From d8754cc68e1babd65d4a697eb14a373dee1589d0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Hans-Joachim Lankenau Date: Thu, 26 Aug 2004 11:59:36 +0000 Subject: fixed quoting in *.sdf; fixed lineends --- helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/default.css | 322 ++-- helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/highcontrast1.css | 322 ++-- helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/highcontrast2.css | 322 ++-- .../source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrast1.css | 322 ++-- .../source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrast2.css | 322 ++-- .../source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrastblack.css | 322 ++-- .../source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrastwhite.css | 322 ++-- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp | 82 +- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp | 62 +- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp | 424 ++--- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp | 106 +- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp | 114 +- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp | 92 +- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp | 78 +- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp | 200 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp | 38 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp | 304 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp | 280 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp | 88 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp | 76 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp | 90 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp | 1002 +++++----- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp | 292 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp | 1188 ++++++------ helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp | 266 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp | 760 ++++---- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp | 810 ++++---- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp | 204 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp | 1358 +++++++------- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp | 358 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp | 300 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp | 462 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp | 706 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp | 522 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp | 82 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp | 64 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp | 68 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp | 82 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp | 174 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp | 76 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp | 100 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp | 70 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp | 56 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp | 98 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp | 66 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp | 90 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp | 110 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp | 62 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp | 64 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp | 68 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp | 96 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp | 278 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp | 94 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp | 64 +- .../source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp | 50 +- .../source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp | 54 +- .../source/text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp | 80 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp | 76 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp | 74 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp | 590 +++--- .../source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp | 122 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp | 94 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp | 122 +- .../text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp | 94 +- .../text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp | 236 +-- .../source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp | 136 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp | 76 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp | 58 +- .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp | 120 +- .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp | 52 +- .../text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp | 66 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp | 68 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp | 74 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp | 106 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp | 94 +- .../text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp | 214 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp | 90 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp | 268 +-- .../source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp | 148 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp | 104 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp | 130 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp | 160 +- .../text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp | 82 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp | 76 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp | 112 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp | 102 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp | 64 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp | 80 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp | 78 +- .../text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp | 178 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp | 152 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp | 96 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp | 74 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0106.xhp | 86 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp | 340 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp | 68 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp | 94 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp | 72 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp | 68 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp | 68 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp | 70 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp | 72 +- helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp | 876 ++++----- .../source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp | 96 +- .../source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp | 104 +- .../source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp | 110 +- helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp | 116 +- .../source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp | 92 +- .../source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp | 138 +- helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp | 90 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp | 668 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp | 56 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp | 102 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp | 562 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp | 200 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp | 510 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp | 448 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp | 148 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp | 360 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp | 242 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp | 100 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp | 102 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp | 188 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp | 86 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp | 58 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp | 180 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp | 610 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp | 106 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04110000.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp | 156 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp | 234 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp | 166 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp | 78 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp | 128 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp | 116 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp | 82 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp | 176 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp | 96 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp | 64 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp | 64 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp | 74 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp | 60 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp | 172 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp | 98 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp | 104 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp | 102 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp | 66 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp | 202 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp | 202 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp | 370 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp | 56 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp | 246 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp | 110 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp | 134 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp | 364 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp | 104 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp | 78 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp | 58 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp | 308 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp | 86 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp | 324 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp | 84 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp | 196 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp | 268 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp | 108 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp | 140 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp | 66 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp | 200 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp | 134 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp | 78 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp | 62 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp | 96 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp | 122 +- .../source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp | 132 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp | 132 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp | 186 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp | 66 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp | 58 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp | 228 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp | 116 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp | 70 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp | 74 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp | 176 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp | 56 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp | 106 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp | 394 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp | 1790 +++++++++--------- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp | 500 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp | 112 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp | 774 ++++---- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp | 70 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp | 84 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp | 82 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp | 80 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp | 58 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp | 60 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp | 62 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp | 74 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp | 66 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp | 62 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp | 70 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp | 80 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp | 106 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp | 60 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp | 64 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp | 76 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp | 92 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp | 64 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp | 64 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp | 292 +-- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp | 74 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard00.xhp | 62 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp | 52 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard02.xhp | 74 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard03.xhp | 48 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard04.xhp | 94 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard05.xhp | 56 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard06.xhp | 72 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard07.xhp | 84 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard07fc.xhp | 62 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp | 128 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp | 1404 +++++++------- .../text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp | 82 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp | 86 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp | 72 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp | 242 +-- .../text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp | 102 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp | 48 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp | 88 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp | 58 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp | 48 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp | 60 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp | 48 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02adabas.xhp | 50 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp | 76 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp | 134 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp | 58 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp | 56 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp | 52 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp | 104 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp | 86 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp | 74 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp | 58 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp | 60 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp | 64 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp | 48 +- .../shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp | 60 +- .../shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp | 52 +- .../shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp | 72 +- .../text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp | 76 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp | 130 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp | 146 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp | 110 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp | 124 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp | 238 +-- .../source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp | 112 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp | 86 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp | 274 +-- .../text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp | 122 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp | 120 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp | 120 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp | 130 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp | 136 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp | 102 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp | 152 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp | 98 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp | 104 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp | 144 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp | 206 +-- .../text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp | 116 +- .../text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp | 86 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp | 90 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp | 82 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp | 116 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp | 274 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp | 212 +-- .../text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp | 92 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp | 120 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp | 244 +-- .../source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp | 66 +- .../text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp | 84 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp | 120 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp | 542 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp | 220 +-- .../source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp | 80 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp | 148 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp | 372 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp | 328 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp | 44 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp | 102 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp | 220 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp | 106 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp | 128 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp | 106 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp | 144 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp | 282 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp | 74 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp | 82 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp | 134 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp | 236 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp | 92 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp | 154 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp | 80 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp | 262 +-- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp | 128 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp | 110 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp | 68 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp | 164 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp | 132 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp | 52 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp | 46 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp | 94 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp | 102 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp | 46 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp | 60 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp | 56 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp | 246 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp | 56 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp | 74 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp | 86 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp | 56 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp | 66 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp | 86 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp | 74 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp | 434 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp | 304 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp | 832 ++++----- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp | 350 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp | 72 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp | 70 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp | 68 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp | 76 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp | 70 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp | 1096 +++++------ .../source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp | 250 +-- .../text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp | 124 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp | 106 +- .../source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp | 84 +- .../source/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp | 72 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp | 146 +- .../source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp | 108 +- .../source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp | 56 +- .../source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp | 66 +- .../source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp | 84 +- .../source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp | 84 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp | 72 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0101.xhp | 90 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0103.xhp | 84 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0104.xhp | 96 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0114.xhp | 68 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp | 120 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp | 246 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp | 626 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp | 390 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp | 966 +++++----- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp | 596 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp | 682 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp | 516 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp | 78 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp | 892 ++++----- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp | 96 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp | 68 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp | 102 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp | 114 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp | 56 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp | 82 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp | 172 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp | 66 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp | 174 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp | 50 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp | 76 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp | 78 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp | 72 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp | 56 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp | 182 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp | 248 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp | 864 ++++----- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp | 56 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp | 140 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp | 80 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp | 48 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp | 62 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp | 126 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp | 86 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp | 106 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp | 62 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp | 118 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp | 78 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp | 96 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp | 66 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp | 154 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp | 412 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp | 90 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp | 706 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp | 156 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110600.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp | 58 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp | 120 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp | 276 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp | 142 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp | 108 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp | 54 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp | 238 +-- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp | 70 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp | 92 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp | 68 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp | 56 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp | 66 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp | 152 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp | 66 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp | 78 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp | 52 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp | 46 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp | 62 +- .../source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp | 62 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp | 70 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04210000.xhp | 90 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp | 70 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp | 1094 +++++------ helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp | 46 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp | 42 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp | 44 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp | 1924 ++++++++++---------- .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp | 188 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp | 118 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp | 80 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp | 152 +- .../text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp | 118 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp | 86 +- .../text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp | 164 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp | 216 +-- .../text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp | 98 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp | 146 +- .../text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp | 88 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp | 216 +-- .../text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp | 234 +-- .../source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp | 312 ++-- .../source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp | 96 +- .../text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp | 144 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp | 134 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp | 170 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp | 108 +- .../text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp | 200 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp | 122 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp | 158 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp | 98 +- .../text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp | 94 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp | 122 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp | 110 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp | 120 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp | 106 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp | 220 +-- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp | 232 +-- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp | 186 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp | 112 +- .../text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp | 88 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp | 64 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp | 58 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp | 110 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp | 106 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp | 78 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp | 90 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp | 116 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp | 92 +- .../text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp | 84 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp | 240 +-- .../source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp | 262 +-- .../source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp | 114 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp | 202 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp | 80 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp | 138 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp | 94 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp | 116 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp | 74 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp | 120 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp | 106 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp | 102 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp | 90 +- 562 files changed, 42860 insertions(+), 42860 deletions(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/default.css b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/default.css index 000e5568fb..a35f8dd14f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/default.css +++ b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/default.css @@ -1,162 +1,162 @@ -/* -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -+ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + -+ DEFAULT STYLESHEET + -+ WESTERN LANGUAGES + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + -+ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -*/ - - -/* Main Styles */ -body { background: #FFFFFF; } -p { - font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; - font-size: 9pt; - color: #000000; - } -td { - color: #000000; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -th { color:#000066; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Link styles */ - -.ContentLink { - color:#000066; - font-weight: bold; - font-decoration: none; - } -.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } - -/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ - -.Paragraph { - margin-left: 0pt; - margin-top: 7pt; - margin-bottom: 7pt; - } -.ParaList { - margin-left: 20pt; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.PropText { - font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes headings */ - - -h1, .Head1 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000066; - font-size:18pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 5pt; - } -h2, .Head2 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000066; - font-size:14pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h3, .Head3 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000066; - font-size:12pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 25pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h4, .Head4 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000066; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h5, .Head5 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000066; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h6, .Head6 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000066; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes tables */ - -.TextInTable { - color:#000000; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -.TableHead { - color:#000066; - align: left; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Style classes spans */ -.emph { font-weight: bold; } - -/* Style classes special context */ - -.tablebg { background: #FFFFFF; } -.tableheadbg { background: #FFFFFF; } -.tabledatabg { background: #FFFFFF; } - -.doctitlebg { background: #FFFFFF; } -.doctablebg { background: #FFFFFF; } - -.howtogetheader { - font-weight: bold; - color: #000033; - background: #DDDDDD; - } -.howtogetbody { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #000000; - background: #EEEEEE; - } -.howtogetpara { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #000000; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.reltop { - background: #EEEEEE; - color:#000066; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes Webtop context */ - +/* ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + ++ DEFAULT STYLESHEET + ++ WESTERN LANGUAGES + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + ++ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ +*/ + + +/* Main Styles */ +body { background: #FFFFFF; } +p { + font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; + font-size: 9pt; + color: #000000; + } +td { + color: #000000; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +th { color:#000066; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Link styles */ + +.ContentLink { + color:#000066; + font-weight: bold; + font-decoration: none; + } +.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } + +/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ + +.Paragraph { + margin-left: 0pt; + margin-top: 7pt; + margin-bottom: 7pt; + } +.ParaList { + margin-left: 20pt; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.PropText { + font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes headings */ + + +h1, .Head1 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000066; + font-size:18pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 5pt; + } +h2, .Head2 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000066; + font-size:14pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h3, .Head3 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000066; + font-size:12pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 25pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h4, .Head4 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000066; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h5, .Head5 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000066; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h6, .Head6 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000066; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes tables */ + +.TextInTable { + color:#000000; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +.TableHead { + color:#000066; + align: left; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Style classes spans */ +.emph { font-weight: bold; } + +/* Style classes special context */ + +.tablebg { background: #FFFFFF; } +.tableheadbg { background: #FFFFFF; } +.tabledatabg { background: #FFFFFF; } + +.doctitlebg { background: #FFFFFF; } +.doctablebg { background: #FFFFFF; } + +.howtogetheader { + font-weight: bold; + color: #000033; + background: #DDDDDD; + } +.howtogetbody { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #000000; + background: #EEEEEE; + } +.howtogetpara { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #000000; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.reltop { + background: #EEEEEE; + color:#000066; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes Webtop context */ + .ContentCell { background: #FFFFFF; } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/highcontrast1.css b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/highcontrast1.css index 5f453b1a0b..b807a5895f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/highcontrast1.css +++ b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/highcontrast1.css @@ -1,162 +1,162 @@ -/* -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -+ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + -+ HIGH CONTRAST #1 STYLESHEET + -+ WESTERN LANGUAGES + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + -+ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -*/ - - -/* Main Styles */ -body { background: #000000; } -p { - font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; - font-size: 9pt; - color: #FFFF00; - } -td { - color: #FFFF00; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -th { color:#FFFF00; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Link styles */ - -.ContentLink { - color:#FFFF00; - font-weight: bold; - font-decoration: none; - } -.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } - -/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ - -.Paragraph { - margin-left: 0pt; - margin-top: 7pt; - margin-bottom: 7pt; - } -.ParaList { - margin-left: 20pt; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.PropText { - font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes headings */ - - -h1, .Head1 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:18pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 5pt; - } -h2, .Head2 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:14pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h3, .Head3 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:12pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 25pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h4, .Head4 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h5, .Head5 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h6, .Head6 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes tables */ - -.TextInTable { - color:#FFFF00; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -.TableHead { - color:#FFFF00; - align: left; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Style classes spans */ -.emph { font-weight: bold; } - -/* Style classes special context */ - -.tablebg { background: #000000; } -.tableheadbg { background: #000000; } -.tabledatabg { background: #000000; } - -.doctitlebg { background: #000000; } -.doctablebg { background: #000000; } - -.howtogetheader { - font-weight: bold; - color: #FFFF00; - background: #000000; - } -.howtogetbody { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #FFFF00; - background: #000000; - } -.howtogetpara { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #FFFF00; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.reltop { - background: #000000; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes Webtop context */ - +/* ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + ++ HIGH CONTRAST #1 STYLESHEET + ++ WESTERN LANGUAGES + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + ++ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ +*/ + + +/* Main Styles */ +body { background: #000000; } +p { + font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; + font-size: 9pt; + color: #FFFF00; + } +td { + color: #FFFF00; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +th { color:#FFFF00; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Link styles */ + +.ContentLink { + color:#FFFF00; + font-weight: bold; + font-decoration: none; + } +.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } + +/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ + +.Paragraph { + margin-left: 0pt; + margin-top: 7pt; + margin-bottom: 7pt; + } +.ParaList { + margin-left: 20pt; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.PropText { + font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes headings */ + + +h1, .Head1 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:18pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 5pt; + } +h2, .Head2 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:14pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h3, .Head3 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:12pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 25pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h4, .Head4 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h5, .Head5 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h6, .Head6 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes tables */ + +.TextInTable { + color:#FFFF00; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +.TableHead { + color:#FFFF00; + align: left; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Style classes spans */ +.emph { font-weight: bold; } + +/* Style classes special context */ + +.tablebg { background: #000000; } +.tableheadbg { background: #000000; } +.tabledatabg { background: #000000; } + +.doctitlebg { background: #000000; } +.doctablebg { background: #000000; } + +.howtogetheader { + font-weight: bold; + color: #FFFF00; + background: #000000; + } +.howtogetbody { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #FFFF00; + background: #000000; + } +.howtogetpara { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #FFFF00; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.reltop { + background: #000000; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes Webtop context */ + .ContentCell { background: #000000; } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/highcontrast2.css b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/highcontrast2.css index d3204f378a..ed404b76d9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/highcontrast2.css +++ b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/de/highcontrast2.css @@ -1,162 +1,162 @@ -/* -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -+ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + -+ HIGH CONTRAST #2 STYLESHEET + -+ WESTERN LANGUAGES + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + -+ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -*/ - - -/* Main Styles */ -body { background: #000000; } -p { - font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; - font-size: 9pt; - color: #00FF00; - } -td { - color: #00FF00; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -th { color:#00FF00; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Link styles */ - -.ContentLink { - color:#00FF00; - font-weight: bold; - font-decoration: none; - } -.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } - -/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ - -.Paragraph { - margin-left: 0pt; - margin-top: 7pt; - margin-bottom: 7pt; - } -.ParaList { - margin-left: 20pt; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.PropText { - font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes headings */ - - -h1, .Head1 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:18pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 5pt; - } -h2, .Head2 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:14pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h3, .Head3 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:12pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 25pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h4, .Head4 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h5, .Head5 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h6, .Head6 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes tables */ - -.TextInTable { - color:#00FF00; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -.TableHead { - color:#00FF00; - align: left; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Style classes spans */ -.emph { font-weight: bold; } - -/* Style classes special context */ - -.tablebg { background: #000000; } -.tableheadbg { background: #000000; } -.tabledatabg { background: #000000; } - -.doctitlebg { background: #000000; } -.doctablebg { background: #000000; } - -.howtogetheader { - font-weight: bold; - color: #00FF00; - background: #000000; - } -.howtogetbody { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #00FF00; - background: #000000; - } -.howtogetpara { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #00FF00; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.reltop { - background: #000000; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes Webtop context */ - +/* ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + ++ HIGH CONTRAST #2 STYLESHEET + ++ WESTERN LANGUAGES + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + ++ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ +*/ + + +/* Main Styles */ +body { background: #000000; } +p { + font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; + font-size: 9pt; + color: #00FF00; + } +td { + color: #00FF00; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +th { color:#00FF00; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Link styles */ + +.ContentLink { + color:#00FF00; + font-weight: bold; + font-decoration: none; + } +.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } + +/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ + +.Paragraph { + margin-left: 0pt; + margin-top: 7pt; + margin-bottom: 7pt; + } +.ParaList { + margin-left: 20pt; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.PropText { + font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes headings */ + + +h1, .Head1 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:18pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 5pt; + } +h2, .Head2 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:14pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h3, .Head3 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:12pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 25pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h4, .Head4 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h5, .Head5 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h6, .Head6 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes tables */ + +.TextInTable { + color:#00FF00; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +.TableHead { + color:#00FF00; + align: left; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Style classes spans */ +.emph { font-weight: bold; } + +/* Style classes special context */ + +.tablebg { background: #000000; } +.tableheadbg { background: #000000; } +.tabledatabg { background: #000000; } + +.doctitlebg { background: #000000; } +.doctablebg { background: #000000; } + +.howtogetheader { + font-weight: bold; + color: #00FF00; + background: #000000; + } +.howtogetbody { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #00FF00; + background: #000000; + } +.howtogetpara { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #00FF00; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.reltop { + background: #000000; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes Webtop context */ + .ContentCell { background: #000000; } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrast1.css b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrast1.css index 5f453b1a0b..b807a5895f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrast1.css +++ b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrast1.css @@ -1,162 +1,162 @@ -/* -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -+ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + -+ HIGH CONTRAST #1 STYLESHEET + -+ WESTERN LANGUAGES + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + -+ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -*/ - - -/* Main Styles */ -body { background: #000000; } -p { - font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; - font-size: 9pt; - color: #FFFF00; - } -td { - color: #FFFF00; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -th { color:#FFFF00; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Link styles */ - -.ContentLink { - color:#FFFF00; - font-weight: bold; - font-decoration: none; - } -.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } - -/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ - -.Paragraph { - margin-left: 0pt; - margin-top: 7pt; - margin-bottom: 7pt; - } -.ParaList { - margin-left: 20pt; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.PropText { - font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes headings */ - - -h1, .Head1 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:18pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 5pt; - } -h2, .Head2 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:14pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h3, .Head3 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:12pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 25pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h4, .Head4 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h5, .Head5 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h6, .Head6 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes tables */ - -.TextInTable { - color:#FFFF00; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -.TableHead { - color:#FFFF00; - align: left; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Style classes spans */ -.emph { font-weight: bold; } - -/* Style classes special context */ - -.tablebg { background: #000000; } -.tableheadbg { background: #000000; } -.tabledatabg { background: #000000; } - -.doctitlebg { background: #000000; } -.doctablebg { background: #000000; } - -.howtogetheader { - font-weight: bold; - color: #FFFF00; - background: #000000; - } -.howtogetbody { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #FFFF00; - background: #000000; - } -.howtogetpara { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #FFFF00; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.reltop { - background: #000000; - color:#FFFF00; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes Webtop context */ - +/* ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + ++ HIGH CONTRAST #1 STYLESHEET + ++ WESTERN LANGUAGES + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + ++ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ +*/ + + +/* Main Styles */ +body { background: #000000; } +p { + font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; + font-size: 9pt; + color: #FFFF00; + } +td { + color: #FFFF00; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +th { color:#FFFF00; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Link styles */ + +.ContentLink { + color:#FFFF00; + font-weight: bold; + font-decoration: none; + } +.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } + +/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ + +.Paragraph { + margin-left: 0pt; + margin-top: 7pt; + margin-bottom: 7pt; + } +.ParaList { + margin-left: 20pt; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.PropText { + font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes headings */ + + +h1, .Head1 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:18pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 5pt; + } +h2, .Head2 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:14pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h3, .Head3 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:12pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 25pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h4, .Head4 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h5, .Head5 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h6, .Head6 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes tables */ + +.TextInTable { + color:#FFFF00; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +.TableHead { + color:#FFFF00; + align: left; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Style classes spans */ +.emph { font-weight: bold; } + +/* Style classes special context */ + +.tablebg { background: #000000; } +.tableheadbg { background: #000000; } +.tabledatabg { background: #000000; } + +.doctitlebg { background: #000000; } +.doctablebg { background: #000000; } + +.howtogetheader { + font-weight: bold; + color: #FFFF00; + background: #000000; + } +.howtogetbody { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #FFFF00; + background: #000000; + } +.howtogetpara { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #FFFF00; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.reltop { + background: #000000; + color:#FFFF00; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes Webtop context */ + .ContentCell { background: #000000; } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrast2.css b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrast2.css index d3204f378a..ed404b76d9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrast2.css +++ b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrast2.css @@ -1,162 +1,162 @@ -/* -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -+ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + -+ HIGH CONTRAST #2 STYLESHEET + -+ WESTERN LANGUAGES + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + -+ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -*/ - - -/* Main Styles */ -body { background: #000000; } -p { - font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; - font-size: 9pt; - color: #00FF00; - } -td { - color: #00FF00; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -th { color:#00FF00; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Link styles */ - -.ContentLink { - color:#00FF00; - font-weight: bold; - font-decoration: none; - } -.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } - -/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ - -.Paragraph { - margin-left: 0pt; - margin-top: 7pt; - margin-bottom: 7pt; - } -.ParaList { - margin-left: 20pt; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.PropText { - font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes headings */ - - -h1, .Head1 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:18pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 5pt; - } -h2, .Head2 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:14pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h3, .Head3 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:12pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 25pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h4, .Head4 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h5, .Head5 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h6, .Head6 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes tables */ - -.TextInTable { - color:#00FF00; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -.TableHead { - color:#00FF00; - align: left; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Style classes spans */ -.emph { font-weight: bold; } - -/* Style classes special context */ - -.tablebg { background: #000000; } -.tableheadbg { background: #000000; } -.tabledatabg { background: #000000; } - -.doctitlebg { background: #000000; } -.doctablebg { background: #000000; } - -.howtogetheader { - font-weight: bold; - color: #00FF00; - background: #000000; - } -.howtogetbody { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #00FF00; - background: #000000; - } -.howtogetpara { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #00FF00; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.reltop { - background: #000000; - color:#00FF00; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes Webtop context */ - +/* ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + ++ HIGH CONTRAST #2 STYLESHEET + ++ WESTERN LANGUAGES + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + ++ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ +*/ + + +/* Main Styles */ +body { background: #000000; } +p { + font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; + font-size: 9pt; + color: #00FF00; + } +td { + color: #00FF00; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +th { color:#00FF00; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Link styles */ + +.ContentLink { + color:#00FF00; + font-weight: bold; + font-decoration: none; + } +.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } + +/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ + +.Paragraph { + margin-left: 0pt; + margin-top: 7pt; + margin-bottom: 7pt; + } +.ParaList { + margin-left: 20pt; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.PropText { + font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes headings */ + + +h1, .Head1 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:18pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 5pt; + } +h2, .Head2 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:14pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h3, .Head3 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:12pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 25pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h4, .Head4 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h5, .Head5 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h6, .Head6 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes tables */ + +.TextInTable { + color:#00FF00; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +.TableHead { + color:#00FF00; + align: left; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Style classes spans */ +.emph { font-weight: bold; } + +/* Style classes special context */ + +.tablebg { background: #000000; } +.tableheadbg { background: #000000; } +.tabledatabg { background: #000000; } + +.doctitlebg { background: #000000; } +.doctablebg { background: #000000; } + +.howtogetheader { + font-weight: bold; + color: #00FF00; + background: #000000; + } +.howtogetbody { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #00FF00; + background: #000000; + } +.howtogetpara { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #00FF00; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.reltop { + background: #000000; + color:#00FF00; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes Webtop context */ + .ContentCell { background: #000000; } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrastblack.css b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrastblack.css index cb31953611..b57ea899c6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrastblack.css +++ b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrastblack.css @@ -1,162 +1,162 @@ -/* -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -+ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + -+ HIGH CONTRAST BLACK STYLESHEET + -+ WESTERN LANGUAGES + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + -+ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -*/ - - -/* Main Styles */ -body { background: #000000; } -p { - font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; - font-size: 9pt; - color: #FFFFFF; - } -td { - color: #FFFFFF; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -th { color:#FFFFFF; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Link styles */ - -.ContentLink { - color:#FFFFFF; - font-weight: bold; - font-decoration: none; - } -.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } - -/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ - -.Paragraph { - margin-left: 0pt; - margin-top: 7pt; - margin-bottom: 7pt; - } -.ParaList { - margin-left: 20pt; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.PropText { - font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes headings */ - - -h1, .Head1 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFFFF; - font-size:18pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 5pt; - } -h2, .Head2 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFFFF; - font-size:14pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h3, .Head3 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFFFF; - font-size:12pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 25pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h4, .Head4 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFFFF; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h5, .Head5 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFFFF; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h6, .Head6 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#FFFFFF; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes tables */ - -.TextInTable { - color:#FFFFFF; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -.TableHead { - color:#FFFFFF; - align: left; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Style classes spans */ -.emph { font-weight: bold; } - -/* Style classes special context */ - -.tablebg { background: #000000; } -.tableheadbg { background: #000000; } -.tabledatabg { background: #000000; } - -.doctitlebg { background: #000000; } -.doctablebg { background: #000000; } - -.howtogetheader { - font-weight: bold; - color: #FFFFFF; - background: #000000; - } -.howtogetbody { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #FFFFFF; - background: #000000; - } -.howtogetpara { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #FFFFFF; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.reltop { - background: #000000; - color:#FFFFFF; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes Webtop context */ - +/* ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + ++ HIGH CONTRAST BLACK STYLESHEET + ++ WESTERN LANGUAGES + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + ++ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ +*/ + + +/* Main Styles */ +body { background: #000000; } +p { + font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; + font-size: 9pt; + color: #FFFFFF; + } +td { + color: #FFFFFF; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +th { color:#FFFFFF; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Link styles */ + +.ContentLink { + color:#FFFFFF; + font-weight: bold; + font-decoration: none; + } +.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } + +/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ + +.Paragraph { + margin-left: 0pt; + margin-top: 7pt; + margin-bottom: 7pt; + } +.ParaList { + margin-left: 20pt; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.PropText { + font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes headings */ + + +h1, .Head1 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFFFF; + font-size:18pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 5pt; + } +h2, .Head2 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFFFF; + font-size:14pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h3, .Head3 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFFFF; + font-size:12pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 25pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h4, .Head4 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFFFF; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h5, .Head5 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFFFF; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h6, .Head6 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#FFFFFF; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes tables */ + +.TextInTable { + color:#FFFFFF; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +.TableHead { + color:#FFFFFF; + align: left; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Style classes spans */ +.emph { font-weight: bold; } + +/* Style classes special context */ + +.tablebg { background: #000000; } +.tableheadbg { background: #000000; } +.tabledatabg { background: #000000; } + +.doctitlebg { background: #000000; } +.doctablebg { background: #000000; } + +.howtogetheader { + font-weight: bold; + color: #FFFFFF; + background: #000000; + } +.howtogetbody { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #FFFFFF; + background: #000000; + } +.howtogetpara { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #FFFFFF; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.reltop { + background: #000000; + color:#FFFFFF; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes Webtop context */ + .ContentCell { background: #000000; } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrastwhite.css b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrastwhite.css index 8c0a145455..43a6fce82d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrastwhite.css +++ b/helpcontent2/source/auxiliary/en-US/highcontrastwhite.css @@ -1,162 +1,162 @@ -/* -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -+ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + -+ HIGH CONTRAST WHITE STYLESHEET + -+ WESTERN LANGUAGES + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + -+ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + -+-------------------------------------------------------------------+ -+ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + -+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ -*/ - - -/* Main Styles */ -body { background: #FFFFFF; } -p { - font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; - font-size: 9pt; - color: #000000; - } -td { - color: #000000; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -th { color:#000000; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Link styles */ - -.ContentLink { - color:#000000; - font-weight: bold; - font-decoration: none; - } -.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } - -/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ - -.Paragraph { - margin-left: 0pt; - margin-top: 7pt; - margin-bottom: 7pt; - } -.ParaList { - margin-left: 20pt; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.PropText { - font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes headings */ - - -h1, .Head1 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000000; - font-size:18pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 5pt; - } -h2, .Head2 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000000; - font-size:14pt; - font-weight: bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h3, .Head3 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000000; - font-size:12pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 25pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h4, .Head4 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000000; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h5, .Head5 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000000; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -h6, .Head6 { - font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; - color:#000000; - font-size:10pt; - margin-top: 15pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes tables */ - -.TextInTable { - color:#000000; - align: left; - margin-left: 0pt; - } -.TableHead { - color:#000000; - align: left; - font-weight:bold; - } - -/* Style classes spans */ -.emph { font-weight: bold; } - -/* Style classes special context */ - -.tablebg { background: #FFFFFF; } -.tableheadbg { background: #FFFFFF; } -.tabledatabg { background: #FFFFFF; } - -.doctitlebg { background: #FFFFFF; } -.doctablebg { background: #FFFFFF; } - -.howtogetheader { - font-weight: bold; - color: #000000; - background: #FFFFFF; - } -.howtogetbody { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #000000; - background: #FFFFFF; - } -.howtogetpara { - font-size: 9pt; - color: #000000; - margin-top: 2pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } -.reltop { - background: #FFFFFF; - color:#000000; - font-size:10pt; - font-weight:bold; - margin-top: 20pt; - margin-bottom: 2pt; - } - -/* Style classes Webtop context */ - +/* ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ++ STAROFFICE 6.0 HELP + ++ HIGH CONTRAST WHITE STYLESHEET + ++ WESTERN LANGUAGES + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ This stylesheet defines the appearance of the online help files. + ++ It is language dependent and located in {installdir}/help/{lang} + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ (c) 2001 Sun Microsystems, Inc. All Rights Reserved + ++-------------------------------------------------------------------+ ++ Last changes: 11-JUL-02 FPE + ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ +*/ + + +/* Main Styles */ +body { background: #FFFFFF; } +p { + font-family: Albany,Helvetica,Verdana,Tahoma,Andale Sans,Arial,lucidux sans; + font-size: 9pt; + color: #000000; + } +td { + color: #000000; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +th { color:#000000; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Link styles */ + +.ContentLink { + color:#000000; + font-weight: bold; + font-decoration: none; + } +.ContentLink:hover { font-decoration: underline; } + +/* Style classes simple paragraphs */ + +.Paragraph { + margin-left: 0pt; + margin-top: 7pt; + margin-bottom: 7pt; + } +.ParaList { + margin-left: 20pt; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.PropText { + font-family: Cumberland,Courier New,Courier; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes headings */ + + +h1, .Head1 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000000; + font-size:18pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 5pt; + } +h2, .Head2 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000000; + font-size:14pt; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h3, .Head3 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000000; + font-size:12pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 25pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h4, .Head4 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000000; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h5, .Head5 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000000; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +h6, .Head6 { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,Albany,lucidux sans; + color:#000000; + font-size:10pt; + margin-top: 15pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes tables */ + +.TextInTable { + color:#000000; + align: left; + margin-left: 0pt; + } +.TableHead { + color:#000000; + align: left; + font-weight:bold; + } + +/* Style classes spans */ +.emph { font-weight: bold; } + +/* Style classes special context */ + +.tablebg { background: #FFFFFF; } +.tableheadbg { background: #FFFFFF; } +.tabledatabg { background: #FFFFFF; } + +.doctitlebg { background: #FFFFFF; } +.doctablebg { background: #FFFFFF; } + +.howtogetheader { + font-weight: bold; + color: #000000; + background: #FFFFFF; + } +.howtogetbody { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #000000; + background: #FFFFFF; + } +.howtogetpara { + font-size: 9pt; + color: #000000; + margin-top: 2pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } +.reltop { + background: #FFFFFF; + color:#000000; + font-size:10pt; + font-weight:bold; + margin-top: 20pt; + margin-bottom: 2pt; + } + +/* Style classes Webtop context */ + .ContentCell { background: #FFFFFF; } \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp index dee26e6e58..94dec5a876 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -$[officename] Basic Glossary -/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30799# - - - -$[officename] Basic Glossary -This glossary explains some technical terms that you may come across when working with $[officename] Basic. -Decimal Point, Colors, Measurement Units, Twips, URL Notation -
-Decimal Point -When converting numbers, $[officename] Basic uses the locale settings of the system for determining the type of decimal and thousand separator. -The behavior has an effect on both the implicit conversion ( 1 + "2.3" = 3.3 ) as well as the runtime function IsNumeric. -
-Colors -In $[officename] Basic, colors are treated as long integer value. The return value of color queries is also always a long integer value. When defining properties, colors can be specified using their RGB code that is converted to a long integer value using the RGB function. -Measurement Units -In $[officename] Basic, a method parameter or property a expecting unit information can be specified either as integer or long integer expression without a unit, or as a character string containing a unit. If no unit is passed to the method the default unit defined for the active document type will be used. If the parameter is passed as a character string containing a measurement unit, the default setting will be ignored. The default measurement unit for a document type can be set under Tools - Options - (Document Type) - General. + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +$[officename] Basic Glossary +/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30799# + + + +$[officename] Basic Glossary +This glossary explains some technical terms that you may come across when working with $[officename] Basic. +Decimal Point, Colors, Measurement Units, Twips, URL Notation +
+Decimal Point +When converting numbers, $[officename] Basic uses the locale settings of the system for determining the type of decimal and thousand separator. +The behavior has an effect on both the implicit conversion ( 1 + "2.3" = 3.3 ) as well as the runtime function IsNumeric. +
+Colors +In $[officename] Basic, colors are treated as long integer value. The return value of color queries is also always a long integer value. When defining properties, colors can be specified using their RGB code that is converted to a long integer value using the RGB function. +Measurement Units +In $[officename] Basic, a method parameter or property a expecting unit information can be specified either as integer or long integer expression without a unit, or as a character string containing a unit. If no unit is passed to the method the default unit defined for the active document type will be used. If the parameter is passed as a character string containing a measurement unit, the default setting will be ignored. The default measurement unit for a document type can be set under Tools - Options - (Document Type) - General.
Twips - -Twips -A twip is a screen-independent unit which is used to define the uniform position and size of screen elements on all display systems. A twip is 1/1440th of an inch or 1/20 of a printer's point. There are 1440 twips to an inch or about 567 twips to a centimeter. -
-URL Notation -URLs (Uniform Resource Locators) are used to determine the location of a resource like a file in a file system, typically inside a network environment. A URL consists of a protocol specifier, a host specifier and a file and path specifier: - -protocol://host.name/path/to/the/file.html - -The most common usage of URLs is on the internet when specifying web pages. Example for protocols are http, ftp, or file. The file protocol specifier is used when referring to a file on the local file system. -URL notation does not allow certain special characters to be used. These are either replaced by other characters or encoded. A slash (/) is used as a path separator. For example, a file referred to as C:\My File.sxw on the local host in "Windows notation" becomes file:///C|/My%20File.sxw in URL notation. - - + +Twips +A twip is a screen-independent unit which is used to define the uniform position and size of screen elements on all display systems. A twip is 1/1440th of an inch or 1/20 of a printer's point. There are 1440 twips to an inch or about 567 twips to a centimeter. + +URL Notation +URLs (Uniform Resource Locators) are used to determine the location of a resource like a file in a file system, typically inside a network environment. A URL consists of a protocol specifier, a host specifier and a file and path specifier: + +protocol://host.name/path/to/the/file.html + +The most common usage of URLs is on the internet when specifying web pages. Example for protocols are http, ftp, or file. The file protocol specifier is used when referring to a file on the local file system. +URL notation does not allow certain special characters to be used. These are either replaced by other characters or encoded. A slash (/) is used as a path separator. For example, a file referred to as C:\My File.sxw on the local host in "Windows notation" becomes file:///C|/My%20File.sxw in URL notation. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp index 81951913b2..367bdffd84 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Libraries, Modules and Dialogs -/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Libraries, Modules and Dialogs -The following describes the basic use of libraries, modules and dialogs in $[officename] Basic. -
-$[officename] Basic provides tools to help you structuring your projects. It supports various "units" which enable you to group individual SUBS and FUNCTIONS in a Basic project. -Libraries -Libraries serve as a tool for organizing modules, and can either be attached to a document or a template. When the document or a template is saved, all modules contained in the library are automatically saved as well. -A library can contain up to 16,000 modules. -Modules -A module contains SUBS and FUNCTIONS along with variable declarations. The length of the program that can be saved in a module is limited to 64 KB. If more space is required you can divide a $[officename] Basic project among several modules, and then save them in a single library. -Dialog Modules -Dialog modules contain dialog definitions, including the dialog box properties, the properties of each dialog element and the events assigned. Since a dialog module can only contain a single dialog, they are often referred to as "dialogs". - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Libraries, Modules and Dialogs +/text/sbasic/shared/01020500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Libraries, Modules and Dialogs +The following describes the basic use of libraries, modules and dialogs in $[officename] Basic. +
+$[officename] Basic provides tools to help you structuring your projects. It supports various "units" which enable you to group individual SUBS and FUNCTIONS in a Basic project. +Libraries +Libraries serve as a tool for organizing modules, and can either be attached to a document or a template. When the document or a template is saved, all modules contained in the library are automatically saved as well. +A library can contain up to 16,000 modules. +Modules +A module contains SUBS and FUNCTIONS along with variable declarations. The length of the program that can be saved in a module is limited to 64 KB. If more space is required you can divide a $[officename] Basic project among several modules, and then save them in a single library. +Dialog Modules +Dialog modules contain dialog definitions, including the dialog box properties, the properties of each dialog element and the events assigned. Since a dialog module can only contain a single dialog, they are often referred to as "dialogs". + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp index 95a3b3a1ba..44f7e189c6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Event-Driven Macros -/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30797# - - - -
-Event-Driven Macros -This section describes how to assign Basic programs to program events. -
-You can automatically executing a macro when a specified software event occurs by assigning the desired macro to the event. The following table provides an overview of program events and at what point an assigned macro is executed. - - - -Event - - -An assigned macro is executed... - - - - -Program Start - - -... after a $[officename] application is started. - - - - -Program End - - -...before a $[officename] application is terminated. - - - - -Create Document - - -...after a new document is created with File - New or with the New icon. - - - - -Open Document - - -...after a document is opened with File - Open or with the Open icon. - - - - -Save Document As - - -...before a document is saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). - - - - -Document has been saved as - - -... after a document was saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or with the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). - - - - -Save Document - - -...before a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. - - - - -Document has been saved - - -...after a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. - - - - -Close Document - - -...before a document is closed. - - - - -Document is being closed - - -...after a document was closed. Note that the "Save Document" event may also occur when the document is saved before closing. - - - - -Activate Document - - -...after a document is brought to the foreground. - - - - -Deactivate Document - - -...after another document is brought to the foreground. - - - - -Print Document - - -...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. - - - - -JavaScript run-time error - - -...when a JavaScript run-time error occurs. - - - - -Print Mail Merge - - -...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. This event occurs for each copy printed. - - - - -Change of the page count - - -...when the page count changes. - - - - -Message received - - -...if a message was received. - - -
- -Assigning a Macro to an Event - - -Choose Tools - Configure and click the Events tab. - - -Select whether you want the assignment to be globally valid or just valid in the current document by selecting the StarOffice or Document option. - - -Select the event from the Event list. - - -Select the module containing the macro to be assigned to the selected event from the Macros list. The list contains a hierarchical list of modules, libraries, files, and templates. - - -Select the macro to be assigned from the right list. - - -Click Assign. - - -Click OK to close the dialog. - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Event-Driven Macros +/text/sbasic/shared/01040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30797# + + + +
+Event-Driven Macros +This section describes how to assign Basic programs to program events. +
+You can automatically executing a macro when a specified software event occurs by assigning the desired macro to the event. The following table provides an overview of program events and at what point an assigned macro is executed. + + + +Event + + +An assigned macro is executed... + + + + +Program Start + + +... after a $[officename] application is started. + + + + +Program End + + +...before a $[officename] application is terminated. + + + + +Create Document + + +...after a new document is created with File - New or with the New icon. + + + + +Open Document + + +...after a document is opened with File - Open or with the Open icon. + + + + +Save Document As + + +...before a document is saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). + + + + +Document has been saved as + + +... after a document was saved under a specified name (with File - Save As, or with File - Save or with the Save icon, if a document name has not yet been specified). + + + + +Save Document + + +...before a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. + + + + +Document has been saved + + +...after a document is saved with File - Save or the Save icon, provided that a document name has already been specified. + + + + +Close Document + + +...before a document is closed. + + + + +Document is being closed + + +...after a document was closed. Note that the "Save Document" event may also occur when the document is saved before closing. + + + + +Activate Document + + +...after a document is brought to the foreground. + + + + +Deactivate Document + + +...after another document is brought to the foreground. + + + + +Print Document + + +...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. + + + + +JavaScript run-time error + + +...when a JavaScript run-time error occurs. + + + + +Print Mail Merge + + +...after the Print dialog is closed, but before the actual print process begins. This event occurs for each copy printed. + + + + +Change of the page count + + +...when the page count changes. + + + + +Message received + + +...if a message was received. + + +
+ +Assigning a Macro to an Event + + +Choose Tools - Configure and click the Events tab. + + +Select whether you want the assignment to be globally valid or just valid in the current document by selecting the StarOffice or Document option. + + +Select the event from the Event list. + + +Select the module containing the macro to be assigned to the selected event from the Macros list. The list contains a hierarchical list of modules, libraries, files, and templates. + + +Select the macro to be assigned from the right list. + + +Click Assign. + + +Click OK to close the dialog. + events;delete macro assignment - -Removing the Assignment of a Macro to an Event - - -Choose Tools - Configure and click the Events tab. - - -Select whether you want to remove a gobal assignment or an assignment that is just valid in the current document by selecting the StarOffice or Document option. - - -Select the event that contains the assignment to be removed from the Event list. - - -Click Remove. - - -Click OK to close the dialog. - - - - + +Removing the Assignment of a Macro to an Event + + +Choose Tools - Configure and click the Events tab. + + +Select whether you want to remove a gobal assignment or an assignment that is just valid in the current document by selecting the StarOffice or Document option. + + +Select the event that contains the assignment to be removed from the Event list. + + +Click Remove. + + +Click OK to close the dialog. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp index aec05f5dfc..44587e7ceb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -MsgBox Statement [Runtime] -/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30425# - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +MsgBox Statement [Runtime] +/text/sbasic/shared/03010101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30425# + + +
MsgBox;statement - -MsgBox Statement [Runtime] -Displays a dialog box containing a message. -
-Syntax: -MsgBox Text As String [,Type As Integer [,Dialogtitle As String]] (As Statement) or MsgBox (Text As String [,Type As Integer [,Dialogtitle As String]]) (As Function) -Parameter: - -Text: String expression displayed as a message in the dialog box. Line breaks can be inserted with Chr$(13). - -DialogTitle: String expression displayed in the title bar of the dialog. If omitted, the title bar displays the name of the respective application. - -Type: Any integer expression that specifies the dialog type, as well as the number and type of buttons to display, and the icon type. Type represents a combination of bit patterns, that is, a combination of elements can be defined by adding their respective values: -0 : Display OK button only. -1 : Display OK and Cancel buttons. -2 : Display Cancel and Retry buttons. -3 : Display Yes, No and Cancel buttons. -4 : Display Yes and No buttons. -5 : Display Retry and Cancel buttons. -16 : Add the Stop icon to the dialog. -32 : Add the Question icon to the dialog. -48 : Add the Exclamation icon to the dialog. -64 : Add the Information icon to the dialog. -128 : First button in the dialog as default button. -256 : Second button in the dialog as default button. -512 : Third button in the dialog as default button. - - -Example: -Sub ExampleMsgBox -Const sText1 = "An unexpected error occurred." -Const sText2 = "The program execution will continue, however." -Const sText3 = "Error" -MsgBox(sText1 + Chr(13) + sText2,16,sText3) -End sub - - + +MsgBox Statement [Runtime] +Displays a dialog box containing a message. + +Syntax: +MsgBox Text As String [,Type As Integer [,Dialogtitle As String]] (As Statement) or MsgBox (Text As String [,Type As Integer [,Dialogtitle As String]]) (As Function) +Parameter: + +Text: String expression displayed as a message in the dialog box. Line breaks can be inserted with Chr$(13). + +DialogTitle: String expression displayed in the title bar of the dialog. If omitted, the title bar displays the name of the respective application. + +Type: Any integer expression that specifies the dialog type, as well as the number and type of buttons to display, and the icon type. Type represents a combination of bit patterns, that is, a combination of elements can be defined by adding their respective values: +0 : Display OK button only. +1 : Display OK and Cancel buttons. +2 : Display Cancel and Retry buttons. +3 : Display Yes, No and Cancel buttons. +4 : Display Yes and No buttons. +5 : Display Retry and Cancel buttons. +16 : Add the Stop icon to the dialog. +32 : Add the Question icon to the dialog. +48 : Add the Exclamation icon to the dialog. +64 : Add the Information icon to the dialog. +128 : First button in the dialog as default button. +256 : Second button in the dialog as default button. +512 : Third button in the dialog as default button. + + +Example: +Sub ExampleMsgBox +Const sText1 = "An unexpected error occurred." +Const sText2 = "The program execution will continue, however." +Const sText3 = "Error" +MsgBox(sText1 + Chr(13) + sText2,16,sText3) +End sub + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp index d33f2891de..abc24064ea 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Dir Function [Runtime] -/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe; bug fix: i29276 - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Dir Function [Runtime] +/text/sbasic/shared/03020404.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe; bug fix: i29276 + + +
Dir;function - -Dir Function [Runtime] -Returns the name of a file, a directory, or all of the files and the directories on a drive or in a directory that match the specified search path. -
-Syntax: -Dir [(Text As String) [, Attrib As Integer]] -Return value: -String -Parameters: - -Text: Any string expression that specifies the search path, directory or file. This argument can only be specified the first time that you call the Dir function. If you want, you can enter the path in URL notation. - -Attrib: Any integer expression that specifies bitwise file attributes. The Dir function only returns files or directories that match the specified attributes. You can combine several attributes by adding the attribute values: -0 : Normal files. -16 : Returns the name of the directory only. -Use this attribute to check if a file or directory exists, or to determine all files and folders in a specific directory. -To check if a file exists, enter the complete path and name of the file. If the file or directory name does not exist, the Dir function returns a zero-length string (""). -To generate a list of all existing files in a specific directory, proceed as follows: The first time you call the Dir function, specify the complete search path for the files, for example, "D:\Files\*.sxw". If the path is correct and the search finds at least one file, the Dir function returns the name of the first file that matches the search path. To return additional file names that match the path, call Dir again, but with no arguments. -To return directories only, use the attribute parameter. The same applies if you want to determine the name of a volume (for example, a hard drive partition) - - - -Example: -Sub ExampleDir -REM Displays all files and directories -Dim sPath As String -Dim sDir as String, sValue as String -sDir="Directories:" -sPath = CurDir -sValue = Dir$(sPath + "\*",16) -Do -If sValue <> "." and sValue <> ".." Then -if (GetAttr( sPath + getPathSeparator + sValue) AND 16) >0 then -REM get the directories -sDir = sDir & chr(13) & sValue -End If -sValue = Dir$ -Loop Until sValue = "" -MsgBox sDir,0,sPath -End sub - - + +Dir Function [Runtime] +Returns the name of a file, a directory, or all of the files and the directories on a drive or in a directory that match the specified search path. + +Syntax: +Dir [(Text As String) [, Attrib As Integer]] +Return value: +String +Parameters: + +Text: Any string expression that specifies the search path, directory or file. This argument can only be specified the first time that you call the Dir function. If you want, you can enter the path in URL notation. + +Attrib: Any integer expression that specifies bitwise file attributes. The Dir function only returns files or directories that match the specified attributes. You can combine several attributes by adding the attribute values: +0 : Normal files. +16 : Returns the name of the directory only. +Use this attribute to check if a file or directory exists, or to determine all files and folders in a specific directory. +To check if a file exists, enter the complete path and name of the file. If the file or directory name does not exist, the Dir function returns a zero-length string (""). +To generate a list of all existing files in a specific directory, proceed as follows: The first time you call the Dir function, specify the complete search path for the files, for example, "D:\Files\*.sxw". If the path is correct and the search finds at least one file, the Dir function returns the name of the first file that matches the search path. To return additional file names that match the path, call Dir again, but with no arguments. +To return directories only, use the attribute parameter. The same applies if you want to determine the name of a volume (for example, a hard drive partition) + + + +Example: +Sub ExampleDir +REM Displays all files and directories +Dim sPath As String +Dim sDir as String, sValue as String +sDir="Directories:" +sPath = CurDir +sValue = Dir$(sPath + "\*",16) +Do +If sValue <> "." and sValue <> ".." Then +if (GetAttr( sPath + getPathSeparator + sValue) AND 16) >0 then +REM get the directories +sDir = sDir & chr(13) & sValue +End If +sValue = Dir$ +Loop Until sValue = "" +MsgBox sDir,0,sPath +End sub + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp index 2d8d92bf0b..f797daaae5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -InStr Function [Runtime] -/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +InStr Function [Runtime] +/text/sbasic/shared/03120401.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
InStr;function - -InStr Function [Runtime] -Returns the position of a string within another string. -
-The Instr function returns the position at which the match was found. If the string was not found, the function returns 0. -Syntax: -InStr ([Start As Integer,] Text1 As String, Text2 As String[, Compare]) -Return value: -Integer -Parameters: - -Start: Any numeric expression that marks the position in a string at which to start searching for the specified substring. If this parameter is omitted, the search starts at the first character. - -Text1: The string expression that you want to search. - -Text2: The string expression that you want to search for. - -Compare: Optional numeric expression that defines the type of comparison. This parameter can be 0 or 1. The default value 1 specifies a text comparison (not case-sensitive). The value 0 specifies a binary comparison (text is compared case-sensitive).UFI: fixes #i17929# -To avoid a run-time error, do not set the Compare parameter if the first return parameter is omitted. - - -Example: -Sub ExamplePosition -Dim sInput As String -Dim iPos as Integer -sInput = "Star Office" -iPos = Instr(sInput,"v") -print iPos -end sub - - + +InStr Function [Runtime] +Returns the position of a string within another string. + +The Instr function returns the position at which the match was found. If the string was not found, the function returns 0. +Syntax: +InStr ([Start As Integer,] Text1 As String, Text2 As String[, Compare]) +Return value: +Integer +Parameters: + +Start: Any numeric expression that marks the position in a string at which to start searching for the specified substring. If this parameter is omitted, the search starts at the first character. + +Text1: The string expression that you want to search. + +Text2: The string expression that you want to search for. + +Compare: Optional numeric expression that defines the type of comparison. This parameter can be 0 or 1. The default value 1 specifies a text comparison (not case-sensitive). The value 0 specifies a binary comparison (text is compared case-sensitive).UFI: fixes #i17929# +To avoid a run-time error, do not set the Compare parameter if the first return parameter is omitted. + + +Example: +Sub ExamplePosition +Dim sInput As String +Dim iPos as Integer +sInput = "Star Office" +iPos = Instr(sInput,"v") +print iPos +end sub + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp index bb838eea42..ff927596cb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -CreateUnoService Function [Runtime] -/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: added example and link, #i27908# -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +CreateUnoService Function [Runtime] +/text/sbasic/shared/03131600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: added example and link, #i27908# +dedr: reviewed + + +
CreateUnoService;function - -CreateUnoService Function [Runtime] -Instantiates a Uno service with the ProcessServiceManager. -
+ +CreateUnoService Function [Runtime] +Instantiates a Uno service with the ProcessServiceManager. + Syntax: CreateUnoService - -oService = CreateUnoService( Uno service name ) -For a list of available services, go to: http://api.openoffice.org/docs/common/ref/com/sun/star/module-ix.html -Examples: + +oService = CreateUnoService( Uno service name ) +For a list of available services, go to: http://api.openoffice.org/docs/common/ref/com/sun/star/module-ix.html +Examples: oIntrospection = CreateUnoService( "com.sun.star.beans.Introspection" ) filepicker;API service - -The following code uses a service to open a file open dialog: -Sub Main -fName = FileOpenDialog ("Please select a file") -print "file chosen: "+fName -End Sub -function FileOpenDialog(title as String) as String -filepicker = createUnoService("com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.FilePicker") -filepicker.Title = title -filepicker.execute() -files = filepicker.getFiles() -FileOpenDialog=files(0) -End function - - + +The following code uses a service to open a file open dialog: +Sub Main +fName = FileOpenDialog ("Please select a file") +print "file chosen: "+fName +End Sub +function FileOpenDialog(title as String) as String +filepicker = createUnoService("com.sun.star.ui.dialogs.FilePicker") +filepicker.Title = title +filepicker.execute() +files = filepicker.getFiles() +FileOpenDialog=files(0) +End function + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp index 209cbaa199..616d9b87c2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -CreateUnoListener Function [Runtime] -/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i31078# - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +CreateUnoListener Function [Runtime] +/text/sbasic/shared/03132000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i31078# + + +
CreateUnoListener;function - -CreateUnoListener Function [Runtime] -Creates a Listener instance. -
-Many Uno interfaces let you register listeners on a special listener interface. This allows you to listen for specific events and call up the appropriate listener method. The CreateUnoListener function waits for the called listener interface and then passes the interface an object that the interface supports. This object is then passed to the method to register the listener. -Syntax: -oListener = CreateUnoListener( Prefixname, ListenerInterfaceName ) -Example: -The following example is based on a Basic library object. -Dim oListener -oListener = CreateUnoListener( "ContListener_","com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener" ) -The CreateUnoListener method requires two parameters. The first is a prefix and is explained in detail below. The second parameter is the fully qualified name of the Listener interface that you want to use. -The Listener must then be added to the Broadcaster Object. This is done by calling the appropriate method for adding a Listener. These methods always follow the pattern "addFooListener", where "Foo" is the Listener Interface Type, without the 'X'. In this example, the addContainerListener method is called to register the XContainerListener: -Dim oLib -oLib = BasicLibraries.Library1 ' Library1 must exist! -oLib.addContainerListener( oListener ) ' Register the listener -The Listener is now registered. When an event occurs, the corresponding Listener calls the appropriate method from the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener Interface. -The prefix calls registered Listeners from Basic-subroutines. The Basic run-time system searches for Basic-subroutines or functions that have the name "PrefixListenerMethode" and calls them when found. Otherwise, a run-time error occurs. -In this example, the Listener-Interface uses the following methods: - - -disposing: - - -Listener base interface (com.sun.star.lang.XEventListener): base interface for all Listener Interfaces - - -elementInserted: - - -Method of the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener interface - - -elementRemoved: - - -Method of the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener interface - - -elementReplaced: - - -Method of the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener interface - - -In this example, the prefix is ContListener_. The following subroutines must therefore be implemented in Basic: - - -ContListener_disposing - - -ContListener_elementInserted - - -ContListener_elementRemoved - - -ContListener_elementReplaced - - -An event structure type that contains information about an event exists for every Listener type. When a Listener method is called, an instance of this event is passed to the method as a parameter. Basic Listener methods can also call these event objects, so long as the appropriate parameter is passed in the Sub declaration. For example: -Sub ContListener_disposing( oEvent ) -MsgBox "disposing" -MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties -End Sub -Sub ContListener_elementInserted( oEvent ) -MsgBox "elementInserted" -MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties -End Sub -Sub ContListener_elementRemoved( oEvent ) -MsgBox "elementRemoved" -MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties -End Sub -Sub ContListener_elementReplaced( oEvent ) -MsgBox "elementReplaced" -MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties -End Sub -You do not need to include the parameter of an event object if the object is not used: -' Minimal implementation of Sub disposing -Sub ContListener_disposing -End Sub -Listener methods must always be implemented to avoid Basic run-time errors. - - + +CreateUnoListener Function [Runtime] +Creates a Listener instance. + +Many Uno interfaces let you register listeners on a special listener interface. This allows you to listen for specific events and call up the appropriate listener method. The CreateUnoListener function waits for the called listener interface and then passes the interface an object that the interface supports. This object is then passed to the method to register the listener. +Syntax: +oListener = CreateUnoListener( Prefixname, ListenerInterfaceName ) +Example: +The following example is based on a Basic library object. +Dim oListener +oListener = CreateUnoListener( "ContListener_","com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener" ) +The CreateUnoListener method requires two parameters. The first is a prefix and is explained in detail below. The second parameter is the fully qualified name of the Listener interface that you want to use. +The Listener must then be added to the Broadcaster Object. This is done by calling the appropriate method for adding a Listener. These methods always follow the pattern "addFooListener", where "Foo" is the Listener Interface Type, without the 'X'. In this example, the addContainerListener method is called to register the XContainerListener: +Dim oLib +oLib = BasicLibraries.Library1 ' Library1 must exist! +oLib.addContainerListener( oListener ) ' Register the listener +The Listener is now registered. When an event occurs, the corresponding Listener calls the appropriate method from the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener Interface. +The prefix calls registered Listeners from Basic-subroutines. The Basic run-time system searches for Basic-subroutines or functions that have the name "PrefixListenerMethode" and calls them when found. Otherwise, a run-time error occurs. +In this example, the Listener-Interface uses the following methods: + + +disposing: + + +Listener base interface (com.sun.star.lang.XEventListener): base interface for all Listener Interfaces + + +elementInserted: + + +Method of the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener interface + + +elementRemoved: + + +Method of the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener interface + + +elementReplaced: + + +Method of the com.sun.star.container.XContainerListener interface + + +In this example, the prefix is ContListener_. The following subroutines must therefore be implemented in Basic: + + +ContListener_disposing + + +ContListener_elementInserted + + +ContListener_elementRemoved + + +ContListener_elementReplaced + + +An event structure type that contains information about an event exists for every Listener type. When a Listener method is called, an instance of this event is passed to the method as a parameter. Basic Listener methods can also call these event objects, so long as the appropriate parameter is passed in the Sub declaration. For example: +Sub ContListener_disposing( oEvent ) +MsgBox "disposing" +MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties +End Sub +Sub ContListener_elementInserted( oEvent ) +MsgBox "elementInserted" +MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties +End Sub +Sub ContListener_elementRemoved( oEvent ) +MsgBox "elementRemoved" +MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties +End Sub +Sub ContListener_elementReplaced( oEvent ) +MsgBox "elementReplaced" +MsgBox oEvent.Dbg_Properties +End Sub +You do not need to include the parameter of an event object if the object is not used: +' Minimal implementation of Sub disposing +Sub ContListener_disposing +End Sub +Listener methods must always be implemented to avoid Basic run-time errors. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp index 8e799ff438..ff2266dcab 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -To access this function... -/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +To access this function... +/text/scalc/00/00000004.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + To access this function... - + More explanations on top of this page. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp index 9a87be3baa..b85971d824 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Data Menu -/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Data Menu + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Data Menu +/text/scalc/00/00000412.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Data Menu Choose Data - Define Range - + Choose Data - Select Range - + Choose Data - Sort - -
-Choose Data - Sort - Sort Criteria tab -On Main toolbar, click -
- - - + +
+Choose Data - Sort - Sort Criteria tab +On Main toolbar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Sort Ascending - - - - + + + +Sort Ascending + + + + Icon - - - -Sort Descending - - -
- -
-
+ + + +Sort Descending + + + + + + Choose Data - Sort - Options tab - + Choose Data - Filter - -
-Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter - -On Main toolbar and Database Bar, click -
- - - + +
+Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter + +On Main toolbar and Database Bar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -AutoFilter - - -
- -
-
+ + + +AutoFilter + + + + + + Choose Data - Filter - Advanced Filter - -
-Choose Data - Filter - Standard Filter - More>> button -Choose Data - Filter - Advanced Filter - More>> button -
-
-Choose Data - Filter - Remove Filter - -On Database Bar, click Remove Filter/Sort - - - - + +
+Choose Data - Filter - Standard Filter - More>> button +Choose Data - Filter - Advanced Filter - More>> button +
+
+Choose Data - Filter - Remove Filter + +On Database Bar, click Remove Filter/Sort + +
+ + Icon - - - -Remove Filter/Sort - - -
- -
+ + + +Remove Filter/Sort + + + + + Choose Data - Filter - Hide AutoFilter - + Choose Data - Subtotals - + Choose Data - Subtotals - 1st, 2nd, 3rd Group tabs - + Choose Data - Subtotals - Options tab - + Choose Data - Validity - + Menu Data - Validity - Criteria tab - + Choose Data - Validity - Input Help tab - + Choose Data - Validity - Error Alert tab - + Choose Data - Multiple Operations - + Choose Data - Consolidate - + Choose Data - Outline - + Choose Data - Outline - Hide Details - + Choose Data - Outline - Show Details - -
-Choose Data - Outline - Group - -F12 -On Main toolbar, click -
- - - + +
+Choose Data - Outline - Group + +F12 +On Main toolbar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Insert Group - - -
- -
-
-
-Choose Data - Outline - Ungroup - + + + +Insert Group + + + + +
+ +
+Choose Data - Outline - Ungroup + Command -Ctrl+F12 -On Main toolbar, click -
- - - +Ctrl+F12 +On Main toolbar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Ungroup - - -
- -
-
+ + + +Ungroup + + + + + + Choose Data - Outline - AutoOutline - + Choose Data - Outline - Remove - + Choose Data - DataPilot - + Choose Data - DataPilot - Start - + Choose Data - DataPilot - Start, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Data source registered in $[officename]. - -
-Choose Data - DataPilot - Start, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Current selection. -Choose Data - DataPilot - Start, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Data source registered in $[officename], click OK to see Select Data Source dialog. -
+ +
+Choose Data - DataPilot - Start, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Current selection. +Choose Data - DataPilot - Start, in the Select Source dialog choose the option Data source registered in $[officename], click OK to see Select Data Source dialog. +
Choose Data - DataPilot - Refresh - + Choose Data - DataPilot - Delete - + Choose Data - Refresh Range - + Choose Data - DataPilot - Group - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp index 977706a8a1..4bc75a0d10 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Navigator -/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: sc.features "Adding Scenario Protection to Calc" -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Navigator +/text/scalc/01/02110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: sc.features "Adding Scenario Protection to Calc" +dedr: reviewed + + + - - + +Navigator +Activates and deactivates the Navigator. The Navigator is a dockable window. + + + Choose Edit - Navigator to display the Navigator, or click the icon on the Function Bar or press F5. Drag the Navigator title bar to move the Navigator window. To dock the Navigator, hold down the Control Ctrl key while dragging. - -Column + +Column Enter the column letter in the Column spin box. Press Enter to reposition the cell cursor to the specified column in the same row. - -Row + +Row Enter a row number in the Row spin box. Press Enter to reposition the cell cursor to the specified row in the same column. - -Data Range -Specifies the current data range denoted by the position of the cell cursor. - - - + +Data Range +Specifies the current data range denoted by the position of the cell cursor. +
+ + Icon - - - -Data Range - - -
+ + + +Data Range + + + - -Start -Moves to the cell at the beginning of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button. - - - + +Start +Moves to the cell at the beginning of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button. +
+ + Icon - - - -Start - - -
+ + + +Start + + + - -End -Moves to the cell at the end of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button. - - - + +End +Moves to the cell at the end of the current data range, which you can highlight using the Data Range button. +
+ + Icon - - - -End - - -
+ + + +End + + + - -Toggle -Toggles the content view. Only the selected Navigator element and its subelements are displayed. Click the icon again to restore all elements for viewing. - - - + +Toggle +Toggles the content view. Only the selected Navigator element and its subelements are displayed. Click the icon again to restore all elements for viewing. +
+ + Icon - - - -Toggle - - -
+ + + +Toggle + + + - -Contents -Allows you to hide/show the contents. - - - + +Contents +Allows you to hide/show the contents. +
+ + Icon - - - -Contents - - -
+ + + +Contents + + + - -Scenarios -Displays all available scenarios. Double-click a name to apply that scenario. The result is shown in the sheet. For more information, choose Tools - Scenarios. - - - + +Scenarios +Displays all available scenarios. Double-click a name to apply that scenario. The result is shown in the sheet. For more information, choose Tools - Scenarios. +
+ + Icon - - - -Scenarios - - -
- + + + +Scenarios + + + + If the Navigator displays scenarios, you can access the following commands when you right-click a scenario entry: - -Delete + +Delete Deletes the selected scenario. - -Properties + +Properties Opens the Edit scenario dialog, where you can edit the scenario properties. - -Drag Mode -Opens a submenu for selecting the drag mode You can also select the drag mode through the context menu in the Navigator window. You decide which action is performed when dragging and dropping an object from the Navigator into a document. Depending on the mode you select, the icon indicates whether a hyperlink, link or a copy is created. - - - + +Drag Mode +Opens a submenu for selecting the drag mode You can also select the drag mode through the context menu in the Navigator window. You decide which action is performed when dragging and dropping an object from the Navigator into a document. Depending on the mode you select, the icon indicates whether a hyperlink, link or a copy is created. +
+ + Icon - - - -Drag Mode - - -
+ + + +Drag Mode + + + - -Insert as Hyperlink -Inserts a hyperlink when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. You can later click the created hyperlink to set the cursor and the view to the respective object. + +Insert as Hyperlink +Inserts a hyperlink when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. You can later click the created hyperlink to set the cursor and the view to the respective object. If you insert a hyperlink that links to an open document, you need to save the document before you can use the hyperlink.UFI: fixes bugtraq 5009354 - -Insert as Link + +Insert as Link Creates a link when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. - -Insert as Copy + +Insert as Copy Generates a copy when you drag-and-drop an object from the Navigator into a document. - -Objects + +Objects Displays all objects in your document. - -Documents -Displays the names of all open documents. To switch to another open document in the Navigator, click the document name. The status (active, inactive) of the document is shown in brackets after the name. You can switch the active document in the Window menu. - - + +Documents +Displays the names of all open documents. To switch to another open document in the Navigator, click the document name. The status (active, inactive) of the document is shown in brackets after the name. You can switch the active document in the Window menu. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp index d1a9472da5..75e4a470c8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Deleting Contents -/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Deleting Contents +/text/scalc/01/02150000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -deleting; cell contents -cells; deleting contents -spreadsheets; deleting cell contents +deleting; cell contents +cells; deleting contents +spreadsheets; deleting cell contents cell contents; deleting - -Deleting Contents + +Deleting Contents Specifies the contents to be deleted from a cell or cell range. Before deleting, you must first select the cell or range. - Contents are only deleted from the selected cells or active cell. Similarly, if several sheets are selected, only the active one will be affected. - -This dialog is also called by pressing Del after the cell cursor has been activated on the sheet. -Pressing Backspace deletes content without calling the dialog or changing formats. -Use Cut on the Function Bar to delete contents and formats without the dialog. -Selection + Contents are only deleted from the selected cells or active cell. Similarly, if several sheets are selected, only the active one will be affected. + +This dialog is also called by pressing Del after the cell cursor has been activated on the sheet. +Pressing Backspace deletes content without calling the dialog or changing formats. +Use Cut on the Function Bar to delete contents and formats without the dialog. +Selection This area lists the options for deleting contents. - -Delete All + +Delete All Deletes all content from the selected cell range. - -Strings + +Strings Deletes strings only. Formats, formulas, numbers and dates are not affected. - -Numbers + +Numbers Deletes numbers only. Formats and formulas remain unchanged. - -Date & time + +Date & time Deletes date and time values. Formats, text, numbers and formulas remain unchanged. - -Formulas + +Formulas Deletes formulas. Text, numbers, formats, dates and times remain unchanged. - -Notes + +Notes Deletes notes added to cells. All other elements remain unchanged. - -Formats + +Formats Deletes format attributes applied to cells. All cell content remains unchanged. - -Objects -Deletes objects. All cell content remains unchanged. - - + +Objects +Deletes objects. All cell content remains unchanged. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp index 239bb61548..06fe5f997e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Delete Cells -/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Delete Cells +/text/scalc/01/02160000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -cells; deleting cells -columns; deleting -rows; deleting -spreadsheets; deleting cells -deleting; rows -deleting; columns +cells; deleting cells +columns; deleting +rows; deleting +spreadsheets; deleting cells +deleting; rows +deleting; columns deleting; cells - -Delete Cells + +Delete Cells Completely deletes selected cells, columns or rows. The cells below or to the right of the deleted cells will fill the space. - Note that the selected delete option is stored and reloaded when the dialog is next called. - -Selection + Note that the selected delete option is stored and reloaded when the dialog is next called. + +Selection This area contains options for specifying how sheets are displayed after deleting cells. - -Shift cells up + +Shift cells up Fills the space produced by the deleted cells with the cells underneath it. - -Shift cells left + +Shift cells left Fills the resulting space by the cells to the right of the deleted cells. - -Delete entire row(s) + +Delete entire row(s) After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire row from the sheet. - -Delete entire column(s) -After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire column from the sheet. - -Deleting Cells - - + +Delete entire column(s) +After selecting at least one cell, deletes the entire column from the sheet. + +Deleting Cells + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp index fac43773b6..23ba3f0a90 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Row Break -/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Row Break +/text/scalc/01/02190100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-spreadsheets; deleting row break -deleting; row breaks -row breaks; deleting +spreadsheets; deleting row break +deleting; row breaks +row breaks; deleting removing; manual row breaks - -Row Break -Removes the manual row break above the active cell. -
-Position the cursor in a cell directly below the row break indicated by a horizontal line and choose Edit - Delete Manual Break - Row Break. The manual row break is removed. - - - + +Row Break +Removes the manual row break above the active cell. + +Position the cursor in a cell directly below the row break indicated by a horizontal line and choose Edit - Delete Manual Break - Row Break. The manual row break is removed. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp index 41a2a2cef6..1af0c6d952 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Column Break -/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Column Break +/text/scalc/01/02190200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-spreadsheets;deleting column breaks -deleting;column breaks -column breaks;deleting +spreadsheets;deleting column breaks +deleting;column breaks +column breaks;deleting removing; manual column breaks - -Column Break -Removes a manual column break to the left of the active cell. -
-Position the cursor in the cell to the right of the column break indicated by a vertical line and choose Edit - Delete Manual Break - Column Break. The manual column break is removed. - - - + +Column Break +Removes a manual column break to the left of the active cell. + +Position the cursor in the cell to the right of the column break indicated by a vertical line and choose Edit - Delete Manual Break - Column Break. The manual column break is removed. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp index 82a009c859..7c5968afc6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Row Break -/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Row Break +/text/scalc/01/04010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-sheets; inserting row breaks -row breaks; inserting -inserting; manual row breaks +sheets; inserting row breaks +row breaks; inserting +inserting; manual row breaks manual row breaks - -Row Break -Inserts a row break (horizontal page break) above the selected cell. -
-The manual row break is indicated by a dark blue horizontal line. - - - + +Row Break +Inserts a row break (horizontal page break) above the selected cell. + +The manual row break is indicated by a dark blue horizontal line. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp index 37f8820b20..3f387c3498 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Column Break -/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Column Break +/text/scalc/01/04010200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-spreadsheets; inserting column breaks -column breaks; inserting -inserting; manual column breaks +spreadsheets; inserting column breaks +column breaks; inserting +inserting; manual column breaks manual column breaks - -Column Break -Inserts a column break (vertical page break) to the left of the active cell. -
-The manual column break is indicated by a dark blue vertical line. - - - + +Column Break +Inserts a column break (vertical page break) to the left of the active cell. + +The manual column break is indicated by a dark blue vertical line. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp index 50443eaa69..4e53b8b850 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Categories and Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Categories and Functions +/text/scalc/01/04060100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -functions; Calc list -Calc functions +functions; Calc list +Calc functions categories of functions - - -Categories and Functions -This section describes the functions of $[officename] Calc. The various functions are divided into logical categories in the Function Wizard. -Operators are also available. -Database - -Date & Time - -Financial - -Information - -Logical - -Mathematical - -Array - -Statistical - -Spreadsheet - -Text - -Add-in - - - + + +Categories and Functions +This section describes the functions of $[officename] Calc. The various functions are divided into logical categories in the Function Wizard. +Operators are also available. +Database + +Date & Time + +Financial + +Information + +Logical + +Mathematical + +Array + +Statistical + +Spreadsheet + +Text + +Add-in + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp index 0a75bb9039..a9332f559b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Database Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fixed #i25407# -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Database Functions +/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fixed #i25407# +dedr: reviewed + + -Function Wizard; databases -functions; databases +Function Wizard; databases +functions; databases databases; functions in $[officename] Calc - -Database Functions + +Database Functions This section deals with functions used with data organized as one row of data for one record. - -The Database category may be confused with a database integrated in $[officename]. However, there is no connection between a database in $[officename] and the Database category in $[officename] Calc. -Example Data: -The following data will be used in some of the function description examples: -The range A1:E10 lists the children invited to Joe's birthday party. The following information is given for each entry: column A shows the name, B the grade, then age in years, distance to school in meters and weight in kilograms. - - - - - -A - - -B - - -C - - -D - - -E - - - - -1 - - -Name - - -Grade - - -Age - - -Distance to School - - -Weight - - - - -2 - - -Andy - - -3 - - -9 - - -150 - - -40 - - - - -3 - - -Betty - - -4 - - -10 - - -1000 - - -42 - - - - -4 - - -Charles - - -3 - - -10 - - -300 - - -51 - - - - -5 - - -Daniel - - -5 - - -11 - - -1200 - - -48 - - - - -6 - - -Eva - - -2 - - -8 - - -650 - - -33 - - - - -7 - - -Frank - - -2 - - -7 - - -300 - - -42 - - - - -8 - - -Greta - - -1 - - -7 - - -200 - - -36 - - - - -9 - - -Harry - - -3 - - -9 - - -1200 - - -44 - - - - -10 - - -Irene - - -2 - - -8 - - -1000 - - -42 - - - - -11 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -12 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -13 - - -Name - - -Grade - - -Age - - -Distance to School - - -Weight - - - - -14 - - - - - - - - ->600 - - - - - - -15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -16 - - -DCOUNT - - -5 - - - - - - - - -
- -The formula in cell B16 is =DCOUNT(A1:E10;0;A13:E14) -Database Function Parameters: -The following are the parameter definitions for all database functions: - -Database is the cell range defining the database. - + +The Database category may be confused with a database integrated in $[officename]. However, there is no connection between a database in $[officename] and the Database category in $[officename] Calc. +Example Data: +The following data will be used in some of the function description examples: +The range A1:E10 lists the children invited to Joe's birthday party. The following information is given for each entry: column A shows the name, B the grade, then age in years, distance to school in meters and weight in kilograms. + + + + + +A + + +B + + +C + + +D + + +E + + + + +1 + + +Name + + +Grade + + +Age + + +Distance to School + + +Weight + + + + +2 + + +Andy + + +3 + + +9 + + +150 + + +40 + + + + +3 + + +Betty + + +4 + + +10 + + +1000 + + +42 + + + + +4 + + +Charles + + +3 + + +10 + + +300 + + +51 + + + + +5 + + +Daniel + + +5 + + +11 + + +1200 + + +48 + + + + +6 + + +Eva + + +2 + + +8 + + +650 + + +33 + + + + +7 + + +Frank + + +2 + + +7 + + +300 + + +42 + + + + +8 + + +Greta + + +1 + + +7 + + +200 + + +36 + + + + +9 + + +Harry + + +3 + + +9 + + +1200 + + +44 + + + + +10 + + +Irene + + +2 + + +8 + + +1000 + + +42 + + + + +11 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +12 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +13 + + +Name + + +Grade + + +Age + + +Distance to School + + +Weight + + + + +14 + + + + + + + + +>600 + + + + + + +15 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +16 + + +DCOUNT + + +5 + + + + + + + + +
+ +The formula in cell B16 is =DCOUNT(A1:E10;0;A13:E14) +Database Function Parameters: +The following are the parameter definitions for all database functions: + +Database is the cell range defining the database. + Database field specifies the column where the function operates on after the search criteria of the first parameter is applied and the data rows are selected. It is not related to the search criteria itself. Use the number 0 to specify the whole data range. To reference a column by means of the column header name, place quotation marks around the header name. - - -Search criteria is the cell range containing search criteria. If you write several criteria in one row they are connected by AND. If you write the criteria in different rows they are connected by OR. Empty cells in the search criteria range will be ignored. + + +Search criteria is the cell range containing search criteria. If you write several criteria in one row they are connected by AND. If you write the criteria in different rows they are connected by OR. Empty cells in the search criteria range will be ignored. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate to define how $[officename] Calc acts when searching for identical entries. - +
DCOUNT function - -DCOUNT -DCOUNT counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search criteria and contain numerical values. - -Syntax -DCOUNT(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) -For the Database Field parameter you can enter a cell to specify the column, or enter the number 0 for the entire database. The parameter cannot be empty. - -Example -In the example above, we want to know how many children have to travel more than 600 meters to school. The result is to be stored in cell B16. Set the cursor in cell B16. Enter the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;0;A13:E14) in B16. The Function Wizard helps you to input ranges. - -Database is the range of data to be evaluated, including its headers: in this case A1:E10. Database field specifies the column for the search criteria: in this case, the whole database. Search criteria is the range where you can enter the search parameters: in this case, A13:E14. -To learn how many children in second grade are over 7 years of age, delete the entry >600 in cell D14 and enter "2" in cell B14 under Grade, and enter >7 in cell C14 to the right. The result is 2. Two children are in second grade and over 7 years of age. As both criteria are in the same row, they are connected by AND. -
+ +DCOUNT +DCOUNT counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search criteria and contain numerical values. + +Syntax +DCOUNT(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) +For the Database Field parameter you can enter a cell to specify the column, or enter the number 0 for the entire database. The parameter cannot be empty. + +Example +In the example above, we want to know how many children have to travel more than 600 meters to school. The result is to be stored in cell B16. Set the cursor in cell B16. Enter the formula =DCOUNT(A1:E10;0;A13:E14) in B16. The Function Wizard helps you to input ranges. + +Database is the range of data to be evaluated, including its headers: in this case A1:E10. Database field specifies the column for the search criteria: in this case, the whole database. Search criteria is the range where you can enter the search parameters: in this case, A13:E14. +To learn how many children in second grade are over 7 years of age, delete the entry >600 in cell D14 and enter "2" in cell B14 under Grade, and enter >7 in cell C14 to the right. The result is 2. Two children are in second grade and over 7 years of age. As both criteria are in the same row, they are connected by AND. +
DCOUNTA function - -DCOUNTA -DCOUNTA counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search conditions, and contain numeric or alphanumeric values. - -Syntax -DCOUNTA(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) - -Example -In the example above, you can search for the number of children whose name starts with an E or a subsequent letter. Edit the formula in B16 by inserting an A after the function name DCOUNT. Delete the old search criteria and enter >=E under Name in field A14. The result is 5. If you now delete all number values for Greta in row 8, the result changes to 4. Row 8 is no longer included in the count because it does not contain any values. The name Greta is text, not a value. -
+ +DCOUNTA +DCOUNTA counts the number of rows (records) in a database that match the specified search conditions, and contain numeric or alphanumeric values. + +Syntax +DCOUNTA(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) + +Example +In the example above, you can search for the number of children whose name starts with an E or a subsequent letter. Edit the formula in B16 by inserting an A after the function name DCOUNT. Delete the old search criteria and enter >=E under Name in field A14. The result is 5. If you now delete all number values for Greta in row 8, the result changes to 4. Row 8 is no longer included in the count because it does not contain any values. The name Greta is text, not a value. +
DGET function - -DGET -DGET returns the contents of the referenced cell in a database which matches the specified search criteria. In case of an error, the function returns either #VALUE! for no row found, or Err502 for more than one cell found. - -Syntax -DGET(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) - -Example -In the above example we want to determine what grade a child is in, whose name was entered in cell A14. The formula is entered in cell B16 and differs slightly from the earlier examples because only one column (one database field) can be entered for Database field. Enter the following formula: -=DGET(A1:E10;"Grade";A13:E14) -Enter the name Frank in A14, and you see the result 2. Frank is in second grade. Enter "Age" instead of "Grade" and you will get Frank's age. -Or enter the value 11 in cell C14 only, and delete the other entries in this row. Edit the formula in B16 as follows: -=DGET(A1:E10;"Name";A13:E14) -Instead of the grade, the name is queried. The answer appears at once: Daniel is the only child aged 11. -
+ +DGET +DGET returns the contents of the referenced cell in a database which matches the specified search criteria. In case of an error, the function returns either #VALUE! for no row found, or Err502 for more than one cell found. + +Syntax +DGET(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) + +Example +In the above example we want to determine what grade a child is in, whose name was entered in cell A14. The formula is entered in cell B16 and differs slightly from the earlier examples because only one column (one database field) can be entered for Database field. Enter the following formula: +=DGET(A1:E10;"Grade";A13:E14) +Enter the name Frank in A14, and you see the result 2. Frank is in second grade. Enter "Age" instead of "Grade" and you will get Frank's age. +Or enter the value 11 in cell C14 only, and delete the other entries in this row. Edit the formula in B16 as follows: +=DGET(A1:E10;"Name";A13:E14) +Instead of the grade, the name is queried. The answer appears at once: Daniel is the only child aged 11. +
DMAX function - -DMAX -DMAX returns the maximum content of a cell (field) in a database (all records) that matches the specified search conditions. - -Syntax -DMAX(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) - -Example -To find out how much the heaviest child in each grade weighed, enter the following formula in B16: -=DMAX(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) -Under 'Grade', enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. After entering a grade number, the weight of the heaviest child in that grade appears. -
+ +DMAX +DMAX returns the maximum content of a cell (field) in a database (all records) that matches the specified search conditions. + +Syntax +DMAX(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) + +Example +To find out how much the heaviest child in each grade weighed, enter the following formula in B16: +=DMAX(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) +Under 'Grade', enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. After entering a grade number, the weight of the heaviest child in that grade appears. +
DMIN function - -DMIN -DMIN returns the minimum content of a cell (field) in a database that matches the specified search criteria. - -Syntax -DMIN(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) - -Example -To find the shortest distance to school for the children in each grade, enter the following formula in B16: -=DMIN(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) -In row 14, under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. The shortest distance to school for each grade appears. -
+ +DMIN +DMIN returns the minimum content of a cell (field) in a database that matches the specified search criteria. + +Syntax +DMIN(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) + +Example +To find the shortest distance to school for the children in each grade, enter the following formula in B16: +=DMIN(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) +In row 14, under Grade, enter 1, 2, 3, and so on, one after the other. The shortest distance to school for each grade appears. +
DAVERAGE function - -DAVERAGE -DAVERAGE returns the average of the values of all cells (fields) in all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. - -Syntax -DAVERAGE(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) - -Example -To find the average weight of all children of the same age, enter the following formula in B16: -=DAVERAGE(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) -In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The average weight of all children of the same age appears. -
+ +DAVERAGE +DAVERAGE returns the average of the values of all cells (fields) in all rows (database records) that match the specified search criteria. + +Syntax +DAVERAGE(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) + +Example +To find the average weight of all children of the same age, enter the following formula in B16: +=DAVERAGE(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) +In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The average weight of all children of the same age appears. +
DPRODUCT function - -DPRODUCT -DPRODUCT multiplies all cells of a data range where the cell contents match the search criteria. - -Syntax -DPRODUCT(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) - -Example -With the birthday party example above, there is no meaningful application of this function. -
+ +DPRODUCT +DPRODUCT multiplies all cells of a data range where the cell contents match the search criteria. + +Syntax +DPRODUCT(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) + +Example +With the birthday party example above, there is no meaningful application of this function. +
DSTDEV function - -DSTDEV -DSTDEV calculates the standard deviation of a population based on a sample, using the numbers in a database column that match the given conditions. The records are treated as a sample of data. That means that the children in the example represent a cross section of all children. Note that a representative result can not be obtained from a sample of less than one thousand. - -Syntax -DSTDEV(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) - -Example -To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age, enter the following formula in B16: -=DSTDEV(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) -In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result shown is the standard deviation of the weight of all children of this age. -
+ +DSTDEV +DSTDEV calculates the standard deviation of a population based on a sample, using the numbers in a database column that match the given conditions. The records are treated as a sample of data. That means that the children in the example represent a cross section of all children. Note that a representative result can not be obtained from a sample of less than one thousand. + +Syntax +DSTDEV(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) + +Example +To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age, enter the following formula in B16: +=DSTDEV(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) +In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result shown is the standard deviation of the weight of all children of this age. +
DSTDEVP function - -DSTDEVP -DSTDEVP calculates the standard deviation of a population based on all cells of a data range which match the search criteria. The records from the example are treated as the whole population. - -Syntax -DSTDEVP(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) - -Example -To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party, enter the following formula in B16: -=DSTDEVP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) -In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result is the standard deviation of the weight for all same-aged children whose weight was checked. -
+ +DSTDEVP +DSTDEVP calculates the standard deviation of a population based on all cells of a data range which match the search criteria. The records from the example are treated as the whole population. + +Syntax +DSTDEVP(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) + +Example +To find the standard deviation of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party, enter the following formula in B16: +=DSTDEVP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) +In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The result is the standard deviation of the weight for all same-aged children whose weight was checked. +
DSUM function - -DSUM -DSUM returns the total of all cells in a database field in all rows (records) that match the specified search criteria. - -Syntax -DSUM(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) - -Example -To find the length of the combined distance to school of all children at Joe's birthday party who are in second grade, enter the following formula in B16: -=DSUM(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) -Enter "2" in row 14 under "Grade". The sum (1950) of the distances to school of all the children who are in second grade is displayed. -
+ +DSUM +DSUM returns the total of all cells in a database field in all rows (records) that match the specified search criteria. + +Syntax +DSUM(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) + +Example +To find the length of the combined distance to school of all children at Joe's birthday party who are in second grade, enter the following formula in B16: +=DSUM(A1:E10;"Distance to School";A13:E14) +Enter "2" in row 14 under "Grade". The sum (1950) of the distances to school of all the children who are in second grade is displayed. +
DVAR function - -DVAR -DVAR returns the variance of all cells of a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records from the example are treated as a sample of data. A representative result cannot be obtained from a sample population of less than one thousand. - -Syntax -DVAR(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) - -Example -To find the variance of the weight of all children of the same age, enter the following formula in B16: -=DVAR(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) -In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. You will see as a result the variance of the weight values for all children of this age. -
+ +DVAR +DVAR returns the variance of all cells of a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records from the example are treated as a sample of data. A representative result cannot be obtained from a sample population of less than one thousand. + +Syntax +DVAR(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) + +Example +To find the variance of the weight of all children of the same age, enter the following formula in B16: +=DVAR(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) +In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. You will see as a result the variance of the weight values for all children of this age. +
DVARP function - -DVARP -DVARP calculates the variance of all cell values in a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records are from the example are treated as an entire population. - -Syntax -DVARP(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) - -Example -To find the variance of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party, enter the following formula in B16: -=DVARP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) -In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The variance of the weight values for all children of this age attending Joe's birthday party appears. + +DVARP +DVARP calculates the variance of all cell values in a database field in all records that match the specified search criteria. The records are from the example are treated as an entire population. + +Syntax +DVARP(Database; Database Field; Search Criteria) + +Example +To find the variance of the weight for all children of the same age at Joe's birthday party, enter the following formula in B16: +=DVARP(A1:E10;"Weight";A13:E14) +In row 14, under Age, enter 7, 8, 9, and so on, one after the other. The variance of the weight values for all children of this age attending Joe's birthday party appears.
- - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp index 260d1eb9bf..94bbc7c775 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Date & Time Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Date & Time Functions +/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -date and time functions -functions; date & time +date and time functions +functions; date & time Function Wizard; date & time - -Date & Time Functions + +Date & Time Functions These spreadsheet functions are used for inserting and editing dates and times. - -
- - - -
-$[officename] internally handles a date/time value as a numerical value. If you assign the numbering format "Number" to a date or time value, it is converted to a number. For example, 01/01/2000 12:00 PM, converts to 36526.5. The value preceding the decimal point corresponds to the date; the value following the decimal point corresponds to the time. If you do not want to see this type of numerical date or time representation, change the number format (date or time) accordingly. To do this, select the cell containing the date or time value, call its context menu and select Format Cells. The Numbers tab page contains the functions for defining the number format. -In Tools - Options - $[officename] - General you find the area Year (two digits). This sets the period for which two-digit information applies. Note that changes made here have an effect on some of the following functions. -When entering dates, slashes or dashes used as date separators may be interpreted as arithmetic operators. Therefore, dates entered in this format are not always recognized as dates and result in erroneous calculations. To keep dates from being interpreted as parts of formulas, place them in quotation marks, for example, "07/20/54". + +
+ + + +
+$[officename] internally handles a date/time value as a numerical value. If you assign the numbering format "Number" to a date or time value, it is converted to a number. For example, 01/01/2000 12:00 PM, converts to 36526.5. The value preceding the decimal point corresponds to the date; the value following the decimal point corresponds to the time. If you do not want to see this type of numerical date or time representation, change the number format (date or time) accordingly. To do this, select the cell containing the date or time value, call its context menu and select Format Cells. The Numbers tab page contains the functions for defining the number format. +In Tools - Options - $[officename] - General you find the area Year (two digits). This sets the period for which two-digit information applies. Note that changes made here have an effect on some of the following functions. +When entering dates, slashes or dashes used as date separators may be interpreted as arithmetic operators. Therefore, dates entered in this format are not always recognized as dates and result in erroneous calculations. To keep dates from being interpreted as parts of formulas, place them in quotation marks, for example, "07/20/54". Functions - -
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
- - - + +
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+
+ + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp index ca33eda6b5..c3ef5e86b3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Financial Functions Part One -/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Financial Functions Part One +/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -financial functions -functions; financial +financial functions +functions; financial Function Wizard; financial - -Financial Functions Part One + +Financial Functions Part One This category contains the mathematical finance functions of %PRODUCTNAME Calc. - +
AMORDEGRC function - -AMORDEGRC - -Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as degressive amortization. Unlike AMORLINC, a depreciation coefficient that is independent of the depreciable life is used here. -Syntax -AMORDEGRC(Cost;Date purchased;First period;Salvage;Period;Rate;Basis) - -Cost: the acquisition costs. - -Date purchased: the date of acquisition. - -First period: the end date of the first settlement period. - -Salvage: The salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. - -Period: the settlement period to be considered. - -Rate: the rate of depreciation. - -
+ +AMORDEGRC + +Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as degressive amortization. Unlike AMORLINC, a depreciation coefficient that is independent of the depreciable life is used here. +Syntax +AMORDEGRC(Cost;Date purchased;First period;Salvage;Period;Rate;Basis) + +Cost: the acquisition costs. + +Date purchased: the date of acquisition. + +First period: the end date of the first settlement period. + +Salvage: The salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. + +Period: the settlement period to be considered. + +Rate: the rate of depreciation. + +
AMORLINC function - -AMORLINC - -Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as linear amortization. If the capital asset is purchased during the settlement period, the proportional amount of depreciation is considered. -Syntax -AMORLINC(Cost;Date purchased;First period;Salvage;Period;Rate;Basis) - -Cost: the acquisition costs. - -Date purchased: the date of acquisition. - -First period: the end date of the first settlement period. - -Salvage: The salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. - -Period: the settlement period to be considered. - -Rate: the rate of depreciation. - -
+ +AMORLINC + +Calculates the amount of depreciation for a settlement period as linear amortization. If the capital asset is purchased during the settlement period, the proportional amount of depreciation is considered. +Syntax +AMORLINC(Cost;Date purchased;First period;Salvage;Period;Rate;Basis) + +Cost: the acquisition costs. + +Date purchased: the date of acquisition. + +First period: the end date of the first settlement period. + +Salvage: The salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. + +Period: the settlement period to be considered. + +Rate: the rate of depreciation. + +
ACCRINT function - -ACCRINT + +ACCRINT accrued interests - -Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of periodic payments. -Syntax -ACCRINT(Issue;First interest;Settlement;Rate;Par;Frequency;Basis) - -Issue: the issue date of the security. - -First interest: the first interest date of the security. - -Settlement: the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. - -Rate: the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) - -Par: the par value of the security. - -Frequency: number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). - -Example -A security is issued on 2.28.2001. First interest is set for 8.31.2001. The settlement date is 5.1.2001. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). The basis is the US method (0). How much interest has accrued? -=ACCRINT("2.28.2001"; "8.31.2001"; "5.1.2001"; 0.1; 1000; 2; 0) returns 16.94444. -
+ +Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of periodic payments. +Syntax +ACCRINT(Issue;First interest;Settlement;Rate;Par;Frequency;Basis) + +Issue: the issue date of the security. + +First interest: the first interest date of the security. + +Settlement: the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. + +Rate: the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) + +Par: the par value of the security. + +Frequency: number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +Example +A security is issued on 2.28.2001. First interest is set for 8.31.2001. The settlement date is 5.1.2001. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). The basis is the US method (0). How much interest has accrued? +=ACCRINT("2.28.2001"; "8.31.2001"; "5.1.2001"; 0.1; 1000; 2; 0) returns 16.94444. +
ACCRINTM function - -ACCRINTM - -Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of one-off payment at the settlement date. -Syntax -ACCRINTM(Issue;Settlement;Rate;Par;Basis) - -Issue: the issue date of the security. - -Settlement: the maturity date. - -Rate: the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate). - -Par: the par value of the security. - -Example -A security is issued on 4.1.2001. The maturity date is set for 6.15.2001. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. The basis of the daily/annual calculation is the daily balance (3). How much interest has accrued? -=ACCRINTM("4.1.2001"; "6.15.2001"; 0.1; 1000; 3) returns 20.54795. -
+ +ACCRINTM + +Calculates the accrued interest of a security in the case of one-off payment at the settlement date. +Syntax +ACCRINTM(Issue;Settlement;Rate;Par;Basis) + +Issue: the issue date of the security. + +Settlement: the maturity date. + +Rate: the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate). + +Par: the par value of the security. + +Example +A security is issued on 4.1.2001. The maturity date is set for 6.15.2001. The Rate is 0.1 or 10% and Par is 1000 currency units. The basis of the daily/annual calculation is the daily balance (3). How much interest has accrued? +=ACCRINTM("4.1.2001"; "6.15.2001"; 0.1; 1000; 3) returns 20.54795. +
RECEIVED function - -RECEIVED - -Calculates the amount received that is paid for a fixed-interest security at a given point in time. -Syntax -RECEIVED(Settlement;Maturity;Investment;Discount;Basis) - -Settlement: the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity: the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Investment: the purchase sum. - -Discount: the percentage discount on acquisition of the security. - -Example -Settlement date: February 15 1999, maturity date: May 15 1999, investment sum: 1000 currency units, discount: 5.75 per cent, basis: Daily balance/360 = 2. -The amount received on the maturity date is calculated as follows: -=RECEIVED("2.15.99";"5.15.99";1000; 0.0575;2) returns 1014.420266. -
+ +RECEIVED + +Calculates the amount received that is paid for a fixed-interest security at a given point in time. +Syntax +RECEIVED(Settlement;Maturity;Investment;Discount;Basis) + +Settlement: the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity: the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Investment: the purchase sum. + +Discount: the percentage discount on acquisition of the security. + +Example +Settlement date: February 15 1999, maturity date: May 15 1999, investment sum: 1000 currency units, discount: 5.75 per cent, basis: Daily balance/360 = 2. +The amount received on the maturity date is calculated as follows: +=RECEIVED("2.15.99";"5.15.99";1000; 0.0575;2) returns 1014.420266. +
-PV function -present values +PV function +present values calculating; present values - -PV -Returns the present value of an investment resulting from a series of regular payments. -Use this function to calculate the amount of money needed to be invested at a fixed rate today, to receive a specific amount, an annuity, over a specified number of periods. You can also determine how much money is to remain after the elapse of the period. Specify as well if the amount is to be paid out at the beginning or at the end of each period. -Enter these values either as numbers, expressions or references. If, for example, interest is paid annually at 8%, but you want to use month as your period, enter 8%/12 under Rate and %PRODUCTNAME Calc with automatically calculate the correct factor. -Syntax -PV(Rate; NPER; PMT; FV; Type) - -Rate defines the interest rate per period. - -NPER is the total number of periods (payment period). - -PMT is the regular payment made per period. - -FV (optional) defines the future value remaining after the final installment has been made. - -Type (optional) denotes due date for payments. Type = 1 means due at the beginning of a period and Type = 0 (default) means due at the end of the period. -Example -What is the present value of an investment, if 500 currency units are paid out monthly and the annual interest rate is 8%? The payment period is 48 months and 20,000 currency units are to remain at the end of the payment period. -PV(8%/12;48;500;20000) = -35,019.37 currency units. Under the named conditions, you must deposit 35,019.37 currency units today, if you want to receive 500 currency units per month for 48 months and have 20,000 currency units left over at the end. Cross-checking shows that 48 x 500 currency units + 20,000 currency units = 44,000 currency units. The difference between this amount and the 35,000 currency units deposited represents the interest paid. -If you enter references instead of these values into the formula, you can calculate any number of "If-then" scenarios. Please note: references to constants must be defined as absolute references. Examples of this type of application are found under the depreciation functions. - -PPMT, PMT, RATE, IPMT, FV, NPER. -
+ +PV +Returns the present value of an investment resulting from a series of regular payments. +Use this function to calculate the amount of money needed to be invested at a fixed rate today, to receive a specific amount, an annuity, over a specified number of periods. You can also determine how much money is to remain after the elapse of the period. Specify as well if the amount is to be paid out at the beginning or at the end of each period. +Enter these values either as numbers, expressions or references. If, for example, interest is paid annually at 8%, but you want to use month as your period, enter 8%/12 under Rate and %PRODUCTNAME Calc with automatically calculate the correct factor. +Syntax +PV(Rate; NPER; PMT; FV; Type) + +Rate defines the interest rate per period. + +NPER is the total number of periods (payment period). + +PMT is the regular payment made per period. + +FV (optional) defines the future value remaining after the final installment has been made. + +Type (optional) denotes due date for payments. Type = 1 means due at the beginning of a period and Type = 0 (default) means due at the end of the period. +Example +What is the present value of an investment, if 500 currency units are paid out monthly and the annual interest rate is 8%? The payment period is 48 months and 20,000 currency units are to remain at the end of the payment period. +PV(8%/12;48;500;20000) = -35,019.37 currency units. Under the named conditions, you must deposit 35,019.37 currency units today, if you want to receive 500 currency units per month for 48 months and have 20,000 currency units left over at the end. Cross-checking shows that 48 x 500 currency units + 20,000 currency units = 44,000 currency units. The difference between this amount and the 35,000 currency units deposited represents the interest paid. +If you enter references instead of these values into the formula, you can calculate any number of "If-then" scenarios. Please note: references to constants must be defined as absolute references. Examples of this type of application are found under the depreciation functions. + +PPMT, PMT, RATE, IPMT, FV, NPER. +
-calculating; depreciations -SYD function -depreciations; arithmetic declining +calculating; depreciations +SYD function +depreciations; arithmetic declining arithmetic declining depreciations - -SYD -Returns the arithmetic-declining depreciation rate. -Use this function to calculate the depreciation amount for one period of the total depreciation span of an object. Arithmetic declining depreciation reduces the depreciation amount from period to period by a fixed sum. -Syntax -SYD(Cost;Salvage;Life;Period) - -Cost is the initial cost of an asset. - -Salvage is the value of an asset after depreciation. - -Life is the period fixing the time span over which an asset is depreciated. - -Period defines the period for which the depreciation is to be calculated. -Example -A video system initially costing 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated annually for the next 5 years. The salvage value is to be 10,000 currency units. You want to calculate depreciation for the first year. -SYD(50000;10000;5;1)=13,333.33 currency units. The depreciation amount for the first year is 13,333.33 currency units. -To have an overview of depreciation rates per period, it is best to define a depreciation table. By entering the different depreciation formulas available in %PRODUCTNAME Calc next to each other, you can see which depreciation form is the most appropriate. Enter the table as follows: - - - - - - -A - - - - -B - - - - -C - - - - -D - - - - -E - - - - - -1 - - -Initial Cost - - -Salvage Value - - -Useful Life - - -Time Period - - -Deprec. SYD - - - - -2 - - -50,000 currency units - - -10,000 currency units - - -5 - - -1 - - -13,333.33 currency units - - - - -3 - - - - - - - - -2 - - -10,666.67 currency units - - - - -4 - - - - - - - - -3 - - -8,000.00 currency units - - - - -5 - - - - - - - - -4 - - -5,333.33 currency units - - - - -6 - - - - - - - - -5 - - -2,666.67 currency units - - - - -7 - - - - - - - - -6 - - -0.00 currency units - - - - -8 - - - - - - - - -7 - - -- - - - - -9 - - - - - - - - -8 - - -- - - - - -10 - - - - - - - - -9 - - -- - - - - -11 - - - - - - - - -10 - - -- - - - - -12 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -13 - - ->0 - - - - - - -Total - - -40,000.00 currency units - - -
- -The formula in E2 is as follows: -=SYD($A$2;$B$2;$C$2;D2) -This formula is duplicated in column E down to E11 (select E2, then drag down the lower right corner with the mouse). -Cell E13 contains the formula used to check the total of the depreciation amounts. It uses the SUMIF function as the negative values in E8:E11 must not be considered. The condition >0 is contained in cell A13. The formula in E13 is as follows: -=SUMIF(E2:E11;A13) -Now view the depreciation for a 10 year period, or at a salvage value of 1 currency unit, or enter a different initial cost, and so on. - -DDB, SLN, VDB. -
+ +SYD +Returns the arithmetic-declining depreciation rate. +Use this function to calculate the depreciation amount for one period of the total depreciation span of an object. Arithmetic declining depreciation reduces the depreciation amount from period to period by a fixed sum. +Syntax +SYD(Cost;Salvage;Life;Period) + +Cost is the initial cost of an asset. + +Salvage is the value of an asset after depreciation. + +Life is the period fixing the time span over which an asset is depreciated. + +Period defines the period for which the depreciation is to be calculated. +Example +A video system initially costing 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated annually for the next 5 years. The salvage value is to be 10,000 currency units. You want to calculate depreciation for the first year. +SYD(50000;10000;5;1)=13,333.33 currency units. The depreciation amount for the first year is 13,333.33 currency units. +To have an overview of depreciation rates per period, it is best to define a depreciation table. By entering the different depreciation formulas available in %PRODUCTNAME Calc next to each other, you can see which depreciation form is the most appropriate. Enter the table as follows: + + + + + + +A + + + + +B + + + + +C + + + + +D + + + + +E + + + + + +1 + + +Initial Cost + + +Salvage Value + + +Useful Life + + +Time Period + + +Deprec. SYD + + + + +2 + + +50,000 currency units + + +10,000 currency units + + +5 + + +1 + + +13,333.33 currency units + + + + +3 + + + + + + + + +2 + + +10,666.67 currency units + + + + +4 + + + + + + + + +3 + + +8,000.00 currency units + + + + +5 + + + + + + + + +4 + + +5,333.33 currency units + + + + +6 + + + + + + + + +5 + + +2,666.67 currency units + + + + +7 + + + + + + + + +6 + + +0.00 currency units + + + + +8 + + + + + + + + +7 + + +- + + + + +9 + + + + + + + + +8 + + +- + + + + +10 + + + + + + + + +9 + + +- + + + + +11 + + + + + + + + +10 + + +- + + + + +12 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +13 + + +>0 + + + + + + +Total + + +40,000.00 currency units + + +
+ +The formula in E2 is as follows: +=SYD($A$2;$B$2;$C$2;D2) +This formula is duplicated in column E down to E11 (select E2, then drag down the lower right corner with the mouse). +Cell E13 contains the formula used to check the total of the depreciation amounts. It uses the SUMIF function as the negative values in E8:E11 must not be considered. The condition >0 is contained in cell A13. The formula in E13 is as follows: +=SUMIF(E2:E11;A13) +Now view the depreciation for a 10 year period, or at a salvage value of 1 currency unit, or enter a different initial cost, and so on. + +DDB, SLN, VDB. +
DISC function - -DISC - -Calculates the allowance (discount) of a security as a percentage. -Syntax -DISC(Settlement;Maturity;Price;Redemption;Basis) - -Settlement: the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity: the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Price: The price of the security per 100 currency units of par value. - -Redemption: the redemption value of the security per 100 currency units of par value. - -Example -A security is purchased on 1.25.2001; the maturity date is 11.15.2001. The price (purchase price) is 97, the redemption value is 100. Using daily balance calculation (basis 3) how high is the settlement (discount)? -=DISC("1.25.2001"; "11.15.2001"; 97; 100; 3) returns 0.03840 or 3.84 per cent. -
+ +DISC + +Calculates the allowance (discount) of a security as a percentage. +Syntax +DISC(Settlement;Maturity;Price;Redemption;Basis) + +Settlement: the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity: the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Price: The price of the security per 100 currency units of par value. + +Redemption: the redemption value of the security per 100 currency units of par value. + +Example +A security is purchased on 1.25.2001; the maturity date is 11.15.2001. The price (purchase price) is 97, the redemption value is 100. Using daily balance calculation (basis 3) how high is the settlement (discount)? +=DISC("1.25.2001"; "11.15.2001"; 97; 100; 3) returns 0.03840 or 3.84 per cent. +
DURATION_ADD function - -DURATION_ADD - -Calculates the duration of a fixed interest security in years. -Syntax -DURATION_ADD(Settlement;Maturity;Coupon;Yield;Frequency;Basis) - -Settlement: the date of purchase of the security. - -Maturity: the date on which the security matures (expires). - -Coupon: the annual coupon interest rate (nominal rate of interest) - -Yield: the annual yield of the security. - -Frequency: number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). - -Example -A security is purchased on 1.1.2001; the maturity date is 1.1.2006. The Coupon rate of interest is 8%. The yield is 9.0%. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how long is the duration? -=DURATION_ADD("1.1.2001"; "1.1.2006"; 0.08; 0.09; 2; 3) -
+ +DURATION_ADD + +Calculates the duration of a fixed interest security in years. +Syntax +DURATION_ADD(Settlement;Maturity;Coupon;Yield;Frequency;Basis) + +Settlement: the date of purchase of the security. + +Maturity: the date on which the security matures (expires). + +Coupon: the annual coupon interest rate (nominal rate of interest) + +Yield: the annual yield of the security. + +Frequency: number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + +Example +A security is purchased on 1.1.2001; the maturity date is 1.1.2006. The Coupon rate of interest is 8%. The yield is 9.0%. Interest is paid half-yearly (frequency is 2). Using daily balance interest calculation (basis 3) how long is the duration? +=DURATION_ADD("1.1.2001"; "1.1.2006"; 0.08; 0.09; 2; 3) +
-annual net interest rates -calculating; annual net interest rates +annual net interest rates +calculating; annual net interest rates EFFECTIVE function - -EFFECTIVE -Returns the net annual interest rate for a nominal interest rate. -Nominal interest refers to the amount of interest due at the end of a calculation period. Effective interest increases with the number of payments made. In other words, interest is often paid in installments (for example, monthly or quarterly) before the end of the calculation period. -Syntax -EFFECTIVE(NOM;P) - -NOM is the nominal interest. - -P is the number of interest payment periods per year. -Example -If the annual nominal interest rate is 9.75% and four interest calculation periods are defined, what is the actual interest rate (effective rate)? -EFFECTIVE(9.75%;4) = 10.11% The annual effective rate is therefore 10.11%. - -NOMINAL. -
+ +EFFECTIVE +Returns the net annual interest rate for a nominal interest rate. +Nominal interest refers to the amount of interest due at the end of a calculation period. Effective interest increases with the number of payments made. In other words, interest is often paid in installments (for example, monthly or quarterly) before the end of the calculation period. +Syntax +EFFECTIVE(NOM;P) + +NOM is the nominal interest. + +P is the number of interest payment periods per year. +Example +If the annual nominal interest rate is 9.75% and four interest calculation periods are defined, what is the actual interest rate (effective rate)? +EFFECTIVE(9.75%;4) = 10.11% The annual effective rate is therefore 10.11%. + +NOMINAL. +
-effective rates +effective rates EFFECT_ADD function - -EFFECT_ADD - -Calculates the effective annual rate of interest on the basis of the nominal interest rate and the number of interest payments per annum. -Syntax -EFFECT_ADD(Nominal rate;Npery) -Nominal rate: the annual nominal rate of interest. -Npery: the number of interest payments per year. -Example -What is the effective annual rate of interest for a 5.25% nominal rate and quarterly payment. -=EFFECT_ADD(0.0525; 4) returns 0.053543 or 5.3534%. -
+ +EFFECT_ADD + +Calculates the effective annual rate of interest on the basis of the nominal interest rate and the number of interest payments per annum. +Syntax +EFFECT_ADD(Nominal rate;Npery) +Nominal rate: the annual nominal rate of interest. +Npery: the number of interest payments per year. +Example +What is the effective annual rate of interest for a 5.25% nominal rate and quarterly payment. +=EFFECT_ADD(0.0525; 4) returns 0.053543 or 5.3534%. +
-calculating; arithmetic degressive depreciations -arithmetic degressive depreciations +calculating; arithmetic degressive depreciations +arithmetic degressive depreciations DDB function - -DDB -Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the arithmetic-declining method. -Use this form of depreciation if you require a higher initial depreciation value as opposed to linear depreciation. The depreciation value gets less with each period and is usually used for assets whose value loss is higher shortly after purchase (for example, vehicles, computers). Please note that the book value will never reach zero under this calculation type. -Syntax -DDB(Cost;Salvage;Life;Period;Factor) - -Cost fixes the initial cost of an asset. - -Salvage fixes the value of an asset at the end of its life. - -Life is the number of periods defining how long the asset is to be used. - -Period defines the length of the period. The length must be entered in the same time unit as life. - -Factor (optional) is the factor by which depreciation decreases. If a value is not entered, the default is factor 2. -Example -A computer system with an initial cost of 75,000 currency units is to be depreciated monthly over 5 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 1 currency unit. The factor is 2. -DDB(75000;1;60;12;2) = 1,721.81 currency units. Therefore, the double-declining depreciation during the first month after purchase is 1,721.81 currency units. - -SYD, SLN, VDB. -
+ +DDB +Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the arithmetic-declining method. +Use this form of depreciation if you require a higher initial depreciation value as opposed to linear depreciation. The depreciation value gets less with each period and is usually used for assets whose value loss is higher shortly after purchase (for example, vehicles, computers). Please note that the book value will never reach zero under this calculation type. +Syntax +DDB(Cost;Salvage;Life;Period;Factor) + +Cost fixes the initial cost of an asset. + +Salvage fixes the value of an asset at the end of its life. + +Life is the number of periods defining how long the asset is to be used. + +Period defines the length of the period. The length must be entered in the same time unit as life. + +Factor (optional) is the factor by which depreciation decreases. If a value is not entered, the default is factor 2. +Example +A computer system with an initial cost of 75,000 currency units is to be depreciated monthly over 5 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 1 currency unit. The factor is 2. +DDB(75000;1;60;12;2) = 1,721.81 currency units. Therefore, the double-declining depreciation during the first month after purchase is 1,721.81 currency units. + +SYD, SLN, VDB. +
-calculating; geometric-degressive depreciations -geometric-degressive depreciations +calculating; geometric-degressive depreciations +geometric-degressive depreciations DB function - -DB -Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the double-declining balance method. -This form of depreciation is used if you want to get a higher depreciation value at the beginning of the depreciation (as opposed to linear depreciation). The depreciation value is reduced with every depreciation period by the depreciation already deducted from the initial cost. -Syntax -DB(Cost;Salvage;Life;Period;Month) - -Cost is the initial cost of an asset. - -Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. - -Life Life defines the period over which an asset is depreciated. - -Period is the length of each period. The length must be entered in the same date unit as the depreciation period. - -Month (optional) denotes the number of months for the first year of depreciation. If an entry is not defined, 12 is used as the default. -Example -A computer system with an initial cost of 25,000 currency units is to be depreciated over a three year period. The salvage value is to be 1,000 currency units. One period is 30 days. -DB(25000;1000;36;1;6) = 1,075.00 currency units -The fixed-declining depreciation of the computer system is 1,075.00 currency units. - -DDB, VDB, SYD. -
+ +DB +Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the double-declining balance method. +This form of depreciation is used if you want to get a higher depreciation value at the beginning of the depreciation (as opposed to linear depreciation). The depreciation value is reduced with every depreciation period by the depreciation already deducted from the initial cost. +Syntax +DB(Cost;Salvage;Life;Period;Month) + +Cost is the initial cost of an asset. + +Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. + +Life Life defines the period over which an asset is depreciated. + +Period is the length of each period. The length must be entered in the same date unit as the depreciation period. + +Month (optional) denotes the number of months for the first year of depreciation. If an entry is not defined, 12 is used as the default. +Example +A computer system with an initial cost of 25,000 currency units is to be depreciated over a three year period. The salvage value is to be 1,000 currency units. One period is 30 days. +DB(25000;1000;36;1;6) = 1,075.00 currency units +The fixed-declining depreciation of the computer system is 1,075.00 currency units. + +DDB, VDB, SYD. +
-IRR function -calculating; internal rates +IRR function +calculating; internal rates internal rates - -IRR -Calculates the internal rate of return for an investment. The values represent cash flow values at regular intervals, at least one value must be negative (payments), and at least one value must be positive (income). -Syntax -IRR(Values;Guess) - -Values represents an array containing the values. - -Guess (optional) is the estimated value. An iterative method is used to calculate the internal rate of return. If you can provide only few values, you should provide an initial guess to enable the iteration. -Example -Under the assumption that cell contents are A1=-10000, A2=3500, A3=7600 and A4=1000, the formula =IRR(A1:A4) gives a result of 80.24%. - -NPV, RATE. -
+ +IRR +Calculates the internal rate of return for an investment. The values represent cash flow values at regular intervals, at least one value must be negative (payments), and at least one value must be positive (income). +Syntax +IRR(Values;Guess) + +Values represents an array containing the values. + +Guess (optional) is the estimated value. An iterative method is used to calculate the internal rate of return. If you can provide only few values, you should provide an initial guess to enable the iteration. +Example +Under the assumption that cell contents are A1=-10000, A2=3500, A3=7600 and A4=1000, the formula =IRR(A1:A4) gives a result of 80.24%. + +NPV, RATE. +
-calculating; interests for unchanged amortization installments -interests for unchanged amortization installments +calculating; interests for unchanged amortization installments +interests for unchanged amortization installments ISPMT function - -ISPMT -Calculates the level of interest for unchanged amortization installments. -Syntax -ISPMT(Rate; Period; Total_periods; Invest) - -Rate sets the periodic interest rate. - -Period is the number of installments for calculation of interest. - -Total_periods is the total number of installment periods. - -Invest is the amount of the investment. -Example -For a credit amount of 120,000 currency units with a two-year term and monthly installments, at a yearly interest rate of 12% the level of interest after 1.5 years is required. -ISPMT(1%;18;24;120000) = -300 currency units. The monthly interest after 1.5 years amounts to 300 currency units. + +ISPMT +Calculates the level of interest for unchanged amortization installments. +Syntax +ISPMT(Rate; Period; Total_periods; Invest) + +Rate sets the periodic interest rate. + +Period is the number of installments for calculation of interest. + +Total_periods is the total number of installment periods. + +Invest is the amount of the investment. +Example +For a credit amount of 120,000 currency units with a two-year term and monthly installments, at a yearly interest rate of 12% the level of interest after 1.5 years is required. +ISPMT(1%;18;24;120000) = -300 currency units. The monthly interest after 1.5 years amounts to 300 currency units.
- -Financial Functions Part Two -Financial Functions Part Three - - + +Financial Functions Part Two +Financial Functions Part Three + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp index 658fa80a8e..34fb2d06a3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Statistics Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Statistics Functions +/text/scalc/01/04060108.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -statistics; functions -Function Wizard; statistics +statistics; functions +Function Wizard; statistics functions; statistics - -Statistics Functions + +Statistics Functions This category contains the Statistics functions. - -
- -
-Some of the examples use the following data table: - - - - - -C - - -D - - - - -2 - - -x value - - -y value - - - - -3 - - --5 - - --3 - - - - -4 - - --2 - - -0 - - - - -5 - - --1 - - -1 - - - - -6 - - -0 - - -3 - - - - -7 - - -2 - - -4 - - - - -8 - - -4 - - -6 - - - - -9 - - -6 - - -8 - - -
- -The statistical functions are described in the following subsections. - - - - - -Statistical Functions in the Analysis-AddIn - - + +
+ +
+Some of the examples use the following data table: + + + + + +C + + +D + + + + +2 + + +x value + + +y value + + + + +3 + + +-5 + + +-3 + + + + +4 + + +-2 + + +0 + + + + +5 + + +-1 + + +1 + + + + +6 + + +0 + + +3 + + + + +7 + + +2 + + +4 + + + + +8 + + +4 + + +6 + + + + +9 + + +6 + + +8 + + +
+ +The statistical functions are described in the following subsections. + + + + + +Statistical Functions in the Analysis-AddIn + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp index 8e532c9168..4cf259f81c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Spreadsheet Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: brushed up this doc due to #i29327# -dedr: reviewed -UFI: added HYPERLINK function #i27972#; dedr. reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Spreadsheet Functions +/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: brushed up this doc due to #i29327# +dedr: reviewed +UFI: added HYPERLINK function #i27972#; dedr. reviewed + + -spreadsheets; functions -Function Wizard; spreadsheets +spreadsheets; functions +Function Wizard; spreadsheets functions; spreadsheets - -Spreadsheet Functions + +Spreadsheet Functions This section contains descriptions of the Spreadsheet functions together with an example. - + - +
ADDRESS function - -ADDRESS -Returns a cell address (reference) as text, according to the specified row and column numbers. Optionally, you can determine whether the address is interpreted as an absolute address (for example, $A$1) or as a relative address (as A1) or in a mixed form (A$1 or $A1). You can also specify the name of the sheet. -Syntax -ADDRESS(row; column; abs;sheet) - -row represents the row number for the cell reference - -column represents the column number for the cell reference (the number, not the letter) - -abs determines the type of reference: -1 or empty: absolute ($A$1) -2: row reference type is absolute; column reference is relative (A$1) -3: row (relative); column (absolute) ($A1) -4: relative (A1) - -sheet represents the name of the sheet. It must be placed in double quotes. -Example: -ADDRESS(1; 1; 2; "Sheet2") returns the following: Sheet2.A$1 -If the cell A1 in sheet 2 contains the value -6, you can refer indirectly to the referenced cell using a function in B2 by entering =ABS(INDIRECT(B2)). The result is the absolute value of the cell reference specified in B2, which in this case is 6. - -COLUMN, ROW. -
+ +ADDRESS +Returns a cell address (reference) as text, according to the specified row and column numbers. Optionally, you can determine whether the address is interpreted as an absolute address (for example, $A$1) or as a relative address (as A1) or in a mixed form (A$1 or $A1). You can also specify the name of the sheet. +Syntax +ADDRESS(row; column; abs;sheet) + +row represents the row number for the cell reference + +column represents the column number for the cell reference (the number, not the letter) + +abs determines the type of reference: +1 or empty: absolute ($A$1) +2: row reference type is absolute; column reference is relative (A$1) +3: row (relative); column (absolute) ($A1) +4: relative (A1) + +sheet represents the name of the sheet. It must be placed in double quotes. +Example: +ADDRESS(1; 1; 2; "Sheet2") returns the following: Sheet2.A$1 +If the cell A1 in sheet 2 contains the value -6, you can refer indirectly to the referenced cell using a function in B2 by entering =ABS(INDIRECT(B2)). The result is the absolute value of the cell reference specified in B2, which in this case is 6. + +COLUMN, ROW. +
AREAS function - -AREAS -Returns the number of individual ranges that belong to a multiple range. A range can consist of contiguous cells or a single cell. -Syntax -AREAS(Reference) -Reference represents the reference to a cell or cell range. -Example -=AREAS(A1:B3;F2;G1) returns 3, as it is a reference to three cells and/or areas. -=AREAS(All) returns 1 if you have defined an area named All under Data - Define Range. - -ADDRESS, COLUMN, COLUMNS, INDEX, ROW, ROWS. -
+ +AREAS +Returns the number of individual ranges that belong to a multiple range. A range can consist of contiguous cells or a single cell. +Syntax +AREAS(Reference) +Reference represents the reference to a cell or cell range. +Example +=AREAS(A1:B3;F2;G1) returns 3, as it is a reference to three cells and/or areas. +=AREAS(All) returns 1 if you have defined an area named All under Data - Define Range. + +ADDRESS, COLUMN, COLUMNS, INDEX, ROW, ROWS. +
DDE function - -DDE -Returns the result of a DDE-based link. If the contents of the linked range or section changes, the returned value will also change. You must reload the spreadsheet or choose Edit - Links to see the updated links. Cross-platform links, for example from a%PRODUCTNAME installation running on a Windows machine to a document created on a Linux machine, are not allowed. -Syntax -DDE(server;file;range;mode) - -Server is the name of a server application. %PRODUCTNAME applications have the server name "Soffice". - -File is the complete file name, including path specification. - -Range is the area containing the data to be evaluated. - -Mode is an optional parameter that controls the method by which the DDE server converts its data into numbers. - - - - -Mode - - - - -Effect - - - - - -0 or missing - - -Number format from the "Default" cell style - - - - -1 - - -Data are always interpreted in the standard format for US English - - - - -2 - - -Data are retrieved as text; no conversion to numbers - - -
- -Example -=DDE("soffice";"c:\office\document\data1.sxc";"sheet1.A1") reads the contents of cell A1 in sheet1 of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc spreadsheet data1.sxc. -=DDE("soffice";"c:\office\document\motto.sxw";"Today's motto") returns a motto in the cell containing this formula. First, you must enter a line in the motto.sxw document containing the motto text and define it as the first line of a section named Today's Motto (in %PRODUCTNAME Writer under Insert - Section). If the motto is modified (and saved) in the %PRODUCTNAME Writer document, the motto is updated in all %PRODUCTNAME Calc cells in which this DDE link is defined. -
+ +DDE +Returns the result of a DDE-based link. If the contents of the linked range or section changes, the returned value will also change. You must reload the spreadsheet or choose Edit - Links to see the updated links. Cross-platform links, for example from a%PRODUCTNAME installation running on a Windows machine to a document created on a Linux machine, are not allowed. +Syntax +DDE(server;file;range;mode) + +Server is the name of a server application. %PRODUCTNAME applications have the server name "Soffice". + +File is the complete file name, including path specification. + +Range is the area containing the data to be evaluated. + +Mode is an optional parameter that controls the method by which the DDE server converts its data into numbers. + + + + +Mode + + + + +Effect + + + + + +0 or missing + + +Number format from the "Default" cell style + + + + +1 + + +Data are always interpreted in the standard format for US English + + + + +2 + + +Data are retrieved as text; no conversion to numbers + + +
+ +Example +=DDE("soffice";"c:\office\document\data1.sxc";"sheet1.A1") reads the contents of cell A1 in sheet1 of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc spreadsheet data1.sxc. +=DDE("soffice";"c:\office\document\motto.sxw";"Today's motto") returns a motto in the cell containing this formula. First, you must enter a line in the motto.sxw document containing the motto text and define it as the first line of a section named Today's Motto (in %PRODUCTNAME Writer under Insert - Section). If the motto is modified (and saved) in the %PRODUCTNAME Writer document, the motto is updated in all %PRODUCTNAME Calc cells in which this DDE link is defined. +
ERRORTYPE function - -ERRORTYPE -Returns the number corresponding to an error value occurring in a different cell. With the aid of this number, you can generate an error message text. - -The Status Bar displays the predefined error code from %PRODUCTNAME if you click the cell containing the error. -Syntax -ERRORTYPE(Reference) - -Reference contains the address of the cell in which the error occurs. -Example -If cell A1 displays Err:518, the function =ERRORTYPE(A1) returns the number 518. - -ISREF, ISERR, ISERROR, ISFORMULA. ISNONTEXT, ISBLANK, ISLOGICAL, ISNA, ISTEXT, ISNUMBER. -
+ +ERRORTYPE +Returns the number corresponding to an error value occurring in a different cell. With the aid of this number, you can generate an error message text. + +The Status Bar displays the predefined error code from %PRODUCTNAME if you click the cell containing the error. +Syntax +ERRORTYPE(Reference) + +Reference contains the address of the cell in which the error occurs. +Example +If cell A1 displays Err:518, the function =ERRORTYPE(A1) returns the number 518. + +ISREF, ISERR, ISERROR, ISFORMULA. ISNONTEXT, ISBLANK, ISLOGICAL, ISNA, ISTEXT, ISNUMBER. +
INDEX function - -INDEX -INDEX returns the content of a cell, specified by row and column number or an optional range name. -Syntax -INDEX(reference;row;column;range) - -reference is a cell reference, entered either directly or by specifying a range name. If the reference consists of multiple ranges, you must enclose the reference or range name in parentheses. - -row (optional) represents the row number of the reference range, for which to return a value. - -column (optional) represents the column number of the reference range, for which to return a value. - -range (optional) represents the index of the subrange if referring to a multiple range. -Example -=INDEX(Prices;4;1) returns the value from row 4 and column 1 of the database range defined in Data - Define as Prices. -=INDEX(SumX;4;1) returns the value from the range SumX in row 4 and column 1 as defined in Insert - Names - Define. -=INDEX((multi);4;1) indicates the value contained in row 4 and column 1 of the (multiple) range, which you named under Insert - Names - Set as multi. The multiple range may consist of several rectangular ranges, each with a row 4 and column 1. If you now want to call the second block of this multiple range enter the number 2 as the range parameter. -=INDEX(A1:B6;1;1) indicates the value in the upper-left of the A1:B6 range. - -VLOOKUP, MATCH, LOOKUP, CHOOSE, HLOOKUP. -
+ +INDEX +INDEX returns the content of a cell, specified by row and column number or an optional range name. +Syntax +INDEX(reference;row;column;range) + +reference is a cell reference, entered either directly or by specifying a range name. If the reference consists of multiple ranges, you must enclose the reference or range name in parentheses. + +row (optional) represents the row number of the reference range, for which to return a value. + +column (optional) represents the column number of the reference range, for which to return a value. + +range (optional) represents the index of the subrange if referring to a multiple range. +Example +=INDEX(Prices;4;1) returns the value from row 4 and column 1 of the database range defined in Data - Define as Prices. +=INDEX(SumX;4;1) returns the value from the range SumX in row 4 and column 1 as defined in Insert - Names - Define. +=INDEX((multi);4;1) indicates the value contained in row 4 and column 1 of the (multiple) range, which you named under Insert - Names - Set as multi. The multiple range may consist of several rectangular ranges, each with a row 4 and column 1. If you now want to call the second block of this multiple range enter the number 2 as the range parameter. +=INDEX(A1:B6;1;1) indicates the value in the upper-left of the A1:B6 range. + +VLOOKUP, MATCH, LOOKUP, CHOOSE, HLOOKUP. +
INDIRECT function - -INDIRECT -Returns the reference specified by a text string. This function can also be used to return the area of a corresponding string. -Syntax -INDIRECT(ref) - -ref represents a reference to a cell or an area (in text form) for which to return the contents. -Example -=INDIRECT(A1) equals 100 if A1 contains C108 as a reference and cell C108 contains a value of 100. -=SUM(INDIRECT("a1:" & ADDRESS(1;3))) totals the cells in the area of A1 up to the cell, whose address is defined by row 1 and column 3. Therefore, area A1:C1 is totaled. - -OFFSET. -
+ +INDIRECT +Returns the reference specified by a text string. This function can also be used to return the area of a corresponding string. +Syntax +INDIRECT(ref) + +ref represents a reference to a cell or an area (in text form) for which to return the contents. +Example +=INDIRECT(A1) equals 100 if A1 contains C108 as a reference and cell C108 contains a value of 100. +=SUM(INDIRECT("a1:" & ADDRESS(1;3))) totals the cells in the area of A1 up to the cell, whose address is defined by row 1 and column 3. Therefore, area A1:C1 is totaled. + +OFFSET. +
COLUMN function - -COLUMN -Returns the column number of a cell reference. If the reference is a cell the column number of the cell is returned; if the parameter is a cell area, the corresponding column numbers are returned in a single-row array if the formula is entered as an array formula. If the COLUMN function with an area reference parameter is not used for an array formula, only the column number of the first cell within the area is determined. -Syntax -COLUMN(reference) - -Reference is the reference to a cell or cell area whose first column number is to be found. -If no reference is entered, the column number of the cell in which the formula is entered is found. %PRODUCTNAME Calc automatically sets the reference to the current cell. -Example -=COLUMN(A1) equals 1. Column A is the first column in the table. -=COLUMN(C3:E3) equals 3. Column C is the third column in the table. -=COLUMN(D3:G10) returns 4 because column D is the fourth column in the table and the COLUMN function is not used as an array formula. (In this case, the first value of the array is always used as the result.) -{=COLUMN(B2:B7)} and =COLUMN(B2:B7) both return 2 because the reference only contains column B as the second column in the table. Because single-column areas have only one column number, it does not make a difference whether or not the formula is used as an array formula. -=COLUMN() returns 3 if the formula was entered in column C. -{=COLUMN(Rabbit)} returns the single-row array (3, 4) if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3). - -COLUMNS, ROWS. -
+ +COLUMN +Returns the column number of a cell reference. If the reference is a cell the column number of the cell is returned; if the parameter is a cell area, the corresponding column numbers are returned in a single-row array if the formula is entered as an array formula. If the COLUMN function with an area reference parameter is not used for an array formula, only the column number of the first cell within the area is determined. +Syntax +COLUMN(reference) + +Reference is the reference to a cell or cell area whose first column number is to be found. +If no reference is entered, the column number of the cell in which the formula is entered is found. %PRODUCTNAME Calc automatically sets the reference to the current cell. +Example +=COLUMN(A1) equals 1. Column A is the first column in the table. +=COLUMN(C3:E3) equals 3. Column C is the third column in the table. +=COLUMN(D3:G10) returns 4 because column D is the fourth column in the table and the COLUMN function is not used as an array formula. (In this case, the first value of the array is always used as the result.) +{=COLUMN(B2:B7)} and =COLUMN(B2:B7) both return 2 because the reference only contains column B as the second column in the table. Because single-column areas have only one column number, it does not make a difference whether or not the formula is used as an array formula. +=COLUMN() returns 3 if the formula was entered in column C. +{=COLUMN(Rabbit)} returns the single-row array (3, 4) if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3). + +COLUMNS, ROWS. +
COLUMNS function - -COLUMNS -Returns the number of columns in the given reference. -Syntax -COLUMNS(array) - -array is the reference to a cell range whose total number of columns is to be found. The argument can also be a single cell. -Example -=Columns(B5) returns 1 because a cell only contains one column. -=COLUMNS(A1:C5) equals 3. The reference comprises three columns. -=COLUMNS(Rabbit) returns 2 if "Rabbit" is the named range (C1:D3). - -COLUMN, ROWS. -
+ +COLUMNS +Returns the number of columns in the given reference. +Syntax +COLUMNS(array) + +array is the reference to a cell range whose total number of columns is to be found. The argument can also be a single cell. +Example +=Columns(B5) returns 1 because a cell only contains one column. +=COLUMNS(A1:C5) equals 3. The reference comprises three columns. +=COLUMNS(Rabbit) returns 2 if "Rabbit" is the named range (C1:D3). + +COLUMN, ROWS. +
-vertical search function +vertical search function VLOOKUP function - -VLOOKUP -Vertical search with reference to adjacent cells to the right. This function checks if a specific value is contained in the first column of an array. The function then returns the value to the same line of a specific array column named by index. - -Syntax -=VLOOKUP(Search criterion;array;index;sort order) - -Search criterion is the value searched for in the first column of the array. - -array is the reference, which is to comprise at least two columns. - -index is the number of the column in the array that contains the value to be returned. The first column has the number 1. - -Sort order is an optional parameter that indicates whether the first column in the array is sorted in ascending order. Enter the Boolean value FALSE if the first column is not sorted in ascending order. Sorted columns can be searched much faster and the function always returns a value, even if the search value was not matched exactly, if it is between the lowest and highest value of the sorted list. In unsorted lists, the search value must be matched exactly. Otherwise the function will return this message: Error: Value Not Available. -Example -You want to enter the number of a dish on the menu in cell A1, and the name of the dish is to appear as text in the neighboring cell (B1) immediately. The Number to Name assignment is contained in the D1:E100 array. D1 contains 100, E1 contains the name Vegetable Soup, and so forth, for 100 menu items. The numbers in column D are sorted in ascending order; thus, the optional Sort order parameter is not necessary. -Enter the following formula in B1: -=VLOOKUP(A1; D1:E100; 2) -As soon as you enter a number in A1 B1 will show the corresponding text contained in the second column of reference D1:E100. Entering a nonexistent number displays the text with the next number down. To prevent this, enter FALSE as the last parameter in the formula so that an error message is generated when a nonexistent number is entered. - -INDEX, HLOOKUP, LOOKUP, MATCH. -
+ +VLOOKUP +Vertical search with reference to adjacent cells to the right. This function checks if a specific value is contained in the first column of an array. The function then returns the value to the same line of a specific array column named by index. + +Syntax +=VLOOKUP(Search criterion;array;index;sort order) + +Search criterion is the value searched for in the first column of the array. + +array is the reference, which is to comprise at least two columns. + +index is the number of the column in the array that contains the value to be returned. The first column has the number 1. + +Sort order is an optional parameter that indicates whether the first column in the array is sorted in ascending order. Enter the Boolean value FALSE if the first column is not sorted in ascending order. Sorted columns can be searched much faster and the function always returns a value, even if the search value was not matched exactly, if it is between the lowest and highest value of the sorted list. In unsorted lists, the search value must be matched exactly. Otherwise the function will return this message: Error: Value Not Available. +Example +You want to enter the number of a dish on the menu in cell A1, and the name of the dish is to appear as text in the neighboring cell (B1) immediately. The Number to Name assignment is contained in the D1:E100 array. D1 contains 100, E1 contains the name Vegetable Soup, and so forth, for 100 menu items. The numbers in column D are sorted in ascending order; thus, the optional Sort order parameter is not necessary. +Enter the following formula in B1: +=VLOOKUP(A1; D1:E100; 2) +As soon as you enter a number in A1 B1 will show the corresponding text contained in the second column of reference D1:E100. Entering a nonexistent number displays the text with the next number down. To prevent this, enter FALSE as the last parameter in the formula so that an error message is generated when a nonexistent number is entered. + +INDEX, HLOOKUP, LOOKUP, MATCH. +
-sheet numbers; looking up +sheet numbers; looking up SHEET function - -SHEET -Returns the sheet number of a reference or a string representing a sheet name. If you do not enter any parameters, the result is the sheet number of the spreadsheet containing the formula. -Syntax -SHEET(Reference) - -Reference is optional and is the reference to a cell, an area, or a sheet name string. -Example -=SHEET(Sheet2.A1) returns 2 if Sheet2 is the second sheet in the spreadsheet document. -
+ +SHEET +Returns the sheet number of a reference or a string representing a sheet name. If you do not enter any parameters, the result is the sheet number of the spreadsheet containing the formula. +Syntax +SHEET(Reference) + +Reference is optional and is the reference to a cell, an area, or a sheet name string. +Example +=SHEET(Sheet2.A1) returns 2 if Sheet2 is the second sheet in the spreadsheet document. +
-number of sheets; function +number of sheets; function SHEETS function - -SHEETS -Determines the number of sheets in a reference. If you do not enter any parameters, it returns the number of sheets in the current document. -Syntax -SHEETS(Reference) - -Reference is the reference to a sheet or an area. This parameter is optional. -Example -=SHEETS(Sheet1.A1:Sheet3.G12) returns 3 if Sheet1, Sheet2, and Sheet3 exist in the sequence indicated. -
+ +SHEETS +Determines the number of sheets in a reference. If you do not enter any parameters, it returns the number of sheets in the current document. +Syntax +SHEETS(Reference) + +Reference is the reference to a sheet or an area. This parameter is optional. +Example +=SHEETS(Sheet1.A1:Sheet3.G12) returns 3 if Sheet1, Sheet2, and Sheet3 exist in the sequence indicated. +
MATCH function - -MATCH -Returns the relative position of an item in an array that matches a specified value. The function returns the position of the value found in the lookup_array as a number. -Syntax -MATCH(search criterion;lookup_array;type) - -Search Criterion is the value which is to be searched for in the single-row or single-column array. - -lookup_array is the reference searched. A lookup array can be a single row or column, or part of a single row or column. - -Type may take the values 1, 0, or -1. If Type = 1 or if this optional parameter is missing, it is assumed that the first column of the search array is sorted in ascending order. If Type = -1 it is assumed that the column in sorted in descending order. This corresponds to the same function in Microsoft Excel. -If Type = 0, only exact matches are found. If the search criterion is found more than once, the function returns the first one found. Only if Type = 0 can you search for regular expressions. -If Type = 1 or the third parameter is missing, the last value that is smaller or equal to the search criterion is returned. This applies even when the search array is not sorted. For Type = -1, the first value that is larger or equal is returned. - -Example -=MATCH(200; D1:D100) searches the area D1:D100, which is sorted by column D, for the value 200. As soon as this value is reached, the number of the row in which it was found is returned. If a higher value is found during the search in the column, the number of the previous row is returned. - -INDEX, VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP. -
+ +MATCH +Returns the relative position of an item in an array that matches a specified value. The function returns the position of the value found in the lookup_array as a number. +Syntax +MATCH(search criterion;lookup_array;type) + +Search Criterion is the value which is to be searched for in the single-row or single-column array. + +lookup_array is the reference searched. A lookup array can be a single row or column, or part of a single row or column. + +Type may take the values 1, 0, or -1. If Type = 1 or if this optional parameter is missing, it is assumed that the first column of the search array is sorted in ascending order. If Type = -1 it is assumed that the column in sorted in descending order. This corresponds to the same function in Microsoft Excel. +If Type = 0, only exact matches are found. If the search criterion is found more than once, the function returns the first one found. Only if Type = 0 can you search for regular expressions. +If Type = 1 or the third parameter is missing, the last value that is smaller or equal to the search criterion is returned. This applies even when the search array is not sorted. For Type = -1, the first value that is larger or equal is returned. + +Example +=MATCH(200; D1:D100) searches the area D1:D100, which is sorted by column D, for the value 200. As soon as this value is reached, the number of the row in which it was found is returned. If a higher value is found during the search in the column, the number of the previous row is returned. + +INDEX, VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP. +
OFFSET function - -OFFSET -Returns the value of a cell offset by a certain number of rows and columns from a given reference point. -Syntax -OFFSET(reference;rows;columns;height;width) - -Reference is the cell from which the function searches for the new reference. - -Rows is the number of cells by which the reference was corrected up (negative value) or down. - -Columns is the number of columns by which the reference was corrected to the left (negative value) or to the right. - -Height is the optional vertical height for an area that starts at the new reference position. - -Width is the optional horizontal width for an area that starts at the new reference position. -Example -=OFFSET(A1; 2, 2) returns the value in cell C3 (A1 moved by two rows and two columns down). If C3 contains the value 100 this function returns the value 100. -=SUM(OFFSET(A1; 2; 2; 5; 6)) determines the total of the area that starts in cell C3 and has a height of 5 rows and a width of 6 columns (area=C3:H7). -
+ +OFFSET +Returns the value of a cell offset by a certain number of rows and columns from a given reference point. +Syntax +OFFSET(reference;rows;columns;height;width) + +Reference is the cell from which the function searches for the new reference. + +Rows is the number of cells by which the reference was corrected up (negative value) or down. + +Columns is the number of columns by which the reference was corrected to the left (negative value) or to the right. + +Height is the optional vertical height for an area that starts at the new reference position. + +Width is the optional horizontal width for an area that starts at the new reference position. +Example +=OFFSET(A1; 2, 2) returns the value in cell C3 (A1 moved by two rows and two columns down). If C3 contains the value 100 this function returns the value 100. +=SUM(OFFSET(A1; 2; 2; 5; 6)) determines the total of the area that starts in cell C3 and has a height of 5 rows and a width of 6 columns (area=C3:H7). +
LOOKUP function - -LOOKUP -Returns the contents of a cell either from a one-row or one-column range or from an array. Optionally, the assigned value (of the same index) is returned in a different column and row. As opposed to VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP, search and result vector may be at different positions; they do not have to be adjacent. Additionally, the search vector for the LOOKUP must be sorted, otherwise the search will not return any usable results. - -Syntax -LOOKUP(Search criterion;Search vector;result_vector) - -Search criterion is the value to be searched for; entered either directly or as a reference. - -Search vector is the single-row or single-column area to be searched. - -result_vector is another single-row or single-column range from which the result of the function is taken. The result is the cell of the result vector with the same index as the instance found in the search vector. -Example -=LOOKUP(A1; D1:D100;F1:F100) searches the corresponding cell in range D1:D100 for the number you entered in A1. For the instance found, the index is determined, for example, the 12th cell in this range. Then, the contents of the 12th cell are returned as the value of the function (in the result vector). - -HLOOKUP, INDEX, VLOOKUP. -
+ +LOOKUP +Returns the contents of a cell either from a one-row or one-column range or from an array. Optionally, the assigned value (of the same index) is returned in a different column and row. As opposed to VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP, search and result vector may be at different positions; they do not have to be adjacent. Additionally, the search vector for the LOOKUP must be sorted, otherwise the search will not return any usable results. + +Syntax +LOOKUP(Search criterion;Search vector;result_vector) + +Search criterion is the value to be searched for; entered either directly or as a reference. + +Search vector is the single-row or single-column area to be searched. + +result_vector is another single-row or single-column range from which the result of the function is taken. The result is the cell of the result vector with the same index as the instance found in the search vector. +Example +=LOOKUP(A1; D1:D100;F1:F100) searches the corresponding cell in range D1:D100 for the number you entered in A1. For the instance found, the index is determined, for example, the 12th cell in this range. Then, the contents of the 12th cell are returned as the value of the function (in the result vector). + +HLOOKUP, INDEX, VLOOKUP. +
STYLE function - -STYLE -Applies a style to the cell containing the formula. After a set amount of time, another style can be applied. This function always returns the value 0, allowing you to add it to another function without changing the value. Together with the CURRENT function you can apply a color to a cell regardless of the value. For example: =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"red";"green")) applies the style "red" to the cell if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the style "green" is applied. Both cell formats have to be defined beforehand. -Syntax -STYLE(style;time;style2) - -Style is the name of a cell style assigned to the cell. Style names must be entered in quotation marks. - -Time is an optional time range in seconds. If this parameter is missing the style will not be changed after a certain amount of time has passed. - -Style2 is the optional name of a cell style assigned to the cell after a certain amount of time has passed. If this parameter is missing "Standard" is assumed. -Example -=STYLE("Invisible";60;"Default") formats the cell in transparent format for 60 seconds after the document was recalculated or loaded, then the Default format is assigned. Both cell formats have to be defined beforehand. -
+ +STYLE +Applies a style to the cell containing the formula. After a set amount of time, another style can be applied. This function always returns the value 0, allowing you to add it to another function without changing the value. Together with the CURRENT function you can apply a color to a cell regardless of the value. For example: =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"red";"green")) applies the style "red" to the cell if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the style "green" is applied. Both cell formats have to be defined beforehand. +Syntax +STYLE(style;time;style2) + +Style is the name of a cell style assigned to the cell. Style names must be entered in quotation marks. + +Time is an optional time range in seconds. If this parameter is missing the style will not be changed after a certain amount of time has passed. + +Style2 is the optional name of a cell style assigned to the cell after a certain amount of time has passed. If this parameter is missing "Standard" is assumed. +Example +=STYLE("Invisible";60;"Default") formats the cell in transparent format for 60 seconds after the document was recalculated or loaded, then the Default format is assigned. Both cell formats have to be defined beforehand. +
CHOOSE function - -CHOOSE -Uses an index to return a value from a list of up to 30 values. -Syntax -CHOOSE(Index; value1;...value30) - -Index is a reference or number between 1 and 30 indicating which value is to be taken from the list. - -Value1...Value30 is the list of values entered as a reference to a cell or as individual values. -Example -=CHOOSE(A1; B1; B2; B3; "Today"; "Yesterday"; "Tomorrow"), for example, returns the contents of cell B2 for A1 = 2; for A1 = 4, the function returns the text "Today". - -INDEX -
+ +CHOOSE +Uses an index to return a value from a list of up to 30 values. +Syntax +CHOOSE(Index; value1;...value30) + +Index is a reference or number between 1 and 30 indicating which value is to be taken from the list. + +Value1...Value30 is the list of values entered as a reference to a cell or as individual values. +Example +=CHOOSE(A1; B1; B2; B3; "Today"; "Yesterday"; "Tomorrow"), for example, returns the contents of cell B2 for A1 = 2; for A1 = 4, the function returns the text "Today". + +INDEX +
HLOOKUP function - -HLOOKUP -Searches for a value and reference to the cells below the selected area. This function verifies if the first row of an array contains a certain value. The function returns then the value in a row of the array, named in the Index, in the same column. - -Syntax -=HLOOKUP(search_criteria;array;Index;sorted) -See also:VLOOKUP (columns and rows are exchanged) - -INDEX, LOOKUP, MATCH, VLOOKUP. -
+ +HLOOKUP +Searches for a value and reference to the cells below the selected area. This function verifies if the first row of an array contains a certain value. The function returns then the value in a row of the array, named in the Index, in the same column. + +Syntax +=HLOOKUP(search_criteria;array;Index;sorted) +See also:VLOOKUP (columns and rows are exchanged) + +INDEX, LOOKUP, MATCH, VLOOKUP. +
ROW function - -ROW -Returns the row number of a cell reference. If the reference is a cell, it returns the row number of the cell. If the reference is a cell range, it returns the corresponding row numbers in a one-column Array if the formula is entered as an array formula. If the ROW function with a range reference is not used in an array formula, only the row number of the first range cell will be returned. -Syntax -ROW(reference) - -Reference is a cell, an area, or the name of an area. -If you do not indicate a reference, the row number of the cell in which the formula is entered will be found. %PRODUCTNAME Calc automatically sets the reference to the current cell. -Example -=ROW(B3) returns 3 because the reference refers to the third row in the table. -{=ROW(D5:D8)} returns the single-column array (5, 6, 7, 8) because the reference specified contains rows 5 through 8. -=ROW(D5:D8) returns 5 because the ROW function is not used as array formula and only the number of the first row of the reference is returned. -{=ROW(A1:E1)} and =ROW(A1:E1) both return 1 because the reference only contains row 1 as the first column in the table. (Because single-row areas only have one row number it does not make any difference whether or not the formula is used as an array formula.) -=ROW() returns 3 if the formula was entered in row 3. -{=ROW(Rabbit)} returns the single-column array (1, 2, 3) if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3). - -COLUMN, ROWS. -
+ +ROW +Returns the row number of a cell reference. If the reference is a cell, it returns the row number of the cell. If the reference is a cell range, it returns the corresponding row numbers in a one-column Array if the formula is entered as an array formula. If the ROW function with a range reference is not used in an array formula, only the row number of the first range cell will be returned. +Syntax +ROW(reference) + +Reference is a cell, an area, or the name of an area. +If you do not indicate a reference, the row number of the cell in which the formula is entered will be found. %PRODUCTNAME Calc automatically sets the reference to the current cell. +Example +=ROW(B3) returns 3 because the reference refers to the third row in the table. +{=ROW(D5:D8)} returns the single-column array (5, 6, 7, 8) because the reference specified contains rows 5 through 8. +=ROW(D5:D8) returns 5 because the ROW function is not used as array formula and only the number of the first row of the reference is returned. +{=ROW(A1:E1)} and =ROW(A1:E1) both return 1 because the reference only contains row 1 as the first column in the table. (Because single-row areas only have one row number it does not make any difference whether or not the formula is used as an array formula.) +=ROW() returns 3 if the formula was entered in row 3. +{=ROW(Rabbit)} returns the single-column array (1, 2, 3) if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3). + +COLUMN, ROWS. +
ROWS function - -ROWS -Returns the number of rows in a reference or array. -Syntax -ROWS(array) - -array is the reference or named area whose total number of rows is to be determined. -Example -=Rows(B5) returns 1 because a cell only contains one row. -=ROWS(A10:B12) returns 3. -=ROWS(Rabbit) returns 3 if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3). - -COLUMNS, ROW. -
+ +ROWS +Returns the number of rows in a reference or array. +Syntax +ROWS(array) + +array is the reference or named area whose total number of rows is to be determined. +Example +=Rows(B5) returns 1 because a cell only contains one row. +=ROWS(A10:B12) returns 3. +=ROWS(Rabbit) returns 3 if "Rabbit" is the named area (C1:D3). + +COLUMNS, ROW. +
HYPERLINK function - -HYPERLINK -When you click a cell that contains the HYPERLINK function, the hyperlink opens. -If you use the optional cell text parameter, the formula locates the URL, and then displays the text. -To open a hyperlinked cell with the keyboard, select the cell, press F2 to enter the Edit mode, move the cursor in front of the hyperlink, press Shift+F10, and then choose Open Hyperlink. -Syntax -HYPERLINK (URL) or HYPERLINK (URL;cell text) - -URL specifies the link target. The optional cell text parameter is the text that is displayed in the cell and the result of the function. If the cell text parameter is not specified, the URL is displayed in the cell text and in the result of the function. -Example -=HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org") displays the text "http://www.example.org" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. -=HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org";"Click here") displays the text "Click here" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. -=HYPERLINK($B4) where cell B4 contains "http://www.example.org". The function adds "http://www.example.org" to the URL of the hyperlink cell and returns the same text which is used as formula result. -=HYPERLINK("http://www.";"Click ") & "example.org" displays the text "Click example.org" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. + +HYPERLINK +When you click a cell that contains the HYPERLINK function, the hyperlink opens. +If you use the optional cell text parameter, the formula locates the URL, and then displays the text. +To open a hyperlinked cell with the keyboard, select the cell, press F2 to enter the Edit mode, move the cursor in front of the hyperlink, press Shift+F10, and then choose Open Hyperlink. +Syntax +HYPERLINK (URL) or HYPERLINK (URL;cell text) + +URL specifies the link target. The optional cell text parameter is the text that is displayed in the cell and the result of the function. If the cell text parameter is not specified, the URL is displayed in the cell text and in the result of the function. +Example +=HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org") displays the text "http://www.example.org" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. +=HYPERLINK("http://www.example.org";"Click here") displays the text "Click here" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked. +=HYPERLINK($B4) where cell B4 contains "http://www.example.org". The function adds "http://www.example.org" to the URL of the hyperlink cell and returns the same text which is used as formula result. +=HYPERLINK("http://www.";"Click ") & "example.org" displays the text "Click example.org" in the cell and executes the hyperlink http://www.example.org when clicked.
- - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp index 8e8a6a3326..3ba731bb7c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Text Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Text Functions +/text/scalc/01/04060110.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -text in cells; functions -functions; text +text in cells; functions +functions; text Function Wizard;text - -Text Functions + +Text Functions This section contains descriptions of the Text functions. - + - +
ARABIC function - -ARABIC -Calculates the value of a Roman number. The value range must be between 0 and 3999. -Syntax -ARABIC (Text) - -Text is the text that represents a Roman number. -Example -Arabic("MXIV") returns 1014 -Arabic("MMII") returns 2002 - -ROMAN. -
+ +ARABIC +Calculates the value of a Roman number. The value range must be between 0 and 3999. +Syntax +ARABIC (Text) + +Text is the text that represents a Roman number. +Example +Arabic("MXIV") returns 1014 +Arabic("MMII") returns 2002 + +ROMAN. +
BASE function - -BASE -Converts a positive integer to a specified base into a text from the numbering system. The digits 0-9 and the letters A-Z are used. -Syntax -BASE(Number; Radix; [Minimum length]) - -number is the positive integer to be converted. - -radix indicates the base of the number system. It may be any positive integer between 2 and 36. - -Minimum length (optional) determines the minimum length of the character sequence that has been created. If the text is shorter than the indicated minimum length, zeros are added to the left of the string. + +BASE +Converts a positive integer to a specified base into a text from the numbering system. The digits 0-9 and the letters A-Z are used. +Syntax +BASE(Number; Radix; [Minimum length]) + +number is the positive integer to be converted. + +radix indicates the base of the number system. It may be any positive integer between 2 and 36. + +Minimum length (optional) determines the minimum length of the character sequence that has been created. If the text is shorter than the indicated minimum length, zeros are added to the left of the string. Example decimal system; converting to - + BASE(17;10;4) returns 0017 in the decimal system. binary system; converting to - + BASE(17;2) returns 10001 in the binary system. hexadecimal system; converting to - -BASE(255;16;4) returns 00FF in the hexadecimal system. - -DECIMAL. -
+ +BASE(255;16;4) returns 00FF in the hexadecimal system. + +DECIMAL. +
CHAR function - -CHAR -Converts a number into a character according to the current code table. The number can be a two-digit or three-digit integer number. -Syntax -CHAR(number) - -number is a number between 1 and 255 representing the code value for the character. -Example -CHARACTER(100) returns the character "d". - -CODE. -
+ +CHAR +Converts a number into a character according to the current code table. The number can be a two-digit or three-digit integer number. +Syntax +CHAR(number) + +number is a number between 1 and 255 representing the code value for the character. +Example +CHARACTER(100) returns the character "d". + +CODE. +
CLEAN function - -CLEAN -All non-printing characters are removed from the string. -Syntax -CLEAN(text) - -text refers to the text from which to remove all non-printable characters. - -CHAR, TRIM. -
+ +CLEAN +All non-printing characters are removed from the string. +Syntax +CLEAN(text) + +text refers to the text from which to remove all non-printable characters. + +CHAR, TRIM. +
CODE function - -CODE -Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string. -Syntax -CODE(Text) - -Text is the text for which the code of the first character is to be found. -Example -CODE("Hieronymus") returns 72, CODE("hieroglyphic") returns 104. -The code used here does not refer to ASCII, but to the code table currently loaded. - -CHAR. -
+ +CODE +Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string. +Syntax +CODE(Text) + +Text is the text for which the code of the first character is to be found. +Example +CODE("Hieronymus") returns 72, CODE("hieroglyphic") returns 104. +The code used here does not refer to ASCII, but to the code table currently loaded. + +CHAR. +
CONCATENATE function - -CONCATENATE -Combines several text strings into one string. -Syntax -CONCATENATE(Text 1;...;Text 30) - -Text 1; text 2; ... represent up to 30 text passages which are to be combined into one string. -Example -CONCATENATE("Good ";"Morning ";"Mrs. ";"Doe") returns Good Morning Mrs. Doe. -
+ +CONCATENATE +Combines several text strings into one string. +Syntax +CONCATENATE(Text 1;...;Text 30) + +Text 1; text 2; ... represent up to 30 text passages which are to be combined into one string. +Example +CONCATENATE("Good ";"Morning ";"Mrs. ";"Doe") returns Good Morning Mrs. Doe. +
DECIMAL function - -DECIMAL -Converts text with characters from a number system to a positive integer in the base radix given. The radix must be in the range 2 to 36. Spaces and tabs are ignored. The text field is not case-sensitive. -If the radix is 16, a leading x or X or 0x or 0X, and an appended h or H, is disregarded. If the radix is 2, an appended b or B is disregarded. Other characters that do not belong to the number system generate an error. -Syntax -DECIMAL(Text; Radix) - -text is the text to be converted. To differentiate between a hexadecimal number, such as A1 and the reference to cell A1, you must place the number in quotation marks, for example, "A1" or "FACE". - -radix indicates the base of the number system. It may be any positive integer between 2 and 36. -Example -DECIMAL("17";10) returns 17. -DECIMAL("FACE";16) returns 64206. -DECIMAL("0101";2) returns 5. - -BASE. -
+ +DECIMAL +Converts text with characters from a number system to a positive integer in the base radix given. The radix must be in the range 2 to 36. Spaces and tabs are ignored. The text field is not case-sensitive. +If the radix is 16, a leading x or X or 0x or 0X, and an appended h or H, is disregarded. If the radix is 2, an appended b or B is disregarded. Other characters that do not belong to the number system generate an error. +Syntax +DECIMAL(Text; Radix) + +text is the text to be converted. To differentiate between a hexadecimal number, such as A1 and the reference to cell A1, you must place the number in quotation marks, for example, "A1" or "FACE". + +radix indicates the base of the number system. It may be any positive integer between 2 and 36. +Example +DECIMAL("17";10) returns 17. +DECIMAL("FACE";16) returns 64206. +DECIMAL("0101";2) returns 5. + +BASE. +
DOLLAR function - -DOLLAR -Converts a number to an amount in the currency format, rounded to a specified decimal place. In the value field enter the number to be converted to currency. Optionally, you may enter the number of decimal places in the decimals field. If no value is specified, all numbers in currency format will be displayed with two decimal places. -You set the currency format in your system settings. -Syntax -DOLLAR(value; decimals) - -value is a number, a reference to a cell containing a number, or a formula which returns a number. - -decimals is the number of decimal places. -Example -DOLLAR(255) returns $255.00. -DOLLAR(367.456;2) returns $367.46. Use the decimal separator that corresponds to the current locale setting. - -FIXED, TEXT, VALUE. -
+ +DOLLAR +Converts a number to an amount in the currency format, rounded to a specified decimal place. In the value field enter the number to be converted to currency. Optionally, you may enter the number of decimal places in the decimals field. If no value is specified, all numbers in currency format will be displayed with two decimal places. +You set the currency format in your system settings. +Syntax +DOLLAR(value; decimals) + +value is a number, a reference to a cell containing a number, or a formula which returns a number. + +decimals is the number of decimal places. +Example +DOLLAR(255) returns $255.00. +DOLLAR(367.456;2) returns $367.46. Use the decimal separator that corresponds to the current locale setting. + +FIXED, TEXT, VALUE. +
EXACT function - -EXACT -Compares two text strings and returns TRUE if they are identical. This function is case-sensitive. -Syntax -EXACT(text_1;text_2) - -text_1 refers to the first text to compare. - -text_2 is the second text to compare. -Example -EXACT("Sun microsystems";"Sun Microsystems") returns FALSE. - -LEN, SEARCH. -
+ +EXACT +Compares two text strings and returns TRUE if they are identical. This function is case-sensitive. +Syntax +EXACT(text_1;text_2) + +text_1 refers to the first text to compare. + +text_2 is the second text to compare. +Example +EXACT("Sun microsystems";"Sun Microsystems") returns FALSE. + +LEN, SEARCH. +
FIND function - -FIND -Looks for a string of text within another string. You can also define where to begin the search. The search term can be a number or any string of characters. The search is case-sensitive. -Syntax -FIND(find_text; text; position) - -find_text refers to the text to be found. - -text is the text where the search takes place. - -position (optional) is the position in the text from which the search starts. -Example -FIND(76;998877665544) returns 6. - -EXACT, LEN, MID, SEARCH. -
+ +FIND +Looks for a string of text within another string. You can also define where to begin the search. The search term can be a number or any string of characters. The search is case-sensitive. +Syntax +FIND(find_text; text; position) + +find_text refers to the text to be found. + +text is the text where the search takes place. + +position (optional) is the position in the text from which the search starts. +Example +FIND(76;998877665544) returns 6. + +EXACT, LEN, MID, SEARCH. +
FIXED function - -FIXED -Specifies that a number be displayed with a fixed number of decimal places and with or without a thousands separator. This function can be used to apply a uniform format to a column of numbers. -Syntax -FIXED(Number; decimals; no thousands separators) - -Number refers to the number to be formatted. - -Decimals refers to the number of decimal places to be displayed. - -No thousands separators (optional) determines whether the thousands separator is used. If the parameter is a number not equal to 0, the thousands separator is suppressed. If the parameter is equal to 0 or if it is missing altogether, the thousands separators of your current locale setting are displayed. -Example -FIXED(1234567.89;3) returns 1,234,567.890. FIXED(1234567.89;3;1) returns 1234567.890. - -DOLLAR, ROUND, TEXT, VALUE. -
+ +FIXED +Specifies that a number be displayed with a fixed number of decimal places and with or without a thousands separator. This function can be used to apply a uniform format to a column of numbers. +Syntax +FIXED(Number; decimals; no thousands separators) + +Number refers to the number to be formatted. + +Decimals refers to the number of decimal places to be displayed. + +No thousands separators (optional) determines whether the thousands separator is used. If the parameter is a number not equal to 0, the thousands separator is suppressed. If the parameter is equal to 0 or if it is missing altogether, the thousands separators of your current locale setting are displayed. +Example +FIXED(1234567.89;3) returns 1,234,567.890. FIXED(1234567.89;3;1) returns 1234567.890. + +DOLLAR, ROUND, TEXT, VALUE. +
LEFT function - -LEFT -Returns the first character or characters in a text string. -Syntax -LEFT(text; number) - -text is the text where the initial partial words are to be determined. - -Number (optional) specifies the number of characters for the start text. If this parameter is not defined, one character is returned. -Example -LEFT("output";3) returns out. - -MID, RIGHT. -
+ +LEFT +Returns the first character or characters in a text string. +Syntax +LEFT(text; number) + +text is the text where the initial partial words are to be determined. + +Number (optional) specifies the number of characters for the start text. If this parameter is not defined, one character is returned. +Example +LEFT("output";3) returns out. + +MID, RIGHT. +
LEN function - -LEN -Returns the length of a string including spaces. -Syntax -LEN(text) - -text is the text whose length is to be determined. -Example -LEN("Good Afternoon") returns 14. -LEN(12345.67) returns 8. - -EXACT, SEARCH. -
+ +LEN +Returns the length of a string including spaces. +Syntax +LEN(text) + +text is the text whose length is to be determined. +Example +LEN("Good Afternoon") returns 14. +LEN(12345.67) returns 8. + +EXACT, SEARCH. +
LOWER function - -LOWER -Converts all uppercase letters in a text string to lowercase. -Syntax -LOWER(text) - -text refers to the text to be converted. -Example -LOWER("Sun") returns sun. - -PROPER, UPPER. -
+ +LOWER +Converts all uppercase letters in a text string to lowercase. +Syntax +LOWER(text) + +text refers to the text to be converted. +Example +LOWER("Sun") returns sun. + +PROPER, UPPER. +
MID function - -MID -Returns a text segment of a character string. The parameters specify the starting position and the number of characters. -Syntax -MID(text; start; number) - -text is the text containing the characters to extract. - -start is the position of the first character in the text to extract. - -number specifies the number of characters in the part of the text. -Example -MID("Sun Microsystems";5;5) returns Micro. - -CODE, FIND, LEFT, RIGHT, SEARCH. -
+ +MID +Returns a text segment of a character string. The parameters specify the starting position and the number of characters. +Syntax +MID(text; start; number) + +text is the text containing the characters to extract. + +start is the position of the first character in the text to extract. + +number specifies the number of characters in the part of the text. +Example +MID("Sun Microsystems";5;5) returns Micro. + +CODE, FIND, LEFT, RIGHT, SEARCH. +
PROPER function - -PROPER -Capitalizes the first letter in all words of a text string. -Syntax -PROPER(text) - -text refers to the text to be converted. -Example -PROPER("sun microsystems") returns Sun Microsystems. - -UPPER, LOWER. -
+ +PROPER +Capitalizes the first letter in all words of a text string. +Syntax +PROPER(text) + +text refers to the text to be converted. +Example +PROPER("sun microsystems") returns Sun Microsystems. + +UPPER, LOWER. +
REPLACE function - -REPLACE -Replaces part of a text string with a different text string. This function can be used to replace both characters and numbers (which are automatically converted to text). The result of the function is always displayed as text. If you intend to perform further calculations with a number which has been replaced by text, you will need to convert it back to a number using the VALUE function. -Any text containing numbers must be enclosed in quotation marks if you do not want it to be interpreted as a number and automatically converted to text. -Syntax -REPLACE(text; position; length; new text) - -Text refers to text of which a part will be replaced. - -position refers to the position within the text where the replacement will begin. - -length is the number of characters in text to be replaced. - -new text refers to the text which replaces text. -Example -REPLACE("1234567";1;1;"444") returns "444234567". One character at position 1 is replaced by the complete new text. - -MID, SEARCH, SUBSTITUTE, TRIM. -
+ +REPLACE +Replaces part of a text string with a different text string. This function can be used to replace both characters and numbers (which are automatically converted to text). The result of the function is always displayed as text. If you intend to perform further calculations with a number which has been replaced by text, you will need to convert it back to a number using the VALUE function. +Any text containing numbers must be enclosed in quotation marks if you do not want it to be interpreted as a number and automatically converted to text. +Syntax +REPLACE(text; position; length; new text) + +Text refers to text of which a part will be replaced. + +position refers to the position within the text where the replacement will begin. + +length is the number of characters in text to be replaced. + +new text refers to the text which replaces text. +Example +REPLACE("1234567";1;1;"444") returns "444234567". One character at position 1 is replaced by the complete new text. + +MID, SEARCH, SUBSTITUTE, TRIM. +
REPT function - -REPT -Repeats a character string by the given number of copies. -Syntax -REPT(text; number) - -text is the text to be repeated. - -number is the number of repetitions. -The result can be a maximum of 255 characters. -Example -REPT("Good morning"; 2) returns Good morningGood morning. -
+ +REPT +Repeats a character string by the given number of copies. +Syntax +REPT(text; number) + +text is the text to be repeated. + +number is the number of repetitions. +The result can be a maximum of 255 characters. +Example +REPT("Good morning"; 2) returns Good morningGood morning. + + +RIGHT +Defines the last character or characters in a text string. +Syntax +RIGHT(text; number) + +text is the text of which the right part is to be determined. + +number (optional) is the number of characters from the right part of the text. +Example +RIGHT("Sun";2) returns un. + +LEFT, MID. +
ROMAN function - -ROMAN -Converts a number into a Roman numeral. The value range must be between 0 and 3999, the modes can be integers from 0 to 4. -Syntax -ROMAN(Number; Mode) - -Number is the number that is to be converted into a Roman numeral. - -Mode (optional) indicates the degree of simplification. The higher the value, the greater is the simplification of the Roman number. -Example -ROMAN(999) returns CMXCIX -ROMAN(999;0) returns CMXCIX -ROMAN (999;1) returns LMVLIV -ROMAN(999;2) returns XMIX -ROMAN(999;3) returns VMIV -ROMAN(999;4) returns IM - -ARABIC. -
+ +ROMAN +Converts a number into a Roman numeral. The value range must be between 0 and 3999, the modes can be integers from 0 to 4. +Syntax +ROMAN(Number; Mode) + +Number is the number that is to be converted into a Roman numeral. + +Mode (optional) indicates the degree of simplification. The higher the value, the greater is the simplification of the Roman number. +Example +ROMAN(999) returns CMXCIX +ROMAN(999;0) returns CMXCIX +ROMAN (999;1) returns LMVLIV +ROMAN(999;2) returns XMIX +ROMAN(999;3) returns VMIV +ROMAN(999;4) returns IM + +ARABIC. + + +SEARCH +Returns the position of a text segment within a character string. You can set the start of the search as an option. The search text can be a number or any sequence of characters. The search is not case-sensitive. + +Syntax +SEARCH(find_text; text; position) + +find_text is the text to be searched for. + +text is the text where the search will take place. + +position (optional) is the position in the text where the search is to start. +Example +SEARCH(54;998877665544) returns 10. + +FIND, MID, REPLACE, SUBSTITUTE. +
SUBSTITUTE function - -SUBSTITUTE -Substitutes new text for old text in a string. -Syntax -SUBSTITUTE(text; search_text; new text; occurrence) - -text is the text in which text segments are to be exchanged. - -search_text is the text segment that is to be replaced (a number of times). - -new text is the text that is to replace the text segment. - -occurrence (optional) indicates how many occurrences of the search text are to be replaced. If this parameter is missing the search text is replaced throughout. -Example -SUBSTITUTE("123123123"; "3"; "abc") returns 12abc12abc12abc. -SUBSTITUTE("123123123"; "3"; "abc"; 2) returns 12312abc123. - -REPLACE, TRIM. -
+ +SUBSTITUTE +Substitutes new text for old text in a string. +Syntax +SUBSTITUTE(text; search_text; new text; occurrence) + +text is the text in which text segments are to be exchanged. + +search_text is the text segment that is to be replaced (a number of times). + +new text is the text that is to replace the text segment. + +occurrence (optional) indicates how many occurrences of the search text are to be replaced. If this parameter is missing the search text is replaced throughout. +Example +SUBSTITUTE("123123123"; "3"; "abc") returns 12abc12abc12abc. +SUBSTITUTE("123123123"; "3"; "abc"; 2) returns 12312abc123. + +REPLACE, TRIM. +
T function - -T -This function converts a number to a blank text string. -Syntax -T(value) - -value is the value to be converted. Also, a reference can be used as a parameter. If the referenced cell includes a number or a formula containing a numerical result, the result will be an empty string. -Example -T(12345) becomes an empty string "", if 12345 is formatted as a number. T("12345") returns 12345. - -N, VALUE. -
+ +T +This function converts a number to a blank text string. +Syntax +T(value) + +value is the value to be converted. Also, a reference can be used as a parameter. If the referenced cell includes a number or a formula containing a numerical result, the result will be an empty string. +Example +T(12345) becomes an empty string "", if 12345 is formatted as a number. T("12345") returns 12345. + +N, VALUE. +
TEXT function - -TEXT -Converts a number into text according to a given format. -Syntax -TEXT(Number; Format) - -Number is the numerical value to be converted. - -Format is the text which defines the format. Use decimal and thousands separators according to the language set in the cell format. - -DOLLAR, FIXED, T, VALUE. -
+ +TEXT +Converts a number into text according to a given format. +Syntax +TEXT(Number; Format) + +Number is the numerical value to be converted. + +Format is the text which defines the format. Use decimal and thousands separators according to the language set in the cell format. + +DOLLAR, FIXED, T, VALUE. +
TRIM function - -TRIM -Removes spaces that are in front of a string, or aligns cell contents to the left. -Syntax -TRIM(Text) - -text refers to text in which leading spaces are removed, or to the cell in which the contents will be left-aligned. -Example -TRIM("   hello") returns "hello". - -CLEAN, REPLACE, MID, SUBSTITUTE. -
+ +TRIM +Removes spaces that are in front of a string, or aligns cell contents to the left. +Syntax +TRIM(Text) + +text refers to text in which leading spaces are removed, or to the cell in which the contents will be left-aligned. +Example +TRIM("   hello") returns "hello". + +CLEAN, REPLACE, MID, SUBSTITUTE. +
UPPER function - -UPPER -Converts the string specified in the text field to uppercase. -Syntax -UPPER(text) - -text refers to the lower case letters you want to convert to upper case. -Example -UPPER("Good Morning") returns GOOD MORNING. - -LOWER, PROPER. -
+ +UPPER +Converts the string specified in the text field to uppercase. +Syntax +UPPER(text) + +text refers to the lower case letters you want to convert to upper case. +Example +UPPER("Good Morning") returns GOOD MORNING. + +LOWER, PROPER. +
VALUE function - -VALUE -Converts a text string into a number. -Syntax -VALUE(text) - -text is the text to be converted to a number. -Example -VALUE("4321") returns 4321. - -DOLLAR, FIXED, TEXT. + +VALUE +Converts a text string into a number. +Syntax +VALUE(text) + +text is the text to be converted to a number. +Example +VALUE("4321") returns 4321. + +DOLLAR, FIXED, TEXT.
- - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp index 83d461d06a..bf4c640c52 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Add-in Functions -/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fixed #i25199# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Add-in Functions +/text/scalc/01/04060111.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fixed #i25199# + + -add-ins; functions -functions; add-ins +add-ins; functions +functions; add-ins Function Wizard; add-ins - -Add-in Functions + +Add-in Functions The following describes and lists the available add-in functions. - -Add-in concept + +Add-in concept You will also find a description of the $[officename] Calc add-in interface in the Help. In addition, important functions and their parameters are described in the Help for the Shared Library -$[officename] Calc add-in DLL. -Add-ins supplied -$[officename] contains examples for the add-in interface of $[officename] Calc. These provide the functions that you find in Function Wizard under the Add-in category, plus several of the financial functions. -In the $[officename] Setup program, you can selectively deinstall the Calc Add-ins. Be aware that you will lose all functions listed under the Add-in category, plus several financial functions, if you do so. -Analysis Functions Part One +$[officename] Calc add-in DLL. +Add-ins supplied +$[officename] contains examples for the add-in interface of $[officename] Calc. These provide the functions that you find in Function Wizard under the Add-in category, plus several of the financial functions. +In the $[officename] Setup program, you can selectively deinstall the Calc Add-ins. Be aware that you will lose all functions listed under the Add-in category, plus several financial functions, if you do so. +Analysis Functions Part One Analysis Functions Part Two - +
ISLEAPYEAR function - -ISLEAPYEAR -Determines whether a year is a leap year. If yes, the function will return the value 1 (TRUE); if not, it will return 0 (FALSE). -Syntax -ISLEAPYEAR(Date) -Date: Specifies whether a given date falls within a leap year. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. -Example -ISLEAPYEAR(A1) returns 1, if A1 contains 2/29/68, the valid date 29th of February 1968 in your locale setting. -You may also use ISLEAPYEAR("2/29/68"). -Never use ISLEAPYEAR(2/29/68), because this would first evaluate 2 divided by 29 devided by 68, and then calculate the ISLEAPYEAR function from this small number as a serial date number. -
+ +ISLEAPYEAR +Determines whether a year is a leap year. If yes, the function will return the value 1 (TRUE); if not, it will return 0 (FALSE). +Syntax +ISLEAPYEAR(Date) +Date: Specifies whether a given date falls within a leap year. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. +Example +ISLEAPYEAR(A1) returns 1, if A1 contains 2/29/68, the valid date 29th of February 1968 in your locale setting. +You may also use ISLEAPYEAR("2/29/68"). +Never use ISLEAPYEAR(2/29/68), because this would first evaluate 2 divided by 29 devided by 68, and then calculate the ISLEAPYEAR function from this small number as a serial date number. +
YEARS function - -YEARS -Calculates the difference in years between two dates. -Syntax -YEARS(Start date, End date, Type) -Start date: First date -End date: Second date -Type: Calculates the type of difference. Possible values are 0 (interval) and 1 (in calendar years). -
+ +YEARS +Calculates the difference in years between two dates. +Syntax +YEARS(Start date, End date, Type) +Start date: First date +End date: Second date +Type: Calculates the type of difference. Possible values are 0 (interval) and 1 (in calendar years). +
MONTHS function - -MONTHS -Calculates the difference in months between two dates. -Syntax -MONTHS(Start date, End date, Type) -Start date: First date -End date: Second date -Type: Calculates the type of difference. Possible values include 0 (interval) and 1 (in calendar months). -
+ +MONTHS +Calculates the difference in months between two dates. +Syntax +MONTHS(Start date, End date, Type) +Start date: First date +End date: Second date +Type: Calculates the type of difference. Possible values include 0 (interval) and 1 (in calendar months). +
ROT13 function - -ROT13 -Encrypts a character string by moving the characters 13 positions in the alphabet. After the letter Z, the alphabet begins again (Rotation). By applying the encryption function again to the resulting code, you can decrypt the text. -Syntax -ROT13(Text) -Text: Enter the character string to be encrypted. ROT13(ROT13(Text)) decrypts the code. -
+ +ROT13 +Encrypts a character string by moving the characters 13 positions in the alphabet. After the letter Z, the alphabet begins again (Rotation). By applying the encryption function again to the resulting code, you can decrypt the text. +Syntax +ROT13(Text) +Text: Enter the character string to be encrypted. ROT13(ROT13(Text)) decrypts the code. +
DAYSINYEAR function - -DAYSINYEAR -Calculates the number of days in the year until a given date. -Syntax -DAYSINYEAR(Date) -Date: The date up through which a number of days in the year is calculated. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. -Example -DAYSINYEAR(A1) returns 366 days if A1 contains 2/29/68, a valid date for the year 1968. -
+ +DAYSINYEAR +Calculates the number of days in the year until a given date. +Syntax +DAYSINYEAR(Date) +Date: The date up through which a number of days in the year is calculated. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. +Example +DAYSINYEAR(A1) returns 366 days if A1 contains 2/29/68, a valid date for the year 1968. +
DAYSINMONTH function - -DAYSINMONTH -Calculates the number of days in a month until a given date. -Syntax -DAYSINMONTH(Date) -Date: The date up through which the days in the month is calculated. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. -Example -DAYSINMONTH(A1) returns 29 days if A1 contains 2/17/68, a valid date for February 1968. -
+ +DAYSINMONTH +Calculates the number of days in a month until a given date. +Syntax +DAYSINMONTH(Date) +Date: The date up through which the days in the month is calculated. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. +Example +DAYSINMONTH(A1) returns 29 days if A1 contains 2/17/68, a valid date for February 1968. +
WEEKS function - -WEEKS -Calculates the difference in weeks between two dates. -Syntax -WEEKS(Start date, End date, Type) -Start date: First date -End date: Second date -Type: Calculates the type of difference. The possible values are 0 (interval) and 1 (in numbers of weeks). -
+ +WEEKS +Calculates the difference in weeks between two dates. +Syntax +WEEKS(Start date, End date, Type) +Start date: First date +End date: Second date +Type: Calculates the type of difference. The possible values are 0 (interval) and 1 (in numbers of weeks). +
WEEKSINYEAR function - -WEEKSINYEAR -Calculates the number of weeks in a year until a certain date. The number of weeks is defined as follows: a week that spans two years is added to the year in which most days of that week occur. -Syntax -WEEKSINYEAR(Date) -Date: The date until which the weeks in the year will be calculated. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. -Example -WEEKSINYEAR(A1) returns 53 if A1 contains 2/17/70, a valid date for the year 1970. + +WEEKSINYEAR +Calculates the number of weeks in a year until a certain date. The number of weeks is defined as follows: a week that spans two years is added to the year in which most days of that week occur. +Syntax +WEEKSINYEAR(Date) +Date: The date until which the weeks in the year will be calculated. The Date parameter must be a valid date according to the locale settings of %PRODUCTNAME. +Example +WEEKSINYEAR(A1) returns 53 if A1 contains 2/17/70, a valid date for the year 1970.
- -Add-ins through %PRODUCTNAME API -Add-ins can also be implemented through the %PRODUCTNAME API. - - + +Add-ins through %PRODUCTNAME API +Add-ins can also be implemented through the %PRODUCTNAME API. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp index 8844761e65..c0d9e1005c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Add-in for Programming in $[officename] Calc -/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30855# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Add-in for Programming in $[officename] Calc +/text/scalc/01/04060112.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30855# + + -programming; add-ins -shared libraries; programming -external DLL functions; programming -functions; shared library for $[officename] Calc -functions; $[officename] Calc add-in DLL +programming; add-ins +shared libraries; programming +external DLL functions; programming +functions; shared library for $[officename] Calc +functions; $[officename] Calc add-in DLL add-ins; for programming - + -Add-in for Programming in $[officename] Calc -The method of extending Calc by Add-Ins that is described in the following is outdated. The interfaces are still valid and supported, to ensure compatibility with existing Add-Ins, but for programming new Add-Ins you should use the new API functions. +Add-in for Programming in $[officename] Calc +The method of extending Calc by Add-Ins that is described in the following is outdated. The interfaces are still valid and supported, to ensure compatibility with existing Add-Ins, but for programming new Add-Ins you should use the new API functions. $[officename] Calc can be expanded by Add-Ins, which are external programming modules providing additional functions for working with spreadsheets. These are listed in the Function Wizard in the Add-In category. If you would like to program an Add-In yourself, you can learn here which functions must be exported by the shared library -external DLL so that the Add-In can be successfully attached. +external DLL so that the Add-In can be successfully attached. $[officename] searches the folder defined in Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - Add-ins for a suitable shared library DLL. To be recognized by $[officename], the shared library -DLL must have certain properties, as explained in the following. This information allows you to program your own Add-In for Function Wizard of $[officename] Calc. -
-The Add-In Concept -Each Add-In library provides several functions. Some functions are used for administrative purposes. You can choose almost any name for your own functions. However, they must also follow certain rules regarding parameter passing. The exact naming and calling conventions vary for different platforms. -
+DLL must have certain properties, as explained in the following. This information allows you to program your own Add-In for Function Wizard of $[officename] Calc. +
+The Add-In Concept +Each Add-In library provides several functions. Some functions are used for administrative purposes. You can choose almost any name for your own functions. However, they must also follow certain rules regarding parameter passing. The exact naming and calling conventions vary for different platforms. +
Functions of Shared Library -AddIn DLL -At a minimum, the administrative functions GetFunctionCount and GetFunctionData must exist. Using these, the functions as well as parameter types and return values can be determined. As return values, the Double and String types are supported. As parameters, additionally the cell areas Double Array, String Array, and Cell Array are supported. -Parameters are passed using references. Therefore, a change of these values is basically possible. However, this is not supported in $[officename] Calc because it does not make sense within spreadsheets. -Libraries can be reloaded during runtime and their contents can be analyzed by the administrative functions. For each function, information is available about count and type of parameters, internal and external function names and an administrative number. -The functions are called synchronously and return their results immediately. Real time functions (asynchronous functions) are also possible; however, they are not explained in detail because of their complexity. -General information about the interface -The maximum number of parameters in an Add-In function attached to $[officename] Calc is 16: one return value and a maximum of 15 function input parameters. -The data types are defined as follows: - - - - -Data types - - - - -Definition - - - - - -CALLTYPE - - -Under Windows: FAR PASCAL (_far _pascal) -Other: default (operating system specific default) - - - - -USHORT - - -2 Byte unsigned Integer - - - - -DOUBLE - - -8 byte platform-dependent format - - - - -Paramtype - - -Platform-dependent like int -PTR_DOUBLE =0 pointer to a double -PTR_STRING =1 pointer to a zero-terminated string -PTR_DOUBLE_ARR =2 pointer to a double array -PTR_STRING_ARR =3 pointer to a string array -PTR_CELL_ARR =4 pointer to a cell array -NONE =5 - - -
- +AddIn DLL +At a minimum, the administrative functions GetFunctionCount and GetFunctionData must exist. Using these, the functions as well as parameter types and return values can be determined. As return values, the Double and String types are supported. As parameters, additionally the cell areas Double Array, String Array, and Cell Array are supported. +Parameters are passed using references. Therefore, a change of these values is basically possible. However, this is not supported in $[officename] Calc because it does not make sense within spreadsheets. +Libraries can be reloaded during runtime and their contents can be analyzed by the administrative functions. For each function, information is available about count and type of parameters, internal and external function names and an administrative number. +The functions are called synchronously and return their results immediately. Real time functions (asynchronous functions) are also possible; however, they are not explained in detail because of their complexity. +General information about the interface +The maximum number of parameters in an Add-In function attached to $[officename] Calc is 16: one return value and a maximum of 15 function input parameters. +The data types are defined as follows: + + + + +Data types + + + + +Definition + + + + + +CALLTYPE + + +Under Windows: FAR PASCAL (_far _pascal) +Other: default (operating system specific default) + + + + +USHORT + + +2 Byte unsigned Integer + + + + +DOUBLE + + +8 byte platform-dependent format + + + + +Paramtype + + +Platform-dependent like int +PTR_DOUBLE =0 pointer to a double +PTR_STRING =1 pointer to a zero-terminated string +PTR_DOUBLE_ARR =2 pointer to a double array +PTR_STRING_ARR =3 pointer to a string array +PTR_CELL_ARR =4 pointer to a cell array +NONE =5 + + +
+ Shared Library -DLL functions +DLL functions Following you will find a description of those functions, which are called at the Shared Library -external DLL. +external DLL. For all Shared Library -DLL functions, the following applies: -void CALLTYPE fn(out, in1, in2, ...) -Output: Resulting value -Input: Any number of types (double&, char*, double*, char**, Cell area), where the Cell area is an array of types double array, string array, or cell array. -GetFunctionCount() -Returns the number of functions without the management functions of the reference parameter. Each function has a unique number between 0 and nCount-1. This number will be needed for the GetFunctionData and GetParameterDescription functions later. - -Syntax - -void CALLTYPE GetFunctionCount(USHORT& nCount) - -Parameter - -USHORT &nCount: -Output: Reference to a variable, which is supposed to contain the number of Add-In functions. For example: If the Add-In provides 5 functions for $[officename] Calc, then nCount=5. -GetFunctionData() -Determines all the important information about an Add-In function. - -Syntax - -void CALLTYPE GetFunctionData(USHORT& nNo, char* pFuncName, USHORT& nParamCount, Paramtype* peType, char* pInternalName) - -Parameter - -USHORT& nNo: -Input: Function number between 0 and nCount-1, inclusively. -char* pFuncName: +DLL functions, the following applies: +void CALLTYPE fn(out, in1, in2, ...) +Output: Resulting value +Input: Any number of types (double&, char*, double*, char**, Cell area), where the Cell area is an array of types double array, string array, or cell array. +GetFunctionCount() +Returns the number of functions without the management functions of the reference parameter. Each function has a unique number between 0 and nCount-1. This number will be needed for the GetFunctionData and GetParameterDescription functions later. + +Syntax + +void CALLTYPE GetFunctionCount(USHORT& nCount) + +Parameter + +USHORT &nCount: +Output: Reference to a variable, which is supposed to contain the number of Add-In functions. For example: If the Add-In provides 5 functions for $[officename] Calc, then nCount=5. +GetFunctionData() +Determines all the important information about an Add-In function. + +Syntax + +void CALLTYPE GetFunctionData(USHORT& nNo, char* pFuncName, USHORT& nParamCount, Paramtype* peType, char* pInternalName) + +Parameter + +USHORT& nNo: +Input: Function number between 0 and nCount-1, inclusively. +char* pFuncName: Output: Function name as seen by the programmer, as it is named in the Shared Library -DLL. This name does not determine the name used in the Function Wizard. -USHORT& nParamCount: -Output: Number of parameters in AddIn function. This number must be greater than 0, because there is always a result value; the maximum value is 16. -Paramtype* peType: -Output: Pointer to an array of exactly 16 variables of type Paramtype. The first nParamCount entries are filled with the suitable type of parameter. -char* pInternalName: -Output: Function name as seen by the user, as it appears in the Function Wizard. May contain umlauts. -The pFuncName and pInternalName parameters are char arrays, which are implemented with size 256 in $[officename] Calc. -GetParameterDescription() -Provides a brief description of the Add-In function and its parameters. As an option, this function can be used to show a function and parameter description in the Function Wizard. - -Syntax - -void CALLTYPE GetParameterDescription(USHORT& nNo, USHORT& nParam, char* pName, char* pDesc) - -Parameter - -USHORT& nNo: -Input: Number of the function in the library; between 0 and nCount-1. -USHORT& nParam: -Input: Indicates, for which parameter the description is provided; parameters start at 1. If nParam is 0, the description itself is supposed to be provided in pDesc; in this case, pName does not have any meaning. -char* pName: -Output: Takes up the parameter name or type, for example, the word "Number" or "String" or "Date", and so on. Implemented in $[officename] Calc as char[256]. -char* pDesc: -Output: Takes up the description of the parameter, for example, "Value, at which the universe is to be calculated." Implemented in $[officename] Calc as char[256]. -pName and pDesc are char arrays; implemented in $[officename] Calc with size 256. Please note that the space available in the Function Wizard is limited and that the 256 characters cannot be fully used. -Cell areas -The following tables contain information about which data structures must be provided by an external program module in order to pass cell areas. $[officename] Calc distinguishes between three different arrays, depending on the data type. -Double Array -As a parameter, a cell area with values of the Number/Double type can be passed. A double array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: - - - - -Offset - - - - -Name - - - - -Description - - - - - -0 - - -Col1 - - -Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. - - - - -2 - - -Row1 - - -Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -4 - - -Tab1 - - -Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -6 - - -Col2 - - -Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. - - - - -8 - - -Row2 - - -Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -10 - - -Tab2 - - -Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -12 - - -Count - - -Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. - - - - -14 - - -Col - - -Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. - - - - -16 - - -Row - - -Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -18 - - -Tab - - -Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -20 - - -Error - - -Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. - - - - -22 - - -Value - - -8 byte IEEE variable of type double/floating point - - - - -30 - - -... - - -Next element - - -
- -String Array -A cell area, which contains values of data type Text and is passed as a string array. A string array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: - - - - -Offset - - - - -Name - - - - -Description - - - - - -0 - - -Col1 - - -Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. - - - - -2 - - -Row1 - - -Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -4 - - -Tab1 - - -Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -6 - - -Col2 - - -Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. - - - - -8 - - -Row2 - - -Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -10 - - -Tab2 - - -Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -12 - - -Count - - -Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. - - - - -14 - - -Col - - -Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. - - - - -16 - - -Row - - -Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -18 - - -Tab - - -Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -20 - - -Error - - -Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. - - - - -22 - - -Len - - -Length of the following string, including closing zero byte. If the length including closing zero byte equals an odd value a second zero byte is added to the string so that an even value is achieved. Therefore, Len is calculated using ((StrLen+2)&~1). - - - - -24 - - -String - - -String with closing zero byte - - - - -24+Len - - -... - - -Next element - - -
- -Cell Array -Cell arrays are used to call cell areas containing text as well as numbers. A cell array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: - - - - -Offset - - - - -Name - - - - -Description - - - - - -0 - - -Col1 - - -Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. - - - - -2 - - -Row1 - - -Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -4 - - -Tab1 - - -Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -6 - - -Col2 - - -Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. - - - - -8 - - -Row2 - - -Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -10 - - -Tab2 - - -Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -12 - - -Count - - -Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. - - - - -14 - - -Col - - -Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. - - - - -16 - - -Row - - -Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -18 - - -Tab - - -Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. - - - - -20 - - -Error - - -Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. - - - - -22 - - -Type - - -Type of cell content, 0 == Double, 1 == String - - - - -24 - - -Value or Len - - -If type == 0: 8 byte IEEE variable of type double/floating point -If type == 1: Length of the following string, including closing zero byte. If the length including closing zero byte equals an odd value a second zero byte is added to the string so that an even value is achieved. Therefore, Len is calculated using ((StrLen+2)&~1). - - - - -26 if type==1 - - -String - - -If type == 1: String with closing zero byte - - - - -32 or 26+Len - - -... - - -Next element - - -
- - - +DLL. This name does not determine the name used in the Function Wizard. +USHORT& nParamCount: +Output: Number of parameters in AddIn function. This number must be greater than 0, because there is always a result value; the maximum value is 16. +Paramtype* peType: +Output: Pointer to an array of exactly 16 variables of type Paramtype. The first nParamCount entries are filled with the suitable type of parameter. +char* pInternalName: +Output: Function name as seen by the user, as it appears in the Function Wizard. May contain umlauts. +The pFuncName and pInternalName parameters are char arrays, which are implemented with size 256 in $[officename] Calc. +GetParameterDescription() +Provides a brief description of the Add-In function and its parameters. As an option, this function can be used to show a function and parameter description in the Function Wizard. + +Syntax + +void CALLTYPE GetParameterDescription(USHORT& nNo, USHORT& nParam, char* pName, char* pDesc) + +Parameter + +USHORT& nNo: +Input: Number of the function in the library; between 0 and nCount-1. +USHORT& nParam: +Input: Indicates, for which parameter the description is provided; parameters start at 1. If nParam is 0, the description itself is supposed to be provided in pDesc; in this case, pName does not have any meaning. +char* pName: +Output: Takes up the parameter name or type, for example, the word "Number" or "String" or "Date", and so on. Implemented in $[officename] Calc as char[256]. +char* pDesc: +Output: Takes up the description of the parameter, for example, "Value, at which the universe is to be calculated." Implemented in $[officename] Calc as char[256]. +pName and pDesc are char arrays; implemented in $[officename] Calc with size 256. Please note that the space available in the Function Wizard is limited and that the 256 characters cannot be fully used. +Cell areas +The following tables contain information about which data structures must be provided by an external program module in order to pass cell areas. $[officename] Calc distinguishes between three different arrays, depending on the data type. +Double Array +As a parameter, a cell area with values of the Number/Double type can be passed. A double array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: + + + + +Offset + + + + +Name + + + + +Description + + + + + +0 + + +Col1 + + +Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + +2 + + +Row1 + + +Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +4 + + +Tab1 + + +Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +6 + + +Col2 + + +Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + +8 + + +Row2 + + +Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +10 + + +Tab2 + + +Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +12 + + +Count + + +Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. + + + + +14 + + +Col + + +Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + +16 + + +Row + + +Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +18 + + +Tab + + +Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +20 + + +Error + + +Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. + + + + +22 + + +Value + + +8 byte IEEE variable of type double/floating point + + + + +30 + + +... + + +Next element + + +
+ +String Array +A cell area, which contains values of data type Text and is passed as a string array. A string array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: + + + + +Offset + + + + +Name + + + + +Description + + + + + +0 + + +Col1 + + +Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + +2 + + +Row1 + + +Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +4 + + +Tab1 + + +Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +6 + + +Col2 + + +Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + +8 + + +Row2 + + +Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +10 + + +Tab2 + + +Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +12 + + +Count + + +Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. + + + + +14 + + +Col + + +Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + +16 + + +Row + + +Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +18 + + +Tab + + +Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +20 + + +Error + + +Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. + + + + +22 + + +Len + + +Length of the following string, including closing zero byte. If the length including closing zero byte equals an odd value a second zero byte is added to the string so that an even value is achieved. Therefore, Len is calculated using ((StrLen+2)&~1). + + + + +24 + + +String + + +String with closing zero byte + + + + +24+Len + + +... + + +Next element + + +
+ +Cell Array +Cell arrays are used to call cell areas containing text as well as numbers. A cell array in $[officename] Calc is defined as follows: + + + + +Offset + + + + +Name + + + + +Description + + + + + +0 + + +Col1 + + +Column number in the upper-left corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + +2 + + +Row1 + + +Row number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +4 + + +Tab1 + + +Table number in the upper-left corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +6 + + +Col2 + + +Column number in the lower-right corner of the cell area. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + +8 + + +Row2 + + +Row number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +10 + + +Tab2 + + +Table number in the lower-right corner of the cell area; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +12 + + +Count + + +Number of the following elements. Empty cells are not counted or passed. + + + + +14 + + +Col + + +Column number of the element. Numbering starts at 0. + + + + +16 + + +Row + + +Row number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +18 + + +Tab + + +Table number of the element; numbering starts at 0. + + + + +20 + + +Error + + +Error number, where the value 0 is defined as "no error." If the element comes from a formula cell the error value is determined by the formula. + + + + +22 + + +Type + + +Type of cell content, 0 == Double, 1 == String + + + + +24 + + +Value or Len + + +If type == 0: 8 byte IEEE variable of type double/floating point +If type == 1: Length of the following string, including closing zero byte. If the length including closing zero byte equals an odd value a second zero byte is added to the string so that an even value is achieved. Therefore, Len is calculated using ((StrLen+2)&~1). + + + + +26 if type==1 + + +String + + +If type == 1: String with closing zero byte + + + + +32 or 26+Len + + +... + + +Next element + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp index 102a864c93..af842817d6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part One -/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Fixed missing Headings, inserted sections, added sort element - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part One +/text/scalc/01/04060115.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Fixed missing Headings, inserted sections, added sort element + + -add-ins; analysis functions +add-ins; analysis functions analysis functions - -Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part One - - -General conversion function BASIS -Analysis functions Part Two + +Add-in Functions, List of Analysis Functions Part One + + +General conversion function BASIS +Analysis functions Part Two Back to the Overview - +
Bessel functions - -BESSELI -Calculates the modified Bessel function. -Syntax -BESSELI(x;n) -x: the value on which the function will be calculated. -n: the order of the Bessel function -
+ +BESSELI +Calculates the modified Bessel function. +Syntax +BESSELI(x;n) +x: the value on which the function will be calculated. +n: the order of the Bessel function +
- -BESSELJ -Calculates the Bessel function (cylinder function). -Syntax -BESSELJ(x;n) -x: the value on which the function will be calculated. -n: the order of the Bessel function -
+ +BESSELJ +Calculates the Bessel function (cylinder function). +Syntax +BESSELJ(x;n) +x: the value on which the function will be calculated. +n: the order of the Bessel function +
- -BESSELK -Calculates the modified Bessel function. -Syntax -BESSELK(x;n) -x: the value on which the function will be calculated. -n: the order of the Bessel function -
+ +BESSELK +Calculates the modified Bessel function. +Syntax +BESSELK(x;n) +x: the value on which the function will be calculated. +n: the order of the Bessel function +
- -BESSELY -Calculates the modified Bessel function is. -Syntax -BESSELY(x;n) -x: the value on which the function will be calculated. -n: the order of the Bessel function -
+ +BESSELY +Calculates the modified Bessel function is. +Syntax +BESSELY(x;n) +x: the value on which the function will be calculated. +n: the order of the Bessel function +
BIN2DEC function - -BIN2DEC -The result is the decimal number for the binary number entered. -Syntax -BIN2DEC (Number) -Number: the binary number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places (bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. -Example -=BIN2DEC(1100100) returns 100. -
+ +BIN2DEC +The result is the decimal number for the binary number entered. +Syntax +BIN2DEC (Number) +Number: the binary number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places (bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. +Example +=BIN2DEC(1100100) returns 100. +
BIN2HEX function - -BIN2HEX -The result is the hexadecimal number for the binary number entered. -Syntax -BIN2HEX(Number;Places) -Number: the binary number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places (bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. -Places: the number of places to be output. -Example -=BIN2HEX(1100100;6) returns 000064. -
+ +BIN2HEX +The result is the hexadecimal number for the binary number entered. +Syntax +BIN2HEX(Number;Places) +Number: the binary number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places (bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. +Places: the number of places to be output. +Example +=BIN2HEX(1100100;6) returns 000064. +
BIN2OCT function - -BIN2OCT - The result is the octal number for the binary number entered. -Syntax -BIN2OCT(Number;Places) -Number: the binary number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places (bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. -Places: the number of places to be output. -Example -=BIN2OCT(1100100;4) returns 0144. -
+ +BIN2OCT + The result is the octal number for the binary number entered. +Syntax +BIN2OCT(Number;Places) +Number: the binary number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places (bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. +Places: the number of places to be output. +Example +=BIN2OCT(1100100;4) returns 0144. +
DELTA function - -DELTA -The result is TRUE (1) if both numbers, which are delivered as an argument, are equal, otherwise it is FALSE (0). -Syntax -DELTA(Number 1;Number 2) -Example -=DELTA(1;2) returns 0. -
+ +DELTA +The result is TRUE (1) if both numbers, which are delivered as an argument, are equal, otherwise it is FALSE (0). +Syntax +DELTA(Number 1;Number 2) +Example +=DELTA(1;2) returns 0. +
DEC2BIN function - -DEC2BIN - The result is the binary number for the decimal number entered between -512 and 511. -Syntax -DEC2BIN(Number;Places) -Number: the decimal number. If Number is negative, the function returns a binary number with 10 characters. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the other 9 bits return the value. -Places: the number of places to be output. -Example -=DEC2BIN(100;8) returns 01100100. -
+ +DEC2BIN + The result is the binary number for the decimal number entered between -512 and 511. +Syntax +DEC2BIN(Number;Places) +Number: the decimal number. If Number is negative, the function returns a binary number with 10 characters. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the other 9 bits return the value. +Places: the number of places to be output. +Example +=DEC2BIN(100;8) returns 01100100. +
DEC2HEX function - -DEC2HEX -The result is the hexadecimal number for the decimal number entered. -Syntax -DEC2HEX(Number;Places) -Number: the decimal number. If Number is negative, the function returns a hexadecimal number with 10 characters (40 bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit, the other 39 bits return the value. -Places: the number of places to be output. -Example -=DEC2HEX(100;4) returns 0064. -
+ +DEC2HEX +The result is the hexadecimal number for the decimal number entered. +Syntax +DEC2HEX(Number;Places) +Number: the decimal number. If Number is negative, the function returns a hexadecimal number with 10 characters (40 bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit, the other 39 bits return the value. +Places: the number of places to be output. +Example +=DEC2HEX(100;4) returns 0064. +
DEC2OCT function - -DEC2OCT -The result is the octal number for the decimal number entered. -Syntax -DEC2OCT(Number; Places) -Number: the decimal number. If Number is negative, the function returns an octal number with 10 characters (30 bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit, the other 29 bits return the value. -Places: the number of places to be output. -Example -=DEC2OCT(100;4) returns 0144. -
+ +DEC2OCT +The result is the octal number for the decimal number entered. +Syntax +DEC2OCT(Number; Places) +Number: the decimal number. If Number is negative, the function returns an octal number with 10 characters (30 bits). The most significant bit is the sign bit, the other 29 bits return the value. +Places: the number of places to be output. +Example +=DEC2OCT(100;4) returns 0144. +
ERF function - -ERF -Returns values of the Gaussian error integral. -Syntax -ERF(Lower limit;Upper limit) -Lower limit; lower limit of integral. -Upper limit: optionally, the upper limit of the integral. If this value is missing, the calculation takes places between 0 and the lower limit. -Example -=ERF(0;1) returns 0.842701. -
+ +ERF +Returns values of the Gaussian error integral. +Syntax +ERF(Lower limit;Upper limit) +Lower limit; lower limit of integral. +Upper limit: optionally, the upper limit of the integral. If this value is missing, the calculation takes places between 0 and the lower limit. +Example +=ERF(0;1) returns 0.842701. +
ERFC function - -ERFC -Returns complementary values of the Gaussian error integral between x and infinity. -Syntax -ERFC(Lower limit) -Lower limit; lower limit of integral -Example -=ERFC(1) returns 0.157299. -
+ +ERFC +Returns complementary values of the Gaussian error integral between x and infinity. +Syntax +ERFC(Lower limit) +Lower limit; lower limit of integral +Example +=ERFC(1) returns 0.157299. +
GESTEP function - -GESTEP -The result is 1 if Number is greater than or equal to Step. -Syntax -GESTEP(Number; Step) -Example -=GESTEP(5;1) returns 1. -
+ +GESTEP +The result is 1 if Number is greater than or equal to Step. +Syntax +GESTEP(Number; Step) +Example +=GESTEP(5;1) returns 1. +
HEX2BIN function - -HEX2BIN -The result is the binary number for the hexadecimal number entered. -Syntax -HEX2BIN(Number;Places) -Number: the hexadecimal number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. -Places: the number of places to be output. -Example -=HEX2BIN(64;8) returns 01100100. -
+ +HEX2BIN +The result is the binary number for the hexadecimal number entered. +Syntax +HEX2BIN(Number;Places) +Number: the hexadecimal number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. +Places: the number of places to be output. +Example +=HEX2BIN(64;8) returns 01100100. +
HEX2DEC function - -HEX2DEC -The result is the decimal number for the hexadecimal number entered. -Syntax -HEX2DEC(Number) -Number: the hexadecimal number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. -Example -=HEX2DEC(64) returns 100. -
+ +HEX2DEC +The result is the decimal number for the hexadecimal number entered. +Syntax +HEX2DEC(Number) +Number: the hexadecimal number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. +Example +=HEX2DEC(64) returns 100. +
HEX2OCT function - -HEX2OCT -The result is the octal number for the hexadecimal number entered. -Syntax -HEX2OCT(Number;Places) -Number: the hexadecimal number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. -Places: the number of places to be output. -Example -=HEX2OCT(64;4) returns 0144. + +HEX2OCT +The result is the octal number for the hexadecimal number entered. +Syntax +HEX2OCT(Number;Places) +Number: the hexadecimal number. The number can have a maximum of 10 places. The most significant bit is the sign bit, the following bits return the value. Negative numbers are entered as two's complement. +Places: the number of places to be output. +Example +=HEX2OCT(64;4) returns 0144.
- - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp index 82ea359db4..9a7fedef02 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Statistical Functions Part Three -/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Statistical Functions Part Three +/text/scalc/01/04060183.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + Statistical Functions Part Three - +
LARGE function - -LARGE -Returns the Rank_c-th largest value in a data set. -Syntax -LARGE(Data; Rank_c) - -Data is the cell range of data. - -Rank_c is the ranking of the value. -Example -=LARGE(A1:C50; 2) gives the second largest value in A1:C50. - -SMALL, MAX, MEDIAN, PERCENTILE, PERCENTRANK, QUARTILE -
+ +LARGE +Returns the Rank_c-th largest value in a data set. +Syntax +LARGE(Data; Rank_c) + +Data is the cell range of data. + +Rank_c is the ranking of the value. +Example +=LARGE(A1:C50; 2) gives the second largest value in A1:C50. + +SMALL, MAX, MEDIAN, PERCENTILE, PERCENTRANK, QUARTILE +
SMALL function - -SMALL -Returns the Rank_c-th smallest value in a data set. -Syntax -SMALL(Data; Rank_c) - -Data is the cell range of data. - -Rank_c is the rank of the value. -Example -=SMALL(A1:C50; 2) gives the second smallest value in A1:C50. - -LARGE, MEDIAN, MIN, PERCENTILE, PERCENTRANK, QUARTILE -
+ +SMALL +Returns the Rank_c-th smallest value in a data set. +Syntax +SMALL(Data; Rank_c) + +Data is the cell range of data. + +Rank_c is the rank of the value. +Example +=SMALL(A1:C50; 2) gives the second smallest value in A1:C50. + +LARGE, MEDIAN, MIN, PERCENTILE, PERCENTRANK, QUARTILE +
CONFIDENCE function - -CONFIDENCE -Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a normal distribution. -Syntax -CONFIDENCE(Alpha; STDEV; Size) - -Alpha is the level of the confidence interval. - -STDEV is the standard deviation for the total population. - -Size is the size of the total population. -Example -=CONFIDENCE(0.05; 1.5; 100) gives 0.29. - -ZTEST -
+ +CONFIDENCE +Returns the (1-alpha) confidence interval for a normal distribution. +Syntax +CONFIDENCE(Alpha; STDEV; Size) + +Alpha is the level of the confidence interval. + +STDEV is the standard deviation for the total population. + +Size is the size of the total population. +Example +=CONFIDENCE(0.05; 1.5; 100) gives 0.29. + +ZTEST +
CORREL function - -CORREL -Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets. -Syntax -CORREL(Data_1; Data_2) - -Data_1 is the first data set. - -Data_2 is the second data set. -Example -=CORREL(A1:A50; B1:B50) calculates the correlation coefficient as a measure of the linear correlation of the two data sets. - -FISHER, FISHERINV, COVAR -
+ +CORREL +Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets. +Syntax +CORREL(Data_1; Data_2) + +Data_1 is the first data set. + +Data_2 is the second data set. +Example +=CORREL(A1:A50; B1:B50) calculates the correlation coefficient as a measure of the linear correlation of the two data sets. + +FISHER, FISHERINV, COVAR +
COVAR function - -COVAR -Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations. -Syntax -COVAR(Data_1; Data_2) - -Data_1 is the first data set. - -Data_2 is the second data set. -Example -=COVAR(A1:A30; B1:B30) - -FISHER, FISHERINV, CORREL -
+ +COVAR +Returns the covariance of the product of paired deviations. +Syntax +COVAR(Data_1; Data_2) + +Data_1 is the first data set. + +Data_2 is the second data set. +Example +=COVAR(A1:A30; B1:B30) + +FISHER, FISHERINV, CORREL +
CRITBINOM function - -CRITBINOM -Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is less than or equal to a criterion value. -Syntax -CRITBINOM(Trials; SP; Alpha) - -Trials is the total number of trials. - -SP is the probability of success for one trial. - -Alpha is the threshold probability to be reached or exceeded. -Example -=CRITBINOM(100; 0.5; 0.1) yields 44. - -BINOMDIST, FACT, HYPGEOMDIST, COMBIN, NEGBINOMDIST, PERMUT, PROB -
+ +CRITBINOM +Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is less than or equal to a criterion value. +Syntax +CRITBINOM(Trials; SP; Alpha) + +Trials is the total number of trials. + +SP is the probability of success for one trial. + +Alpha is the threshold probability to be reached or exceeded. +Example +=CRITBINOM(100; 0.5; 0.1) yields 44. + +BINOMDIST, FACT, HYPGEOMDIST, COMBIN, NEGBINOMDIST, PERMUT, PROB +
KURT function - -KURT -Returns the kurtosis of a data set (at least 4 values required). -Syntax -KURT(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) - -Number 1,Number 2,...Number 30 are numeric arguments or ranges representing a random sample of distribution. -Example -=KURT(A1;A2;A3;A4;A5;A6) - -SKEW, STDEV, STDEVP, VAR, VARP -
+ +KURT +Returns the kurtosis of a data set (at least 4 values required). +Syntax +KURT(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) + +Number 1,Number 2,...Number 30 are numeric arguments or ranges representing a random sample of distribution. +Example +=KURT(A1;A2;A3;A4;A5;A6) + +SKEW, STDEV, STDEVP, VAR, VARP +
LOGINV function - -LOGINV -Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution. -Syntax -LOGINV(Number; Mean; STDEV) - -Number is the probability value for which the inverse standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. - -Mean is the arithmetic mean of the standard logarithmic distribution. - -STDEV is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. -Example -=LOGINV(0.05; 0; 1) returns 0.19. - -EXP, LN, LOG, LOG10, LOGNORMDIST -
+ +LOGINV +Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution. +Syntax +LOGINV(Number; Mean; STDEV) + +Number is the probability value for which the inverse standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. + +Mean is the arithmetic mean of the standard logarithmic distribution. + +STDEV is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. +Example +=LOGINV(0.05; 0; 1) returns 0.19. + +EXP, LN, LOG, LOG10, LOGNORMDIST +
LOGNORMDIST function - -LOGNORMDIST -Returns the cumulative lognormal distribution. -Syntax -LOGNORMDIST(Number; Mean; STDEV) - -Number is the probability value for which the standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. - -Mean is the mean value of the standard logarithmic distribution. - -STDEV is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. -Example -=LOGNORMDIST(0.1; 0; 1) returns 0.01. - -EXP, LN, LOG, LOG10, LOGINV + +LOGNORMDIST +Returns the cumulative lognormal distribution. +Syntax +LOGNORMDIST(Number; Mean; STDEV) + +Number is the probability value for which the standard logarithmic distribution is to be calculated. + +Mean is the mean value of the standard logarithmic distribution. + +STDEV is the standard deviation of the standard logarithmic distribution. +Example +=LOGNORMDIST(0.1; 0; 1) returns 0.01. + +EXP, LN, LOG, LOG10, LOGINV
- - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp index 8d40507408..8cea6f2c82 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Statistical Functions Part Four -/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Inserted sections, added sort element - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Statistical Functions Part Four +/text/scalc/01/04060184.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Inserted sections, added sort element + + + Statistical Functions Part Four - +
MAX function - -MAX -Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. -Syntax -MAX(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) - -Number 1; Number 2;...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges. -Example -=MAX(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200) returns the largest value from the list. -=MAX(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list. -
+ +MAX +Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. +Syntax +MAX(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) + +Number 1; Number 2;...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example +=MAX(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200) returns the largest value from the list. +=MAX(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list. +
MAXA function - -MAXA -Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. In opposite to MAX, here you can enter text. The value of the text is 0. -Syntax -MAXA(Value 1; Value 2; ... Value 30) - -Value 1; Value 2;...Value 30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. -Example -=MAXA(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200;"Text") returns the largest value from the list. -=MAXA(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list. -
+ +MAXA +Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments. In opposite to MAX, here you can enter text. The value of the text is 0. +Syntax +MAXA(Value 1; Value 2; ... Value 30) + +Value 1; Value 2;...Value 30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. +Example +=MAXA(A1;A2;A3;50;100;200;"Text") returns the largest value from the list. +=MAXA(A1:B100) returns the largest value from the list. +
MEDIAN function - -MEDIAN -Returns the median of a set of numbers. In a set containing an uneven number of values, the median will be the number in the middle of the set and in a set containing an even number of values, it will be the mean of the two values in the middle of the set. -Syntax -MEDIAN(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) - -Number 1; Number 2;...Number 30 are values or ranges, which represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. -Example -for an odd number: =MEDIAN(1; 5; 9; 20; 21) returns 9 as the median value. -for an even number: =MEDIAN(1; 5; 9; 20) returns the average of the two middle values 5 and 9, thus 7. -
+ +MEDIAN +Returns the median of a set of numbers. In a set containing an uneven number of values, the median will be the number in the middle of the set and in a set containing an even number of values, it will be the mean of the two values in the middle of the set. +Syntax +MEDIAN(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) + +Number 1; Number 2;...Number 30 are values or ranges, which represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. +Example +for an odd number: =MEDIAN(1; 5; 9; 20; 21) returns 9 as the median value. +for an even number: =MEDIAN(1; 5; 9; 20) returns the average of the two middle values 5 and 9, thus 7. +
MIN function - -MIN -Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. -Syntax -MIN(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) - -Number 1; Number 2;...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges. -Example -=MIN(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list. -
+ +MIN +Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. +Syntax +MIN(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) + +Number 1; Number 2;...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example +=MIN(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list. +
MINA function - -MINA -Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. Here you can also enter text. The value of the text is 0. -Syntax -MINA(Value 1; Value 2; ... Value 30) - -Value 1; Value 2;...Value 30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. -Example -=MINA(1; "Text"; 20) returns 0. -=MINA(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list. -
+ +MINA +Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments. Here you can also enter text. The value of the text is 0. +Syntax +MINA(Value 1; Value 2; ... Value 30) + +Value 1; Value 2;...Value 30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. +Example +=MINA(1; "Text"; 20) returns 0. +=MINA(A1:B100) returns the smallest value in the list. +
AVEDEV function - -AVEDEV -Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean. Displays the diffusion in a data set. -Syntax -AVEDEV(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) - -Number 1, Number 2,...Number 30 are values or ranges that represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. -Example -=AVEDEV(A1:A50) -
+ +AVEDEV +Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean. Displays the diffusion in a data set. +Syntax +AVEDEV(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) + +Number 1, Number 2,...Number 30 are values or ranges that represent a sample. Each number can also be replaced by a reference. +Example +=AVEDEV(A1:A50) +
AVERAGE function - -AVERAGE -Returns the average of the arguments. -Syntax -AVERAGE(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) - -Number 1; Number 2;...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges. -Example -=AVERAGE(A1:A50) -
+ +AVERAGE +Returns the average of the arguments. +Syntax +AVERAGE(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) + +Number 1; Number 2;...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example +=AVERAGE(A1:A50) +
AVERAGEA function - -AVERAGEA -Returns the average of the arguments. The value of a text is 0. -Syntax -AVERAGEA(Value 1; Value 2; ... Value 30) - -Value 1; Value 2;...Value 30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. -Example -=AVERAGEA(A1:A50) -
+ +AVERAGEA +Returns the average of the arguments. The value of a text is 0. +Syntax +AVERAGEA(Value 1; Value 2; ... Value 30) + +Value 1; Value 2;...Value 30 are values or ranges. Text has the value of 0. +Example +=AVERAGEA(A1:A50) +
MODE function - -MODE -Returns the most common value in a data set. If there are several values with the same frequency, it returns the smallest value. An error occurs when a value doesn't appear twice. -Syntax -MODE(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) - -Number 1; Number 2;...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges. -Example -=MODE(A1:A50) -
+ +MODE +Returns the most common value in a data set. If there are several values with the same frequency, it returns the smallest value. An error occurs when a value doesn't appear twice. +Syntax +MODE(Number 1; Number 2; ...Number 30) + +Number 1; Number 2;...Number 30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example +=MODE(A1:A50) +
NEGBINOMDIST function - -NEGBINOMDIST -Returns the negative binomial distribution. -Syntax -NEGBINOMDIST(X; R; SP) - -X represents the value returned for unsuccessful tests. - -R represents the value returned for successful tests. - -SP is the probability of the success of an attempt. -Example -=NEGBINOMDIST(1; 1; 0.5) returns 0.25. -
+ +NEGBINOMDIST +Returns the negative binomial distribution. +Syntax +NEGBINOMDIST(X; R; SP) + +X represents the value returned for unsuccessful tests. + +R represents the value returned for successful tests. + +SP is the probability of the success of an attempt. +Example +=NEGBINOMDIST(1; 1; 0.5) returns 0.25. +
NORMINV function - -NORMINV -Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution. -Syntax -NORMINV(Number; Mean; STDEV) - -Number represents the probability value used to determine the inverse normal distribution. - -Mean represents the mean value in the normal distribution. - -STDEV represents the standard deviation of the normal distribution. -Example -=NORMINV(0.9; 63; 5) returns 69.41. If the average egg weighs 63 grams with a standard deviation of 5, then there will be 90% probability that the egg will not be heavier than 69.41g grams. -
+ +NORMINV +Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution. +Syntax +NORMINV(Number; Mean; STDEV) + +Number represents the probability value used to determine the inverse normal distribution. + +Mean represents the mean value in the normal distribution. + +STDEV represents the standard deviation of the normal distribution. +Example +=NORMINV(0.9; 63; 5) returns 69.41. If the average egg weighs 63 grams with a standard deviation of 5, then there will be 90% probability that the egg will not be heavier than 69.41g grams. +
NORMDIST function - -NORMDIST -Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution. -Syntax -NORMDIST(Number; Mean; STDEV; C) - -Number is the value of the distribution based on which the normal distribution is to be calculated. - -Mean is the mean value of the distribution. - -STDEV is the standard deviation of the distribution. - -C = 0 calculates the density function; C = 1 calculates the distribution. -Example -=NORMDIST(70; 63; 5; 0) returns 0.03. -=NORMDIST(70; 63; 5; 1) returns 0.92. -
+ +NORMDIST +Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution. +Syntax +NORMDIST(Number; Mean; STDEV; C) + +Number is the value of the distribution based on which the normal distribution is to be calculated. + +Mean is the mean value of the distribution. + +STDEV is the standard deviation of the distribution. + +C = 0 calculates the density function; C = 1 calculates the distribution. +Example +=NORMDIST(70; 63; 5; 0) returns 0.03. +=NORMDIST(70; 63; 5; 1) returns 0.92. +
PEARSON function - -PEARSON -Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient r. -Syntax -PEARSON(Data_1; Data_2) - -Data_1 represents the array of the first data set. - -Data_2 represents the array of the second data set. -Example -=PEARSON(A1:A30; B1:B30) returns the Pearson correlation coefficient of both data sets. -
+ +PEARSON +Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient r. +Syntax +PEARSON(Data_1; Data_2) + +Data_1 represents the array of the first data set. + +Data_2 represents the array of the second data set. +Example +=PEARSON(A1:A30; B1:B30) returns the Pearson correlation coefficient of both data sets. +
PHI function - -PHI -Returns the values of the distribution function for a standard normal distribution. -Syntax -PHI(Number) - -Number represents the value based on which the standard normal distribution is calculated. -Example -PHI(2.25) = 0.03 -PHI(-2.25) = 0.03 -PHI(0) = 0.4 -
+ +PHI +Returns the values of the distribution function for a standard normal distribution. +Syntax +PHI(Number) + +Number represents the value based on which the standard normal distribution is calculated. +Example +PHI(2.25) = 0.03 +PHI(-2.25) = 0.03 +PHI(0) = 0.4 +
POISSON function - -POISSON -Returns the Poisson distribution. -Syntax -POISSON(Number; Mean; C) - -Number represents the value based on which the Poisson distribution is calculated. - -Mean represents the middle value of the Poisson distribution. - -C = 0 calculates the density function; C = 1 calculates the distribution. -Example -=POISSON(60;50;1) returns 0.93. -
+ +POISSON +Returns the Poisson distribution. +Syntax +POISSON(Number; Mean; C) + +Number represents the value based on which the Poisson distribution is calculated. + +Mean represents the middle value of the Poisson distribution. + +C = 0 calculates the density function; C = 1 calculates the distribution. +Example +=POISSON(60;50;1) returns 0.93. +
PERCENTILE function - -PERCENTILE -Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array. A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. -Syntax -PERCENTILE(Data;Alpha) - -Data represents the array of data. - -Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. -Example -=PERCENTILE(A1:A50; 0.1) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50. -
+ +PERCENTILE +Returns the alpha-percentile of data values in an array. A percentile returns the scale value for a data series which goes from the smallest (Alpha=0) to the largest value (alpha=1) of a data series. For Alpha = 25%, the percentile means the first quartile; Alpha = 50% is the MEDIAN. +Syntax +PERCENTILE(Data;Alpha) + +Data represents the array of data. + +Alpha represents the percentage of the scale between 0 and 1. +Example +=PERCENTILE(A1:A50; 0.1) represents the value in the data set, which equals 10% of the total data scale in A1:A50. +
PERCENTRANK function - -PERCENTRANK -Returns the percentage rank of a value in a sample. -Syntax -PERCENTRANK(Data; Value) - -Data represents the array of data in the sample. - -Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. -Example -=PERCENTRANK(A1:A50; 50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear. -
+ +PERCENTRANK +Returns the percentage rank of a value in a sample. +Syntax +PERCENTRANK(Data; Value) + +Data represents the array of data in the sample. + +Value represents the value whose percentile rank must be determined. +Example +=PERCENTRANK(A1:A50; 50) returns the percentage rank of the value 50 from the total range of all values found in A1:A50. If 50 falls outside the total range, an error message will appear. +
QUARTILE function - -QUARTILE -Returns the quartile of a data set. -Syntax -QUARTILE(Data; Type) - -Data represents the array of data in the sample. - -Type represents the type of quartile. (0 = MIN, 1 = 25%, 2 = 50% (MEDIAN), 3 = 75% and 4 = MAX.) -Example -=QUARTILE(A1:A50; 2) returns the value of which 25% of the scale corresponds to the lowest to highest values in the range A1:A50. + +QUARTILE +Returns the quartile of a data set. +Syntax +QUARTILE(Data; Type) + +Data represents the array of data in the sample. + +Type represents the type of quartile. (0 = MIN, 1 = 25%, 2 = 50% (MEDIAN), 3 = 75% and 4 = MAX.) +Example +=QUARTILE(A1:A50; 2) returns the value of which 25% of the scale corresponds to the lowest to highest values in the range A1:A50.
- - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp index 3b609367f9..ac71fd29cb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Statistical Functions Part Five -/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Statistical Functions Part Five +/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + Statistical Functions Part Five - +
RANK function - -RANK -Returns the rank of a number in a sample. -Syntax -RANK(Value; Data; Type) - -Value is the value, whose rank is to be determined. - -Data is the array or range of data in the sample. - -Type (optional) is the sequence order. = 0 means ascending, = 1 means descending. -Example -=RANK(A10; A1:A50) returns the ranking of the value in A10 in value range A1:A50. If Value does not exist within the range an error message is displayed. - -PERCENTRANK -
+ +RANK +Returns the rank of a number in a sample. +Syntax +RANK(Value; Data; Type) + +Value is the value, whose rank is to be determined. + +Data is the array or range of data in the sample. + +Type (optional) is the sequence order. = 0 means ascending, = 1 means descending. +Example +=RANK(A10; A1:A50) returns the ranking of the value in A10 in value range A1:A50. If Value does not exist within the range an error message is displayed. + +PERCENTRANK +
SKEW function - -SKEW -Returns the skewness of a distribution. -Syntax -SKEW(Number 1; number 2; ...number 30) - -Number 1, number 2...number 30 are numerical values or ranges. -Example -=SKEW(A1:A50) calculates the value of skew for the data referenced. - -KURT, STDEV, STDEVP, VAR, VARP -
+ +SKEW +Returns the skewness of a distribution. +Syntax +SKEW(Number 1; number 2; ...number 30) + +Number 1, number 2...number 30 are numerical values or ranges. +Example +=SKEW(A1:A50) calculates the value of skew for the data referenced. + +KURT, STDEV, STDEVP, VAR, VARP +
-regression lines +regression lines FORECAST function - -FORECAST -Extrapolates future values based on existing x and y values. -Syntax -FORECAST(Value; data_Y; data_X) - -Value is the x value, for which the y value on the linear regression is to be returned. - -Data_Y is the array or range of known y's. - -Data_X is the array or range of known x's. -Example -=FORECAST(50; A1:A50; B1;B50) returns the Y value expected for the X value of 50 if the X and Y values in both references are linked by a linear trend. - -LINEST, LOGEST, TREND, GROWTH -
+ +FORECAST +Extrapolates future values based on existing x and y values. +Syntax +FORECAST(Value; data_Y; data_X) + +Value is the x value, for which the y value on the linear regression is to be returned. + +Data_Y is the array or range of known y's. + +Data_X is the array or range of known x's. +Example +=FORECAST(50; A1:A50; B1;B50) returns the Y value expected for the X value of 50 if the X and Y values in both references are linked by a linear trend. + +LINEST, LOGEST, TREND, GROWTH +
STDEV function - -STDEV -Estimates the standard deviation based on a sample. -Syntax -STDEV(Number 1;number 2;...number 30) - -Number 1, number 2, ... number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample based on an entire population. -Example -=STDEV(A1:A50) returns the estimated standard deviation based on the data referenced. - -AVEDEV, AVERAGE, MODE, STDEVP, VAR -
+ +STDEV +Estimates the standard deviation based on a sample. +Syntax +STDEV(Number 1;number 2;...number 30) + +Number 1, number 2, ... number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample based on an entire population. +Example +=STDEV(A1:A50) returns the estimated standard deviation based on the data referenced. + +AVEDEV, AVERAGE, MODE, STDEVP, VAR +
STDEVA function - -STDEVA -Calculates the standard deviation of an estimation based on a sample. -Syntax -STDEVA(Value 1;value 2;...value 30) - -Value 1,value 2,...value 30 are values or ranges representing a sample derived from an entire population. Text has the value 0. -Example -=STDEVA(A1:A50) returns the estimated standard deviation based on the data referenced. - -STDEV, STDEVP and STDEVPA -
+ +STDEVA +Calculates the standard deviation of an estimation based on a sample. +Syntax +STDEVA(Value 1;value 2;...value 30) + +Value 1,value 2,...value 30 are values or ranges representing a sample derived from an entire population. Text has the value 0. +Example +=STDEVA(A1:A50) returns the estimated standard deviation based on the data referenced. + +STDEV, STDEVP and STDEVPA +
STDEVP function - -STDEVP -Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. -Syntax -STDEVP(Number 1;number 2;...number 30) - -Number 1,number 2,...number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample based on an entire population. -Example -=STDEVP(A1:A50) returns a standard deviation of the data referenced. - -AVEDEV, AVERAGE, MODE, STDEV, VARP -
+ +STDEVP +Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. +Syntax +STDEVP(Number 1;number 2;...number 30) + +Number 1,number 2,...number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample based on an entire population. +Example +=STDEVP(A1:A50) returns a standard deviation of the data referenced. + +AVEDEV, AVERAGE, MODE, STDEV, VARP +
STDEVPA function - -STDEVPA -Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. -Syntax -STDEVPA(Value 1;value 2;...value 30) - -Value 1,value 2,...value 30 are values or ranges representing a sample derived from an entire population. Text has the value 0. -Example -=STDEVPA(A1:A50) returns the standard deviation of the data referenced. - -STDEVP and STDEV -
+ +STDEVPA +Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population. +Syntax +STDEVPA(Value 1;value 2;...value 30) + +Value 1,value 2,...value 30 are values or ranges representing a sample derived from an entire population. Text has the value 0. +Example +=STDEVPA(A1:A50) returns the standard deviation of the data referenced. + +STDEVP and STDEV +
STANDARDIZE function - -STANDARDIZE -Converts a random variable to a normalized value. -Syntax -STANDARDIZE(Number; mean; STDEV) - -Number is the value to be standardized. - -Mean is the arithmetic mean of the distribution. - -STDEV is the standard deviation of the distribution. -Example -=STANDARDIZE(11; 10; 1) returns 1. The value 11 in a normal distribution with a mean of 10 and a standard deviation of 1 is as much above the mean of 10, as the value 1 is above the mean of the standard normal distribution. - -ZTEST, NORMINV, NORMDIST,NORMSINV, NORMSDIST -
+ +STANDARDIZE +Converts a random variable to a normalized value. +Syntax +STANDARDIZE(Number; mean; STDEV) + +Number is the value to be standardized. + +Mean is the arithmetic mean of the distribution. + +STDEV is the standard deviation of the distribution. +Example +=STANDARDIZE(11; 10; 1) returns 1. The value 11 in a normal distribution with a mean of 10 and a standard deviation of 1 is as much above the mean of 10, as the value 1 is above the mean of the standard normal distribution. + +ZTEST, NORMINV, NORMDIST,NORMSINV, NORMSDIST +
NORMSINV function - -NORMSINV -Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution. -Syntax -NORMINV(Number) - -Number is the probability to which the inverse standard normal distribution is calculated. -Example -NORMSINV(0.908789) returns 1.3333. - -ZTEST, NORMINV, NORMDIST, STANDARDIZE, NORMSDIST -
+ +NORMSINV +Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution. +Syntax +NORMINV(Number) + +Number is the probability to which the inverse standard normal distribution is calculated. +Example +NORMSINV(0.908789) returns 1.3333. + +ZTEST, NORMINV, NORMDIST, STANDARDIZE, NORMSDIST +
NORMSDIST function - -NORMSDIST -Returns the normal cumulative distribution. -Syntax -NORMSDIST(Number) - -Number is the value to which the standard normal distribution is calculated. -Example -=NORMSDIST(1) returns 0.84. The area below the standard normal distribution curve to the left of X value 1 is 84% of the total area. - -ZTEST, NORMINV, NORMDIST, PHI, STANDARDIZE, NORMSINV -
+ +NORMSDIST +Returns the normal cumulative distribution. +Syntax +NORMSDIST(Number) + +Number is the value to which the standard normal distribution is calculated. +Example +=NORMSDIST(1) returns 0.84. The area below the standard normal distribution curve to the left of X value 1 is 84% of the total area. + +ZTEST, NORMINV, NORMDIST, PHI, STANDARDIZE, NORMSINV +
SLOPE function - -SLOPE -Returns the slope of the linear regression line. The slope is adapted to the data points set in the y and x values. -Syntax -SLOPE(data_Y; data_X) - -Data_Y is the array or matrix of Y data. - -Data_X is the array or matrix of X data. -Example -=SLOPE(A1:A50; B1:B50) - -INTERCEPT, RSQ, PEARSON, LINEST, LOGEST, STEYX, TREND -
+ +SLOPE +Returns the slope of the linear regression line. The slope is adapted to the data points set in the y and x values. +Syntax +SLOPE(data_Y; data_X) + +Data_Y is the array or matrix of Y data. + +Data_X is the array or matrix of X data. +Example +=SLOPE(A1:A50; B1:B50) + +INTERCEPT, RSQ, PEARSON, LINEST, LOGEST, STEYX, TREND +
STEYX function - -STEYX -Returns the standard error of the predicted y value for each x in the regression. -Syntax -STEYX(data_Y; data_X) - -Data_Y is the array or matrix of Y data. - -Data_X is the array or matrix of X data. -Example -=STEXY(A1:A50; B1:B50) - -INTERCEPT, RSQ, PEARSON, LINEST, LOGEST, SLOPE -
+ +STEYX +Returns the standard error of the predicted y value for each x in the regression. +Syntax +STEYX(data_Y; data_X) + +Data_Y is the array or matrix of Y data. + +Data_X is the array or matrix of X data. +Example +=STEXY(A1:A50; B1:B50) + +INTERCEPT, RSQ, PEARSON, LINEST, LOGEST, SLOPE +
DEVSQ function - -DEVSQ -Returns the sum of squares of deviations based on a sample mean. -Syntax -DEVSQ(Number 1; number 2; ...number 30) - -Number 1,number 2,...number 30 numerical values or ranges representing a sample. -Example -=DEVSQ(A1:A50) - -AVEDEV, STDEV, STDEVP, VAR, VARP -
+ +DEVSQ +Returns the sum of squares of deviations based on a sample mean. +Syntax +DEVSQ(Number 1; number 2; ...number 30) + +Number 1,number 2,...number 30 numerical values or ranges representing a sample. +Example +=DEVSQ(A1:A50) + +AVEDEV, STDEV, STDEVP, VAR, VARP +
TINV function - -TINV -Returns the inverse of the t-distribution. -Syntax -TINV(Number; degrees_freedom) - -Number is the probability associated with the two-tailed t-distribution. - -Degrees_freedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. -Example -=TINV(0.1; 6) returns 1.94 - -TTEST, TDIST -
+ +TINV +Returns the inverse of the t-distribution. +Syntax +TINV(Number; degrees_freedom) + +Number is the probability associated with the two-tailed t-distribution. + +Degrees_freedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. +Example +=TINV(0.1; 6) returns 1.94 + +TTEST, TDIST +
TTEST function - -TTEST -Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test. -Syntax -TTEST(Data_1; Data_2; Mode; Type) - -Data_1 is the dependent array or range of data for the first record. - -Data_2 is the dependent array or range of data for the second record. - -Mode = 1 calculates the one-tailed test, Mode = 2 the two- tailed test. - -Type is the kind of t-test to perform. Type 1 means paired. Type 2 means two samples, equal variance (homoscedastic). Type 3 means two samples, unequal variance (heteroscedastic). -Example -=TTEST(A1:A50; B1:B50; 2; 2) - -TINV, TDIST -
+ +TTEST +Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test. +Syntax +TTEST(Data_1; Data_2; Mode; Type) + +Data_1 is the dependent array or range of data for the first record. + +Data_2 is the dependent array or range of data for the second record. + +Mode = 1 calculates the one-tailed test, Mode = 2 the two- tailed test. + +Type is the kind of t-test to perform. Type 1 means paired. Type 2 means two samples, equal variance (homoscedastic). Type 3 means two samples, unequal variance (heteroscedastic). +Example +=TTEST(A1:A50; B1:B50; 2; 2) + +TINV, TDIST +
TDIST function - -TDIST -Returns the t-distribution. -Syntax -TDIST(Number; Degrees_freedom; Mode) - -Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. - -Degrees_freedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. - -Mode = 1 returns the one-tailed test, Mode = 2 returns the two-tailed test. -Example -=TDIST(12; 5; 1) - -TINV, TTEST -
+ +TDIST +Returns the t-distribution. +Syntax +TDIST(Number; Degrees_freedom; Mode) + +Number is the value for which the t-distribution is calculated. + +Degrees_freedom is the number of degrees of freedom for the t-distribution. + +Mode = 1 returns the one-tailed test, Mode = 2 returns the two-tailed test. +Example +=TDIST(12; 5; 1) + +TINV, TTEST +
VAR function - -VAR -Estimates the variance based on a sample. -Syntax -VAR(Number 1; number 2; ...number 30) - -Number 1,number 2,...number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample based on an entire population. -Example -=VAR(A1:A50) - -AVEDEV, AVERAGE, MODE, STDEV -
+ +VAR +Estimates the variance based on a sample. +Syntax +VAR(Number 1; number 2; ...number 30) + +Number 1,number 2,...number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing a sample based on an entire population. +Example +=VAR(A1:A50) + +AVEDEV, AVERAGE, MODE, STDEV +
VARA function - -VARA -Estimates a variance based on a sample. The value of text is 0. -Syntax -VARA(Value 1; value 2; ...value 30) - -Value 1,value 2,...value 30 are values or ranges representing a sample derived from an entire population. Text has the value 0. -Example -=VARA(A1:A50) - -VAR, STDEV and STDEVA -
+ +VARA +Estimates a variance based on a sample. The value of text is 0. +Syntax +VARA(Value 1; value 2; ...value 30) + +Value 1,value 2,...value 30 are values or ranges representing a sample derived from an entire population. Text has the value 0. +Example +=VARA(A1:A50) + +VAR, STDEV and STDEVA +
VARP function - -VARP -Calculates a variance based on the entire population. -Syntax -VARP(Number 1; number 2; ...number 30) - -Number 1,number 2,...number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing an entire population. -Example -=VARP(A1:A50) - -AVEDEV, AVERAGE, MODE, STDEV -
+ +VARP +Calculates a variance based on the entire population. +Syntax +VARP(Number 1; number 2; ...number 30) + +Number 1,number 2,...number 30 are numerical values or ranges representing an entire population. +Example +=VARP(A1:A50) + +AVEDEV, AVERAGE, MODE, STDEV +
VARPA function - -VARPA -Calculates the variance based on the entire population. The value of text is 0. -Syntax -VARA(Value 1; value 2; ...value 30) - -Value 1,value 2,...value 30 are values or ranges representing an entire population. -Example -=VARPA(A1:A50) - -STDEVP and STDEVPA -
+ +VARPA +Calculates the variance based on the entire population. The value of text is 0. +Syntax +VARA(Value 1; value 2; ...value 30) + +Value 1,value 2,...value 30 are values or ranges representing an entire population. +Example +=VARPA(A1:A50) + +STDEVP and STDEVPA +
PERMUT function - -PERMUT -Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects. -Syntax -PERMUT(Count_1; Count_2) - -Count_1 is the total number of objects. - -Count_2 is the number of objects in each permutation. -Example -=PERMUT(6; 3) returns 120. There are 120 different possibilities, to pick a sequence of 3 playing cards out of 6 playing cards. - -BINOMDIST, FACT, HYPGEOMDIST, COMBIN, CRITBINOM, NEGBINOMDIST -
+ +PERMUT +Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects. +Syntax +PERMUT(Count_1; Count_2) + +Count_1 is the total number of objects. + +Count_2 is the number of objects in each permutation. +Example +=PERMUT(6; 3) returns 120. There are 120 different possibilities, to pick a sequence of 3 playing cards out of 6 playing cards. + +BINOMDIST, FACT, HYPGEOMDIST, COMBIN, CRITBINOM, NEGBINOMDIST +
PERMUTATIONA function - -PERMUTATIONA -Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects (repetition allowed). -Syntax -PERMUTATIONA(Count_1; Count_2) - -Count_1 is the total number of objects. - -Count_2 is the number of objects in each permutation. -Example -How often can 2 objects be selected from a total of 11 objects? -PERMUTATIONA(11;2) returns 121. -PERMUTATIONA(6; 3) returns 216. There are 216 different possibilities to put a sequence of 3 playing cards together out of six playing cards if every card is returned before the next one is drawn. - -BINOMDIST, FACT, HYPGEOMDIST, COMBINA, CRITBINOM, NEGBINOMDIST -
+ +PERMUTATIONA +Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects (repetition allowed). +Syntax +PERMUTATIONA(Count_1; Count_2) + +Count_1 is the total number of objects. + +Count_2 is the number of objects in each permutation. +Example +How often can 2 objects be selected from a total of 11 objects? +PERMUTATIONA(11;2) returns 121. +PERMUTATIONA(6; 3) returns 216. There are 216 different possibilities to put a sequence of 3 playing cards together out of six playing cards if every card is returned before the next one is drawn. + +BINOMDIST, FACT, HYPGEOMDIST, COMBINA, CRITBINOM, NEGBINOMDIST +
PROB function - -PROB -Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits. If there is no End value, this function calculates the probability based on the principle that the Data values are equal to the value of Start. -Syntax -PROB(Data; Probability: Start; End) - -Data is the array or range of data in the sample. - -Probability is the array or range of the corresponding probabilities. - -Start is the start value of the interval whose probabilities are to be summed. - -End (optional) is the end value of the interval whose probabilities are to be summed. If this parameter is missing, the probability for the Start value is calculated. -Example -=PROB(A1:A50; B1:B50; 50; 60) returns the probability with which a value within the range of A1:A50 is also within the limits between 50 and 60. Every value within the range of A1:A50 has a probability within the range of B1:B50. - -BINOMDIST, CRITBINOM -
+ +PROB +Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits. If there is no End value, this function calculates the probability based on the principle that the Data values are equal to the value of Start. +Syntax +PROB(Data; Probability: Start; End) + +Data is the array or range of data in the sample. + +Probability is the array or range of the corresponding probabilities. + +Start is the start value of the interval whose probabilities are to be summed. + +End (optional) is the end value of the interval whose probabilities are to be summed. If this parameter is missing, the probability for the Start value is calculated. +Example +=PROB(A1:A50; B1:B50; 50; 60) returns the probability with which a value within the range of A1:A50 is also within the limits between 50 and 60. Every value within the range of A1:A50 has a probability within the range of B1:B50. + +BINOMDIST, CRITBINOM +
WEIBULL function - -WEIBULL -Returns the values of the Weibull distribution. -Syntax -WEIBULL(Number; Alpha; Beta; C) - -Number is the value at which to calculate the Weibull distribution. - -Alpha is the Alpha parameter of the Weibull distribution. - -Beta is the Beta parameter of the Weibull distribution. - -C indicates the type of function. If C equals 0 the form of the function is calculated, if C equals 1 the distribution is calculated. -Example -=WEIBULL(2; 1; 1; 1) returns 0.86. - -EXPONDIST + +WEIBULL +Returns the values of the Weibull distribution. +Syntax +WEIBULL(Number; Alpha; Beta; C) + +Number is the value at which to calculate the Weibull distribution. + +Alpha is the Alpha parameter of the Weibull distribution. + +Beta is the Beta parameter of the Weibull distribution. + +C indicates the type of function. If C equals 0 the form of the function is calculated, if C equals 1 the distribution is calculated. +Example +=WEIBULL(2; 1; 1; 1) returns 0.86. + +EXPONDIST
- - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp index 2f4be4b54a..ee76cf5d03 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Operators in $[officename] Calc -/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Operators in $[officename] Calc +/text/scalc/01/04060199.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -formula functions; operators +formula functions; operators operators; formula functions - -Operators in $[officename] Calc -You can use the following operators in $[officename] Calc: -Arithmetical Operators -These operators return numerical results. - - - -Operator - - -Name - - -Example - - - - -+ (Plus) - - -Addition - - -1+1 - - - - -- (Minus) - - -Subtraction - - -2-1 - - - - -- (Minus) - - -Negation - - --5 - - - - -* (asterisk) - - -Multiplication - - -2*2 - - - - -/ (Slash) - - -Division - - -9/3 - - - - -% (Percent) - - -Percent - - -15% - - - - -^ (Caret) - - -Exponentiation - - -3^2 - - -
- -Comparative operators -These operators return either true or false. - - - -Operator - - -Name - - -Example - - - - -= (equal sign) - - -Equal - - -A1=B1 - - - - -> (Greater than) - - -Greater than - - -A1>B1 - - - - -< (Less than) - - -Less than - - -A1<B1 - - - - ->= (Greater than or equal to) - - -Greater than or equal to - - -A1>=B1 - - - - -<= (Less than or equal to) - - -Less than or equal to - - -A1<=B1 - - - - -<> (Inequality) - - -Inequality - - -A1<>B1 - - -
- -Text operators -The operator combines separate texts into one text. - - - -Operator - - -Name - - -Example - - - - -& (And) - + +Operators in $[officename] Calc +You can use the following operators in $[officename] Calc: +Arithmetical Operators +These operators return numerical results. +
+ + +Operator + + +Name + + +Example + + + + ++ (Plus) + + +Addition + + +1+1 + + + + +- (Minus) + + +Subtraction + + +2-1 + + + + +- (Minus) + + +Negation + + +-5 + + + + +* (asterisk) + + +Multiplication + + +2*2 + + + + +/ (Slash) + + +Division + + +9/3 + + + + +% (Percent) + + +Percent + + +15% + + + + +^ (Caret) + + +Exponentiation + + +3^2 + + +
+ +Comparative operators +These operators return either true or false. + + + +Operator + + +Name + + +Example + + + + += (equal sign) + + +Equal + + +A1=B1 + + + + +> (Greater than) + + +Greater than + + +A1>B1 + + + + +< (Less than) + + +Less than + + +A1<B1 + + + + +>= (Greater than or equal to) + + +Greater than or equal to + + +A1>=B1 + + + + +<= (Less than or equal to) + + +Less than or equal to + + +A1<=B1 + + + + +<> (Inequality) + + +Inequality + + +A1<>B1 + + +
+ +Text operators +The operator combines separate texts into one text. + + + +Operator + + +Name + + +Example + + + + +& (And) + text concatenation AND - -text concatenation AND - - -"Sun" & "day" is "Sunday" - - -
- -Reference operators -These operators merge cell ranges. - - - -Operator - - -Name - - -Example - - - - -: (Colon) - - -Range - - -A1:C108 - - - - -! (Exclamation point) - + +text concatenation AND + + +"Sun" & "day" is "Sunday" + + +
+ +Reference operators +These operators merge cell ranges. + + + +Operator + + +Name + + +Example + + + + +: (Colon) + + +Range + + +A1:C108 + + + + +! (Exclamation point) + intersection operator - -Intersection - - -SUM(A1:B6!B5:C12) -Calculates the sum of all cells in the intersection; in this example, the result yields the sum of cells B5 and B6. - - -
- - - + +Intersection + + +SUM(A1:B6!B5:C12) +Calculates the sum of all cells in the intersection; in this example, the result yields the sum of cells B5 and B6. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp index 2c500f67f7..bd4308ca07 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Define Names -/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Define Names +/text/scalc/01/04070100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Define Names + +Define Names Opens a dialog where you can specify a name for a selected area. - -Use the mouse to define ranges or type the reference into the Define Name dialog fields. - + +Use the mouse to define ranges or type the reference into the Define Name dialog fields. + The Sheet Area box on the Formula bar contains a list of defined names for the ranges. Click a name from this box to highlight the corresponding reference on the spreadsheet. Names given formulas or parts of a formula are not listed here. - -Name + +Name Enter the name of the area for which you want to define a reference. All area names already defined in the spreadsheet are listed in the text field below. If you click a name on the list, the corresponding reference in the document will be shown with a blue frame. If multiple cell ranges belong to the same area name, they are displayed with different colored frames. - -Assigned to -The reference of the selected area name is shown here as an absolute value. + +Assigned to +The reference of the selected area name is shown here as an absolute value. To insert a new area reference, place the cursor in this field and use your mouse to select the desired area in any sheet of your spreadsheet document. - -More -Allows you to specify the Area type (optional) for the reference. -Area type + +More +Allows you to specify the Area type (optional) for the reference. +Area type Defines additional options related to the type of reference area. - -Print range + +Print range Defines the area as a print range. - -Filter + +Filter Defines the selected area to be used in an advanced filter. - -Repeat column + +Repeat column Defines the area as a repeating column. - -Repeat row + +Repeat row Defines the area as a repeating row. - -Add/Modify + +Add/Modify Click the Add button to add the defined name to the list. Click the Modify button to enter another name for an already existing name selected from the list. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp index c2e24f4bbc..683bd7054a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Format Cells -/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Format Cells +/text/scalc/01/05020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -cell attributes -formatting;cells +cell attributes +formatting;cells cells;formatting dialog - -Format Cells + +Format Cells Allows you to specify a variety of formatting options and to apply attributes to the selected cells. - - -Numbers - -Font + + +Numbers + +Font - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp index dc203898ce..d9dfa3bfc3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Cell Protection -/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Cell Protection +/text/scalc/01/05020600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Cell Protection -Defines protection options for selected cells. -
- + +Cell Protection +Defines protection options for selected cells. + + Protection - -Hide all + +Hide all Hides formulas and contents of the selected cells. - -Protected -Prevents the selected cells from being modified. + +Protected +Prevents the selected cells from being modified. This cell protection only takes effect if you also protect the spreadsheet (Tools - Protect Document - Sheet). - -Hide formula -Hides formulas in the selected cells. -Print + +Hide formula +Hides formulas in the selected cells. +Print Defines print options for the sheet. - -Hide when printing -Keeps the selected cells from being printed. - - + +Hide when printing +Keeps the selected cells from being printed. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp index d78fed3bfe..36f7ec7392 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Optimal Row Heights -/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Optimal Row Heights +/text/scalc/01/05030200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -sheets; optimal row heights -rows; optimal heights +sheets; optimal row heights +rows; optimal heights optimal row heights - -Optimal Row Heights + +Optimal Row Heights Determines the optimal row height for the selected rows. - The optimal row height depends on the font size of the largest character in the row. You can use various units of measure. + The optimal row height depends on the font size of the largest character in the row. You can use various units of measure. - -Add + +Add Sets additional spacing between the largest character in a row and the cell boundaries. - -Default value -Restores the default value for the optimal row height. - - + +Default value +Restores the default value for the optimal row height. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp index d7684cc2c4..4d09279f30 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Hide -/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -YJ: checked - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Hide +/text/scalc/01/05030300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +YJ: checked + + +
-spreadsheets; hiding functions -hiding; rows -hiding; columns -hiding; sheets -sheets;hiding -columns;hiding +spreadsheets; hiding functions +hiding; rows +hiding; columns +hiding; sheets +sheets;hiding +columns;hiding rows;hiding - -Hide -Hides selected rows, columns or individual sheets. -
- -Select the rows or columns that you want to hide, and then choose Format - Row - Hide or Format - Column - Hide. -You can hide a sheet by selecting the sheet tab and then choosing Format - Sheet - Hide. Hidden sheets are not printed unless they occur within a print range. -A break in the row or column header indicates whether the row or column is hidden. -To display hidden rows, columns or sheets - - -Select the range that includes the hidden objects. You can also use the box in the corner above row 1 and beside column A. For sheets, this step is not necessary.UFI: fixes #i18582# - - -Choose Format - Row/Column - Show or Format - Sheet - Show. - - - - + +Hide +Hides selected rows, columns or individual sheets. + + +Select the rows or columns that you want to hide, and then choose Format - Row - Hide or Format - Column - Hide. +You can hide a sheet by selecting the sheet tab and then choosing Format - Sheet - Hide. Hidden sheets are not printed unless they occur within a print range. +A break in the row or column header indicates whether the row or column is hidden. +To display hidden rows, columns or sheets + + +Select the range that includes the hidden objects. You can also use the box in the corner above row 1 and beside column A. For sheets, this step is not necessary.UFI: fixes #i18582# + + +Choose Format - Row/Column - Show or Format - Sheet - Show. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp index 2c4ab32d06..12c0c39a05 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Show -/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Show +/text/scalc/01/05030400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-spreadsheets; showing columns -showing; columns +spreadsheets; showing columns +showing; columns showing; rows - -Show -Choose this command to show previously hidden rows or columns. -
- -To show a column or row, select the range of rows or columns containing the hidden elements, then choose Format - Row - Show or Format - Column - Show. -To show all hidden cells, first click in the field in the upper left corner. This selects all cells of the table. - - + +Show +Choose this command to show previously hidden rows or columns. + + +To show a column or row, select the range of rows or columns containing the hidden elements, then choose Format - Row - Show or Format - Column - Show. +To show all hidden cells, first click in the field in the upper left corner. This selects all cells of the table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp index 7a429b3605..1c58ab0164 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Sheet -/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -YJ: checked - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Sheet +/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +YJ: checked + + +
-cells; printing grids -borders; printing cells -printing; grids -printing; formulas instead of results -printing; zero values -zero values; printing -null values; printing -pages; order when printing +cells; printing grids +borders; printing cells +printing; grids +printing; formulas instead of results +printing; zero values +zero values; printing +null values; printing +pages; order when printing printing; page order - -Sheet -Specifies the elements to be included in the printout of all sheets with the current Page Style. Additionally, you can set the print order, the first page number, and the page scale. -
- -Print + +Sheet +Specifies the elements to be included in the printout of all sheets with the current Page Style. Additionally, you can set the print order, the first page number, and the page scale. + + +Print Defines which elements of the spreadsheet are to be printed. - -Column and row headers + +Column and row headers Specifies whether you want the column and row headers to be printed. - -Grid + +Grid Prints out the borders of the individual cells as a grid. For the view on screen, make your choice under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Grid lines. - -Notes + +Notes Prints the notes defined in your spreadsheet. They will be printed on a separate page, along with the corresponding cell reference. - -Objects/graphics + +Objects/graphics Includes all inserted objects (if printable) and graphics with the printed document. - -Charts + +Charts Prints the charts that have been inserted into your spreadsheet. - -Drawing Objects + +Drawing Objects Includes all drawing objects in the printed document. - -Formulas + +Formulas Prints the formulas contained in the cells, instead of the results. - -Zero Values -Specifies that cells with a zero value are printed. -Page Order + +Zero Values +Specifies that cells with a zero value are printed. +Page Order Defines the order in which data in a sheet is numbered and printed when it does not fit on one printed page. - -Top to bottom, then right + +Top to bottom, then right Prints vertically from the left column to the bottom of the sheet. - -Left to right, then down + +Left to right, then down Prints horizontally from the top row of the sheet to the right column. - -First page number + +First page number Select this option if you want the first page to start with a number other than 1. - -The first page receives the page number specified in the spin box. -Scale + +The first page receives the page number specified in the spin box. +Scale Defines a page scale for the printed spreadsheet. - -Scaling mode -Select a scaling mode from the list box. Appropriate controls will be shown at the side of the list box. -Reduce/enlarge printout + +Scaling mode +Select a scaling mode from the list box. Appropriate controls will be shown at the side of the list box. +Reduce/enlarge printout Specifies a scaling factor to scale all printed pages. - -Scaling factor -Enter a scaling factor. Factors less than 100 reduce the pages, higher factors enlarge the pages. -Fit print range(s) to width/height -Specifies the maximum number of pages horizontally (width) and vertically (height) on which every sheet with the current Page Style is to be printed. - - -The print ranges are always scaled proportionally, so the resulting number of pages may be less than specified. - - -You may clear one of the boxes, then the unspecified dimension will use as many pages as necessary. - - -If you clear both boxes, this will result in a scaling factor of 100%. - + +Scaling factor +Enter a scaling factor. Factors less than 100 reduce the pages, higher factors enlarge the pages. +Fit print range(s) to width/height +Specifies the maximum number of pages horizontally (width) and vertically (height) on which every sheet with the current Page Style is to be printed. + + +The print ranges are always scaled proportionally, so the resulting number of pages may be less than specified. + + +You may clear one of the boxes, then the unspecified dimension will use as many pages as necessary. + + +If you clear both boxes, this will result in a scaling factor of 100%. + - -Width in pages + +Width in pages Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed horizontally across. - -Height in pages -Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed vertically stacked. -Fit print range(s) on number of pages + +Height in pages +Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed vertically stacked. +Fit print range(s) on number of pages Specifies the maximum number of pages on which every sheet with the current Page Style is to be printed. The scale will be reduced as necessary to fit the defined number of pages.UFI: fixes #112585# - -Number of pages -Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed. - - + +Number of pages +Enter the maximum number of pages to be printed. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp index cd1689f4f5..af24c456d5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Define -/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Define +/text/scalc/01/05080100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Define -Defines an active cell or selected cell area as the print range. -
- - - + +Define +Defines an active cell or selected cell area as the print range. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp index 7d122174a5..fc994cb39c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Remove -/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Remove +/text/scalc/01/05080200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Remove -Removes the defined print area. -
- - - + +Remove +Removes the defined print area. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp index 81d485dcaf..30f80942e8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Edit Print Ranges -/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: added spec "Calc Print Settings Sheet Property "Print Entire Sheet"" -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Edit Print Ranges +/text/scalc/01/05080300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: added spec "Calc Print Settings Sheet Property "Print Entire Sheet"" +dedr: reviewed + + + - -Edit Print Ranges + +Edit Print Ranges Opens a dialog where you can specify the print range. - You can also set the rows or columns which are to be repeated in every page. - - - - + You can also set the rows or columns which are to be repeated in every page. + + + + - -Print range -Allows you to modify a defined print range. -Select -none- to remove a print range definition for the current spreadsheet. Select -entire sheet- to set the current sheet as a print range. Select -selection- to define the selected area of a spreadsheet as the print range. By selecting -user-defined-, you can define a print range that you have already defined using the Format - Print Ranges - Set command. If you have given a name to a range using the Insert - Name - Define command, this name will be displayed and can be selected from the list box. + +Print range +Allows you to modify a defined print range. +Select -none- to remove a print range definition for the current spreadsheet. Select -entire sheet- to set the current sheet as a print range. Select -selection- to define the selected area of a spreadsheet as the print range. By selecting -user-defined-, you can define a print range that you have already defined using the Format - Print Ranges - Set command. If you have given a name to a range using the Insert - Name - Define command, this name will be displayed and can be selected from the list box. In the right-hand text box, you can enter a print range by reference or by name. If the cursor is in the Print range text box, you can also select the print range in the spreadsheet with your mouse. - -Rows to repeat -Choose one or more rows to print on every page. In the right text box enter the row reference, for example, "1" or $1" or "$2:$3". The list box displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating row. -You can also define repeating rows by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Rows to repeat text field in the dialog. + +Rows to repeat +Choose one or more rows to print on every page. In the right text box enter the row reference, for example, "1" or $1" or "$2:$3". The list box displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating row. +You can also define repeating rows by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Rows to repeat text field in the dialog. - -Columns to repeat -Choose one or more columns to print on every page. In the right text box enter the column reference, for example, "A" or "AB" or "$C:$E". The list box then displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating column. -You can also define repeating columns by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Columns to repeat text field in the dialog. - - - + +Columns to repeat +Choose one or more columns to print on every page. In the right text box enter the column reference, for example, "A" or "AB" or "$C:$E". The list box then displays -user defined-. You can also select -none- to remove a defined repeating column. +You can also define repeating columns by dragging the mouse in the spreadsheet, if the cursor is in the Columns to repeat text field in the dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp index f8d62ca671..894b2688be 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Hyphenation -/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Hyphenation +/text/scalc/01/06020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -automatic hyphenation in spreadsheets -hyphenation in spreadsheets +automatic hyphenation in spreadsheets +hyphenation in spreadsheets syllables in spreadsheets - -Hyphenation + +Hyphenation The Hyphenation command calls the dialog for setting the hyphenation in $[officename] Calc. - - -You can only turn on the automatic hyphenation in $[officename] Calc when the row break feature is active. -Hyphenation for selected cells. - - -Select the cells for which you want to change the hyphenation. - - -Choose Tools - Hyphenation. - - -The Format Cells dialog appears with the Alignment tab page open. - - -Mark the Automatic line break and the Hyphenation active check boxes. - - -Hyphenation for Drawing Objects - - -Select a drawing object. - - -Choose Tools - Hyphenation. - - -Each time you call the command you turn the hyphenation for the drawing object on or off. A check mark shows the current status. - - - - + + +You can only turn on the automatic hyphenation in $[officename] Calc when the row break feature is active. +Hyphenation for selected cells. + + +Select the cells for which you want to change the hyphenation. + + +Choose Tools - Hyphenation. + + +The Format Cells dialog appears with the Alignment tab page open. + + +Mark the Automatic line break and the Hyphenation active check boxes. + + +Hyphenation for Drawing Objects + + +Select a drawing object. + + +Choose Tools - Hyphenation. + + +Each time you call the command you turn the hyphenation for the drawing object on or off. A check mark shows the current status. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp index 32fd0f537d..5c251fa9b7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Detective -/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Detective +/text/scalc/01/06030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-cell links search -searching for links in cells +cell links search +searching for links in cells traces;precedents and dependents - -Detective -This command activates the Spreadsheet Detective. With the Detective, you can trace the dependencies from the current formula cell to the cells in the spreadsheet. -
- -Once you have defined a trace, you can point with the mouse cursor to the trace. The mouse cursor will change its shape. Double-click the trace with this cursor to select the referenced cell at the end of the trace. If you define an icon in the spreadsheet, you can put your cursor on it. It will change into a magnifying glass with reference arrows. Double-click the visible icon to select the cell at the furthest end of the icon. - - - - - - - - - - - - + +Detective +This command activates the Spreadsheet Detective. With the Detective, you can trace the dependencies from the current formula cell to the cells in the spreadsheet. + + +Once you have defined a trace, you can point with the mouse cursor to the trace. The mouse cursor will change its shape. Double-click the trace with this cursor to select the referenced cell at the end of the trace. If you define an icon in the spreadsheet, you can put your cursor on it. It will change into a magnifying glass with reference arrows. Double-click the visible icon to select the cell at the furthest end of the icon. + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp index ff1805a492..c5d1b3cf1d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Trace Precedents -/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Trace Precedents +/text/scalc/01/06030100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-cells; tracing precedents +cells; tracing precedents formula cells;tracing precedents - -Trace Precedents -This function shows the relationship between the current cell containing a formula and the cells used in the formula. -
-Traces are displayed in the sheet with marking arrows. At the same time, the range of all the cells contained in the formula of the current cell is highlighted with a blue frame. - -This function is based on a principle of layers. For example, if the precedent cell to a formula is already indicated with a tracer arrow, when you repeat this command, the tracer arrows are drawn to the precedent cells of this cell. - - + +Trace Precedents +This function shows the relationship between the current cell containing a formula and the cells used in the formula. + +Traces are displayed in the sheet with marking arrows. At the same time, the range of all the cells contained in the formula of the current cell is highlighted with a blue frame. + +This function is based on a principle of layers. For example, if the precedent cell to a formula is already indicated with a tracer arrow, when you repeat this command, the tracer arrows are drawn to the precedent cells of this cell. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp index 0b8cb38de9..29d72ce0e0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Remove Precedents -/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Remove Precedents +/text/scalc/01/06030200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-cells; removing precedents +cells; removing precedents formula cells;tracing precedents - -Remove Precedents -Deletes one level of the trace arrows that were inserted with the Trace Precedents command. -
- - - + +Remove Precedents +Deletes one level of the trace arrows that were inserted with the Trace Precedents command. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp index ce8245f39b..b5caf4607e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Goal Seek -/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Goal Seek +/text/scalc/01/06040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Goal Seek + +Goal Seek Opens a dialog where you can solve an equation with a variable. - After a successful search, a dialog with the results opens, allowing you to apply the result and the target value directly to the cell. - -Default + After a successful search, a dialog with the results opens, allowing you to apply the result and the target value directly to the cell. + +Default In this section, you can define the variables in your formula. - -Formula cell + +Formula cell In the formula cell, enter the reference of the cell which contains the formula. It contains the current cell reference. Click another cell in the sheet to apply its reference to the text box. - -Target value + +Target value Specifies the value you want to achieve as a new result. - -Variable cell + +Variable cell Specifies the reference for the cell that contains the value you want to adjust in order to reach the target. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp index 392e56c7d3..2b6633e19c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Create Scenario -/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: sc.features "Adding Scenario Protection to Calc" -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Create Scenario +/text/scalc/01/06050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: sc.features "Adding Scenario Protection to Calc" +dedr: reviewed + + - -Create Scenario + +Create Scenario Defines a scenario for the selected sheet area. - - - - + + + + - -Name of scenario + +Name of scenario Defines the name for the scenario. Use a clear and unique name so you can easily identify the scenario. You can also modify a scenario name in the Navigator through the Properties context menu command. - -Comment -Specifies additional information about the scenario. This information will be displayed in the Navigator when you click the Scenarios icon and select the desired scenario. You can also modify this information in the Navigator through the Properties context menu command. -Settings + +Comment +Specifies additional information about the scenario. This information will be displayed in the Navigator when you click the Scenarios icon and select the desired scenario. You can also modify this information in the Navigator through the Properties context menu command. +Settings This section is used to define some of the settings used in the scenario display. - -Display border in + +Display border in Highlights the scenario in your table with a border. The color for the border is specified in the field to the right of this option. The border will have a title bar displaying the name of the last scenario. The button on the right of the scenario border offers you an overview of all the scenarios in this area, if several have been defined. You can choose any of the scenarios from this list without restrictions. - -Copy back + +Copy back Copies the values of cells that you change into the active scenario. If you do not select this option, the scenario is not changed when you change cell values. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings. - -Copy entire sheet + +Copy entire sheet Copies the entire sheet into an additional scenario sheet. - -Prevent changes -Prevents changes to the active scenario. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings. - - -You can only change the scenario properties if the Prevent changes option is not selected and if the sheet is not protected. - - -You can only edit cell values if the Prevent changes option is selected, if the Copy back is option is not selected, and if the cells are not protected. - - -You can only change scenario cell values and write them back into the scenario if the Prevent changes option is not selected, if the Copy back option is selected, and if the cells are not protected. - - - - + +Prevent changes +Prevents changes to the active scenario. The behavior of the Copy back setting depends on the cell protection, the sheet protection, and the Prevent changes settings. + + +You can only change the scenario properties if the Prevent changes option is not selected and if the sheet is not protected. + + +You can only edit cell values if the Prevent changes option is selected, if the Copy back is option is not selected, and if the cells are not protected. + + +You can only change scenario cell values and write them back into the scenario if the Prevent changes option is not selected, if the Copy back option is selected, and if the cells are not protected. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp index c32580ea71..dcd8e58667 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Protecting Sheet -/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Protecting Sheet +/text/scalc/01/06060100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Protecting Sheet + +Protecting Sheet Protects the current sheet from being modified. - Choose Tools - Protect Document - Sheet to open the Protect Sheet dialog in which you then specify sheet protection with or without a password. - -To protect cells from further editing, the Protected check box must be checked on the Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab page or on the Format Cells context menu. -Unprotected cells or cell ranges can be set up on a protected sheet by using the Tools - Protect Document - Sheet and Format - Cells - Cell Protection menus: -Select the cells that will be unprotected -Select Format - Cells - Cell Protection. Unmark the Protected box and click OK. -On the Tools - Protect Document - Sheet menu, activate protection for the sheet. Effective immediately, only the cell range you selected in step 1 can be edited. -To later change an unprotected area to a protected area, select the range. Next, on the Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab page, check the Protected box. Finally, choose the Tools - Protect Document - Sheet menu. The previously editable range is now protected. -Sheet protection also affects the context menu of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the screen. The Delete and Move/Copy commands cannot be selected. -If a sheet is protected, you will not be able to modify or delete any Cell Styles. -A protected sheet or cell range can no longer be modified until this protection is disabled. To disable the protection, choose the Tools - Protect Document - Sheet command. If no password was set, the sheet protection is immediately disabled. If the sheet was password protected, the Remove Protection dialog opens, where you must enter the password. -Once saved, protected sheets can only be saved again by using the File - Save As command. -Password (optional) -Allows you to enter a password to protect the sheet from unauthorized changes. -Complete protection of your work can be achieved by combining both options on the Tools - Protect Document menu, including password protection. To prohibit opening the document altogether, in the Save dialog mark the Save with password box before you click the Save button. - - + Choose Tools - Protect Document - Sheet to open the Protect Sheet dialog in which you then specify sheet protection with or without a password. + +To protect cells from further editing, the Protected check box must be checked on the Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab page or on the Format Cells context menu. +Unprotected cells or cell ranges can be set up on a protected sheet by using the Tools - Protect Document - Sheet and Format - Cells - Cell Protection menus: +Select the cells that will be unprotected +Select Format - Cells - Cell Protection. Unmark the Protected box and click OK. +On the Tools - Protect Document - Sheet menu, activate protection for the sheet. Effective immediately, only the cell range you selected in step 1 can be edited. +To later change an unprotected area to a protected area, select the range. Next, on the Format - Cells - Cell Protection tab page, check the Protected box. Finally, choose the Tools - Protect Document - Sheet menu. The previously editable range is now protected. +Sheet protection also affects the context menu of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the screen. The Delete and Move/Copy commands cannot be selected. +If a sheet is protected, you will not be able to modify or delete any Cell Styles. +A protected sheet or cell range can no longer be modified until this protection is disabled. To disable the protection, choose the Tools - Protect Document - Sheet command. If no password was set, the sheet protection is immediately disabled. If the sheet was password protected, the Remove Protection dialog opens, where you must enter the password. +Once saved, protected sheets can only be saved again by using the File - Save As command. +Password (optional) +Allows you to enter a password to protect the sheet from unauthorized changes. +Complete protection of your work can be achieved by combining both options on the Tools - Protect Document menu, including password protection. To prohibit opening the document altogether, in the Save dialog mark the Save with password box before you click the Save button. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp index 9bf5b2a5e3..e8cc0a8eb1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Protecting document -/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Protecting document +/text/scalc/01/06060200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Protecting document + +Protecting document Protects your entire document from modifications. It is impossible to insert, delete, rename, move or copy sheets. - Open the Protect document dialog with Tools - Protect Document - Document. Enter a password and click OK. - -The structure of protected spreadsheet documents can be changed only if the Protect option is disabled. On the context menus for the spreadsheet tabs at the lower graphic border, only the menu item Select All Sheets can be activated. All other menu items are deactivated. To remove the protection, call up the command Tools - Protect Document - Document again. If no password is assigned, protection is immediately removed. If you were assigned a password, the Remove Spreadsheet Protection dialog appears, in which you must enter the password. Only then can you remove the check mark specifying that protection is active. -A protected document, once saved, can only be saved again with the File - Save As menu command. -Password (optional) -You can create a password to protect your document against unauthorized or accidental modifications. -You can completely protect your work by combining both options from Tools - Protect Document, including password entry. If you want to prevent the document from being opened by other users, select Save With Password and click the Save button. The Enter Password dialog appears. Consider carefully when choosing a password; if you forget it after you close a document you will be unable to access the document. - - + Open the Protect document dialog with Tools - Protect Document - Document. Enter a password and click OK. + +The structure of protected spreadsheet documents can be changed only if the Protect option is disabled. On the context menus for the spreadsheet tabs at the lower graphic border, only the menu item Select All Sheets can be activated. All other menu items are deactivated. To remove the protection, call up the command Tools - Protect Document - Document again. If no password is assigned, protection is immediately removed. If you were assigned a password, the Remove Spreadsheet Protection dialog appears, in which you must enter the password. Only then can you remove the check mark specifying that protection is active. +A protected document, once saved, can only be saved again with the File - Save As menu command. +Password (optional) +You can create a password to protect your document against unauthorized or accidental modifications. +You can completely protect your work by combining both options from Tools - Protect Document, including password entry. If you want to prevent the document from being opened by other users, select Save With Password and click the Save button. The Enter Password dialog appears. Consider carefully when choosing a password; if you forget it after you close a document you will be unable to access the document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp index d69f6f8aee..3cf3b83496 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -AutoCalculate -/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +AutoCalculate +/text/scalc/01/06070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-calculating; auto calcuating sheets -AutoCalculate function in sheets -correcting sheets -formulas;AutoCalculate function +calculating; auto calcuating sheets +AutoCalculate function in sheets +correcting sheets +formulas;AutoCalculate function cell contents;AutoCalculate function - -AutoCalculate -Automatically recalculates all formulas in the document. -
-All cells are recalculated after a sheet cell has been modified. Any charts in the sheet will also be refreshed. If the AutoCalculate function is activated, the Recalculate function F9 is not available. - - - + +AutoCalculate +Automatically recalculates all formulas in the document. + +All cells are recalculated after a sheet cell has been modified. Any charts in the sheet will also be refreshed. If the AutoCalculate function is activated, the Recalculate function F9 is not available. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp index acdc765fb7..ad74bd2e00 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Recalculate -/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Recalculate +/text/scalc/01/06080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-calculating; sheets -formulas; calculating automatically -cell contents; calculating +calculating; sheets +formulas; calculating automatically +cell contents; calculating recalculating formulas - -Recalculate -Recalculates the current sheet manually. Use this command to update all calculations in the document if you have deselected the automatic recalculation function, and also to update the NOW() function. -
-After the document has been recalculated, the display is refreshed. Any charts contained in the sheet are also refreshed. - -With the shortcut keys Shift+Ctrl+F9 you can force a recalculation of all cells. - - + +Recalculate +Recalculates the current sheet manually. Use this command to update all calculations in the document if you have deselected the automatic recalculation function, and also to update the NOW() function. + +After the document has been recalculated, the display is refreshed. Any charts contained in the sheet are also refreshed. + +With the shortcut keys Shift+Ctrl+F9 you can force a recalculation of all cells. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp index 43446ac4d4..a744dedcae 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Select Range -/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Select Range +/text/scalc/01/12020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + databases; selecting - -Select Range + +Select Range Selects a database range that you defined under Data – Define Range. - + - -Areas -Lists the available database ranges. To select a database in your spreadsheet, click its name, and then click OK. - - + +Areas +Lists the available database ranges. To select a database in your spreadsheet, click its name, and then click OK. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp index 4bd9ddf569..9c317f52bd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Sort -/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Sort +/text/scalc/01/12030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Sort + +Sort Sorts the selected rows according to the conditions that you specify. - $[officename] automatically recognizes and selects database ranges. -You cannot sort data if the Record changes options is enabled. - - - - - - + $[officename] automatically recognizes and selects database ranges. +You cannot sort data if the Record changes options is enabled. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp index ff2a86b537..b1bf7d67c3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Sort Criteria -/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Sort Criteria +/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
sorting; sort criteria for database ranges - -Sort Criteria -Specify the sorting options for the selected range. -
-Ensure that you include any row and column titles in the selection. + +Sort Criteria +Specify the sorting options for the selected range. + +Ensure that you include any row and column titles in the selection. - -Sort by + +Sort by Select the column that you want to use as the primary sort key. - -Ascending + +Ascending Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value, that is, from A to Z or 0 to 9. - -Descending + +Descending Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value, that is from Z to A or 9 to 0. - -Then by + +Then by Select the column that you want to use as the secondary sort key. - -Ascending + +Ascending Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value, that is, from A to Z or 0 to 9. - -Descending + +Descending Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value, that is from Z to A or 9 to 0. - -Then by + +Then by Select the column that you want to use as the third sort key. - -Ascending + +Ascending Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value, that is, from A to Z or 0 to 9. - -Descending + +Descending Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value, that is from Z to A or 9 to 0. - -Sort Ascending/Descending + +Sort Ascending/Descending Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value using the column that contains the cursor. - Number fields are sorted by size and text fields by the ASCII order of the characters. -Icons on the Toolbar - - - + Number fields are sorted by size and text fields by the ASCII order of the characters. +Icons on the Toolbar + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp index 056e2010e8..cb6357842f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Options -/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -YJ: checked - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Options +/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +YJ: checked + + +
-sorting; options for database ranges -sorting;Asian languages -Asian languages;sorting +sorting; options for database ranges +sorting;Asian languages +Asian languages;sorting phonebook sorting rules - -Options -Sets additional sorting options. -
+ +Options +Sets additional sorting options. + - -Case Sensitivity -Sorts first by uppercase letters and then by lowercase letters. + +Case Sensitivity +Sorts first by uppercase letters and then by lowercase letters. Note for Asian languages: Check Case Sensitivity to apply multi-level collation. With multi-level collation, entries are first compared in their primitive forms with their cases and diacritics ignored. If they evaluate as the same, their diacritics are taken into account for the second-level comparison. If they still evaluate as the same, their cases, character widths, and Japanese Kana difference are considered for the third-level comparison.UFI: see #112590# and #112507# - -Range contains column/row labels + +Range contains column/row labels Omits the first row or the first column in the selection from the sort. The Direction setting at the bottom of the dialog defines the name and function of this check box. - -Include formats + +Include formats Preserves the current cell formatting. - -Copy sort results to: + +Copy sort results to: Copies the sorted list to the cell range that you specify. - -Sort results + +Sort results Select a named cell range where you want to display the sorted list, or enter a cell range in the input box. - -Sort results + +Sort results Enter the cell range where you want to display the sorted list, or a select a named range from the list. - -User-defined sort order + +User-defined sort order Click here and then select the custom sort order that you want. - -Custom sort order -Select the custom sort order that you want to apply. To define a custom sort order, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Custom Lists. + +Custom sort order +Select the custom sort order that you want to apply. To define a custom sort order, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Custom Lists. Language - -Language + +Language Select the language for the sorting rules. - -Options -Select a sorting option for the language. For example, select the "phonebook" option for German to include the umlaut special character in the sorting. + +Options +Select a sorting option for the language. For example, select the "phonebook" option for German to include the umlaut special character in the sorting. Direction - -Top to Bottom (Sort Rows) + +Top to Bottom (Sort Rows) Sorts rows by the values in the active columns of the selected range. - -Left to Right (Sort Columns) -Sorts columns by the values in the active rows of the selected range. -Data area -Displays the cell range that you want to sort. - - + +Left to Right (Sort Columns) +Sorts columns by the values in the active rows of the selected range. +Data area +Displays the cell range that you want to sort. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp index 756edd1b4e..58324b914a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Filter -/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Filter +/text/scalc/01/12040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
database ranges; filters - -Filter -Contains filter commands. -
-$[officename] automatically recognizes predefined database ranges. - -The following filtering options are available: - -Default filter - -Advanced filter - - - - - + +Filter +Contains filter commands. + +$[officename] automatically recognizes predefined database ranges. + +The following filtering options are available: + +Default filter + +Advanced filter + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp index c09e8d52a1..806aa239fe 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -AutoFilter -/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +AutoFilter +/text/scalc/01/12040100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -AutoFilter -Automatically filters the selected cell range, and creates one-row list boxes where you can choose the items that you want to display. -
- - -Default filter - - + +AutoFilter +Automatically filters the selected cell range, and creates one-row list boxes where you can choose the items that you want to display. + + + +Default filter + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp index 56ecdab385..898bad849f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Consolidatestill work to do, just brushed up the very worst errors -/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Consolidatestill work to do, just brushed up the very worst errors +/text/scalc/01/12070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Consolidatestill work to do, just brushed up the very worst errors + +Consolidatestill work to do, just brushed up the very worst errors Combines data from one or more independent cell ranges and calculates a new range using the function that you specify. - + - -Function + +Function Select the function that you want to use to consolidate the data. - -Consolidation ranges + +Consolidation ranges Displays the cell ranges that you want to consolidate. - -Source data range + +Source data range Specifies the cell range that you want to consolidate with the cell ranges listed in the Consolidation ranges box. Select a cell range in a sheet, and then click Add. You can also select a the name of a predefined cell from the Source data range list. - -Copy results to + +Copy results to Displays the first cell in the range where the consolidation results will be displayed. - -Add + +Add Adds the cell range specified in the Source data range box to the Consolidation ranges box. - -More >> -Shows additional options. - - + +More >> +Shows additional options. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp index e349f18bec..3fcae9a64f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Outline -/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Outline +/text/scalc/01/12080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-sheets; outlines -outlines; sheets -hiding; sheet details -showing; sheet details +sheets; outlines +outlines; sheets +hiding; sheet details +showing; sheet details grouping;cells - -Outline -You can create an outline of your data and group rows and columns together so that you can collapse and expand the groups with a single click. -
- - - -Group - -Ungroup - - - - - + +Outline +You can create an outline of your data and group rows and columns together so that you can collapse and expand the groups with a single click. + + + + +Group + +Ungroup + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp index dfe7cc6d5e..f4587f141b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Show Details -/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Show Details +/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
tables; showing details - -Show Details -Shows the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To show the details of all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command. -
-To hide a selected group, choose Data -Outline –Hide Details. - - - + +Show Details +Shows the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To show the details of all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command. + +To hide a selected group, choose Data -Outline –Hide Details. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp index c01a130c05..de674cd2f6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -DataPilot -/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fix to #i22166# -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +DataPilot +/text/scalc/01/12090102.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fix to #i22166# +dedr: reviewed + + - -DataPilot -Specify the layout of the table that is generated by the DataPilot. - - + +DataPilot +Specify the layout of the table that is generated by the DataPilot. + + The DataPilot displays data fields as buttons which you can drag and drop to define the DataPilot table. - -Layout -To define the layout of a DataPilot table, drag and drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas. You can also use drag and drop to rearrange the data fields on a DataPilot table. -$[officename] automatically adds a caption to buttons that are dragged into the Data Fields area. The caption contains the name of the data field as well as the formula that created the data. + +Layout +To define the layout of a DataPilot table, drag and drop data field buttons onto the Page Fields, Row Fields, Column Fields, and Data Fields areas. You can also use drag and drop to rearrange the data fields on a DataPilot table. +$[officename] automatically adds a caption to buttons that are dragged into the Data Fields area. The caption contains the name of the data field as well as the formula that created the data. To change the function that is used by a data field, double-click a button in the Data Fields area to open the Data Field dialog. You can also double-click buttons in the Row Fields or Column Fields areas. - -Remove + +Remove Removes the selected data field from the table layout. - -Options + +Options Opens the Data Field dialog where you can change the function that is associated with the selected field. - -More -Displays or hides additional options for defining the DataPilot table. -Result + +More +Displays or hides additional options for defining the DataPilot table. +Result Specify the settings for displaying the results of the DataPilot table. - -Results to + +Results to Select the area where you want to display the results of the DataPilot table. - + If the selected area contains data, the DataPilot overwrites the data. To prevent the loss of existing data, let the DataPilot automatically select the area to display the results. - -Ignore empty rows + +Ignore empty rows Ignores empty fields in the data source. - -Identify categories + +Identify categories Automatically assigns rows without labels to the next highest category as specified by a row label. - -Total columns + +Total columns Calculates and displays the grand total of the column calculation. - -Total rows -Calculates and displays the grand total of the row calculation. - -DataPilot shortcut keys - - + +Total rows +Calculates and displays the grand total of the row calculation. + +DataPilot shortcut keys + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp index db5d646318..473d4a983a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Data field -/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: added info from spec sc-features Field Options in DataPilot - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Data field +/text/scalc/01/12090105.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: added info from spec sc-features Field Options in DataPilot + + - -Data field -The contents of this dialog is different for data fields in the Data area, and data fields in the Row or Column area of the DataPilot dialog. -Subtotals + +Data field +The contents of this dialog is different for data fields in the Data area, and data fields in the Row or Column area of the DataPilot dialog. +Subtotals Specify the subtotals that you want to calculate. - -None + +None Does not calculate subtotals. - -Automatic + +Automatic Automatically calculates subtotals. - -User-defined + +User-defined Select this option, and then click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate in the list. - -Function + +Function Click the type of subtotal that you want to calculate. This option is only available if the User-defined option is selected. - -Show elements without data -Includes empty columns and rows in the results table. -Name: -Lists the name of the selected data field. -More -Expands or reduces the dialog. This button is visible for data fields only. -Options -Opens the Data Field Options dialog. This button is visible for column, row, or page fields only. -If the dialog is expanded by the More button, the following items are added to the dialog: -Displayed value + +Show elements without data +Includes empty columns and rows in the results table. +Name: +Lists the name of the selected data field. +More +Expands or reduces the dialog. This button is visible for data fields only. +Options +Opens the Data Field Options dialog. This button is visible for column, row, or page fields only. +If the dialog is expanded by the More button, the following items are added to the dialog: +Displayed value For each data field, you can select the type of display. For some types you can select additional information of a base field and a base item. - -Type -Select the type of calculating the displayed value for the data field. - - - -Type - - -Displayed value - - - - -Normal - - -Results are shown unchanged - - - - -Difference from - - -From each result, its reference value (see below) is subtracted, and the difference is shown. Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. - -Named item - -If a base item name is specified, the reference value for a combination of field items is the result where the item in the base field is replaced by the specified base item. - -Previous item or Next item - -If "previous item" or "next item" is specified as the base item, the reference value is the result for the next visible member of the base field, in the base field's sort order. - - - - -% Of - - -Each result is divided by its reference value. The reference value is determined in the same way as for "Difference from". Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. - - - - -% Difference from - - -From each result, its reference value is subtracted, and the difference is divided by the reference value. The reference value is determined in the same way as for "Difference from". Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. - - - - -Running total in - - -Each result is added to the sum of the results for preceding items in the base field, in the base field's sort order, and the total sum is shown. -Results are always summed, even if a different summary function was used to get each result. - - - - -% of row - - -Each result is divided by the total result for its row in the DataPilot table. If there are several data fields, the total for the result's data field is used. If there are subtotals with manually selected summary functions, still the total with the data field's summary function is used. - - - - -% of column - - -Same as "% of row", but the total for the result's column is used. - - - - -% of total - - -Same as "% of row", but the grand total for the result's data field is used. - - - - -Index - - -The row and column totals and the grand total, following the same rules as above, are used to calculate the following expression: -( original result * grand total ) / ( row total * column total ) - - -
+ +Type +Select the type of calculating the displayed value for the data field. + + + +Type + + +Displayed value + + + + +Normal + + +Results are shown unchanged + + + + +Difference from + + +From each result, its reference value (see below) is subtracted, and the difference is shown. Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. + +Named item + +If a base item name is specified, the reference value for a combination of field items is the result where the item in the base field is replaced by the specified base item. + +Previous item or Next item + +If "previous item" or "next item" is specified as the base item, the reference value is the result for the next visible member of the base field, in the base field's sort order. + + + + +% Of + + +Each result is divided by its reference value. The reference value is determined in the same way as for "Difference from". Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. + + + + +% Difference from + + +From each result, its reference value is subtracted, and the difference is divided by the reference value. The reference value is determined in the same way as for "Difference from". Totals outside of the base field are shown as empty results. + + + + +Running total in + + +Each result is added to the sum of the results for preceding items in the base field, in the base field's sort order, and the total sum is shown. +Results are always summed, even if a different summary function was used to get each result. + + + + +% of row + + +Each result is divided by the total result for its row in the DataPilot table. If there are several data fields, the total for the result's data field is used. If there are subtotals with manually selected summary functions, still the total with the data field's summary function is used. + + + + +% of column + + +Same as "% of row", but the total for the result's column is used. + + + + +% of total + + +Same as "% of row", but the grand total for the result's data field is used. + + + + +Index + + +The row and column totals and the grand total, following the same rules as above, are used to calculate the following expression: +( original result * grand total ) / ( row total * column total ) + + +
- -Base field + +Base field Select the field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation. - -Base item -Select the item of the base field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation. - - + +Base item +Select the item of the base field from which the respective value is taken as base for the calculation. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp index 0e4dbdc0d1..160ecb8a0f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Data Field Options -text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp - - -UFI: new Data Field Options dialog - - - - -Data Field Options + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Data Field Options +text/scalc/01/12090106.xhp + + +UFI: new Data Field Options dialog + + + + +Data Field Options For column, row, and page fields in the DataPilot, you can specify additional data field options. - -Sort by + +Sort by Select the data field by which values the column or row field is to be sorted. - -Ascending + +Ascending Specifies to sort values ascending. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, items are sorted by their names. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by their result values for that data field. - -Descending + +Descending Specifies to sort values descending. If the selected field is the field for which the dialog was opened, items are sorted by their names. If a data field was selected, the items are sorted by their result values for that data field. - -Manual -Specifies to sort values alphabetically.UFI: see spec doc. Currently set to alphabetically. -Display options + +Manual +Specifies to sort values alphabetically.UFI: see spec doc. Currently set to alphabetically. +Display options The display options can be specified for the outer row fields, that means, all row fields except the last, innermost row field. - -Layout + +Layout Select the field's layout mode from the list box. - -Empty line after each item -Specifies to add an empty row in the DataPilot table following the data of each item. -Show automatically + +Empty line after each item +Specifies to add an empty row in the DataPilot table following the data of each item. +Show automatically Specifies to only show the top or bottom nn items, when sorted by a specified field. - -Show + +Show Enables the automatic show feature. - -items + +items Enter the maximum number of items to show automatically. - -From + +From Select to show the top or bottom items in the specified sort order. - -Using field + +Using field Select the data field to use for sorting. - -Hide items + +Hide items Select the items to hide from the calculations. - -Hierarchy -Select the hierarchy to use. The DataPilot must be based on external source data that contains data hierarchies. - - + +Hierarchy +Select the hierarchy to use. The DataPilot must be based on external source data that contains data hierarchies. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp index 75b4791256..a373409c54 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Refresh -/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Refresh +/text/scalc/01/12090200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Refresh -Updates the DataPilot table. -
-After you import an Excel spreadsheet that contains a Pivot table, click in the table, and then choose Data - DataPilot - Refresh. - - - + +Refresh +Updates the DataPilot table. + +After you import an Excel spreadsheet that contains a Pivot table, click in the table, and then choose Data - DataPilot - Refresh. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp index ef58e4c95f..994c9fa799 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -DATE -text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp - - -extracted from 04060102 - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +DATE +text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp + + +extracted from 04060102 + + + DATE function - + DATE - -This function converts a date written as year, month, day to an internal serial number and displays it in the cell's formatting. The default format of a cell containing the DATE function is the date format, but you can format the cells with the 0 number format, which displays the internal serial number of the date as a number. -Syntax -DATE(year; month; day) - -Year is an integer between 1583 and 9956 or 0 and 99. -In Tools - Options - $[officename] - General you can set from which year a two-digit number entry is recognized as 20xx. - -Month is an integer between 1 and 12 indicating the month. - -Day is a number between 1 and 31 indicating the day of the month. -If the values for month and day are higher, they are carried over to the next digit. If you enter =DATE(00;12;31) the result will be "12/31/00." If, on the other hand, you enter =DATE(00;13;31) the result will be "1/31/01." -You can enter dates directly into the DATE function either as arguments, or range references. -Example -DATE("00;1;1") yields 1/1/00 - - + +This function converts a date written as year, month, day to an internal serial number and displays it in the cell's formatting. The default format of a cell containing the DATE function is the date format, but you can format the cells with the 0 number format, which displays the internal serial number of the date as a number. +Syntax +DATE(year; month; day) + +Year is an integer between 1583 and 9956 or 0 and 99. +In Tools - Options - $[officename] - General you can set from which year a two-digit number entry is recognized as 20xx. + +Month is an integer between 1 and 12 indicating the month. + +Day is a number between 1 and 31 indicating the day of the month. +If the values for month and day are higher, they are carried over to the next digit. If you enter =DATE(00;12;31) the result will be "12/31/00." If, on the other hand, you enter =DATE(00;13;31) the result will be "1/31/01." +You can enter dates directly into the DATE function either as arguments, or range references. +Example +DATE("00;1;1") yields 1/1/00 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp index 3cfbb57841..805241dcfc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -DATEVALUE -text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp - - - -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +DATEVALUE +text/scalc/01/func_datevalue.xhp + + + +dedr: reviewed + + DATEVALUE function - + DATEVALUE - -Returns the internal date number for text in quotes. -The internal date number is returned as a natural number. The number is determined by the date system that is used by $[officename] to calculate dates. -Syntax -DATEVALUE("Text") - -Text is a valid date expression and must be entered with quotation marks. -Example -DATEVALUE("7/20/54") yields 19925 - - + +Returns the internal date number for text in quotes. +The internal date number is returned as a natural number. The number is determined by the date system that is used by $[officename] to calculate dates. +Syntax +DATEVALUE("Text") + +Text is a valid date expression and must be entered with quotation marks. +Example +DATEVALUE("7/20/54") yields 19925 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp index 637a5d3d53..8bda671522 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -DAY -text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp - - - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +DAY +text/scalc/01/func_day.xhp + + + + + + DAY function - + DAY - -Returns the day of given date value. The day is returned as an integer between 1 and 31. You can also enter a negative date/time value. -Syntax -DAY(Number) - -Number, as a time value, is a decimal, for which the day is to be returned. -Examples -DAY(1) returns 31 (since $[officename] starts counting at zero from December 30, 1899) -DAY(NOW()) returns the current day. -DAY(C4) returns 5 if the contents of C4 = 8/5/1901. - - + +Returns the day of given date value. The day is returned as an integer between 1 and 31. You can also enter a negative date/time value. +Syntax +DAY(Number) + +Number, as a time value, is a decimal, for which the day is to be returned. +Examples +DAY(1) returns 31 (since $[officename] starts counting at zero from December 30, 1899) +DAY(NOW()) returns the current day. +DAY(C4) returns 5 if the contents of C4 = 8/5/1901. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp index 40d57f8f5a..9bcbc92760 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -DAYS -text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp - - - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +DAYS +text/scalc/01/func_days.xhp + + + + + + DAYS function - + DAYS - -Calculates the difference between two date values. The result is an integer and returns the number of days between the two days. -Syntax -DAYS(Date_2;Date_1) - -Date_1 is the start date, Date_2 is the end date. If Date_2 is an earlier date than Date_1 the result is a negative number. -Examples -DAYS("1/1/2010"; NOW()) returns the number of days from today until January 1, 2010. -DAYS("10/10/1990";"10/10/1980") returns 3652. - - + +Calculates the difference between two date values. The result is an integer and returns the number of days between the two days. +Syntax +DAYS(Date_2;Date_1) + +Date_1 is the start date, Date_2 is the end date. If Date_2 is an earlier date than Date_1 the result is a negative number. +Examples +DAYS("1/1/2010"; NOW()) returns the number of days from today until January 1, 2010. +DAYS("10/10/1990";"10/10/1980") returns 3652. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp index 1c2bc5627f..a0c1929cbd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -DAYS360 -text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp - - - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +DAYS360 +text/scalc/01/func_days360.xhp + + + + + + DAYS360 function - + DAYS360 - -Returns the difference between two dates based on the 360 day year used in interest calculations. The result is an integer. -Syntax -DAYS360(Date_1;Date_2;Type) -If Date_2 is earlier than Date_1, the function will return a negative number. -The optional argument Type determines the type of difference calculation. If Type = 0 or if the argument is missing, the US method (NASD, National Association of Securities Dealers) is used. If Type <> 0, the European method is used. -Examples -DAYS360("1/1/2000";NOW()) returns the number of interest days from January 1, 2000 until today. - - + +Returns the difference between two dates based on the 360 day year used in interest calculations. The result is an integer. +Syntax +DAYS360(Date_1;Date_2;Type) +If Date_2 is earlier than Date_1, the function will return a negative number. +The optional argument Type determines the type of difference calculation. If Type = 0 or if the argument is missing, the US method (NASD, National Association of Securities Dealers) is used. If Type <> 0, the European method is used. +Examples +DAYS360("1/1/2000";NOW()) returns the number of interest days from January 1, 2000 until today. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp index e575d3f04f..31ca495ef0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -EASTERSUNDAY -text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp - - - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +EASTERSUNDAY +text/scalc/01/func_eastersunday.xhp + + + + + + EASTERSUNDAY function - + EASTERSUNDAY - -Returns the date of Easter Sunday for the entered year. Year is an integer between 1583 and 9956 or 0 and 99. You can also calculate other holidays by simple addition with this date. -Easter Monday = EASTERSUNDAY() + 1 -Good Friday = EASTERSUNDAY() - 2 -Pentecost Sunday = EASTERSUNDAY() + 49 -Pentecost Monday = EASTERSUNDAY() + 50 -Examples -EASTERSUNDAY(2000) returns 4/23/00 -EASTERSUNDAY(2000)+49 returns the internal serial number 36688. If you use the MMDDYY date format, the result is 06/11/00. - - + +Returns the date of Easter Sunday for the entered year. Year is an integer between 1583 and 9956 or 0 and 99. You can also calculate other holidays by simple addition with this date. +Easter Monday = EASTERSUNDAY() + 1 +Good Friday = EASTERSUNDAY() - 2 +Pentecost Sunday = EASTERSUNDAY() + 49 +Pentecost Monday = EASTERSUNDAY() + 50 +Examples +EASTERSUNDAY(2000) returns 4/23/00 +EASTERSUNDAY(2000)+49 returns the internal serial number 36688. If you use the MMDDYY date format, the result is 06/11/00. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp index c78db2ee28..90388cf550 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -SECOND -text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp - - - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +SECOND +text/scalc/01/func_second.xhp + + + + + + SECOND function - + SECOND - -Returns the second for the given time value. The second is given as an integer between 0 and 59. -Syntax -SECOND(Number) - -Number, as a time value, is a decimal, for which the second is to be returned. -Examples -SECOND(NOW()) returns the current second -SECOND(C4) returns 17 if contents of C4 = 12:20:17. - - + +Returns the second for the given time value. The second is given as an integer between 0 and 59. +Syntax +SECOND(Number) + +Number, as a time value, is a decimal, for which the second is to be returned. +Examples +SECOND(NOW()) returns the current second +SECOND(C4) returns 17 if contents of C4 = 12:20:17. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp index 0ae8036fbf..7757bcb3e0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -TIME -text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp - - - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +TIME +text/scalc/01/func_time.xhp + + + + + + TIME function - + TIME - -TIME returns the current time value from values for hours, minutes and seconds. This function can be used to convert a time based on these three elements to a decimal time value. -Syntax -TIME(hour; minute; second) -Use an integer to set the hour. -Use an integer to set the minute. -Use an integer to set the second. -Examples -TIME("0;0;0") returns 00:00:00 -TIME("4;20;4") returns 04:20:04 - - + +TIME returns the current time value from values for hours, minutes and seconds. This function can be used to convert a time based on these three elements to a decimal time value. +Syntax +TIME(hour; minute; second) +Use an integer to set the hour. +Use an integer to set the minute. +Use an integer to set the second. +Examples +TIME("0;0;0") returns 00:00:00 +TIME("4;20;4") returns 04:20:04 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp index 2c7f9f970f..f1261b818e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -TIMEVALUE -text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp - - - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +TIMEVALUE +text/scalc/01/func_timevalue.xhp + + + + + + TIMEVALUE function - + TIMEVALUE - -TIMEVALUE returns the internal time number from a text enclosed by quotes and which may show a possible time entry format. -The internal number indicated as a decimal is the result of the date system used under $[officename] to calculate date entries. -Syntax -TIMEVALUE("Text") - -Text is a valid time expression and must be entered in quotation marks. -Examples -TIMEVALUE("4PM") returns 0.67. When formatting in time format HH:MM:SS, you then get 16:00:00. -TIMEVALUE("24:00") returns 1. If you use the HH:MM:SS time format, the value is 00:00:00. - - + +TIMEVALUE returns the internal time number from a text enclosed by quotes and which may show a possible time entry format. +The internal number indicated as a decimal is the result of the date system used under $[officename] to calculate date entries. +Syntax +TIMEVALUE("Text") + +Text is a valid time expression and must be entered in quotation marks. +Examples +TIMEVALUE("4PM") returns 0.67. When formatting in time format HH:MM:SS, you then get 16:00:00. +TIMEVALUE("24:00") returns 1. If you use the HH:MM:SS time format, the value is 00:00:00. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp index 6bf9c76740..ab45d0bc7f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -TODAY -text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp - - - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +TODAY +text/scalc/01/func_today.xhp + + + + + + TODAY - + TODAY - -Returns the current computer system date. The value is updated when you reopen the document or modify the values of the document. -Syntax -TODAY() - -Today is a function without arguments. -Example -TODAY() returns the current computer system date. - - + +Returns the current computer system date. The value is updated when you reopen the document or modify the values of the document. +Syntax +TODAY() + +Today is a function without arguments. +Example +TODAY() returns the current computer system date. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp index 1273c28011..db6321a55b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Number format: Percent -/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Number format: Percent +/text/scalc/02/02140000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Number format: Percent -Applies the percentage format to the selected cells. -
-
- - - + +Number format: Percent +Applies the percentage format to the selected cells. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Number Format: Percent - - -
- + + + +Number Format: Percent + + + +
percentage calculations - -You can also enter a percentage sign (%) after a number in a cell: -1% corresponds to 0.01 -1 + 16% corresponds to 116% or 1.16 -1%% corresponds to 0.0001 - -Format - Cell - Numbers - - + +You can also enter a percentage sign (%) after a number in a cell: +1% corresponds to 0.01 +1 + 16% corresponds to 116% or 1.16 +1%% corresponds to 0.0001 + +Format - Cell - Numbers + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp index 6ff54ee61f..c20a391fb3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Standard Formula, Date/Time, Error Warning -/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Standard Formula, Date/Time, Error Warning +/text/scalc/02/08080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
status bar info @@ -76,12 +76,12 @@ - -Standard Formula, Date/Time, Error Warning -Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed. -
-To change the default formula that is displayed, right-click the field, and then choose the formula that you want. The available formulas are: Average, count of values (COUNTA), count of numbers (COUNT), Maximum, Minimum, Sum, or None. - -Error codes - - + +Standard Formula, Date/Time, Error Warning +Displays information about the current document. By default, the SUM of the contents of the selected cells is displayed. + +To change the default formula that is displayed, right-click the field, and then choose the formula that you want. The available formulas are: Average, count of values (COUNTA), count of numbers (COUNT), Maximum, Minimum, Sum, or None. + +Error codes + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp index 3e216bc55f..2ac375540f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Zoom In -/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Zoom In +/text/scalc/02/10050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-page views; increasing scales -increasing scales in page view -scaling;page views +page views; increasing scales +increasing scales in page view +scaling;page views zooming;page views - -Zoom In -Enlarges the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar. -
-The maximum zoom factor is 400%. -
- - - + +Zoom In +Enlarges the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar. + +The maximum zoom factor is 400%. +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Zoom In - - -
- -
- - + + + +Zoom In + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp index 28d7db463b..99532bc833 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Zoom Out -/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Zoom Out +/text/scalc/02/10060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-page views;reducing scale -scaling; reducing the screen display +page views;reducing scale +scaling; reducing the screen display zooming;reducing page views - -Zoom Out -Reduces the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar. -
-The minimum zoom factor is 20%. -
- - - + +Zoom Out +Reduces the screen display of the current document. The current zoom factor is displayed on the Status Bar. + +The minimum zoom factor is 20%. +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Zooming Out - - -
- -
- - + + + +Zooming Out + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp index d59e7df043..1a628cd8ee 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Error Codes in %PRODUCTNAME Calc -/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Error Codes in %PRODUCTNAME Calc +/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -error codes in %PRODUCTNAME Calc +error codes in %PRODUCTNAME Calc %PRODUCTNAME Calc; error codes - -Error Codes in %PRODUCTNAME Calc -This following table is an overview of the error messages for %PRODUCTNAME Calc. If the error occurs in the cell that contains the cursor, the error message is displayed on the Status Bar. - - - -Error Code - - -Message - - -Explanation - - - - -501 - - -Invalid character - - -Character in a formula is not valid, for example, "=1Eq" instead of "=1E2". - - - - -502 - - -Invalid argument - - -Function argument is not valid, for example, a negative number for the root function. - - - - -503 - - -Invalid floating point operation - - -Division by 0, or another calculation that results in an overflow of the defined value range. - - - - -504 - - -Parameter list error - - -Function parameter is not valid, for example, text instead of a number, or a domain reference instead of cell reference. - - - - -508 - - -Error: Pair missing - - -Missing bracket, for example, closing brackets, but no opening brackets - - - - -509 - - -Missing operator - - -Operator is missing, for example, "=2(3+4) * ", where the operator between "2" and "(" is missing. - - - - -510 - - -Missing variable - - -Variable is missing, for example when two operators are together "=1+*2". - - - - -511 - - -Missing variable - - -Function requires more variables than are provided, for example, AND() and OR(). - - - - -512 - - -Formula overflow - - - -Compiler: the total number of internal tokens, (that is, operators, variables, brackets) in the formula exceeds 512. Interpreter: the total number of matrices that the formula creates exceeds 150. This includes basic functions that receive too large an array as a parameter (max. 0xFFFE, for example, 65534 bytes). - - - - -513 - - -String overflow - - - -Compiler: an identifier in the formula exceeds 64 KB in size. Interpreter: a result of a string operation exceeds 64 KB in size. - - - - -514 - - -Internal overflow - - -Sort operation attempted on too much numerical data (max. 100000) or a calculation stack overflow. - - - - -516 - - -Internal syntax error - - -Matrix is expected on the calculation stack, but is not available. - - - - -517 - - -Internal syntax error - - -Unknown code, for example, a document with a newer function is loaded in an older version that does not contain the function. - - - - -518 - - -Internal syntax error - - -Variable is not available - - - - -519 - - -No result (#VALUE is in the cell rather than Err:519!) - - -Formula yields a value that does not corresponds to the definition, or a cell that is referenced in the formula contains text instead of a number. - - - - -520 - - -Internal syntax error - - -Compiler creates an unknown compiler code. - - - - -521 - - -Internal syntax error - - -No result. - - - - -522 - - -Circular reference - - -Formula refers directly or indirectly to itself and the Iterations option is not set under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate.UFI: fixes #i23854# - - - - -523 - - -The calculation procedure does not converge - - -Financial statistics function missed a targeted value or iterations of circular references do not reach the minimum change within the maximum steps that are set. - - - - -524 - - -invalid references; error messages + +Error Codes in %PRODUCTNAME Calc +This following table is an overview of the error messages for %PRODUCTNAME Calc. If the error occurs in the cell that contains the cursor, the error message is displayed on the Status Bar. +
+ + +Error Code + + +Message + + +Explanation + + + + +501 + + +Invalid character + + +Character in a formula is not valid, for example, "=1Eq" instead of "=1E2". + + + + +502 + + +Invalid argument + + +Function argument is not valid, for example, a negative number for the root function. + + + + +503 + + +Invalid floating point operation + + +Division by 0, or another calculation that results in an overflow of the defined value range. + + + + +504 + + +Parameter list error + + +Function parameter is not valid, for example, text instead of a number, or a domain reference instead of cell reference. + + + + +508 + + +Error: Pair missing + + +Missing bracket, for example, closing brackets, but no opening brackets + + + + +509 + + +Missing operator + + +Operator is missing, for example, "=2(3+4) * ", where the operator between "2" and "(" is missing. + + + + +510 + + +Missing variable + + +Variable is missing, for example when two operators are together "=1+*2". + + + + +511 + + +Missing variable + + +Function requires more variables than are provided, for example, AND() and OR(). + + + + +512 + + +Formula overflow + + + +Compiler: the total number of internal tokens, (that is, operators, variables, brackets) in the formula exceeds 512. Interpreter: the total number of matrices that the formula creates exceeds 150. This includes basic functions that receive too large an array as a parameter (max. 0xFFFE, for example, 65534 bytes). + + + + +513 + + +String overflow + + + +Compiler: an identifier in the formula exceeds 64 KB in size. Interpreter: a result of a string operation exceeds 64 KB in size. + + + + +514 + + +Internal overflow + + +Sort operation attempted on too much numerical data (max. 100000) or a calculation stack overflow. + + + + +516 + + +Internal syntax error + + +Matrix is expected on the calculation stack, but is not available. + + + + +517 + + +Internal syntax error + + +Unknown code, for example, a document with a newer function is loaded in an older version that does not contain the function. + + + + +518 + + +Internal syntax error + + +Variable is not available + + + + +519 + + +No result (#VALUE is in the cell rather than Err:519!) + + +Formula yields a value that does not corresponds to the definition, or a cell that is referenced in the formula contains text instead of a number. + + + + +520 + + +Internal syntax error + + +Compiler creates an unknown compiler code. + + + + +521 + + +Internal syntax error + + +No result. + + + + +522 + + +Circular reference + + +Formula refers directly or indirectly to itself and the Iterations option is not set under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate.UFI: fixes #i23854# + + + + +523 + + +The calculation procedure does not converge + + +Financial statistics function missed a targeted value or iterations of circular references do not reach the minimum change within the maximum steps that are set. + + + + +524 + + +invalid references; error messages #REF error message - -invalid references (instead of Err:524 cell contains #REF) - - - -Compiler: a column or row description name could not be resolved. Interpreter: in a formula, the column, row, or sheet that contains a referenced cell is missing. - - - - -525 - - -invalid names; error messages + +invalid references (instead of Err:524 cell contains #REF) + + + +Compiler: a column or row description name could not be resolved. Interpreter: in a formula, the column, row, or sheet that contains a referenced cell is missing. + + + + +525 + + +invalid names; error messages #NAME error message - -invalid names (instead of Err:525 cell contains #NAME?) - - -An identifier could not be evaluated, for example, no valid reference, no valid domain name, no column/row label, no macro, incorrect decimal divider, add-in not found. - - - - -526 - - -Internal syntax error - - -Obsolete, no longer used, but could come from old documents if the result is a formula from a domain. - - - - -527 - - -Internal overflow - - - -Interpreter: References, such as when a cell references a cell, are too encapsulated. - - -
- - - + +invalid names (instead of Err:525 cell contains #NAME?) + + +An identifier could not be evaluated, for example, no valid reference, no valid domain name, no column/row label, no macro, incorrect decimal divider, add-in not found. + + + + +526 + + +Internal syntax error + + +Obsolete, no longer used, but could come from old documents if the result is a formula from a domain. + + + + +527 + + +Internal overflow + + + +Interpreter: References, such as when a cell references a cell, are too encapsulated. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp index 7b8b153f9c..676f4d0f92 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Automatically Calculating Series -/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screen shot, heavily reedited; dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Automatically Calculating Series +/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted screen shot, heavily reedited; dedr: reviewed + + -series; calculating -calculating; series -linear series -growth series -powers of 2;calculating a list -cells; filling automatically -auto filling; cells +series; calculating +calculating; series +linear series +growth series +powers of 2;calculating a list +cells; filling automatically +auto filling; cells filling;cells, automatically - + Automatically Filling in Data Based on Adjacent Cells - -You can automatically fill cells with data with the AutoFill command or the Series command. -Using AutoFill -AutoFill automatically generates a data series based on a defined pattern. - - -On a sheet, click in cell, and type a number. - - -Click in another cell and then click back in the cell where you typed the number. - - -Drag the fill handle in the bottom right corner of the cell across the cells that you want to fill, and release the mouse button. -The cells are filled with ascending numbers. - - -If you select two or more adjacent cells that contain different numbers, and drag, the remaining cells are filled with the arithmetic pattern that is recognized in the numbers. The AutoFill function also recognizes customized lists that are defined under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. -To quickly create a list of consecutive days, enter "Monday" in a cell, and drag the fill handle. -Using a Defined Series - - -Select the cell range in the sheet that you want to fill. - - -Choose Edit - Fill - Series. - - -Select the parameters for the series. -If you select a linear series, the increment that you enter is added to each consecutive number in the series to create the next value. -If you select a growth series, the increment that you enter is multiplied by each consecutive number to create the next value. -If you select a date series, the increment that you enter is added to the time unit that you specify. - - -
- -Sort lists -
- - + +You can automatically fill cells with data with the AutoFill command or the Series command. +Using AutoFill +AutoFill automatically generates a data series based on a defined pattern. + + +On a sheet, click in cell, and type a number. + + +Click in another cell and then click back in the cell where you typed the number. + + +Drag the fill handle in the bottom right corner of the cell across the cells that you want to fill, and release the mouse button. +The cells are filled with ascending numbers. + + +If you select two or more adjacent cells that contain different numbers, and drag, the remaining cells are filled with the arithmetic pattern that is recognized in the numbers. The AutoFill function also recognizes customized lists that are defined under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. +To quickly create a list of consecutive days, enter "Monday" in a cell, and drag the fill handle. +Using a Defined Series + + +Select the cell range in the sheet that you want to fill. + + +Choose Edit - Fill - Series. + + +Select the parameters for the series. +If you select a linear series, the increment that you enter is added to each consecutive number in the series to create the next value. +If you select a growth series, the increment that you enter is multiplied by each consecutive number to create the next value. +If you select a date series, the increment that you enter is added to the time unit that you specify. + + +
+ +Sort lists +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp index 052d7269ca..c9510c49c6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Calculating in Spreadsheets -/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Changed screenshots, cleaned up text; dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Calculating in Spreadsheets +/text/scalc/guide/calculate.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Changed screenshots, cleaned up text; dedr: reviewed + + -spreadsheets; calculating -calculating; spreadsheets +spreadsheets; calculating +calculating; spreadsheets formulas; spreadsheets - + Calculating in Spreadsheets - -The following is an example of a calculation in $[officename] Calc. - - -Click in a cell, and type a number - - -Press Enter. -The cursor moves down to the next cell. - - -Enter another number. - - -Press the Tab key. -The cursor moves to the right into the next cell. - - -Type in a formula, for example, =A3 * A4 / 100. - - - - Press Enter. -The result of the formula appears in the cell. If you want, you can edit the formula in the input line of the Formula bar. + +The following is an example of a calculation in $[officename] Calc. + + +Click in a cell, and type a number + + +Press Enter. +The cursor moves down to the next cell. + + +Enter another number. + + +Press the Tab key. +The cursor moves to the right into the next cell. + + +Type in a formula, for example, =A3 * A4 / 100. + + + + Press Enter. +The result of the formula appears in the cell. If you want, you can edit the formula in the input line of the Formula bar. Calculating in a spreadsheet - -When you edit a formula, the new result is calculated automatically. - - - - + +When you edit a formula, the new result is calculated automatically. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp index 055be7345e..f3f0bb92a9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Protecting Cells from Changes -/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Changed table to numbered list, cleanup deleted screenshot; dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Protecting Cells from Changes +/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Changed table to numbered list, cleanup deleted screenshot; dedr: reviewed + + -protecting;cells -cells; protecting -cell protection; enabling -sheets; protecting -documents; protecting -cells; hiding for printing -protecting; sheets -modifying; protecting sheets +protecting;cells +cells; protecting +cell protection; enabling +sheets; protecting +documents; protecting +cells; hiding for printing +protecting; sheets +modifying; protecting sheets changing; document protection - + Protecting Cells from Changes - -%PRODUCTNAME provides several options to protect the data in a spreadsheet. By default, when you protect a sheet or a spreadsheet, every cell is protected. That is, you cannot change the contents of cells in a protected sheet or spreadsheet. If you want, you can specify the degree of protection down to a sheet or cell level. - - -Select the cells that you want to specify the cell protection options for. -If you want, you can also select an entire sheet. - - -Choose Format - Cells and click the Cell Protection tab. - - -Select the protection options that you want. -Select Protected to prevent changes to the contents and the format of a cell. -Select Hide formula to hide and to protect formulas from changes. -Select Hide when printing to hide protected cells in the printed document. The cells are not hidden onscreen. - - -Click OK. - - -Apply the protection options. -To apply the options to the current sheet only, choose Tools - Protect Document - Sheet. -To apply the options to all of the sheets in the spreadsheet, choose Tools - Protect Document - Document. - - -(Optional) Enter a password. -If you forget your password, you cannot deactivate the protection. If you only want to protect cells from changes, do not enter a password. - - -Click OK. - - -
- - -
- - + +%PRODUCTNAME provides several options to protect the data in a spreadsheet. By default, when you protect a sheet or a spreadsheet, every cell is protected. That is, you cannot change the contents of cells in a protected sheet or spreadsheet. If you want, you can specify the degree of protection down to a sheet or cell level. + + +Select the cells that you want to specify the cell protection options for. +If you want, you can also select an entire sheet. + + +Choose Format - Cells and click the Cell Protection tab. + + +Select the protection options that you want. +Select Protected to prevent changes to the contents and the format of a cell. +Select Hide formula to hide and to protect formulas from changes. +Select Hide when printing to hide protected cells in the printed document. The cells are not hidden onscreen. + + +Click OK. + + +Apply the protection options. +To apply the options to the current sheet only, choose Tools - Protect Document - Sheet. +To apply the options to all of the sheets in the spreadsheet, choose Tools - Protect Document - Document. + + +(Optional) Enter a password. +If you forget your password, you cannot deactivate the protection. If you only want to protect cells from changes, do not enter a password. + + +Click OK. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp index 0f754dfa24..0e43766c94 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Assigning Formats by Formula -/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Assigning Formats by Formula +/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_by_formula.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -formats; assigning by formulas +formats; assigning by formulas cell formats; assigning by formulas - + Assigning Formats by Formula - -The STYLE() function can be added to an existing formula in a cell. For example, together with the CURRENT function, you can color a cell depending on its value. The formula =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3, "Red", "Green")) applies the cell style "Red" to cells if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the cell style "Green" is applied. -If you would like to apply a formula to all cells in a selected area, you can use the Find & Replace dialog. - - -Select all the desired cells. - - -Select the menu command Edit - Find & Replace. - - -For the Search for term, enter: .* -".*" is a regular expression that designates the contents of the current cell. - + +The STYLE() function can be added to an existing formula in a cell. For example, together with the CURRENT function, you can color a cell depending on its value. The formula =...+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3, "Red", "Green")) applies the cell style "Red" to cells if the value is greater than 3, otherwise the cell style "Green" is applied. +If you would like to apply a formula to all cells in a selected area, you can use the Find & Replace dialog. + + +Select all the desired cells. + + +Select the menu command Edit - Find & Replace. + + +For the Search for term, enter: .* +".*" is a regular expression that designates the contents of the current cell. + STYLE; function - -Enter the following formula in the Replace with field: =&+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"Red";"Green")) -The "&" symbol designates the current contents of the Search for field. The line must begin with an equal sign, since it is a formula. It is assumed that the cell styles "Red" and "Green" already exist. - - -Mark the fields Regular expressions and Current selection only. Click Find All. -All cells with contents that were included in the selection are now highlighted. - - -Click Replace all. - - - - - - - + +Enter the following formula in the Replace with field: =&+STYLE(IF(CURRENT()>3;"Red";"Green")) +The "&" symbol designates the current contents of the Search for field. The line must begin with an equal sign, since it is a formula. It is assumed that the cell styles "Red" and "Green" already exist. + + +Mark the fields Regular expressions and Current selection only. Click Find All. +All cells with contents that were included in the selection are now highlighted. + + +Click Replace all. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp index 15fcbd8d3b..54b51049dc 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Applying Conditional Formatting -/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Applying Conditional Formatting +/text/scalc/guide/cellstyle_conditional.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -formats; using conditional formats -conditional formatting; cells -cells; conditional formatting -formatting; conditional formatting -styles;conditional styles -formats; conditional +formats; using conditional formats +conditional formatting; cells +cells; conditional formatting +formatting; conditional formatting +styles;conditional styles +formats; conditional cell formats; conditional - + Applying Conditional Formatting - -Using the menu command Format - Conditional formatting, the dialog allows you to define up to three conditions per cell, which must be met in order for the selected cells to have a particular format. -With conditional formatting, you can, for example, highlight the totals that exceed the average value of all totals. If the totals change, the formatting changes correspondingly, without having to apply other styles manually. - - -Select the cells to which you want to apply a conditional style. - - -Choose Format - Conditional Formatting. - - -Enter the condition(s) into the dialog box. The dialog is described in detail in $[officename] Help, and an example is provided below: - + +Using the menu command Format - Conditional formatting, the dialog allows you to define up to three conditions per cell, which must be met in order for the selected cells to have a particular format. +With conditional formatting, you can, for example, highlight the totals that exceed the average value of all totals. If the totals change, the formatting changes correspondingly, without having to apply other styles manually. + + +Select the cells to which you want to apply a conditional style. + + +Choose Format - Conditional Formatting. + + +Enter the condition(s) into the dialog box. The dialog is described in detail in $[officename] Help, and an example is provided below: + random numbers; generating - -Example of Conditional Formatting: Generate Number Values -You want to give certain values in your tables particular emphasis. For example, in a table of turnovers, you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red. This is possible with conditional formatting. - - -First of all, write a table in which a few different values occur. For your test you can create tables with any random numbers: -In one of the cells enter the formula =RAND(), and you will obtain a random number between 0 and 1. If you want integers of between 0 and 50, enter the formula =INT(RAND()*50). - - -Copy the formula to create a row of random numbers. Click the bottom right corner of the selected cell, and drag to the right until the desired cell range is selected. - - -In the same way as described above, drag down the corner of the rightmost cell in order to create more rows of random numbers. - - -Example of Conditional Formatting: Define Cell Styles -The next step is to apply a cell style to all values that represent above-average turnover, and one to those that are below the average. Ensure that the Stylist is visible before proceeding. - - -Click in a blank cell and select the command Format Cells in the context menu. - - -In the Format Cells dialog on the Background tab, select a background color. Click OK. - - -In the Stylist, click the New Style from Selection icon. Enter the name of the new style. For this example, name the style "Above". - - -To define a second style, click again in a blank cell and proceed as described above. Assign a different background color for the cell and assign a name (for this example, "Below"). - - -Example of Conditional Formatting: Calculate Average -In our particular example, we are calculating the average of the random values. The result is placed in a cell: - - -Set the cursor in a blank cell, for example, J14, and activate the Function Wizard. - - -Select the AVERAGE function. Use the mouse to select all your random numbers. If you cannot see the entire range, because Function Wizard is obscuring it, you can temporarily zoom out from the dialog using the Zoom in/out key. - - -Close Function Wizard with OK. - - -Example of Conditional Formatting: Apply Cell Style -Now you can apply the conditional formatting to the sheet: - - -Select all cells with the random numbers. - - -Choose the Format - Conditional Formatting command to open the corresponding dialog. - - -Define the condition as follows: If cell value is less than J14, format with cell style "Below", and if cell value is greater than or equal to J14, format with cell style "Above". - + +Example of Conditional Formatting: Generate Number Values +You want to give certain values in your tables particular emphasis. For example, in a table of turnovers, you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red. This is possible with conditional formatting. + + +First of all, write a table in which a few different values occur. For your test you can create tables with any random numbers: +In one of the cells enter the formula =RAND(), and you will obtain a random number between 0 and 1. If you want integers of between 0 and 50, enter the formula =INT(RAND()*50). + + +Copy the formula to create a row of random numbers. Click the bottom right corner of the selected cell, and drag to the right until the desired cell range is selected. + + +In the same way as described above, drag down the corner of the rightmost cell in order to create more rows of random numbers. + -cell styles; copying -copying; cell styles +Example of Conditional Formatting: Define Cell Styles +The next step is to apply a cell style to all values that represent above-average turnover, and one to those that are below the average. Ensure that the Stylist is visible before proceeding. + + +Click in a blank cell and select the command Format Cells in the context menu. + + +In the Format Cells dialog on the Background tab, select a background color. Click OK. + + +In the Stylist, click the New Style from Selection icon. Enter the name of the new style. For this example, name the style "Above". + + +To define a second style, click again in a blank cell and proceed as described above. Assign a different background color for the cell and assign a name (for this example, "Below"). + + +Example of Conditional Formatting: Calculate Average +In our particular example, we are calculating the average of the random values. The result is placed in a cell: + + +Set the cursor in a blank cell, for example, J14, and activate the Function Wizard. + + +Select the AVERAGE function. Use the mouse to select all your random numbers. If you cannot see the entire range, because Function Wizard is obscuring it, you can temporarily zoom out from the dialog using the Zoom in/out key. + + +Close Function Wizard with OK. + + +Example of Conditional Formatting: Apply Cell Style +Now you can apply the conditional formatting to the sheet: + + +Select all cells with the random numbers. + + +Choose the Format - Conditional Formatting command to open the corresponding dialog. + + +Define the condition as follows: If cell value is less than J14, format with cell style "Below", and if cell value is greater than or equal to J14, format with cell style "Above". + + +cell styles; copying +copying; cell styles tables; copying cell styles - -Example of Conditional Formatting: Copy Cell Style -To apply the conditional formatting to other cells later: - - -Click one of the cells that has been assigned conditional formatting. - - -Copy the cell to the clipboard. - - -Select the cells that are to receive this same formatting. - - -Choose Edit - Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog appears. - - -In the Selection area, check only the Formats box. All other boxes must be unchecked. Click OK. - - - - - -Format - Conditional formatting - - + +Example of Conditional Formatting: Copy Cell Style +To apply the conditional formatting to other cells later: + + +Click one of the cells that has been assigned conditional formatting. + + +Copy the cell to the clipboard. + + +Select the cells that are to receive this same formatting. + + +Choose Edit - Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog appears. + + +In the Selection area, check only the Formats box. All other boxes must be unchecked. Click OK. + + + + + +Format - Conditional formatting + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp index 739d30e345..4a2a93d853 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Filtering Database Ranges -/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshot and reedited; dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Filtering Database Ranges +/text/scalc/guide/database_filter.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted screenshot and reedited; dedr: reviewed + + -database ranges; filtering -filtering; database ranges +database ranges; filtering +filtering; database ranges database ranges; removing filters - + Filtering Database Ranges - -You can use the spreadsheet filters to filter database ranges in spreadsheets. A standard filter uses the options that you specify to filter the data. An AutoFilter filters data according to a specific value or string. -To Apply a Standard Filter to a Database Range - - -Click in a database range. - - -Choose Data - Filter - Standard Filter. - - -In the Standard Filter dialog, specify the filter options that you want. - - -Click OK. -The records that match the filter options that you specified are shown. - - -To Apply an AutoFilter to a Database Range - - -Click in a database range. - - -Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. -An arrow button is added to the head of each column in the database range. - - -Click the arrow button in the column that contains the value or string that you want to set as the filter criteria. - - -Select the value or string that you want to use as the filter criteria. -The records that match the filter criteria that you selected are shown. - - -To Remove a Filter From a Database Range - - -Click in a database range. - - -Choose Data - Filter - Remove Filter. - - -
- - - -
- - + +You can use the spreadsheet filters to filter database ranges in spreadsheets. A standard filter uses the options that you specify to filter the data. An AutoFilter filters data according to a specific value or string. +To Apply a Standard Filter to a Database Range + + +Click in a database range. + + +Choose Data - Filter - Standard Filter. + + +In the Standard Filter dialog, specify the filter options that you want. + + +Click OK. +The records that match the filter options that you specified are shown. + + +To Apply an AutoFilter to a Database Range + + +Click in a database range. + + +Choose Data - Filter - AutoFilter. +An arrow button is added to the head of each column in the database range. + + +Click the arrow button in the column that contains the value or string that you want to set as the filter criteria. + + +Select the value or string that you want to use as the filter criteria. +The records that match the filter criteria that you selected are shown. + + +To Remove a Filter From a Database Range + + +Click in a database range. + + +Choose Data - Filter - Remove Filter. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp index ddb73501da..aef211b41c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Sorting Database Ranges -/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshot, cleaned up; dedr:reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Sorting Database Ranges +/text/scalc/guide/database_sort.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted screenshot, cleaned up; dedr:reviewed + + -database ranges; sorting +database ranges; sorting sorting; database ranges - + Sorting Database Ranges - - - -Click in a database range. - - -Choose Data - Sort. - - -Select the sort options that you want. - - -Click OK. - - -
- - - -
- - + + + +Click in a database range. + + +Choose Data - Sort. + + +Select the sort options that you want. + + +Click OK. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp index 96ff7a6c5a..00fe1ddb26 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -DataPilot -/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshot, cleaned up - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +DataPilot +/text/scalc/guide/datapilot.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted screenshot, cleaned up + + -DataPilot function; introduction +DataPilot function; introduction Pivot Table, see DataPilot function - + DataPilot - -The DataPilot (sometimes known as Pivot Table) allows you to combine, compare and analyze large amounts of data. You can view different summaries of the source data, and you can display the details for areas of interest and create reports. -A table that has been created with the DataPilot is an interactive table. Data can be arranged, rearranged or summarized according to different points of view. -
- - - - - - -
- - + +The DataPilot (sometimes known as Pivot Table) allows you to combine, compare and analyze large amounts of data. You can view different summaries of the source data, and you can display the details for areas of interest and create reports. +A table that has been created with the DataPilot is an interactive table. Data can be arranged, rearranged or summarized according to different points of view. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp index 317e24dd99..ed6d8c855b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Creating DataPilot Tables -/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fix to #i22166#, deleted 3 hard-to-localize images -YJ: checked - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Creating DataPilot Tables +/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_createtable.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fix to #i22166#, deleted 3 hard-to-localize images +YJ: checked + + -DataPilot function; creating and applying -DataPilot function; calling up +DataPilot function; creating and applying +DataPilot function; calling up DataPilot function; selecting sources - + Creating DataPilot Tables - - - -Position the cursor within a range of cells containing values, row and column headings. - - -Choose Data - DataPilot - Start. The Select Source dialog appears. Choose Current selection and confirm with OK. The table headings are shown as buttons in the DataPilot dialog. Drag these buttons as required and drop them into the layout areas "Page Fields", "Column Fields", "Row Fields" and "Data Fields". - - -Drag the desired buttons into one of the four areas. - - -Drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated datapilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. -If the button is dropped in the Data Fields area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used to calculate the data. - - -By double-clicking on one of the fields in the Data Fields area you can call up the Data Field dialog. - - -Use the Data Field dialog to select the calculations to be used for the data. To make a multiple selection, press the Ctrl key while clicking the desired calculation. - - -The order of the buttons can be changed at any time by moving them to a different position in the area with the mouse. - - -Remove a button by dragging it back to the area of the other buttons at the right of the dialog. - - -To open the Data Field dialog, double-click one of the buttons in the Row or Column area. Use the dialog to select if and to what extent %PRODUCTNAME calculates display subtotals. - - -Exit the DataPilot dialog by pressing OK. A Filter button will now be inserted, or a page button for every data field that you dropped in the Page Fields area. The DataPilot table is inserted further down. - - - - - - - - - - + + + +Position the cursor within a range of cells containing values, row and column headings. + + +Choose Data - DataPilot - Start. The Select Source dialog appears. Choose Current selection and confirm with OK. The table headings are shown as buttons in the DataPilot dialog. Drag these buttons as required and drop them into the layout areas "Page Fields", "Column Fields", "Row Fields" and "Data Fields". + + +Drag the desired buttons into one of the four areas. + + +Drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated datapilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. +If the button is dropped in the Data Fields area it will be given a caption that also shows the formula that will be used to calculate the data. + + +By double-clicking on one of the fields in the Data Fields area you can call up the Data Field dialog. + + +Use the Data Field dialog to select the calculations to be used for the data. To make a multiple selection, press the Ctrl key while clicking the desired calculation. + + +The order of the buttons can be changed at any time by moving them to a different position in the area with the mouse. + + +Remove a button by dragging it back to the area of the other buttons at the right of the dialog. + + +To open the Data Field dialog, double-click one of the buttons in the Row or Column area. Use the dialog to select if and to what extent %PRODUCTNAME calculates display subtotals. + + +Exit the DataPilot dialog by pressing OK. A Filter button will now be inserted, or a page button for every data field that you dropped in the Page Fields area. The DataPilot table is inserted further down. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp index 0f8c464eaa..386e2974ab 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Deleting DataPilot Tables -/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Deleting DataPilot Tables +/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_deletetable.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + DataPilot function; deleting tables - + Deleting DataPilot Tables - -In order to delete a DataPilot table, select any cell in the DataPilot table, then choose Delete in the context menu. - - - - - - - - - + +In order to delete a DataPilot table, select any cell in the DataPilot table, then choose Delete in the context menu. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp index 1003eb65ca..801e649750 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Editing DataPilot Tables -/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fix to #i22166# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Editing DataPilot Tables +/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fix to #i22166# + + -DataPilot function; editing tables +DataPilot function; editing tables DataPilot function; inserting columns - + Editing DataPilot Tables - -Click one of the buttons in the table that the DataPilot has created and hold the mouse button down. A special symbol will appear next to the mouse pointer. -By dragging the button to a different position in the same row you can alter the order of the columns. If you drag a button to the left edge of the table into the row headings area, you can change a column into a row. -In the DataPilot dialog, you can drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated DataPilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. -To remove a button from the table, just drag it out of the DataPilot table. Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer positioned within the sheet has become a 'not allowed' icon. The button is deleted. -To edit the DataPilot table, click a cell inside the DataPilot table and open the context menu. In the context menu you find the command Start, which displays the DataPilot dialog for the current DataPilot table. -By double-clicking on some buttons inside the DataPilot table you can hide the subelements below it. - - - - - - - - - - + +Click one of the buttons in the table that the DataPilot has created and hold the mouse button down. A special symbol will appear next to the mouse pointer. +By dragging the button to a different position in the same row you can alter the order of the columns. If you drag a button to the left edge of the table into the row headings area, you can change a column into a row. +In the DataPilot dialog, you can drag a button to the Page Fields area to create a button and a listbox on top of the generated DataPilot table. The listbox can be used to filter the DataPilot table by the contents of the selected item. You can use drag-and-drop within the generated DataPilot table to use another page field as a filter. +To remove a button from the table, just drag it out of the DataPilot table. Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer positioned within the sheet has become a 'not allowed' icon. The button is deleted. +To edit the DataPilot table, click a cell inside the DataPilot table and open the context menu. In the context menu you find the command Start, which displays the DataPilot dialog for the current DataPilot table. +By double-clicking on some buttons inside the DataPilot table you can hide the subelements below it. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp index 4f3a026753..cd04fb3fb5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Copying to Multiple Sheets -/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: sc.features "Select tables with keyboard" -YJ:checked - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Copying to Multiple Sheets +/text/scalc/guide/edit_multitables.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: sc.features "Select tables with keyboard" +YJ:checked + + -sheets; transfering values -multiple sheets +sheets; transfering values +multiple sheets copying;values in multiple sheets - + Copying to Multiple Sheets - -In $[officename] Calc, you can insert values, text or formulas that are simultaneously copied to other selected sheets of your document. - - -Select all desired sheets by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key and clicking the corresponding register tabs that are still gray at the bottom margin of the workspace. All selected register tabs are now white. -You can use Shift+Ctrl+Page Up or Page Down to select multiple sheets using the keyboard. - - -Now when you insert values, text or formulas into the sheets, they will also appear in the identical positions in the other selected sheets. - - - - - - - + +In $[officename] Calc, you can insert values, text or formulas that are simultaneously copied to other selected sheets of your document. + + +Select all desired sheets by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key and clicking the corresponding register tabs that are still gray at the bottom margin of the workspace. All selected register tabs are now white. +You can use Shift+Ctrl+Page Up or Page Down to select multiple sheets using the keyboard. + + +Now when you insert values, text or formulas into the sheets, they will also appear in the identical positions in the other selected sheets. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp index 823aea2956..47f8aa9e90 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Applying Filters -/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Removed dead link - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Applying Filters +/text/scalc/guide/filters.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Removed dead link + + -filters; applying -advanced filters +filters; applying +advanced filters rows; deleting with filters - + Applying Filters - -Filters and advanced filters allow you to ensure that only certain rows (records) of a data range are visible. In the spreadsheets in $[officename] there are various possibilities for applying filters. - - -One use for the AutoFilter function is to quickly restrict the display to records with identical entries in a data field. - - -In the Filter dialog, you can also define ranges which contain the values in particular data fields. You can use the standard filter to connect up to three conditions with either a logical AND or a logical OR operator. - - -The Advanced filter exceeds the three condition limitation and allows up to a total of eight filter conditions. With advanced filters you enter the conditions directly into the sheet. - - -If you select rows for filters and then want to delete these, before deleting you must first click all the rows visible after the filter individually while pressing the Ctrl key. This ensures that only these rows are selected and then deleted. -
- - -
- - + +Filters and advanced filters allow you to ensure that only certain rows (records) of a data range are visible. In the spreadsheets in $[officename] there are various possibilities for applying filters. + + +One use for the AutoFilter function is to quickly restrict the display to records with identical entries in a data field. + + +In the Filter dialog, you can also define ranges which contain the values in particular data fields. You can use the standard filter to connect up to three conditions with either a logical AND or a logical OR operator. + + +The Advanced filter exceeds the three condition limitation and allows up to a total of eight filter conditions. With advanced filters you enter the conditions directly into the sheet. + + +If you select rows for filters and then want to delete these, before deleting you must first click all the rows visible after the filter individually while pressing the Ctrl key. This ensures that only these rows are selected and then deleted. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp index b66098d49b..d6e3c36a2e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Formatting Spreadsheets -/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -checked - yj - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Formatting Spreadsheets +/text/scalc/guide/format_table.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +checked - yj + + -sheets;AutoFormat function -AutoFormat function; sheets -text in cells; formatting +sheets;AutoFormat function +AutoFormat function; sheets +text in cells; formatting spreadsheets;formatting - + Formatting Spreadsheets - -Formatting Text in a Spreadsheet - - -Select the text you want to format. - - -Choose the desired text attributes from the Spreadsheet Object Bar. You can also choose Format - Cells. The Format Cells dialog will appear in which you can choose various text attributes on the Font tab page. - - -Formatting Numbers in a Spreadsheet - - -Select the cells containing the numbers you want to format. - - -To format numbers in the default currency format or as percentages, use the icons on the Spreadsheet Object Bar. For other formats, choose Format - Cells. You can choose from the preset formats or define your own on the Numbers tab page. - - -Formatting Borders and Backgrounds for Cells and Pages - - -You can assign a format to any group of cells by first selecting the cells (for multiple selection, hold down the Ctrl key when clicking), and then activating the Format Cells dialog in Format - Cell. In this dialog, you can select attributes such as shadows and backgrounds. - - -To apply formatting attributes to an entire sheet, choose Format - Page. You can define headers and footers, for example, to appear on each printed page. - - -An image that you have loaded with Format - Page - Background is only visible in print or in the page preview. To display a background image on screen as well, insert the graphic image by choosing Insert - Graphics - From File and arrange the image behind the cells by choosing Format - Arrange - To Background. Use the Navigator to select the background image. -
- -
- - + +Formatting Text in a Spreadsheet + + +Select the text you want to format. + + +Choose the desired text attributes from the Spreadsheet Object Bar. You can also choose Format - Cells. The Format Cells dialog will appear in which you can choose various text attributes on the Font tab page. + + +Formatting Numbers in a Spreadsheet + + +Select the cells containing the numbers you want to format. + + +To format numbers in the default currency format or as percentages, use the icons on the Spreadsheet Object Bar. For other formats, choose Format - Cells. You can choose from the preset formats or define your own on the Numbers tab page. + + +Formatting Borders and Backgrounds for Cells and Pages + + +You can assign a format to any group of cells by first selecting the cells (for multiple selection, hold down the Ctrl key when clicking), and then activating the Format Cells dialog in Format - Cell. In this dialog, you can select attributes such as shadows and backgrounds. + + +To apply formatting attributes to an entire sheet, choose Format - Page. You can define headers and footers, for example, to appear on each printed page. + + +An image that you have loaded with Format - Page - Background is only visible in print or in the page preview. To display a background image on screen as well, insert the graphic image by choosing Insert - Graphics - From File and arrange the image behind the cells by choosing Format - Arrange - To Background. Use the Navigator to select the background image. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp index b8b64a4e21..a18b26c3a0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Formatting Numbers With Decimals -/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Formatting Numbers With Decimals +/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -numbers; formatting in tables -formats; numbers in tables -tables; number formats -default formats; numbers in tables +numbers; formatting in tables +formats; numbers in tables +tables; number formats +default formats; numbers in tables number formats; in cells - + Formatting Numbers With Decimals - -Enter a number into the sheet, for example, 1234.5678. This number will be displayed in the default number format, with two decimal places. You will see 1234.57 when you confirm the entry. Only the display in the document will be rounded off; internally, the number retains all four decimal places after the decimal point. -To format numbers with decimals: - - -Set the cursor at the number and choose Format - Cells to start the Format Cells dialog. - - -On the Numbers tab you will see a selection of predefined number formats. In the bottom right in the dialog you will see a preview of how your current number would look if you were to give it a particular format. - - - - - + +Enter a number into the sheet, for example, 1234.5678. This number will be displayed in the default number format, with two decimal places. You will see 1234.57 when you confirm the entry. Only the display in the document will be rounded off; internally, the number retains all four decimal places after the decimal point. +To format numbers with decimals: + + +Set the cursor at the number and choose Format - Cells to start the Format Cells dialog. + + +On the Numbers tab you will see a selection of predefined number formats. In the bottom right in the dialog you will see a preview of how your current number would look if you were to give it a particular format. + + +
+ + Icon - - - -If you only want to modify the number of the decimal places displayed, the easiest method is to use the Number Format: Add Decimal Place or Number Format: Delete Decimal Place icons on the Object Bar. - - -
- - - - - - - + + + +If you only want to modify the number of the decimal places displayed, the easiest method is to use the Number Format: Add Decimal Place or Number Format: Delete Decimal Place icons on the Object Bar. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp index 0ca4f268b4..75be46f764 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -User-defined Number Formats -/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30800# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +User-defined Number Formats +/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30800# + + -numbers; user-defined formatting in tables -formatting; user-defined numbers +numbers; user-defined formatting in tables +formatting; user-defined numbers number formats; millions - + User-defined Number Formats - -You can define your own number formats to display numbers in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. -As an example, to display the number 10,200,000 as 10.2 Million: - - -Select the cells to which you want to apply a new, user-defined format. - - -Choose Format - Cells - Numbers. - - -In the Categories list box select "User-defined". - - -In the Format code text box enter the following code: - - -0.0,, "Million" - - -Click OK. - - -The following table shows the effects of rounding, thousands delimiters (,), decimal delimiters (.) and the placeholders # and 0. - - - -Number - - -.#,, "Million" - - -0.0,, "Million" - - -#,, "Million" - - - - -10200000 - - -10.2 Million - - -10.2 Million - - -10 Million - - - - -500000 - - -.5 Million - - -0.5 Million - - -1 Million - - - - -100000000 - - -100. Million - - -100.0 Million - - -100 Million - - -
- - - - - - - + +You can define your own number formats to display numbers in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +As an example, to display the number 10,200,000 as 10.2 Million: + + +Select the cells to which you want to apply a new, user-defined format. + + +Choose Format - Cells - Numbers. + + +In the Categories list box select "User-defined". + + +In the Format code text box enter the following code: + + +0.0,, "Million" + + +Click OK. + + +The following table shows the effects of rounding, thousands delimiters (,), decimal delimiters (.) and the placeholders # and 0. + + + +Number + + +.#,, "Million" + + +0.0,, "Million" + + +#,, "Million" + + + + +10200000 + + +10.2 Million + + +10.2 Million + + +10 Million + + + + +500000 + + +.5 Million + + +0.5 Million + + +1 Million + + + + +100000000 + + +100. Million + + +100.0 Million + + +100 Million + + +
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp index 6bd9f7a2fa..6e431d0776 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Freezing Rows or Columns as Headers -/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Freezing Rows or Columns as Headers +/text/scalc/guide/line_fix.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -freezing; tables -tables; freezing -title rows; freezing during table split -rows; freezing -columns; freezing -freezing; rows or columns -headers; freezing during table split -scrolling prevention in tables -windows; splitting +freezing; tables +tables; freezing +title rows; freezing during table split +rows; freezing +columns; freezing +freezing; rows or columns +headers; freezing during table split +scrolling prevention in tables +windows; splitting tables; splitting windows - + Freezing Rows or Columns as Headers - -If you have long rows or columns of data that extend beyond the viewable area of the spreadsheet, you can freeze them, which allows you to see the columns or rows as you scroll through the rest of the data. - - -Select the row below, or the column to the right of the row or column that you want to be in the frozen region. All rows above, or all columns to the left of the selection are frozen. -To freeze both horizontally and vertically, select the cell that is below the row and to the right of the column that you want to freeze. - - -Choose Window - Freeze. -To deactivate, choose Window - Freeze again. - - -If the area defined is to be scrollable, apply the Window - Split command. -If you want to print a certain row on all pages of a document, choose Format - Print ranges - Edit. - -Window - Freeze -Window - Split - -Format - Print ranges - Edit - - + +If you have long rows or columns of data that extend beyond the viewable area of the spreadsheet, you can freeze them, which allows you to see the columns or rows as you scroll through the rest of the data. + + +Select the row below, or the column to the right of the row or column that you want to be in the frozen region. All rows above, or all columns to the left of the selection are frozen. +To freeze both horizontally and vertically, select the cell that is below the row and to the right of the column that you want to freeze. + + +Choose Window - Freeze. +To deactivate, choose Window - Freeze again. + + +If the area defined is to be scrollable, apply the Window - Split command. +If you want to print a certain row on all pages of a document, choose Format - Print ranges - Edit. + +Window - Freeze +Window - Split + +Format - Print ranges - Edit + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp index db0fc5b684..402a097423 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Instructions for Using $[officename] Calc -/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Removed Dead Link - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Instructions for Using $[officename] Calc +/text/scalc/guide/main.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Removed Dead Link + + -$[officename] Calc; instructions +$[officename] Calc; instructions instructions; $[officename] Calc - + Instructions for Using $[officename] Calc - - -Formatting Tables and Cells - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Entering Values and Formulas - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Entering References - - - - - - - - - -Database Ranges in Tables - - - - -Advanced Calculations - - - - - - - - - - - - -Printing and Page Preview - - - - - - -Importing and Exporting Documents - - - - - - - -Miscellaneous - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + +Formatting Tables and Cells + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Entering Values and Formulas + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Entering References + + + + + + + + + +Database Ranges in Tables + + + + +Advanced Calculations + + + + + + + + + + + + +Printing and Page Preview + + + + + + +Importing and Exporting Documents + + + + + + + +Miscellaneous + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp index 6fad69b8e5..a6ad0236a8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Selecting Multiple Cells -/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Selecting Multiple Cells +/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -cells; selecting -cells; marking -multiple cells selection -selection modes in tables +cells; selecting +cells; marking +multiple cells selection +selection modes in tables tables; selecting ranges - + Selecting Multiple Cells - -Select a rectangular range -With the mouse button pressed, drag from one corner to the diagonally opposed corner of the range. -Mark a single cell -Do one of the following: - - -Click, then Shift-click the cell. - - -Pressing the mouse button, drag a range across two cells, do not release the mouse button, and then drag back to the first cell. You can now move the individual cell by drag and drop. - - -Select various dispersed cells + +Select a rectangular range +With the mouse button pressed, drag from one corner to the diagonally opposed corner of the range. +Mark a single cell +Do one of the following: + + +Click, then Shift-click the cell. + + +Pressing the mouse button, drag a range across two cells, do not release the mouse button, and then drag back to the first cell. You can now move the individual cell by drag and drop. + + +Select various dispersed cells Mark at least one cell. Then while pressing Command -Ctrl, click each of the additional cells. -Switch marking mode -On the status bar, click the box with the legend STD / EXT / ADD to switch the marking mode: - - - -Field contents - - -Effect of clicking the mouse - - - - -STD - - -A mouse click selects the cell you have clicked on. Unmarks all marked cells. - - - - -EXT - - -A mouse click marks a rectangular range from the current cell to the cell you clicked. - - - - -ADD - - -A mouse click in a cell adds it to the already marked cells. A mouse click in a marked cell unmarks it. Alternatively, Ctrl-click the cells. - - -
- -Status bar - - +Ctrl, click each of the additional cells. +Switch marking mode +On the status bar, click the box with the legend STD / EXT / ADD to switch the marking mode: + + + +Field contents + + +Effect of clicking the mouse + + + + +STD + + +A mouse click selects the cell you have clicked on. Unmarks all marked cells. + + + + +EXT + + +A mouse click marks a rectangular range from the current cell to the cell you clicked. + + + + +ADD + + +A mouse click in a cell adds it to the already marked cells. A mouse click in a marked cell unmarks it. Alternatively, Ctrl-click the cells. + + +
+ +Status bar + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp index f79ef7a9cc..3fd22ea195 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Printing Sheets in Landscape Format -/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Printing Sheets in Landscape Format +/text/scalc/guide/print_landscape.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -printing; sheet selection -sheets; printing in landscape -printing; landscape +printing; sheet selection +sheets; printing in landscape +printing; landscape landscape printing - + Printing Sheets in Landscape Format - -In order to print a sheet you have a number of interactive options available under View - Page Break Preview. Drag the delimiter lines to define the range of printed cells on each page. -To print in landscape format, proceed as follows: - - -Go to the sheet to be printed. - - -Choose Format - Page. -The command is not visible if the sheet has been opened with write protection on. In that case, click the Edit File icon on the Function Bar. - - -Select the Page tab. Select the Landscape paper format and click OK. - - -Choose File - Print. You will see the Print dialog. -Depending on the printer driver and the operating system, it may be necessary to click the Properties button and to change your printer to landscape format there. - - -In the Print dialog under Print range, select the pages to be printed: - -All - All sheets will be printed. - -Pages - Enter the pages to be printed. The pages will also be numbered from the first sheet onwards. If you see in the Page Break Preview that Sheet1 will be printed on 4 pages and you want to print the first two pages of Sheet2, enter 5-6 here. - -Selection - Only the selection will be printed. If cells are selected, these are printed. If no cells are selected, all those sheets whose names (at the bottom on the sheet tabs) are selected will be printed. By pressing Ctrl while clicking a sheet name you can change this selection. - - -If under Format - Print ranges you have defined one or more print ranges, only the contents of these print ranges will be printed. - -View - Page Break Preview - - - + +In order to print a sheet you have a number of interactive options available under View - Page Break Preview. Drag the delimiter lines to define the range of printed cells on each page. +To print in landscape format, proceed as follows: + + +Go to the sheet to be printed. + + +Choose Format - Page. +The command is not visible if the sheet has been opened with write protection on. In that case, click the Edit File icon on the Function Bar. + + +Select the Page tab. Select the Landscape paper format and click OK. + + +Choose File - Print. You will see the Print dialog. +Depending on the printer driver and the operating system, it may be necessary to click the Properties button and to change your printer to landscape format there. + + +In the Print dialog under Print range, select the pages to be printed: + +All - All sheets will be printed. + +Pages - Enter the pages to be printed. The pages will also be numbered from the first sheet onwards. If you see in the Page Break Preview that Sheet1 will be printed on 4 pages and you want to print the first two pages of Sheet2, enter 5-6 here. + +Selection - Only the selection will be printed. If cells are selected, these are printed. If no cells are selected, all those sheets whose names (at the bottom on the sheet tabs) are selected will be printed. By pressing Ctrl while clicking a sheet name you can change this selection. + + +If under Format - Print ranges you have defined one or more print ranges, only the contents of these print ranges will be printed. + +View - Page Break Preview + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp index 74e5d7a21c..49f1fe0a5b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Printing Rows or Columns on Every Page -/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Printing Rows or Columns on Every Page +/text/scalc/guide/print_title_row.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -printing; sheets on multiple pages -sheets; printing on multiple pages -rows; repeating when printing -columns; repeating when printing -fixed rows or columns; printing -repeated columns/rows; printing -title rows; printing on all sheets -headers; printing on sheets -footers; printing on sheets -printing; rows as table headings +printing; sheets on multiple pages +sheets; printing on multiple pages +rows; repeating when printing +columns; repeating when printing +fixed rows or columns; printing +repeated columns/rows; printing +title rows; printing on all sheets +headers; printing on sheets +footers; printing on sheets +printing; rows as table headings printing; columns as table headings - - + + Printing Rows or Columns on Every Page - -If you have a sheet that is so large that it will be printed multiple pages, you can set up rows or columns to repeat on each printed page. -As an example, If you want to print the top two rows of the sheet as well as the first column (A)on all pages, do the following: - - -Choose Format - Print Ranges - Edit. The Edit Print Ranges dialog appears. - - -Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area. -The dialog shrinks so that you can see more of the sheet. - - -Select the first two rows and, for this example, click cell A1 and drag to A2. -In the shrunk dialog you will see $1:$2. Rows 1 and 2 are now rows to repeat. - - -Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area. The dialog is restored again. - - -If you also want column A as a column to repeat, click the icon at the far right of the Columns to repeat area. - - -Click column A (not in the column header). - - -Click the icon again at the far right of the Columns to repeat area. - - -Rows to repeat are rows from the sheet. You can define headers and footers to be printed on each print page independently of this in Format - Page. - - - - -View - Page Break Preview - -Format - Print ranges - Edit -Format - Page - (Header / Footer) - - + +If you have a sheet that is so large that it will be printed multiple pages, you can set up rows or columns to repeat on each printed page. +As an example, If you want to print the top two rows of the sheet as well as the first column (A)on all pages, do the following: + + +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Edit. The Edit Print Ranges dialog appears. + + +Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area. +The dialog shrinks so that you can see more of the sheet. + + +Select the first two rows and, for this example, click cell A1 and drag to A2. +In the shrunk dialog you will see $1:$2. Rows 1 and 2 are now rows to repeat. + + +Click the icon at the far right of the Rows to repeat area. The dialog is restored again. + + +If you also want column A as a column to repeat, click the icon at the far right of the Columns to repeat area. + + +Click column A (not in the column header). + + +Click the icon again at the far right of the Columns to repeat area. + + +Rows to repeat are rows from the sheet. You can define headers and footers to be printed on each print page independently of this in Format - Page. + + + + +View - Page Break Preview + +Format - Print ranges - Edit +Format - Page - (Header / Footer) + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp index ced9cfc9d4..a213aa8d63 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/printranges.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Using Print Ranges on a Spreadsheet -K:\WORKBENCH\help2\source\text\scalc\guide\printranges.xhp - - -UFI: new guide on request of users -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Using Print Ranges on a Spreadsheet +K:\WORKBENCH\help2\source\text\scalc\guide\printranges.xhp + + +UFI: new guide on request of users +dedr: reviewed + + -exporting cells;print ranges -printing;print ranges -printing; cells -ranges;print ranges -PDF export;print ranges -cell ranges; printing -cells; print ranges -print ranges -clearing printranges -defining;printranges +exporting cells;print ranges +printing;print ranges +printing; cells +ranges;print ranges +PDF export;print ranges +cell ranges; printing +cells; print ranges +print ranges +clearing printranges +defining;printranges extending printranges - + Defining Print Ranges on a Sheet - -You can define which range of cells on a spreadsheet to print. -The cells on the sheet that are not part of the defined print range are not printed or exported. -The sheets that do not contain a defined print range are printed. The same behavior occurs when you export the spreadsheet to a PDF file.UFI: New, see spec "Calc Print Settings Sheet Property "Print Entire Sheet"" -To Define a Print Range - - -Select the cells that you want to print. - - -Choose Format - Print Ranges - Define. - - -To Add Cells to a Print Range - - -Select the cells that you want to add to the existing print range. - - -Choose Format - Print Ranges - Add. - - -To Clear a Print Range - - -Choose Format - Print Ranges - Remove. - - -Using the Page Break Preview to Edit Print Ranges -In the Page Break Preview, print ranges as well as page break regions are outlined by a blue border and contain a centered page number in gray. Nonprinting areas have a gray background. -To define a new page break region, drag the border to a new location. When you define a new page break region, an automatic page break is replaced by a manual page break. -To View and Edit Print Ranges - - -Choose View - Page Break Preview. -To change the default zoom factor of the Page Break Preview, double click the percentage value on the Status bar, and select a new zoom factor. - - -Edit the print range. -To change the size of a print range, drag a border of the range to a new location. -To delete a manual page break that is contained in a print range, drag the border of the page break outside of the print range. -To add cells to a print range, select the cells, and choose Format - Print Ranges - Add. -To clear a print range, drag a border of the range onto the opposite border of the range. - - -To exit the Page Break Preview, choose View - Page Break Preview. - - -
- - -Editing Print Ranges -
- - + +You can define which range of cells on a spreadsheet to print. +The cells on the sheet that are not part of the defined print range are not printed or exported. +The sheets that do not contain a defined print range are printed. The same behavior occurs when you export the spreadsheet to a PDF file.UFI: New, see spec "Calc Print Settings Sheet Property "Print Entire Sheet"" +To Define a Print Range + + +Select the cells that you want to print. + + +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Define. + + +To Add Cells to a Print Range + + +Select the cells that you want to add to the existing print range. + + +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Add. + + +To Clear a Print Range + + +Choose Format - Print Ranges - Remove. + + +Using the Page Break Preview to Edit Print Ranges +In the Page Break Preview, print ranges as well as page break regions are outlined by a blue border and contain a centered page number in gray. Nonprinting areas have a gray background. +To define a new page break region, drag the border to a new location. When you define a new page break region, an automatic page break is replaced by a manual page break. +To View and Edit Print Ranges + + +Choose View - Page Break Preview. +To change the default zoom factor of the Page Break Preview, double click the percentage value on the Status bar, and select a new zoom factor. + + +Edit the print range. +To change the size of a print range, drag a border of the range to a new location. +To delete a manual page break that is contained in a print range, drag the border of the page break outside of the print range. +To add cells to a print range, select the cells, and choose Format - Print Ranges - Add. +To clear a print range, drag a border of the range onto the opposite border of the range. + + +To exit the Page Break Preview, choose View - Page Break Preview. + + +
+ + +Editing Print Ranges +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp index 54bb2a3ebe..93b678cd4d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Addresses and References, Absolute and Relative -/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Addresses and References, Absolute and Relative +/text/scalc/guide/relativ_absolut_ref.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -addresses in spreadsheets -references; absolute/relative -absolute addresses in spreadsheets -relative addresses -absolute references in spreadsheets -relative references -references; to cells -references; marking by color +addresses in spreadsheets +references; absolute/relative +absolute addresses in spreadsheets +relative addresses +absolute references in spreadsheets +relative references +references; to cells +references; marking by color cells; references - + Addresses and References, Absolute and Relative - -Relative Addressing -The cell in column A, row 1 is addressed as A1. You can address a range of adjacent cells by first entering the coordinates of the upper left cell of the area, then a colon followed by the coordinates of the lower right cell. For example, the square formed by the first four cells in the upper left corner is addressed as A1:B2. -By addressing an area in this way, you are making a relative reference to A1:B2. Relative here means that the reference to this area will be adjusted automatically when you copy the formulas. -Absolute Addressing -Absolute references are the opposite of relative addressing. A dollar sign is placed before each letter and number in an absolute reference, for example, $A$1:$B$2. -$[officename] can convert the current reference, in which the cursor is positioned in the input line, from relative to absolute and vice versa by pressing Shift +F4. If you start with a relative address such as A1, the first time you press this key combination, both row and column are set to absolute references ($A$1). The second time, only the row (A$1), and the third time, only the column ($A1). If you press the key combination once more, both column and row references are switched back to relative (A1) -$[officename] Calc shows the references to a formula. If, for example you click the formula =SUM(A1:C5;D15:D24) in a cell, the two referenced areas in the sheet will be highlighted in color. For example, the formula component "A1:C5" may be in blue and the cell range in question bordered in the same shade of blue. The next formula component "D15:D24" can be marked in red in the same way. -When to Use Relative and Absolute References -What distinguishes a relative reference? Assume you want to calculate in cell E1 the sum of the cells in range A1:B2. The formula to enter into E1 would be: =SUM(A1:B2). If you later decide to insert a new column in front of column A, the elements you want to add would then be in B1:C2 and the formula would be in F1, not in E1. After inserting the new column, you would therefore have to check and correct all formulas in the sheet, and possibly in other sheets. -Fortunately, $[officename] does this work for you. After having inserted a new column A, the formula =SUM(A1:B2) will be automatically updated to =SUM(B1:C2). Row numbers will also be automatically adjusted when a new row 1 is inserted. Absolute and relative references are always adjusted in $[officename] Calc whenever the referenced area is moved. But be careful if you are copying a formula since in that case only the relative references will be adjusted, not the absolute references. -Absolute references are used when a calculation refers to one specific cell in your sheet. If a formula that refers to exactly this cell is copied relatively to a cell below the original cell, the reference will also be moved down if you did not define the cell coordinates as absolute. -Aside from when new rows and columns are inserted, references can also change when an existing formula referring to particular cells is copied to another area of the sheet. Assume you entered the formula =SUM(A1:A9) in row 10. If you want to calculate the sum for the adjacent column to the right, simply copy this formula to the cell to the right. The copy of the formula in column B will be automatically adjusted to =SUM(B1:B9). - - - - - + +Relative Addressing +The cell in column A, row 1 is addressed as A1. You can address a range of adjacent cells by first entering the coordinates of the upper left cell of the area, then a colon followed by the coordinates of the lower right cell. For example, the square formed by the first four cells in the upper left corner is addressed as A1:B2. +By addressing an area in this way, you are making a relative reference to A1:B2. Relative here means that the reference to this area will be adjusted automatically when you copy the formulas. +Absolute Addressing +Absolute references are the opposite of relative addressing. A dollar sign is placed before each letter and number in an absolute reference, for example, $A$1:$B$2. +$[officename] can convert the current reference, in which the cursor is positioned in the input line, from relative to absolute and vice versa by pressing Shift +F4. If you start with a relative address such as A1, the first time you press this key combination, both row and column are set to absolute references ($A$1). The second time, only the row (A$1), and the third time, only the column ($A1). If you press the key combination once more, both column and row references are switched back to relative (A1) +$[officename] Calc shows the references to a formula. If, for example you click the formula =SUM(A1:C5;D15:D24) in a cell, the two referenced areas in the sheet will be highlighted in color. For example, the formula component "A1:C5" may be in blue and the cell range in question bordered in the same shade of blue. The next formula component "D15:D24" can be marked in red in the same way. +When to Use Relative and Absolute References +What distinguishes a relative reference? Assume you want to calculate in cell E1 the sum of the cells in range A1:B2. The formula to enter into E1 would be: =SUM(A1:B2). If you later decide to insert a new column in front of column A, the elements you want to add would then be in B1:C2 and the formula would be in F1, not in E1. After inserting the new column, you would therefore have to check and correct all formulas in the sheet, and possibly in other sheets. +Fortunately, $[officename] does this work for you. After having inserted a new column A, the formula =SUM(A1:B2) will be automatically updated to =SUM(B1:C2). Row numbers will also be automatically adjusted when a new row 1 is inserted. Absolute and relative references are always adjusted in $[officename] Calc whenever the referenced area is moved. But be careful if you are copying a formula since in that case only the relative references will be adjusted, not the absolute references. +Absolute references are used when a calculation refers to one specific cell in your sheet. If a formula that refers to exactly this cell is copied relatively to a cell below the original cell, the reference will also be moved down if you did not define the cell coordinates as absolute. +Aside from when new rows and columns are inserted, references can also change when an existing formula referring to particular cells is copied to another area of the sheet. Assume you entered the formula =SUM(A1:A9) in row 10. If you want to calculate the sum for the adjacent column to the right, simply copy this formula to the cell to the right. The copy of the formula in column B will be automatically adjusted to =SUM(B1:B9). + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp index 214f6bf52a..fedac78d68 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Renaming Sheets -/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Renaming Sheets +/text/scalc/guide/rename_table.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -renaming sheets -sheets; changing names +renaming sheets +sheets; changing names names; sheets - + Renaming Sheets - - - -Click the name of the sheet that you want to change. - - -Open the context menu and choose the Rename command. A dialog box appears where you can enter a new name. - - -Enter a new name for the sheet and click OK. - - + + + +Click the name of the sheet that you want to change. + + +Open the context menu and choose the Rename command. A dialog box appears where you can enter a new name. + + +Enter a new name for the sheet and click OK. + + Alternatively, hold down the Option key -Alt-key and click on any sheet name and enter the new name directly. - - -Allowed characters are letters, numbers, spaces, and the underline character. -The name of a sheet is independent of the name of the spreadsheet. You enter the spreadsheet name when you save it for the first time as a file. The document can contain up to 256 individual sheets, which can have different names. - - - - +Alt-key and click on any sheet name and enter the new name directly. + + +Allowed characters are letters, numbers, spaces, and the underline character. +The name of a sheet is independent of the name of the spreadsheet. You enter the spreadsheet name when you save it for the first time as a file. The document can contain up to 256 individual sheets, which can have different names. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp index 38849715f3..45a96ab951 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Using Rounded Off Numbers -/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Using Rounded Off Numbers +/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -numbers; rounded off -rounded off numbers -exact numbers in $[officename] Calc +numbers; rounded off +rounded off numbers +exact numbers in $[officename] Calc decimal places; showing - - + + Using Rounded Off Numbers - -In $[officename] Calc, all decimal numbers are displayed rounded off to two decimal places. -To change this for selected cells - - -Mark all the cells you want to modify. - - -Choose Format - Cells and go to the Numbers tab page. - - -In the Category field, select Number. Under Options, change the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. - - -To permanently change this everywhere - - -Choose Tools - Options - Spreadsheet. - - -Go to the Calculate page. Modify the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. - - -To calculate with the rounded off numbers instead of the internal exact values - - -Choose Tools - Options - Spreadsheet. - - -Go to the Calculate page. Mark the Precision as shown field and exit the dialog with OK. - - - -Numbers -Calculate - - + +In $[officename] Calc, all decimal numbers are displayed rounded off to two decimal places. +To change this for selected cells + + +Mark all the cells you want to modify. + + +Choose Format - Cells and go to the Numbers tab page. + + +In the Category field, select Number. Under Options, change the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. + + +To permanently change this everywhere + + +Choose Tools - Options - Spreadsheet. + + +Go to the Calculate page. Modify the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. + + +To calculate with the rounded off numbers instead of the internal exact values + + +Choose Tools - Options - Spreadsheet. + + +Go to the Calculate page. Mark the Precision as shown field and exit the dialog with OK. + + + +Numbers +Calculate + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp index e03f729349..a2f25f3368 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Changing Row Height or Column Width -/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Changing Row Height or Column Width +/text/scalc/guide/row_height.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -height of cells -cell heights -cells; heights -widths of cells -column widths -cells; widths -rows; heights +height of cells +cell heights +cells; heights +widths of cells +column widths +cells; widths +rows; heights columns; widths - + Changing Row Height or Column Width - -You can change the height of the rows with the mouse or through the dialog. -What is described here for rows and row height applies accordingly for columns and column width. -Using the mouse to change the row height or column width - - -Click the area of the headers on the separator below the current row, keep the mouse button pressed and drag up or down in order to change the row height. - - -Select the optimal row height by double-clicking the separator below the row. - - -Using the dialog to change the row height or column width - - -Click the row so that you achieve the focus. - - -Start the context menu on the header at the left-hand side. -You will see the commands Height and Optimal row height. Choosing either opens a dialog. - - - -Row height -Optimal row height -Column width -Optimal column width - - + +You can change the height of the rows with the mouse or through the dialog. +What is described here for rows and row height applies accordingly for columns and column width. +Using the mouse to change the row height or column width + + +Click the area of the headers on the separator below the current row, keep the mouse button pressed and drag up or down in order to change the row height. + + +Select the optimal row height by double-clicking the separator below the row. + + +Using the dialog to change the row height or column width + + +Click the row so that you achieve the focus. + + +Start the context menu on the header at the left-hand side. +You will see the commands Height and Optimal row height. Choosing either opens a dialog. + + + +Row height +Optimal row height +Column width +Optimal column width + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp index f5c3726108..0b5d262b87 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Formatting Numbers as Text -/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Formatting Numbers as Text +/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -numbers; as text -text formats; for numbers -numbers; entering without number formats -formats; numbers as text +numbers; as text +text formats; for numbers +numbers; entering without number formats +formats; numbers as text cell formats; text/numbers - + Formatting Numbers as Text - -
-You can format numbers as text in $[officename] Calc. Open the context menu of a cell or range of cells and choose Format Cells - Numbers, then select "Text" from the Category list. Any numbers subsequently entered into the formatted range are interpreted as text. The display of these "numbers" is left-justified, just as with other text. -When numbers are formatted as text, they cannot be used in calculations or formulas. -If you have already entered normal numbers in cells and have afterwards changed the format of the cells to "Text", the numbers will remain normal numbers. They will not be converted. Only numbers entered afterwards, or numbers which are then edited, will become text numbers. -If you decide to enter a number directly as text, enter an apostrophe (') first. For example, for years in column headings, you can enter '1999, '2000 and '2001. The apostrophe is not visible in the cell, it only indicates that the entry is to be recognized as a text. This is useful if, for example, you enter a telephone number or postal code that begins with a zero (0), because a zero (0) at the start of a sequence of digits is removed in normal number formats. -
- - -Format - Cell - Numbers - - - + +
+You can format numbers as text in $[officename] Calc. Open the context menu of a cell or range of cells and choose Format Cells - Numbers, then select "Text" from the Category list. Any numbers subsequently entered into the formatted range are interpreted as text. The display of these "numbers" is left-justified, just as with other text. +When numbers are formatted as text, they cannot be used in calculations or formulas. +If you have already entered normal numbers in cells and have afterwards changed the format of the cells to "Text", the numbers will remain normal numbers. They will not be converted. Only numbers entered afterwards, or numbers which are then edited, will become text numbers. +If you decide to enter a number directly as text, enter an apostrophe (') first. For example, for years in column headings, you can enter '1999, '2000 and '2001. The apostrophe is not visible in the cell, it only indicates that the entry is to be recognized as a text. This is useful if, for example, you enter a telephone number or postal code that begins with a zero (0), because a zero (0) at the start of a sequence of digits is removed in normal number formats. +
+ + +Format - Cell - Numbers + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp index 0aedf5def6..5e6116dd46 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Rotating Text -/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Rotating Text +/text/scalc/guide/text_rotate.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -text in cells; rotating -cells; rotating text -rotating; text in cells -text in cells; slanting +text in cells; rotating +cells; rotating text +rotating; text in cells +text in cells; slanting text in cells; writing vertically - + Rotating Text - - - -Select the cells whose text you want to rotate. - - -Choose Format - Cells. You will see the Format Cells dialog. - - -Click the Alignment tab. - - -In the Text direction area use the mouse to select in the preview wheel the direction in which the text is to be rotated. Click OK. - - -In the Text direction area, if you press the ABCD button, the text is written vertically in the direction of the characters. - -Format - Cells -Format - Cells - Alignment - - + + + +Select the cells whose text you want to rotate. + + +Choose Format - Cells. You will see the Format Cells dialog. + + +Click the Alignment tab. + + +In the Text direction area use the mouse to select in the preview wheel the direction in which the text is to be rotated. Click OK. + + +In the Text direction area, if you press the ABCD button, the text is written vertically in the direction of the characters. + +Format - Cells +Format - Cells - Alignment + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp index 2a0b2ec2d5..172abcd9b1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Writing Multi-line Text -/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Writing Multi-line Text +/text/scalc/guide/text_wrap.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -text in cells; multi-line -cells; text breaks -breaks; in cells +text in cells; multi-line +cells; text breaks +breaks; in cells multi-line text in cells - + Writing Multi-line Text - -
- - + +
+ + Pressing the Command -Ctrl+Enter keys inserts a manual line break. This shortcut only works directly in the cell, not in the input line. - - -If you want the text to automatically break at the right border of the cell, proceed as follows: - - -Select all the cells where you want the text to break at the right border. - - -In Format - Cells - Alignment, mark the Automatic line break option and click OK. - - -
- -Format - Cell - - +Ctrl+Enter keys inserts a manual line break. This shortcut only works directly in the cell, not in the input line. + + +If you want the text to automatically break at the right border of the cell, proceed as follows: + + +Select all the cells where you want the text to break at the right border. + + +In Format - Cells - Alignment, mark the Automatic line break option and click OK. + + +
+ +Format - Cell + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp index 14c26ea7a5..9ed9d6bf7f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -User-Defined Functions -/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted Screenshot and cleaned up -yj - checked - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +User-Defined Functions +/text/scalc/guide/userdefined_function.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted Screenshot and cleaned up +yj - checked + + -functions; user-defined -user-defined functions -Basic IDE; applying +functions; user-defined +user-defined functions +Basic IDE; applying IDE; Basic IDE - + User-Defined Functions - -You can apply user-defined functions in $[officename] Calc in the following ways: - - -You can program functions as add-ins. This method requires an advanced knowledge of programming. - - -You can define your own functions using the Basic-IDE. This method only requires a basic knowledge of programming. - - -Defining A Function Using %PRODUCTNAME Basic - - -Choose Tools - Macros - Macro. - - -Click the Edit button. You will now see the Basic IDE. - - -Enter the function code. In this example, we define a VOL(a; b; c) function that calculates the volume of a rectangular solid with side lengths a, b and c: -Function VOL(a, b, c)
VOL = a*b*c
End Function - - -Close the Basic-IDE window. -Your function is automatically saved in the default module and is now available. If you apply the function in a Calc document that is to be used on another computer, you can copy the function to the Calc document as described in the next section. - - -Copying a Function To a Document -In stage 2 of "Defining a user-defined function in Basic-IDE", in the Macro dialog you clicked on Edit . As the default, in the Macro from field the soffice - Default - Module1 module is selected. The default module resides locally in your user directory. -If you want to copy the user-defined function to a Calc document: - - -Choose Tools - Macros - Macro. - - -In the Macro from field select soffice - Default - Module1 and click Edit. - - -In the Basic-IDE, select the source of your user-defined function and copy it to the clipboard. - - -Close the Basic-IDE. - - -Choose Tools - Macros - Macro. - - -In the Macro from field select (Name of the Calc document)- Default - Module1. Click Edit. - - -Paste the clipboard contents in the Basic-IDE of the document. - - -Applying a User-defined Function in $[officename] Calc -Once you have defined the function VOL(a; b; c) in the Basic-IDE, you can apply it in exactly the same way as the built-in functions of $[officename] Calc. - - -Open a $[officename] Calc document and enter numbers for the function parameters a, b, and c in cells. - - -Set the cursor in another cell and enter the following: -=VOL(A1;B1;C1) -where A1, B1, and C1 correspond to the cells with the values for a, b, and c. - - -The function is evaluated and you will see the result in the selected cell. - - - - + +You can apply user-defined functions in $[officename] Calc in the following ways: + + +You can program functions as add-ins. This method requires an advanced knowledge of programming. + + +You can define your own functions using the Basic-IDE. This method only requires a basic knowledge of programming. + + +Defining A Function Using %PRODUCTNAME Basic + + +Choose Tools - Macros - Macro. + + +Click the Edit button. You will now see the Basic IDE. + + +Enter the function code. In this example, we define a VOL(a; b; c) function that calculates the volume of a rectangular solid with side lengths a, b and c: +Function VOL(a, b, c)
VOL = a*b*c
End Function + + +Close the Basic-IDE window. +Your function is automatically saved in the default module and is now available. If you apply the function in a Calc document that is to be used on another computer, you can copy the function to the Calc document as described in the next section. + + +Copying a Function To a Document +In stage 2 of "Defining a user-defined function in Basic-IDE", in the Macro dialog you clicked on Edit . As the default, in the Macro from field the soffice - Default - Module1 module is selected. The default module resides locally in your user directory. +If you want to copy the user-defined function to a Calc document: + + +Choose Tools - Macros - Macro. + + +In the Macro from field select soffice - Default - Module1 and click Edit. + + +In the Basic-IDE, select the source of your user-defined function and copy it to the clipboard. + + +Close the Basic-IDE. + + +Choose Tools - Macros - Macro. + + +In the Macro from field select (Name of the Calc document)- Default - Module1. Click Edit. + + +Paste the clipboard contents in the Basic-IDE of the document. + + +Applying a User-defined Function in $[officename] Calc +Once you have defined the function VOL(a; b; c) in the Basic-IDE, you can apply it in exactly the same way as the built-in functions of $[officename] Calc. + + +Open a $[officename] Calc document and enter numbers for the function parameters a, b, and c in cells. + + +Set the cursor in another cell and enter the following: +=VOL(A1;B1;C1) +where A1, B1, and C1 correspond to the cells with the values for a, b, and c. + + +The function is evaluated and you will see the result in the selected cell. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp index 125ab0dfba..d88bf7ce06 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Validity of Cell Contents -/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Validity of Cell Contents +/text/scalc/guide/validity.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -values; limiting on input -limiting values; specifying on input -permitted cell contents -checking for validity -validity -cells; validity -error messages; defining for incorrect input -actions in case of incorrect input -Help tips; defining text for cell input -notes;help text for cells -cells; defining input help -macros; running when incorrect input +values; limiting on input +limiting values; specifying on input +permitted cell contents +checking for validity +validity +cells; validity +error messages; defining for incorrect input +actions in case of incorrect input +Help tips; defining text for cell input +notes;help text for cells +cells; defining input help +macros; running when incorrect input data; validity check - + Validity of Cell Contents - -For each cell, you can define in advance what type of contents is valid for that cell. This allows you to guide users through data entry in $[officename] Calc by restricting cells to receive specific values and ranges. -The validity rule is activated when a new value is entered. If an invalid value has already been inserted into the cell, or if you insert a value in the cell either with drag-and-drop or by copying and pasting, the validity rule will not take effect. You can choose Tools - Detective at any time and choose the command Mark Invalid Data to display which cells contain invalid values. -Additional details about data validity can be found in the $[officename] Help. -Using Cell Contents Validity - - -Select the cells for which you want to define a new validity rule. You can select multiple cells by clicking on all the cells while holding down the Ctrl key. -The validity rule is a component of the cell format. To copy the validity rule to other cells, choose Edit - Copy and Edit - Paste Special, and select "Formats." - - -Choose Data - Validity. The Validity dialog appears. - - -On the Criteria tab page, enter the conditions for new values entered into cells. Values you have already entered will not be affected. - - -In the Allow field, "All Values" is selected by default. To place a condition on a cell entry, choose from one of the other options listed. - - -This choice already sets the first condition. If you choose "Whole Numbers", values such as "12.5" are not allowed, even if they satisfy the other conditions. Choosing "Date" allows date information both in the local date format as well as in the form of a serial date. Similarly, the "Time" condition permits time values such as "12:00" or serial time numbers. "Text Length" stipulates that cells are allowed to contain text only. - - -After you have set the first condition under Allow, select the next condition under Data. According to what you choose, additional text fields (Value, Minimum and Maximum) may appear to further refine the condition. - - -A few possible conditions resulting from this register could be as follows: "Integer greater than 1", "Decimal between 10 and 12.5", "Date earlier than or equal to 1/1/2000", "Time not equal to 00:00", "Text with a length of more than 2 characters". - - -After you have determined the conditions for cell validity, you can use the other two tabs in the dialog to create input help and error/invalid entry messages: - - -On the Input Help tab page, enter the title and the text of the tip, which will then be displayed if the cell is selected. - - -On the Error Alert tab page, select the action to be carried out in the event of an error. -If you select "Stop" as the action, invalid entries are not accepted, and the previous cell contents are retained. -Select "Warning" or "Information" to display a dialog in which the entry can either be canceled (the cell value will be retained) or accepted (even if the new value violates the validity rule). -If you select "Macro", then by using the Browse button you can specify a macro to be run in the event of an error. - - -To display the error message, mark the Show error message when invalid values are entered. If the option is unmarked, no error message will be displayed, even with an invalid entry. - -After changing the action for a cell on the Error Alert tab page and closing the dialog with OK, you must first select another cell before the change takes effect. -
-Data - Validity -
- - + +For each cell, you can define in advance what type of contents is valid for that cell. This allows you to guide users through data entry in $[officename] Calc by restricting cells to receive specific values and ranges. +The validity rule is activated when a new value is entered. If an invalid value has already been inserted into the cell, or if you insert a value in the cell either with drag-and-drop or by copying and pasting, the validity rule will not take effect. You can choose Tools - Detective at any time and choose the command Mark Invalid Data to display which cells contain invalid values. +Additional details about data validity can be found in the $[officename] Help. +Using Cell Contents Validity + + +Select the cells for which you want to define a new validity rule. You can select multiple cells by clicking on all the cells while holding down the Ctrl key. +The validity rule is a component of the cell format. To copy the validity rule to other cells, choose Edit - Copy and Edit - Paste Special, and select "Formats." + + +Choose Data - Validity. The Validity dialog appears. + + +On the Criteria tab page, enter the conditions for new values entered into cells. Values you have already entered will not be affected. + + +In the Allow field, "All Values" is selected by default. To place a condition on a cell entry, choose from one of the other options listed. + + +This choice already sets the first condition. If you choose "Whole Numbers", values such as "12.5" are not allowed, even if they satisfy the other conditions. Choosing "Date" allows date information both in the local date format as well as in the form of a serial date. Similarly, the "Time" condition permits time values such as "12:00" or serial time numbers. "Text Length" stipulates that cells are allowed to contain text only. + + +After you have set the first condition under Allow, select the next condition under Data. According to what you choose, additional text fields (Value, Minimum and Maximum) may appear to further refine the condition. + + +A few possible conditions resulting from this register could be as follows: "Integer greater than 1", "Decimal between 10 and 12.5", "Date earlier than or equal to 1/1/2000", "Time not equal to 00:00", "Text with a length of more than 2 characters". + + +After you have determined the conditions for cell validity, you can use the other two tabs in the dialog to create input help and error/invalid entry messages: + + +On the Input Help tab page, enter the title and the text of the tip, which will then be displayed if the cell is selected. + + +On the Error Alert tab page, select the action to be carried out in the event of an error. +If you select "Stop" as the action, invalid entries are not accepted, and the previous cell contents are retained. +Select "Warning" or "Information" to display a dialog in which the entry can either be canceled (the cell value will be retained) or accepted (even if the new value violates the validity rule). +If you select "Macro", then by using the Browse button you can specify a macro to be run in the event of an error. + + +To display the error message, mark the Show error message when invalid values are entered. If the option is unmarked, no error message will be displayed, even with an invalid entry. + +After changing the action for a cell on the Error Alert tab page and closing the dialog with OK, you must first select another cell before the change takes effect. +
+Data - Validity +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp index 1325c1ebcb..29850717e0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Naming Cells -/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Naming Cells +/text/scalc/guide/value_with_name.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -cells; defining names -names; for cells -values; defining names -constants definition -variables; defining names -cell ranges; defining names -defining names; cell ranges -formulas; defining names +cells; defining names +names; for cells +values; defining names +constants definition +variables; defining names +cell ranges; defining names +defining names; cell ranges +formulas; defining names cell names;in formulas - + Naming Cells - -$[officename] Calc lets you assign names to cell ranges. - - -Select a cell or range of cells, then choose Insert - Names - Define. The Define Names dialog appears. - - -Type the name of the selected area in the Name field. Click Add. The newly defined name appears in the list below. Click OK to close the dialog. - - -If you type the name in a formula, after the first few characters entered you will see the entire name as a tip. - - -Press the Enter key in order to accept the name from the tip. - - -If more than one name starts with the same characters, you can scroll through all the names using the Tab key. - - - -Insert - Names - Define - -Addressing by Name - - + +$[officename] Calc lets you assign names to cell ranges. + + +Select a cell or range of cells, then choose Insert - Names - Define. The Define Names dialog appears. + + +Type the name of the selected area in the Name field. Click Add. The newly defined name appears in the list below. Click OK to close the dialog. + + +If you type the name in a formula, after the first few characters entered you will see the entire name as a tip. + + +Press the Enter key in order to accept the name from the tip. + + +If more than one name starts with the same characters, you can scroll through all the names using the Tab key. + + + +Insert - Names - Define + +Addressing by Name + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp index a66ba7e817..6a3c32ac0d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Welcome to the $[officename] Calc Help -/text/scalc/main0000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Welcome to the $[officename] Calc Help +/text/scalc/main0000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Welcome to the $[officename] Calc Help -How to Work With $[officename] Calc - - -List of Categories and Functions - - -$[officename] Calc Menus, Toolbars, and Keys - - + +Welcome to the $[officename] Calc Help +How to Work With $[officename] Calc + + +List of Categories and Functions + + +$[officename] Calc Menus, Toolbars, and Keys + + - -Help about the Help - - - - - - - + +Help about the Help + + + + + + + - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0106.xhp index d043529660..0928bf63e3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0106.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/main0106.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Tools -/text/scalc/main0106.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Tools -The Tools menu contains commands to check spelling, to trace sheet references, to find mistakes and to define define scenarios. -
-You can also create and assign macros and configure the look and feel of toolbars, menus, keyboard, and set the default options for $[officename] applications. - - - -AutoCorrect - -Goal Seek - -Scenarios - - - - -Data Sources - - - - - -Configure - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Tools +/text/scalc/main0106.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Tools +The Tools menu contains commands to check spelling, to trace sheet references, to find mistakes and to define define scenarios. +
+You can also create and assign macros and configure the look and feel of toolbars, menus, keyboard, and set the default options for $[officename] applications. + + + +AutoCorrect + +Goal Seek + +Scenarios + + + + +Data Sources + + + + + +Configure + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp index e491a532df..898a70b76a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Chart Data -/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Chart Data +/text/schart/01/03010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Chart Data -Opens the Chart Data dialog where you can edit the chart data. -
-The Chart Data dialog is not available if you insert a chart that is based on Calc sheet or on a Writer table.UFI: fixes #i31208# -Some changes will become visible only after you close and reopen the dialog.UFI: fixes #i22854# + +Chart Data +Opens the Chart Data dialog where you can edit the chart data. + +The Chart Data dialog is not available if you insert a chart that is based on Calc sheet or on a Writer table.UFI: fixes #i31208# +Some changes will become visible only after you close and reopen the dialog.UFI: fixes #i22854# - -Apply to Chart -Transfers all data from this dialog to the chart. - - - + +Apply to Chart +Transfers all data from this dialog to the chart. +
+ + Icon - - - -Apply to Chart - - -
+ + + +Apply to Chart + + + - -Insert Row -Inserts a new row below the current row. - - - + +Insert Row +Inserts a new row below the current row. +
+ + Icon - - - -Insert Row - - -
+ + + +Insert Row + + + - -Insert Column -Inserts a new column after the current column. - - - + +Insert Column +Inserts a new column after the current column. +
+ + Icon - - - -Insert Column - - -
+ + + +Insert Column + + + - -Delete Row -Deletes the current row. It is not possible to delete the header row. - - - + +Delete Row +Deletes the current row. It is not possible to delete the header row. +
+ + Icon - - - -Delete Row - - -
+ + + +Delete Row + + + - -Delete Column -Deletes the current column. It is not possible to delete the header column. - - - + +Delete Column +Deletes the current column. It is not possible to delete the header column. +
+ + Icon - - - -Delete Column - - -
+ + + +Delete Column + + + - -Switch Columns -Switches the current column with the column to the right. - - - + +Switch Columns +Switches the current column with the column to the right. +
+ + Icon - - - -Switch Columns - - -
+ + + +Switch Columns + + + - -Switch Rows -Switches the current row with the row below. - - - + +Switch Rows +Switches the current row with the row below. +
+ + Icon - - - -Switch Rows - - -
+ + + +Switch Rows + + + - -Sort Columns -Sorts the cells of the current column in ascending order. - - - + +Sort Columns +Sorts the cells of the current column in ascending order. +
+ + Icon - - - -Sort Columns - - -
+ + + +Sort Columns + + + - -Sort Rows -Sorts the cells of the current row in ascending order. - - - + +Sort Rows +Sorts the cells of the current row in ascending order. +
+ + Icon - - - -Sort Rows - - -
+ + + +Sort Rows + + + - -Sort by Columns -Sorts the whole table by columns. The current column will not be moved, all other columns will be sorted accordingly. If two or more cells in the current row have the same value, each click changes the position of the corresponding columns. - - - + +Sort by Columns +Sorts the whole table by columns. The current column will not be moved, all other columns will be sorted accordingly. If two or more cells in the current row have the same value, each click changes the position of the corresponding columns. +
+ + Icon - - - -Sort by Columns - - -
+ + + +Sort by Columns + + + - -Sort by Rows -Sorts the whole table by rows. The current row will not be moved, all other rows will be sorted accordingly. If two or more cells in the current column have the same value, each click changes the position of the corresponding rows. - - - + +Sort by Rows +Sorts the whole table by rows. The current row will not be moved, all other rows will be sorted accordingly. If two or more cells in the current column have the same value, each click changes the position of the corresponding rows. +
+ + Icon - - - -Sort by Rows - - -
+ + + +Sort by Rows + + + - -Chart Data Window -Allows you to edit the contents of the chart. To edit, click in a cell. -You can undo a large number of editing steps in $[officename] Chart. The editing of chart data tables can also be retraced step-by-step. These steps, however, are shown in the table only if you close and re-open the Chart Data dialog. - - + +Chart Data Window +Allows you to edit the contents of the chart. To edit, click in a cell. +You can undo a large number of editing steps in $[officename] Chart. The editing of chart data tables can also be retraced step-by-step. These steps, however, are shown in the table only if you close and re-open the Chart Data dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp index 397cf4a77a..3cc733d063 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Titles -/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Titles +/text/schart/01/04010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Titles + +Titles Opens a dialog to enter or modify the titles in a chart. - You can define the text for the main title, subtitle and the axis labels, and specify if they are displayed. + You can define the text for the main title, subtitle and the axis labels, and specify if they are displayed. - -Main Title + +Main Title Marking the Main Title option activates the main title. Enter the desired title in the corresponding text field. - -Subtitle + +Subtitle Marking the Subtitle option activates the subtitle. Enter the desired title in the corresponding text field. - + Click Title On/Off on the Main Toolbar to show or hide the title and subtitle. - + - -X axis + +X axis Marking the X axis option activates the x axis title. Enter the desired title in the corresponding text field. - -Y axis + +Y axis Marking the Y axis option activates the subtitle. Enter the desired title in the corresponding text field. - -Z axis + +Z axis Marking the Z axis option activates the subtitle. Enter the desired title in the corresponding text field. This option is only available for 3-D charts. - + Click Axes Title On/Off on the Main Toolbar to show or hide the axis labels. - - - - + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp index 7cffb51fe7..4d312108de 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Legend -/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Legend +/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -chart legends; hiding +chart legends; hiding hiding;chart legends - - Legend + + Legend Opens the Legend dialog, which allows you to change the position of legends in the chart, and to specify whether the legend is displayed. - + - + To show or hide a legend, click Legend On/Off on the Main Toolbar. - -
- - - + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Legend On/Off - - -
- + + + +Legend On/Off + + + +
- -Display -Specifies whether to display a legend for the chart. This option is only visible if you call the dialog by choosing Insert - Legend. -Position + +Display +Specifies whether to display a legend for the chart. This option is only visible if you call the dialog by choosing Insert - Legend. +Position Select the position for the legend: - -Left + +Left Positions the legend at the left of the chart. - -Top + +Top Positions the legend at the top of the chart. - -Right + +Right Positions the legend at the right of the chart. - -Bottom -Positions the legend at the bottom of the chart. - - + +Bottom +Positions the legend at the bottom of the chart. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp index 4100819ad1..4b2faac786 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Data labels -/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Data labels +/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -data labels in charts -labels; for charts -charts; data labels -data values in charts +data labels in charts +labels; for charts +charts; data labels +data values in charts chart legends; showing icons with labels - + Data labels - + Opens the Data labels dialog, which enables you to set the data labels. - This allows you to display information regarding the data. - -Data labels + This allows you to display information regarding the data. + +Data labels Choose your data labeling preferences from the following: - - Show value + + Show value Displays the values of each data point. Use the corresponding option fields to determine the value display (percentage or number). - -as number + +as number Displays the absolute values of the data points. - -as percentage + +as percentage Displays the percentage of the data points in each column. - -Show label text + +Show label text Shows the data point text labels. - -Show legend icon with label -Displays the legend icons next to each data point label. - - + +Show legend icon with label +Displays the legend icons next to each data point label. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp index 159af713fa..d6ef85c7cd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Title -/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Title +/text/schart/01/05020100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + editing; titles - -Title + +Title Modifies the properties of the selected title. - - - - - -Character - - - - - + + + + + +Character + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp index d87a9c4886..34b22e5876 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Alignment -/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Alignment +/text/schart/01/05020101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-aligning;titles in charts +aligning;titles in charts titles;alignment - -Alignment -Modifies the alignment of the title. -
-Some of the options are not available for all types of labels. For example, there are different options for 2D and 3D object labels. - - -Please note that problems may arise in displaying labels if the size of your chart is too small. You can avoid this by either enlarging the view or decreasing the font size. - - + +Alignment +Modifies the alignment of the title. + +Some of the options are not available for all types of labels. For example, there are different options for 2D and 3D object labels. + + +Please note that problems may arise in displaying labels if the size of your chart is too small. You can avoid this by either enlarging the view or decreasing the font size. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp index 15f5208a63..9beebcb0a2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Grid -/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Grid +/text/schart/01/05050100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -X axes;grid formatting -Y axes;grid formatting +X axes;grid formatting +Y axes;grid formatting Z axes; grid formatting @@ -76,12 +76,12 @@ - -Grid + +Grid Opens the Grid dialog for defining grid properties. - - - - - - + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp index 3db2abf851..0437c207cb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Chart Floor -/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Chart Floor +/text/schart/01/05070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -charts; formatting floors +charts; formatting floors formatting; chart floors - -Chart Floor + +Chart Floor Opens the Chart Floor dialog, where you can modify the properties of the chart floor. The chart floor is the lower area in 3D charts. This function is only available for 3D charts. - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp index d3c3841101..e467a19ea2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Data in Rows -/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Data in Rows +/text/schart/02/01190000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Data in Rows -Changes the arrangement of the chart data. -
-
- - - + +Data in Rows +Changes the arrangement of the chart data. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Data in Rows - - -
- -
- - + + + +Data in Rows + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp index fb73850257..4c9740dbb9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Data in Columns -/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Data in Columns +/text/schart/02/01200000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Data in Columns -Changes the arrangement of the chart data. -
-
- - - + +Data in Columns +Changes the arrangement of the chart data. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Data in Columns - - -
- -
- - + + + +Data in Columns + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp index 7e98302cbf..2b53ea036e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Scale Text -/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Scale Text +/text/schart/02/01210000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-text scaling; charts +text scaling; charts scaling; text in charts - -Scale Text -Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size the chart. -
-
- - - + +Scale Text +Rescales the text in the chart when you change the size the chart. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Scale Text - - -
- -
- - + + + +Scale Text + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp index 3f978f4a64..ab10de44a7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Reorganize Chart -/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: fixed #110306# -YJ: checked - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Reorganize Chart +/text/schart/02/01220000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: fixed #110306# +YJ: checked + + +
-reorganizing charts +reorganizing charts charts; reorganizing - -Reorganize Chart -Moves all chart objects to their default positions. This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of objects. -
-
- - - + +Reorganize Chart +Moves all chart objects to their default positions. This function does not alter the chart type or any other attributes other than the position of objects. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Reorganize Chart - - -
- -
- - + + + +Reorganize Chart + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp index a9ba410db8..2fa87df397 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Shortcut Keys for Drawings -/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Shortcut Keys for Drawings +/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-shortcut keys;in drawings +shortcut keys;in drawings drawings; shortcut keys - + Shortcut Keys for Drawings - -The following is a list of shortcut keys specific to Drawing documents. -You can also use the general shortcut keys for $[officename]. -
-Function Keys for Drawings - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -F2 - - -Add or edit text. - - - - -F3 - - -Opens group to edit individual objects. - - - - + +The following is a list of shortcut keys specific to Drawing documents. +You can also use the general shortcut keys for $[officename]. + +Function Keys for Drawings +
+ + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +F2 + + +Add or edit text. + + + + +F3 + + +Opens group to edit individual objects. + + + + Command -Ctrl+F3 - - -Close group editor. - - - - -Shift+F3 - - -Opens the Duplicate dialog. - - - - -F4 - - -Opens the Position and Size dialog. - - - - -F5 - - -Opens the Navigator. - - - - -F7 - - -Checks spelling. - - - - +Ctrl+F3 + + +Close group editor. + + + + +Shift+F3 + + +Opens the Duplicate dialog. + + + + +F4 + + +Opens the Position and Size dialog. + + + + +F5 + + +Opens the Navigator. + + + + +F7 + + +Checks spelling. + + + + Command -Ctrl+F7 - - -Opens the Thesaurus. - - - - -F8 - - -Edit points on/off. - - - - +Ctrl+F7 + + +Opens the Thesaurus. + + + + +F8 + + +Edit points on/off. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+F8 - - -Fits to frame. - - - - -F11 - - -Opens Styles and Formatting window. - - -
+Ctrl+Shift+F8 + + +Fits to frame. + + + + +F11 + + +Opens Styles and Formatting window. + + + -zooming;shortcut keys +zooming;shortcut keys drawings; zoom function in - -Shortcut Keys for Drawings - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Plus(+) Key - - -Zooms in. - - - - -Minus(-) Key - - -Zooms out. - - - - -Multiple(×) Key (number pad) - - -Zooms to fit entire page in screen. - - - - -Divide (÷) Key (number pad) - - -Zooms in on the current selection. - - - - + +Shortcut Keys for Drawings +
+ + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Plus(+) Key + + +Zooms in. + + + + +Minus(-) Key + + +Zooms out. + + + + +Multiple(×) Key (number pad) + + +Zooms to fit entire page in screen. + + + + +Divide (÷) Key (number pad) + + +Zooms in on the current selection. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+G - - -Groups selected objects. - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+G + + +Groups selected objects. + + + + Shift+Command+Option -Ctrl+Alt+A - - -Ungroups selected group. - - - - +Ctrl+Alt+A + + +Ungroups selected group. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+K - - -Combines selected objects. - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+K + + +Combines selected objects. + + + + Command+Option -Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K - - -Uncombines selected object. - - - - +Ctrl+Alt+Shift+K + + +Uncombines selected object. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift++ - - -Bring to front. - - - - +Ctrl+Shift++ + + +Bring to front. + + + + Command -Ctrl++ - - -Bring forward. - - - - +Ctrl++ + + +Bring forward. + + + + Command -Ctrl+- - - -Send backward. - - - - +Ctrl+- + + +Send backward. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+- - - -Send to back. - - -
- -Shortcut Keys Specific to Drawings - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Arrow Key - - -Moves the selected object in the direction of the arrow key. - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+- + + +Send to back. + + +
+ +Shortcut Keys Specific to Drawings + + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Arrow Key + + +Moves the selected object in the direction of the arrow key. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Arrow Key - - -Moves the page view in the direction of the arrow key. - - - - -Shift+ drag with mouse - - -The movement of the selected object is constrained by multiples of 45 degrees. - - - - +Ctrl+Arrow Key + + +Moves the page view in the direction of the arrow key. + + + + +Shift+ drag with mouse + + +The movement of the selected object is constrained by multiples of 45 degrees. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Click while dragging an object. Note: you must first enable the Copy when moving option in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General to use this shortcut key. - - -Creates a copy of the dragged object when mouse button is released. - - - - -Ctrl+Enter with keyboard focus (F6) on an object in Main Toolbar - - -Inserts a drawing object of default size into the center of the current view. - - - - -Shift+F10 - - -Opens the context menu for the selected object. - - - - -F2 - - -Enters text mode. - - - - -Enter - - -Enters text mode if a text object is selected. - - - - -Ctrl+Enter - - -Enters text mode if a text object is selected. If there are no text objects or if you have cycled through all of the text objects on the page, a new page is inserted. - - - - +Ctrl+Click while dragging an object. Note: you must first enable the Copy when moving option in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General to use this shortcut key. + + +Creates a copy of the dragged object when mouse button is released. + + + + +Ctrl+Enter with keyboard focus (F6) on an object in Main Toolbar + + +Inserts a drawing object of default size into the center of the current view. + + + + +Shift+F10 + + +Opens the context menu for the selected object. + + + + +F2 + + +Enters text mode. + + + + +Enter + + +Enters text mode if a text object is selected. + + + + +Ctrl+Enter + + +Enters text mode if a text object is selected. If there are no text objects or if you have cycled through all of the text objects on the page, a new page is inserted. + + + + Option -Alt - - +Alt + + Press the Option -Alt key and drag with the mouse to draw or resize an object from the center of the object outward. - - - - +Alt key and drag with the mouse to draw or resize an object from the center of the object outward. + + + + Option -Alt + click on an object - - -Selects the object behind the currently selected object. - - - - +Alt + click on an object + + +Selects the object behind the currently selected object. + + + + Option -Alt+Shift+click an object - - -Selects the object in front of the currently selected object. - - - - -Shift key while selecting an object - - -Adds or removes object to or from the selection. - - - - -Shift+drag while creating or resizing an object - - -Constrains the dimensions of the object to multiples of 45 degrees. - - - - -Tab - - -Cycles through the objects on the page in the order in which they were created. - - - - -Shift+Tab - - -Cycles through the objects on the page in the reverse-order in which they were created. - - - - -Esc - - -Exits current mode. - - -
- -
-Shortcut Keys for 3D Effects (Illumination tab) - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Page Up - - -Changes the light source in the preview window. - - - - -Page Down - - -Changes the light source in the preview window. - - - - -Arrow keys - - -Moves the current light source in the direction of the arrow. - - - - -Spacebar - - -Enables the current light source and turns it on or off. - - -
- -
- - - - - - +Alt+Shift+click an object + + +Selects the object in front of the currently selected object. + + + + +Shift key while selecting an object + + +Adds or removes object to or from the selection. + + + + +Shift+drag while creating or resizing an object + + +Constrains the dimensions of the object to multiples of 45 degrees. + + + + +Tab + + +Cycles through the objects on the page in the order in which they were created. + + + + +Shift+Tab + + +Cycles through the objects on the page in the reverse-order in which they were created. + + + + +Esc + + +Exits current mode. + + + + +
+Shortcut Keys for 3D Effects (Illumination tab) + + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Page Up + + +Changes the light source in the preview window. + + + + +Page Down + + +Changes the light source in the preview window. + + + + +Arrow keys + + +Moves the current light source in the direction of the arrow. + + + + +Spacebar + + +Enables the current light source and turns it on or off. + + +
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp index c5929365d0..126f7c0dee 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Drawing Sectors and Segments -/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Reformat, removed screenshot - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Drawing Sectors and Segments +/text/sdraw/guide/draw_sector.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Reformat, removed screenshot + + -sectors of circles/ellipses -segments of circles/ellipses -circle segments -ellipse segments +sectors of circles/ellipses +segments of circles/ellipses +circle segments +ellipse segments drawing; circles - + Drawing Sectors and Segments - -The Ellipse floating toolbar contains tools for drawing ellipses and circles. You can also draw segments and sectors of circles and ellipses. -To draw a sector of a circle or an ellipse: - - + +The Ellipse floating toolbar contains tools for drawing ellipses and circles. You can also draw segments and sectors of circles and ellipses. +To draw a sector of a circle or an ellipse: + + Open the Ellipses floating toolbar and click one of the Circle Pie or Ellipse Pie icons Icon - . The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair with a small icon of a sector. - - -Position the pointer at the edge of the circle you want to draw and drag to create the circle. + . The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair with a small icon of a sector. + + +Position the pointer at the edge of the circle you want to draw and drag to create the circle. To create a circle by dragging from the center, press Option -Alt while dragging. - - -Release the mouse button when the circle has reached the size you want. A line corresponding to the circle radius appears in the circle. - - -Position the pointer where you want to place the first boundary of the sector and click. -As the radius line that follows the pointer is constrained to the circle boundaries, you can click anywhere in the document. - - -Position the pointer where you want to place the second boundary of the sector and click. The completed sector is displayed. - - -To draw a segment of a circle or ellipse, follow the steps for creating a sector based on a circle. -To draw an arc based on an ellipse, choose one of the arc icons and follow the same steps for creating a sector based on a circle. -
- -
- - +Alt while dragging. + + +Release the mouse button when the circle has reached the size you want. A line corresponding to the circle radius appears in the circle. + + +Position the pointer where you want to place the first boundary of the sector and click. +As the radius line that follows the pointer is constrained to the circle boundaries, you can click anywhere in the document. + + +Position the pointer where you want to place the second boundary of the sector and click. The completed sector is displayed. + + +To draw a segment of a circle or ellipse, follow the steps for creating a sector based on a circle. +To draw an arc based on an ellipse, choose one of the arc icons and follow the same steps for creating a sector based on a circle. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp index 16b00fd57f..6e9661276f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Duplicating Objects -/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Reformatted. This should be rewritten to be more of an instruction. We should get rid of the screen shot - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Duplicating Objects +/text/sdraw/guide/duplicate_object.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Reformatted. This should be rewritten to be more of an instruction. We should get rid of the screen shot + + -doubling draw objects -draw objects; duplicating -duplicating draw objects +doubling draw objects +draw objects; duplicating +duplicating draw objects multiplying draw objects - + Duplicating Objects - -You can create duplicate or multiple copies of an object. The copies can be identical or can differ in size, color, orientation and location. -The following example creates a stack of coins by making multiple copies of a single ellipse. - - -Use the Ellipse tool to draw a solid yellow ellipse. - - -Select the ellipse and choose Edit - Duplicate. - - -Enter the values shown on the following illustration. + +You can create duplicate or multiple copies of an object. The copies can be identical or can differ in size, color, orientation and location. +The following example creates a stack of coins by making multiple copies of a single ellipse. + + +Use the Ellipse tool to draw a solid yellow ellipse. + + +Select the ellipse and choose Edit - Duplicate. + + +Enter the values shown on the following illustration. Duplicate Dialog - -Positive values shift the x-axis to the right and the y-axis down. - - -Enter a negative value for the Width and Height so that the coins decrease in size as you go up the stack. - - -To define a color transition for the coins, select a color in the Start and End boxes. The Start color is applied to the object that you are duplicating. - - -Click OK to create the duplicates. - - -Objects created with the Duplicate command are not grouped. -
-Edit - Duplicate - - - -
- - + +Positive values shift the x-axis to the right and the y-axis down. + + +Enter a negative value for the Width and Height so that the coins decrease in size as you go up the stack. + + +To define a color transition for the coins, select a color in the Start and End boxes. The Start color is applied to the object that you are duplicating. + + +Click OK to create the duplicates. + + +Objects created with the Duplicate command are not grouped. +
+Edit - Duplicate + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp index d1c7e83754..afca4de3f8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Replacing Colors -/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Reformatted, removed screenshot - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Replacing Colors +/text/sdraw/guide/eyedropper.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Reformatted, removed screenshot + + + -eyedropper tool -colors; replacing +eyedropper tool +colors; replacing replacing;colors in bitmaps - + Replacing Colors - -You can replace colors in bitmaps with the Eyedropper tool. -Up to four colors can be replaced at once. -You can also use the Transparency option to replace the transparent areas of an image with a color. -Similarly, you can use the Eyedropper to make a color on your image transparent. -To replace colors with the Eyedropper tool -Ensure that the image you are using is a bitmap (for example, BMP, GIF, JPG, or PNG) or a metafile (for example, WMF). - - -Choose Tools - Eyedropper. - - -Click the Eyedropper icon and position the mouse pointer over the color you want to replace in the image. The color appears in the box next to the eyedropper icon. - - -Click the color in the image. The color appears in the first Source color box and the check box next to the color is selected. - - -In the Replace with box, select the new color. -This replaces all occurrences of the Source color in the image. - - - - -If you want to replace another color while the dialog is open, select the check box in front of Source color in the next row and repeat steps 3 to 5. - - -Click Replace. - - -If you want to expand or contract the color selection area, increase of decrease the tolerance of the Eyedropper tool and repeat your selection. -
- -Eyedropper -
- - + +You can replace colors in bitmaps with the Eyedropper tool. +Up to four colors can be replaced at once. +You can also use the Transparency option to replace the transparent areas of an image with a color. +Similarly, you can use the Eyedropper to make a color on your image transparent. +To replace colors with the Eyedropper tool +Ensure that the image you are using is a bitmap (for example, BMP, GIF, JPG, or PNG) or a metafile (for example, WMF). + + +Choose Tools - Eyedropper. + + +Click the Eyedropper icon and position the mouse pointer over the color you want to replace in the image. The color appears in the box next to the eyedropper icon. + + +Click the color in the image. The color appears in the first Source color box and the check box next to the color is selected. + + +In the Replace with box, select the new color. +This replaces all occurrences of the Source color in the image. + + + + +If you want to replace another color while the dialog is open, select the check box in front of Source color in the next row and repeat steps 3 to 5. + + +Click Replace. + + +If you want to expand or contract the color selection area, increase of decrease the tolerance of the Eyedropper tool and repeat your selection. +
+ +Eyedropper +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp index c6f636289e..8da4051bea 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Instructions for Using $[officename] Draw -/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Instructions for Using $[officename] Draw +/text/sdraw/guide/main.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -Draw instructions +Draw instructions instructions; $[officename] Draw - + Instructions for Using $[officename] Draw - - -Editing and Grouping Objects - - - - - - - - - -Editing Colors and Textures - - - -Editing Text - - - - -Working with Layers - - - - - - - -Miscellaneous - - - - - - - - - - - - + + +Editing and Grouping Objects + + + + + + + + + +Editing Colors and Textures + + + +Editing Text + + + + +Working with Layers + + + + + + + +Miscellaneous + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp index 46b94ad2d1..0480a4afdb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Rotating Objects -/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Rotating Objects +/text/sdraw/guide/rotate_object.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -rotating draw objects -draw objects; rotating +rotating draw objects +draw objects; rotating pivot points of draw objects - + Rotating Objects - -You can rotate an object around its default pivot point (center point) or a pivot point that you designate. - - - + +You can rotate an object around its default pivot point (center point) or a pivot point that you designate. +
+ + Icon - - - -Select the object you want to rotate. On the Effects floating toolbar in $[officename] Draw or on the Main toolbar in $[officename] Impress, click the Rotate icon. - - -
- -Move the pointer to a corner handle so that the pointer changes to a rotate symbol. Drag the handle to rotate the object. - - - + + + +Select the object you want to rotate. On the Effects floating toolbar in $[officename] Draw or on the Main toolbar in $[officename] Impress, click the Rotate icon. + + +
+ +Move the pointer to a corner handle so that the pointer changes to a rotate symbol. Drag the handle to rotate the object. + + + Rotate object - - - -
- -To change the pivot point, drag the small circle in the center of the object to a new location. -To skew the object vertically or horizontally, drag one of the side handles. -
- -
- - + + + + + +To change the pivot point, drag the small circle in the center of the object to a new location. +To skew the object vertically or horizontally, drag one of the side handles. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp index c154e17e9f..32f396a9f1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Adding Text -/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshots. Reformatted. Cleaned. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Adding Text +/text/sdraw/guide/text_enter.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted screenshots. Reformatted. Cleaned. + + -text frames -callouts; drawings +text frames +callouts; drawings legends; drawings - + Adding Text - -There are three types of text you can add to a drawing or presentation: Text in a text frame, text that behaves like a graphic (Fit Text to Frame) and text in a Callout. - - -To add text to a drawing or presentation, open the Text floating toolbar on the Main Toolbar. - - -For vertical text, you need to enable Asian language support in Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. -Adding a Text Frame - - + +There are three types of text you can add to a drawing or presentation: Text in a text frame, text that behaves like a graphic (Fit Text to Frame) and text in a Callout. + + +To add text to a drawing or presentation, open the Text floating toolbar on the Main Toolbar. + + +For vertical text, you need to enable Asian language support in Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Adding a Text Frame + + Click the Text icon Icon - and move the mouse pointer to where you want to enter the text. - - -Drag a text frame to the size you want in your document. - - -Type or paste your text in the text frame. If you want, you can format your text. - - -Double-click the text to edit it. -Fitting Text to Frames - - + and move the mouse pointer to where you want to enter the text. + + +Drag a text frame to the size you want in your document. + + +Type or paste your text in the text frame. If you want, you can format your text. + + +Double-click the text to edit it. +Fitting Text to Frames + + Click the Fit Text to Frame icon Icon - and move the mouse pointer to where you want to enter the text. - - -Drag a frame to the size you want in your document. Type or paste your text in the text frame. The size of the frame determines the size of the text. - - -Resizing the frame also resizes the text. -Callouts - - + and move the mouse pointer to where you want to enter the text. + + +Drag a frame to the size you want in your document. Type or paste your text in the text frame. The size of the frame determines the size of the text. + + +Resizing the frame also resizes the text. +Callouts + + Click the Callouts icon Icon - and move the mouse pointer to where you want the Callout to start. - - -Drag to where you want to add the Callout text. - - -Press Enter and type or paste your text. - - -If you want to add an arrow to the Callout, right-click the Callout and choose Line. Then, choose one of the Arrow styles and click OK. To change other object properties of the Callout, right-click the Callout and choose one of the commands. - - -
- + and move the mouse pointer to where you want the Callout to start. + + +Drag to where you want to add the Callout text. + + +Press Enter and type or paste your text. + + +If you want to add an arrow to the Callout, right-click the Callout and choose Line. Then, choose one of the Arrow styles and click OK. To change other object properties of the Callout, right-click the Callout and choose one of the commands. + + +
+ - -
- - + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp index f22c2d0e9c..5463e3ee83 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -File -/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-File -This menu contains general commands for working with Draw documents, such as open, close and print. To close $[officename] Draw, click Exit. -
- -Open - - - - - -Save As - -Export - - - -Versions - - -Properties - - -Print - -Printer Settings - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +File +/text/sdraw/main0101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+File +This menu contains general commands for working with Draw documents, such as open, close and print. To close $[officename] Draw, click Exit. +
+ +Open + + + + + +Save As + +Export + + + +Versions + + +Properties + + +Print + +Printer Settings + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp index 9be321d5e2..3302020eeb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp @@ -1,334 +1,334 @@ - - - - - - -XML File Formats -/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Removed screenshot -dedr: reviewed -UFI: added spec "File Format Names for New Oasis Open Office Format" -YJ: reviewed - - - -importing; XML -exporting; XML -filters; for XML -file formats; XML -XML; file formats -extensions; file formats -suffixes; file formats -document types;XML -file formats; changing defaults -default formats; changing -file formats;Open Office -Open Office;file formats - - -XML File Formats - -By default, $[officename] loads and saves files in the Open Office file format. -The Open Office file format is an XML file format standardized by OASIS (Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards). -Open Office file format names -%PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION uses the following file formats: - - - -Application - - -File extension - - - - -Open Office Text - - -*.oot - - - - -Open Office Text Template - - -*.ott - - - - -Open Office Master Document - - -*.oom - - - - -HTML Document - - -*.html - - - - -HTML Document Template - - -*.oth - - - - -Open Office Spreadsheet - - -*.oos - - - - -Open Office Spreadsheet Template - - -*.ots - - - - -Open Office Drawing - - -*.ood - - - - -Open Office Drawing Template - - -*.otd - - - - -Open Office Presentation - - -*.oop - - - - -Open Office Presentation Template - - -*.otp - - - - -Open Office Formula - - -*.oof - - - - -Open Office Database - - -*.odb - - -
- -Older File Formats Prior to %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION -If you want to exchange documents with users that still use older versions of %PRODUCTNAME, save the document in the following formats: - - - -Application - - -File extension - - - - -$[officename] Writer before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION - - -*.sxw - - - - -$[officename] Writer templates before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION - - -*.stw - - - - -Master documents before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION - - -*.sxg - - - - -$[officename] Calc before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION - - -*.sxc - - - - -$[officename] Calc templates before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION - - -*.stc - - - - -$[officename] Impress before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION - - -*.sxi - - - - -$[officename] Impress templates before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION - - -*.sti - - - - -$[officename] Draw before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION - - -*.sxd - - - - -$[officename] Draw templates before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION - - -*.std - - - - -$[officename] Math before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION - - -*.sxm - - -
- -These file name extensions help you to identify the different file types in a directory. If you unzip the XML files, you can use applications other than %PRODUCTNAME to edit the file contents. -If you want to define another file format as the default, choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General to find alternative file formats for each $[officename] document type. -XML file structure -$[officename] files are compressed zip archives that contain XML files. To view these XML files, uncompress the $[officename] file with a program that can uncompress zip files. Depending on the program you use, you might have to rename the $[officename] file extension, for example from *.sxw to *.zip. The following files and directories are contained in the uncompressed $[officename] file: - - -The text content of the document is located in content.xml. -By default, content.xml is stored without formatting elements like indentation or line breaks to minimize the time for saving and opening the document. On the Tools - Options - Load/Save - General tab page you can activate the use of indentations and line breaks by clearing the check box Size optimization for XML format (no pretty printing). - - -The file meta.xml contains the meta information of the document, which you can enter under File - Properties. -If you save a document with a password, all XML files except meta.xml will be encrypted. - - -The file settings.xml contains further information about the settings for this document. - - -In styles.xml, you find the Styles applied to the document that can be seen in the Styles and Formatting window. - - -The meta-inf/manifest.xml file describes the structure of the XML file. - - -Additional files can be contained in the packed file format. For example, illustrations can be contained in a Pictures subdirectory, Basic code in a Basic subdirectory, and linked Basic libraries in further subdirectories of Basic. -Definition of the XML formats -The DTD (Document Type Description) files can be found in $[officepath]/share/dtd -$[officepath]\share\dtd. -Note that the formats are subject to certain licenses. You can find notes on the licenses at the start of the DTD files. More detailed information can be found on the OpenOffice.org website. -
- - - -
- - + + + + + + +XML File Formats +/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Removed screenshot +dedr: reviewed +UFI: added spec "File Format Names for New Oasis Open Office Format" +YJ: reviewed + + + +importing; XML +exporting; XML +filters; for XML +file formats; XML +XML; file formats +extensions; file formats +suffixes; file formats +document types;XML +file formats; changing defaults +default formats; changing +file formats;Open Office +Open Office;file formats + + +XML File Formats + +By default, $[officename] loads and saves files in the Open Office file format. +The Open Office file format is an XML file format standardized by OASIS (Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards). +Open Office file format names +%PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION uses the following file formats: + + + +Application + + +File extension + + + + +Open Office Text + + +*.oot + + + + +Open Office Text Template + + +*.ott + + + + +Open Office Master Document + + +*.oom + + + + +HTML Document + + +*.html + + + + +HTML Document Template + + +*.oth + + + + +Open Office Spreadsheet + + +*.oos + + + + +Open Office Spreadsheet Template + + +*.ots + + + + +Open Office Drawing + + +*.ood + + + + +Open Office Drawing Template + + +*.otd + + + + +Open Office Presentation + + +*.oop + + + + +Open Office Presentation Template + + +*.otp + + + + +Open Office Formula + + +*.oof + + + + +Open Office Database + + +*.odb + + +
+ +Older File Formats Prior to %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION +If you want to exchange documents with users that still use older versions of %PRODUCTNAME, save the document in the following formats: + + + +Application + + +File extension + + + + +$[officename] Writer before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION + + +*.sxw + + + + +$[officename] Writer templates before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION + + +*.stw + + + + +Master documents before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION + + +*.sxg + + + + +$[officename] Calc before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION + + +*.sxc + + + + +$[officename] Calc templates before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION + + +*.stc + + + + +$[officename] Impress before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION + + +*.sxi + + + + +$[officename] Impress templates before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION + + +*.sti + + + + +$[officename] Draw before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION + + +*.sxd + + + + +$[officename] Draw templates before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION + + +*.std + + + + +$[officename] Math before %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION + + +*.sxm + + +
+ +These file name extensions help you to identify the different file types in a directory. If you unzip the XML files, you can use applications other than %PRODUCTNAME to edit the file contents. +If you want to define another file format as the default, choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General to find alternative file formats for each $[officename] document type. +XML file structure +$[officename] files are compressed zip archives that contain XML files. To view these XML files, uncompress the $[officename] file with a program that can uncompress zip files. Depending on the program you use, you might have to rename the $[officename] file extension, for example from *.sxw to *.zip. The following files and directories are contained in the uncompressed $[officename] file: + + +The text content of the document is located in content.xml. +By default, content.xml is stored without formatting elements like indentation or line breaks to minimize the time for saving and opening the document. On the Tools - Options - Load/Save - General tab page you can activate the use of indentations and line breaks by clearing the check box Size optimization for XML format (no pretty printing). + + +The file meta.xml contains the meta information of the document, which you can enter under File - Properties. +If you save a document with a password, all XML files except meta.xml will be encrypted. + + +The file settings.xml contains further information about the settings for this document. + + +In styles.xml, you find the Styles applied to the document that can be seen in the Styles and Formatting window. + + +The meta-inf/manifest.xml file describes the structure of the XML file. + + +Additional files can be contained in the packed file format. For example, illustrations can be contained in a Pictures subdirectory, Basic code in a Basic subdirectory, and linked Basic libraries in further subdirectories of Basic. +Definition of the XML formats +The DTD (Document Type Description) files can be found in $[officepath]/share/dtd +$[officepath]\share\dtd. +Note that the formats are subject to certain licenses. You can find notes on the licenses at the start of the DTD files. More detailed information can be found on the OpenOffice.org website. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp index 8e3028f65a..6b0e1c43df 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -GIF Options -/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +GIF Options +/text/shared/00/00000205.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -transparencies; saving +transparencies; saving GIF format - -GIF Options -In the GIF Options dialog, you can select the settings for the export of files in GIF format. - + +GIF Options +In the GIF Options dialog, you can select the settings for the export of files in GIF format. + Mode - -Interlaced -Specifies whether to use interlaced mode for saving the GIF image. + +Interlaced +Specifies whether to use interlaced mode for saving the GIF image. Drawing objects - -Save transparency -Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Eyedropper to set the transparent color in the picture. -For more information regarding filters, refer to the topic: Information about Import and Export Filters. - - + +Save transparency +Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Eyedropper to set the transparent color in the picture. +For more information regarding filters, refer to the topic: Information about Import and Export Filters. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp index 41657f6d6f..31ee0ac5ac 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Export of text files -/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fixed bug #i23907# - - - -Export of text files -The Export of text files dialog allows you to define the export options for text files. The dialog will be displayed if you save spreadsheet data as file type "Text CSV", and if the Edit filter settings check box is marked in the Save As dialog. -Field options + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Export of text files +/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fixed bug #i23907# + + + +Export of text files +The Export of text files dialog allows you to define the export options for text files. The dialog will be displayed if you save spreadsheet data as file type "Text CSV", and if the Edit filter settings check box is marked in the Save As dialog. +Field options Defines the field separator, text separator and character set that is used for the text export. - -Character set + +Character set Specifies the character set for text export. - -Field delimiter + +Field delimiter Choose or enter the field delimiter, which separates data fields. - -Text delimiter + +Text delimiter Choose or enter the text delimiter, which encloses every data field. - -Fixed column width -Exports all data fields with a fixed width. - - -The width of a data field in the exported text file is set to the current width of the corresponding column. - - -Values are exported in the format as currently seen in the cell. - - -If a value is longer than the fixed column width, it will be exported as a ### string. - - -If a text string is longer than the fixed column width, it will be truncated at the end. - - -The alignment Left, Centered, and Right will be simulated by inserted blanks. - - + +Fixed column width +Exports all data fields with a fixed width. + + +The width of a data field in the exported text file is set to the current width of the corresponding column. + + +Values are exported in the format as currently seen in the cell. + + +If a value is longer than the fixed column width, it will be exported as a ### string. + + +If a text string is longer than the fixed column width, it will be truncated at the end. + + +The alignment Left, Centered, and Right will be simulated by inserted blanks. + +
- - - + + + - -
- - + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp index 8caf48bab3..abc258e7c1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -File Menu -/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -File Menu -
-Choose File - New - - -New icon on the Function Bar (the icon shows the type of the new document) -
- - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +File Menu +/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +File Menu +
+Choose File - New + + +New icon on the Function Bar (the icon shows the type of the new document) +
+
+ + Icon - - - -New - - -
- -
+ + + +New + + + + +
Key Command -Ctrl+N - -
-Menu File - New -- Templates and Documents. +Ctrl+N +
+
+Menu File - New +- Templates and Documents. Key Shift+Command -Ctrl+N -
+Ctrl+N + Choose File - New - Labels - + Choose File - New - Labels - Labels tab - -
-Choose File - New - Labels - Format tab -Choose File - New - Business Cards - Format tab -
-
-Choose File - New - Labels - Options tab -Choose File - New - Business Cards - Options tab -
+ +
+Choose File - New - Labels - Format tab +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Format tab +
+
+Choose File - New - Labels - Options tab +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Options tab +
Choose File - New - Business Cards - + Choose File - New - Business Cards - Medium tab - + Choose File - New - Business Cards - Business cards tab - + Choose File - New - Business Cards - Private tab - + Choose File - New - Business Cards - Business tab - -
-Choose File - Open - + +
+Choose File - Open + Command -Ctrl+O -On the Function Bar, click -
- - - +Ctrl+O +On the Function Bar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Open File - - -
- -
-
-
-Menu File - Open, File type Text Encoded selected -Menu File - Save As, File type Text Encoded selected -
+ + + +Open File + + + + +
+ +
+Menu File - Open, File type Text Encoded selected +Menu File - Save As, File type Text Encoded selected +
Choose File - Wizards - + Choose File - Wizards - Letter - + Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page 1 - + Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page 2 - + Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page 3 - + Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page 4 - + Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page 5 - + Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page 6 - + Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page 7 - + Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page 8 - + Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page 9 - + Choose File - Wizards - Fax - + Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page 1 - + Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page 2 - + Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page 3 - + Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page 4 - + Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page 5 - + Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page 6 - + Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page 7 - + Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page 8 - + Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - + Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Page 1 - + Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Page 2 - + Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Page 3 - + Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Page 4 - + Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Page 5 - + Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Page 6 - + Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - + Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 1 - + Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 2 - + Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 3 - + Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 4 - + Choose File - Wizards - Presentation - Page 5 - + Choose File - Wizards - Web Page - + Choose File - Wizards - Web Wizards - + Menu File - Wizards - Form - + Menu File - Wizards - Form - Database selection - + Menu File - Wizards - Form - Create - + In form design, click the Group Box icon on the Form Functions floating toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame. - + In form design, click the Group Box icon on the Form Functions floating toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 1 - + In form design, click the Group Box icon on the Form Functions floating toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 2 - + In form design, click the Group Box icon on the Form Functions floating toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 3 - + In form design, click the Group Box icon on the Form Functions floating toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 4, there must be a database connection. - + In form design, click the Group Box icon on the Form Functions floating toolbar and use the mouse to create a frame - last page of Wizards - + Menu File - Wizards - Report - + Menu File - Wizards - Report - Choose Database - + Menu File - Wizards - Report - Grouping - + Menu File - Wizards - Report - Sort Options - + Menu File - Wizards - Report - Choose Layout - + Menu File - Wizards - Report - Save Report - + Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter - + Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter - + Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter - + Choose File - Wizards - Euro Converter - -
-AutoPilot Address Data Source (starts automatically) -Menu File - Wizards - Address Data Source - -
+ +
+AutoPilot Address Data Source (starts automatically) +Menu File - Wizards - Address Data Source + +
Address Data Source Wizards - Additional settings - + Address Data Source Wizards - Select table - -Address Data Source Wizards + +Address Data Source Wizards - Data source title - + Address Data Source Wizards - Field assignment - + Choose File - Close - -
-Choose File - Save - + +
+Choose File - Save + Command -Ctrl+S -On Function or Database Bar, click -
- - - +Ctrl+S +On Function or Database Bar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Save Document - - -
- -
-
+ + + +Save Document + + + + +
+ Choose File - Save As, if GIF selected as file type, dialog opens automatically - + Choose File - Save As, if PNG selected as file type, dialog opens automatically - + Choose File - Save As, if BMP selected as file type, dialog opens automatically - + Choose File - Save As, if JPEG selected as file type, dialog opens automatically - + $[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select "HTML Document" file type, this dialog opens automatically - + $[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 1 of the AutoPilot - + $[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 2 of the AutoPilot - + $[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 3 of the AutoPilot - + $[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 4 of the AutoPilot - + $[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 5 of the AutoPilot - + $[officename] Draw/$[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 6 of the AutoPilot - + Choose File - Export, if SVM/WMF/PICT/MET selected as file type, dialog opens automatically - + Choose File - Export, if BMP selected as file type, dialog opens automatically - + Choose File - Export, if GIF selected as file type, dialog opens - + Choose File - Save All - + Choose File - Save As - -
-Choose File - Reload - -
+ +
+Choose File - Reload + +
Choose File - Properties - + Choose File - Properties - General tab - + Choose File - Properties - Description tab - + Choose File - Properties - User Defined tab - + Choose File - Properties - Statistics tab - + Choose File - Properties - Internet tab - + Choose File - Templates - + Choose File - Templates - Organize - -
-Choose File - Templates - Organize - Address Book button -Choose File - Templates - Address Book Source - -
-
-Menu File - Templates - Address Book Source, then Administrate button + +
+Choose File - Templates - Organize - Address Book button +Choose File - Templates - Address Book Source + +
+
+Menu File - Templates - Address Book Source, then Administrate button ChooseTools - Data sources Choose Tools - Data sources - -
+ +
Choose File - Templates - Save - + Choose File - Templates - Edit - + Menu File - Print Preview - -
-Choose File - Printer Settings - -Choose File - Templates - Organize - Commands (button)- Printer Settings - -
+ +
+Choose File - Printer Settings + +Choose File - Templates - Organize - Commands (button)- Printer Settings + +
Menu File - Send - -
-Choose File - Send - Document as E-mail - -
+ +
+Choose File - Send - Document as E-mail + +
Choose File - Export - -
-Choose File - Export as PDF - -
- - - + +
+Choose File - Export as PDF + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Export Directly as PDF - - -
- -
-
-
-Choose File – Send – Document as PDF Attachment - -
+ + + +Export Directly as PDF + + + + + + +
+Choose File – Send – Document as PDF Attachment + +
Choose File - Send - Create Master Document - -
-Choose File - Print - + +
+Choose File - Print + Command -Ctrl+P -On Function Bar, click -
- - - +Ctrl+P +On Function Bar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Print File Directly - - -
- + + + +Print File Directly + + + +
- -On the Page View -Bar of a text document, click - - - + +On the Page View +Bar of a text document, click +
+ + Icon - - - -Print Page Preview - - -
+ + + +Print Page Preview + + + - -
-
-Choose File - Exit - + +
+
+Choose File - Exit + Command -Ctrl+Q -
+Ctrl+Q +
Choose File - New - Master Document - + Menu File - Open - select under Files of type: "Text CSV" - + Choose File - Export, if EPS is selected as file type, this dialog opens automatically - + Choose File - Export, if PBM, PPM or PGM is selected as file type, the dialog opens automatically - + Choose File - Versions - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp index efd5ec658c..8edb548a6c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -View Menu -/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -View Menu -
-Choose View - Zoom - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +View Menu +/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +View Menu +
+Choose View - Zoom + Zoom also with (+) (-) (×) and (÷) on the number keypad Zoom also with (+) (-) (×) and (÷) on the number keypad - -Double click the field on the Status Bar -
-
-Choose View - Toolbars - -
+ +Double click the field on the Status Bar +
+
+Choose View - Toolbars + +
Choose View - Toolbars - Standard Bar - + Choose View - Toolbars - Object Bar - + Choose View - Toolbars - Main Toolbar - + Choose View - Status Bar - + Choose View - Toolbars - Color Bar - + Choose View - Input Method Status - -
-On the Hyperlink Bar, click the Hyperlink icon - Internet - -Choose Insert - Hyperlink - -
+ +
+On the Hyperlink Bar, click the Hyperlink icon - Internet + +Choose Insert - Hyperlink + +
Hyperlink Bar - Icon Hyperlink - Tab Mail & News - + On the Hyperlink Bar, click the Hyperlink icon - Document - + On the Hyperlink Bar, click the Hyperlink icon - New Document - -
-Choose View - Full Screen - + +
+Choose View - Full Screen + Shift+Command Ctrl+J - -
- - - + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Full Screen On/Off (in Page Preview) - - -
- + + + +Full Screen On/Off (in Page Preview) + + + +
- -
-
-If a text document or spreadsheet is open: -Menu View - Data Sources - -F4 key -
- - - + + +
+If a text document or spreadsheet is open: +Menu View - Data Sources + +F4 key +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Data Sources - - -
- -
-
-
-Choose View - HTML Source - -Open context menu in an HTML document -
- - - + + + +Data Sources + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose View - HTML Source + +Open context menu in an HTML document +
+ + + Icon - - - -HTML Source - - -
- -
-
+ + + +HTML Source + + + + +
+ Choose View - Grid (Impress or Draw) - + Choose View - Guides (Impress or Draw) - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp index 4fbca5a9d4..381574f924 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Insert Menu -/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Insert Menu + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Insert Menu +/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Insert Menu Choose Insert - Note - -
-Choose Insert - Scan (Draw, Impress) -Choose Insert - Graphics - Scan (Writer) -
-
-Choose Insert - Scan - Select Source (in Writer: Insert - Graphics - Scan - Select Source) -
-
-Choose Insert - Scan - Request (in Writer: Insert - Graphics - Scan - Request) -
-
-Choose Insert - Special Character - + +
+Choose Insert - Scan (Draw, Impress) +Choose Insert - Graphics - Scan (Writer) +
+
+Choose Insert - Scan - Select Source (in Writer: Insert - Graphics - Scan - Select Source) +
+
+Choose Insert - Scan - Request (in Writer: Insert - Graphics - Scan - Request) +
+
+Choose Insert - Special Character + Choose Format - Numbering/Bullets - Customize - Character button - + Choose Format - Numbering/Bullets - Customize - Character button - -Open the Insert floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar (not for charts), click -
- - - + +Open the Insert floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar (not for charts), click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Insert Special Characters - - -
- -
-
-Choose Insert - Movie and Sound - - + + + +Insert Special Characters + + + + +
+ +Choose Insert - Movie and Sound + + Choose Insert - Object - -
-Choose Insert - Object - OLE Object - -Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click -
- - - + +
+Choose Insert - Object - OLE Object + +Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Insert OLE Object - - -
- -
-
-
+ + + +Insert OLE Object + + + + +
+ +
Choose Insert - Object - PlugIn - -Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click + +Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click
- - - - + +
+ + Icon - - - -Insert PlugIn - - -
+ + + +Insert PlugIn + + + - -
-
-
-Choose Insert - Object - Sound - -Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click -
- - - + + + +
+Choose Insert - Object - Sound + +Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Insert Sound PlugIn - - -
- -
-
-
-Choose Insert - Object - Video - -Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click -
- - - + + + +Insert Sound PlugIn + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Insert - Object - Video + +Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click +
+ + + Icon - - - -Insert Video PlugIn - - -
- -
-
-
-Choose Insert - Object - Applet - -Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click -
- - - + + + +Insert Video PlugIn + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Insert - Object - Applet + +Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click +
+ + + Icon - - - -Insert Applet - - -
- -
-
-
-Choose Insert - Object - Formula - -Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click -
- - - + + + +Insert Applet + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Insert - Object - Formula + +Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click +
+ + + Icon - - - + + + Insert $[officename] Math object -Insert Formula - - -
- -
-
-
-Choose Format - AutoFormat - AutoFormat Chart - -Choose Insert - Object - Chart - AutoFormat Chart - -
-
-Choose Format - AutoFormat - AutoFormat Chart - -Choose Insert - Object - Chart - AutoFormat Chart - -
-
-Choose Format - AutoFormat - AutoFormat Chart - -Choose Insert - Object - Chart - AutoFormat Chart - -
-
-Choose Insert - Object - Chart - -Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click -
- - - +Insert Formula + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Format - AutoFormat - AutoFormat Chart + +Choose Insert - Object - Chart - AutoFormat Chart + +
+
+Choose Format - AutoFormat - AutoFormat Chart + +Choose Insert - Object - Chart - AutoFormat Chart + +
+
+Choose Format - AutoFormat - AutoFormat Chart + +Choose Insert - Object - Chart - AutoFormat Chart + +
+
+Choose Insert - Object - Chart + +Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click +
+ + + Icon - - - -Insert Chart - - -
- -
-
-
-Choose Insert - Graphics - From File - -Open the Insert floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click -
- - - + + + +Insert Chart + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Insert - Graphics - From File + +Open the Insert floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click +
+ + + Icon - - - -Insert Graphics - - -
- -
-
-
-Choose File - New - Image - -
-
-Choose Insert - Floating Frame - -Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click -
- - - + + + +Insert Graphics + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose File - New - Image + +
+
+Choose Insert - Floating Frame + +Open the Insert Object floating toolbar from the Main Toolbar, click +
+ + + Icon - - - -Insert Floating Frame - - -
- -
-
+ + + +Insert Floating Frame + + + + + + Choose Insert - Floating Frame, after selecting a file - -
-Choose View - Toolbars - Hyperlink Bar - -On Main Toolbar (text documents, spreadsheets), click - -
- - + + + +Show/Hide Hyperlink Bar + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp index 2cd8cb5241..922d1bc12b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Tools Menu -/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Tools Menu -Choose Tools - Gallery or on Function Bar, click -
- - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Tools Menu +/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Tools Menu +Choose Tools - Gallery or on Function Bar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Gallery - - -
- -
+ + + +Gallery + + + + + Choose Tools - Gallery or click the Gallery icon on the Function Bar - New Theme button - Files tab - -The Spellcheck dialog only appears when the spellcheck finds a mistake: -Choose Tools - Spellcheck - Check - -F7 key -On Main Toolbar, click -
- - - + +The Spellcheck dialog only appears when the spellcheck finds a mistake: +Choose Tools - Spellcheck - Check + +F7 key +On Main Toolbar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Spellcheck - - -
- -
+ + + +Spellcheck + + + + + Choose Tools - Language - Hangul/Hanja Conversion (Asian language support must be enabled) - + Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Translation (Asian language support must be enabled) - + Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Translation (Asian language support must be enabled) - Edit terms button - + Choose Tools - Spellcheck - + Choose Tools - Spellcheck - Check - (the dialog only appears if the spellchecker finds an error) then click Options - -
-Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus - -Choose Tools - Spellcheck - Check - Thesaurus - + +
+Choose Tools - Language - Thesaurus + +Choose Tools - Spellcheck - Check - Thesaurus + Command -Ctrl+F7 -
-
-Choose Tools - Eyedropper ($[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress) -
+Ctrl+F7 +
+
+Choose Tools - Eyedropper ($[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress) +
Choose Tools - Media Player - + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Macro - -
- - - + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Record Macro - - -
- -
-Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro - + + + +Record Macro + + + + + +Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro + Choose Tools - Macros - Macro, click the Organizer button, click the Libraries tab, and then click the Password button - + Choose Tools - Package Manager - + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings - + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings, the click New or Edit. - + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings, the click Test XSLTs. - + Choose Tools - Customize - + Choose Tools - Customize - Menu tab - + Choose Tools - Customize - Menu tab, click New - + Choose Tools - Customize - Menu tab, click Menu - Move - + Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab - + Choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars tab - -
-Choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars - Customize button -Choose View - Toolbars - Customize - -Open context menu of the toolbars - choose Customize - -
+ +
+Choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars - Customize button +Choose View - Toolbars - Customize + +Open context menu of the toolbars - choose Customize + +
Choose Tools - Customize - Events tab - + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect + +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Options tab - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect + +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Replace tab - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect + +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Exceptions tab - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect + +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Custom Quotes tab - + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Word Completion tab - + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View - + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General - -
-Path selection button in various Wizards -Click Edit button for a few entries under Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - -
+ +
+Path selection button in various Wizards +Click Edit button for a few entries under Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths + +
Choose Tools - Options - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - General - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Memory - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - View - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - External Programs - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Print - -
-Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - -Choose Edit - AutoText - Path - -
-
-Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors - -Choose Format - Area - Colors tab -
-Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors - Edit - -Choose Format - Area - Colors tab - Edit button -Choose Format - 3D Effects icon on the Illumination tab -
- - - + +
+Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths + +Choose Edit - AutoText - Path + +
+
+Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors + +Choose Format - Area - Colors tab +
+Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors - Edit + +Choose Format - Area - Colors tab - Edit button +Choose Format - 3D Effects icon on the Illumination tab +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Select color on the Color tab page - - -
- -
+ + + +Select color on the Color tab page + + + + + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Fonts - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Security - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Java - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance - + Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Network Identity - + Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - + Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General - + Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties - + Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office - + Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility - + Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - + Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - + Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Complex Text Layout - -
-Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - -
-
-Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, in the Available language modules list, select one of the language modules and then click Edit. -
-
-Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids - -
+ +
+Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages + +
+
+Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, in the Available language modules list, select one of the language modules and then click Edit. +
+
+Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids + +
Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Searching in Japanese - + Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout - + Choose Tools - Options - Internet - + Choose Tools - Options - Internet - Proxy - + Choose Tools - Options - Internet - Search - + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility - + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General - + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption - + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View - + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Formatting Aids - + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Calc/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Grid - -
-Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Western) - -Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Asian) (only available if Asian language support is enabled) -
+ +
+Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Western) + +Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Asian) (only available if Asian language support is enabled) +
Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/ %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web/%PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print - + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Table - + Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes - + Open an HTML document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - + Open an HTML document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Background - + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General - + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - International - + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate - + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - Copy button - + Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes - + Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - + Open a presentation document, chooseTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General - + Open a presentation document, chooseTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View - + Open a presentation document, chooseTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid - + Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Print - + Open a drawing document, chooseTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - + Open a Math document, chooseTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - + Open a Math document, chooseTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - Settings - + Choose Tools - Options - Charts - + Choose Tools - Options - Charts - Default Colors - + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Database - + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Database - Connections - + Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Database - Databases - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp index f99d8f8e55..fcb950d097 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Showing and Hiding Docked Windows -/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Showing and Hiding Docked Windows +/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -AutoHide function; windows -AutoShow function; windows +AutoHide function; windows +AutoShow function; windows windows; AutoHiding/AutoShowing - -Showing and Hiding Docked Windows -Every docked window has two icons to control the display properties of the window. -
-To show or hide a docked window, click the arrow icon. To change to or from a floating state, click the pushpin icon. A floating docked window may overlap some of the underlying document. A fixed docked window does not overlap the document. -A window docked by its left edge has the following icons: - - - -Show - - - - + +Showing and Hiding Docked Windows +Every docked window has two icons to control the display properties of the window. +
+To show or hide a docked window, click the arrow icon. To change to or from a floating state, click the pushpin icon. A floating docked window may overlap some of the underlying document. A fixed docked window does not overlap the document. +A window docked by its left edge has the following icons: +
+ + +Show + + + + Icon - - - - - -Hide - - - - + + + + + +Hide + + + + Icon - - - - - -Stick - - - - + + + + + +Stick + + + + Icon - - - - - -Floating - - - - + + + + + +Floating + + + + Icon - - - -
- -
-AutoShow and AutoHide Docked Windows -You can click the edge of a hidden docked window to open the window. -The docked window closes automatically when you move the mouse pointer outside of the window. -Multiple docked windows act as a single window in AutoShow/AutoHide mode. -Drag and Drop -If you drag an object over the edge of a hidden docked window, the window opens in AutoShow mode. - - + + + + + + +AutoShow and AutoHide Docked Windows +You can click the edge of a hidden docked window to open the window. +The docked window closes automatically when you move the mouse pointer outside of the window. +Multiple docked windows act as a single window in AutoShow/AutoHide mode. +Drag and Drop +If you drag an object over the edge of a hidden docked window, the window opens in AutoShow mode. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp index 5eaacc22e8..e876043912 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -General -/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: test what must remain, delete the rest - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +General +/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: test what must remain, delete the rest + + +
- -GeneralUFI: this is a tab page of the Gallery. Deleted everything else -The General tab page lists the general properties of the current theme. + +GeneralUFI: this is a tab page of the Gallery. Deleted everything else +The General tab page lists the general properties of the current theme.
- -Name -The name of the theme is displayed in the text box. If no name has been assigned, type a new name here. -Type -Specifies the object type. -Location -The complete object path. - - + +Name +The name of the theme is displayed in the text box. If no name has been assigned, type a new name here. +Type +Specifies the object type. +Location +The complete object path. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp index 431b8f0c66..ab40d3da61 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -New -/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +New +/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -New -Creates a new $[officename] document. + +New +Creates a new $[officename] document.
- -Creates a new $[officename] document. Click the arrow to select the document type. - -If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates and Documents. -A template is a file that contains the design elements for a document, including formatting styles, backgrounds, frames, graphics, fields, page layout, and text. - - - - -Icon - - - - -Name - - - - -Function - - - - - + +Creates a new $[officename] document. Click the arrow to select the document type. + +If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates and Documents. +A template is a file that contains the design elements for a document, including formatting styles, backgrounds, frames, graphics, fields, page layout, and text. +
+ + + +Icon + + + + +Name + + + + +Function + + + + + Icon - - - -Text Document - - -Creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). - - - - + + + +Text Document + + +Creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). + + + + Icon - - - -Spreadsheet - - -Creates a new spreadsheet document ($[officename] Calc). - - - - + + + +Spreadsheet + + +Creates a new spreadsheet document ($[officename] Calc). + + + + Icon - - - -Presentation - - -Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress). The Presentation Wizard dialog appears. - - - - + + + +Presentation + + +Creates a new presentation document ($[officename] Impress). The Presentation Wizard dialog appears. + + + + Icon - - - -Drawing - - -Creates a new drawing document ($[officename] Draw). - - - - + + + +Drawing + + +Creates a new drawing document ($[officename] Draw). + + + + Icon - replace - - -Database - - -Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file. - - - - + replace + + +Database + + +Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file. + + + + Icon - - - -HTML Document - - -Creates a new HTML document. - - - - + + + +HTML Document + + +Creates a new HTML document. + + + + Icon - replace - - -XML Form Document - - -Creates a new XForms document. - - - - + replace + + +XML Form Document + + +Creates a new XForms document. + + + + Icon - - - -Master Document - - -Creates a new master document. - - - - + + + +Master Document + + +Creates a new master document. + + + + Icon - - - -Formula - - -Creates a new formula document ($[officename] Math). - - - - + + + +Formula + + +Creates a new formula document ($[officename] Math). + + + + Icon - - - -Labels - - -Opens the Labels dialog where you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels ($[officename] Writer). - - - - + + + +Labels + + +Opens the Labels dialog where you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels ($[officename] Writer). + + + + Icon - - - -Business Cards - - -Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). - - - - + + + +Business Cards + + +Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document ($[officename] Writer). + + + + Icon - - - -Templates and Documents - - -Creates a new document using an existing template or opens a sample document. - - -
- -
-Opening documents -
- - + + + +Templates and Documents + + +Creates a new document using an existing template or opens a sample document. + + + + +
+Opening documents +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp index a264547df6..b435919366 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Open -/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -Deleted 2 screenshots - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Open +/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +Deleted 2 screenshots + + -directories; creating new -folders; creating new -My Documents folder; opening -default directories; opening -multiple selections; opening -opening; several files -selecting; several files -opening; files with placeholders -wildcards; opening files -files; opening with placeholders -placeholders; opening files -documents; opening with templates -templates; opening document -templates; searching when opening -documents; styles changed +directories; creating new +folders; creating new +My Documents folder; opening +default directories; opening +multiple selections; opening +opening; several files +selecting; several files +opening; files with placeholders +wildcards; opening files +files; opening with placeholders +placeholders; opening files +documents; opening with templates +templates; opening document +templates; searching when opening +documents; styles changed styles; 'changed' message - -Open + +Open Opens or imports a file. - - -The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAME -Open dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAME -Open and Save dialogs, choose Tools - Options - - -%PRODUCTNAME - - - General, and then select the Use - -%PRODUCTNAME - - dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. + + +The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAME +Open dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAME +Open and Save dialogs, choose Tools - Options - + +%PRODUCTNAME + + - General, and then select the Use + +%PRODUCTNAME + + dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. If the file that you want to open contains Styles, special rules apply. - -Up One Level -Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories. + +Up One Level +Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories. - -Create New Directory -Creates a new directory. + +Create New Directory +Creates a new directory. - -Default Directory -Displays the files in the default user directory. + +Default Directory +Displays the files in the default user directory. - -Display area -Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in. To open a file, select the file, and then click Open. + +Display area +Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in. To open a file, select the file, and then click Open. To open more than one file at the same time, hold Command -Ctrl while you click the files, and then click Open. - - -Click a column header to sort the files. Click again to reverse the sort order. - +Ctrl while you click the files, and then click Open. + - -To delete a file, right-click the file, and then choose Delete. - +Click a column header to sort the files. Click again to reverse the sort order. + - -To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename. - + +To delete a file, right-click the file, and then choose Delete. + + + +To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename. + - + Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialog. - + Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialog. - + Click to delete all selected files. - -File name -Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL -If you want, you can use wildcards in the File name box to filter the list of files that is displayed. + +File name +Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL +If you want, you can use wildcards in the File name box to filter the list of files that is displayed. -For example, to list all of the text files in a directory, enter the asterisk wildcard with the text file extension (*.txt), and then click Open. Use the question mark (?) wildcard to represent any character, as in (??3*.txt), which only displays text files with a '3' as the third character in the file name. +For example, to list all of the text files in a directory, enter the asterisk wildcard with the text file extension (*.txt), and then click Open. Use the question mark (?) wildcard to represent any character, as in (??3*.txt), which only displays text files with a '3' as the third character in the file name. - -Version + +Version If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open. You can save and organize multiple versions of a document by choosing File - Versions. The versions of a document are opened in read-only mode. - -File type + +File type Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) - + (*.*) to display a list of all of the files in the directory. - -Open + +Open Opens the selected document(s). - -Insert + +Insert If you opened the dialog with by choosing Insert – File, the Open button is labeled Insert. Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position. - -Read-only + +Read-only Opens the file in read-only mode. - -Play + +Play Plays the selected sound file. Click again to stop playing the sound file. - +
- -Opening Documents With Templates - -%PRODUCTNAME stores templates in the following directories: - - + +Opening Documents With Templates + +%PRODUCTNAME stores templates in the following directories: + + the shared template directory {installpath}/share/template - -{installpath}\share\template - - + +{installpath}\share\template + + the user template directory {installpath}/user/template - -{installpath}\user\template - - -all template folders as defined in Tools - Options - - -%PRODUCTNAME - - - Paths - - -When you open a document that was created from a template, %PRODUCTNAME checks to see if the template has been modified since the document was last opened. If the template was changed a dialog is shown where you can select which styles to apply to the document. -To apply the new styles from the template to the document, click Yes. -To retain the styles that are currently used in the document, click No. -If a document was created using a template that cannot be found a dialog is shown that asks you how to proceed next time the document is opened. -To break the link between the document and the missing template, click No, otherwise %PRODUCTNAME will look for the template the next time you open the document. -
- -Opening Documents -Import and Export Filters - - + +{installpath}\user\template + + +all template folders as defined in Tools - Options - + +%PRODUCTNAME + + - Paths + + +When you open a document that was created from a template, %PRODUCTNAME checks to see if the template has been modified since the document was last opened. If the template was changed a dialog is shown where you can select which styles to apply to the document. +To apply the new styles from the template to the document, click Yes. +To retain the styles that are currently used in the document, click No. +If a document was created using a template that cannot be found a dialog is shown that asks you how to proceed next time the document is opened. +To break the link between the document and the missing template, click No, otherwise %PRODUCTNAME will look for the template the next time you open the document. + + +Opening Documents +Import and Export Filters + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp index 337d8321f3..887601f4cb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -General -/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +General +/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-version numbers of documents -documents; version number -files; version numbers -editing time of documents +version numbers of documents +documents; version number +files; version numbers +editing time of documents documents; editing time - -General -Contains basic information about the current file. -
+ +General +Contains basic information about the current file. + - -File -Displays the file name. -Type: -Displays the file type for the current document. -Location: -Displays the path and the name of the directory where the file is stored. -Size: -Displays the size of the current document in bytes. -Created: -Displays the date and time when the file was first saved. -Modified: -Displays the date and time when the file was last saved in a $[officename] file format. -Last printed: -Displays the date and time when the file was last printed. -Document number: -Displays the number of times that the file has been saved. - Editing time: + +File +Displays the file name. +Type: +Displays the file type for the current document. +Location: +Displays the path and the name of the directory where the file is stored. +Size: +Displays the size of the current document in bytes. +Created: +Displays the date and time when the file was first saved. +Modified: +Displays the date and time when the file was last saved in a $[officename] file format. +Last printed: +Displays the date and time when the file was last printed. +Document number: +Displays the number of times that the file has been saved. + Editing time: Displays the amount of time that the file has been open for editing since the file was created. The editing time is updated when you save the file. - -Apply User Data + +Apply User Data Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. - -Delete -Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted. -Template: -Displays the template that was used to create the file. - - + +Delete +Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted. +Template: +Displays the template that was used to create the file. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp index 054873fbfb..e09c6aa020 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Statistics -/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Statistics +/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-number of pages -documents;number of pages -number of tables -documents;number of tables -number of sheets -documents;number of sheets -cells;number of -graphics;number of +number of pages +documents;number of pages +number of tables +documents;number of tables +number of sheets +documents;number of sheets +cells;number of +graphics;number of OLE objects;number of - -Statistics -Displays statistics for the current file. -
- + +Statistics +Displays statistics for the current file. + + Some statistic values can be used as variables in formulas. - -Number of Pages: -Number of pages in the file. + +Number of Pages: +Number of pages in the file. Number of Tables: Number of Sheets: - + Number of tables in the file. Number of sheets in the file. - This statistic does not include tables that were inserted as OLE objects. + This statistic does not include tables that were inserted as OLE objects. Number of Cells: - + Number of cells with content in the file. - + Number of Graphics: - + Number of graphics in the file. This statistic does not include graphics that were inserted as OLE objects. - + Number of OLE Objects: - + Number of OLE objects in the file, including tables and graphics that were inserted as OLE objects. - + Number of Paragraphs: - + Number of paragraphs (including blank paragraphs) in the file. - + Number of Words: - + Number of words (including words consisting of a single character) in the file. - + Number of Characters: - + Number of characters (including spaces) in the file. Non-printable characters are not included. - + Number of Lines: - + Number of lines in the file. - + Update - + Updates the statistics. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp index d423f84b72..ea06fce70d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Internet -/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Internet +/text/shared/01/01100500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-auto reloading documents -reloading; documents automatically -loading; documents automatically +auto reloading documents +reloading; documents automatically +loading; documents automatically documents; auto reloading - -Internet -Sets the refresh and redirect options for an HTML page. -
+ +Internet +Sets the refresh and redirect options for an HTML page. + - -Do not refresh automatically + +Do not refresh automatically User must refresh the page manually. - -Refresh this document + +Refresh this document Reloads the HTML page after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box. To observe the result, open the page in a browser. - -Seconds + +Seconds Enter the number of seconds to wait before the page is reloaded. - -Redirect from this document -Loads a page that you specify after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box. -after ... seconds + +Redirect from this document +Loads a page that you specify after the number of seconds that you enter in the seconds box. +after ... seconds Enter the number of seconds to wait before redirecting the browser to a different file. - -to URL -Enter the URL address of the file that you want to open. -... + +to URL +Enter the URL address of the file that you want to open. +... Locate the file that you want to open, and then click Open. - -to frame -If the current HTML page uses frames, select the name of the target frame where you want the file to be loaded. -
- - - -Name of Frame - - -Definition - - - - -Named entries - - -File opens in a named frame in the current HTML document. - - - - -_self - - -File opens in the current frame. - - - - -_blank - - -File opens in a new page. - - - - -_parent - - -File opens in the parent frame of the current frame. If there is no parent frame, the current frame is used. - - - - -_top - - -File opens in the topmost frame in the hierarchy. - - -
- -
- - + +to frame +If the current HTML page uses frames, select the name of the target frame where you want the file to be loaded. +
+ + + +Name of Frame + + +Definition + + + + +Named entries + + +File opens in a named frame in the current HTML document. + + + + +_self + + +File opens in the current frame. + + + + +_blank + + +File opens in a new page. + + + + +_parent + + +File opens in the parent frame of the current frame. If there is no parent frame, the current frame is used. + + + + +_top + + +File opens in the topmost frame in the hierarchy. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp index 306797b34c..c407c04cf0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Printer Setup -/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Printer Setup +/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -printers; settings -printers; properties -settings; printers -properties; printers -default printer; setting up -printers; default printer +printers; settings +printers; properties +settings; printers +properties; printers +default printer; setting up +printers; default printer page formats; restriction - -Printer Setup + +Printer Setup Select the default printer for the current document. - - -You might experience a slight delay when you change the default printer for a document that contains embedded $[officename] OLE objects. + + +You might experience a slight delay when you change the default printer for a document that contains embedded $[officename] OLE objects. Printer - + Lists the information that applies to the selected printer. - + If the list is empty, you need to install a default printer for your operating system. Refer to the online help for your operating system for instructions on how to install and setup a default printer. - -Name -Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list. + +Name +Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list. Status - + Describes the current status of the selected printer. - + Type - + Displays the type of printer that you selected. - + Location - + Displays the port for the selected printer. - + Comments - + Displays additional information for the printer. - -Properties + +Properties Changes the printer settings of your operating system for the current document. - -Ensure that the Landscape or Portrait layout option set in the printer properties dialog matches the page format that you set by choosing Format - Page. - - + +Ensure that the Landscape or Portrait layout option set in the printer properties dialog matches the page format that you set by choosing Format - Page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp index b4f636b6b1..1ecb5f3d5e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Document as E-mail -/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Document as E-mail +/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Document as E-mail + +Document as E-mail Sends the current document as an e-mail attachment with your default e-mail program. - -
- - - + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp index 12989211df..ca9ab25fd9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Paste -/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Paste +/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-pasting; from clipboard -clipboard; pasting -cell ranges;pasting -cells;pasting +pasting; from clipboard +clipboard; pasting +cell ranges;pasting +cells;pasting pasting;cell ranges - + overwrite dialog in Calc if target is not empty - -Paste -Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects. Long-click the icon to select the format.UFI: text used for icon and menu -
- -Long-click the Paste icon on the Function Bar to select the format in which you want to paste the contents of the clipboard. + +Paste +Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects. Long-click the icon to select the format.UFI: text used for icon and menu + + +Long-click the Paste icon on the Function Bar to select the format in which you want to paste the contents of the clipboard. In a spreadsheet, when you paste a range of cells from the clipboard, the result depends on the current selection: If only one cell is selected, the cell range will be pasted started from that cell. If you mark a cell range wider than the cell range in the clipboard, the cell range will be pasted repeatedly to fill the selected cell range. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp index 242955b492..aec5e045fd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Find & Replace -/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Find & Replace +/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-finding & replacing text -finding; text -finding; tables -replacing; text -replacing; cells -finding; Styles -styles; finding +finding & replacing text +finding; text +finding; tables +replacing; text +replacing; cells +finding; Styles +styles; finding searching, see also finding - + Find & Replace - + Searches for or replaces text or formats in the current document. - -
+ + - -Search For + +Search For Enter the text that you want to search for, or select a previous search from the list. - + Search options are listed in the Options area of the dialog - -Replace With + +Replace With Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list. - -Replacement options are listed in the Options area of the dialog. + +Replacement options are listed in the Options area of the dialog. Options - + Entire Cells -Whole words only +Whole words only Searches for cells with contents that are identical to the characters criteria are found. If the search term is only part of the cell content, the cell is not found. Searches for whole words that are are identical to the search text. - -Backwards + +Backwards Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file. - + -Regular expressions +Regular expressions Allows you to use wildcards in your search. @@ -121,122 +121,122 @@ - + Match case case-sensitive search - + Distinguishes between uppercase and lowercase characters. finding; selections - -Current selection only + +Current selection only Searches only the selected cells. Searches only the selected text. - + -Search for Styles -Searches for the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Search for list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace with list. +Search for Styles +Searches for the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Search for list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace with list. - + Match character width (only if Asian languages are enabled) - + Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms. - + Sounds like (Japanese) (only if Asian languages are enabled) - + Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the ... button to specify the search options. - + Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. - + Searching in Japanese - -Find All + +Find All Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document. - -Find + +Find Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you searching for in the document. - -Replace All + +Replace All Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace. Repeat this command until all replacements on your slide have been made. - -Replace -Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence. + +Replace +Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence. Attribute - + Format - + No Format - + Click in the Search for or the Replace with box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats. - + The search criteria for formatting attributes are displayed under the Search for or the Replace with box. - + More - + Extends the search options. Click this button again to hide the extended search options. - + Search in - + Formulas - + Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'. - + Values - + Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. - + Notes - + Searches for the characters that you specify in the notes that are attached to the cells. - + Search direction - + Determines the order for searching the cells. - + By Rows - + Searches from left to right across the rows. - + By Columns - + Searches from top to bottom through the columns. - + Extras -searching; all sheets -finding; in all sheets +searching; all sheets +finding; in all sheets sheets; searching all - + Search in all sheets - + Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file. - - + + After you close the Find & Replace dialog, you can still search using the last search criteria that you entered, by pressing Shift+Command -Ctrl+F. - - +Ctrl+F. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp index c8a1016e76..a596ecdc76 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -List of Regular Expressions -/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fixed #i24613#, plus many changes due to #i18379# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +List of Regular Expressions +/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fixed #i24613#, plus many changes due to #i18379# + + -regular expressions; list of +regular expressions; list of list of regular expressions - + List of Regular Expressions - - - - -Character - - -Result/Use - - - - -Any character - - -Represents any single character unless otherwise specified. - - - - -. - - -Represents any single character except for a line break or paragraph break. For example, the search term "sh.rt" returns both "shirt" and "short". - - - - -^ - - -Only finds the search term if the term is at the beginning of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames, at the beginning of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "^Peter". - - - - -$ - - -Only finds the search term if the term appears at the end of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames at the end of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "Peter$". - - - - -* - - -Finds zero or more of the characters in front of the "*". For example, "Ab*c" finds "Ac", "Abc", "Abbc", "Abbbc", and so on. - - - - -+ - - -Finds one or more of the characters in front of the "+". For example, "AX.+4" finds "AXx4", but not "AX4". -The longest possible string that matches this search pattern in a paragraph is always found. If the paragraph contains the string "AX 4 AX4", the entire passage is highlighted. - - - - -? - - -Finds zero or one of the characters in front of the "?". For example, "Texts?" finds "Text" and "Texts" and "x(ab|c)?y" finds "xy", "xaby", or "xcy". - - - - -\ - - -Search interprets the special character that follows the "\" as a normal character and not as a regular expression (except for the combinations \n, \t, \>, and \<). For example, "tree\." finds "tree.", not "treed" or "trees". - - - - -\n - - -Represents a line break that was inserted with the Shift+Enter key combination. To change a line break into a paragraph break, enter \n in the Search for and Replace with boxes, and then perform a search and replace. - - - - -\t - - -Represents a tab. You can also use this expression in the Replace with box. - - - - -\> - - -Only finds the search term if it appears at the end of a word. For example, "book\>" finds "checkbook", but not "bookmark". - - - - -\< - - -Only finds the search term if it appears at the beginning of a word. For example, "\<book" finds "bookmark", but not "checkbook". - - - - -^$ - - -Finds an empty paragraph. - - - - -^. - - -Finds the first character of a paragraph. - - - - -& - - -Adds the string that was found by the search criteria in the Search for box to the term in the Replace with box when you make a replacement. -For example, if you enter "window" in the Search for box and "&frame" in the Replace with box, the word "window" is replaced with "windowframe". -You can also enter an "&" in the Replace with box to modify the Attributes or the Format of the string found by the search criteria. - - - - -[abc123] - - -Represents one of the characters that are between the brackets. - - - - -[a-e] - - -Represents any of the characters that are between a and e. - - - - -[a-eh-x] - - -Represents any of the characters that are between a-e and h-x. - - - - -[^a-s] - - -Represents any character that is not between a and s. - - - - -\xXXXX - - -Represents a special character based on its four-digit hexadecimal code (XXXX). -The code for the special character depends on the font used. You can view the codes by choosing Insert - Special Character. - - - - -| - - -Finds the terms that occur before or after the "|". For example, "this|that" finds either "this" and "that". - - - - -{2} - - -Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket occurs. For example, "tre{2}" finds "tree". - - - - -{1,2} - - -Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{1,2}" finds both "tree" and "treated". - - - - -{1,} - - -Defines the minimum number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{2,}" finds "tree", "treee", and "treeeee". - - - - -( ) - - -Defines the characters inside the parentheses as a reference. You can then refer to the first reference in the current expression with "\1", to the second reference with "\2", and so on. -For example, if your text contains the number 13487889 and you search using the regular expression (8)7\1\1, "8788" is found. -You can also use () to group terms, for example, "a(bc)?d" finds "ad" or "abcd". - - - - -[:digit:]? - - -Represents a decimal digit. - - - - -[:space:]? - - -Represents a white space character such as space or tab. - - - - -[:print:]? - - -Represents a printable character. - - - - -[:cntrl:]? - - -Represents a nonprinting character. - - - - -[:alnum:]? - - -Represents an alphanumeric character ([:alpha:] and [:digit:]). - - - - -[:alpha:]? - - -Represents an alphabetic character. - - - - -[:lower:]? - - -Represents a lowercase character if Match case is selected in Options. - - - - -[:upper:]? - - -Represents an uppercase character if Match case is selected in Options. - - - -
- + + + + +Character + + +Result/Use + + + + +Any character + + +Represents any single character unless otherwise specified. + + + + +. + + +Represents any single character except for a line break or paragraph break. For example, the search term "sh.rt" returns both "shirt" and "short". + + + + +^ + + +Only finds the search term if the term is at the beginning of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames, at the beginning of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "^Peter". + + + + +$ + + +Only finds the search term if the term appears at the end of a paragraph. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames at the end of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "Peter$". + + + + +* + + +Finds zero or more of the characters in front of the "*". For example, "Ab*c" finds "Ac", "Abc", "Abbc", "Abbbc", and so on. + + + + ++ + + +Finds one or more of the characters in front of the "+". For example, "AX.+4" finds "AXx4", but not "AX4". +The longest possible string that matches this search pattern in a paragraph is always found. If the paragraph contains the string "AX 4 AX4", the entire passage is highlighted. + + + + +? + + +Finds zero or one of the characters in front of the "?". For example, "Texts?" finds "Text" and "Texts" and "x(ab|c)?y" finds "xy", "xaby", or "xcy". + + + + +\ + + +Search interprets the special character that follows the "\" as a normal character and not as a regular expression (except for the combinations \n, \t, \>, and \<). For example, "tree\." finds "tree.", not "treed" or "trees". + + + + +\n + + +Represents a line break that was inserted with the Shift+Enter key combination. To change a line break into a paragraph break, enter \n in the Search for and Replace with boxes, and then perform a search and replace. + + + + +\t + + +Represents a tab. You can also use this expression in the Replace with box. + + + + +\> + + +Only finds the search term if it appears at the end of a word. For example, "book\>" finds "checkbook", but not "bookmark". + + + + +\< + + +Only finds the search term if it appears at the beginning of a word. For example, "\<book" finds "bookmark", but not "checkbook". + + + + +^$ + + +Finds an empty paragraph. + + + + +^. + + +Finds the first character of a paragraph. + + + + +& + + +Adds the string that was found by the search criteria in the Search for box to the term in the Replace with box when you make a replacement. +For example, if you enter "window" in the Search for box and "&frame" in the Replace with box, the word "window" is replaced with "windowframe". +You can also enter an "&" in the Replace with box to modify the Attributes or the Format of the string found by the search criteria. + + + + +[abc123] + + +Represents one of the characters that are between the brackets. + + + + +[a-e] + + +Represents any of the characters that are between a and e. + + + + +[a-eh-x] + + +Represents any of the characters that are between a-e and h-x. + + + + +[^a-s] + + +Represents any character that is not between a and s. + + + + +\xXXXX + + +Represents a special character based on its four-digit hexadecimal code (XXXX). +The code for the special character depends on the font used. You can view the codes by choosing Insert - Special Character. + + + + +| + + +Finds the terms that occur before or after the "|". For example, "this|that" finds either "this" and "that". + + + + +{2} + + +Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket occurs. For example, "tre{2}" finds "tree". + + + + +{1,2} + + +Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{1,2}" finds both "tree" and "treated". + + + + +{1,} + + +Defines the minimum number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{2,}" finds "tree", "treee", and "treeeee". + + + + +( ) + + +Defines the characters inside the parentheses as a reference. You can then refer to the first reference in the current expression with "\1", to the second reference with "\2", and so on. +For example, if your text contains the number 13487889 and you search using the regular expression (8)7\1\1, "8788" is found. +You can also use () to group terms, for example, "a(bc)?d" finds "ad" or "abcd". + + + + +[:digit:]? + + +Represents a decimal digit. + + + + +[:space:]? + + +Represents a white space character such as space or tab. + + + + +[:print:]? + + +Represents a printable character. + + + + +[:cntrl:]? + + +Represents a nonprinting character. + + + + +[:alnum:]? + + +Represents an alphanumeric character ([:alpha:] and [:digit:]). + + + + +[:alpha:]? + + +Represents an alphabetic character. + + + + +[:lower:]? + + +Represents a lowercase character if Match case is selected in Options. + + + + +[:upper:]? + + +Represents an uppercase character if Match case is selected in Options. + + + +
+ -For a logical search expression with nested AND and OR operators, use parentheses. -
- -
- - +For a logical search expression with nested AND and OR operators, use parentheses. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp index c8162878e9..a1283970e7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Zoom -/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30099# - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Zoom +/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30099# + + +
-scaling; views -zooming; views -views; scaling -screen; scaling -pages; scaling -zooming in +scaling; views +zooming; views +views; scaling +screen; scaling +pages; scaling +zooming in zooming out - -Zoom + +Zoom Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME. - The current zoom factor is displayed as a percentage value on the Status bar. -
- -Zooming is handled differently on Unix, Linux, and Windows platforms. A document saved with a 100% zoom factor in Windows is displayed at a larger zoom factor on Unix/Linux platforms. To change the zoom factor, double-click the percentage value on the Status bar, and select a the Zoom factor that you want. -Zoom factor + The current zoom factor is displayed as a percentage value on the Status bar. + + +Zooming is handled differently on Unix, Linux, and Windows platforms. A document saved with a 100% zoom factor in Windows is displayed at a larger zoom factor on Unix/Linux platforms. To change the zoom factor, double-click the percentage value on the Status bar, and select a the Zoom factor that you want. +Zoom factor Set the zoom factor at which to display the current document. - -Entire page + +Entire page Displays the entire page on your screen. - -Page Width + +Page Width Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible. - -Optimal + +Optimal Resizes the display to fit the width of the selected cells. Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document. - -200 % + +200 % Displays the document at two times its actual size. - -150 % -Displays the document at one and a half times its actual size. + +150 % +Displays the document at one and a half times its actual size.
- -100 % -Displays the document at its actual size. + +100 % +Displays the document at its actual size.
- -75 % + +75 % Displays the document at 75% of its actual size. - -50 % + +50 % Displays the document at half of its actual size. - -Variable -Allows you to enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Click here, and then enter a percentage in the box. -You can also use the arrow buttons next to the Variable box to enter the zoom factor. - - + +Variable +Allows you to enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Click here, and then enter a percentage in the box. +You can also use the arrow buttons next to the Variable box to enter the zoom factor. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp index 4a18f4f1d0..71cc75c74b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Full Screen -/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Full Screen +/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-full screen view -screen; full screen views -complete screen; views +full screen view +screen; full screen views +complete screen; views views;full screen - -Full Screen -Shows or hides the menus and toolbars. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen On/Off button. -
+ +Full Screen +Shows or hides the menus and toolbars. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen On/Off button. + - + You can also use the shortcut keys Command -Ctrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode. +Ctrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode. You can still use shortcut keys in Full Screen mode, even though the menus are unavailable. To open the View menu, press Alt+V. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04110000.xhp index 4892d391ad..f923d6f9e0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04110000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04110000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Hyperlink Bar -/text/shared/01/04110000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Hyperlink Bar +/text/shared/01/04110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + - - -Hyperlink bar -Inserting hyperlinks -URL - - + +Hyperlink Bar +Shows or hides the Hyperlink Bar, where you can insert and edit URLs or search the Internet using keywords. + + + +Hyperlink bar +Inserting hyperlinks +URL + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp index f53ae143cd..b3fa6fc1b5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Character Font -/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Character Font +/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-formats; fonts -formats; characters -characters; formats -fonts; formats -fonts; characters -text; fonts -characters; fonts -typefaces; fonts -characters; typefaces -bold; typefaces -italics; typefaces -font sizes; characters -font sizes; relative changes -languages; text -text; languages +formats; fonts +formats; characters +characters; formats +fonts; formats +fonts; characters +text; fonts +characters; fonts +typefaces; fonts +characters; typefaces +bold; typefaces +italics; typefaces +font sizes; characters +font sizes; relative changes +languages; text +text; languages characters; languages - + Character -Font -
+Font + Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply. - - -
-The changes are applied to the current selection, to the entire word that contains the cursor, or to the new text that you type. -
-Depending on your language settings, you can change the formatting for the following font types: - - -Western text font - Latin character sets. - - -Asian text font - Chinese, Japanese, or Korean character sets - - -Complex text layout font - right-to-left text direction - - + + +
+The changes are applied to the current selection, to the entire word that contains the cursor, or to the new text that you type. +
+Depending on your language settings, you can change the formatting for the following font types: + + +Western text font - Latin character sets. + + +Asian text font - Chinese, Japanese, or Korean character sets + + +Complex text layout font - right-to-left text direction + + To enable support for complex text layout and Asian character sets, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the corresponding area. - -Font -Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list. - - + +Font +Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list. + + - -Typeface -Select the formatting that you want to apply. -You can also use the Typeface icons on the Object Bar. - - + +Typeface +Select the formatting that you want to apply. +You can also use the Typeface icons on the Object Bar. + + - -Font Size -Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values. -If you are creating a Style that is based on another Style, you can enter a percentage value or a point value (for example, -2pt or +5pt). - + +Font Size +Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values. +If you are creating a Style that is based on another Style, you can enter a percentage value or a point value (for example, -2pt or +5pt). + - -Language -Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text of the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them. + +Language +Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text of the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them. You can only change the language setting for cells (choose Format - Cells - Numbers). - - - -If you received an error message about missing character sets, run the $[officename] Setup program, and choose the Repair option. - -Asian languages support -Complex text layout support - - + + + +If you received an error message about missing character sets, run the $[officename] Setup program, and choose the Repair option. + +Asian languages support +Complex text layout support + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp index e495cb3819..3d406e1dc7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Font Effects -/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fix to #112392#, spec "Hidden Text in Writer" -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Font Effects +/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fix to #112392#, spec "Hidden Text in Writer" +dedr: reviewed + + +
-fonts;effects -formatting; font effects -characters; font effects -text; font effects -effects; fonts -font effects; underlining -underlining; text -capital letters; font effects -lowercase letters; font effects -titles; font effects -small capitals; font effects -strikethrough; characters effects -font effects; strikethrough -strikethrough; font effects -fonts; strikethrough -outlines; font effects -fonts; outlines -shadows; font -fonts; shadows -blinking fonts -flashing fonts -colors; fonts -fonts; colors +fonts;effects +formatting; font effects +characters; font effects +text; font effects +effects; fonts +font effects; underlining +underlining; text +capital letters; font effects +lowercase letters; font effects +titles; font effects +small capitals; font effects +strikethrough; characters effects +font effects; strikethrough +strikethrough; font effects +fonts; strikethrough +outlines; font effects +fonts; outlines +shadows; font +fonts; shadows +blinking fonts +flashing fonts +colors; fonts +fonts; colors text; colors - -Font Effects -Specify the font effects that you want to use. -
- + +Font Effects +Specify the font effects that you want to use. + + - -Underlining -Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. -If you apply underlining to a superscript text, the underlining is raised to the level of the superscript. If the superscript is contained in a word with normal text, the underlining is not raised. - + +Underlining +Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. +If you apply underlining to a superscript text, the underlining is raised to the level of the superscript. If the superscript is contained in a word with normal text, the underlining is not raised. + - -Color + +Color Select the color for the underlining. - -Effects -Select the font effects that you want to apply. -Effects -The following capitalization effects are available: - - -Without - no effect is applied - - -Capitals - changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters - - -Lowercase - changes the selected uppercase characters to lower characters - - -Title font - changes the first character of each selected word to an uppercase character - - -Small capitals - changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters, and then reduces their size - + +Effects +Select the font effects that you want to apply. +Effects +The following capitalization effects are available: + + +Without - no effect is applied + + +Capitals - changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters + + +Lowercase - changes the selected uppercase characters to lower characters + + +Title font - changes the first character of each selected word to an uppercase character + + +Small capitals - changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters, and then reduces their size + - -Strikethrough -Select a strikethrough style for the selected text. + +Strikethrough +Select a strikethrough style for the selected text. If you save your document in MS Word format, all of the strikethrough styles are converted to the single line style. - -Individual words + +Individual words Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces. - -Outlines + +Outlines Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font. - -Shadows + +Shadows Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters. UFI: fixed bugtraq 5031302 Blinking (and Effects) only in Writer - -Blinking + +Blinking Makes the selected characters blink. You cannot change the blink frequency. - -Hidden + +Hidden Hides the selected characters . To display the hidden text, ensure that Non-printing Characters On/Off is selected in the View menu. You can also choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and select Hidden text in the Display of area. - - + + - -Emphasis mark + +Emphasis mark Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text. - -Position + +Position Specify where to display the emphasis marks. - -Relief + +Relief Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page. - -Font Color -Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds. - - -To change the color of a text selection, select the text that you want to change, and click the Font Color icon. To apply a different color, long-click the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. - - -If you click the Font Color icon before you select text, the paint can cursor appears. To change the color of text, select the text with the paint can cursor. To change the color of a single word, double-click in a word. To apply a different color, long-click the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. - - -To undo the last change, right-click. - - -To exit the paint can mode, click once, or press the Escape key. - + +Font Color +Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds. + + +To change the color of a text selection, select the text that you want to change, and click the Font Color icon. To apply a different color, long-click the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. + + +If you click the Font Color icon before you select text, the paint can cursor appears. To change the color of text, select the text with the paint can cursor. To change the color of a single word, double-click in a word. To apply a different color, long-click the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. + + +To undo the last change, right-click. + + +To exit the paint can mode, click once, or press the Escape key. + - + The text color is ignored if the Print black check box is selected in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. - + Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Long-click to open the Font color floating toolbar. - - -$[officename] color tables - - - + + +$[officename] color tables + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp index 1a7e4fb292..53d0139534 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Font Position -/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Font Position +/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-positions; fonts -formats; positions -effects; positions -font positions in text -spacing; font effects -characters; spacing -pair kerning -kerning; in characters -characters; kerning -text; kerning +positions; fonts +formats; positions +effects; positions +font positions in text +spacing; font effects +characters; spacing +pair kerning +kerning; in characters +characters; kerning +text; kerning fonts; kerning - + Font Position -Position -Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters. -
- +Position +Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters. + + - -Position + +Position Set the subscript or superscript options for a character. - -Superscript + +Superscript Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline. - -Normal + +Normal Removes superscript or subscript formatting. - -Subscript + +Subscript Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline. - -Raise/lower by + +Raise/lower by Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font. - -Relative font size + +Relative font size Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text. - -Automatic -Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline. + +Automatic +Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline. Rotation / scaling - + Set the rotation and the scaling options for the selected text. - -0 degrees + +0 degrees Does not rotate the selected text. - -90 degrees + +90 degrees Rotates the selected text to the left by 90 degrees. - -270 degrees + +270 degrees Rotates the selected text to the right by 90 degrees. - -Fit to line + +Fit to line Stretches or compresses the selected text so that it fits between the line that is above the text and the line that is below the text. - -Scale width -Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text. -Spacing + +Scale width +Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text. +Spacing Specify the spacing between individual characters. - -Spacing -Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. For expanded or condensed spacing, enter the amount that you want to expand or condense the text in the by box. - - - -Default - uses the character spacing specified in the font type - - - -Expanded - increases the character spacing - - - -Condensed - decreases the character spacing - + +Spacing +Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. For expanded or condensed spacing, enter the amount that you want to expand or condense the text in the by box. + + + +Default - uses the character spacing specified in the font type + + + +Expanded - increases the character spacing + + + +Condensed - decreases the character spacing + - -by + +by Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the character spacing for the selected text. - -Pair kerning -Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations. -Kerning is only available for certain font types and requires that your printer support this option. - - - + +Pair kerning +Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations. +Kerning is only available for certain font types and requires that your printer support this option. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp index b89ae6f9a7..3d6ddaf500 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Asian Typography -/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Asian Typography +/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-Asian typography; fonts -formats; Asian typography -paragraphs; Asian typography -text; Asian typography +Asian typography; fonts +formats; Asian typography +paragraphs; Asian typography +text; Asian typography typography; Asian - -Asian Typography + +Asian Typography Set the typographic options for cells -paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area. The Asian typography options are ignored in HTML documents. - -
- -Line change +paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area. The Asian typography options are ignored in HTML documents. + + + +Line change Set the options for line breaks in Asian language documents. - -Apply list of forbidden characters to the beginning and end of line + +Apply list of forbidden characters to the beginning and end of line Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. - -Allow hanging punctuation + +Allow hanging punctuation Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin. - - -Apply spacing between Asian, Latin and Complex text - -Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters. - -Enabling Asian language support - - + + +Apply spacing between Asian, Latin and Complex text + +Inserts a space between Asian, Latin and complex characters. + +Enabling Asian language support + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp index cd199d58cb..2616fcd731 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Paragraph -/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Paragraph +/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Paragraph + +Paragraph Modifies the format of the current paragraph. To modify the font of the current paragraph, select the entire paragraph, choose Format - Character, and then click on the Font tab. If you want to change the format of all of the paragraphs that use the current paragraph style, choose Format - Styles - Catalog. - - + + The paragraph style for the current paragraph is displayed at the left end of the Object Bar, or is highlighted in the Stylist. - - + + @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ - + @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ - - - - + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp index 59c14563a2..331ea4e37a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Alignment -/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Alignment +/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-aligning; paragraphs -paragraphs; alignment -text; alignment -lines; alignment -aligning text; lines -left alignment of paragraphs -aligning text; left -right alignment of paragraphs -aligning text; right -centered text +aligning; paragraphs +paragraphs; alignment +text; alignment +lines; alignment +aligning text; lines +left alignment of paragraphs +aligning text; left +right alignment of paragraphs +aligning text; right +centered text justifying; text - -Alignment -Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page. -
- -Alignment + +Alignment +Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page. + + +Alignment Set the alignment options for the current paragraph. If you want, you can also use the alignment icons on the Object Bar. - -Left + +Left Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin. - If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Left/Top. - + If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Left/Top. + - -Right + +Right Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin. - If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Right/Bottom. - + If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Right/Bottom. + - -Centered + +Centered Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page. - - + + - -Justify + +Justify Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins. - - + + - + Last Line - + Specify the alignment for the last line in the paragraph. - + Expand single word - + If the last line of a justified paragraph consists of one word, the word is stretched to the width of the paragraph. - -Snap to text grid (if active) + +Snap to text grid (if active) Aligns the paragraph to a text grid. To activate the text grid, choose Format - Page - Text Grid. - -Text-to-text - Alignment + +Text-to-text - Alignment Select an alignment option for oversized or undersized characters in the paragraph relative to the rest of the text in the paragraph. - -
+ +
Properties - -Text direction -Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. -
- - - + +Text direction +Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp index 21bd2aa799..8ed93f5339 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Crop -/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Crop +/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-cropping graphics -graphics; cropping -zooming; graphics -graphics; zooming -graphics; sizes +cropping graphics +graphics; cropping +zooming; graphics +graphics; zooming +graphics; sizes sizes; graphics - -Crop -Trims or scales the selected graphic. You can also restore the graphic to its original size. -
- -
-Crop + +Crop +Trims or scales the selected graphic. You can also restore the graphic to its original size. +
+ +
+Crop Use this area to trim or scale the selected graphic, or to add white space around the graphic. - -Keep scale + +Keep scale Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes. - -Keep image size + +Keep image size Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes. - -Left + +Left If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. - -Right + +Right If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. - -Top + +Top If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. - -Bottom -If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. -Scale + +Bottom +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. +Scale Changes the scale of the selected graphic. - -Width + +Width Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage. - -Height -Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage. -Image size + +Height +Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage. +Image size Changes the size of the selected graphic. - -Width + +Width Enter a width for the selected graphic. - -Height -Enter a height for the selected graphic. + +Height +Enter a height for the selected graphic. - -Original Size -Returns the selected graphic to its original size. -
- - + +Original Size +Returns the selected graphic to its original size. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp index 2a2817054b..d325df8121 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Organizer -/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: spec "Assign Keyboard Shortcuts to Styles" -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Organizer +/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: spec "Assign Keyboard Shortcuts to Styles" +dedr: reviewed + + +
-organizing; styles +organizing; styles styles; organizing - -Organizer -Set the options for the selected style. -
+ +Organizer +Set the options for the selected style. + - -Name + +Name Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style. - + AutoUpdate - + Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated. - -Next Style + +Next Style Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to the paragraph that is created when you press Enter. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created. - -Linked with + +Linked with Select an existing style that you want to base the new style on, or select none to define your own style. - -Category -Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list. + +Category +Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list. You cannot change the category for a predefined style. - -Contains -Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style. -Assign Shortcut Key -Opens the Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab page where you can assign a shortcut key to the current Style. - -Update Style - - + +Contains +Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style. +Assign Shortcut Key +Opens the Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab page where you can assign a shortcut key to the current Style. + +Update Style + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp index e77678fd53..43a4cd993c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Page -/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fixed #i22750# FPE: fixed typo in link dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Page +/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fixed #i22750# FPE: fixed typo in link dedr: reviewed + + +
-pages;formatting -formatting;pages -paper formats -paper trays;printers -printers;paper trays -layout;pages -pages;numbering +pages;formatting +formatting;pages +paper formats +paper trays;printers +printers;paper trays +layout;pages +pages;numbering numbering;pages - -Page -Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats. -
- - -Paper format + +Page +Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats. + + + +Paper format Select from a list of predefined paper sizes, or define a custom paper format. - -Format + +Format Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes. - -Width + +Width Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here. - -Height + +Height Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here. - -Portrait + +Portrait Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically. - -Landscape + +Landscape Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally. - -Text direction + +Text direction Select the text direction that you want to use in your document. The "right-to-left (vertical)" text flow direction rotates all layout settings to the right by 90 degrees, except for the header and footer. - -Paper tray -Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.UFI: #i31234# - -Margins + +Paper tray +Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.UFI: #i31234# + +Margins Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the page and the document text. - -Left/Inner + +Left/Inner Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page. - -Right / Outer + +Right / Outer Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page. - -Top + +Top Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text. - -Bottom -Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text. + +Bottom +Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text. -Page Layout +Page Layout Select the page layout style to use in the current document. - + -Page layout +Page layout -Specify whether to apply the formatting to odd pages, even pages, or to both odd and even pages that use the current page style. +Specify whether to apply the formatting to odd pages, even pages, or to both odd and even pages that use the current page style. -Right and left +Right and left -Applies the formatting settings to both odd and even pages in the document that use the current page style. +Applies the formatting settings to both odd and even pages in the document that use the current page style. -Mirrored +Mirrored -Use this layout if you want to bind the printed pages like a book. +Use this layout if you want to bind the printed pages like a book. -Only right +Only right -Applies the current formatting settings only to odd pages that use the current page style. The first page of a document is automatically treated as an odd page. +Applies the current formatting settings only to odd pages that use the current page style. The first page of a document is automatically treated as an odd page. -Only left +Only left -Applies the current formatting settings only to even pages that use the current page style. +Applies the current formatting settings only to even pages that use the current page style. Register-true - + Register-true - + Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid. The spacing of the grid is defined by the Reference Style. - + Reference Style - + Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid. - + Table alignment - + Specify the alignment options for the cells on a printed page. - + Horizontal - + Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page. - + Vertical - + Centers the cells vertically on the printed page. - + @@ -190,30 +190,30 @@ Layout settings - -format + +format Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style. - + -AutoFit object to page format +AutoFit object to page format -Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved. - +Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved. + Changing measurement units - + Writing Register-true - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp index e1c783cf37..2a60db3755 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Asian Phonetic Guide -/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: changed name, see spec "Format Menu in Writer" - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Asian Phonetic Guide +/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: changed name, see spec "Format Menu in Writer" + + +
- -Asian Phonetic Guide -Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide. - -
- - - -Select one or more words in the document. - - -Choose Format - Asian Phonetic Guide. - - -Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide in the Ruby text box. - + +Asian Phonetic Guide +Allows you to add comments above Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide. + + + + + +Select one or more words in the document. + + +Choose Format - Asian Phonetic Guide. + + +Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide in the Ruby text box. + - -Base text + +Base text Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here. - -Ruby text + +Ruby text Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text. - -Alignment + +Alignment Select the horizontal alignment for the Ruby text. - -Position + +Position Select where you want to place the ruby text. - -Character Style for ruby text + +Character Style for ruby text Select a character style for the ruby text. - -StylistUFI: renamed?? + +StylistUFI: renamed?? Opens the Styles and Formatting window -Styles and Formatting window where you can select a character style for the ruby text. - - - - +Styles and Formatting window where you can select a character style for the ruby text. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp index 1d49c8ada5..00a1e95c29 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Aligning (Objects) -/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Aligning (Objects) +/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-aligning; objects -positioning; objects +aligning; objects +positioning; objects ordering; objects - -Alignment (Objects) -Aligns selected objects with respect to one another. -
-If one of the selected objects is anchored as a character, some of the alignment options do not work. - + +Alignment (Objects) +Aligns selected objects with respect to one another. + +If one of the selected objects is anchored as a character, some of the alignment options do not work. + -To open the Alignment floating toolbar, long-click the Alignment icon on the Main Toolbar or on the Object Bar. - - - - - - - - +To open the Alignment floating toolbar, long-click the Alignment icon on the Main Toolbar or on the Object Bar. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp index 8a0e95a29f..448bebec67 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Alignment (Text Objects) -/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Alignment (Text Objects) +/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-aligning; text objects +aligning; text objects text objects; alignment - -Alignment (Text Objects) -Set the alignment options for the current selection. -
- - - - - - - + +Alignment (Text Objects) +Set the alignment options for the current selection. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp index e1c2e135b6..697a8885c3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Style -/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Style +/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-text objects; font styles +text objects; font styles font styles in text objects - -Style -Use this command to quickly apply font styles to a text selection. -
- -If you place the cursor in a word and do not make a selection, the font style is applied to the entire word. If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. - - - - - - - - - - + +Style +Use this command to quickly apply font styles to a text selection. + + +If you place the cursor in a word and do not make a selection, the font style is applied to the entire word. If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp index 70d630d875..b0b89ec823 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Superscript -/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Superscript +/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Superscript -Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline. -
- - - - + +Superscript +Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp index 27bd5107a0..445c5e291d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Subscript -/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Subscript +/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Subscript -Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline. -
- - - - + +Subscript +Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp index 7c19b16f40..94f73c3163 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Arrow Styles -/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Arrow Styles +/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Arrow Styles -Edit or create arrow styles. -
- -Organize arrow styles + +Arrow Styles +Edit or create arrow styles. + + +Organize arrow styles Lets you organize the current list of arrow styles. - -Title + +Title Displays the name of the selected arrow style. - -Arrow style + +Arrow style Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box. - -Add + +Add To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, choose Format - Line, click the Arrow Styles tab, and then click here. - -Modify + +Modify Changes the name of the selected arrow style. - -Load Arrow Styles + +Load Arrow Styles Imports a list of arrow styles. - -Save Arrow Styles -Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later. - - - + +Save Arrow Styles +Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp index a2eb3624f5..62dfc12176 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Area -/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Area +/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Area + +Area Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object. - -
- - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp index 13d1ee2e0d..a4b4d2bf89 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Background Area -/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Background Area +/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-areas; fill -areas; style -fill patterns; areas -fill colors; areas -areas; invisible -invisible areas +areas; fill +areas; style +fill patterns; areas +fill colors; areas +areas; invisible +invisible areas areas; none - + Background -Area -Set the fill options for the selected drawing object. -
-You can save collections of colors, gradients, hatchings, and bitmap patterns as lists that you can later load and use. - +Area +Set the fill options for the selected drawing object. + +You can save collections of colors, gradients, hatchings, and bitmap patterns as lists that you can later load and use. + Fill - + Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object. - -List boxes in the Object Bar: + +List boxes in the Object Bar: - -None + +None Does not apply a fill to the selected object. If the object contains a fill, the fill is removed. - -Color -Fills the selected object with the color that you click in the list. + +Color +Fills the selected object with the color that you click in the list. To add a color to the list, choose Format - Area, click the Colors tab, and then click Edit. - -Gradient + +Gradient Fills the selected object with the gradient that you click in the list. - -Hatching + +Hatching Fills the selected object with the hatching pattern that you click in the list. To apply a background color to the hatching pattern, select the Background color box, and then click a color in the list. - -Bitmap + +Bitmap Fills the selected object with the bitmap pattern that you click in the list. To add a bitmap to the list, click the Bitmaps tab, and then click Import. - -Area Fill -Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object. -Increments (Gradients) + +Area Fill +Click the fill that you want to apply to the selected object. +Increments (Gradients) Set the number of steps for blending the two end colors of a gradient. - -Automatic + +Automatic Automatically determines the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient. - -Increment -Enter the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient. -Size (Bitmaps) + +Increment +Enter the number of steps for blending the two end colors of the gradient. +Size (Bitmaps) Specify the dimensions of the bitmap. - -Relative + +Relative Rescales the bitmap relative to the size of the selected object by the percentage values that you enter in the Width and Height boxes . Clear this checkbox to resize the selected object with the measurements that you enter in the Width and Height boxes. - -Original + +Original Retains the original size of the bitmap when filling the selected object. To resize the bitmap, clear this checkbox, and then click Relative. - -Width + +Width Enter a width for the bitmap. - -Height -Enter a height for the bitmap. -Position (Bitmaps) + +Height +Enter a height for the bitmap. +Position (Bitmaps) Click in the position grid to specify the offset for tiling the bitmap. - -X Offset + +X Offset Enter the horizontal offset for tiling the bitmap. - -Y Offset + +Y Offset Enter the vertical offset for tiling the bitmap. - -Tile + +Tile Tiles the bitmap to fill the selected object. - -AutoFit -Stretches the bitmap to fill the selected object. To use this feature, clear the Tile box. -Offset + +AutoFit +Stretches the bitmap to fill the selected object. To use this feature, clear the Tile box. +Offset Specify the offset for tiling the bitmap in terms of rows and columns. - -Row + +Row Horizontally offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter. - -Column + +Column Vertically offsets the original bitmap relative to the bitmap tiles by the amount that you enter. - -Percent -Enter the percentage to offset the rows or columns. + +Percent +Enter the percentage to offset the rows or columns. Background Color (Hatching) - -Background color + +Background color Applies a background color to the hatching pattern. Select this checkbox, and then click a color in the list. - -List of colors -Click the color that you want to use as a background for the selected hatching pattern. - - - + +List of colors +Click the color that you want to use as a background for the selected hatching pattern. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp index 8991ee3d92..04e43cde72 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Colors -/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Colors -Select a color to apply, save the current color list, or load a different color list. - - -Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Colors +/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Colors +Select a color to apply, save the current color list, or load a different color list. + + +Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp index c996a7efe5..43cd882e53 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Gradients -/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Gradients +/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Gradients -Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists. -
+ +Gradients +Set the properties of a gradient, or save and load gradient lists. + - -Type + +Type Lists the available gradients. Click the gradient that you want to apply, and then click OK. - -Center X + +Center X Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. - -Center Y + +Center Y Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. - -Angle + +Angle Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient. - -Border -Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. + +Border +Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To box. From - + Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient. - -Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. + +Enter the intensity for the color in the From box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. To - + Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient. - + Enter the intensity for the color in the To box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. - -Gradients + +Gradients Select the type of gradient that you want to apply or create. - -Add + +Add Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button - -Modify + +Modify Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name. - + - -Load Gradients List + +Load Gradients List Load a different list of gradients. - -Save Gradients List -Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later. - - + +Save Gradients List +Saves the current list of gradients, so that you can load it later. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp index dca6c228d4..cbe2b3c4f8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Hatching -/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Hatching +/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-areas; hatching -hatching; areas -areas; shaded -shaded areas -dotted areas +areas; hatching +hatching; areas +areas; shaded +shaded areas +dotted areas areas; dotted - -Hatching -Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists. -
- -Properties + +Hatching +Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save and load hatching lists. + + +Properties Define or modify a hatching pattern. - -Spacing + +Spacing Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines. - -Angle + +Angle Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid. - -Angle grid + +Angle grid Click a position in the grid to define the rotation angle for the hatch lines. - -Line type + +Line type Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use. - -Line color -Select the color of the hatch lines. -Hatches List + +Line color +Select the color of the hatch lines. +Hatches List Lists the available hatching patterns. You can also modify or create your own hatching pattern. To save the list, click the Save Hatches List button. To display a different list, click the Load Hatches List button. - -Hatches list + +Hatches list Lists the available hatching patterns. Click the hatching pattern that you want to apply, and then click OK. - -Add + +Add Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button. - -Modify + +Modify Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name. - + - -Load Hatches List + +Load Hatches List Loads a different list of hatching patterns. - -Save Hatches List -Saves the current list of hatching patterns, so that you can load it later. - - + +Save Hatches List +Saves the current list of hatching patterns, so that you can load it later. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp index 3e3a5dda6a..1131b6bef2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Text -/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: some changes to fix #i32887# - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Text +/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: some changes to fix #i32887# + + +
-text; text drawing objects -drawing objects; text -frames; text drawing objects +text; text drawing objects +drawing objects; text +frames; text drawing objects drawing objects; frames - -Text -Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. -
- -The text is positioned relative to the edges of the drawing or text object. + +Text +Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. + + +The text is positioned relative to the edges of the drawing or text object. Text - -Fit width to text + +Fit width to text Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. - -Fit height to text + +Fit height to text Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. - -Fit to frame + +Fit to frame Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object. - -Contour flow -Adapts the text flow so that it match the contours of the selected drawing object. -Spacing from border + +Contour flow +Adapts the text flow so that it match the contours of the selected drawing object. +Spacing from border Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the drawing or text object and the borders of the text. - -Left + +Left Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text. - -Right + +Right Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text. - -Top + +Top Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text. - -Bottom -Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text. -Text anchor + +Bottom +Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text. +Text anchor Set the anchor type and the anchor position. - -Graphic field + +Graphic field Click where you want to place the anchor for the text. - -Full width -Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing or text object. - - + +Full width +Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing or text object. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp index 50e1b4b8a1..bd6f54cc95 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Slant & Corner Radius -/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Slant & Corner Radius +/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-slanting; draw objects -draw objects; slanting -areas; slanting +slanting; draw objects +draw objects; slanting +areas; slanting slanting; areas - -Slant & Corner Radius -Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object. -
- -Corner Radius + +Slant & Corner Radius +Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object. + + +Corner Radius You can only round the corners of a rectangular object. - -Radius -Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners. -Slant + +Radius +Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners. +Slant Slants the selected object along an axis that you specify. - -Angle -Enter the angle of the slant axis. - - + +Angle +Enter the angle of the slant axis. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp index 1fe24553f4..148031933d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Text Animation -/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Text Animation +/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Text Animation -Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object. -
- -Text animation effects + +Text Animation +Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object. + + +Text animation effects Select the effect that you want to apply, and then set the properties of the effect. - -Effects + +Effects Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect. - -To the Left -Scrolls text from right to left. - - - + +To the Left +Scrolls text from right to left. +
+ + Icon - - - -Left arrow - - -
+ + + +Left arrow + + + - -To the Right -Scrolls text from left to right. - - - + +To the Right +Scrolls text from left to right. +
+ + Icon - - - -Right arrow - - -
+ + + +Right arrow + + + - -To the Top -Scrolls text from bottom to top. - - - + +To the Top +Scrolls text from bottom to top. +
+ + Icon - - - -Up arrow - - -
+ + + +Up arrow + + + - -To the Bottom -Scrolls text from top to bottom. - - - + +To the Bottom +Scrolls text from top to bottom. +
+ + Icon - - - -Down arrow - - -
- + + + +Down arrow + + + + Properties - -Start Inside + +Start Inside Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied. - -Text visible when finishing -Text remains visible after the effect is applied. -Animation effects + +Text visible when finishing +Text remains visible after the effect is applied. +Animation effects Set the looping options for the animation effect. - -Continuous + +Continuous Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box. - -Continuous box -Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat. -Increment + +Continuous box +Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat. +Increment Specify the increment value for scrolling the text. - -Pixels + +Pixels Measures increment value in pixels. - -Increment box -Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text. -Delay + +Increment box +Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text. +Delay Specify the amount time to wait before repeating the effect. - -Automatic + +Automatic $[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box. - -Automatic box -Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. - - + +Automatic box +Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp index e94aff2991..f4dd95a952 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Row Height -/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Row Height +/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Row Height + +Row Height Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows. - + You can also change the height of a row by dragging the divider below the row header. To fit the row height to the cell contents, double-click the divider. - + - -Height + +Height Enter the row height that you want to use. - + Default value -Automatic -Automatically adjusts the row height based on the current font. - - +Automatic +Automatically adjusts the row height based on the current font. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp index 6a60e0eaf6..2f2e945e3e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Alignment -/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: added specs.openoffice.org/calc/compatibility/fillcell.sxw and Calc Cell Property “Shrink To Fit” -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Alignment +/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: added specs.openoffice.org/calc/compatibility/fillcell.sxw and Calc Cell Property “Shrink To Fit” +dedr: reviewed + + +
-aligning; cells +aligning; cells cells; aligning - -Alignment -Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells. -
+ +Alignment +Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells. + - -Horizontal -Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. -Default -Aligns numbers to the right, and text to the left. + +Horizontal +Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. +Default +Aligns numbers to the right, and text to the left. If the Default option is selected, numbers will be aligned to the right and text will be left-justified. - -Left + +Left Aligns the contents of the cell to the left. - - + + - -Right + +Right Aligns the contents of the cell to the right. - - + + - -Center + +Center Horizontally centers the contents of the cell. - - + + - -Justified + +Justified Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and to the right cell borders. - -Filled -Repeats the cell contents (number and text) until the visible area of the cell is filled. This feature does not work on text that contains line breaks. - + +Filled +Repeats the cell contents (number and text) until the visible area of the cell is filled. This feature does not work on text that contains line breaks. + - -Indent + +Indent Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter. - -Vertical -Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. -Default + +Vertical +Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. +Default Aligns the cell contents to the bottom of the cell. - -Top + +Top Aligns the contents of the cell to the upper edge of the cell. - + @@ -127,65 +127,65 @@ dedr: reviewed - -Bottom + +Bottom Aligns the contents of the cell to the lower edge of the cell. - - + + - -Middle + +Middle Vertically centers the contents of the cell. - - - -Text Direction + + + +Text Direction Sets the text orientation of the cell contents. - + Click in the dial to set the text orientation. - -Angle + +Angle Enter the rotation angle for the text in the selected cell(s). A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right. - -Reference edge -Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text. - - - -Text Extension From Lower Cell Border: Writes the rotated text from the bottom cell edge outwards. - - - -Text Extension From Upper Cell Border: Writes the rotated text from the top cell edge outwards. - - - -Text Extension Inside Cells: Writes the rotated text only within the cell. - - -Vertically stacked -Aligns text vertically.UFI: see spec "Shrink to fit" + +Reference edge +Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text. + + + +Text Extension From Lower Cell Border: Writes the rotated text from the bottom cell edge outwards. + + + +Text Extension From Upper Cell Border: Writes the rotated text from the top cell edge outwards. + + + +Text Extension Inside Cells: Writes the rotated text only within the cell. + + +Vertically stacked +Aligns text vertically.UFI: see spec "Shrink to fit" - -Asian layout mode -This checkbox is only available if Asian language support is enabled and the text direction is set to vertical. Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated. -Text flow + +Asian layout mode +This checkbox is only available if Asian language support is enabled and the text direction is set to vertical. Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated. +Text flow Determine the text flow in a cell. - -Wrap text automatically + +Wrap text automatically Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell. To enter a manual line break, press Command -Ctrl+Enter in the cell. - - +Ctrl+Enter in the cell. + + - -Hyphenation active -Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line. -Shrink to fit cell size -Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks. - - + +Hyphenation active +Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line. +Shrink to fit cell size +Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp index 729b6cefa5..1fd1d63fc3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Data Sources -/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Data Sources +/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-database tables; data source browser -data source browser -tables in databases; data source browser -databases; editing tables -editing; database tables -editing; queries +database tables; data source browser +data source browser +tables in databases; data source browser +databases; editing tables +editing; database tables +editing; queries queries; editing - - -Data Sources -This section contains information on browsing and editing database tables. -
- -You cannot use the data source browser on a database table that is open in Design view. -Data source browser -The commands for the data source browser are found on the Database Bar and in context menus. -Selecting records -To select a record in a database table, click the row header, or click a row header, and then use the Up or Down arrow keys. -The following table describes how to select individual elements in the data source browser: - - - -Selection - - -Action - - - - -Record - - -Click the row header - - - - -Several records or removing a selection - - -Hold down Ctrl and click the row header - - - - -Column - - -Click the column header - - - - -Data field - - -Click in the data field - - - - -Entire table - - -Click the row header of the column headings - - -
- -Database Bar (editing database tables) - - - + + +Data Sources +This section contains information on browsing and editing database tables. + + +You cannot use the data source browser on a database table that is open in Design view. +Data source browser +The commands for the data source browser are found on the Database Bar and in context menus. +Selecting records +To select a record in a database table, click the row header, or click a row header, and then use the Up or Down arrow keys. +The following table describes how to select individual elements in the data source browser: +
+ + +Selection + + +Action + + + + +Record + + +Click the row header + + + + +Several records or removing a selection + + +Hold down Ctrl and click the row header + + + + +Column + + +Click the column header + + + + +Data field + + +Click in the data field + + + + +Entire table + + +Click the row header of the column headings + + +
+ +Database Bar (editing database tables) + + + Icon - - - -Allows you to edit, add, or delete records from the database table. -To change the layout of a database table, right-click the table in Data Source view, and then choose Edit - Table. -When you edit a query for the current database table in Data Source view, the changes are immediately displayed. To edit a query that requires access to more than one table, right-click the query in Data Source view, and then choose Edit - Query. - - -
- -You cannot edit a database table that requires an index key or a primary key for identification of the data records, if the table definition does not contain an index key or a primary key. -Cutting, copying and pasting data -You can cut, copy, and paste table fields in Data Source view. The Data Source browser also supports the dragging and dropping of table fields, or simple text and numbers from other $[officename] files. -You cannot drag and drop to Yes/No, binary, image, or counting table fields. -Drag and drop only works in Edit mode. - -Navigating in the Data Source Browser -Use the Navigation Bar at the bottom of the Data Source view to navigate between different records. -First record - - - + + + +Allows you to edit, add, or delete records from the database table. +To change the layout of a database table, right-click the table in Data Source view, and then choose Edit - Table. +When you edit a query for the current database table in Data Source view, the changes are immediately displayed. To edit a query that requires access to more than one table, right-click the query in Data Source view, and then choose Edit - Query. + + +
+ +You cannot edit a database table that requires an index key or a primary key for identification of the data records, if the table definition does not contain an index key or a primary key. +Cutting, copying and pasting data +You can cut, copy, and paste table fields in Data Source view. The Data Source browser also supports the dragging and dropping of table fields, or simple text and numbers from other $[officename] files. +You cannot drag and drop to Yes/No, binary, image, or counting table fields. +Drag and drop only works in Edit mode. + +Navigating in the Data Source Browser +Use the Navigation Bar at the bottom of the Data Source view to navigate between different records. +First record + + + Icon - - - -Go to the first record in the table. - - -
- -Previous record - - - + + + +Go to the first record in the table. + + +
+ +Previous record + + + Icon - - - -Go to the previous record in the table. - - -
- -Record number -Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. -Next record - - - + + + +Go to the previous record in the table. + + +
+ +Record number +Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. +Next record + + + Icon - - - -Go to the next record in the table. - - -
- -Last record - - - + + + +Go to the next record in the table. + + +
+ +Last record + + + Icon - - - -Go to the last record in the table. - - -
- -New record - - - + + + +Go to the last record in the table. + + +
+ +New record + + + Icon - - - -Inserts a new record into the current table.To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table. - - -
- -Number of records -The Navigation bar also displays information about the number of records in the current table. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7. -Organizing tables -To access the commands for formatting the table, right-click a column header, or a row header. -Table Format - -Row Height - - -Column Format - -Column Width - - - - - + + + +Inserts a new record into the current table.To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table. + + + + +Number of records +The Navigation bar also displays information about the number of records in the current table. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7. +Organizing tables +To access the commands for formatting the table, right-click a column header, or a row header. +Table Format + +Row Height + + +Column Format + +Column Width + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp index 7d33c352d9..aa34cf30a2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -3D Effects -/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +3D Effects +/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -3D Effects -Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document. -
- - - - - - - - - + +3D Effects +Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp index 70d719298b..09bb21e3a9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Geometry -/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Geometry +/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-3D effects; geometry +3D effects; geometry geometry; 3D effects - -Geometry -Adjusts the shape and of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object. -
- -Geometry + +Geometry +Adjusts the shape and of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object. + + +Geometry Define the shape properties for the selected 3D object. - -Rounded edges + +Rounded edges Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object. - -Scaled depth + +Scaled depth Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object. - -Rotation angle + +Rotation angle Enter the number of degrees to include in the selected 3D rotation object. - -Depth -Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects. -Segments + +Depth +Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects. +Segments You can change the number of segments that are used to draw a 3D rotation object. - -Horizontal + +Horizontal Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object. - -Vertical -Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object -Normals + +Vertical +Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object +Normals Allows you to modify the rendering style of the 3D surface. - -Object-Specific -Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface. - - - + +Object-Specific +Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface. +
+ + Icon - - - -Object-Specific - - -
+ + + +Object-Specific + + + - -Flat -Renders the 3D surface as polygons. - - - + +Flat +Renders the 3D surface as polygons. +
+ + Icon - - - -Flat - - -
+ + + +Flat + + + - -Spherical -Renders a smooth 3D surface. - - - + +Spherical +Renders a smooth 3D surface. +
+ + Icon - - - -Spherical - - -
+ + + +Spherical + + + - -Invert Normals -Inverts the light source. - - - + +Invert Normals +Inverts the light source. +
+ + Icon - - - -Invert Normals - - -
+ + + +Invert Normals + + + - -Double-sided Illumination -Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button. - - - + +Double-sided Illumination +Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button. +
+ + Icon - - - -Double-sided illumination - - -
+ + + +Double-sided illumination + + + - -Double-Sided -Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D). - - - + +Double-Sided +Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D). +
+ + Icon - - - -Double-Sided - - -
- - - - - - - + + + +Double-Sided + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp index 17201f8f91..989fa7e4fa 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Shading -/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Shading +/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-shading; 3D effects +shading; 3D effects 3D effects; shading - -Shading -Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object. -
- -Shading + +Shading +Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object. + + +Shading Specify the type of shading to apply to the selected 3D object. - + Mode -flat shading;3D -Phong shading;3D +flat shading;3D +Phong shading;3D Gouraud shading;3D - + Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power. - -Shadow -Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object. - - - + +Shadow +Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object. +
+ + Icon - - - -3D Shadowing On/Off - - -
+ + + +3D Shadowing On/Off + + + - -Surface angle -Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow. -Camera + +Surface angle +Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow. +Camera Set the camera options for the selected 3D object. - -Distance + +Distance Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object. - -Focal length -Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens. - - - - - - - + +Focal length +Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp index 264c2939dc..ba2b25480f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Illumination -/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Illumination +/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-illumination; 3D effects +illumination; 3D effects 3D effects; illumination - -Illumination -Define the light source for the selected 3D object. -
- -Illumination + +Illumination +Define the light source for the selected 3D object. + + +Illumination Specify the light source for the object, as well as the color of the light source and of the ambient light. You can define up to eight different light sources. @@ -84,56 +84,56 @@ - -Light source -Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box. You can also press the Spacebar to turn the light source on or off. - - - + +Light source +Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box. You can also press the Spacebar to turn the light source on or off. +
+ + Icon - - - -Light is on - - -
- - - - + + + +Light is on + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Light is off - - -
+ + + +Light is off + + + - -Color Selection + +Color Selection Select a color for the current light source. - -Select Color in the color dialog - - + +Select Color in the color dialog + + Ambient light - -Color Selection + +Color Selection Select a color for the ambient light. - -Select Color Through the Color Dialog - - -Preview -Displays a preview of the light source changes. - - - - - - - + +Select Color Through the Color Dialog + + +Preview +Displays a preview of the light source changes. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp index 3a81776c8a..ce02052f87 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Textures -/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Textures +/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-textures; 3D effects +textures; 3D effects 3D effects; textures - -Textures -Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface textures to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object. -
- -Textures -Sets the texture properties. -Type + +Textures +Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface textures to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+Ctrl, and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object. + + +Textures +Sets the texture properties. +Type Set the color properties of the texture. - -Black & White -Converts the texture to black and white. - - - + +Black & White +Converts the texture to black and white. +
+ + Icon - - - -Black & White - - -
+ + + +Black & White + + + - -Color -Converts the texture to color. - - - + +Color +Converts the texture to color. +
+ + Icon - - - -Color - - -
- -Mode + + + +Color + + + + +Mode Show or hide shading. - -Only Texture -Applies the texture without shading. - - - + +Only Texture +Applies the texture without shading. +
+ + Icon - - - -Only Texture - - -
+ + + +Only Texture + + + - -Texture and Shading -Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog. - - - + +Texture and Shading +Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog. +
+ + Icon - - - -Texture and Shading - - -
- -Projection X + + + +Texture and Shading + + + + +Projection X Set the options for displaying the texture. - -Object-specific -Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. - - - + +Object-specific +Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. +
+ + Icon - - - -Object-specific - - -
+ + + +Object-specific + + + - -Parallel -Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis. - - - + +Parallel +Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis. +
+ + Icon - - - -Parallel - - -
+ + + +Parallel + + + - -Circular -Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. - - - + +Circular +Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. +
+ + Icon - - - -Circular - - -
- -Projection Y + + + +Circular + + + + +Projection Y Click the respective buttons to define the texture for the object Y axis. - -Object-specific -Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. - - - + +Object-specific +Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. +
+ + Icon - - - -Object-specific - - -
+ + + +Object-specific + + + - -Parallel -Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis. - - - + +Parallel +Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis. +
+ + Icon - - - -Parallel - - -
+ + + +Parallel + + + - -Circular -Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. - - - + +Circular +Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. +
+ + Icon - - - -Circular - - -
- -Filter + + + +Circular + + + + +Filter Filters out some of the 'noise' that can occur when you apply a texture to a 3D object. - -Filtering On/Off -Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles. - - - + +Filtering On/Off +Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles. +
+ + Icon - - - -Filtering On/Off - - -
- - - - - - - + + + +Filtering On/Off + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp index d10edb5f9a..b041dedbef 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Material -/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Material +/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-3D effects; material +3D effects; material material; 3D effects - -Material -Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object. -
- -Material + +Material +Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object. + + +Material Assigns a predefined color scheme or lets you create your own color scheme. - -Favorites + +Favorites Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme. - -Object color + +Object color Select the color that you want to apply to the object. - -Select Color Through the Color Dialog - + +Select Color Through the Color Dialog + - -Illumination color + +Illumination color Select the color to illuminate the object. - -Select Color Through the Color Dialog - - -Specular + +Select Color Through the Color Dialog + + +Specular Sets the light reflection properties for the selected object. - -Color + +Color Select the color that you want the object to reflect. - -Select Color Through the Color Dialog - + +Select Color Through the Color Dialog + - -Intensity -Enter the intensity of the specular effect. - - - - - - - - + +Intensity +Enter the intensity of the specular effect. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp index b76200fbd0..1ece6c00e8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Thesaurus -/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Thesaurus +/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Thesaurus + +Thesaurus Replaces the current word with a synonym, or a related term. - -
+ + - -Thesaurus support is not available for all languages. -Variations + +Thesaurus support is not available for all languages. +Variations Lists the current word and the suggested replacement word. - -Word + +Word Displays the current selection, or the word that contains that cursor. - -Meaning + +Meaning Select the meaning that matches the context of the current word, and then select a word in the Synonym list. - -Replace + +Replace Displays a suggested replacement for the current word. You can also type a new word in this box, or click a word in the Synonym list. - -Synonym + +Synonym Lists the words associated with the category that you selected in the Meaning list. Select the word that you want to use as a replacement, and then click OK. - -Search + +Search Searches the thesaurus for the best match of the word selected in the Synonym list. - -Language + +Language Specifies the language to use for the thesaurus. - -Selection -Select the language that you want to use for the thesaurus, and then click OK. - - + +Selection +Select the language that you want to use for the thesaurus, and then click OK. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp index a9e34c4079..7ddf624aaa 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -AutoCorrect -/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +AutoCorrect +/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -AutoCorrect function; switching on and off +AutoCorrect function; switching on and off AutoFormat function; switching on and off - -AutoCorrect + +AutoCorrect Sets the options for automatically correcting errors as you type. - + @@ -81,22 +81,22 @@ - -The AutoCorrect settings are applied when you press the Spacebar after you enter a word. -To turn on or to turn off the AutoCorrect feature, in $[officename] Calc choose Tools - Cell Contents - AutoInput, and in $[officename] Writer choose Format - AutoFormat - While Typing. To apply the AutoFormat settings to an entire text document, choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply. - - - + +The AutoCorrect settings are applied when you press the Spacebar after you enter a word. +To turn on or to turn off the AutoCorrect feature, in $[officename] Calc choose Tools - Cell Contents - AutoInput, and in $[officename] Writer choose Format - AutoFormat - While Typing. To apply the AutoFormat settings to an entire text document, choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply. + + + - + - + AutoFormat - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp index 2c0d022ea7..9c0cbc3342 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Options -/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Options +/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-AutoCorrect function; options -replacement options -word replacement; automatic -words; automatically replacing -words; replacing abbreviations -abbreviation replacement -capital letters; AutoCorrect function -bold; AutoFormat function -underlining; AutoFormat function -URL; AutoCorrect function -hyperlinks; automatic recognition -links; automatic recognition -1/2 replacement -dashes; AutoCorrect function -spaces; ignoring double -automatic numbering; AutoCorrect function -numbering; using automatically -bullets; using automatically -automatic bullets -paragraphs; automatic numbering -numbering;paragraphs -tables in text; creating automatically -titles; formatting automatically -styles; using automatically -empty paragraphs; removing by AutoCorrect function -paragraphs; removing blank ones -styles; replacing automatically -user-defined styles; automatically replacing -bullets; replacing -quotation marks; replacing -typographical quotes in $[officename] Writer -paragraphs; joining +AutoCorrect function; options +replacement options +word replacement; automatic +words; automatically replacing +words; replacing abbreviations +abbreviation replacement +capital letters; AutoCorrect function +bold; AutoFormat function +underlining; AutoFormat function +URL; AutoCorrect function +hyperlinks; automatic recognition +links; automatic recognition +1/2 replacement +dashes; AutoCorrect function +spaces; ignoring double +automatic numbering; AutoCorrect function +numbering; using automatically +bullets; using automatically +automatic bullets +paragraphs; automatic numbering +numbering;paragraphs +tables in text; creating automatically +titles; formatting automatically +styles; using automatically +empty paragraphs; removing by AutoCorrect function +paragraphs; removing blank ones +styles; replacing automatically +user-defined styles; automatically replacing +bullets; replacing +quotation marks; replacing +typographical quotes in $[officename] Writer +paragraphs; joining joining; paragraphs - -Options -Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK. -
- + +Options +Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK. + + In text documents, you can choose to apply the AutoCorrect errors while you type [T], or only when you modify existing text [M] with Format - AutoFormat - Apply. - -Use replacement table -If you type a letter combination that matches a shortcut in the replacement table, the combination is replaced with the text that you specified in the AutoFormat dialog when you press F3. -Correct TWo INitial CApitals -If you type two uppercase letters at the beginning of a "WOrd", the second uppercase letter is automatically replaced with a lowercase letter. -Capitalize first letter of every sentence. -Capitalizes the first letter of every sentence. -Automatic *bold* and _underline_ -Automatically applies bold formatting to text enclosed by asterisks (*), and underling to text enclosed by underscores ( _ ), for example, *bold*. The asterisks and underscores are not displayed after the formatting is applied. -This feature does not work if the formatting characters * or _ are entered with an Input Method Editor. -URL Recognition -Automatically creates a hyperlink when you type a URL. -Replace 1/2 ... with ½ ... -Replaces 1/2, 1/4, 3/4 with the corresponding fraction characters. -Replace 1st ... with 1^st ... -Displays the text characters of ordinals, such as 1st, 2nd, or 3rd, as superscripts. + +Use replacement table +If you type a letter combination that matches a shortcut in the replacement table, the combination is replaced with the text that you specified in the AutoFormat dialog when you press F3. +Correct TWo INitial CApitals +If you type two uppercase letters at the beginning of a "WOrd", the second uppercase letter is automatically replaced with a lowercase letter. +Capitalize first letter of every sentence. +Capitalizes the first letter of every sentence. +Automatic *bold* and _underline_ +Automatically applies bold formatting to text enclosed by asterisks (*), and underling to text enclosed by underscores ( _ ), for example, *bold*. The asterisks and underscores are not displayed after the formatting is applied. +This feature does not work if the formatting characters * or _ are entered with an Input Method Editor. +URL Recognition +Automatically creates a hyperlink when you type a URL. +Replace 1/2 ... with ½ ... +Replaces 1/2, 1/4, 3/4 with the corresponding fraction characters. +Replace 1st ... with 1^st ... +Displays the text characters of ordinals, such as 1st, 2nd, or 3rd, as superscripts. -Replace Dashes +Replace Dashes -Replaces one or two hyphens preceded by and followed by a space with an en dash. If no space is added after the hyphen(s), an em dash is inserted. +Replaces one or two hyphens preceded by and followed by a space with an en dash. If no space is added after the hyphen(s), an em dash is inserted. Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph - + Removes spaces and tabs at the beginning of a paragraph. To use this option, the Apply Styles option must also be selected. - + Delete blanks and tabs at end and start of lines - + Removes spaces and tabs at the beginning of each line. To use this option, the Apply Styles option must also be selected. - -Ignore double spaces -Replaces two or more consecutive spaces with a single space. + +Ignore double spaces +Replaces two or more consecutive spaces with a single space. Apply numbering - + Automatically creates a numbered list when you press Enter at the end of a line that starts with a number followed by a period, a space, and text. If a line starts with a hyphen (-), a plus sign (+), or an asterisk (*), followed by a space, and text, a bulleted list is created when you press Enter. - + To cancel automatic numbering when you press Enter at the end of a line that starts with a numbering symbol, press Enter again. - + The automatic numbering options is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. - -Apply border -Automatically applies a border at the base of the preceding paragraph when you type three or more specific characters, and then press Enter. To create a single line, type three or more hyphens (-), or underscores ( _ ), and then press Enter. To create a double line, type three or more equal signs (=), asterisks (*), tildes (~), or hash marks (#), and then press Enter. -To delete the created line, click the paragraph above the line, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders, delete the bottom border. -The following table summarizes the line thickness for the different characters: - - - ---- - - -0.5pt single underline - - - - -___ - - -1.0pt single underline - - - - -=== - - -1.1pt double underline - - - - -*** - - -4.5pt double underline - - - - -~~~ - - -6.0pt double underline - - - - -### - - -9.0pt double underline - - -
+ +Apply border +Automatically applies a border at the base of the preceding paragraph when you type three or more specific characters, and then press Enter. To create a single line, type three or more hyphens (-), or underscores ( _ ), and then press Enter. To create a double line, type three or more equal signs (=), asterisks (*), tildes (~), or hash marks (#), and then press Enter. +To delete the created line, click the paragraph above the line, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders, delete the bottom border. +The following table summarizes the line thickness for the different characters: + + + +--- + + +0.5pt single underline + + + + +___ + + +1.0pt single underline + + + + +=== + + +1.1pt double underline + + + + +*** + + +4.5pt double underline + + + + +~~~ + + +6.0pt double underline + + + + +### + + +9.0pt double underline + + +
 - + Create table - + Creates a table when you press Enter after typing a series of hyphens (-) or tabs separated by plus signs, that is, +------+---+. Plus signs indicate column dividers, while hyphens and tabs indicate the width of a column. - + +-----------------+---------------+------+ - + Apply Styles - + Automatically replaces the "Default" paragraph style with the Heading 1 to Heading 8 paragraph styles. To apply the Heading 1 paragraph style, type the text that you want to use as a heading (without a period), and then press Enter twice. To apply a sub-heading, press Tab one or more times, type the text (without a period), and then press Enter. - + Remove blank paragraphs - + Removes empty paragraphs from the current document when you choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply. - + Replace Custom Styles - + Replaces the custom paragraph styles in the current document with the "Default", the "Text Body", or the "Text Body Indent" paragraph style. - + Replace bullets with - + Converts paragraphs that start with a hyphen (-), a plus sign (+), or an asterisk (*) directly followed by a space or a tab, to bulleted lists. This option only works on paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text Body", or "Text Body Indent" paragraph styles. To change the bullet style that is used, select this option, and then click Edit. - + Replace standard quotes with custom quotes - + Changes quotation marks in the text to the quotation marks that you specify in the Custom Quotes tab of this dialog. - + Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than ... - + Combines consecutive single-line paragraphs into a single paragraph. This option only works on paragraphs that use the "Default" paragraph style. If a paragraph is longer than the specified length value, the paragraph is combined with the next paragraph. To enter a different length value, select the option, and then click Edit. - + Edit - + Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp index 9d403fc399..40b7820b45 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Replace -/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Replace +/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-AutoCorrect function; replacement table -replacement table; AutoCorrect function -replacing; AutoCorrect function -text; replacing with format -frames; AutoCorrect function -graphics; AutoCorrect function -graphics; inserting automatically +AutoCorrect function; replacement table +replacement table; AutoCorrect function +replacing; AutoCorrect function +text; replacing with format +frames; AutoCorrect function +graphics; AutoCorrect function +graphics; inserting automatically AutoCorrect function; graphics and frames - -Replace -Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document. -
+ +Replace +Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document. + To enable the replacement table, choose Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat, click the Options tab, and then select Use replacement table. To use the replacement table while you type, choose Format - AutoFormat - While Typing. - - + + - -Replacement table -Lists the entries for automatically replacing words or abbreviations while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete. -You can use the AutoCorrect feature to apply a specific character format to a word or abbreviation. Select the formatted text in your document, open this dialog, clear the Text only box, and then enter the text that you want to replace in the Replace box. + +Replacement table +Lists the entries for automatically replacing words or abbreviations while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete. +You can use the AutoCorrect feature to apply a specific character format to a word or abbreviation. Select the formatted text in your document, open this dialog, clear the Text only box, and then enter the text that you want to replace in the Replace box. You can also include frames, graphics, and OLE objects in an AutoCorrect entry, so long as they are anchored as characters in the text. Select the frame, graphic or OLE object and at least one text character in front of and behind the object. Open this dialog, type a name for this AutoCorrect entry in the Replace box, and then click New. - -Replace + +Replace Enter the word or abbreviation that you want to replace while you type. - -With: + +With: Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here. - -Text only + +Text only Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text. - -New + +New Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp index c8ffa07463..fb0b9057d4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Options -/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Options +/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-numbering;options -bullet lists;options +numbering;options +bullet lists;options font sizes;bullets - -Options -Sets the formatting options for numbered or bulleted lists. If you want, you can apply formatting to individual levels in the list hierarchy. -
- -Format + +Options +Sets the formatting options for numbered or bulleted lists. If you want, you can apply formatting to individual levels in the list hierarchy. + + +Format Select the level(s) that you want to modify, and then specify the formatting that you want to use. - -Level + +Level Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for. The selected level is highlighted in the preview. - -Numbering -Select a numbering style for the selected levels. - - - -Selection - - -Description - - - - -1, 2, 3, ... - - -Arabic numerals - - - - -A, B, C, ... - - -Capital letters - - - - -a, b, c, ... - - -Lowercase letters - - - - -I, II, III, ... - - -Roman numerals (uppercase) - - - - -i, ii, iii, ... - - -Roman numerals (lowercase) - - - - -A,... AA,... AAA,... - - -Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters - - - - -a,... aa,... aaa,... - - -Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters - - - - -Bullet - - -Adds a bullet to the beginning of a line. Select this option, and then click the Character button to choose a bullet style. + +Numbering +Select a numbering style for the selected levels. +
+ + +Selection + + +Description + + + + +1, 2, 3, ... + + +Arabic numerals + + + + +A, B, C, ... + + +Capital letters + + + + +a, b, c, ... + + +Lowercase letters + + + + +I, II, III, ... + + +Roman numerals (uppercase) + + + + +i, ii, iii, ... + + +Roman numerals (lowercase) + + + + +A,... AA,... AAA,... + + +Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters + + + + +a,... aa,... aaa,... + + +Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters + + + + +Bullet + + +Adds a bullet to the beginning of a line. Select this option, and then click the Character button to choose a bullet style. Bullets are resized to fit the current line height. If you want, you can define a Character Style that uses a different font size for bullets. - - - - - -Graphics - - -Displays an image for the bullet. Select this options, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. - - - - -Linked graphics - - -Links the image to the current file. To embed the image in the current file, clear this checkbox. - - - - -None - - -Does not apply a numbering style. - - -
- + + + + + +Graphics + + +Displays an image for the bullet. Select this options, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. + + + + +Linked graphics + + +Links the image to the current file. To embed the image in the current file, clear this checkbox. + + + + +None + + +Does not apply a numbering style. + + + + The availability of the following fields depends on the style that you select in the Numbering box. - -Before + +Before Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list. - -After + +After Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create a numbered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box. - + Character Styles - + Select the Character Style that you want to use in the numbered list. To create or edit a Character Style, open the Stylist, click the Character, right-click a style, and then choose New. - + Show sublevels - + Enter the number of previous levels to include in the numbering style. For example, if you enter "2" and the previous level uses the "A, B, C..." numbering style, the numbering scheme for the current level becomes: "A.1". - -Start at + +Start at Enter a new starting number for the current level. - + Color Color - + @@ -222,12 +222,12 @@ Select a color for the current numbering style. - + Relative size Relative size - + @@ -235,37 +235,37 @@ Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph. - -Character -Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol. + +Character +Opens the Special Characters dialog, where you can select a bullet symbol. Options for graphics: - -Select... + +Select... Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet. - -Width + +Width Enter a width for the graphic. - -Height + +Height Enter a height for the graphic. - -Keep ratio + +Keep ratio Maintains the size proportions of the graphic. - -Alignment -Select the alignment option for the graphic. + +Alignment +Select the alignment option for the graphic. All levels - + Set the numbering options for all of the levels. - + Consecutive numbering - + Increases the numbering by one as you go down each level in the list hierarchy. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp index 3db4331211..54bb840eef 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Position -/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Position -Sets the indent, spacing, and alignment options for the numbered or bulleted list. -
do we have a how-to for numbering/bullets/outlines with/without styles? seems we really need one + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Position +/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Position +Sets the indent, spacing, and alignment options for the numbered or bulleted list. +
do we have a how-to for numbering/bullets/outlines with/without styles? seems we really need one - -Level -Select the level(s) that you want to modify. + +Level +Select the level(s) that you want to modify. Position and spacing - -Indent + +Indent Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin edge of the text object and the left edge of the numbering symbol. If the current paragraph style uses an indent, the amount you enter here is added to the indent. - -Relative + +Relative Indents the current level relative to the previous level in the list hierarchy. - -Space to text + +Space to text Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text.UFI: fixed #i31282# - + Minimum space numbering <-> text - + Enter the minimum amount of space to leave between the right edge of the numbering symbol and the left edge of the text. - -Numbering alignment -Set the alignment of the numbering symbols in the list. You cannot change the alignment if the values in the Spacing to text and the Minimum space numbering <-> boxes are the same, or too close together. + +Numbering alignment +Set the alignment of the numbering symbols in the list. You cannot change the alignment if the values in the Spacing to text and the Minimum space numbering <-> boxes are the same, or too close together. The Numbering alignment option does not set the alignment of the paragraph. - -Default -Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values. - - -Paragraph alignment - - + +Default +Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values. + + +Paragraph alignment + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp index 2398d41027..68ed22de8b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Macro -/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: added framework.features "Macro Selector & Script Organizer specs implemented"; dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Macro +/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: added framework.features "Macro Selector & Script Organizer specs implemented"; dedr: reviewed + + - -Macro + +Macro Opens a dialog where you can select a macro to run. - - + + - -Macro name + +Macro name Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here. - + Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list. - -Macro from / Save macro in + +Macro from / Save macro in Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog. - -Run / Saveunfortunately both have the same Help ID + +Run / Saveunfortunately both have the same Help ID Runs or saves the current macro. - -Assign + +Assign Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a shortcut key combination, or an event. - -Edit + +Edit Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. - -New / Delete -Creates a new module or macro, or deletes the selected macro. -To create a new macro, select the "Standard" module in the Macro from list, and then click New. You can also create a new module, select it in the Macro from list, and then click New. + +New / Delete +Creates a new module or macro, or deletes the selected macro. +To create a new macro, select the "Standard" module in the Macro from list, and then click New. You can also create a new module, select it in the Macro from list, and then click New. To delete a macro, select it, and then click Delete. - -New Library + +New Library Saves the recorded macro in a new library. - -New Module + +New Module Saves the recorded macro in a new module. - -Organizer -Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries. -Module/Dialog tab page + +Organizer +Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries. +Module/Dialog tab page Lets you manage modules or dialog boxes. - -Module/Dialog + +Module/Dialog Lists the existing macros and dialogs for the current application and any open documents. - -Edit -Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. + +Edit +Opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. - -New Module + +New Module Opens the editor and creates a new module. - -New Dialog + +New Dialog Opens the editor and creates a new dialog. - -Libraries tab page + +Libraries tab page Lets you manage the macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. - -Location + +Location Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize. - -Library + +Library Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. - -Edit -Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library. + +Edit +Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library. - -Password + +Password Assigns or edits the password for the selected library. - -New + +New Creates a new library. - -Name + +Name Enter a name for the new library or module. - -Append + +Append Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. - + - -To open the BeanShell Macros dialog box, choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - BeanShell. To open the the JavaScript dialog box, choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - JavaScript. -UFI: Help-ID double, see #i29782# -Macros + +To open the BeanShell Macros dialog box, choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - BeanShell. To open the the JavaScript dialog box, choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - JavaScript. +UFI: Help-ID double, see #i29782# +Macros Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry. - -Run + +Run To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run. - -Create + +Create Creates a new script. The default script editor opens after you enter a name for the script. - + Enter a name for the script.UFI: called from Create and from Rename - -Edit + +Edit Opens the default script editor for your operating system. - -Rename + +Rename Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script. - -Delete -Prompts you to delete the selected script. -The Macro Selector dialog contains two list boxes, namely the Library list box and the Macro name list box. -UFI: Help-ID double, see #i29782# -Library -Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the contents of a library, double-click an entry in the list. -UFI: Help-ID double, see #i29782# -Macro name -Click a script, and then click a command button. - -Macro programming in $[officename] - - - - - + +Delete +Prompts you to delete the selected script. +The Macro Selector dialog contains two list boxes, namely the Library list box and the Macro name list box. +UFI: Help-ID double, see #i29782# +Library +Select a macro or script from "user", "share", or an open document. To view the contents of a library, double-click an entry in the list. +UFI: Help-ID double, see #i29782# +Macro name +Click a script, and then click a command button. + +Macro programming in $[officename] + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp index c47f178280..453ca161e4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Macros -/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Macros -Lets you record or organize and edit macros. -
- -Run Macro - - -Organize Dialogs -Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Macros +/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Macros +Lets you record or organize and edit macros. +
+ +Run Macro + + +Organize Dialogs +Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp index 4b2c34dbe8..974ff49e23 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Menu -/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: changes due to Customize Menu spec doc - Help IDs still missing -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Menu +/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: changes due to Customize Menu spec doc - Help IDs still missing +dedr: reviewed + + + -You can add new commands, alter existing commands, or rearrange the menu items. + +Menu +Customizes and saves current menu layouts, or creates new menus. You cannot customize context menus. + +You can add new commands, alter existing commands, or rearrange the menu items. - -Menu + +Menu Select the menu and submenu that you want to edit. - -New + +New Opens the New Menu dialog where you can enter the name of a new menu as well as select the location for the menu. - -Menu -The Menu button opens a submenu with additional commands. - - -Move -Opens the Move Menu dialog where you can specify the location of the selected menu. - - -Rename -Opens the Rename dialog where you can change the name of the selected menu. - - -New name -Enter the new name for the selected menu. -To specify the keyboard accelerator for a menu -A keyboard accelerator allows you to select a menu command when you press Alt+ an underlined letter in a menu command. For example, to select the Save All command by pressing Alt+V, enter Sa~ve All. - - -Select a menu or menu entry. - - -Click the Menu button and select Rename. - - -Add a tilde (~) in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator. Currently you cannot rename or delete any top-level menu entries. This is a bug - - -Delete -Deletes the selected menu or menu entry. + +Menu +The Menu button opens a submenu with additional commands. + + +Move +Opens the Move Menu dialog where you can specify the location of the selected menu. + + +Rename +Opens the Rename dialog where you can change the name of the selected menu. + + +New name +Enter the new name for the selected menu. +To specify the keyboard accelerator for a menu +A keyboard accelerator allows you to select a menu command when you press Alt+ an underlined letter in a menu command. For example, to select the Save All command by pressing Alt+V, enter Sa~ve All. + + +Select a menu or menu entry. + + +Click the Menu button and select Rename. + + +Add a tilde (~) in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator. Currently you cannot rename or delete any top-level menu entries. This is a bug + + +Delete +Deletes the selected menu or menu entry. You can only delete custom menus and custom menu entries. - -Entries -Displays a list of the available menu commands for the selected menu in the current application or document. -
+ +Entries +Displays a list of the available menu commands for the selected menu in the current application or document. +
To rearrange the order of menu entries, select an entry, and then click the up or down arrow button. - -Arrow Up -Moves the selected item up one position. - - - + +Arrow Up +Moves the selected item up one position. +
+ + Icon - - - -Arrow Up - - -
+ + + +Arrow Up + + + - -Arrow Down -Moves the selected item down one position. - - - + +Arrow Down +Moves the selected item down one position. +
+ + Icon - - - -Arrow Down - - -
- + + + +Arrow Down + + + +
- -Add Commands + +Add Commands Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select the command that you want to add to the menu, and then click Add. You can also drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog box. - -Command -Opens a menu that contains additional commands. - - -Add Submenu -Opens the Add Submenu dialog, where you enter the name of a submenu. - - -Begin Group -Inserts a separator line under the current menu entry. - - -Rename -Opens the Rename dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected command. -New name -Enter the new name for the selected command. - - -To specify the keyboard accelerator for a menuUFI: why is this now twice in this file? -A keyboard accelerator allows you to select a menu command when you press Alt+ an underlined letter in a menu command. For example, to select the Save All command by pressing Alt+V, enter Sa~ve All. - - -Select a menu or menu entry. - - -Click the Menu button and select Rename. - - -Add a tilde (~) in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator. - - -Delete + +Command +Opens a menu that contains additional commands. + + +Add Submenu +Opens the Add Submenu dialog, where you enter the name of a submenu. + + +Begin Group +Inserts a separator line under the current menu entry. + + +Rename +Opens the Rename dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected command. +New name +Enter the new name for the selected command. + + +To specify the keyboard accelerator for a menuUFI: why is this now twice in this file? +A keyboard accelerator allows you to select a menu command when you press Alt+ an underlined letter in a menu command. For example, to select the Save All command by pressing Alt+V, enter Sa~ve All. + + +Select a menu or menu entry. + + +Click the Menu button and select Rename. + + +Add a tilde (~) in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator. + + +Delete Deletes the selected command. - -Save In -UFI: Load and Save did not make it into SO8. There seems to be no work-around!!! -Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu. A separate menu configuration is saved for the item that you select. -To edit a menu configuration that is associated with an item in the list, select the item, make the changes that you want, and then click the OK button. -You cannot load a menu configuration from one location and save the configuration to another location. -UFI: test if this link still has valid info - + +Save In +UFI: Load and Save did not make it into SO8. There seems to be no work-around!!! +Select the application or open document where you want to add the menu. A separate menu configuration is saved for the item that you select. +To edit a menu configuration that is associated with an item in the list, select the item, make the changes that you want, and then click the OK button. +You cannot load a menu configuration from one location and save the configuration to another location. +UFI: test if this link still has valid info + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp index 77d99556a3..e913776c99 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Move Menu -text/shared/01/06140102.xhp - - -UFI: Move Menu dialog from Customize dialog -dedr: reviewed - - - -Move Menu - -Menu position -Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click the arrow buttons. - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Move Menu +text/shared/01/06140102.xhp + + +UFI: Move Menu dialog from Customize dialog +dedr: reviewed + + + +Move Menu + +Menu position +Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click the arrow buttons. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp index 3205c5a37f..07926249ba 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Keyboard -/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: spec doc "Assign Keyboard Shortcuts to Styles" -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Keyboard +/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: spec doc "Assign Keyboard Shortcuts to Styles" +dedr: reviewed + + +
-keyboard;customizing -customizing;keyboard -modifying;keyboard -changing;keyboard -editing;shortcut keys -keyboard;Styles shortcuts +keyboard;customizing +customizing;keyboard +modifying;keyboard +changing;keyboard +editing;shortcut keys +keyboard;Styles shortcuts Styles;keyboard shortcuts - -Keyboard -Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros. -
- -You can assign or edit shortcut keys for the current application or for all $[officename] applications. -
-Avoid assigning shortcut keys that are currently used by your operating system. + +Keyboard +Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros.
- -$[officename] + +You can assign or edit shortcut keys for the current application or for all $[officename] applications. +
+Avoid assigning shortcut keys that are currently used by your operating system. +
+ +$[officename] Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications. - + Writer Calc Impress Draw Math - + Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application. - -Shortcut keys -Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify. -Functions + +Shortcut keys +Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. To assign or modify the shortcut key for the command selected in the Function list, click a shortcut in this list, and then click Modify. +Functions Lists the function categories and the $[officename] functions that you can assign shortcut keys to. - -Category + +Category Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category. - -Function + +Function Select a function that you want to assign a shortcut key to, click a key combination in the Shortcut keys list, and then click Modify. If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list. - -Keys + +Keys Displays the shortcut keys that are assigned to the selected function. - -Modify + +Modify Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list. - -Load + +Load Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved. - -Save -Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later. + +Save +Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp index 8a3f9fd424..f7178e5a87 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Toolbars -/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30857# - - - -
-ToolbarsUFI: the tab page has the same Help IDs as the Menu tab page!!! -Lets you customize $[officename] toolbars. -
- -UFI: test if still valid -Toolbar -Select the toolbar you want to edit. -New -Opens the Name dialog, where you enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar. -Toolbar -The Toolbar button opens a submenu with the following commands: -Rename -Opens the Name dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected toolbar. -New name -Enter the new name for the selected toolbar. -Delete -Deletes the selected toolbar after you agree to the question. You can only delete custom toolbars, not the built-in toolbars. -Restore Default Settings -Restores the default settings. UFI: ask if for all or the current toolbar -Icons only -Shows icons only. -Text only -Shows text only. -Icons & Text -Shows icons and text. -Commands -Displays a list of commands for the selected toolbar of the current application or document. -Add Commands -Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog. -Command -The Command button opens a submenu with the following commands: -Rename -Opens the Rename dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected command. -New name -Enter the new name for the selected command. -Delete -Deletes the selected command after you agree to the question. -Restore Default Settings -Restores the default settings. UFI: ask if for all or the current toolbar -Begin a Group -Inserts a separator line under the current toolbar entry. -Change Icon -Opens the Change Icon dialog, where you can assign a different icon to the current command. -Reset Icon -Resets the icon to the default icon. -Save In -UFI: Load and Save did not make it into SO8. There seems to be no work-around!!! -Select the location where to load the configuration and where to save it. -For every entry in the list box, an own configuration is maintained. Select one of the open documents or select the application to load and edit the associated configuration. Edit the configuration and save it back to the location from where you loaded it. Editing the configuration in one location does not change the configuration in any other location. -It is not possible to load a configuration from one location and save it to another location. -UFI: test if still valid - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Toolbars +/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30857# + + + +
+ToolbarsUFI: the tab page has the same Help IDs as the Menu tab page!!! +Lets you customize $[officename] toolbars. +
+ +UFI: test if still valid +Toolbar +Select the toolbar you want to edit. +New +Opens the Name dialog, where you enter the name of a new toolbar and select the location of the new toolbar. +Toolbar +The Toolbar button opens a submenu with the following commands: +Rename +Opens the Name dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected toolbar. +New name +Enter the new name for the selected toolbar. +Delete +Deletes the selected toolbar after you agree to the question. You can only delete custom toolbars, not the built-in toolbars. +Restore Default Settings +Restores the default settings. UFI: ask if for all or the current toolbar +Icons only +Shows icons only. +Text only +Shows text only. +Icons & Text +Shows icons and text. +Commands +Displays a list of commands for the selected toolbar of the current application or document. +Add Commands +Opens the Add Commands dialog. Select any command, then click Add or drag-and-drop the command into the Customize dialog. +Command +The Command button opens a submenu with the following commands: +Rename +Opens the Rename dialog, where you enter a new name for the selected command. +New name +Enter the new name for the selected command. +Delete +Deletes the selected command after you agree to the question. +Restore Default Settings +Restores the default settings. UFI: ask if for all or the current toolbar +Begin a Group +Inserts a separator line under the current toolbar entry. +Change Icon +Opens the Change Icon dialog, where you can assign a different icon to the current command. +Reset Icon +Resets the icon to the default icon. +Save In +UFI: Load and Save did not make it into SO8. There seems to be no work-around!!! +Select the location where to load the configuration and where to save it. +For every entry in the list box, an own configuration is maintained. Select one of the open documents or select the application to load and edit the associated configuration. Edit the configuration and save it back to the location from where you loaded it. Editing the configuration in one location does not change the configuration in any other location. +It is not possible to load a configuration from one location and save it to another location. +UFI: test if still valid + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp index 777889b5fd..526d5f904c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Change Icon -text/shared/01/06140402.xhp - - -UFI: new Change Icon dialog from Customize dialog -dedr: reviewed - - - -Change Icon -Buttons -Displays the available icons in %PRODUCTNAME. To replace the icon that you selected in the Customize dialog, click an icon, then click the OK button. -Import -Adds new icons to the list of icons.UFI: multiselection is possible; but I dont have any 16x16 pixel png for testing -You can only import icons that are in the PNG file format and that are 16x16 pixels in size.UFI: ask what else; what about large icons? - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Change Icon +text/shared/01/06140402.xhp + + +UFI: new Change Icon dialog from Customize dialog +dedr: reviewed + + + +Change Icon +Buttons +Displays the available icons in %PRODUCTNAME. To replace the icon that you selected in the Customize dialog, click an icon, then click the OK button. +Import +Adds new icons to the list of icons.UFI: multiselection is possible; but I dont have any 16x16 pixel png for testing +You can only import icons that are in the PNG file format and that are 16x16 pixels in size.UFI: ask what else; what about large icons? + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp index 2541023c01..5455102b75 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Events -/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Events +/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-customizing; events +customizing; events events; customizing - -Events -Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs. -
+ +Events +Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs. +
- -Save In -Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME. + +Save In +Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME. A macro that is saved with a document can only be run when that document is opened. - + The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro. - -Assign Macro + +Assign Macro Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event. - -Remove Macro -Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event. - -List of events - - + +Remove Macro +Deletes the macro assignment for the selected event. + +List of events + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp index c6a49ec19c..a8aaaf4f91 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -XML Filter Settings -/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: added sw-features "HTML export provide valid XHTML 1.0 Strict output" DEDR: reviewed -dedr: fixed #i30856# - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +XML Filter Settings +/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: added sw-features "HTML export provide valid XHTML 1.0 Strict output" DEDR: reviewed +dedr: fixed #i30856# + + + +
-filters; XML filter settings -XML filters; settings +filters; XML filter settings +XML filters; settings XSLT based filters; settings - -XML Filter Settings -Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files. -
- - - - -Some filters are only available as optional components during the %PRODUCTNAME installation. To install an optional filter, run the %PRODUCTNAME Setup application, select "Modify", and then select the filter that you want in the list of modules.UFI: is this still possible for all systems? -The term XML filter is used in the following as a shortcut for the more exact description as an XSLT based filter. - - - -Term - - -Description - - - - -XML - - -Extensible Markup Language - - - - -XSL - - -Extensible Stylesheet Language - - - - -XSLT - - -Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation. XSLT files are also called XSLT stylesheets. - - -
- + +XML Filter Settings +Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files. + + + + + +Some filters are only available as optional components during the %PRODUCTNAME installation. To install an optional filter, run the %PRODUCTNAME Setup application, select "Modify", and then select the filter that you want in the list of modules.UFI: is this still possible for all systems? +The term XML filter is used in the following as a shortcut for the more exact description as an XSLT based filter. + + + +Term + + +Description + + + + +XML + + +Extensible Markup Language + + + + +XSL + + +Extensible Stylesheet Language + + + + +XSLT + + +Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation. XSLT files are also called XSLT stylesheets. + + +
+ The XHTML export filter produces valid "XHTML 1.0 Strict" output for Writer, Calc, Draw, and Impress documents. - -Filter list -Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons. -Some filters are only available as optional components during the %PRODUCTNAME installation. To install an optional filter, run the %PRODUCTNAME Setup application, select "Modify", and then select the filter that you want in the list of modules. -The lists shows the name and the type of the installed filters. - - -Click a filter to select it. - - -Shift-click or Ctrl-click to select several filters. - - -Double-click a name to edit the filter. - + +Filter list +Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons. +Some filters are only available as optional components during the %PRODUCTNAME installation. To install an optional filter, run the %PRODUCTNAME Setup application, select "Modify", and then select the filter that you want in the list of modules. +The lists shows the name and the type of the installed filters. + + +Click a filter to select it. + + +Shift-click or Ctrl-click to select several filters. + + +Double-click a name to edit the filter. + - -New + +New Opens the dialog with the name of a new filter. - -Edit + +Edit Opens the dialog with the name of the selected file. - -Test XSLTs + +Test XSLTs Opens the dialog with the name of the selected file. - -Delete + +Delete Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows. - -Save as Package + +Save as Package Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar). - -Open Package + +Open Package Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar). - -Help + +Help Displays the help page for this dialog. - -Close -Closes the dialog. - - - - + +Close +Closes the dialog. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp index 93c72ac315..131b78bb75 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Hangul/Hanja Conversion -/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: Added Options button; DEDR: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Hangul/Hanja Conversion +/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: Added Options button; DEDR: reviewed + + +
-converting;Hangul/Hanja +converting;Hangul/Hanja Hangul/Hanja - -Hangul/Hanja Conversion -Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul. The menu command can only be called if you enable Asian language support under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and if a text formatted in Korean language is selected. -
+ +Hangul/Hanja Conversion +Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul. The menu command can only be called if you enable Asian language support under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and if a text formatted in Korean language is selected. + - -Original + +Original Displays the current selection. - -Replace withname according to spec, current implementation displays "Word" here + +Replace withname according to spec, current implementation displays "Word" here Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary. You can edit the suggested word or enter another word. Click the Find button to replace your original word with the corresponding replacement word. - -Find + +Find Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja. Click Ignore to cancel the find function. - -Suggestions -Displays all available replacements in the dictionary. If the Replace by character box is enabled, you see a grid of characters. If the Replace by character box is not checked, you see a list of words. -Format + +Suggestions +Displays all available replacements in the dictionary. If the Replace by character box is enabled, you see a grid of characters. If the Replace by character box is not checked, you see a list of words. +Format Click the format to display the replacements. - -Hangul/Hanja + +Hangul/Hanja The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters. - -Hanja (Hangul) + +Hanja (Hangul) The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part. - -Hangul (Hanja) + +Hangul (Hanja) The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part. - -Hanja as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources + +Hanja as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part. - -Hanja as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources + +Hanja as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part. - -Hangul as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources + +Hangul as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part. - -Hangul as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources -The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part. -Conversion + +Hangul as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part. +Conversion Normally in a mixed text selection made of Hangul and Hanja characters, all Hangul characters will be converted to Hanja and all Hanja characters will be converted to Hangul. If you want to convert a mixed text selection only in one direction, use the following conversion options. - -Hangul only + +Hangul only Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja. - -Hanja only + +Hanja only Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul. - -Ignore + +Ignore No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. - -Always Ignore + +Always Ignore No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. The list of ignored text is valid for the current $[officename] session. - -Replace + +Replace Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. - -Always Replace + +Always Replace Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. The list of replacement text is valid for the current $[officename] session. - -Replace by character + +Replace by character Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced. - -Options + +Options Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog. - -Close -Closes the dialog. - - + +Close +Closes the dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp index c1595054fd..43c78a8b5a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Hangul/Hanja Options -text/shared/01/06201000.xhp - - -UFI: new Hangul/Hanja Options dialog -DEDR: Reviewed - - - -Hangul/Hanja Options + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Hangul/Hanja Options +text/shared/01/06201000.xhp + + +UFI: new Hangul/Hanja Options dialog +DEDR: Reviewed + + + +Hangul/Hanja Options Define options for the Hangul/Hanja conversion. - -User-defined dictionaries + +User-defined dictionaries Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use. - -New + +New Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary. - -Name + +Name Enter a name for the dictionary. To display the new dictionary in the User-defined dictionaries list box, click OK. - -Edit + +Edit Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary. - -Delete -Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary. -Options + +Delete +Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary. +Options Specifies additional options for all dictionaries. - -Ignore post-positional word + +Ignore post-positional word Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary. - -Close Conversion dialog automatically after replacement + +Close Conversion dialog automatically after replacement Closes the Hangul/Hanja Conversion dialog box after you click Ignore, Always Ignore, Replace, or Always Replace. - -Show entries recently used first + +Show entries recently used first Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list. - -Replace all unique entries automatically -Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement. - - + +Replace all unique entries automatically +Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp index da6eee88e6..cae3db3603 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Edit Custom Dictionary -text/shared/01/06202000.xhp - - -UFI: new Edit Hangul/Hanja Custom Dictionary dialog -dedr: reviewed - - - -Edit Custom Dictionary + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Edit Custom Dictionary +text/shared/01/06202000.xhp + + +UFI: new Edit Hangul/Hanja Custom Dictionary dialog +dedr: reviewed + + + +Edit Custom Dictionary Add and delete entries that are used for the Hangul/Hanja Conversion. - -Book + +Book Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit. - -Original + +Original Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box. To move from the Original box to the the first text box in the Suggestions area, press Enter. - -Replace by character + +Replace by character Converts the text on a character by character basis and not on a word by word basis. - -Suggestions (max. 8) + +Suggestions (max. 8) Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacment word can contain a maximum of eight characters. - -New + +New Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary. - -Delete -Deletes the selected entry. - - + +Delete +Deletes the selected entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp index 3cb78705cd..6699925596 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -New Window -/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +New Window +/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-new windows +new windows windows;new - -New Window -Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window. You can now view different parts of the same document at the same time. -
- -Changes made to a document in one window are automatically applied to all of the windows that are open for that document. - - + +New Window +Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window. You can now view different parts of the same document at the same time. + + +Changes made to a document in one window are automatically applied to all of the windows that are open for that document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp index 0b521836f5..dbf13dba9a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Media Player -text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp - - -UFI: Media Player from Tools menu -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Media Player -Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document. -
- + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Media Player +text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp + + +UFI: Media Player from Tools menu +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Media Player +Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document. +
+ The Media Player is a Java-based player that support many different media formats. You can also insert media files from the Media Player into your document.UFI: add a list of keyboard shortcuts to /04/ file when available - + On UNIX systems, the Media Player requires the Java Media Framework API (JMF). - -Open -Opens a movie file or a sound file that you want to preview. -Insert -Inserts the current movie file or sound file as a media object into the current document. -Only a link to the media file is inserted into the current document. -Play -Plays the current file. -Pause -Pauses or resumes the playback of the current file. -Stop -Stops the playback of the current file. -Repeat -Plays the file repeatedly. -Mute -Turns sound off and on. -Volume slider -Adjusts the volume. -Zoom -Adjusts the size of the movie playback. -Position slider -Moves to a different position in the file. -
- -
- - + +Open +Opens a movie file or a sound file that you want to preview. +Insert +Inserts the current movie file or sound file as a media object into the current document. +Only a link to the media file is inserted into the current document. +Play +Plays the current file. +Pause +Pauses or resumes the playback of the current file. +Stop +Stops the playback of the current file. +Repeat +Plays the file repeatedly. +Mute +Turns sound off and on. +Volume slider +Adjusts the volume. +Zoom +Adjusts the size of the movie playback. +Position slider +Moves to a different position in the file. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp index 60fa2ae5da..2921f7ab76 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Movie and Sound -text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp - - -UFI: Media Player -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Movie and Sound -Inserts a video or sound file into your document. -
- -To insert a movie or sound file into your document - - -Click where you want to insert the file. - - -Choose Insert - Movie and Sound. - - -In the File Open dialog, select the file that you want to insert. -The file types that are listed in this dialog are not supported by all operating systems. - - -Click Open. - - -To play a movie or sound file in an Impress presentation - - -Open the slide that contains the movie or sound file. - - -Click the object icon for the movie or sound file on the slide. - - -If you want, you can specify that the playback starts automatically when you switch to the slide.UFI: how? -To play a movie or sound file in a Writer, Calc, or Draw document - - -Open the document that contains the movie or sound file. - - -On the Media Object Bar, click Play. - - -You can also use the Media Object Bar to pause, to stop, to loop, as well as to adjust the volume or to mute the playback of the file. The current playback position in the file is indicated on the left slider. Use the right slider to adjust the playback volume. For movie files, the bar also contains a list box where you can select the zoom factor for the playback. -
- -
- - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Movie and Sound +text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp + + +UFI: Media Player +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Movie and Sound +Inserts a video or sound file into your document. +
+ +To insert a movie or sound file into your document + + +Click where you want to insert the file. + + +Choose Insert - Movie and Sound. + + +In the File Open dialog, select the file that you want to insert. +The file types that are listed in this dialog are not supported by all operating systems. + + +Click Open. + + +To play a movie or sound file in an Impress presentation + + +Open the slide that contains the movie or sound file. + + +Click the object icon for the movie or sound file on the slide. + + +If you want, you can specify that the playback starts automatically when you switch to the slide.UFI: how? +To play a movie or sound file in a Writer, Calc, or Draw document + + +Open the document that contains the movie or sound file. + + +On the Media Object Bar, click Play. + + +You can also use the Media Object Bar to pause, to stop, to loop, as well as to adjust the volume or to mute the playback of the file. The current playback position in the file is indicated on the left slider. Use the right slider to adjust the playback volume. For movie files, the bar also contains a list box where you can select the zoom factor for the playback. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp index ff2921ced9..306967c188 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Package Manager -text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp - - -UFI: new in Tools menu -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Package Manager +text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp + + +UFI: new in Tools menu +dedr: reviewed + + +
-UNO components; package manager -extensions;packages +UNO components; package manager +extensions;packages package manager - -Package Manager -The Package Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and exports %PRODUCTNAME extensions (packages). -
- -The following are examples of %PRODUCTNAME packages: - - -UNO components (compiled software modules) - - -Configuration data (for menu commands) - - -%PRODUCTNAME Basic libraries - - -%PRODUCTNAME dialog libraries - - -Package bundles (*.zip files containing one or more packages) - - -The following examples list objects not to be used as packages: XSLT filter files, language modules, palettes. -The availability of a package depends on the location where you add the package. - - -Packages that you add to "%PRODUCTNAME Packages" are available to all users. -You need administrator rights to manage shared installation packages. - - -Packages that you add to "My Packages" can only be used and managed by yourself.UFI: the spec has also packages in documents, but most possibly they are not in SO8, as DB told me - + +Package Manager +The Package Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and exports %PRODUCTNAME extensions (packages). + + +The following are examples of %PRODUCTNAME packages: + + +UNO components (compiled software modules) + + +Configuration data (for menu commands) + + +%PRODUCTNAME Basic libraries + + +%PRODUCTNAME dialog libraries + + +Package bundles (*.zip files containing one or more packages) + - -Browse packages +The following examples list objects not to be used as packages: XSLT filter files, language modules, palettes. +The availability of a package depends on the location where you add the package. + + +Packages that you add to "%PRODUCTNAME Packages" are available to all users. +You need administrator rights to manage shared installation packages. + + +Packages that you add to "My Packages" can only be used and managed by yourself.UFI: the spec has also packages in documents, but most possibly they are not in SO8, as DB told me + + + +Browse packages Select the directory where you want to add a new package, or select the package that you want to remove, enable, disable, or export. To select multiple packages, press the Ctrl key when you click. - -Add -Select a top-level node in the list box, and then click Add to add new packages to that location. + +Add +Select a top-level node in the list box, and then click Add to add new packages to that location. A file dialog opens where you can select the packages that you want to add. To copy and to register the selected packages, click Open. - -Remove + +Remove Select the packages that you want to remove, and then click Remove. - -Enable + +Enable Select the packages that you want to enable, and then click Enable. - -Disable + +Disable Select the packages that you want to disable, and then click Disable. - -Export -Select the packages that you want to export, and then click Export. When you export a single package, a dialog opens where you can specify the path and the file name for the exported package. If you export more than one package, a dialog opens where you can select the folder where you want to save the exported packages. - - + +Export +Select the packages that you want to export, and then click Export. When you export a single package, a dialog opens where you can specify the path and the file name for the exported package. If you export more than one package, a dialog opens where you can select the folder where you want to save the exported packages. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp index cec9203e28..89e65b0b31 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Special properties of a formatted field -/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Special properties of a formatted field +/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -formatted fields; properties -fields; formatted fields +formatted fields; properties +fields; formatted fields controls; formatted field - -Special properties of a formatted field - -Formatting: You can set the Formatting property by clicking the ... button in the Formatting line of the Properties: Formatted Field dialog. The Number Format dialog appears. -If the formatted field is connected to the text field of a database, the entries in this field will be treated as text. If the formatted field is connected to a field of the database that can be displayed as a number, the input is treated as numbers. The date and time are also handled internally as numbers. - -Min. value and Max. value: You can enter the minimum and maximum numeric value for a formatted field. The min and max values determine the output of existing data (Example: Min. value is 5, the connected database field contains the integer value 3. The output is 5, but the value in the database is not modified) and the input of new data (Example: Max. value is 10 and you enter 20. The input is corrected and 10 is written in the database). If the fields are not filled in for Min. value and Max. value, no limits will be applied. For formatted fields that are connected to a database text field, these two values and the Default value do not apply. - -Default value: This value is set for new records as the default value. - - + +Special properties of a formatted field + +Formatting: You can set the Formatting property by clicking the ... button in the Formatting line of the Properties: Formatted Field dialog. The Number Format dialog appears. +If the formatted field is connected to the text field of a database, the entries in this field will be treated as text. If the formatted field is connected to a field of the database that can be displayed as a number, the input is treated as numbers. The date and time are also handled internally as numbers. + +Min. value and Max. value: You can enter the minimum and maximum numeric value for a formatted field. The min and max values determine the output of existing data (Example: Min. value is 5, the connected database field contains the integer value 3. The output is 5, but the value in the database is not modified) and the input of new data (Example: Max. value is 10 and you enter 20. The input is corrected and 10 is written in the database). If the fields are not filled in for Min. value and Max. value, no limits will be applied. For formatted fields that are connected to a database text field, these two values and the Default value do not apply. + +Default value: This value is set for new records as the default value. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp index 8a970e8a27..0a1a9383ec 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Special Tips for Table Controls -/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Special Tips for Table Controls +/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -table controls; properties -controls; table control properties +table controls; properties +controls; table control properties table controls;keyboard-only control - -Special Tips for Table Controls -You can define a table control to display the records as you like. In other words you can define data fields for displaying or editing data like in a database form. -The following fields are possible in a table control: text, date, time and currency field, numeric field, pattern field, check box and combo box. In the case of combined data/time fields, two columns are created automatically. -The number of selected lines, if any are selected, is in parentheses after the total number of records. + +Special Tips for Table Controls +You can define a table control to display the records as you like. In other words you can define data fields for displaying or editing data like in a database form. +The following fields are possible in a table control: text, date, time and currency field, numeric field, pattern field, check box and combo box. In the case of combined data/time fields, two columns are created automatically. +The number of selected lines, if any are selected, is in parentheses after the total number of records. To insert columns into the table control, click in the column heads and bring up the context menu. The following commands are available: - -Insert Column -Calls a submenu to select a data field to adopt it in the table control. + +Insert Column +Calls a submenu to select a data field to adopt it in the table control. Configure the table control using drag and drop: Open the data source browser and drag the desired fields out of the data source browser and on to the column heads of the table control. A pre-configured column is created. - -Replace with + +Replace with Opens a submenu to select a data field to replace the data field selected in the table control. - -Delete Column -Deletes the currently selected column. -Column + +Delete Column +Deletes the currently selected column. +Column Opens the properties dialog of the selected column. - -Hide Columns + +Hide Columns Hides the selected column. Its properties are not changed. - -Show columns + +Show columns Calls a submenu where you can select the columns to show again. To show only one column, click the column name. You see only the first 16 hidden columns. If there are more hidden columns, choose the More command to call the Show Columns dialog. - -More + +More Calls the Show Columns dialog. - + In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or Ctrl key to select multiple entries. - -All -Click All if you want to show all columns. -Keyboard-only control of Table Controls -If you use the keyboard only to travel through controls in your document, you will find one difference to the other types of controls: the Tab key does not move the cursor to the next control, but moves to the next column inside the table control. Press Ctrl+Tab to move to the next control, or press Shift+Ctrl+Tab to move to the previous control. -To enter the special keyboard-only edit mode for Table Controls: -The form document must be in design mode. - - -Press Ctrl+F6 to select the document. - - -Press Shift+F5 to select the first control. If the Table Control is not the first control, press Tab until it is selected. - - -Press Enter to enter the edit mode. The handles are shown farther out from the control border. - - -In the edit mode, you can open the edit mode context menu by pressing Shift+F10. - - -If you want to edit columns, press Shift+Space to enter column edit mode. Now you can rearrange the order of columns with Ctrl+Arrow keys. The Delete key deletes the current column. - - -Press the Escape key to exit the edit mode. - - - - + +All +Click All if you want to show all columns. +Keyboard-only control of Table Controls +If you use the keyboard only to travel through controls in your document, you will find one difference to the other types of controls: the Tab key does not move the cursor to the next control, but moves to the next column inside the table control. Press Ctrl+Tab to move to the next control, or press Shift+Ctrl+Tab to move to the previous control. +To enter the special keyboard-only edit mode for Table Controls: +The form document must be in design mode. + + +Press Ctrl+F6 to select the document. + + +Press Shift+F5 to select the first control. If the Table Control is not the first control, press Tab until it is selected. + + +Press Enter to enter the edit mode. The handles are shown farther out from the control border. + + +In the edit mode, you can open the edit mode context menu by pressing Shift+F10. + + +If you want to edit columns, press Shift+Space to enter column edit mode. Now you can rearrange the order of columns with Ctrl+Arrow keys. The Delete key deletes the current column. + + +Press the Escape key to exit the edit mode. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp index 056e2e0d6b..fb3f20d6f1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -General -/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +General +/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-submitting; forms -get method; forms +submitting; forms +get method; forms post method; forms - -General -
- -A form is a text document or spreadsheet with different form controls. If you create a form for a Web page, the user can enter data into it to send over the Internet. The data from the form controls of a form is transmitted to a server by specifying a URL and can be processed on the server. -Name -Specifies a name for the form. This name is used to identify the form in the Form Navigator. -URL -Specifies the URL to which the data of the completed form is to be transmitted. -Frame -Defines the target frame in which the loaded URL is to appear. + +General + + +A form is a text document or spreadsheet with different form controls. If you create a form for a Web page, the user can enter data into it to send over the Internet. The data from the form controls of a form is transmitted to a server by specifying a URL and can be processed on the server. +Name +Specifies a name for the form. This name is used to identify the form in the Form Navigator. +URL +Specifies the URL to which the data of the completed form is to be transmitted. +Frame +Defines the target frame in which the loaded URL is to appear. - -Type of submission -Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information. -Using the "Get" method, the data of every control is transmitted as an environment variable. They are appended to the URL in the form "?Control1=Content1&Control2=Content2&..."; the character string is analyzed by a program on the recipient's server. + +Type of submission +Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information. +Using the "Get" method, the data of every control is transmitted as an environment variable. They are appended to the URL in the form "?Control1=Content1&Control2=Content2&..."; the character string is analyzed by a program on the recipient's server. Using the "Post" method, a document is created from the content of the form that is sent to the specified URL. - -Submission encoding -Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer. -Data transfer of control information -When sending a form, all controls available in $[officename] are taken into consideration. The name of the control and the corresponding value, if available, are transmitted. -Which values are transmitted in each case depends on the respective control. For text fields, the visible entries are transmitted; for list boxes, the selected entries are transmitted; for check boxes and option fields, the associated reference values are transmitted if these fields were activated. -How this information is transmitted depends on the selected transfer method (Get or Post) and the coding (URL or Multipart). If the Get method and URL encoding are selected, for example, value pairs in the form <Name>=<Value> are sent. -In addition to the controls that are recognized in HTML, $[officename] offers other controls. It should be noted that, for fields with a specific numerical format, the visible values are not transmitted but rather fixed default formats. The following table shows how the data of the $[officename]-specific controls is transmitted: - - - -Control - - -Value Pair - - - - -Numeric field, currency field - - -A decimal separator is always displayed as a period. - - - - -Date field - - -The date format is sent in a fixed format (MM-DD-YYYY), regardless of the user's local settings. - - - - -Time field - - -The time format is sent in a fixed format (HH:MM:SS), regardless of the user's local settings. - - - - -Pattern field - - -The values of pattern fields are sent as text fields, that is, the value visible in the form is sent. - - - - -Table control - - -From the table control, the individual columns are always transmitted. The name of the control, the name of the column, and the value of the column are sent. Using the Get method with URL encoding, the transmission is done in the form <Name of the table control>.<Name of the column>=<Value>, for example, with the value being dependent on the column. - - -
- - - + +Submission encoding +Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer. +Data transfer of control information +When sending a form, all controls available in $[officename] are taken into consideration. The name of the control and the corresponding value, if available, are transmitted. +Which values are transmitted in each case depends on the respective control. For text fields, the visible entries are transmitted; for list boxes, the selected entries are transmitted; for check boxes and option fields, the associated reference values are transmitted if these fields were activated. +How this information is transmitted depends on the selected transfer method (Get or Post) and the coding (URL or Multipart). If the Get method and URL encoding are selected, for example, value pairs in the form <Name>=<Value> are sent. +In addition to the controls that are recognized in HTML, $[officename] offers other controls. It should be noted that, for fields with a specific numerical format, the visible values are not transmitted but rather fixed default formats. The following table shows how the data of the $[officename]-specific controls is transmitted: + + + +Control + + +Value Pair + + + + +Numeric field, currency field + + +A decimal separator is always displayed as a period. + + + + +Date field + + +The date format is sent in a fixed format (MM-DD-YYYY), regardless of the user's local settings. + + + + +Time field + + +The time format is sent in a fixed format (HH:MM:SS), regardless of the user's local settings. + + + + +Pattern field + + +The values of pattern fields are sent as text fields, that is, the value visible in the form is sent. + + + + +Table control + + +From the table control, the individual columns are always transmitted. The name of the control, the name of the column, and the value of the column are sent. Using the Get method with URL encoding, the transmission is done in the form <Name of the table control>.<Name of the column>=<Value>, for example, with the value being dependent on the column. + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp index 3c590d1bd6..9df654d882 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Tab Order -/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Tab Order +/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Tab Order + +Tab Order In the Tab Order dialog you can modify the order in which control fields get the focus when the user presses the tab key. - -
- -If form elements are inserted into a document, %PRODUCTNAME automatically determines in which order to move from one control to the next when using the Tab key. Every new control added is automatically placed at the end of this series. In the Tab Order dialog, you can adapt the order of this series to your individual needs. -You can also define the index of a control through its specific properties by entering the desired value under Order in the Properties dialog of the control. + + + +If form elements are inserted into a document, %PRODUCTNAME automatically determines in which order to move from one control to the next when using the Tab key. Every new control added is automatically placed at the end of this series. In the Tab Order dialog, you can adapt the order of this series to your individual needs. +You can also define the index of a control through its specific properties by entering the desired value under Order in the Properties dialog of the control. A radio button can only be accessed by the Tab key when the radio button is selected. If you have designed a group of radio buttons where none are selected, then the user will not be able to access the group or any of the radio buttons by keyboard. - -Controls + +Controls Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom. Select a control from the Controls list to assign the desired position in the tab order. - -Move Up + +Move Up Click the Move Up button to shift the selected control one position higher in the tab order. - -Move Down + +Move Down Click the Move Down button to shift the selected control one position lower in the tab order. - -Automatic Sort -Click the Automatic Sort button to automatically sort the controls according to the their position in the document. - - + +Automatic Sort +Click the Automatic Sort button to automatically sort the controls according to the their position in the document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp index d03350a95d..f04db9217e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Open in Design Mode -/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Open in Design Mode +/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-forms; opening in design mode -controls; activating in forms -design mode after saving -documents; opening in design mode +forms; opening in design mode +controls; activating in forms +design mode after saving +documents; opening in design mode edit mode; after opening - -Open in Design Mode -Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited. -
-You cannot activate the controls of the form or edit contents of database records in Design Mode. However, you can change the position and size of the controls, edit other properties, and add or delete controls in Design Mode. - -After you have finished editing your form, right-click "Forms" in the Form Navigator and deselect Open in Design Mode. Save your form when you are finished. -If the form document is write-protected, the Open in Design Mode command is ignored. - - + +Open in Design Mode +Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited. + +You cannot activate the controls of the form or edit contents of database records in Design Mode. However, you can change the position and size of the controls, edit other properties, and add or delete controls in Design Mode. + +After you have finished editing your form, right-click "Forms" in the Form Navigator and deselect Open in Design Mode. Save your form when you are finished. +If the form document is write-protected, the Open in Design Mode command is ignored. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp index 0194964a4c..bdbf31d9e5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp @@ -1,114 +1,114 @@ - - - - - - -Highlighting -/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: changed text to fix #112387#, #112392#; dedr: reviewed - - - -
- -Highlighting -Applies the current highlight color to the background of a text selection. If no text is selected, click the Highlighting icon, select the text that you want to highlight, and then click the Highlighting icon again. To change the highlight color, long-click the Highlighting icon, and then click the color that you want. - -
-
- - - - -Icon - - - -Highlighting - - -
- -
-To Apply HighlightingUFI: see #112387# - - -On the Object bar, click the Highlighting icon. -To change the highlighting color, long-click the Highlighting icon, and then click the color that you want. - - -Select the text that you want to highlight. -To apply highlighting to a single word, double-click the word. - - -To turn off highlighting, press Esc. - - -To Remove Highlighting - - -Select the highlighted text. - - -On the Object bar, long-click the Highlighting icon, and then click No Fill. - - - - + + + + + + +Highlighting +/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: changed text to fix #112387#, #112392#; dedr: reviewed + + + +
+ +Highlighting +Applies the current highlight color to the background of a text selection. If no text is selected, click the Highlighting icon, select the text that you want to highlight, and then click the Highlighting icon again. To change the highlight color, long-click the Highlighting icon, and then click the color that you want. + +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Highlighting + + +
+ +
+To Apply HighlightingUFI: see #112387# + + +On the Object bar, click the Highlighting icon. +To change the highlighting color, long-click the Highlighting icon, and then click the color that you want. + + +Select the text that you want to highlight. +To apply highlighting to a single word, double-click the word. + + +To turn off highlighting, press Esc. + + +To Remove Highlighting + + +Select the highlighted text. + + +On the Object bar, long-click the Highlighting icon, and then click No Fill. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp index 5c0fd8aa72..7717db0936 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Background color Paragraph background -/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fix to #112392# -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Background color Paragraph background +/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fix to #112392# +dedr: reviewed + + +
- + Background color -Paragraph background +Paragraph background Click to open a floating toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph. The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs. - -
- + + +
- - - - + +
+ + Icon - - - -Background Color - - -
+ + + +Background Color + + + - - - - + +
+ + Icon - - - -Paragraph Background, or Background Color when in a table in text, frames and inserted graphics - - -
+ + + +Paragraph Background, or Background Color when in a table in text, frames and inserted graphics + + + - - - - + +
+ + Icon - - - -Paragraph Background - - -
+ + + +Paragraph Background + + + - -
- - + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp index c2eb4202ff..cc23251c76 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Filter -/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Filter +/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Filter -Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data. This dialog is called Standard Filter in Spreadsheet documents and Filter in database tables or database forms. The Filter dialog does not contain the More button. - -Filter criteria + +Filter +Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data. This dialog is called Standard Filter in Spreadsheet documents and Filter in database tables or database forms. The Filter dialog does not contain the More button. + +Filter criteria You can define a filter by indicating the type of line, the name of the field, a logical condition and a value or a combination of arguments. - -Operator + +Operator For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR. - -Field name + +Field name Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument. You will see the column identifiers if no text is available for the field names. - -Condition + +Condition Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked. - -Value -Specifies a value to filter the field. -The Value list box contains all possible values for the specified Field name . Choose the value to be used in the filter. You can also choose the - empty - or -not empty - entries.. + +Value +Specifies a value to filter the field. +The Value list box contains all possible values for the specified Field name . Choose the value to be used in the filter. You can also choose the - empty - or -not empty - entries.. If you use the filter function in database tables or forms, then type the value in the Value text box to be used for filtering. - -The Filter dialog does not contain the Options button. -More>> + +The Filter dialog does not contain the Options button. +More>> - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp index 09b3b690c0..d71c963e19 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Data Source of Current Document -/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Data Source of Current Document +/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-data source of current document +data source of current document data sources; displaying current - + - -Data Source of Current Document -Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document. -
-
- - - + +Data Source of Current Document +Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Data Source of Current Document - - -
- -
-Choose Edit - Exchange Database to select another table. - - + + + +Data Source of Current Document + + + + + +Choose Edit - Exchange Database to select another table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp index 398d336bf3..2f90b883f6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Setting Indents, Margins, and Columns -/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Setting Indents, Margins, and Columns +/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-indents; setting -margins; setting -columns; setting -text;indenting, margins and columns +indents; setting +margins; setting +columns; setting +text;indenting, margins and columns paragraphs; indenting, margins and columns - -Setting Indents, Margins, and Columns -You can define the indents and margins for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, using the mouse. -
-If you split the page into columns, or the cursor is placed in a multiple-column text frame, you can change the column width and the column spacing by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. -When an object, an image, or a draw object is selected, you will see the borders of the object in the ruler. You can change the borders by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. -If the cursor is placed in a table cell, you can change the indents for the contents of the cell by dragging them with the mouse on the ruler. You can change the boundary lines of the table on the ruler or by dragging the actual boundary line. - - - + +Setting Indents, Margins, and Columns +You can define the indents and margins for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, using the mouse. + +If you split the page into columns, or the cursor is placed in a multiple-column text frame, you can change the column width and the column spacing by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. +When an object, an image, or a draw object is selected, you will see the borders of the object in the ruler. You can change the borders by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. +If the cursor is placed in a table cell, you can change the indents for the contents of the cell by dragging them with the mouse on the ruler. You can change the boundary lines of the table on the ruler or by dragging the actual boundary line. +
+ + Icon - - - -These icons mark the left indent for the first line of the current paragraph (top triangle) and the left indent for the other lines of the paragraph (bottom triangle). - - - - + + + +These icons mark the left indent for the first line of the current paragraph (top triangle) and the left indent for the other lines of the paragraph (bottom triangle). + + + + Icon - - - -This icon on the right of the ruler marks the right indent of the current paragraph. - - -
- - - - - -Task - - - - -Procedure - - - - - -Set left indent - - -Drag the bottom left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button - - - - -Set left indent of first line - - -Drag the top left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button - - - - -Set right indent - - -Drag the mark on the right to the left while pressing the mouse button - - -
- + + + +This icon on the right of the ruler marks the right indent of the current paragraph. + + + + + + + + +Task + + + + +Procedure + + + + + +Set left indent + + +Drag the bottom left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button + + + + +Set left indent of first line + + +Drag the top left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button + + + + +Set right indent + + +Drag the mark on the right to the left while pressing the mouse button + + +
+ In order to change the left indent starting with the second line of a paragraph, hold down the Command -Ctrl key, click the triangle on the bottom left, and drag it to the right. -Tabs that have been set are not changed when indenting a paragraph. If the set tabs end up outside the margins of the paragraph, they are no longer displayed, but they still exist. - - +Ctrl key, click the triangle on the bottom left, and drag it to the right. +Tabs that have been set are not changed when indenting a paragraph. If the set tabs end up outside the margins of the paragraph, they are no longer displayed, but they still exist. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp index 4adcdebd83..6f98966404 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Add Tables -/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Add Tables +/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + tables in databases; adding to queries - -Add Tables + +Add Tables Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window. In the Add Tables dialog, select the tables you need for your current task. - When creating a query or a new table presentation, select the corresponding table to which the query or table presentation should refer. When working with relational databases, select the tables between which you want to build relationships. -The inserted tables appear in a separate window in the query design or relational windows, along with a list of the fields contained in the table. You can determine the size and order of this window. - -Table -Table name + When creating a query or a new table presentation, select the corresponding table to which the query or table presentation should refer. When working with relational databases, select the tables between which you want to build relationships. +The inserted tables appear in a separate window in the query design or relational windows, along with a list of the fields contained in the table. You can determine the size and order of this window. + +Table +Table name Lists the available tables. To insert a table, select one from the list and click Add. You can also double-click the table name, and a window will be displayed containing the table fields at the top of the query design or the relational window. - -Add + +Add Inserts the currently selected table. - -Close -Closes the Add Tables dialog. - - + +Close +Closes the Add Tables dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp index 797c34fe3f..a6110ac7ed 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -HTML Source -/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +HTML Source +/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
HTML source; text - -HTML Source -Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document. -
- -In HTML Source mode, you can view and edit the tags of HTML. Save the document as a plain text document. Assign an .html or .htm extension to designate the document as HTML.UFI: is this so? test it - - + +HTML Source +Displays the source text of the current HTML document. To view the HTML source of a new document, you must first save the new document as an HTML document. + + +In HTML Source mode, you can view and edit the tags of HTML. Save the document as a plain text document. Assign an .html or .htm extension to designate the document as HTML.UFI: is this so? test it + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp index b43c5d8bc0..24a481feaf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Current Page Style -/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Current Page Style +/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
page styles;editing and applying - -Current Page Style + +Current Page Style Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit -, a right-click switches to another style (if multiple styles are listed). -
+, a right-click switches to another style (if multiple styles are listed). + Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. In the context menu of this field, you can apply a Page Style to the active page. - + Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. - + Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog in which you can select the style for the active page. You can select a different paper format or background. - + Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog in which you select the style for the current page. You can select a different paper format or background. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp index 53f330b489..e16bb2e6a4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Insert Mode -/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Insert Mode +/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Insert Mode + +Insert Mode Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite.This field is only active if the cursor is in the input line of the formula bar or in a cell. - -
+ + Click in the field to toggle the modes (except in the $[officename] Basic IDE, since only the Insert key is active). If the cursor is positioned in a document, you may also use the Insert key to toggle the modes. - - - - - -Mode - - - - -Result - - - - - -INSRT - - -In the insert mode, new text is inserted at the cursor position and the following text is shifted to the right. The cursor is displayed as a vertical line. - - - - -OVER - - -In the overwrite mode, any existing text is replaced by new text. The cursor is displayed as a thick vertical line. - - -
- - - + + + + + +Mode + + + + +Result + + + + + +INSRT + + +In the insert mode, new text is inserted at the cursor position and the following text is shifted to the right. The cursor is displayed as a vertical line. + + + + +OVER + + +In the overwrite mode, any existing text is replaced by new text. The cursor is displayed as a thick vertical line. + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp index 024ae33624..ac07210aa5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Filters -/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Filters +/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Filters -Opens the Filter window, where you can use various filters on the selected graphic image. -
-
- - - + +Filters +Opens the Filter window, where you can use various filters on the selected graphic image. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Filter - - -
- + + + +Filter + + + +
- -Invert -Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image. - - - + +Invert +Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image. +
+ + Icon - - - -Invert - - -
+ + + +Invert + + + - -Smooth -Softens the contrast in an image. - - - + +Smooth +Softens the contrast in an image. +
+ + Icon - - - -Smooth - - -
+ + + +Smooth + + + - -Sharpen -Increases the contrast in an image. - - - + +Sharpen +Increases the contrast in an image. +
+ + Icon - - - -Sharpen - - -
+ + + +Sharpen + + + - -Remove Noise -Removes single pixels from an image. - - - + +Remove Noise +Removes single pixels from an image. +
+ + Icon - - - -Remove Noise - - -
+ + + +Remove Noise + + + - -Solarization -Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted. - - - + +Solarization +Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted. +
+ + Icon - - - -Solarization - - -
- -Parameters + + + +Solarization + + + + +Parameters Specifies the degree and type of solarization. - -Threshold Value + +Threshold Value Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized. - -Invert + +Invert Specifies whether the pixels to be solarized are also to be inverted. - -Aging -Opens a dialog for setting the aging function. Each time you call this function, the image appears a little bit darker; the colors can be made more gray or brown. - - - + +Aging +Opens a dialog for setting the aging function. Each time you call this function, the image appears a little bit darker; the colors can be made more gray or brown. +
+ + Icon - - - -Aging - - -
+ + + +Aging + + + - -Aging Degree + +Aging Degree Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. The higher the value, the more the image ages. - -Posterize -Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors. This effect is based on the reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings. - - - + +Posterize +Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors. This effect is based on the reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings. +
+ + Icon - - - -Posterize - - -
+ + + +Posterize + + + - -Poster Colors + +Poster Colors Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced. - -Pop Art -Converts an image to a pop-art format. By applying color alienation, the image acquires a completely new character. This function can be applied to the whole image or to parts of it. - - - + +Pop Art +Converts an image to a pop-art format. By applying color alienation, the image acquires a completely new character. This function can be applied to the whole image or to parts of it. +
+ + Icon - - - -Pop Art - - -
+ + + +Pop Art + + + - -Charcoal Sketch -Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed. You can apply this function to the whole image or to a part of it. - - - + +Charcoal Sketch +Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed. You can apply this function to the whole image or to a part of it. +
+ + Icon - - - -Charcoal Sketch - - -
+ + + +Charcoal Sketch + + + - -Relief -Displays a dialog for creating reliefs. You can choose the position of the imaginary light source that determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic image looks in relief. - - - + +Relief +Displays a dialog for creating reliefs. You can choose the position of the imaginary light source that determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic image looks in relief. +
+ + Icon - - - -Relief - - -
- -Light Source + + + +Relief + + + + +Light Source Specifies the light source position. A dot represents the light source. - -Mosaic -Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The larger the individual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has. - - - + +Mosaic +Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The larger the individual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has. +
+ + Icon - - - -Mosaic - - -
- -Element resolution + + + +Mosaic + + + + +Element resolution Determines the number of pixels to be joined into rectangles. - -Width + +Width Defines the width of the individual tiles. - -Height + +Height Defines the height of the individual tiles. - -Enhance edges -Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object. - - + +Enhance edges +Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp index 2fa7e2c1b2..5b333565a1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] -/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fixed #113742# -dedr: fixed #i30842# - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] +/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fixed #113742# +dedr: fixed #i30842# + + +
-keyboard;general commands -shortcut keys;general -text input fields; input -AutoComplete function in text and list boxes +keyboard;general commands +shortcut keys;general +text input fields; input +AutoComplete function in text and list boxes macros; interrupting - + General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] - -
-Using Shortcut Keys + + +Using Shortcut Keys A great deal of your application's functionality can be called up by using shortcut keys. For example, the Command+O Ctrl+O shortcut keys are shown next to the Open entry in the File menu. If you want to access this function by using the shortcut keys, press and hold down the key Command -Ctrl and then press the O key. Release both keys after the dialog appears. -When operating your application, you can choose between using the mouse or the keyboard for almost all of the operations available. +Ctrl and then press the O key. Release both keys after the dialog appears. +When operating your application, you can choose between using the mouse or the keyboard for almost all of the operations available. -Calling Menus With Shortcut Keys +Calling Menus With Shortcut Keys -Some of the characters shown on the menu bar are underlined. You can access these menus directly by pressing the underlined character together with the ALT key. Once the menu is opened, you will again find underlined characters. You can access these menu items directly by simply pressing the underlined character key. -Using Shortcut Keys to Control Dialogs -There is always one element highlighted in any given dialog - usually shown by a broken frame. This element, which can be either a button, an option field, an entry in a list box or a check box, is said to have the focus on it. If the focal point is a button, pressing Enter runs it as if you had clicked it. A check box is toggled by pressing the spacebar. If an option field has the focus, use the arrow keys to change the activated option field in that area. Use the Tab key to go from one element or area to the next one, use Shift + Tab to go in the reverse direction. +Some of the characters shown on the menu bar are underlined. You can access these menus directly by pressing the underlined character together with the ALT key. Once the menu is opened, you will again find underlined characters. You can access these menu items directly by simply pressing the underlined character key. +Using Shortcut Keys to Control Dialogs +There is always one element highlighted in any given dialog - usually shown by a broken frame. This element, which can be either a button, an option field, an entry in a list box or a check box, is said to have the focus on it. If the focal point is a button, pressing Enter runs it as if you had clicked it. A check box is toggled by pressing the spacebar. If an option field has the focus, use the arrow keys to change the activated option field in that area. Use the Tab key to go from one element or area to the next one, use Shift + Tab to go in the reverse direction. Pressing ESC closes the dialog without saving changes. -If you place the focus on a button, not only will you see the dotted line framing the name of the button, but also a thicker shadow under the button selected. This indicates that if you exit the dialog by pressing the Enter key, it is the equivalent of pressing that button itself. -Shortcut Keys for Mouse Actions +If you place the focus on a button, not only will you see the dotted line framing the name of the button, but also a thicker shadow under the button selected. This indicates that if you exit the dialog by pressing the Enter key, it is the equivalent of pressing that button itself. +Shortcut Keys for Mouse Actions If you are using drag-and-drop, selecting with the mouse or clicking objects and names, you can use the keys Shift, Command Ctrl and occasionally Option Alt to access additional functionality. The modified functions available when holding down keys during drag-and-drop are indicated by the mouse pointer changing form. When selecting files or other objects, the modifier keys can extend the selection - the functions are explained where applicable. - -Practical Text Input Fields - - -You can open a context menu, which contains some of the most often-used commands. - - + +Practical Text Input Fields + + +You can open a context menu, which contains some of the most often-used commands. + + Use the shortcut keys Shift+Command -Ctrl+S to open the Special Characters dialog to insert one or more special characters. - - +Ctrl+S to open the Special Characters dialog to insert one or more special characters. + + Use Command -Ctrl+A to select the entire text. Use the right or left arrow key to remove the selection. - - -Double-click a word to select it. - - -A triple-click selects the entire line. - - +Ctrl+A to select the entire text. Use the right or left arrow key to remove the selection. + + +Double-click a word to select it. + + +A triple-click selects the entire line. + + Use Command -Ctrl+Del to delete everything from the cursor position to the end of the word. - - +Ctrl+Del to delete everything from the cursor position to the end of the word. + + By using Command -Ctrl and right or left arrow key, the cursor will jump from word to word; if you also hold down the Shift key, one word after the other is selected. - - -INSRT is used to switch between the insert mode and the overwrite mode and back again. - - -Drag-and-drop can be used within and outside of a text box. - - +Ctrl and right or left arrow key, the cursor will jump from word to word; if you also hold down the Shift key, one word after the other is selected. + + +INSRT is used to switch between the insert mode and the overwrite mode and back again. + + +Drag-and-drop can be used within and outside of a text box. + + The Command -Ctrl+Z shortcut keys are used to undo modifications one step at a time; the text will then have the status it had before the first change. - - -
- - - $[officename] has a very useful AutoComplete function which activates itself in some text and list boxes. For example, enter c:\a into the URL field and the AutoComplete function displays the first file or first directory found on the C: drive that starts with the letter "a". - - -Use the down arrow key to scroll through the other files and directories. Use the right arrow key to also display an existing subdirectory in the URL field. Quick AutoComplete is available if you press the End key after entering part of the URL. Once you find the program, document or directory you want, press Enter. - - -
-Interrupting Macros +Ctrl+Z shortcut keys are used to undo modifications one step at a time; the text will then have the status it had before the first change. + + +
+ + + $[officename] has a very useful AutoComplete function which activates itself in some text and list boxes. For example, enter c:\a into the URL field and the AutoComplete function displays the first file or first directory found on the C: drive that starts with the letter "a". + + +Use the down arrow key to scroll through the other files and directories. Use the right arrow key to also display an existing subdirectory in the URL field. Quick AutoComplete is available if you press the End key after entering part of the URL. Once you find the program, document or directory you want, press Enter. + + +
+Interrupting Macros If you want to terminate a macro that is currently running, press Shift+ Command -Ctrl+Q. -List of General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] +Ctrl+Q. +List of General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] The shortcut keys are shown on the right hand side of the menu lists next to the corresponding menu command. (Not all of the mentioned keys for controlling dialogs are available on the Macintosh.) - - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Enter key - - -Activates the focused button in a dialog - - - - -Esc - - -Terminates the action or dialog. If in $[officename] Help: goes up one level. The cursor is positioned in the URL on the Function Bar: returns the cursor to the document. If the URL has been selected, you have to press the key twice. - - - - -Spacebar - - -Toggles the focused check box in a dialog. - - - - -Arrow keys - - -Changes the active control field in an option section of a dialog. - - - - -Tab - - -Advances focus to the next section or element in a dialog. - - - - -Shift + Tab - - -Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog. - - - - + +
+ + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Enter key + + +Activates the focused button in a dialog + + + + +Esc + + +Terminates the action or dialog. If in $[officename] Help: goes up one level. The cursor is positioned in the URL on the Function Bar: returns the cursor to the document. If the URL has been selected, you have to press the key twice. + + + + +Spacebar + + +Toggles the focused check box in a dialog. + + + + +Arrow keys + + +Changes the active control field in an option section of a dialog. + + + + +Tab + + +Advances focus to the next section or element in a dialog. + + + + +Shift + Tab + + +Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog. + + + + Option -Alt+Down Arrow - - -Opens the list of the control field currently selected in a dialog. These shortcut keys apply not only to combo boxes but also to icon buttons with pop-up menus. Close an opened list by pressing the Escape key. - - - - -Del - - -Deletes the selected item(s) into the recycle bin. - - - - -Shift+Del - - -Deletes the selected item(s) without putting them in the recycle bin. - - - - -Backspace - - -When a folder is shown: goes up one level (goes back) - - - - +Alt+Down Arrow + + +Opens the list of the control field currently selected in a dialog. These shortcut keys apply not only to combo boxes but also to icon buttons with pop-up menus. Close an opened list by pressing the Escape key. + + + + +Del + + +Deletes the selected item(s) into the recycle bin. + + + + +Shift+Del + + +Deletes the selected item(s) without putting them in the recycle bin. + + + + +Backspace + + +When a folder is shown: goes up one level (goes back) + + + + Command -Ctrl + Tab - - -When positioned at the start of a header, a tab is inserted.UFI: fixes #i21687# - - - - -Enter (if an OLE object is selected) - - -Activates the selected OLE object. - - - - -Enter (if a drawing object or text object is selected) - - -Activates text input mode. - - - - +Ctrl + Tab + + +When positioned at the start of a header, a tab is inserted.UFI: fixes #i21687# + + + + +Enter (if an OLE object is selected) + + +Activates the selected OLE object. + + + + +Enter (if a drawing object or text object is selected) + + +Activates text input mode. + + + + Command -Ctrl + O - - -Opens a document. - - - - +Ctrl + O + + +Opens a document. + + + + Command -Ctrl + S - - -Saves the current document. - - - - +Ctrl + S + + +Saves the current document. + + + + Command -Ctrl + N - - -Creates a new document. - - - - +Ctrl + N + + +Creates a new document. + + + + Shift+Command -Ctrl+N - - -Opens Templates and Documents dialog. - - - - +Ctrl+N + + +Opens Templates and Documents dialog. + + + + Command -Ctrl + P - - -Prints document. - - - - +Ctrl + P + + +Prints document. + + + + Command -Ctrl + Q - - -Exits application. - - - - +Ctrl + Q + + +Exits application. + + + + Command -Ctrl + X - - -Cuts out the selected elements. - - - - +Ctrl + X + + +Cuts out the selected elements. + + + + Command -Ctrl + C - - -Copies the selected items. - - - - +Ctrl + C + + +Copies the selected items. + + + + Command -Ctrl + V - - -Pastes from the clipboard. - - - - +Ctrl + V + + +Pastes from the clipboard. + + + + Command -Ctrl + Shift + V - - -Opens the Paste Special dialog. - - - - +Ctrl + Shift + V + + +Opens the Paste Special dialog. + + + + Command -Ctrl + A - - -Selects all. - - - - +Ctrl + A + + +Selects all. + + + + Command -Ctrl + Z - - -Undoes last action. - - - - +Ctrl + Z + + +Undoes last action. + + + + Command -Ctrl + Y - - -Redoes last action. - - - - +Ctrl + Y + + +Redoes last action. + + + + Command -Ctrl+F - - -Calls the Find & Replace dialog. - - - - +Ctrl+F + + +Calls the Find & Replace dialog. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+F - - -Searches for the last entered search term. - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+F + + +Searches for the last entered search term. + + + + -Ctrl+Shift+J - - +Ctrl+Shift+J + + -Toggles the view between fullscreen mode and normal mode - - - - +Toggles the view between fullscreen mode and normal mode + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+R - - -Redraws the document view. - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+R + + +Redraws the document view. + + + + Shift+Command -Ctrl+I - - -Enable or disable the selection cursor in read-only text or in the Help viewer. - - - - +Ctrl+I + + +Enable or disable the selection cursor in read-only text or in the Help viewer. + + + + Command -Ctrl+I - - -The Italic attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also marked in italic. - - - - +Ctrl+I + + +The Italic attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also marked in italic. + + + + Command -Ctrl+B - - -The Bold attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also put in bold. - - - - +Ctrl+B + + +The Bold attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also put in bold. + + + + Command -Ctrl+U - - -The Underlined attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also underlined. - - -
- -Shortcut Keys Using the Function Keys +Ctrl+U + + +The Underlined attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also underlined. + + + + +Shortcut Keys Using the Function Keys Not all of the function shortcut keys are available on the Mac. - - - - -Shortcut keys - - - -Effect - - - - - + +
+ + +Shortcut keys + + + +Effect + + + + + -F1 - - +F1 + + -Starts the $[officename] Help -In the $[officename] Help: jumps to main help page. - - - - +Starts the $[officename] Help +In the $[officename] Help: jumps to main help page. + + + + -Shift + F1 - - +Shift + F1 + + -Context Help - - - - -Shift+F2 - - -Turns on Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. - - - - +Context Help + + + + +Shift+F2 + + +Turns on Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. + + + + Command Ctrl+F4 or Option -Alt+F4 - - -Closes the current document (close $[officename] when the last open document is closed) - - - - -F6 - - -Sets focus in next subwindow (for example, document/data source view) - - - - -Shift+F6 - - -Sets focus in previous subwindow. - - - - -F10 - - -Activates the first menu (File menu) - - - - -Shift+F10 - - -Opens the context menu. - - - - -Ctrl+F11 - - -Opens the Style Catalog.UFI: may get discarded - - -
- -Shortcut keys in the Gallery - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Result - - - - -Tab - - -Moves between areas. - - - - -Shift+Tab - - -Moves between areas (backwards) - - -
- -Shortcut keys in the New Theme area of the Gallery: - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Result - - - - -Up arrow - - -Moves the selection up one. - - - - -Down arrow - - -Moves the selection down. - - - - +Alt+F4 + + +Closes the current document (close $[officename] when the last open document is closed) + + + + +F6 + + +Sets focus in next subwindow (for example, document/data source view) + + + + +Shift+F6 + + +Sets focus in previous subwindow. + + + + +F10 + + +Activates the first menu (File menu) + + + + +Shift+F10 + + +Opens the context menu. + + + + +Ctrl+F11 + + +Opens the Style Catalog.UFI: may get discarded + + +
+ +Shortcut keys in the Gallery + + + +Shortcut keys + + +Result + + + + +Tab + + +Moves between areas. + + + + +Shift+Tab + + +Moves between areas (backwards) + + +
+ +Shortcut keys in the New Theme area of the Gallery: + + + +Shortcut keys + + +Result + + + + +Up arrow + + +Moves the selection up one. + + + + +Down arrow + + +Moves the selection down. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Enter - - -Opens the Properties dialog. - - - - -Shift+F10 - - -Opens a context menu. - - - - +Ctrl+Enter + + +Opens the Properties dialog. + + + + +Shift+F10 + + +Opens a context menu. + + + + Command -Ctrl+U - - -Refreshes the selected theme. - - - - +Ctrl+U + + +Refreshes the selected theme. + + + + Command -Ctrl+R - - -Opens the Enter Title dialog. - - - - +Ctrl+R + + +Opens the Enter Title dialog. + + + + Command -Ctrl+D - - -Deletes the selected theme. - - - - -Insert - - -Inserts a new theme - - -
- -Shortcut keys in the Gallery preview area: - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Result - - - - -Home - - -Jumps to the first entry. - - - - -End - - -Jumps to the last entry. - - - - -Left Arrow - - -Selects the next Gallery element on the left. - - - - -Right Arrow - - -Selects the next Gallery element on the right. - - - - -Up Arrow - - -Selects the next Gallery element above. - - - - -Down Arrow - - -Selects the next Gallery element below. - - - - -Page Up - - -Scroll up one screen. - - - - -Page Down - - -Scroll down one screen. - - - - +Ctrl+D + + +Deletes the selected theme. + + + + +Insert + + +Inserts a new theme + + +
+ +Shortcut keys in the Gallery preview area: + + + +Shortcut keys + + +Result + + + + +Home + + +Jumps to the first entry. + + + + +End + + +Jumps to the last entry. + + + + +Left Arrow + + +Selects the next Gallery element on the left. + + + + +Right Arrow + + +Selects the next Gallery element on the right. + + + + +Up Arrow + + +Selects the next Gallery element above. + + + + +Down Arrow + + +Selects the next Gallery element below. + + + + +Page Up + + +Scroll up one screen. + + + + +Page Down + + +Scroll down one screen. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+Insert - - -Inserts the selected object as a linked object into the current document. - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+Insert + + +Inserts the selected object as a linked object into the current document. + + + + Command -Ctrl+I - - -Inserts a copy of the selected object into the current document. - - - - +Ctrl+I + + +Inserts a copy of the selected object into the current document. + + + + Command -Ctrl+T - - -Opens the Enter Title dialog. - - - - +Ctrl+T + + +Opens the Enter Title dialog. + + + + Command -Ctrl+P - - -Switches between themes view and object view. - - - - -Spacebar - - -Switches between themes view and object view. - - - - -Enter - - -Switches between themes view and object view. - - - - -Step backward (only in object view) - - -Switches back to main overview. - - -
- -Selecting Rows and Columns in a Table - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Result - - - - -Spacebar - - -Toggles row selection, except when the row is in edit mode. - - - - +Ctrl+P + + +Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + +Spacebar + + +Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + +Enter + + +Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + +Step backward (only in object view) + + +Switches back to main overview. + + +
+ +Selecting Rows and Columns in a Table + + + +Shortcut keys + + +Result + + + + +Spacebar + + +Toggles row selection, except when the row is in edit mode. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Spacebar - - -Toggles row selection - - - - -Shift+Spacebar - - -Selects the current column - - -
- -
-Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Result - - - - +Ctrl+Spacebar + + +Toggles row selection + + + + +Shift+Spacebar + + +Selects the current column + + +
+ +
+Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects + + + +Shortcut keys + + +Result + + + + Select the toolbar with F6. Use the Down Arrow and Right Arrow to select the desired toolbar icon and press Command -Ctrl+Enter - - -Inserts a Drawing Object. - - - - +Ctrl+Enter + + +Inserts a Drawing Object. + + + + Select the document with Command -Ctrl+F6 and press Tab - - -Selects a Drawing Object. - - - - -Tab - - -Selects the next Drawing Object. - - - - -Shift+Tab - - -Selects the previous Drawing Object. - - - - +Ctrl+F6 and press Tab + + +Selects a Drawing Object. + + + + +Tab + + +Selects the next Drawing Object. + + + + +Shift+Tab + + +Selects the previous Drawing Object. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Home - - -Selects the first Drawing Object. - - - - +Ctrl+Home + + +Selects the first Drawing Object. + + + + Command -Ctrl+End - - -Selects the last Drawing Object. - - - - -Esc - - -Ends Drawing Object selection. - - - - -Esc (in Handle Selection Mode) - - -Exit Handle Selection Mode and return to Object Selection Mode. - - - - -Up/down/left/right arrow - - -Move the selected point (the snap-to-grid functions are temporarily disabled, but end points still snap to each other). - - - - +Ctrl+End + + +Selects the last Drawing Object. + + + + +Esc + + +Ends Drawing Object selection. + + + + +Esc (in Handle Selection Mode) + + +Exit Handle Selection Mode and return to Object Selection Mode. + + + + +Up/down/left/right arrow + + +Move the selected point (the snap-to-grid functions are temporarily disabled, but end points still snap to each other). + + + + Option -Alt+Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow - - -Moves the selected Drawing Object one pixel (in Selection Mode) -Re-sizes a Drawing Object (in Handle Selection Mode) -Rotates a Drawing Object (in Rotation Mode) -Opens the properties dialog for a Drawing Object. -Activates the Point Selection mode for the selected drawing object. - - - - -Spacebar - - -Select a point of a drawing object (in Point Selection mode) / Cancel selection. -The selected point blinks once per second. - - - - -Shift+Spacebar - - -Select an additional point in Point Selection mode. - - - - +Alt+Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow + + +Moves the selected Drawing Object one pixel (in Selection Mode) +Re-sizes a Drawing Object (in Handle Selection Mode) +Rotates a Drawing Object (in Rotation Mode) +Opens the properties dialog for a Drawing Object. +Activates the Point Selection mode for the selected drawing object. + + + + +Spacebar + + +Select a point of a drawing object (in Point Selection mode) / Cancel selection. +The selected point blinks once per second. + + + + +Shift+Spacebar + + +Select an additional point in Point Selection mode. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Tab - - -Select the next point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) -In Rotation mode, the center of rotation can also be selected. - - - - +Ctrl+Tab + + +Select the next point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) +In Rotation mode, the center of rotation can also be selected. + + + + Shift+Command -Ctrl+Tab - - -Select the previous point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) - - - - +Ctrl+Tab + + +Select the previous point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) + + + + Command -Ctrl+Enter - - -A new drawing object with default size is placed in the center of the current view. - - - - +Ctrl+Enter + + +A new drawing object with default size is placed in the center of the current view. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Enter at the Selection icon - - -Activates the first drawing object in the document. - - - - -Esc - - -Leave the Point Selection mode. The drawing object is selected afterwards. -Edit a point of a drawing object (Point Edit mode) - - - - -Any text or numerical key - - -If a drawing object is selected, switches to edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the text in the drawing object. A printable character is inserted. - - -
- -
- - - - - +Ctrl+Enter at the Selection icon + + +Activates the first drawing object in the document. + + + + +Esc + + +Leave the Point Selection mode. The drawing object is selected afterwards. +Edit a point of a drawing object (Point Edit mode) + + + + +Any text or numerical key + + +If a drawing object is selected, switches to edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the text in the drawing object. A printable character is inserted. + + + + +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp index 28afd27bec..19a2a71a0d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Database Shortcut Keys -/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Database Shortcut Keys +/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-shortcut keys; databases +shortcut keys; databases databases; shortcut keys - + Database Shortcut Keys - -The following a list of shortcut keys available within databases. -The general shortcut keys in $[officename] also apply. -
-
-Shortcut keys for databases -In the query design - - - -Shortcut Keys - - -Results - - - - -F6 - - -Jump between the query design areas. - - - - -Delete - - -Deletes a table from the query design. - - - - -Tab - - -Selects the connection line. - - - - -Shift+F10 - - -Opens the context menu. - - - - -F4 - - -Show/hide data source view. - - -
- -Control Properties Window - - - -Shortcut Keys - - -Results - - - - + +The following a list of shortcut keys available within databases. +The general shortcut keys in $[officename] also apply. + +
+Shortcut keys for databases +In the query design +
+ + +Shortcut Keys + + +Results + + + + +F6 + + +Jump between the query design areas. + + + + +Delete + + +Deletes a table from the query design. + + + + +Tab + + +Selects the connection line. + + + + +Shift+F10 + + +Opens the context menu. + + + + +F4 + + +Show/hide data source view. + + +
+ +Control Properties Window + + + +Shortcut Keys + + +Results + + + + Option -Alt+Down Arrow - - -Opens the combo box. - - - - +Alt+Down Arrow + + +Opens the combo box. + + + + Option -Alt+Up Arrow - - -Closes the combo box. - - - - -Shift+Enter - - -Inserts a new line. - - - - -Up arrow - - -Positions the cursor in the previous line. - - - - -Down arrow - - -Puts the cursor into the next line. - - - - -Enter - - -Completes the input in the field and places the cursor into the next field. - - - - +Alt+Up Arrow + + +Closes the combo box. + + + + +Shift+Enter + + +Inserts a new line. + + + + +Up arrow + + +Positions the cursor in the previous line. + + + + +Down arrow + + +Puts the cursor into the next line. + + + + +Enter + + +Completes the input in the field and places the cursor into the next field. + + + + Command -Ctrl+F6 - - -Sets the focus (if not in design mode) to the first control. The first control is the first one listed in the Form Navigator. - - -
- -Shortcuts for creating Basic dialogs - - - -Shortcut Keys - - -Results - - - - +Ctrl+F6 + + +Sets the focus (if not in design mode) to the first control. The first control is the first one listed in the Form Navigator. + + +
+ +Shortcuts for creating Basic dialogs + + + +Shortcut Keys + + +Results + + + + Command -Ctrl+PageUp - - -Jumps between tabs. - - - - +Ctrl+PageUp + + +Jumps between tabs. + + + + Command -Ctrl+PageDown - - -Jumps between tabs. - - - - -F6 - - -Jump between windows. - - - - -Tab - - -Selection of the control fields. - - - - -Shift+Tab - - -Selection of the control fields in opposite direction. - - - - +Ctrl+PageDown + + +Jumps between tabs. + + + + +F6 + + +Jump between windows. + + + + +Tab + + +Selection of the control fields. + + + + +Shift+Tab + + +Selection of the control fields in opposite direction. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Enter - - -Inserts the selected control. - - - - -Arrow key -Ctrl + arrow key - - -Moves the selected control in steps of 1 mm in the respective direction. In point edit mode, it changes the size of the selected control. - - - - +Ctrl+Enter + + +Inserts the selected control. + + + + +Arrow key +Ctrl + arrow key + + +Moves the selected control in steps of 1 mm in the respective direction. In point edit mode, it changes the size of the selected control. + + + + Option -Alt+arrow key - - -Moves the selected control in the respective direction of one pixel. - - - - +Alt+arrow key + + +Moves the selected control in the respective direction of one pixel. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Tab - - -In point edit mode, jumps to next handle. - - - - +Ctrl+Tab + + +In point edit mode, jumps to next handle. + + + + Shift+Command -Ctrl+Tab - - -In point edit mode, jumps to previous handle. - - - - -Esc - - -Leaves the current selection. - - -
- -
- - - - - +Ctrl+Tab + + +In point edit mode, jumps to previous handle. + + + + +Esc + + +Leaves the current selection. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp index ef0652b120..c02f352383 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Getting Support -/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Getting Support +/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-support; %PRODUCTNAME +support; %PRODUCTNAME Sun Microsystems support - + Getting Support - + You can find help and support on the OpenOffice.org website at www.openoffice.org. - -The Sun Microsystems Support Center can help you solve problems you may encounter while working with %PRODUCTNAME. -For a summary of the current support services refer to the Readme file in the %PRODUCTNAME folder. -Visit www.sun.com/star/support in the Internet for more information. + +The Sun Microsystems Support Center can help you solve problems you may encounter while working with %PRODUCTNAME. +For a summary of the current support services refer to the Readme file in the %PRODUCTNAME folder. +Visit www.sun.com/star/support in the Internet for more information. You can always find current information about Sun Microsystems and %PRODUCTNAME on the Sun Microsystems homepage. - -
- - + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp index d32317b9c4..117cf8f3fc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Contents - The Main Help Topics -/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Contents - The Main Help Topics +/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -Help; topics -Help; tree view of +Help; topics +Help; tree view of tree view of Help - + - + Contents - The Main Help Topics - -Displays the main help themes, arranged in a similar way to folders in a file manager. - - - + +Displays the main help themes, arranged in a similar way to folders in a file manager. +
+ + Icon - - - -Double-click a closed folder to open it and display the subfolders and Help pages. - - - - + + + +Double-click a closed folder to open it and display the subfolders and Help pages. + + + + Icon - - - -Double-click an open folder to close it and hide the subfolders and Help pages. - - - - + + + +Double-click an open folder to close it and hide the subfolders and Help pages. + + + + Icon - - - -Double-click a document icon to display the corresponding Help page. - - -
- -Use the arrow keys in combination with the Return key to drop down and roll up entries and to open documents. - - - - - - - - + + + +Double-click a document icon to display the corresponding Help page. + + + + +Use the arrow keys in combination with the Return key to drop down and roll up entries and to open documents. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp index a7a295341e..8fb2ac0bf7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -$[officename] HTML Templates -/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30840# - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +$[officename] HTML Templates +/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30840# + + +
-HTML; templates overview -templates; HTML default template -character styles; HTML -HTML; character styles -formatting; HTML +HTML; templates overview +templates; HTML default template +character styles; HTML +HTML; character styles +formatting; HTML HTML; formatting - -$[officename] HTML Templates -To create a new web page for the Internet, open a new HTML Document by choosing File - New. -
-A tool for creating new web pages is the Online-Layout-Mode, which you can open by choosing View - Online Layout. As soon as you have activated this mode you will see only those options in the menus and dialogs of $[officename] which can be used on HTML pages. -Creating a New Web Page - - -Switch to the Online-Layout-Mode by choosing View - Online Layout or by opening a new HTML document. $[officename] will then internally use the html.stw template which is located in $[officepath]/share/template/english/internal - - -You can enter text and insert objects into the new page as if it were a normal text page. Use the special paragraph and character templates that are provided by the HTML template. When the HTML is exported, $[officename] will try to convert the document as close to the original as possible, depending on what the HTML format permits. - - -To create an HTML page from your $[officename] document, save the page using one of the "HTML Document" file types, such as the .HTM or .HTML extensions. - - -HTML Template (Standard) -The pages of the HTML standard template have no margins and unlimited length so that your pages will not have page breaks. -HTML Paragraph Styles -The special Paragraph Styles for HTML pages have the following meaning: - - - -Paragraph Styles - - -Definition - - - - -BLOCKQUOTE - - -The text will be indented and in italics. - - - - -DD 1-3, DT 1-3 - - -Glossaries can be structured using DT and DD formats. The first level will be titled DT1; the corresponding glossary text will be titled DD1. The first sublevel will be titled DT2 for the title and DD2 for the text. The third level will be formatted using DT3 and DD3. -DT1 is left justified, DD1 is indented once, DT2 is indented like DD1, and so on. DD is followed by a line break <p>, whereas DT is not. - - - - -HR - - -Inserts a horizontal line the entire width of the page. - - - - -PRE - - -Text is formatted as preformatted text in the unproportional (TrueType) font, Courier. Since all spaces also appear in HTML text, this format is suitable for program listings with spaces and other similar types of texts. - - -
- -Character Styles for HTML Pages -There are specific font styles for HTML pages available: - - - -Font Styles - - -Definition - - - - -Internet Link - - -Blue underlined font - - - - -Visited Internet link - - -Red underlined font - - - - -ABBREV - - -Logical markup for abbreviations - - - - -ACRONYM - - -Logical markup for acronyms - - - - -AU - - -Logical markup for author names - - - - -BLINK - - -Logical markup for blinking text. - - - - -QUOTE - - -Logical markup for quotations - - - - -CODE - - -Logical markup for source code - - - - -DEL - - -Logical markup for deletions (revision marks) - - - - -DFN - - -Logical markup for definitions - - - - -EM - - -Logical markup for highlighting - - - - -INS - - -Logical markup for insertions (revision marks) - - - - -KBD - - -Logical markup for terminal characters - - - - -LANG - - -Logical markup for foreign languages - - - - -PERSON - - -Logical markup for people's names - - - - -Q - - -Logical markup for short quotations - - - - -SAMP - - -Logical markup for examples - - - - -STRONG - - -Logical markup for important text - - - - -TT - - -Logical markup for text in teletype fonts - - - - -VAR - - -Logical markup for names of variables - - -
- -Most of the formatting codes will be exported as HTML tags, but many Web browsers will display it in normal text. -Converting Formatting to HTML -$[officename] is able to create the correct HTML code from your document. This means that listings in your documents will be exported as HTML tags which can then be displayed as either listings or lists in the Web browsers. Below you will find a selection of some of these formats: - - - -Formatting in a $[officename] Document - - -HTML Tag Types - - - - -(Automatically creating headers) - - -<head> - - - - -Titles in the Document Properties dialog. - - -<title> - - - - -Paragraph formatting for headers 1 to x - - -<H1> to <Hx> - - - - -Sender Paragraph Style - - -<address> - - - - -Text document tables - - -<table ...> - - - - -Bold - - -<b> - - - - -Italic - - -<i> - - - - -Underline - - -<u> - - - - -Bulleted list - - -<ul> as the introduction, <li> for each list item - - - - -Numbered list - - -<ol> as the introduction, <li> for each list item - - - - -Subscript - - -<sub> - - - - -Superscript - - -<super> - - - - -Inserted comments - - -<!-- becomes a comment --> - - - - -Inserted sections - - -<div ID="section name">.....</div> - - -
- - - + +$[officename] HTML Templates +To create a new web page for the Internet, open a new HTML Document by choosing File - New. + +A tool for creating new web pages is the Online-Layout-Mode, which you can open by choosing View - Online Layout. As soon as you have activated this mode you will see only those options in the menus and dialogs of $[officename] which can be used on HTML pages. +Creating a New Web Page + + +Switch to the Online-Layout-Mode by choosing View - Online Layout or by opening a new HTML document. $[officename] will then internally use the html.stw template which is located in $[officepath]/share/template/english/internal + + +You can enter text and insert objects into the new page as if it were a normal text page. Use the special paragraph and character templates that are provided by the HTML template. When the HTML is exported, $[officename] will try to convert the document as close to the original as possible, depending on what the HTML format permits. + + +To create an HTML page from your $[officename] document, save the page using one of the "HTML Document" file types, such as the .HTM or .HTML extensions. + + +HTML Template (Standard) +The pages of the HTML standard template have no margins and unlimited length so that your pages will not have page breaks. +HTML Paragraph Styles +The special Paragraph Styles for HTML pages have the following meaning: + + + +Paragraph Styles + + +Definition + + + + +BLOCKQUOTE + + +The text will be indented and in italics. + + + + +DD 1-3, DT 1-3 + + +Glossaries can be structured using DT and DD formats. The first level will be titled DT1; the corresponding glossary text will be titled DD1. The first sublevel will be titled DT2 for the title and DD2 for the text. The third level will be formatted using DT3 and DD3. +DT1 is left justified, DD1 is indented once, DT2 is indented like DD1, and so on. DD is followed by a line break <p>, whereas DT is not. + + + + +HR + + +Inserts a horizontal line the entire width of the page. + + + + +PRE + + +Text is formatted as preformatted text in the unproportional (TrueType) font, Courier. Since all spaces also appear in HTML text, this format is suitable for program listings with spaces and other similar types of texts. + + +
+ +Character Styles for HTML Pages +There are specific font styles for HTML pages available: + + + +Font Styles + + +Definition + + + + +Internet Link + + +Blue underlined font + + + + +Visited Internet link + + +Red underlined font + + + + +ABBREV + + +Logical markup for abbreviations + + + + +ACRONYM + + +Logical markup for acronyms + + + + +AU + + +Logical markup for author names + + + + +BLINK + + +Logical markup for blinking text. + + + + +QUOTE + + +Logical markup for quotations + + + + +CODE + + +Logical markup for source code + + + + +DEL + + +Logical markup for deletions (revision marks) + + + + +DFN + + +Logical markup for definitions + + + + +EM + + +Logical markup for highlighting + + + + +INS + + +Logical markup for insertions (revision marks) + + + + +KBD + + +Logical markup for terminal characters + + + + +LANG + + +Logical markup for foreign languages + + + + +PERSON + + +Logical markup for people's names + + + + +Q + + +Logical markup for short quotations + + + + +SAMP + + +Logical markup for examples + + + + +STRONG + + +Logical markup for important text + + + + +TT + + +Logical markup for text in teletype fonts + + + + +VAR + + +Logical markup for names of variables + + +
+ +Most of the formatting codes will be exported as HTML tags, but many Web browsers will display it in normal text. +Converting Formatting to HTML +$[officename] is able to create the correct HTML code from your document. This means that listings in your documents will be exported as HTML tags which can then be displayed as either listings or lists in the Web browsers. Below you will find a selection of some of these formats: + + + +Formatting in a $[officename] Document + + +HTML Tag Types + + + + +(Automatically creating headers) + + +<head> + + + + +Titles in the Document Properties dialog. + + +<title> + + + + +Paragraph formatting for headers 1 to x + + +<H1> to <Hx> + + + + +Sender Paragraph Style + + +<address> + + + + +Text document tables + + +<table ...> + + + + +Bold + + +<b> + + + + +Italic + + +<i> + + + + +Underline + + +<u> + + + + +Bulleted list + + +<ul> as the introduction, <li> for each list item + + + + +Numbered list + + +<ol> as the introduction, <li> for each list item + + + + +Subscript + + +<sub> + + + + +Superscript + + +<super> + + + + +Inserted comments + + +<!-- becomes a comment --> + + + + +Inserted sections + + +<div ID="section name">.....</div> + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp index 261a79ffcc..290f484540 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Letter Wizard - Page 1 -/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: new Wizard - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Letter Wizard - Page 1 +/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: new Wizard + + +
- -Letter Wizard - Page design -Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter. The available options on the following pages vary depending on your choice. -
- -Please choose the type of letter and page design + +Letter Wizard - Page design +Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter. The available options on the following pages vary depending on your choice. + + +Please choose the type of letter and page design Specify whether you want to create a business or personal letter template. - -Business letter + +Business letter Specifies that you want to create a business letter template. - -Formal personal letter + +Formal personal letter Specifies that you want to create a formal personal letter. - -Personal letter + +Personal letter Specifies that you want to create a personal letter. - -Page design + +Page design Select the design for your letter template. - -Use letterhead paper with pre-printed elements -Check if you use paper where your logo, own address, or a footer line is already imprinted. Then the Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next. -Go to Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout - - + +Use letterhead paper with pre-printed elements +Check if you use paper where your logo, own address, or a footer line is already imprinted. Then the Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next. +Go to Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp index db3fbbfefc..1ee6e12fee 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Letter Wizard - Page 2 -/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: new Wizard - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Letter Wizard - Page 2 +/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: new Wizard + + +
- -Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout -On this page, you select the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper. Those elements are not printed, and the space they occupy is left blank by the printer. -
- + +Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout +On this page, you select the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper. Those elements are not printed, and the space they occupy is left blank by the printer. + + Specify items already on your letterhead paper - -Logo + +Logo Check if a logo is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a logo then. - -Height + +Height Defines the height of the object. - -Width + +Width Defines the width of the object. - -Spacing to left margin + +Spacing to left margin Sets the object distance from the left page margin. - -Spacing to top margin + +Spacing to top margin Sets the object distance from the top page margin. - -Own address + +Own address Check if your own address is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an own address then. - -Return address in envelope window + +Return address in envelope window Check if your own address is imprinted in small size above the sender address. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an own address in small size then. - -Footer + +Footer Check if a footer area is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a footer then. - -Height -Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area then. -Go to Letter Wizard - Printed items - - + +Height +Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area then. +Go to Letter Wizard - Printed items + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp index f46d1e41be..ee5cb99ea7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Letter Wizard - Page 3 -/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: new Wizard - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Letter Wizard - Page 3 +/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: new Wizard + + +
- -Letter Wizard - Printed items -Defines the items to be included in the letter template. -
+ +Letter Wizard - Printed items +Defines the items to be included in the letter template. + - -Use a typical letter format for this country + +Use a typical letter format for this country Select a country to use a typical letter layout from that country. - -Logo + +Logo Include a logo on the letter template. - -Return address in envelope window + +Return address in envelope window Include a small size return address on the letter template. - -Letter signs + +Letter signs Include a line with references to a business letter on the letter template. - -Subject line + +Subject line Include a subject line on the letter template. - -Salutation + +Salutation Include a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box. - -Fold marks + +Fold marks Include fold marks on the letter template. - -Complimentary close + +Complimentary close Include a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box. - -Footer -Include a footer on the letter template. -Go to Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender - - + +Footer +Include a footer on the letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp index 278b81eaf7..b881ca6724 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Letter Wizard - Page 4 -/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: new Wizard - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Letter Wizard - Page 4 +/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: new Wizard + + +
- -Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender -Specify the sender and recipient information. -
- -Sender's address + +Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender +Specify the sender and recipient information. + + +Sender's address Enter your own address information. - -Use user data for return address + +Use user data for return address Use the address data from Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User data. - -New sender address + +New sender address Use the address data from the following text boxes. - -Name + +Name Enter the name of the sender. - -Street + +Street Enter the street address of the sender. - -Postcode/State/City -Enter the address data of the sender. -Recipient's address + +Postcode/State/City +Enter the address data of the sender. +Recipient's address Enter the address information where to send the letter to. - -Use placeholders for recipient's address + +Use placeholders for recipient's address Placeholder fields are inserted into the letter template. - -Use address database for mail merge -Address database fields are inserted into the letter template. -Go to Letter Wizard - Footer - + +Use address database for mail merge +Address database fields are inserted into the letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Footer + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp index d2126c5f67..b80b5c1e97 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Letter Wizard - Page 5 -/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Letter Wizard - Page 5 +/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Letter Wizard - Footer -Specifies the information to include in the footer space. -
+ +Letter Wizard - Footer +Specifies the information to include in the footer space. + - -Footer + +Footer Enter the text for the footer lines. - -Include only on second and following pages + +Include only on second and following pages Select to suppress the footer on the first page. - -Include page numbers -Includes page numbers in your letter template. -Go to Letter Wizard - Name and location - - + +Include page numbers +Includes page numbers in your letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Name and location + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp index c6cb9f8d50..f10a204f1b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Letter Wizard - Page 6 -/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Letter Wizard - Page 6 +/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Letter Wizard - Name and Location -Specifies where and under which name you want to save the document and template. -
+ +Letter Wizard - Name and Location +Specifies where and under which name you want to save the document and template. + - -Template name + +Template name Specifies the title of the document template. - -Path + +Path Enter the path and file name for the template or click the ... button to select the path and file name. - -Create a letter from this template + +Create a letter from this template Select to save and close the template and open a new untitled document based on the template. - -Make manual changes to this letter template -Select to save the template and keep it open for editing. -Letter Wizard overview - + +Make manual changes to this letter template +Select to save the template and keep it open for editing. +Letter Wizard overview + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp index 6f3717820f..76aa55f87c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -AutoPilot Agenda - Page 3 -/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: edited for new Wizard - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +AutoPilot Agenda - Page 3 +/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: edited for new Wizard + + +
- -Agenda Wizard - Headings -Select the headings you want to include in the agenda. -
- -Type of meeting -Specifies to print a type of meeting line. -Please read -Specifies to print a Please read line. -Please bring -Specifies to print a Please bring line. -Notes -Specifies to print a Notes line. -Go to Agenda Wizard - Names - - + +Agenda Wizard - Headings +Select the headings you want to include in the agenda. + + +Type of meeting +Specifies to print a type of meeting line. +Please read +Specifies to print a Please read line. +Please bring +Specifies to print a Please bring line. +Notes +Specifies to print a Notes line. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Names + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp index 051dff2011..d3deb612fb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -AutoPilot Agenda - Page 4 -/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: edited for new Wizard - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +AutoPilot Agenda - Page 4 +/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: edited for new Wizard + + +
- -Agenda Wizard - Names -Specifies the names to be printed on the agenda. -
- -Meeting called by -Specifies to print a line where you can enter the person who called the meeting. -Facilitator -Specifies to print a line where you can enter the facilitator. -Note taker -Specifies to print a line where you can enter the note taker. -Timekeeper -Specifies to print a line where you can enter the timekeeper. -Attendees -Specifies to print a line where you can enter the attendees. -Observers -Specifies to print a line where you can enter the observers. -Resource persons -Specifies to print a line where you can enter the resource persons. -Go to Agenda Wizard - Topics - - + +Agenda Wizard - Names +Specifies the names to be printed on the agenda. + + +Meeting called by +Specifies to print a line where you can enter the person who called the meeting. +Facilitator +Specifies to print a line where you can enter the facilitator. +Note taker +Specifies to print a line where you can enter the note taker. +Timekeeper +Specifies to print a line where you can enter the timekeeper. +Attendees +Specifies to print a line where you can enter the attendees. +Observers +Specifies to print a line where you can enter the observers. +Resource persons +Specifies to print a line where you can enter the resource persons. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Topics + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp index 5015d9efac..98de5026bf 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -AutoPilot Agenda - Page 5 -/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: edited for new Wizard - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +AutoPilot Agenda - Page 5 +/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: edited for new Wizard + + +
- -Agenda Wizard - Topics -Specifies the topics to be printed on the agenda template. -
- -Topics -Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics. -Insert -Click to insert a new empty topic row above the current row. -Remove -Click to remove the current topic row. -Move up -Click to move the current topic row up. -Move down -Click to move the current topic row down. -Go to Agenda Wizard - Title and location - - + +Agenda Wizard - Topics +Specifies the topics to be printed on the agenda template. + + +Topics +Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics. +Insert +Click to insert a new empty topic row above the current row. +Remove +Click to remove the current topic row. +Move up +Click to move the current topic row up. +Move down +Click to move the current topic row down. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Title and location + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp index 616442b3da..e7bde68d36 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -AutoPilot Agenda - Page 6 -/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: edited for new Wizard - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +AutoPilot Agenda - Page 6 +/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: edited for new Wizard + + +
- -Agenda Wizard - Title and Location -Choose the title and location for the agenda template. -
- -Template title -Enter the name of the agenda template. -Path -Enter or select the complete path including file name of the agenda template. -Create an agenda from this template -Select to create and save the agenda template, then open a new agenda document based on that template. -Make manual changes to this template -Select to create and save the agenda template, then open the template for further editing. -Go to Agenda Wizard - - + +Agenda Wizard - Title and Location +Choose the title and location for the agenda template. + + +Template title +Enter the name of the agenda template. +Path +Enter or select the complete path including file name of the agenda template. +Create an agenda from this template +Select to create and save the agenda template, then open a new agenda document based on that template. +Make manual changes to this template +Select to create and save the agenda template, then open the template for further editing. +Go to Agenda Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp index 0b6bf43498..b551dee4e9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Presentation Wizard -/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Presentation Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -wizards; presentations +wizards; presentations presentations; wizards - -Presentation Wizard + +Presentation Wizard Use the wizard to interactively create a presentation. With the wizard, you can modify the sample templates to suit your needs. - The wizard takes you step by step through the design elements and offers various editing options. - -The Presentation Wizard starts automatically when you open a new presentation. You can deactivate this function if you choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General and deselect the Start with Wizard check box. -Within each wizard page, you can undo, modify, or skip altogether the editing steps. If you decide to skip over one of the pages, the wizard uses the default settings. - - - - + The wizard takes you step by step through the design elements and offers various editing options. + +The Presentation Wizard starts automatically when you open a new presentation. You can deactivate this function if you choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General and deselect the Start with Wizard check box. +Within each wizard page, you can undo, modify, or skip altogether the editing steps. If you decide to skip over one of the pages, the wizard uses the default settings. + + + + - -<< Back + +<< Back Returns to the previous step without deleting your current settings. You can only select this button after the second editing step. - -Next >> -Accepts the new settings and moves to the next page. You will not be able to select this button in the last editing step. -Create -The wizard creates a new document based on the specified settings. You can later specify a name for the document and save it. -$[officename] saves the current wizard settings and uses them as default the next time you open the wizard. - - + +Next >> +Accepts the new settings and moves to the next page. You will not be able to select this button in the last editing step. +Create +The wizard creates a new document based on the specified settings. You can later specify a name for the document and save it. +$[officename] saves the current wizard settings and uses them as default the next time you open the wizard. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp index f574765a23..75ccd95c57 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Presentation Wizard Page 1 -/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i31165# - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Presentation Wizard Page 1 +/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i31165# + + +
- -Presentation Wizard Page 1 -Specifies the presentation type and allows you to select a template. -
- -Type + +Presentation Wizard Page 1 +Specifies the presentation type and allows you to select a template. + + +Type You can determine the presentation type in this area. - -Empty presentation + +Empty presentation Creates a new (empty) presentation. - -From template + +From template Opens a list box containing various modifiable presentations. - -Open existing presentation + +Open existing presentation Displays a list of previously created presentations. To load a presentation created in another area of your hard disk, double-click Other Position. The Open dialog then appears. - -List of template categories (only available when you select the From template option) + +List of template categories (only available when you select the From template option) Lists the available template categories for presentations. - -List of existing presentations (only available when you select the Open existing presentation option) + +List of existing presentations (only available when you select the Open existing presentation option) Lists the presentations that you created and saved to the Templates directory that is specified under Tools - Options - %PRODCUTNAME - Paths. To edit the layout and formatting of a presentation with the AutoPilot, select the presentation, and then click Next. If the presentation is located in a different directory, double-click the Other Position entry and locate the presentation. - -Preview + +Preview Specifies that templates appear in the preview window. - -Do not show this dialog again -Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation. This field is only visible when you create a presentation by choosing File - New - Presentation. You can also specify whether to show the dialog with the Start with Wizard check box in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. -Continue here to Wizard Page 2. - - + +Do not show this dialog again +Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation. This field is only visible when you create a presentation by choosing File - New - Presentation. You can also specify whether to show the dialog with the Start with Wizard check box in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. +Continue here to Wizard Page 2. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp index eefd4d3e9c..01a5efa533 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Form Wizard - Field Selection -/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: edited for new Wizard - - - -
-Form Wizard - Field Selection -On this page of the Form Wizard, you specify the table or query you need to create the form, and which fields you wish to include in the form. -
+ ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Form Wizard - Field Selection +/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: edited for new Wizard + + + +
+Form Wizard - Field Selection +On this page of the Form Wizard, you specify the table or query you need to create the form, and which fields you wish to include in the form. +
- -Tables or queries -Specifies the table or query for which the form is to be created. + +Tables or queries +Specifies the table or query for which the form is to be created.
- -Available fields + +Available fields Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query. Click to select a field or press the Shift or Command -Ctrl key while clicking to select multiple fields. -
+Ctrl key while clicking to select multiple fields. +
- -> -Click to transfer the selected field(s) to the right box. -
+ +> +Click to transfer the selected field(s) to the right box. +
- ->> -Click to transfer all fields to the right box. -
+ +>> +Click to transfer all fields to the right box. +
- -< -Click to remove the selected field from the right box. The fields will be displayed again in the left box. -
+ +< +Click to remove the selected field from the right box. The fields will be displayed again in the left box. +
- -<< -Click to remove all fields from the right box. -
-
-^ -Click to move the selected field up in the list. -v -Click to move the selected field down in the list. + +<< +Click to remove all fields from the right box. +
+
+^ +Click to move the selected field up in the list. +v +Click to move the selected field down in the list.
- -Fields in my form -Displays all fields that will be included in the new form. -Form Wizard - Set up a subform - - + +Fields in my form +Displays all fields that will be included in the new form. +Form Wizard - Set up a subform + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp index 583eaf6c2f..15510f42a5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Form Wizard - Set up a Subform -text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp - - -UFI: new Form Wizard page 2 - - - - -
-Form Wizard - Set up a Subform -Specify if you want to use a subform and enter the subform's properties. A subform is a form that is inserted in another form. -
-Add subform -Select to add a subform. -Sub form based on existing relation -Click to add a subform based on an existing relation. -Which relation do you want to add? -Select the relation on which the subform is based. -Sub form based on manual selection of fields -Click to add a subform based on a manual selection of fields. -Form Wizard - Add subform fields - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Form Wizard - Set up a Subform +text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 2 + + + + +
+Form Wizard - Set up a Subform +Specify if you want to use a subform and enter the subform's properties. A subform is a form that is inserted in another form. +
+Add subform +Select to add a subform. +Sub form based on existing relation +Click to add a subform based on an existing relation. +Which relation do you want to add? +Select the relation on which the subform is based. +Sub form based on manual selection of fields +Click to add a subform based on a manual selection of fields. +Form Wizard - Add subform fields + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp index 294a33f063..7839c638b6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Form Wizard - Add Subform Fields -text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp - - -UFI: new Form Wizard page 3 - - - - -
-Form Wizard - Add Subform Fields -Specify the table or query you need to create the subform, and which fields you wish to include in the subform. -
-Tables or queries -Specifies the table or query for which the subform is to be created. - - - - - - -Fields in my subform -Displays all fields that will be included in the new subform. -Form Wizard - Get joined fields - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Form Wizard - Add Subform Fields +text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 3 + + + + +
+Form Wizard - Add Subform Fields +Specify the table or query you need to create the subform, and which fields you wish to include in the subform. +
+Tables or queries +Specifies the table or query for which the subform is to be created. + + + + + + +Fields in my subform +Displays all fields that will be included in the new subform. +Form Wizard - Get joined fields + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp index da313a1b13..12a7cc2560 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Form Wizard - Get Joined Fields -text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp - - -UFI: new Form Wizard page 4 - - - - -
-Form Wizard - Get Joined Fields -When you chose in step 2 to set up a subform based on manual selection of fields, you can select the joined fields on this Wizard page. -
-First joined subform field -Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field which you select in the list box next to this list box. -First joined main form field -Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Second joined subform field -Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Second joined main form field -Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Third joined subform field -Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Third joined main form field -Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Fourth joined subform field -Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Fourth joined main form field -Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field which you select in the list box next to this list box. -Form Wizard - Arrange controls - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Form Wizard - Get Joined Fields +text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 4 + + + + +
+Form Wizard - Get Joined Fields +When you chose in step 2 to set up a subform based on manual selection of fields, you can select the joined fields on this Wizard page. +
+First joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field which you select in the list box next to this list box. +First joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Second joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Second joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Third joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Third joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Fourth joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Fourth joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Form Wizard - Arrange controls + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp index 443e751b53..b2e1ed5642 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Form Wizard - Arrange Controls -/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: edited for new Wizard - - - -
-Form Wizard - Arrange Controls -On this page of the Wizard you can select the layout of the created form. -
- + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Form Wizard - Arrange Controls +/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: edited for new Wizard + + + +
+Form Wizard - Arrange Controls +On this page of the Wizard you can select the layout of the created form. +
+ Label placement - -Align left + +Align left The labels are left-aligned. - -Align right -The labels are right-aligned. + +Align right +The labels are right-aligned. Arrangement of the main form - -Columnar - Labels Left + +Columnar - Labels Left Aligns the database fields columnwise with the labels to the left of the fields. - -Columnar - Labels on Top + +Columnar - Labels on Top Aligns the database fields columnwise with the labels above the field. - -As Data Sheet + +As Data Sheet Aligns the database fields in a tabular form. - -In Blocks - Labels Above -Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. -Arrangement of the subform -Columnar - Labels Left -Aligns the database fields columnwise with the labels to the left of the fields. -Columnar - Labels on Top -Aligns the database fields columnwise with the labels above the field. -As Data Sheet -Aligns the database fields in a tabular form. -In Blocks - Labels Above -Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. -Form Wizard - Set data entry - - + +In Blocks - Labels Above +Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. +Arrangement of the subform +Columnar - Labels Left +Aligns the database fields columnwise with the labels to the left of the fields. +Columnar - Labels on Top +Aligns the database fields columnwise with the labels above the field. +As Data Sheet +Aligns the database fields in a tabular form. +In Blocks - Labels Above +Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. +Form Wizard - Set data entry + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp index 4be59daab2..4429c1c14e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Form Wizard - Set Data Entry -text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp - - -UFI: new Form Wizard - - - - -
-Form Wizard - Set Data Entry -Select the data handling mode for the new form. -
-The form is to be used for entering new data only, existing data will not be displayed -Select to create a form that is only used for entering new data. -The form is to display all data -Select to create a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data. -Do not allow modification of existing data -Select to disallow editing data. -Do not allow deletion of existing data -Select to disallow deleting data. -Do not allow addition of new data -Select to disallow adding new data. -Form Wizard - Apply styles - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Form Wizard - Set Data Entry +text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard + + + + +
+Form Wizard - Set Data Entry +Select the data handling mode for the new form. +
+The form is to be used for entering new data only, existing data will not be displayed +Select to create a form that is only used for entering new data. +The form is to display all data +Select to create a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data. +Do not allow modification of existing data +Select to disallow editing data. +Do not allow deletion of existing data +Select to disallow deleting data. +Do not allow addition of new data +Select to disallow adding new data. +Form Wizard - Apply styles + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp index 80d21d4644..79093004b2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Form Wizard - Apply Styles -text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp - - -UFI: new Form Wizard page 7 - - - - -
-Form Wizard - Apply Styles -Specify the form style. -
-Page styles -Select a page style for the form. -Field border -Select a field border style. -No border -The fields have no border. -3D look -The field borders have a 3D look. -Flat -The field borders look flat. -Form Wizard - Set name - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Form Wizard - Apply Styles +text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 7 + + + + +
+Form Wizard - Apply Styles +Specify the form style. +
+Page styles +Select a page style for the form. +Field border +Select a field border style. +No border +The fields have no border. +3D look +The field borders have a 3D look. +Flat +The field borders look flat. +Form Wizard - Set name + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp index 870e3636c2..21c4719c22 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -HTML Export - Page 2 -/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +HTML Export - Page 2 +/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-kiosk export -HTML; live presentations -live presentations in the Internet -showing;live presentations in the Internet -presentations; live in the Internet -Internet; presentations +kiosk export +HTML; live presentations +live presentations in the Internet +showing;live presentations in the Internet +presentations; live in the Internet +Internet; presentations WebCast; exporting - -HTML Export - Page 2 -Determines the type of publication. -
-You can specify if you want to include frames, create a title, or display presentation notes. - -Publication type + +HTML Export - Page 2 +Determines the type of publication. + +You can specify if you want to include frames, create a title, or display presentation notes. + +Publication type Defines the basic settings for the intended export. - -Standard HTML format + +Standard HTML format Creates standard HTML pages from export pages. - -Standard HTML with frames + +Standard HTML with frames Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks. - -Create title page + +Create title page Creates a title page for your document. - + Show notes - + Specifies that your notes are also displayed. - -Automatic + +Automatic Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time. - -As stated in document + +As stated in document The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard. - -Automatic + +Automatic The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents. - -Slide view time + +Slide view time Defines the amount of time for each slide display. - -Endless + +Endless Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed. - -WebCast + +WebCast In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support. This enables the speaker (for example, a speaker in a telephone conference using a slide show in the Internet) to change the slides in the audience's web browsers. You will find more information on WebCast later in this section. - -Active Server Pages (ASP) + +Active Server Pages (ASP) When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP. - -Perl + +Perl Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts. - -URL for listeners + +URL for listeners Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation. - -URL for presentation + +URL for presentation Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved. - -URL for Perl scripts -Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts. -More Information on WebCast Export -There are two possible options for exporting $[officename] Impress presentations using WebCast technology: Active Server Pages (ASP) and Perl. -In either case, the WebCast needs an HTTP server offering either Perl or ASP as scripting. Therefore, the exporting option depends on the HTTP server used. -WebCast in ASP -Exporting - - -To export to ASP, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. You then see the Export dialog in which you select HTML Document as the file type. Once you have selected a directory and entered a file name, click Save. For export as ASP, we recommend selecting a "secret" file name for the HTML file (see below for more details). You then see the HTML Export dialog. Several files will be written to the directory you have just selected. - - -The presenter uses the entered file name to change between the slides viewed by the audience. You can save the WebCast files locally or save them directly to an HTTP server. You can later transfer locally saved files to the HTTP server by FTP. Note that WebCast only works if the files are requested over an HTTP server. - - -Do not use the same directory for two different HTML exports. - - -Select WebCast as a publishing type on the second page of the HTML Export Wizard. - - -In the options area for WebCast, select the Active Server Pages (ASP) option. You can now continue defining other settings or start the export by clicking the Create button. - - -Using ASP WebCast -You can use WebCast as soon as the exported files can be accessed from an HTTP server. - -Example: -Let's assume that you installed the Microsoft Internet Information Server on your computer. You entered the "c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation" directory as an HTML output directory during the IIS setup. The URL of your computer is assumed as follows: "http://myserver.com". - - -You have saved the files that have been created during the Export process in the c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation\ directory. In this directory, the Export creates an HTML file that can be named, for example, as "secret.htm". You entered this name in the Save dialog (see above). The presenter can now browse to the HTML Export files by entering the http://myserver.com/presentation/secret.htm URL in any HTTP Browser having JavaScript support. The presenter is now able to modify the page using some form controls. - - -The audience can now view the slide selected by the presenter through the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/webcast.asp. They cannot move to other slides found at this URL, unless the file names are known. Please ensure that the HTTP server does not show the directory listing. -WebCast over Perl -Exporting - - -To export, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. This opens the Export dialog, in which you select HTML Document as the file type. After selecting a folder and entering a file name, click Save. This opens the HTML Export Wizard. This will write some files to the folder you have just selected. - - - - -The entered file name will be used by the presenter to switch through the slides. Please select an empty directory. - - -In the second page of the HTML Export, select WebCast as the publication type. - - -In the option area for WebCast, select Perl. - - -In the URL for listeners text box, enter the file name of the HTML document that will be used by the audience. In URL for presentation, enter the URL of the directory that will be used for the presentation and, in URL for Perl scripts, enter the URL for the CGI script directory. You can now define further settings on the following pages of the Wizard or start the export process by clicking the Create button. - - -Using Perl WebCast -The files that have been created during the export must now be set up in the Perl enabled HTTP server. This cannot be done automatically because of the variety of different HTTP servers having Perl support. The steps to follow will be described next. Please refer to your server manual or ask your network administrator how to apply these steps on your server. - - -You should first move the files that have been created during the export into the correct directory on the HTTP server. - - - - -Move all files having the htm, jpg and gif extensions into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the text box URL for presentation. - - -All files having the pl and txt extensions have to be moved into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the URL for Perl scripts text box. This directory has to be configured in a way that the Perl scripts contained there can also be run by an HTTP request. - - -On UNIX systems grant the files with the pl extension the rights to be executable by the HTTP server. Normally, this is done with the chmod command. The rights of the currpic.txt file must be set to be writable by the HTTP server. - - -Now you should be able to use WebCast. - -Example: -In this example, you have a Linux computer with an HTTP server. The URL of your HTTP server is http://myserver.com and the output directory of your HTML documents is the //user/local/http/ directory. Your Perl scripts are contained in the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. Enter secret.htm as an export file name and presentation.htm as URL for listeners. In the URL for presentation text box enter http://myserver.com/presentation/ and for the URL for Perl scripts enter http://myserver.com/cgi-bin/. - - -Now, copy all *.htm, *.jpg and *.gif files from the directories that were specified during the export into the //user/local/http/presentation/ directory on your HTTP Server and copy all files with the *.pl and *.txt extensions into the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. - - -Login on your server as root and switch to the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. You can define the corresponding rights using the chmod command. - - -Once you have finished installing the Perl files, the presenter will be able to give the presentation. The listeners can view this presentation under the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/presentation.htm. - - + +URL for Perl scripts +Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts. +More Information on WebCast Export +There are two possible options for exporting $[officename] Impress presentations using WebCast technology: Active Server Pages (ASP) and Perl. +In either case, the WebCast needs an HTTP server offering either Perl or ASP as scripting. Therefore, the exporting option depends on the HTTP server used. +WebCast in ASP +Exporting + + +To export to ASP, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. You then see the Export dialog in which you select HTML Document as the file type. Once you have selected a directory and entered a file name, click Save. For export as ASP, we recommend selecting a "secret" file name for the HTML file (see below for more details). You then see the HTML Export dialog. Several files will be written to the directory you have just selected. + + +The presenter uses the entered file name to change between the slides viewed by the audience. You can save the WebCast files locally or save them directly to an HTTP server. You can later transfer locally saved files to the HTTP server by FTP. Note that WebCast only works if the files are requested over an HTTP server. + + +Do not use the same directory for two different HTML exports. + + +Select WebCast as a publishing type on the second page of the HTML Export Wizard. + + +In the options area for WebCast, select the Active Server Pages (ASP) option. You can now continue defining other settings or start the export by clicking the Create button. + + +Using ASP WebCast +You can use WebCast as soon as the exported files can be accessed from an HTTP server. + +Example: +Let's assume that you installed the Microsoft Internet Information Server on your computer. You entered the "c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation" directory as an HTML output directory during the IIS setup. The URL of your computer is assumed as follows: "http://myserver.com". + + +You have saved the files that have been created during the Export process in the c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation\ directory. In this directory, the Export creates an HTML file that can be named, for example, as "secret.htm". You entered this name in the Save dialog (see above). The presenter can now browse to the HTML Export files by entering the http://myserver.com/presentation/secret.htm URL in any HTTP Browser having JavaScript support. The presenter is now able to modify the page using some form controls. + + +The audience can now view the slide selected by the presenter through the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/webcast.asp. They cannot move to other slides found at this URL, unless the file names are known. Please ensure that the HTTP server does not show the directory listing. +WebCast over Perl +Exporting + + +To export, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. This opens the Export dialog, in which you select HTML Document as the file type. After selecting a folder and entering a file name, click Save. This opens the HTML Export Wizard. This will write some files to the folder you have just selected. + + + + +The entered file name will be used by the presenter to switch through the slides. Please select an empty directory. + + +In the second page of the HTML Export, select WebCast as the publication type. + + +In the option area for WebCast, select Perl. + + +In the URL for listeners text box, enter the file name of the HTML document that will be used by the audience. In URL for presentation, enter the URL of the directory that will be used for the presentation and, in URL for Perl scripts, enter the URL for the CGI script directory. You can now define further settings on the following pages of the Wizard or start the export process by clicking the Create button. + + +Using Perl WebCast +The files that have been created during the export must now be set up in the Perl enabled HTTP server. This cannot be done automatically because of the variety of different HTTP servers having Perl support. The steps to follow will be described next. Please refer to your server manual or ask your network administrator how to apply these steps on your server. + + +You should first move the files that have been created during the export into the correct directory on the HTTP server. + + + + +Move all files having the htm, jpg and gif extensions into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the text box URL for presentation. + + +All files having the pl and txt extensions have to be moved into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the URL for Perl scripts text box. This directory has to be configured in a way that the Perl scripts contained there can also be run by an HTTP request. + + +On UNIX systems grant the files with the pl extension the rights to be executable by the HTTP server. Normally, this is done with the chmod command. The rights of the currpic.txt file must be set to be writable by the HTTP server. + + +Now you should be able to use WebCast. + +Example: +In this example, you have a Linux computer with an HTTP server. The URL of your HTTP server is http://myserver.com and the output directory of your HTML documents is the //user/local/http/ directory. Your Perl scripts are contained in the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. Enter secret.htm as an export file name and presentation.htm as URL for listeners. In the URL for presentation text box enter http://myserver.com/presentation/ and for the URL for Perl scripts enter http://myserver.com/cgi-bin/. + + +Now, copy all *.htm, *.jpg and *.gif files from the directories that were specified during the export into the //user/local/http/presentation/ directory on your HTTP Server and copy all files with the *.pl and *.txt extensions into the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. + + +Login on your server as root and switch to the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. You can define the corresponding rights using the chmod command. + + +Once you have finished installing the Perl files, the presenter will be able to give the presentation. The listeners can view this presentation under the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/presentation.htm. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp index 9015939adc..9f0ddda0ad 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Document Converter -/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Document Converter +/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -wizards; Microsoft import -Microsoft Office; wizard to import files -file import -importing; Microsoft document wizard -XML converters; wizards -converters; XML -wizards; XML converters -Document Converter Wizard +wizards; Microsoft import +Microsoft Office; wizard to import files +file import +importing; Microsoft document wizard +XML converters; wizards +converters; XML +wizards; XML converters +Document Converter Wizard wizards; document converter - + - -Document Converter + +Document Converter Converts documents into the XML format used by $[officename]. - - -The Wizard converts documents and templates from the binary format from previous $[officename] versions (StarOffice 5.2 and before), as well as documents from Microsoft Word, Excel and PowerPoint. The source files are only read, not edited. New target files are written with the new file name extension in the same or a new folder. -The Document Converter Wizard contains the following pages: - - -Document Converter Summary + + +The Wizard converts documents and templates from the binary format from previous $[officename] versions (StarOffice 5.2 and before), as well as documents from Microsoft Word, Excel and PowerPoint. The source files are only read, not edited. New target files are written with the new file name extension in the same or a new folder. +The Document Converter Wizard contains the following pages: + + +Document Converter Summary Displays a summary which shows what will be converted when you click Convert. - - - - - + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard00.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard00.xhp index 69cc1e9eaf..ead1edef11 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard00.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard00.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Web Wizard -text/shared/autopi/webwizard00.xhp - - -UFI: Web Wizard main page -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Web Wizard +text/shared/autopi/webwizard00.xhp + + +UFI: Web Wizard main page +dedr: reviewed + + +
- -Web Wizard -The Web Wizard helps you to maintain a web site on an Internet server.The Web Wizard converts files in a local folder to a web format and uploads the files to the server. The wizard also uses one of the supplied templates to create an index page that contains hyperlinks to the uploaded files. -
- -The Web Wizard uses the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) to upload files to a server. You cannot use the wizard to upload the files if you connect to the internet through a proxy server. -The wizard involves the following steps: - - - - - - + +Web Wizard +The Web Wizard helps you to maintain a web site on an Internet server.The Web Wizard converts files in a local folder to a web format and uploads the files to the server. The wizard also uses one of the supplied templates to create an index page that contains hyperlinks to the uploaded files. + + +The Web Wizard uses the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) to upload files to a server. You cannot use the wizard to upload the files if you connect to the internet through a proxy server. +The wizard involves the following steps: + + + + + + - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp index 188d7d58d7..a431d2fbc2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Web Wizard - Introduction -text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp - - -UFI: Web Wizard page 1 -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Web Wizard - Introduction -You can use the Web Wizard to maintain a web page on server. If you want you can load previously saved Web Wizard settings to maintain an existing web page. These settings include information on the local folder and the ftp server. + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Web Wizard - Introduction +text/shared/autopi/webwizard01.xhp + + +UFI: Web Wizard page 1 +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Web Wizard - Introduction +You can use the Web Wizard to maintain a web page on server. If you want you can load previously saved Web Wizard settings to maintain an existing web page. These settings include information on the local folder and the ftp server.
- -Choose Web Wizard settings + +Choose Web Wizard settings Select the settings that you want to load and then click Load. To start the wizard with the default settings, select "none". - -Delete -Deletes the selected settings. -Web Wizard - Documents - - + +Delete +Deletes the selected settings. +Web Wizard - Documents + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard02.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard02.xhp index 9dd2afc609..f8d71f6eec 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard02.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard02.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Web Wizard - Documents -text/shared/autopi/webwizard02.xhp - - -UFI: Web Wizard page 2 -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Web Wizard - Documents -Select the files that you want to upload to your web site. You can upload the files to a server or to a local directory. + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Web Wizard - Documents +text/shared/autopi/webwizard02.xhp + + +UFI: Web Wizard page 2 +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Web Wizard - Documents +Select the files that you want to upload to your web site. You can upload the files to a server or to a local directory.
- -Documents + +Documents Lists the documents that you want to publish to your web site. The wizard can convert %PRODUCTNAME documents to HTML, PDF, or in some cases, Flash format before the documents are uploaded. All other files are uploaded in their original file format. - -Add + +Add Opens a dialog where you can select the files that you want to have to your web site. The order of the list determines the order in which the hyperlinks to the documents are displayed on the index page of your web site. - -Remove -Removes the selected file from the list. + +Remove +Removes the selected file from the list. - -Export to file format + +Export to file format Select the file format that you want to export the selected file to. - -Title + +Title Enter the title for the selected document. The title appears as a hyperlink to the selected document on the index page of your web site. - -Summary + +Summary Enter a description for the selected document. - -Author -Enter the name of the author for the selected document. -Web Wizard - Main layout - - + +Author +Enter the name of the author for the selected document. +Web Wizard - Main layout + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard03.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard03.xhp index 35e546abde..938eb00515 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard03.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard03.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Web Wizard - Main Layout -text/shared/autopi/webwizard03.xhp - - -UFI: Web Wizard page 3 -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Web Wizard - Main Layout -Select the formatting template that you want to use for the layout of the index page of your site. The template defines the text formatting and the position of elements on the page. Some of the available layouts use frames. + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Web Wizard - Main Layout +text/shared/autopi/webwizard03.xhp + + +UFI: Web Wizard page 3 +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Web Wizard - Main Layout +Select the formatting template that you want to use for the layout of the index page of your site. The template defines the text formatting and the position of elements on the page. Some of the available layouts use frames.
- -Layouts -Select the layout for the index page. -Web Wizard - Layout details - - + +Layouts +Select the layout for the index page. +Web Wizard - Layout details + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard04.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard04.xhp index fa1b0d21ae..76d9b62d54 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard04.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard04.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Web Wizard - Layout Details -text/shared/autopi/webwizard04.xhp - - -UFI: Web Wizard page 4 -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Web Wizard - Layout Details -Use this page of the wizard to customize the layout options for the index page of your web site. + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Web Wizard - Layout Details +text/shared/autopi/webwizard04.xhp + + +UFI: Web Wizard page 4 +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Web Wizard - Layout Details +Use this page of the wizard to customize the layout options for the index page of your web site.
- -File name + +File name Includes the file names of the documents on the index page. - -Description + +Description Includes the summary information of the documents on the index page. - -Author + +Author Includes the names of the people who created the documents on the index page. - -Creation date + +Creation date Includes the creation dates of the documents on the index page. - -Last change date + +Last change date Includes the date of the last time a file was modified on the index page. - -File format + +File format Displays the format of the files on the index page. - -File format icon + +File format icon Displays the file format icon on the index page. - -No. of pages + +No. of pages Displays the number of pages in your site on the index page. - -Size in KB -Displays the file size in kilobytes on the index page. + +Size in KB +Displays the file size in kilobytes on the index page. Optimize the layout for screen resolution: - -640x480 + +640x480 Optimizes the web site for a 640x480 pixel screen resolution. - -800x600 + +800x600 Optimizes the web site for a 800x600 pixel screen resolution. - -1024x768 -Optimizes the web site for a 1024x768 pixel screen resolution. -Web Wizard - Design - - + +1024x768 +Optimizes the web site for a 1024x768 pixel screen resolution. +Web Wizard - Design + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard05.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard05.xhp index 2b4e4467fa..c01b8a262d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard05.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard05.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Web Wizard - Design -text/shared/autopi/webwizard05.xhp - - -UFI: Web Wizard page 5 -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Web Wizard - Design -Select a style for the index page. + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Web Wizard - Design +text/shared/autopi/webwizard05.xhp + + +UFI: Web Wizard page 5 +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Web Wizard - Design +Select a style for the index page.
- -Style + +Style Select the color scheme for the index page. - -Background + +Background Select a Background image for the index page. - -Icon set -Select the Icons that you navigation in HTML want to use for the navigation elements on the index page. -Web Wizard - Web site information - - + +Icon set +Select the Icons that you navigation in HTML want to use for the navigation elements on the index page. +Web Wizard - Web site information + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard06.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard06.xhp index 06f5f3f378..6b71fec662 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard06.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard06.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Web Wizard - Web Site Information -text/shared/autopi/webwizard06.xhp - - -UFI: Web Wizard page 6 -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Web Wizard - Web Site Information -Enter the title and meta information for your web site. + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Web Wizard - Web Site Information +text/shared/autopi/webwizard06.xhp + + +UFI: Web Wizard page 6 +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Web Wizard - Web Site Information +Enter the title and meta information for your web site.
- -Title + +Title Enter the title for the index page. This element is displayed on the title bar of web browsers. - -Description -Enter a description for the index page. The description is stored in an HTML meta tag. -Keywords + +Description +Enter a description for the index page. The description is stored in an HTML meta tag. +Keywords Enter keywords for the index page. Keywords are stored in HTML meta tags. - -Created + +Created Enter the creation date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag. - -Modified + +Modified Enter the modified date for the index page. The date is stored in an HTML meta tag. - -E-mail + +E-mail Enter the e-mail address for the index page. The address is stored in an HTML meta tag. - -Copyright notice -Enter the copyright notice for the index page. The notice is stored in an HTML meta tag. -Web Wizard - Preview - - + +Copyright notice +Enter the copyright notice for the index page. The notice is stored in an HTML meta tag. +Web Wizard - Preview + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard07.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard07.xhp index a082665b5b..4d40111b37 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard07.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard07.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Web Wizard - Preview -text/shared/autopi/webwizard07.xhp - - -UFI: Web Wizard page 7 -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Web Wizard - Preview -Specify where you want to publish your web site as well as preview your site. + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Web Wizard - Preview +text/shared/autopi/webwizard07.xhp + + +UFI: Web Wizard page 7 +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Web Wizard - Preview +Specify where you want to publish your web site as well as preview your site.
- -Preview + +Preview Opens your web page in the default web browser of your operating system. - -Local directory + +Local directory Uploads your index page and files to a local directory. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page. - -... + +... Opens a dialog to select a folder. - -Archive file -Adds your index page and files to a compressed archive file and uploads the file to your web site. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page. + +Archive file +Adds your index page and files to a compressed archive file and uploads the file to your web site. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page. Depending on your operating system, the available archive file formats are zip, gzip, and war. - -... + +... Opens a dialog where you can specify the location of the archive file. - -The web via FTP -Uploads your files to an FTP server. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page. + +The web via FTP +Uploads your files to an FTP server. The index page is saved to the location that you specified. All other files are saved to the "myWebsite" directory in the directory that contains the index page. You cannot use the FTP option if you connect to the internet through a proxy server. - -Configure + +Configure Opens the FTP Connection dialog where you can edit and test the connection settings for the FTP server. - -Save settings + +Save settings Saves the settings that you specified in this wizard. - -Save as -Enter the name for the settings file. -Web Wizard - - + +Save as +Enter the name for the settings file. +Web Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard07fc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard07fc.xhp index 4f6e272751..476158d023 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard07fc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/webwizard07fc.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -FTP Connection -text/shared/autopi/webwizard07fc.xhp - - -UFI: FTP Connection dialog for Web Wizard -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +FTP Connection +text/shared/autopi/webwizard07fc.xhp + + +UFI: FTP Connection dialog for Web Wizard +dedr: reviewed + + - -FTP Connection -Edit and test the FTP server connection settings for the Web Wizard. + +FTP Connection +Edit and test the FTP server connection settings for the Web Wizard. Server name or IP address - + Enter the name or IP address of the FTP server.UFI: which format? - -Username + +Username Enter the user name that is required to access the FTP server. - -Password + +Password Enter the password that is required to access the FTP server. - -Test + +Test Tests the FTP connection with the current settings. - -Choose a remote directory + +Choose a remote directory Enter the location of a directory on the FTP server where you want to store your files. - -... -Opens a dialog where you can specify the FTP server directory to store the files. - - + +... +Opens a dialog where you can specify the FTP server directory to store the files. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp index f019ebdcb7..a960bcdcdd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Queries -/text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Queries +/text/shared/explorer/database/02000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-queries; creating and editing -tables in databases; printing queries -printing; queries +queries; creating and editing +tables in databases; printing queries +printing; queries queries; printing - -Queries -A "query" is special view of a table. Queries can display certain records or only a few fields per record and, if required, also sort those records. A query can apply to one table to multiple tables, if they are linked by common data fields. -
- -Use queries to find records from data tables based on certain criteria. All queries created for a database are listed under the Queries entry. Since this entry contains the database queries, it is also called the "query container". -Printing Queries -To print a query or table: - - -Open a text document (or a spreadsheet document if you prefer the specific printing functions of this type of document). - - -Open the database so that you can see the name of the query or table as an entry. - - -Drag the name into the open document. You now see the dialog Insert Database Columns - - -Decide which columns = data fields you want to include. You can also click the AutoFormat button and select a corresponding formatting type. Close the dialog. -The query or table will be inserted into your document. - - -Print the document by choosing File - Print. - - -You can also select the entire database table in the data source view (button in the top left corner of the table) and then drag this to a text document or spreadsheet. -The $[officename] Help provides you with further information about the following subjects: -Creating a New Query -In the context menu of a query container open the command New. - -Sorting and Filtering Data -Allows you to sort and filter the data in a query table. -Query Design -With the Query Design, you can create and edit a query or view. - -Query Through Several Tables -The query result can contain data from several tables if these are linked to each other by suitable data fields. -Formulating Query Criteria -You can find out which operators and commands can be used to formulate the filter conditions for a query. -Executing Functions -You can perform calculations with the data of a table and store the results as a query result. -$[officename] and SQL -$[officename] "understands" SQL. The syntax used depends on the database system you are using. - - + +Queries +A "query" is special view of a table. Queries can display certain records or only a few fields per record and, if required, also sort those records. A query can apply to one table to multiple tables, if they are linked by common data fields. +
+ +Use queries to find records from data tables based on certain criteria. All queries created for a database are listed under the Queries entry. Since this entry contains the database queries, it is also called the "query container". +Printing Queries +To print a query or table: + + +Open a text document (or a spreadsheet document if you prefer the specific printing functions of this type of document). + + +Open the database so that you can see the name of the query or table as an entry. + + +Drag the name into the open document. You now see the dialog Insert Database Columns + + +Decide which columns = data fields you want to include. You can also click the AutoFormat button and select a corresponding formatting type. Close the dialog. +The query or table will be inserted into your document. + + +Print the document by choosing File - Print. + + +You can also select the entire database table in the data source view (button in the top left corner of the table) and then drag this to a text document or spreadsheet. +The $[officename] Help provides you with further information about the following subjects: +Creating a New Query +In the context menu of a query container open the command New. + +Sorting and Filtering Data +Allows you to sort and filter the data in a query table. +Query Design +With the Query Design, you can create and edit a query or view. + +Query Through Several Tables +The query result can contain data from several tables if these are linked to each other by suitable data fields. +Formulating Query Criteria +You can find out which operators and commands can be used to formulate the filter conditions for a query. +Executing Functions +You can perform calculations with the data of a table and store the results as a query result. +$[officename] and SQL +$[officename] "understands" SQL. The syntax used depends on the database system you are using. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp index 7c0105b043..08c7fd0be4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Query Design -/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Switched Adabas content to be displayed for SO only (#i10510#) - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Query Design +/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Switched Adabas content to be displayed for SO only (#i10510#) + + -views; creating database views -queries; creating database queries -queries; designing -designing; queries -design view; queries/views -joining ; tables -tables in databases; joining for queries -queries; joining tables -tables in databases; relations -relations; joining tables -queries; deleting table links -criteria of query design -queries; formulating filter conditions -filter conditions in queries -parameter queries -queries; parameter query -SQL; queries -native SQL +views; creating database views +queries; creating database queries +queries; designing +designing; queries +design view; queries/views +joining ; tables +tables in databases; joining for queries +queries; joining tables +tables in databases; relations +relations; joining tables +queries; deleting table links +criteria of query design +queries; formulating filter conditions +filter conditions in queries +parameter queries +queries; parameter query +SQL; queries +native SQL SQL; native SQL - - -Query Design -The Query Design View allows you to create and edit a database query. -Some databases also support the creation of a new table view. Selecting the New View Design command from the context menu of a database table container, you see the View Design window that resembles the Query Design window described here. The new view is listed alphabetically with the tables. - -The Design View -To create a query, select the tables containing relevant data for the query from the Add Tables dialog. The Add Tables dialog automatically appears when first entering the Design View, or can be called by clicking the Add Tables icon on the Options Bar. Adding tables enables you to define possible relationships between the tables in this area. -The lower pane of the Design View is where you define the query. To define a query, specify the database field names to include and the criteria for displaying the fields. To rearrange the columns in the lower pane of the Design View, drag a column header to a new location, or select the column and press Ctrl+arrow key. -In the top of the query Design View window, the icons of the Query Object Bar are displayed. -If you want to test a query, click the Run icon on the Query Object Bar. The query result is displayed in a table similar to the Data Source View. Note: the table displayed is only temporary. -Press F6 to switch between the screen areas of the query. -Browse + + +Query Design +The Query Design View allows you to create and edit a database query. +Some databases also support the creation of a new table view. Selecting the New View Design command from the context menu of a database table container, you see the View Design window that resembles the Query Design window described here. The new view is listed alphabetically with the tables. + +The Design View +To create a query, select the tables containing relevant data for the query from the Add Tables dialog. The Add Tables dialog automatically appears when first entering the Design View, or can be called by clicking the Add Tables icon on the Options Bar. Adding tables enables you to define possible relationships between the tables in this area. +The lower pane of the Design View is where you define the query. To define a query, specify the database field names to include and the criteria for displaying the fields. To rearrange the columns in the lower pane of the Design View, drag a column header to a new location, or select the column and press Ctrl+arrow key. +In the top of the query Design View window, the icons of the Query Object Bar are displayed. +If you want to test a query, click the Run icon on the Query Object Bar. The query result is displayed in a table similar to the Data Source View. Note: the table displayed is only temporary. +Press F6 to switch between the screen areas of the query. +Browse When you open the query design for the first time, in order to create a new query, you can click Add Tables. You then see a dialog in which you must first select the table that will be the basis for the query. - -Double-click fields to add them to the query. Drag-and-drop to define relations. -While designing a query, you cannot modify the selected tables. -Remove tables -To remove the table from Design View, click the upper border of the table window and display the context menu. You can use the Delete command to remove the table from the Design View. Another option is to press the Delete key. -
-Move table and modify table size -You can resize and arrange the tables according to your preferences. To move tables, drag the upper border to the desired position. Enlarge or reduce the size in which the table is displayed by positioning the mouse cursor on a border or on a corner and dragging the table until it is the desired size. -
-Table Relations -If there are data relations between a field name in one table and a field name in another table, you can use these relations for your query. -If, for example, you have a spreadsheet for articles identified by an article number, and a spreadsheet for customers in which you record all articles that a customer orders using the corresponding article numbers, then there is a relationship between the two "article number" data fields. If you now want to create a query that returns all articles that a customer has ordered, you must retrieve data from two spreadsheets. To do this, you must tell $[officename] what the relationship exists between the data in the two spreadsheets. -To do this, click a field name in a table (for example, the field name "Item-Number" from the Customer table), hold down the mouse button and then drag the field name to the field name of the other table ("Item-Number" from the Item table). When you release the mouse button, a line connecting the two fields in the two windows appears. The corresponding condition that the content of the two field names must be identical is entered in the resulting SQL query. -The creation of a query that is based on several related sheets is only possible if you use $[officename] as the interface for a relational database. -You cannot access tables from different databases in a query. Queries involving multiple tables can only be created within one database. -Specifying link type + +Double-click fields to add them to the query. Drag-and-drop to define relations. +While designing a query, you cannot modify the selected tables. +Remove tables +To remove the table from Design View, click the upper border of the table window and display the context menu. You can use the Delete command to remove the table from the Design View. Another option is to press the Delete key. +
+Move table and modify table size +You can resize and arrange the tables according to your preferences. To move tables, drag the upper border to the desired position. Enlarge or reduce the size in which the table is displayed by positioning the mouse cursor on a border or on a corner and dragging the table until it is the desired size. +
+Table Relations +If there are data relations between a field name in one table and a field name in another table, you can use these relations for your query. +If, for example, you have a spreadsheet for articles identified by an article number, and a spreadsheet for customers in which you record all articles that a customer orders using the corresponding article numbers, then there is a relationship between the two "article number" data fields. If you now want to create a query that returns all articles that a customer has ordered, you must retrieve data from two spreadsheets. To do this, you must tell $[officename] what the relationship exists between the data in the two spreadsheets. +To do this, click a field name in a table (for example, the field name "Item-Number" from the Customer table), hold down the mouse button and then drag the field name to the field name of the other table ("Item-Number" from the Item table). When you release the mouse button, a line connecting the two fields in the two windows appears. The corresponding condition that the content of the two field names must be identical is entered in the resulting SQL query. +The creation of a query that is based on several related sheets is only possible if you use $[officename] as the interface for a relational database. +You cannot access tables from different databases in a query. Queries involving multiple tables can only be created within one database. +Specifying link type If you double-click the line connecting two linked fields or call the menu command Insert - New Relation, you can specify the type of link in the Relations dialog. - -Edit Joint Properties.Alternatively, press Tab until the joint vector is selected (it is displayed enlarged), then press Shift+F10 to display the context menu and there choose the command Edit. -Deleting relations -To delete a relation between two tables, click the connection line and then press the Delete key. + +Edit Joint Properties.Alternatively, press Tab until the joint vector is selected (it is displayed enlarged), then press Shift+F10 to display the context menu and there choose the command Edit. +Deleting relations +To delete a relation between two tables, click the connection line and then press the Delete key. Alternatively, delete the respective entries in Fields involved in the Relations dialog. Or press Tab until the connecting vector is displayed highlighted, then press Shift+F10 to open the context menu and select Delete command. - -Define query -Select conditions to define the query. Each column of the design table accepts a data field for the query. The conditions in one row are linked with a Boolean AND. -Specify field name -First, select all field names from the tables that you want to add to the query. You can do this either with drag-and-drop or by double-clicking a field name in the table window. With the drag-and-drop method, use the mouse to drag a field name from the table window into the lower area of the query design. As you do this, you can decide which column you want to add the field to. Select a field name by double-clicking. It will then be added to the next free column. -Deleting field names -To remove a field name from the query, click the column header of the field and choose the Delete command on the context menu for the column. -Save query + +Define query +Select conditions to define the query. Each column of the design table accepts a data field for the query. The conditions in one row are linked with a Boolean AND. +Specify field name +First, select all field names from the tables that you want to add to the query. You can do this either with drag-and-drop or by double-clicking a field name in the table window. With the drag-and-drop method, use the mouse to drag a field name from the table window into the lower area of the query design. As you do this, you can decide which column you want to add the field to. Select a field name by double-clicking. It will then be added to the next free column. +Deleting field names +To remove a field name from the query, click the column header of the field and choose the Delete command on the context menu for the column. +Save query Use the Save icon on the Function Bar to save the query. You see a dialog that asks you to enter a name for the query. If the database supports schemas, you can also enter a schema. - -Schema + +Schema Enter the name of the schema that is assigned to the query or table view. - -Query name or table view name -Enter the name of the query or table view. -Filtering data + +Query name or table view name +Enter the name of the query or table view. +Filtering data To filter data for the query, set the desired preferences in the lower area of the Design View. The following lines are available: - -Field + +Field Enter the name of the data field that you referred to in the Query. All settings made in the lower rows refer to this field. If you activate a cell with a mouse click you'll see an arrow button, which enables you to select a field. The "Table name.*" option selects all data fields and the criteria is valid for all table fields. - -Alias -Specifies an alias. This alias will be listed in a query instead of the field name. This makes it possible to use user-defined column labels. For example, if the data field has the name PtNo and, instead of that name, you would like to have PartNum appear in the query, enter PartNum as alias. -In an SQL statement, aliases are defined as following: -SELECT column AS alias FROM table. -For example: + +Alias +Specifies an alias. This alias will be listed in a query instead of the field name. This makes it possible to use user-defined column labels. For example, if the data field has the name PtNo and, instead of that name, you would like to have PartNum appear in the query, enter PartNum as alias. +In an SQL statement, aliases are defined as following: +SELECT column AS alias FROM table. +For example: SELECT "PtNo" AS "PartNum" FROM "Parts" - -Table + +Table The corresponding database table of the selected data field is listed here. If you activate the a cell with a mouse click, an arrow will appear which enables you to select another table of the current query. - -Sort + +Sort If you click the cell, you can select among the sorting options: ascending, descending and not sorted. Text fields will be sorted alphabetically (A to Z) and numerical fields numerically (0 to 9). - -Visible + +Visible If you mark the Visible property for a data field, that field will be visible in the query. If you only use a data field to formulate a condition, you do not necessarily need to show it. - -Criteria -Specifies the criteria by which the content of the data field should be filtered. -or -Here you can enter one additional criterion for filtering in each line. Multiple criteria in one column will be connected by an OR link. + +Criteria +Specifies the criteria by which the content of the data field should be filtered. +or +Here you can enter one additional criterion for filtering in each line. Multiple criteria in one column will be connected by an OR link. You can also use the context menu of the line headers in the lower area of the query design to insert another line for functions: - + Functions - -Select a function to run in the query here. The functions you can run here depend on the database. -If you are working with the Adabas database, the list box in the Function row offers you the following options: - - - -Option - - -SQL - - -Effect - - - - -No function - - -- - - -No function will be executed. - - - - -Average - - -AVG - - -Calculates the arithmetic mean of a field. - - - - -Count - - -COUNT - - -Determines the number of records in the table. Empty fields can either be counted (a) or not (b). -a) COUNT(*): Passing an asterisk as the argument counts all records in the table. -b) COUNT(column): Passing a field name as an argument counts only fields in which the field name in question contains a value. Null values (empty fields) will not be counted. - - - - -Maximum - - -MAX - - -Determines the highest value of a field. - - - - -Minimum - - -MIN - - -Determines the lowest value of a field. - - - - -Sum - - -SUM - - -Calculates the sum of values of associated fields. - - - - -Group - - -GROUP BY - - -Groups query data according to the field name selected. Functions are executed according to the specified groups. In SQL, this option corresponds to the GROUP BY clause. If a criterion is added, this entry appears in the SQL HAVING. - - -
+ +Select a function to run in the query here. The functions you can run here depend on the database. +If you are working with the Adabas database, the list box in the Function row offers you the following options: + + + +Option + + +SQL + + +Effect + + + + +No function + + +- + + +No function will be executed. + + + + +Average + + +AVG + + +Calculates the arithmetic mean of a field. + + + + +Count + + +COUNT + + +Determines the number of records in the table. Empty fields can either be counted (a) or not (b). +a) COUNT(*): Passing an asterisk as the argument counts all records in the table. +b) COUNT(column): Passing a field name as an argument counts only fields in which the field name in question contains a value. Null values (empty fields) will not be counted. + + + + +Maximum + + +MAX + + +Determines the highest value of a field. + + + + +Minimum + + +MIN + + +Determines the lowest value of a field. + + + + +Sum + + +SUM + + +Calculates the sum of values of associated fields. + + + + +Group + + +GROUP BY + + +Groups query data according to the field name selected. Functions are executed according to the specified groups. In SQL, this option corresponds to the GROUP BY clause. If a criterion is added, this entry appears in the SQL HAVING. + + +
 - -You can also enter function calls directly into the SQL statement. The syntax is: -SELECT FUNCTION(column) FROM table. -For example, the function call in SQL for calculating a sum is: -SELECT SUM("Price") FROM "Article". -Except for the Group function, the above functions are so-called Aggregate functions. These are functions that calculate data to create summaries from the results. Additional functions that are not listed in the list box are also possible. These depend on the specific database system in use. To get information about driver specific functions refer to the documentation of your database system. -To use other functions not listed in the list box, you must enter them under Field. They will then appear automatically in the Function line. -You can also assign aliases to function calls. If the query is not to be displayed in the column header, enter the desired name under Alias. -The corresponding function in an SQL statement is: -SELECT FUNCTION() AS alias FROM table -Example: -SELECT COUNT(*) AS count FROM "Item" -If you run this function, you cannot insert any additional columns for the query other than receiving these columns as a "Group" function. - -Examples - -In the following example, a query is run through two tables: an "Item" table with the "Item_No" field and a "Suppliers" table with the "Supplier_Name" field. In addition, both tables have a common field name "Supplier_No." -The following steps are required to create a query containing all suppliers who deliver more than three items. - - -Insert the "Item" and "Suppliers" tables into the query design. - - -Link the "Supplier_No" fields of the two tables if there is not already a relation of this type. - - -Double-click the "Item_No" field from the "Item" table. Display the Function line using the context menu and select the Count function. - - -Enter >3 as a criterion and disable the Visible field. - - -Double-click the "Supplier_Name" field in the "Suppliers" table and choose the Group function. - - -Run the query. - - -If the "price" (for the individual price of an article) and "Supplier_No" (for the supplier of the article) fields exist in the "Item" table, you can obtain the average price of the item that a supplier provides with the following query: - - -Insert the "Item" table into the query design. - - -Double-click the "Price" and "Supplier_No" fields. - - -Enable the Function line and select the Average function from the "Price" field. - - -You can also enter "Average" in the line for the alias name (without quotation marks). - - -Choose Group for the "Supplier_No" field. - - -Run the query. - - -The following context menu commands and symbols are available: -Functions -Shows or hides a row for selection of functions. -Table Name -Shows or hides the row for the table name. -Alias Name -Shows or hides the row for the alias name. -Distinct Values -Applies only distinct values to the query. This applies to records containing data that appears several times in the selected fields. If the Distinct Values command is active, you will see only one record in the query (DISTINCT). Otherwise, you will see all records corresponding to the query criteria (ALL). -For example, if the name "Smith" occurs several times in your address database, you can choose the Distinct Values command to specify in the query that the name "Smith" will occur only once. -For a query involving several fields, the combination of values from all fields must be unique so that the result can be formed from a specific record. For example, you have "Smith in Chicago" once in your address book and "Smith in London" twice. With the Distinct Values command, the query will use the two fields "last name" and "city" and return the query result "Smith in Chicago" once and "Smith in London" once. -In SQL, this command corresponds to the DISTINCT predicate. -Formulating filter conditions -
-When formulating filter conditions, various operators and commands are available to you. Apart from the relational operators, there are SQL-specific commands that query the content of database fields. If you use these commands in the $[officename] syntax, $[officename] automatically converts these into the corresponding SQL syntax. You can also enter the SQL command directly. The following tables give an overview of the operators and commands: - - - -Operator - - -Meaning - - -Condition is satisfied if... - - - - -= - - -equal to - - -... the content of the field is identical to the indicated expression. -The operator = will not be displayed in the query fields. If you enter a value without any operator, the operator = will be automatically adopted. - - - - -<> - - -not equal to - - -... the content of the field does not correspond to the specified expression. - - - - -> - - -greater than - - -... the content of the field is greater than the specified expression. - - - - -< - - -less than - - -... the content of the field is less than the specified expression. - - - - ->= - - -greater than or equal to - - -... the content of the field is greater than or equal to the specified expression. - - - - -<= - - -less than or equal to - - -... the content of the field is less than or equal to the specified expression. - - -
- - - - -$[officename] command - - -SQL command - - -Meaning - - -Condition is satisfied if... - - - - -IS EMPTY - - -IS NULL - - -is null - - -... The field name is empty. For Yes/No fields with three states, this command automatically queries the undetermined state (neither Yes nor No). - - - - -IS NOT EMPTY - - -IS NOT NULL - - -is not empty - - -... the field name is not empty. - - - - -LIKE -(placeholder * for any number of characters -placeholder ? for exactly one character) - - + +You can also enter function calls directly into the SQL statement. The syntax is: +SELECT FUNCTION(column) FROM table. +For example, the function call in SQL for calculating a sum is: +SELECT SUM("Price") FROM "Article". +Except for the Group function, the above functions are so-called Aggregate functions. These are functions that calculate data to create summaries from the results. Additional functions that are not listed in the list box are also possible. These depend on the specific database system in use. To get information about driver specific functions refer to the documentation of your database system. +To use other functions not listed in the list box, you must enter them under Field. They will then appear automatically in the Function line. +You can also assign aliases to function calls. If the query is not to be displayed in the column header, enter the desired name under Alias. +The corresponding function in an SQL statement is: +SELECT FUNCTION() AS alias FROM table +Example: +SELECT COUNT(*) AS count FROM "Item" +If you run this function, you cannot insert any additional columns for the query other than receiving these columns as a "Group" function. + +Examples + +In the following example, a query is run through two tables: an "Item" table with the "Item_No" field and a "Suppliers" table with the "Supplier_Name" field. In addition, both tables have a common field name "Supplier_No." +The following steps are required to create a query containing all suppliers who deliver more than three items. + + +Insert the "Item" and "Suppliers" tables into the query design. + + +Link the "Supplier_No" fields of the two tables if there is not already a relation of this type. + + +Double-click the "Item_No" field from the "Item" table. Display the Function line using the context menu and select the Count function. + + +Enter >3 as a criterion and disable the Visible field. + + +Double-click the "Supplier_Name" field in the "Suppliers" table and choose the Group function. + + +Run the query. + + +If the "price" (for the individual price of an article) and "Supplier_No" (for the supplier of the article) fields exist in the "Item" table, you can obtain the average price of the item that a supplier provides with the following query: + + +Insert the "Item" table into the query design. + + +Double-click the "Price" and "Supplier_No" fields. + + +Enable the Function line and select the Average function from the "Price" field. + + +You can also enter "Average" in the line for the alias name (without quotation marks). + + +Choose Group for the "Supplier_No" field. + + +Run the query. + + +The following context menu commands and symbols are available: +Functions +Shows or hides a row for selection of functions. +Table Name +Shows or hides the row for the table name. +Alias Name +Shows or hides the row for the alias name. +Distinct Values +Applies only distinct values to the query. This applies to records containing data that appears several times in the selected fields. If the Distinct Values command is active, you will see only one record in the query (DISTINCT). Otherwise, you will see all records corresponding to the query criteria (ALL). +For example, if the name "Smith" occurs several times in your address database, you can choose the Distinct Values command to specify in the query that the name "Smith" will occur only once. +For a query involving several fields, the combination of values from all fields must be unique so that the result can be formed from a specific record. For example, you have "Smith in Chicago" once in your address book and "Smith in London" twice. With the Distinct Values command, the query will use the two fields "last name" and "city" and return the query result "Smith in Chicago" once and "Smith in London" once. +In SQL, this command corresponds to the DISTINCT predicate. +Formulating filter conditions +
+When formulating filter conditions, various operators and commands are available to you. Apart from the relational operators, there are SQL-specific commands that query the content of database fields. If you use these commands in the $[officename] syntax, $[officename] automatically converts these into the corresponding SQL syntax. You can also enter the SQL command directly. The following tables give an overview of the operators and commands: +
+ + +Operator + + +Meaning + + +Condition is satisfied if... + + + + += + + +equal to + + +... the content of the field is identical to the indicated expression. +The operator = will not be displayed in the query fields. If you enter a value without any operator, the operator = will be automatically adopted. + + + + +<> + + +not equal to + + +... the content of the field does not correspond to the specified expression. + + + + +> + + +greater than + + +... the content of the field is greater than the specified expression. + + + + +< + + +less than + + +... the content of the field is less than the specified expression. + + + + +>= + + +greater than or equal to + + +... the content of the field is greater than or equal to the specified expression. + + + + +<= + + +less than or equal to + + +... the content of the field is less than or equal to the specified expression. + + +
+ + + + +$[officename] command + + +SQL command + + +Meaning + + +Condition is satisfied if... + + + + +IS EMPTY + + +IS NULL + + +is null + + +... The field name is empty. For Yes/No fields with three states, this command automatically queries the undetermined state (neither Yes nor No). + + + + +IS NOT EMPTY + + +IS NOT NULL + + +is not empty + + +... the field name is not empty. + + + + +LIKE +(placeholder * for any number of characters +placeholder ? for exactly one character) + + LIKE SQL;placeholders - -(% placeholder for any number of characters -Placeholder _ for exactly one character) - - -is an element of - - -... the data field contains the indicated expression. The (*) placeholder indicates whether the expression x occurs at the beginning of (x*), at the end of (*x) or inside the field content (*x*). You can enter as a placeholder in SQL queries either the SQL % character or the familiar (*) file system placeholder in the $[officename] interface. -The * or % placeholder stands for any number of characters. The question mark (?) in the $[officename] interface or the underscore (_) in SQL queries is used to represent exactly one character. - - - - -NOT LIKE - - -NOT LIKE - - -Is not an element of - - -... the field name does not contain the specified expression. - - - - -BETWEEN x AND y - - -BETWEEN x AND y - - -falls within the interval [x,y] - - -... the field name contains a value that lies between the two values x and y. - - - - -NOT BETWEEN x AND y - - -NOT BETWEEN x AND y - - -Does not fall within the interval [x,y] - - -... the field name contains a value that does not lie between the two values x and y. - - - - -IN (a; b; c...) -Note that the semicolons are used as separators in all value lists! - - -IN (a, b, c...) - - -contains a, b, c... - - -... the field name contains one of the specified expressions a, b, c,... Any number of expressions can be specified, and the result of the query is determined by an Or link. The expressions a, b, c... can be either numbers or characters - - - - -NOT IN (a; b; c...) - - -NOT IN (a, b, c...) - - -does not contain a, b, c... - - -... the field name does not contain one of the specified expressions a, b, c,... - - - - -= TRUE - - -= TRUE - - -has the value True - - -... the field name has the value True. - - - - -= FALSE - - -= FALSE - - -has the value false - - -... the field name has the value false. - - -
- -Examples - - - -='Ms.' - - -returns field names with the field content "Ms." - - - - -LIKE 'g?ve' - - -returns field names with field content such as "give" and "gave". - - - - -LIKE 'S*' - - -returns data fields with field contents such as "Sun". - - - - -BETWEEN 10 AND 20 - - -returns field names with field content between the values 10 and 20. (The fields can be either text fields or number fields). - - - - -IN (1; 3; 5; 7) - - -returns field names with the values 1, 3, 5, 7. If the field name contains an item number, for example, you can create a query that returns the item having the specified number. - - - - -NOT IN ('Smith') - - -returns field names that do not contain "Smith". - - -
- -
- -Date fields are represented as #Date# to clearly identify them as dates. The date condition will be reproduced in the resulting SQL statement in the following ODBC - compliant way: - - - -Date - - -{D'YYYY-MM-DD'} - - - - -Date time - - -{D'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS'} - - - - -Time - - -{D'HH:MM:SS'} - - -
- -$[officename] also supports the following Escape sequences known from ODBC and JDBC: - - - -Date - - -{d 'YYYY-MM-DD'} - - - - -Time - - -{t 'HH:MI:SS[.SS]'} - [ ] optional - - - - -DateTime - - -{ts 'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MI:SS[.SS]'} - [ ] optional - - -
- -Example: select {d '1999-12-31'} from world.years - -Like Escape Sequence: {escape 'escape-character'} -Example: select * from Item where ItemName like 'The *%' {escape '*'} -The example will give you all of the entries where the item name begins with 'The *'. This means that you can also search for characters that would otherwise be interpreted as placeholders, such as *, ?, _, % or the period. - -Outer Join Escape Sequence: {oj outer-join} -Example: select Article.* from {oj item LEFT OUTER JOIN orders ON item.no=orders.ANR} -Querying text fields -To query the content of a text field, you must put the expression between single quotes. The distinction between uppercase and lowercase letters depends on the database in use. LIKE, by definition, is case-sensitive (though some databases don't see it that strict). -Querying date fields -Even if you want to filter by a date, you must place the expression between single quotation marks. The following formats are valid: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS and YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS as well as YYYY.MM.DD HH:MM:SS -Querying Yes/No fields -To query Yes/No fields, use the following syntax for dBase tables: - - - -Status - - -Query criterion - - -Example - - - - -Yes - - -for dBase tables: not equal to any given value - - -=1 returns all records where the Yes/No field has the status "Yes" or "On" (selected in black), - - - - -No - - -. - - -=0 returns all records for which the Yes/No field has the status "No" or "Off" (no selection). - - - - -Null - - -IS NULL - - -IS NULL returns all records for which the Yes/No field has neither of the states Yes or No (selected in gray). - - -
- -The syntax depends on the database system used. You should also note that Yes/No fields can be defined differently (only 2 states instead of 3). -Parameter queries -You must place the variable between square brackets (=[x]) to create a query with variable parameters. Alternatively, you can use an equal sign followed by a colon (=:x). When the query is executed, the program will display a dialog asking you for the expression to which the variable x should be assigned. -If you query several parameters at the same time, you will see a list field in the dialog containing all of the parameters and an input line alongside each one. Enter the values, preferably from top to bottom, and press the Enter key after each line. -Parameter queries with placeholders (*, _) or special characters (for example, ?) are not possible. -If you formulate a parameter query and you save it with the variables, you can later create a query in which only the variables have to be replaced by the expressions that you want. $[officename] asks for these variables in a dialog as soon as you open the query. -Parameter Input -The Parameter Input dialog asks you which variables you defined in the query. Enter a value for each query variable and confirm by clicking OK. -Parameter queries are also used for subforms, since they work exclusively with queries for which the values to be invoked are read internally from a variable. -A parameter query can have the following form in an SQL statement: -select * from 'addresses' where 'name' = :placeholder -SQL Mode -SQL stands for "Structured Query Language" and describes instructions for updating and administering relational databases. -In $[officename] you do not need any knowledge of SQL for most queries, since you do not have to enter the SQL code. If you create a query in the query design, $[officename] automatically converts your instructions into the corresponding SQL syntax. If, with the help of the Switch Design View On/Off button, you change to the SQL view, you can see the SQL commands for a query that has been created previously. -You can formulate your query directly in the SQL code. Note, however, that the special syntax is dependent upon the database system that you use. -If you enter the SQL code manually, you can create SQL-specific queries that are not supported by the graphical interface in Query design. These queries must be executed in native SQL mode. -By clicking the Run SQL command directly icon in the SQL view, you can formulate a query that is not processed by $[officename]. - - + +(% placeholder for any number of characters +Placeholder _ for exactly one character) + + +is an element of + + +... the data field contains the indicated expression. The (*) placeholder indicates whether the expression x occurs at the beginning of (x*), at the end of (*x) or inside the field content (*x*). You can enter as a placeholder in SQL queries either the SQL % character or the familiar (*) file system placeholder in the $[officename] interface. +The * or % placeholder stands for any number of characters. The question mark (?) in the $[officename] interface or the underscore (_) in SQL queries is used to represent exactly one character. + + + + +NOT LIKE + + +NOT LIKE + + +Is not an element of + + +... the field name does not contain the specified expression. + + + + +BETWEEN x AND y + + +BETWEEN x AND y + + +falls within the interval [x,y] + + +... the field name contains a value that lies between the two values x and y. + + + + +NOT BETWEEN x AND y + + +NOT BETWEEN x AND y + + +Does not fall within the interval [x,y] + + +... the field name contains a value that does not lie between the two values x and y. + + + + +IN (a; b; c...) +Note that the semicolons are used as separators in all value lists! + + +IN (a, b, c...) + + +contains a, b, c... + + +... the field name contains one of the specified expressions a, b, c,... Any number of expressions can be specified, and the result of the query is determined by an Or link. The expressions a, b, c... can be either numbers or characters + + + + +NOT IN (a; b; c...) + + +NOT IN (a, b, c...) + + +does not contain a, b, c... + + +... the field name does not contain one of the specified expressions a, b, c,... + + + + += TRUE + + += TRUE + + +has the value True + + +... the field name has the value True. + + + + += FALSE + + += FALSE + + +has the value false + + +... the field name has the value false. + + + + +Examples + + + +='Ms.' + + +returns field names with the field content "Ms." + + + + +LIKE 'g?ve' + + +returns field names with field content such as "give" and "gave". + + + + +LIKE 'S*' + + +returns data fields with field contents such as "Sun". + + + + +BETWEEN 10 AND 20 + + +returns field names with field content between the values 10 and 20. (The fields can be either text fields or number fields). + + + + +IN (1; 3; 5; 7) + + +returns field names with the values 1, 3, 5, 7. If the field name contains an item number, for example, you can create a query that returns the item having the specified number. + + + + +NOT IN ('Smith') + + +returns field names that do not contain "Smith". + + +
+ +
+ +Date fields are represented as #Date# to clearly identify them as dates. The date condition will be reproduced in the resulting SQL statement in the following ODBC - compliant way: + + + +Date + + +{D'YYYY-MM-DD'} + + + + +Date time + + +{D'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS'} + + + + +Time + + +{D'HH:MM:SS'} + + +
+ +$[officename] also supports the following Escape sequences known from ODBC and JDBC: + + + +Date + + +{d 'YYYY-MM-DD'} + + + + +Time + + +{t 'HH:MI:SS[.SS]'} - [ ] optional + + + + +DateTime + + +{ts 'YYYY-MM-DD HH:MI:SS[.SS]'} - [ ] optional + + +
+ +Example: select {d '1999-12-31'} from world.years + +Like Escape Sequence: {escape 'escape-character'} +Example: select * from Item where ItemName like 'The *%' {escape '*'} +The example will give you all of the entries where the item name begins with 'The *'. This means that you can also search for characters that would otherwise be interpreted as placeholders, such as *, ?, _, % or the period. + +Outer Join Escape Sequence: {oj outer-join} +Example: select Article.* from {oj item LEFT OUTER JOIN orders ON item.no=orders.ANR} +Querying text fields +To query the content of a text field, you must put the expression between single quotes. The distinction between uppercase and lowercase letters depends on the database in use. LIKE, by definition, is case-sensitive (though some databases don't see it that strict). +Querying date fields +Even if you want to filter by a date, you must place the expression between single quotation marks. The following formats are valid: YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS and YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS as well as YYYY.MM.DD HH:MM:SS +Querying Yes/No fields +To query Yes/No fields, use the following syntax for dBase tables: + + + +Status + + +Query criterion + + +Example + + + + +Yes + + +for dBase tables: not equal to any given value + + +=1 returns all records where the Yes/No field has the status "Yes" or "On" (selected in black), + + + + +No + + +. + + +=0 returns all records for which the Yes/No field has the status "No" or "Off" (no selection). + + + + +Null + + +IS NULL + + +IS NULL returns all records for which the Yes/No field has neither of the states Yes or No (selected in gray). + + +
+ +The syntax depends on the database system used. You should also note that Yes/No fields can be defined differently (only 2 states instead of 3). +Parameter queries +You must place the variable between square brackets (=[x]) to create a query with variable parameters. Alternatively, you can use an equal sign followed by a colon (=:x). When the query is executed, the program will display a dialog asking you for the expression to which the variable x should be assigned. +If you query several parameters at the same time, you will see a list field in the dialog containing all of the parameters and an input line alongside each one. Enter the values, preferably from top to bottom, and press the Enter key after each line. +Parameter queries with placeholders (*, _) or special characters (for example, ?) are not possible. +If you formulate a parameter query and you save it with the variables, you can later create a query in which only the variables have to be replaced by the expressions that you want. $[officename] asks for these variables in a dialog as soon as you open the query. +Parameter Input +The Parameter Input dialog asks you which variables you defined in the query. Enter a value for each query variable and confirm by clicking OK. +Parameter queries are also used for subforms, since they work exclusively with queries for which the values to be invoked are read internally from a variable. +A parameter query can have the following form in an SQL statement: +select * from 'addresses' where 'name' = :placeholder +SQL Mode +SQL stands for "Structured Query Language" and describes instructions for updating and administering relational databases. +In $[officename] you do not need any knowledge of SQL for most queries, since you do not have to enter the SQL code. If you create a query in the query design, $[officename] automatically converts your instructions into the corresponding SQL syntax. If, with the help of the Switch Design View On/Off button, you change to the SQL view, you can see the SQL commands for a query that has been created previously. +You can formulate your query directly in the SQL code. Note, however, that the special syntax is dependent upon the database system that you use. +If you enter the SQL code manually, you can create SQL-specific queries that are not supported by the graphical interface in Query design. These queries must be executed in native SQL mode. +By clicking the Run SQL command directly icon in the SQL view, you can formulate a query that is not processed by $[officename]. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp index 01e449de90..bf21c4d5ca 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Relations -/text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Relations +/text/shared/explorer/database/02010101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -join properties in relational databases -link properties; relational databases -inner joins -joins in databases -left joins -right joins +join properties in relational databases +link properties; relational databases +inner joins +joins in databases +left joins +right joins full joins - -Relations -If you double-click a connection between two linked fields in the query design, or if you choose Insert - New Relation, the Relations dialog appears. These properties will be used in all queries created in the future. + +Relations +If you double-click a connection between two linked fields in the query design, or if you choose Insert - New Relation, the Relations dialog appears. These properties will be used in all queries created in the future. - -Tables involved + +Tables involved Specifies two different tables that you want to join. - -Fields involved -Specifies two data fields that will be joined by a relation. + +Fields involved +Specifies two data fields that will be joined by a relation. Options - -Type -Specifies the link type of the selected link. Queries about the various types of links differ in the number of records displayed. The following options are available: -Inner Join -With the internal join, the results table contains only the records for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link is created by a corresponding WHERE clause. -Left Join -With the left join, the results table contains all fields of the left table and only those fields of the right table for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link corresponds to the LEFT OUTER JOIN command. -Right Join -With the right join, the results table contains all fields of the right table and only those fields of the left table for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link corresponds to the RIGHT OUTER JOIN command. -Full Join -For a full join, the results table contains all fields of the left and right tables. In the SQL of $[officename] this type of link corresponds to the FULL OUTER JOIN command. - - + +Type +Specifies the link type of the selected link. Queries about the various types of links differ in the number of records displayed. The following options are available: +Inner Join +With the internal join, the results table contains only the records for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link is created by a corresponding WHERE clause. +Left Join +With the left join, the results table contains all fields of the left table and only those fields of the right table for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link corresponds to the LEFT OUTER JOIN command. +Right Join +With the right join, the results table contains all fields of the right table and only those fields of the left table for which the content of the linked fields is the same. In $[officename] SQL this type of link corresponds to the RIGHT OUTER JOIN command. +Full Join +For a full join, the results table contains all fields of the left and right tables. In the SQL of $[officename] this type of link corresponds to the FULL OUTER JOIN command. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp index abba028817..1147c10d1d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -General -/text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-General -When you create a database table as an administrator, you can use this tab to determine user access, and to edit the data or the table structure. + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +General +/text/shared/explorer/database/05040100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+General +When you create a database table as an administrator, you can use this tab to determine user access, and to edit the data or the table structure.
-access rights; for database tables +access rights; for database tables tables in databases; access rights to - -If you are not the administrator, you can use the General tab to view your access rights for the selected table. -Table name -Displays the name of the selected database table. -Type -Displays the type of database. -Location -Displays the complete path of the database table. -Read data -Allows a user to read the data. -Insert data -Allows a user to insert new data. -Change data -Allows a user to change data. -Delete data -Allows a user to delete data. -Change table structure -Allows a user to change the table structure. -Definition -Allows the user to delete the table structure. -Modify references -Allows the user to modify the defined references, for example, to enter new relations for the table or to delete existing relations. - - + +If you are not the administrator, you can use the General tab to view your access rights for the selected table. +Table name +Displays the name of the selected database table. +Type +Displays the type of database. +Location +Displays the complete path of the database table. +Read data +Allows a user to read the data. +Insert data +Allows a user to insert new data. +Change data +Allows a user to change data. +Delete data +Allows a user to delete data. +Change table structure +Allows a user to change the table structure. +Definition +Allows the user to delete the table structure. +Modify references +Allows the user to modify the defined references, for example, to enter new relations for the table or to delete existing relations. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp index 15235f82a4..a756619f8e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Execute SQL statement -/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Execute SQL statement +/text/shared/explorer/database/11080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -SQL; executing SQL statements +SQL; executing SQL statements databases; administration through SQL - - -Execute SQL statement + + +Execute SQL statement Opens a dialog where you can enter a SQL command for administering a database. - - -You can only enter administration commands in this dialog, such as Grant, Create Table, or Drop Table, and not filter commands. The commands that you can enter depend on the data source, for example, dBase can only run some of the SQL commands list here. + + +You can only enter administration commands in this dialog, such as Grant, Create Table, or Drop Table, and not filter commands. The commands that you can enter depend on the data source, for example, dBase can only run some of the SQL commands list here. To run an SQL query for filtering data in the database, use the Query Design. - -Command to execute -Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run. -For example, for a "Bibliography" data source, you can enter the following SQL command: -SELECT "Address" FROM "biblio" "biblio" + +Command to execute +Enter the SQL administration command that you want to run. +For example, for a "Bibliography" data source, you can enter the following SQL command: +SELECT "Address" FROM "biblio" "biblio" For more information on SQL commands, please consult the documentation that came with the database. - -Previous commands + +Previous commands Lists the previously executed SQL commands. To run a command again, click the command, and then click Run. - -Status + +Status Displays the results, including errors, of the SQL command that you ran. - -Run -Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box. - - - + +Run +Runs the command that you entered in the Command to execute box. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp index 64d74a5234..1b21a5dde4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Adabas D Database -/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fixed #i21955# -FPE: Switched for SO only (#i10510#) - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Adabas D Database +/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fixed #i21955# +FPE: Switched for SO only (#i10510#) + + -Adabas; creating new databases +Adabas; creating new databases Adabas; deleting databases - -Adabas D Database -The Adabas D database that you may have installed together with $[officename] is a limited version of the database. For more information on Adabas, visit the Software AG Web site at http://www.softwareag.com/adabas/.UFI: Adabas is not included with OO.o -About Adabas -The Adabas database that you may have installed together with $[officename] is restricted to a size of 100 MB, and a maximum of three users on a network. See the "License.txt" file in the Adabas directory for more details. The Adabas database must be installed in a separate directory from $[officename]. -The name of an Adabas file cannot exceed 8 characters. The path to the Adabas file, including the file name, cannot exceed 30 characters, and must be compliant with the 7-bit ASCII code. Both the path and the file name cannot contain spaces. -Under Windows, the Adabas setup application adds the DBROOT environment variable that contains the path information for the database. If the setup application finds this variable, it does not install the database. -Create New Adabas Database -Use the Create New Adabas Database dialog to create an Adabas database: - - -Choose Tools - Data Sources, and then click the General tab. - - -Click New Data Source, and then select "Adabas" in the Database type box. - - -Click the New Database button. - - -Type the name of the database in the Database name box. - - -In the Administrator box, type the name of the administrator. - - -In the same row, click the Password button. - - -Enter a password, and then click OK. - - -Deleting an Adabas Database -To delete the reference to an Adabas database, right-click the name of the database in the data source view, and then choose Delete Data Source. -To delete an Adabas database: -If you do not know the name of the Adabas database that you want to delete, choose Tools - Data Sources, click the General tab, and look at the Data Source URL box. - - + +Adabas D Database +The Adabas D database that you may have installed together with $[officename] is a limited version of the database. For more information on Adabas, visit the Software AG Web site at http://www.softwareag.com/adabas/.UFI: Adabas is not included with OO.o +About Adabas +The Adabas database that you may have installed together with $[officename] is restricted to a size of 100 MB, and a maximum of three users on a network. See the "License.txt" file in the Adabas directory for more details. The Adabas database must be installed in a separate directory from $[officename]. +The name of an Adabas file cannot exceed 8 characters. The path to the Adabas file, including the file name, cannot exceed 30 characters, and must be compliant with the 7-bit ASCII code. Both the path and the file name cannot contain spaces. +Under Windows, the Adabas setup application adds the DBROOT environment variable that contains the path information for the database. If the setup application finds this variable, it does not install the database. +Create New Adabas Database +Use the Create New Adabas Database dialog to create an Adabas database: + + +Choose Tools - Data Sources, and then click the General tab. + + +Click New Data Source, and then select "Adabas" in the Database type box. + + +Click the New Database button. + + +Type the name of the database in the Database name box. + + +In the Administrator box, type the name of the administrator. + + +In the same row, click the Password button. + + +Enter a password, and then click OK. + + +Deleting an Adabas Database +To delete the reference to an Adabas database, right-click the name of the database in the data source view, and then choose Delete Data Source. +To delete an Adabas database: +If you do not know the name of the Adabas database that you want to delete, choose Tools - Data Sources, click the General tab, and look at the Data Source URL box. + + Determine which directories are referred to by the system variables DBCONFIG and DBWORK. Under Windows these variables are defined in the system settings or in the c:\Autoexec.bat file. Under Unix these variables are defined in a start script. - - - -In the $DBCONFIG$ directory, delete the three files that have the same name as the database, but with different extensions. For example, for a database named "Big", delete the "Big.sys", "Big.trs", and "Big.dat" files in the "C:\Adabas\". - - -In the $DBCONFIG$\Config directory, delete the file that has the same name as the database, for example, " C:\Adabas\Sql\Config\Big". - - -In the $DBWORKS$\Wrk directory, delete the directory that has the same name as the database., for example "C:\Adabas\Sql\Wrk\Big". - - -Starting and Shutting Down an Adabas Database - - -strt -d <DBNAME> -NoDBWindow -NoDBService -switches the database to COLD. - - -xutil -d <DBNAME> -u <CONTROLUSER>,<CONTROLPASSWORD> shutdown -switches the database to COLD. - - -xutil -d <DBNAME> -u <CONTROLUSER>,<CONTROLPASSWORD> restart -switches the database to WARM. - - -stp -d <DBNAME> -NoDBService -completely shuts down the database - - -Error Messages in an Adabas Database -The following is a list of possible error messages and solutions for working with the Adabas D database. -The database cannot be shut down / restarted as a user is still connected to it. -Close any other open tasks that show the database contents. On multi-user systems, ensure that all users are disconnected from the database, and then restart $[officename]. -Client unable to establish connection; -813 SERVERDB MUST BE RESTARTED -This error occurs if you try to access an Adabas D database that has not been started. Ensure that you have defined a Control User for the database, and then start the database. -Client unable to establish connection; -8022 USER ALREADY CONNECTED -This error occurs if you try to access an Adabas D database more than one time. -Errors occurring when writing the data in the database -Restart $[officename], and then change the database properties. -Running an Adabas Server on a Network -To run Adabas on a network, you need to install the Adabas server on one machine and the client on the workstations that you want to access the database from. -You can only create a new database on the server. -Enabling a Remote Connection - - -Under Windows, start the xtcpupd.exe support program on both the client and the server, and ensure that "Remote SQL via TCP/IP" is selected in the xtcpupd.exe dialog. - - + + + +In the $DBCONFIG$ directory, delete the three files that have the same name as the database, but with different extensions. For example, for a database named "Big", delete the "Big.sys", "Big.trs", and "Big.dat" files in the "C:\Adabas\". + + +In the $DBCONFIG$\Config directory, delete the file that has the same name as the database, for example, " C:\Adabas\Sql\Config\Big". + + +In the $DBWORKS$\Wrk directory, delete the directory that has the same name as the database., for example "C:\Adabas\Sql\Wrk\Big". + + +Starting and Shutting Down an Adabas Database + + +strt -d <DBNAME> -NoDBWindow -NoDBService +switches the database to COLD. + + +xutil -d <DBNAME> -u <CONTROLUSER>,<CONTROLPASSWORD> shutdown +switches the database to COLD. + + +xutil -d <DBNAME> -u <CONTROLUSER>,<CONTROLPASSWORD> restart +switches the database to WARM. + + +stp -d <DBNAME> -NoDBService +completely shuts down the database + + +Error Messages in an Adabas Database +The following is a list of possible error messages and solutions for working with the Adabas D database. +The database cannot be shut down / restarted as a user is still connected to it. +Close any other open tasks that show the database contents. On multi-user systems, ensure that all users are disconnected from the database, and then restart $[officename]. +Client unable to establish connection; -813 SERVERDB MUST BE RESTARTED +This error occurs if you try to access an Adabas D database that has not been started. Ensure that you have defined a Control User for the database, and then start the database. +Client unable to establish connection; -8022 USER ALREADY CONNECTED +This error occurs if you try to access an Adabas D database more than one time. +Errors occurring when writing the data in the database +Restart $[officename], and then change the database properties. +Running an Adabas Server on a Network +To run Adabas on a network, you need to install the Adabas server on one machine and the client on the workstations that you want to access the database from. +You can only create a new database on the server. +Enabling a Remote Connection + + +Under Windows, start the xtcpupd.exe support program on both the client and the server, and ensure that "Remote SQL via TCP/IP" is selected in the xtcpupd.exe dialog. + + On the server, start the x_server program in adabas\bin -Adabas\bin directory. - - -Choose Tools - Data Source, and then click the General tab. - - -In the Data source box, enter the name of the server, a colon, and the name of the database on the server, for example, computername:database. - - -Click the Adabas D tab, and then enter a name in the User Name box. - - -Select the Password checkbox, and then click OK. - +Adabas\bin directory. + + +Choose Tools - Data Source, and then click the General tab. + + +In the Data source box, enter the name of the server, a colon, and the name of the database on the server, for example, computername:database. + + +Click the Adabas D tab, and then enter a name in the User Name box. + + +Select the Password checkbox, and then click OK. + - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp index 4182825363..87422b0ea2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Create New Adabas Database -/text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Switched for SO only (#i10510) -dedr: fixed #i30843# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Create New Adabas Database +/text/shared/explorer/database/30100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Switched for SO only (#i10510) +dedr: fixed #i30843# + + - -Create New Adabas Database -Creates a new Adabas database. + +Create New Adabas Database +Creates a new Adabas database. - -Database name -Type the name of the database. The name is added to the Data source URL field. + +Database name +Type the name of the database. The name is added to the Data source URL field. User settings - -Administrator + +Administrator Enter the name of the database administrator. The administrator name and password is assigned when you create an Adabas database. Apart from the administrator, two more users can access the Adabas database. - -Control User + +Control User Enter the name of a user that you want to give limited control to modify some parameters of the database. Normally, the default settings for the name and the password of the control user are not changed. The control user does not affect the three-user limitation. - -Domain User + +Domain User Enter the name of the domain user that is used by Adabas internally. Normally, the default settings for the name and password of the domain user are not changed. The domain user does not affect the three-user limit. - -Password -Enter a password. -Database settings -Drives containing parts of the Serverdb are called DEVSPACEs. To improve performance, store each DEVSPACE on separate drives. + +Password +Enter a password. +Database settings +Drives containing parts of the Serverdb are called DEVSPACEs. To improve performance, store each DEVSPACE on separate drives. The file path for a DEVSPACE, including its file name, cannot exceed 40 characters. - -SYSDEVSPACE + +SYSDEVSPACE Enter the path for the system DEVSPACE. The SYSDEVSPACE manages the configuration data for the database. The size of the SYSDEVSPACE depends on the size of the database. - -TRANSACTIONLOG + +TRANSACTIONLOG Enter the path for the transaction log file. This file records all modifications that are made to the database during a transaction, and overwrites them when the transaction is completed. The TRANSACTIONLOG is also used for the rollback of a transaction. - -DATADEVSPACE -Enter the path for the data DEVSPACE. This file stores user data, such as tables and indexes, as well as the SQL catalog (schema info). The data contained in one user table is evenly distributed across all DATADEVSPACEs. The combined size of all DATADEVSPACEs corresponds to the size of the database. -The maximum size for a DATADEVSPACE in the limited version Adabas database is 100MB. + +DATADEVSPACE +Enter the path for the data DEVSPACE. This file stores user data, such as tables and indexes, as well as the SQL catalog (schema info). The data contained in one user table is evenly distributed across all DATADEVSPACEs. The combined size of all DATADEVSPACEs corresponds to the size of the database. +The maximum size for a DATADEVSPACE in the limited version Adabas database is 100MB. If the DATADEVSPACE reaches full capacity during a database operation, Adabas shuts down, increases the capacity of the DATADEVSPACE (up to 100 MB), and restarts the database. Saved data is not lost. - -... + +... Locate the directory where you want to save the file, and then click OK. - -Transaction file (MB) + +Transaction file (MB) Enter the size of the transaction file in megabytes. - -Database size (MB) + +Database size (MB) Enter the size of the database in megabytes here. The maximum size is 100 MB. - -Data buffer size (MB) + +Data buffer size (MB) Enter the size of the data cache in megabytes. The data buffer can be simultaneously accessed by all users and stores the most recently accessed pages from the DATADEVSPACEs. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp index e5c01ac50f..a5ef8238de 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Advanced Properties -text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp - - -Database advanced properties dialog -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Advanced Properties -Specifies advanced properties for the database. -
-how to get this - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Advanced Properties +text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvprop.xhp + + +Database advanced properties dialog +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Advanced Properties +Specifies advanced properties for the database. +
+how to get this + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp index 2031237c01..e48f551d70 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Data Handling -text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp - - -Advanced Properties dialog Data handling tab page -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Data Handling -Specifies the way you can work with data in a database.UFI: some text copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp -
-how to get this: Edit Database AdvancedProp -Use SQL92 naming constraints -Only allows characters that conform to the SQL92 naming convention in a name in a data source. All other characters are rejected. Each name must begin with a lowercase letter, an uppercase letter, or an underscore ( _ ). The remaining characters can be ASCII letters, numbers, and underscores. -Append the table alias name in SELECT statements -Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements. -Use Outer Join syntax '{OJ }' -Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}copied from shared\explorer\database\02010100.xhp -Example: -select Article.* from {oj item LEFT OUTER JOIN orders ON item.no=orders.ANR} -Ignore the privileges from the database driver -Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver. -Replace named parameters with ? -Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?). -Display version columns (when available) -Some databases assign version numbers to fields to track changes to records. The version number of a field is incremented by one each time the contents of the field are changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.copied from shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp -Use the catalog name in SELECT statements -Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBase driver.copie from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp -Use the schema name in SELECT statements -Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements. -Create index with ASC or DESC statement -Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements. -Comparison of Boolean values -Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Data Handling +text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropdat.xhp + + +Advanced Properties dialog Data handling tab page +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Data Handling +Specifies the way you can work with data in a database.UFI: some text copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +
+how to get this: Edit Database AdvancedProp +Use SQL92 naming constraints +Only allows characters that conform to the SQL92 naming convention in a name in a data source. All other characters are rejected. Each name must begin with a lowercase letter, an uppercase letter, or an underscore ( _ ). The remaining characters can be ASCII letters, numbers, and underscores. +Append the table alias name in SELECT statements +Appends the alias to the table name in SELECT statements. +Use Outer Join syntax '{OJ }' +Use escape sequences for outer joins. The syntax for this escape sequence is {oj outer-join}copied from shared\explorer\database\02010100.xhp +Example: +select Article.* from {oj item LEFT OUTER JOIN orders ON item.no=orders.ANR} +Ignore the privileges from the database driver +Ignores access privileges that are provided by the database driver. +Replace named parameters with ? +Replaces named parameters in a data source with a question mark (?). +Display version columns (when available) +Some databases assign version numbers to fields to track changes to records. The version number of a field is incremented by one each time the contents of the field are changed. Displays the internal version number of the record in the database table.copied from shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp +Use the catalog name in SELECT statements +Uses the current data source of the catalog. This option is useful when the ODBC data source is a database server. Do not select this option if the ODBC data source is a dBase driver.copie from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +Use the schema name in SELECT statements +Allows you to use the schema name in SELECT statements. +Create index with ASC or DESC statement +Creates an index with ASC or DESC statements. +Comparison of Boolean values +Select the type of Boolean comparison that you want to use. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp index 68ec6d5730..e8b6b939d7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Generated Values -text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp - - -Advanced Properties dialog Generated values tab page -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Generated Values -Specifies the options for automatically generated values for new data records.UFI: all text copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp -
-how to get this: Edit Database AdvancedProp -Retrieve generated values -Enables $[officename] support for auto-incremented data fields in the current ODBC or JDBC data source. Select this option if the auto-increment feature in the SDBCX layer of the database is not supported. By default, the auto-increment is selected for the primary key field. -Auto-increment statement -Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field. For example, the following following MySQL statement used the AUTO_INCREMENT statement to increase the "id" field each time the statement creates a data field: -CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER AUTO_INCREMENT) -Query of generated values -SELECT LAST_INSERT_D(); - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Generated Values +text/shared/explorer/database/dabaadvpropgen.xhp + + +Advanced Properties dialog Generated values tab page +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Generated Values +Specifies the options for automatically generated values for new data records.UFI: all text copied from shared\explorer\database\11020000.xhp +
+how to get this: Edit Database AdvancedProp +Retrieve generated values +Enables $[officename] support for auto-incremented data fields in the current ODBC or JDBC data source. Select this option if the auto-increment feature in the SDBCX layer of the database is not supported. By default, the auto-increment is selected for the primary key field. +Auto-increment statement +Enter the SQL command specifier that instructs the data source to auto-increment a specified Integer data field. For example, the following following MySQL statement used the AUTO_INCREMENT statement to increase the "id" field each time the statement creates a data field: +CREATE TABLE "table1" ("id" INTEGER AUTO_INCREMENT) +Query of generated values +SELECT LAST_INSERT_D(); + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp index 0b5ea71c16..9e5d969beb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Database File -text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp - - -UFI: the main database document window - - - - -
-Database File -The database window organizes the tables, views, queries, links, and reports of a database in %PRODUCTNAME. -
-
-Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME -
- - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Database File +text/shared/explorer/database/dabadoc.xhp + + +UFI: the main database document window + + + + +
+Database File +The database window organizes the tables, views, queries, links, and reports of a database in %PRODUCTNAME. +
+
+Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp index b6b4187ca6..ea117c4987 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Next Steps -text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp - - -UFI: Database Wizard page 2 - - - - -
-Next Steps -Choose how to continue: register the database, open the database for editing, insert a new table. -
-Yes, register the Database for me -Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is shown in the View - Data Sources window. -No, I'll register the database -Select to keep the database information only within the created database document. -Open the database for editing -Select to show the database document window where you can edit the database structure.UFI: is it so? -Create tables using the table wizard -Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished. -Database Wizard - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Next Steps +text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard page 2 + + + + +
+Next Steps +Choose how to continue: register the database, open the database for editing, insert a new table. +
+Yes, register the Database for me +Select to register the database within your user copy of %PRODUCTNAME. After registering, the database is shown in the View - Data Sources window. +No, I'll register the database +Select to keep the database information only within the created database document. +Open the database for editing +Select to show the database document window where you can edit the database structure.UFI: is it so? +Create tables using the table wizard +Select to call the Table Wizard after the Database Wizard is finished. +Database Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp index 6dee73d8eb..0deb0c1b5b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Microsoft Access Connection -text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp - - -UFI: Database Wizard MS Access page - - - - -Microsoft Access Connection -Specifies the settings for importing a database file in Microsoft Access format. -Microsoft Access database file -Enter the path to the database file. -Browse -Click to open a file selection dialog. -Database Wizard - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Microsoft Access Connection +text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02access.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard MS Access page + + + + +Microsoft Access Connection +Specifies the settings for importing a database file in Microsoft Access format. +Microsoft Access database file +Enter the path to the database file. +Browse +Click to open a file selection dialog. +Database Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02adabas.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02adabas.xhp index ece868dfdc..c2d9b6d42a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02adabas.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02adabas.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Adabas D Connection -text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02adabas.xhp - - -UFI: Database Wizard Adabas page - - - - -Adabas D Connection -Specifies the settings for importing an Adabas D database. -Name of the Adabas D database -Enter the name of the database file. -Browse -Click to open a file selection dialog. -Authentification -Database Wizard - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Adabas D Connection +text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02adabas.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard Adabas page + + + + +Adabas D Connection +Specifies the settings for importing an Adabas D database. +Name of the Adabas D database +Enter the name of the database file. +Browse +Click to open a file selection dialog. +Authentification +Database Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp index 46b32a165c..8af7ff1fc1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -ADO Connection -text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp - - -UFI: Database Wizard ADO page - - - - -ADO Connection -Specifies the options for adding an ADO (Microsoft ActiveX Data Objects) database.UFI: copied text from shared\explorer\database\11160000 -The ADO interface is a Microsoft Windows proprietary container for connecting to databases. -$[officename] requires the Microsoft Data Access Components (MDAC) to use the ADO interface. Microsoft Windows 2000 and XP include these components by default. For earlier visions of Windows, you need to install MDAC separately. You can download MDAC from the Microsoft web site. -Data source URL -Enter the data source URL. -JDBC driver class -Example URLs -To connect to an Access 2000 file, use the format: -PROVIDER=Microsoft.Jet.OLEDB.4.0;DATA SOURCE=c:\Access\nwind2000.mdb -To connect with a name to a catalog on a Microsoft SQL server that has a name turner, enter: -PROVIDER=sqloledb;DATA SOURCE=turner;INITIAL CATALOG=First -To access an ODBC driver as a provider: -DSN=SQLSERVER -Browse -Click to open a file selection dialog. -Test Connection -Click to test the connection using the current settings. -A user name can have a maximum of 18 characters. -A password must contain 3 to 18 characters. -Database Wizard - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +ADO Connection +text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ado.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard ADO page + + + + +ADO Connection +Specifies the options for adding an ADO (Microsoft ActiveX Data Objects) database.UFI: copied text from shared\explorer\database\11160000 +The ADO interface is a Microsoft Windows proprietary container for connecting to databases. +$[officename] requires the Microsoft Data Access Components (MDAC) to use the ADO interface. Microsoft Windows 2000 and XP include these components by default. For earlier visions of Windows, you need to install MDAC separately. You can download MDAC from the Microsoft web site. +Data source URL +Enter the data source URL. +JDBC driver class +Example URLs +To connect to an Access 2000 file, use the format: +PROVIDER=Microsoft.Jet.OLEDB.4.0;DATA SOURCE=c:\Access\nwind2000.mdb +To connect with a name to a catalog on a Microsoft SQL server that has a name turner, enter: +PROVIDER=sqloledb;DATA SOURCE=turner;INITIAL CATALOG=First +To access an ODBC driver as a provider: +DSN=SQLSERVER +Browse +Click to open a file selection dialog. +Test Connection +Click to test the connection using the current settings. +A user name can have a maximum of 18 characters. +A password must contain 3 to 18 characters. +Database Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp index a3630159b5..6225a4e1b8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -JDBC Connection -text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp - - -UFI: Database Wizard JDBC page - - - - -JDBC Connection -Specifies the options for accessing JDBC databases.copied text from shared\explorer\database\11110000 -JDBC Examples - -%PRODUCTNAME can communicate with a database through a JDBC driver class, that is provided by the database manufacturer. Below are two examples of JDBC driver classes. -The driver classes must be added to the Java CLASSPATH on your system, or in %PRODUCTNAME. -Oracle database + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +JDBC Connection +text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard JDBC page + + + + +JDBC Connection +Specifies the options for accessing JDBC databases.copied text from shared\explorer\database\11110000 +JDBC Examples + +%PRODUCTNAME can communicate with a database through a JDBC driver class, that is provided by the database manufacturer. Below are two examples of JDBC driver classes. +The driver classes must be added to the Java CLASSPATH on your system, or in %PRODUCTNAME. +Oracle database Use JDBC to access an Oracle database from Solaris or Linux, and ODBC to access the database from Microsoft Windows. - -Under UNIX, ensure that the Oracle database client is installed with JDBC support. The JDBC driver class from the Solaris Oracle client version 8.x is located in the <Oracle client>/product/jdbc/lib/classes111.zip directory. You can also download the latest version from the Oracle web site: + +Under UNIX, ensure that the Oracle database client is installed with JDBC support. The JDBC driver class from the Solaris Oracle client version 8.x is located in the <Oracle client>/product/jdbc/lib/classes111.zip directory. You can also download the latest version from the Oracle web site: http://otn.oracle.com/tech/java/sqlj_jdbc/content.html - -Enter the location of the Oracle database server in the Data source URL box. The syntax of the URL depends on the database type. See the documentation that came with the JDBC driver for more information. -For an Oracle database, the syntax of the URL is: -oracle:thin:@hostname:port:database_name -Where: - - -hostname is the name of the machine that runs the Oracle database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. - - -port is the port where the Oracle database listens. Ask your database administrator for the correct port address. - - -database_name is the name of the Oracle database. Ask your database administrator for the correct name. - - -MySQL database -Use the mm.mysql-2.0.4-bin.jar driver archive available on the following web site: -http://mmmysql.sourceforge.net/oldDist.html -The syntax for a MySQL database is: -mysql://hostname:port/database_name -Where: - - -hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. - - -port is the default port for MySQL databases, namely 3306. - - -database_name is the name of the database. - - -Data source URL + +Enter the location of the Oracle database server in the Data source URL box. The syntax of the URL depends on the database type. See the documentation that came with the JDBC driver for more information. +For an Oracle database, the syntax of the URL is: +oracle:thin:@hostname:port:database_name +Where: + + +hostname is the name of the machine that runs the Oracle database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. + + +port is the port where the Oracle database listens. Ask your database administrator for the correct port address. + + +database_name is the name of the Oracle database. Ask your database administrator for the correct name. + + +MySQL database +Use the mm.mysql-2.0.4-bin.jar driver archive available on the following web site: +http://mmmysql.sourceforge.net/oldDist.html +The syntax for a MySQL database is: +mysql://hostname:port/database_name +Where: + + +hostname is the name of the machine that runs the MySQL database. You can also replace hostname with the IP address of the server. + + +port is the default port for MySQL databases, namely 3306. + + +database_name is the name of the database. + + +Data source URL Enter the URL for connecting to the database, for example, for the MySQL-JDBC-Driver, enter "jdbc:mysql://<Servername>/<DB-Name>", where "DB-Name" is the name of the database. For more information on the JDBC driver, consult the documentation that came with the driver. - -JDBC Driver Class -Enter the name of the JDBC driver. -Test ConnectionUFI: may be Test Class - both strings are in spec -Click to test the connection using the current settings. -Authentification -Database Wizard - - + +JDBC Driver Class +Enter the name of the JDBC driver. +Test ConnectionUFI: may be Test Class - both strings are in spec +Click to test the connection using the current settings. +Authentification +Database Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp index 4ccad4b235..b092743f5b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -LDAP Connection -text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp - - -UFI: Database Wizard LDAP page - - - - -LDAP Connection + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +LDAP Connection +text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02ldap.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard LDAP page + + + + +LDAP Connection Specifies the settings for importing a database using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). This page is only available if you registered an LDAP server as an address database.UFI: copied text from shared\explorer\database\11190000 - -Host name + +Host name Enter the name of the LDAP server using the format "ldap.server.com". - -Base DN + +Base DN Enter the starting point to search the LDAP database, for example, "dc=com". - -Port number -Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389. -Use secure connection (SSL) -Creates a secure connection to the LDAP server through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). By default, an SSL connection uses port 636. A regular connection uses port 389. -Authentification -Database Wizard - - + +Port number +Enter the port of the LDAP server, normally 389. +Use secure connection (SSL) +Creates a secure connection to the LDAP server through the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). By default, an SSL connection uses port 636. A regular connection uses port 389. +Authentification +Database Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp index eb91e576aa..8860deda9c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -MySQL Connection -text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp - - -UFI: Database Wizard MySQL page - - - - -MySQL Connection -Specifies the options for MySQL databases.text copied from shared\explorer\database\11120000 -Connect using ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) -Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level. -Connect using JDBC (Java Database Connectivity) -Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level. -The next wizard page depends on your choice of ODBC or JDBC: -ODBC Connection -JDBC Connection -Authentification -Database Wizard - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +MySQL Connection +text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02mysql.xhp + + +UFI: Database Wizard MySQL page + + + + +MySQL Connection +Specifies the options for MySQL databases.text copied from shared\explorer\database\11120000 +Connect using ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) +Connects to an existing ODBC data source that was set on a system level. +Connect using JDBC (Java Database Connectivity) +Connects to an existing JDBC data source that was set on a system level. +The next wizard page depends on your choice of ODBC or JDBC: +ODBC Connection +JDBC Connection +Authentification +Database Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp index 61ace55034..d271677641 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Menus -text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp - - -UFI: Database Document Menu bar - - - - - - - - - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Menus +text/shared/explorer/database/menubar.xhp + + +UFI: Database Document Menu bar + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp index e2b96b8ce5..d807059a64 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Edit -text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp - - -UFI: Edit menu of Database -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-Edit -
-The Edit menu of a database window. -Copy -Copies the selected object to the clipboard. -Paste -Inserts an item from the clipboard. If you want, you can insert forms and reports, including subfolders, from one database file to another. -Paste Special -Inserts an item from the clipboard. If you want, you can insert forms and reports, including subfolders, from one database file to another. -Delete -Deletes the selected object. You must have write permission to delete objects from a database. -Rename -Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid. -Edit -Opens the selected form or report so that you can edit the content. For a dynamic report, the template is opened for you to edit. -Open -Opens the selected object in the last saved state. -Convert to Viewor Create as View -Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database. -Most databases use queries to filter or to sort database tables to display records on your computer. Views offer the same functionality as queries, but on the server side. If your database is on a server that supports views, you can use views to filter the records on the server to speed up the display time. -Form Wizard -Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view. -Report Wizard -Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view. -Select All -Selects all entries, including subfolders, in the lower part of the database window. -Database -Opens a submenu. -Properties -Opens the Database Properties dialog where you can specify settings for the selected database. -Connection Type -Opens the Connection Type Wizard which helps you to open a database file that is in an unsupported format. -Advanced Properties -Opens the Advanced Properties dialog. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Edit +text/shared/explorer/database/menuedit.xhp + + +UFI: Edit menu of Database +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+Edit +
+The Edit menu of a database window. +Copy +Copies the selected object to the clipboard. +Paste +Inserts an item from the clipboard. If you want, you can insert forms and reports, including subfolders, from one database file to another. +Paste Special +Inserts an item from the clipboard. If you want, you can insert forms and reports, including subfolders, from one database file to another. +Delete +Deletes the selected object. You must have write permission to delete objects from a database. +Rename +Renames the selected object. Depending on the database, some names, characters, and name length might be invalid. +Edit +Opens the selected form or report so that you can edit the content. For a dynamic report, the template is opened for you to edit. +Open +Opens the selected object in the last saved state. +Convert to Viewor Create as View +Converts the selected query to a view. The original query remains in your database file and an additional view is generated on the database server. You must have write permission to add a view to a database. +Most databases use queries to filter or to sort database tables to display records on your computer. Views offer the same functionality as queries, but on the server side. If your database is on a server that supports views, you can use views to filter the records on the server to speed up the display time. +Form Wizard +Starts the Form Wizard for the selected table, query, or view. +Report Wizard +Starts the Report Wizard for the selected table, query, or view. +Select All +Selects all entries, including subfolders, in the lower part of the database window. +Database +Opens a submenu. +Properties +Opens the Database Properties dialog where you can specify settings for the selected database. +Connection Type +Opens the Connection Type Wizard which helps you to open a database file that is in an unsupported format. +Advanced Properties +Opens the Advanced Properties dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp index 60e07d405e..dd248039f0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -File -text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp - - -UFI: File menu for Database - - - - -
-File -
-The File menu of a database window. -New -no info in spec except that it is there -Open -no info in spec except that it is there -Wizard -no info in spec except that it is there -Close -no info in spec except that it is there -Save -Saves the current database file. In the file save dialog, select a path and file name to save. -Save As -Saves the current database file with another name. In the file save dialog, select a path and file name to save. -Export -Exports the selected report or form to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. -Send -Opens a submenu. -Document as E-mail -Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The current database file is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. -Report as E-mail -Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. -Report to Text Document -Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +File +text/shared/explorer/database/menufile.xhp + + +UFI: File menu for Database + + + + +
+File +
+The File menu of a database window. +New +no info in spec except that it is there +Open +no info in spec except that it is there +Wizard +no info in spec except that it is there +Close +no info in spec except that it is there +Save +Saves the current database file. In the file save dialog, select a path and file name to save. +Save As +Saves the current database file with another name. In the file save dialog, select a path and file name to save. +Export +Exports the selected report or form to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. +Send +Opens a submenu. +Document as E-mail +Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The current database file is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. +Report as E-mail +Opens the default e-mail application to send a new e-mail. The selected report is appended as an attachment. You can enter the subject, the recipients and a mail body. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. +Report to Text Document +Exports the selected report to a text document. A dynamic report is exported as a copy of the database contents at the time of export. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp index 6a7e11c931..a2f79fa642 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Insert -text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp - - -UFI: Insert menu of Database - - - - -
-Insert -
-The Insert menu of a database window. -Form -Opens a new text document in form mode.UFI: how do we call this? XForms editing document? Writer/Form? -Report -Starts the Report Wizard with the selected table, view, or query already filled in. -Query (Design View) -Opens a new query in design mode. -Query (SQL View) -Opens a new query in SQL mode. -Table Design -Opens the table design view. -View Design View -Opens a new view in design mode. -View (Simple) -Opens a new view in SQL mode. -Folder -Opens a dialog to save a new folder in the database file. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Insert +text/shared/explorer/database/menuinsert.xhp + + +UFI: Insert menu of Database + + + + +
+Insert +
+The Insert menu of a database window. +Form +Opens a new text document in form mode.UFI: how do we call this? XForms editing document? Writer/Form? +Report +Starts the Report Wizard with the selected table, view, or query already filled in. +Query (Design View) +Opens a new query in design mode. +Query (SQL View) +Opens a new query in SQL mode. +Table Design +Opens the table design view. +View Design View +Opens a new view in design mode. +View (Simple) +Opens a new view in SQL mode. +Folder +Opens a dialog to save a new folder in the database file. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp index f6c56edb3e..5b8bbd98eb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Tools -text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp - - -UFI: Tools menu of Database - - - - -
-Tools -
-The Tools menu of a database window. -Relationshipsor Relation Design (spec has both) -Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations. -User Administration -Opens the User Administration dialog.UFI: where is this specced? -Table Filter -Opens the Table Filter dialog, where you specify which tables of the database shall be visible or hidden.see text in shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp -Execute SQL -Opens the SQL dialog where you can enter SQL statements.UFI: may be shared\02\14030000.xhp - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Tools +text/shared/explorer/database/menutools.xhp + + +UFI: Tools menu of Database + + + + +
+Tools +
+The Tools menu of a database window. +Relationshipsor Relation Design (spec has both) +Opens the Relation Design view and checks whether the database connection supports relations. +User Administration +Opens the User Administration dialog.UFI: where is this specced? +Table Filter +Opens the Table Filter dialog, where you specify which tables of the database shall be visible or hidden.see text in shared\explorer\database\11090000.xhp +Execute SQL +Opens the SQL dialog where you can enter SQL statements.UFI: may be shared\02\14030000.xhp + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp index 598518e474..2d4f789a5b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Query Wizard - Grouping -text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp - - -UFI: new Query Wizard page 5 - - - - -
-Query Wizard - Grouping -Specify to group the query. The data source must support the SQL statement "Order by clauses" to enable this page of the Wizard. -
- - - - - - -Group by -Displays all fields that will be used to group the query. -Query Wizard - Grouping conditions - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Query Wizard - Grouping +text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard05.xhp + + +UFI: new Query Wizard page 5 + + + + +
+Query Wizard - Grouping +Specify to group the query. The data source must support the SQL statement "Order by clauses" to enable this page of the Wizard. +
+ + + + + + +Group by +Displays all fields that will be used to group the query. +Query Wizard - Grouping conditions + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp index b8d79f441a..0fe70682d2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Query Wizard - Grouping Conditions -text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp - - -UFI: new Query Wizard page 6 - - - - -
-Query Wizard - Grouping Conditions -Specify the conditions to group the query. The data source must support the SQL statement "Order by clauses" to enable this page of the Wizard. -
-Match all of the following -Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND. -Match any of the following -Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR. -Field name -Select the field name for the grouping condition. -Condition -Select the condition for the grouping. -Value -Enter the value for the grouping condition. -Query Wizard - Aliases - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Query Wizard - Grouping Conditions +text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard06.xhp + + +UFI: new Query Wizard page 6 + + + + +
+Query Wizard - Grouping Conditions +Specify the conditions to group the query. The data source must support the SQL statement "Order by clauses" to enable this page of the Wizard. +
+Match all of the following +Select to group the query by all the conditions using a logical AND. +Match any of the following +Select to group the query by any of the conditions using a logical OR. +Field name +Select the field name for the grouping condition. +Condition +Select the condition for the grouping. +Value +Enter the value for the grouping condition. +Query Wizard - Aliases + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp index 56e977bf5e..b03c9a9bf4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Query Wizard - Aliases -text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp - - -UFI: new Query Wizard page 7 - - - - -
-Query Wizard - Aliases -Optionally assign aliases to field names. Aliases can provide more user friendly names for the display of field names, for example when fields from different tables have the same names. -
-Alias -Enter the alias for the field name. -Query Wizard - Overview - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Query Wizard - Aliases +text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard07.xhp + + +UFI: new Query Wizard page 7 + + + + +
+Query Wizard - Aliases +Optionally assign aliases to field names. Aliases can provide more user friendly names for the display of field names, for example when fields from different tables have the same names. +
+Alias +Enter the alias for the field name. +Query Wizard - Overview + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp index 924c5931d5..3e4c87af36 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Query Wizard - Overview -text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp - - -UFI: new Query Wizard page 8 - - - - -
-Query Wizard - Overview -Enter a name of the query and specify whether you want to display or to modify the query next after the Wizard is finished. -
-Name of the query -Enter the name of the query. -Display query -Select to save and display the query. -Modify query -Select to save the query and open it for editing. -Overview -Shows a summary of the query. -Query Wizard - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Query Wizard - Overview +text/shared/explorer/database/querywizard08.xhp + + +UFI: new Query Wizard page 8 + + + + +
+Query Wizard - Overview +Enter a name of the query and specify whether you want to display or to modify the query next after the Wizard is finished. +
+Name of the query +Enter the name of the query. +Display query +Select to save and display the query. +Modify query +Select to save the query and open it for editing. +Overview +Shows a summary of the query. +Query Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp index 35a802d9e9..72caac7a86 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Table Wizard -text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp - - -UFI: new Table Wizard main page - - - - -
-Table Wizard -The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table. -
- - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Table Wizard +text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard00.xhp + + +UFI: new Table Wizard main page + + + + +
+Table Wizard +The Table Wizard helps you to create a database table. +
+ + + - -Query Wizard - Field selection - - + +Query Wizard - Field selection + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp index 5d82d04c31..758afea75e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Table Wizard - Select Table Scenario -text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp - - -UFI: new Table Wizard page 1 - - - - -
-Table Wizard - Select Table Scenario -Select fields from the provided sample tables as a starting point to create your own table. -
-Business -Select the business category to see only business sample tables. -Private -Select the private category to see only private sample tables. -Sample tables -Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields of that table from the left list box. Repeat this step as often as you want. - - - - - - -Fields in my new table -Displays all fields that will be included in the new table. -Table Wizard - Set type formatting - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Table Wizard - Select Table Scenario +text/shared/explorer/database/tablewizard01.xhp + + +UFI: new Table Wizard page 1 + + + + +
+Table Wizard - Select Table Scenario +Select fields from the provided sample tables as a starting point to create your own table. +
+Business +Select the business category to see only business sample tables. +Private +Select the private category to see only private sample tables. +Sample tables +Select one of the sample tables. Then select fields of that table from the left list box. Repeat this step as often as you want. + + + + + + +Fields in my new table +Displays all fields that will be included in the new table. +Table Wizard - Set type formatting + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp index 42885bbaaa..c45d3bfa28 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Turning Extended Tips On and Off -/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Turning Extended Tips On and Off +/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -Help; extended tips on/off -extended tips in Help +Help; extended tips on/off +extended tips in Help tips;extended tips in Help - + Turning Extended Tips On and Off - - -Extended tips provide a brief description of the function of a particular icon, text box or menu command when you rest your cursor on that item. -To turn Extended Tips on and off: - - -On the menu bar of the application, choose Help - Extended Tips. -A check mark next to the menu command indicates that the extended tips are activated. - - -To turn Extended Tips on temporarily: - - -Press the shortcut keys Shift+F1 to activate extended tips once. -A question mark appears beside the mouse pointer. You can move this Help Mouse Pointer over all controls, icons and menu commands to obtain a description of the command. The Help Mouse Pointer is disabled the next time you click the mouse. - - - - - - + + +Extended tips provide a brief description of the function of a particular icon, text box or menu command when you rest your cursor on that item. +To turn Extended Tips on and off: + + +On the menu bar of the application, choose Help - Extended Tips. +A check mark next to the menu command indicates that the extended tips are activated. + + +To turn Extended Tips on temporarily: + + +Press the shortcut keys Shift+F1 to activate extended tips once. +A question mark appears beside the mouse pointer. You can move this Help Mouse Pointer over all controls, icons and menu commands to obtain a description of the command. The Help Mouse Pointer is disabled the next time you click the mouse. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp index 049e59d244..2d0a16d568 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -ActiveX Control to Display Documents in Internet Explorer -/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +ActiveX Control to Display Documents in Internet Explorer +/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -ActiveX control -Internet; Internet Explorer for displaying $[officename] documents +ActiveX control +Internet; Internet Explorer for displaying $[officename] documents $[officename] documents;viewing in Internet Explorer - + ActiveX Control to Display Documents in Internet Explorer - -Under Windows only, you can view any $[officename] document in a window of the Microsoft Internet Explorer. Install the ActiveX control in the $[officename] Setup program. -Installing the ActiveX control - - -Close $[officename] and the Quickstarter. - - -Start the $[officename] Setup program. There is a link to start Setup in your $[officepath] folder. - - -In Setup, choose the Modify option and click Next. - - -Open the Optional Components entry and find the ActiveX Control entry. If it has a solid color it is already installed. If it has another color, click it until it shows a solid color. - - -Click Modify, answer any other dialogs, and end the Setup program with Complete. - - -Viewing $[officename] documents - - -In Internet Explorer, browse to a web page that contains a link to a $[officename] Writer *.sxw document, for example. - - -Click the link to view the document in the Internet Explorer window. -You may still right-click the link to save the file on your harddisk. - - -Editing $[officename] documents -The $[officename] document inside the Internet Explorer shows a set of read-only toolbar icons. - - -Click the Edit file icon in the document's toolbar to open a copy of the document in a new $[officename] window. - - -Edit the copy of the document. - - - - - - - - - - + +Under Windows only, you can view any $[officename] document in a window of the Microsoft Internet Explorer. Install the ActiveX control in the $[officename] Setup program. +Installing the ActiveX control + + +Close $[officename] and the Quickstarter. + + +Start the $[officename] Setup program. There is a link to start Setup in your $[officepath] folder. + + +In Setup, choose the Modify option and click Next. + + +Open the Optional Components entry and find the ActiveX Control entry. If it has a solid color it is already installed. If it has another color, click it until it shows a solid color. + + +Click Modify, answer any other dialogs, and end the Setup program with Complete. + + +Viewing $[officename] documents + + +In Internet Explorer, browse to a web page that contains a link to a $[officename] Writer *.sxw document, for example. + + +Click the link to view the document in the Internet Explorer window. +You may still right-click the link to save the file on your harddisk. + + +Editing $[officename] documents +The $[officename] document inside the Internet Explorer shows a set of read-only toolbar icons. + + +Click the Edit file icon in the document's toolbar to open a copy of the document in a new $[officename] window. + + +Edit the copy of the document. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp index 1445f36b81..99f6347acc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Assistive Tools in $[officename] -/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Assistive Tools in $[officename] +/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -accessibility; $[officename] assistive technology -assistive technology in $[officename] -screen readers -screen magnifiers -readers;accessibility +accessibility; $[officename] assistive technology +assistive technology in $[officename] +screen readers +screen magnifiers +readers;accessibility magnifiers;accessibility - + Assistive Tools in $[officename] - -$[officename] supports some assistive technology tools like screen magnification software, screen readers, and on-screen keyboards. Most of these tools communicate with $[officename] by means of the Java(TM) Access Bridge software, that uses the Java Accessibility API, a part of the Java runtime environment. -Requirements to use assistive tools in $[officename] - - -Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.4.1_01 and higher, or version 1.4.0_02 with the locale set to "en_us". - - -Most recent version of the software for your assistive tool - - -On Windows systems, Java Access Bridge software version 1.0.3 or higher - - -On UNIX(R) systems, the GNOME 2 desktop environment with the Java Access Bridge software for GNOME - - -Supported Assistive Tools -On Windows systems, $[officename] directly supports most on-screen keyboard software. Additional support for assistive tools is provided by the Java Access Bridge software. The following is a list of some assistive tools that use the Java Access Bridge software to exchange data with $[officename]: - - -ZoomText Screen Magnifier (version 7.11 or higher)(Windows) - - -Gnopernicus Screen Reader and Magnifier, using GNOME Assistive Technology Service Provider Interface (at-spi) and Java Accessibility API software - - -GNOME On Screen Keyboard (GOK), using GNOME at-spi and Java Accessibility API software - - -Supported Input Devices -$[officename] provides the ability to use alternative input devices for access to all functions of $[officename]. - - -Screen magnification software allow users with low vision to work in $[officename] with caret and focus tracking. - - -On-screen keyboards enable users to perform almost all data input and commands with a mouse. - - -Screen readers allow visually impaired users to access $[officename] with text-to-speech and Braille displays. - - -When accessibility support in $[officename] is enabled, the Java Runtime Environment is loaded, and increases the startup time for $[officename]. - - -Tools - Options - $[officename] - View -Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance -Tools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility - - - - + +$[officename] supports some assistive technology tools like screen magnification software, screen readers, and on-screen keyboards. Most of these tools communicate with $[officename] by means of the Java(TM) Access Bridge software, that uses the Java Accessibility API, a part of the Java runtime environment. +Requirements to use assistive tools in $[officename] + + +Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.4.1_01 and higher, or version 1.4.0_02 with the locale set to "en_us". + + +Most recent version of the software for your assistive tool + + +On Windows systems, Java Access Bridge software version 1.0.3 or higher + + +On UNIX(R) systems, the GNOME 2 desktop environment with the Java Access Bridge software for GNOME + + +Supported Assistive Tools +On Windows systems, $[officename] directly supports most on-screen keyboard software. Additional support for assistive tools is provided by the Java Access Bridge software. The following is a list of some assistive tools that use the Java Access Bridge software to exchange data with $[officename]: + + +ZoomText Screen Magnifier (version 7.11 or higher)(Windows) + + +Gnopernicus Screen Reader and Magnifier, using GNOME Assistive Technology Service Provider Interface (at-spi) and Java Accessibility API software + + +GNOME On Screen Keyboard (GOK), using GNOME at-spi and Java Accessibility API software + + +Supported Input Devices +$[officename] provides the ability to use alternative input devices for access to all functions of $[officename]. + + +Screen magnification software allow users with low vision to work in $[officename] with caret and focus tracking. + + +On-screen keyboards enable users to perform almost all data input and commands with a mouse. + + +Screen readers allow visually impaired users to access $[officename] with text-to-speech and Braille displays. + + +When accessibility support in $[officename] is enabled, the Java Runtime Environment is loaded, and increases the startup time for $[officename]. + + +Tools - Options - $[officename] - View +Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance +Tools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp index 43247ac5d9..c605a9614c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Turning off Automatic URL Recognition -/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Turning off Automatic URL Recognition +/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -AutoCorrect function; URL recognition -recognizing URLs; AutoCorrect function -hyperlinks; automatic formatting -Internet; turning off recognition of addresses -links; formatting -hyperlinks; formatting -automatic hyperlink formatting +AutoCorrect function; URL recognition +recognizing URLs; AutoCorrect function +hyperlinks; automatic formatting +Internet; turning off recognition of addresses +links; formatting +hyperlinks; formatting +automatic hyperlink formatting automatic URL recognition - + Turning off Automatic URL Recognition - -When you enter text, $[officename] automatically recognizes a word that may be a URL and replaces the word with a hyperlink. $[officename] formats the hyperlink with direct font attributes (color and underline) the properties of which are obtained from certain Character Styles. -If you do not want $[officename] to automatically recognize URLs as you are typing, there are several ways of turning off this feature. -Undo URL Recognition - - + +When you enter text, $[officename] automatically recognizes a word that may be a URL and replaces the word with a hyperlink. $[officename] formats the hyperlink with direct font attributes (color and underline) the properties of which are obtained from certain Character Styles. +If you do not want $[officename] to automatically recognize URLs as you are typing, there are several ways of turning off this feature. +Undo URL Recognition + + When you are typing and notice that a text has just been automatically converted into a hyperlink, press Command -Ctrl+Z to undo this formatting. - - -If you do not notice this conversion until later, select the hyperlink and choose the menu command Format - Default. - - -Turn off URL Recognition - - -Load a document of the type for which you want to modify the URL recognition. -If you want to modify the URL recognition for text documents, open a text document. - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect. (In $[officename] Writer, choose Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat.) - - -In the AutoCorrect dialog, select the Options tab. - - -If you unmark URL Recognition, words will no longer be automatically replaced with hyperlinks. -In $[officename] Writer there are two check boxes in front of URL Recognition. The box in the first column is for later post-editing and the box in the second column is for AutoCorrect as you type. - - - +Ctrl+Z to undo this formatting. + + +If you do not notice this conversion until later, select the hyperlink and choose the menu command Format - Default. + + +Turn off URL Recognition + + +Load a document of the type for which you want to modify the URL recognition. +If you want to modify the URL recognition for text documents, open a text document. + + +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect. (In $[officename] Writer, choose Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat.) + + +In the AutoCorrect dialog, select the Options tab. + + +If you unmark URL Recognition, words will no longer be automatically replaced with hyperlinks. +In $[officename] Writer there are two check boxes in front of URL Recognition. The box in the first column is for later post-editing and the box in the second column is for AutoCorrect as you type. + + + - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp index 26b72c4c31..9dff8dfd48 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Showing, Docking and Hiding Windows -/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Showing, Docking and Hiding Windows +/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -Gallery; showing -data source view; showing -windows; showing (guide) -Navigator; showing -Styles and Formatting window; showing -AutoHide function;showing/hiding windows -windows; hiding (guide) -windows; docking (guide) +Gallery; showing +data source view; showing +windows; showing (guide) +Navigator; showing +Styles and Formatting window; showing +AutoHide function;showing/hiding windows +windows; hiding (guide) +windows; docking (guide) docking; windows (guide) - - + + Showing, Docking and Hiding Windows - -Some windows in $[officename] are dockable, such as the Navigator and Gallery windows. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. -Docking and Undocking Windows -To dock a window, do one of the following: - - -Hold down Ctrl and drag the window by its title bar to the side, or - - -Hold down Ctrl and double-click inside a vacant area of the window; in the Styles and Formatting window, double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons. - - -These methods can also be used to undock a currently docked window. -Showing and Hiding Docked Windows - - - + +Some windows in $[officename] are dockable, such as the Navigator and Gallery windows. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. +Docking and Undocking Windows +To dock a window, do one of the following: + + +Hold down Ctrl and drag the window by its title bar to the side, or + + +Hold down Ctrl and double-click inside a vacant area of the window; in the Styles and Formatting window, double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons. + + +These methods can also be used to undock a currently docked window. +Showing and Hiding Docked Windows +
+ + Icon - - - -You can float or fix a docked window by clicking the button with a pin located on the upper left side. A floating window floats above the workplace so that the windows below it are partially covered. The fixed state displays the window next to the workplace. - - -
- - - - + + + +You can float or fix a docked window by clicking the button with a pin located on the upper left side. A floating window floats above the workplace so that the windows below it are partially covered. The fixed state displays the window next to the workplace. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Click the arrow button on the edge of the docked window to show or hide the docked window. The AutoHide function allows you to temporarily show a hidden window by clicking on its edge. When you move the pointer outside of the window area, it will become hidden again. - - -
- - - + + + +Click the arrow button on the edge of the docked window to show or hide the docked window. The AutoHide function allows you to temporarily show a hidden window by clicking on its edge. When you move the pointer outside of the window area, it will become hidden again. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp index 717ef7680b..b782c652c6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics -/text/shared/guide/background.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics +/text/shared/guide/background.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -backgrounds; selecting colors -paragraphs; backgrounds -backgrounds; paragraphs -backgrounds; text -text; paragraph backgrounds -colors; backgrounds -backgrounds; graphics -graphics; backgrounds -backgrounds; pages -pages; backgrounds -spreadsheets; backgrounds -backgrounds; spreadsheets -tables; backgrounds -backgrounds; tables -cells; backgrounds -backgrounds; cells -watermarks +backgrounds; selecting colors +paragraphs; backgrounds +backgrounds; paragraphs +backgrounds; text +text; paragraph backgrounds +colors; backgrounds +backgrounds; graphics +graphics; backgrounds +backgrounds; pages +pages; backgrounds +spreadsheets; backgrounds +backgrounds; spreadsheets +tables; backgrounds +backgrounds; tables +cells; backgrounds +backgrounds; cells +watermarks backgrounds;watermarks - + Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics - -You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for various objects in $[officename]. -Applying a Background To Text Characters - - -Select the characters. - - -Choose Format - Character. - - -Click the Background tab, select the background color. - - -Applying a Background To a Paragraph - - -Place the cursor in the paragraph or select several paragraphs. - - -Choose Format - Paragraph. - - -On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. - - -Applying a Background To All or Part of a Text Table - - -Place the cursor in the table in your text document. - - -Choose Format - Table. - - -On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. -In the For box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection. - - -Applying a Background to Parts of a Text Table Using an Icon - - -To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and click the color on the Background Color floating toolbar. - - -To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph, then click the color on the Background Color floating toolbar. - - -Applying a Background To a $[officename] Calc Spreadsheet - - -Select the cells. - - -Choose Format - Cells (or Format Cells from the context menu). - - -On the Background tab page, select the background color. - - -Graphics in the Background of Cells - - -Choose Insert - Graphics - From File. - - -Select the graphic and click Open. + +You can define a background color or use a graphic as a background for various objects in $[officename]. +Applying a Background To Text Characters + + +Select the characters. + + +Choose Format - Character. + + +Click the Background tab, select the background color. + + +Applying a Background To a Paragraph + + +Place the cursor in the paragraph or select several paragraphs. + + +Choose Format - Paragraph. + + +On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. + + +Applying a Background To All or Part of a Text Table + + +Place the cursor in the table in your text document. + + +Choose Format - Table. + + +On the Background tab page, select the background color or a background graphic. +In the For box, choose whether the color or graphic should apply to the current cell, the current row or the whole table. If you select several cells or rows before opening the dialog, the change applies to the selection. + + +Applying a Background to Parts of a Text Table Using an Icon + + +To apply a background color to cells, select the cells and click the color on the Background Color floating toolbar. + + +To apply a background color to a text paragraph within a cell, place the cursor into the text paragraph, then click the color on the Background Color floating toolbar. + + +Applying a Background To a $[officename] Calc Spreadsheet + + +Select the cells. + + +Choose Format - Cells (or Format Cells from the context menu). + + +On the Background tab page, select the background color. + + +Graphics in the Background of Cells + + +Choose Insert - Graphics - From File. + + +Select the graphic and click Open. The graphic is inserted anchored to the current cell. You can move and scale the graphic as you want. In your context menu you can use the Arrange - To Background command to place this in the background. To select a graphic that has been placed in the background, use the Navigator -Navigator. - - -Graphic in the Background of Printed Pages (Watermark) - - -Choose Format - Page. - - -On the Background tab page, select a background color or a background graphic. -This background appears only in the print behind the cells not formatted elsewhere. - - +Navigator. + + +Graphic in the Background of Printed Pages (Watermark) + + +Choose Format - Page. + + +On the Background tab page, select a background color or a background graphic. +This background appears only in the print behind the cells not formatted elsewhere. + + Applying Backgrounds To Presentation Pages - + See . - + - -Highlighting icon -Background tab page - - + +Highlighting icon +Background tab page + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp index 9f3c400ccd..7ff8423db7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Inserting Line Breaks in Cells -K:\WORKBENCH\help2\source\text\shared\guide\breaking_lines.xhp - - - -UFI 04/04/27, added links to this file in scalc/guide/main.xhp and swriter/guide/main.xhp -YJ: checked - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Inserting Line Breaks in Cells +K:\WORKBENCH\help2\source\text\shared\guide\breaking_lines.xhp + + + +UFI 04/04/27, added links to this file in scalc/guide/main.xhp and swriter/guide/main.xhp +YJ: checked + + -line breaks; in cells -cells; line breaks -text flow; in cells -cells; text flow -text breaks in cells -wrapping text; in cells -word wrapping in cells -automatic line breaks +line breaks; in cells +cells; line breaks +text flow; in cells +cells; text flow +text breaks in cells +wrapping text; in cells +word wrapping in cells +automatic line breaks new lines in cells - + Inserting Line Breaks in Cells - -Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Calc spreadsheet cells - - -To insert a line break in a spreadsheet cell, press the Ctrl+Enter keys. -This will work only with the text edit cursor inside the cell, not at the input line. So first double-click the cell, then single-click at the text position where you want the line break. - - -Formatting $[officename] Calc cells for automatic line wrapping - - -Select the cells for which you want an automatic line break. - - -Choose Format - Cells - Alignment. - - -Select Automatic line break. - - -Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Writer text document tables - - -To insert a line break in a text document table cell, press the Enter key. - - -An automatic line break will be performed while you type across the end of each cell. -
-Alignment -
- - + +Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Calc spreadsheet cells + + +To insert a line break in a spreadsheet cell, press the Ctrl+Enter keys. +This will work only with the text edit cursor inside the cell, not at the input line. So first double-click the cell, then single-click at the text position where you want the line break. + + +Formatting $[officename] Calc cells for automatic line wrapping + + +Select the cells for which you want an automatic line break. + + +Choose Format - Cells - Alignment. + + +Select Automatic line break. + + +Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Writer text document tables + + +To insert a line break in a text document table cell, press the Enter key. + + +An automatic line break will be performed while you type across the end of each cell. +
+Alignment +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp index cb4334a12b..c1d8287256 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Editing Chart Axes -/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Editing Chart Axes +/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -charts; editing axes -axes; in charts -editing; chart axes -axes; formatting -charts; formatting axes +charts; editing axes +axes; in charts +editing; chart axes +axes; formatting +charts; formatting axes formatting; axes in charts - + Editing Chart Axes - -To edit the axes of a chart that you have inserted: - - -Double-click on the chart. -A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. - - -Choose Format - Axis, then select the axis (or axes) that you would like to edit. A dialog appears. - - -Select from the available sections and make the required changes (for example, select the Scale tab if you want to modify the scale of the axis). - - -Click OK. In your document, click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode. - - - -Format - Object properties - - - - + +To edit the axes of a chart that you have inserted: + + +Double-click on the chart. +A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. + + +Choose Format - Axis, then select the axis (or axes) that you would like to edit. A dialog appears. + + +Select from the available sections and make the required changes (for example, select the Scale tab if you want to modify the scale of the axis). + + +Click OK. In your document, click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode. + + + +Format - Object properties + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp index 14512d674b..8051d0e782 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Inserting Charts -/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Removed screenshots. Cleaned a bit. Needs update! - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Inserting Charts +/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Removed screenshots. Cleaned a bit. Needs update! + + -charts; inserting -plotting;data as charts -inserting; charts -spreadsheets; inserting charts -charts; editing data -editing; chart data -data; in columns -columns; putting data in -rows; putting data in -data; putting in rows -charts; selecting (guide) -charts; marking -ordering; data series -data series; changing order of -values; changing in charts -charts; changing values in -numbers; changing in a chart -charts; selecting types -charts; changing types -2D charts selection -3D charts; selecting -types of charts; selecting -XY charts -stock charts; selecting -line charts; selecting -pie charts; selecting -circle charts; selecting -combination charts;inserting -combination charts; selecting -bar charts;inserting -bar charts; selecting -charts; with columns -combination charts;variants -charts; variants -3D charts;inserting -statistical values in charts -statistics;XY charts -charts; statistics -selecting;XY charts -error indicators in charts -error bars in charts -logarithmic axes in charts -averages in charts -showing statistics in a 2D chart -variances in charts -standard deviation in charts -regression curves in charts -trend lines in charts +charts; inserting +plotting;data as charts +inserting; charts +spreadsheets; inserting charts +charts; editing data +editing; chart data +data; in columns +columns; putting data in +rows; putting data in +data; putting in rows +charts; selecting (guide) +charts; marking +ordering; data series +data series; changing order of +values; changing in charts +charts; changing values in +numbers; changing in a chart +charts; selecting types +charts; changing types +2D charts selection +3D charts; selecting +types of charts; selecting +XY charts +stock charts; selecting +line charts; selecting +pie charts; selecting +circle charts; selecting +combination charts;inserting +combination charts; selecting +bar charts;inserting +bar charts; selecting +charts; with columns +combination charts;variants +charts; variants +3D charts;inserting +statistical values in charts +statistics;XY charts +charts; statistics +selecting;XY charts +error indicators in charts +error bars in charts +logarithmic axes in charts +averages in charts +showing statistics in a 2D chart +variances in charts +standard deviation in charts +regression curves in charts +trend lines in charts charts;binary formats - + Inserting Charts - - - -Open a spreadsheet and enter some data with row and column headings. - - -Select the data together with the headings. - - + + + +Open a spreadsheet and enter some data with row and column headings. + + +Select the data together with the headings. + + Long-click the Insert Object icon Icon - found in the Main Toolbar to display the floating toolbar. Then click the Insert Chart icon. The mouse pointer will change to a cross-hair symbol with a small chart symbol. - - -In the spreadsheet, drag open a rectangle defining the initial location and size of the chart. - - -As soon as you release the mouse button, a dialog appears in which you can make further entries. - - -If you want to switch horizontal and vertical axis you can "tilt" the chart: With the chart still selected, click Data in Columns or Data in Rows icon on the Main Toolbar. -Suppose you placed the chart in your $[officename] Calc spreadsheet in the background, and now you are wondering how to select it for further editing. + found in the Main Toolbar to display the floating toolbar. Then click the Insert Chart icon. The mouse pointer will change to a cross-hair symbol with a small chart symbol. + + +In the spreadsheet, drag open a rectangle defining the initial location and size of the chart. + + +As soon as you release the mouse button, a dialog appears in which you can make further entries. + + +If you want to switch horizontal and vertical axis you can "tilt" the chart: With the chart still selected, click Data in Columns or Data in Rows icon on the Main Toolbar. +Suppose you placed the chart in your $[officename] Calc spreadsheet in the background, and now you are wondering how to select it for further editing. Open the Show Draw Functions floating toolbar and click the Select arrow Icon - . Now you can click on the chart to select it. -In a $[officename] Calc chart, you can move a data series forward or backward. You can arrange the series in such a way that the lowest 3D bars are placed in the foreground and the higher ones in the background. To change the arrangement in the chart, use a command in the context menu of a data series or choose Format - Arrangement. The corresponding cell ranges in the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet will not be rearranged. - - -In $[officename] Writer documents, you can insert a chart obtained from the data of a $[officename] Writer table. If you have not selected any data in a $[officename] Writer table, choosing Insert - Object - Chart inserts a chart containing sample data. - - -You can change the sample data values by double-clicking on the chart and then choosing Edit - Chart Data. If you want to change the values of a chart obtained from selected cells, you have to change the values in the table cells. If the chart is in a text document, press F9 to update the chart. - - -An easy method to change the numbers in a chart is drag-and-drop: select any table cell range, then drag and drop them at the chart. The chart updates with the new values. - - -Modification of chart data is also possible if you, for example, have copied a chart from a $[officename] Calc document into a $[officename] Writer document and now double-click the chart in the $[officename] Writer document. Remember, however, you are only editing the copy and not the original document. - - -You can change the type of chart any time. When you double-click on the chart and choose Format - Chart Type, a dialog appears, presenting you with various types to choose from. -Try out the different options in the Chart Type dialog. You can also switch between 2D and 3D representation. With the Columns chart type you can select a Combination Chart of lines and columns. - - -3D charts can be rotated and tilted with the mouse for an optimal point of view. - - -In Line Charts you can use the data series symbols that are applied automatically by $[officename] Chart. You can also select symbols yourself from graphic files or from the Gallery. - - -
-Opening Binary StarOffice Chart FilesUFI: this is for StarOffice 5.2 binary format. So use no variable. -There is a special read-only mode to open a binary Chart file that was saved by a previous version of StarOffice. Double-click the file in your file manager or enter the full name including the .sds extension in the Open file dialog. You can then look at and print the chart. -To retrieve or edit the chart data of a StarOffice Chart .sds file, follow these steps: - - -Open a $[officename] Calc document. - - -Choose Insert - Object - OLE Object. - - -In the dialog, click Create from file. Click the Search button and select the .sds file. The chart is inserted and selected. - - -The chart data can be retrieved or edited after clicking the Chart Data icon in the Main Toolbar. - - -
-
-AutoFormat Chart - - - - -
- - + . Now you can click on the chart to select it. +In a $[officename] Calc chart, you can move a data series forward or backward. You can arrange the series in such a way that the lowest 3D bars are placed in the foreground and the higher ones in the background. To change the arrangement in the chart, use a command in the context menu of a data series or choose Format - Arrangement. The corresponding cell ranges in the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet will not be rearranged. + + +In $[officename] Writer documents, you can insert a chart obtained from the data of a $[officename] Writer table. If you have not selected any data in a $[officename] Writer table, choosing Insert - Object - Chart inserts a chart containing sample data. + + +You can change the sample data values by double-clicking on the chart and then choosing Edit - Chart Data. If you want to change the values of a chart obtained from selected cells, you have to change the values in the table cells. If the chart is in a text document, press F9 to update the chart. + + +An easy method to change the numbers in a chart is drag-and-drop: select any table cell range, then drag and drop them at the chart. The chart updates with the new values. + + +Modification of chart data is also possible if you, for example, have copied a chart from a $[officename] Calc document into a $[officename] Writer document and now double-click the chart in the $[officename] Writer document. Remember, however, you are only editing the copy and not the original document. + + +You can change the type of chart any time. When you double-click on the chart and choose Format - Chart Type, a dialog appears, presenting you with various types to choose from. +Try out the different options in the Chart Type dialog. You can also switch between 2D and 3D representation. With the Columns chart type you can select a Combination Chart of lines and columns. + + +3D charts can be rotated and tilted with the mouse for an optimal point of view. + + +In Line Charts you can use the data series symbols that are applied automatically by $[officename] Chart. You can also select symbols yourself from graphic files or from the Gallery. + + +
+Opening Binary StarOffice Chart FilesUFI: this is for StarOffice 5.2 binary format. So use no variable. +There is a special read-only mode to open a binary Chart file that was saved by a previous version of StarOffice. Double-click the file in your file manager or enter the full name including the .sds extension in the Open file dialog. You can then look at and print the chart. +To retrieve or edit the chart data of a StarOffice Chart .sds file, follow these steps: + + +Open a $[officename] Calc document. + + +Choose Insert - Object - OLE Object. + + +In the dialog, click Create from file. Click the Search button and select the .sds file. The chart is inserted and selected. + + +The chart data can be retrieved or edited after clicking the Chart Data icon in the Main Toolbar. + + +
+
+AutoFormat Chart + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp index 0ae5f8abcd..4643949de4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Inserting Data From Text Documents -/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Inserting Data From Text Documents +/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -sending; outlines in presentations -sending; AutoAbstract function in presentations -AutoAbstract function for sending text to presentations +sending; outlines in presentations +sending; AutoAbstract function in presentations +AutoAbstract function for sending text to presentations outlines; sending to presentations - + Inserting Data From Text Documents - -You can insert text into other document types, such as spreadsheets and presentations. Note that there is a difference between whether the text is inserted into a text frame, a spreadsheet cell, or into the outline view of a presentation. - - + +You can insert text into other document types, such as spreadsheets and presentations. Note that there is a difference between whether the text is inserted into a text frame, a spreadsheet cell, or into the outline view of a presentation. + + If you copy text to the clipboard, you can paste it with or without text attributes. Use the shortcut keys Command Ctrl+C to copy and Command -Ctrl+V to paste. - - - - - +Ctrl+V to paste. + + +
+ + Icon - - - -To select the format in which the clipboard contents will be pasted, long click the Paste icon on the Function Bar, or choose Edit - Paste Special, then select the proper format. - - -
- - -If a text document contains headings formatted with the Heading Paragraph Style, choose File - Send - Outline to Presentation. A new presentation document is created, which contains the headings as an outline. - - -If you want to transfer each heading together with its accompanying paragraphs, select the File - Send - AutoAbstract to Presentation command. You must have formatted the headings with a corresponding Paragraph Style to be able to see this command. - + + + +To select the format in which the clipboard contents will be pasted, long click the Paste icon on the Function Bar, or choose Edit - Paste Special, then select the proper format. + + + + + +If a text document contains headings formatted with the Heading Paragraph Style, choose File - Send - Outline to Presentation. A new presentation document is created, which contains the headings as an outline. + + +If you want to transfer each heading together with its accompanying paragraphs, select the File - Send - AutoAbstract to Presentation command. You must have formatted the headings with a corresponding Paragraph Style to be able to see this command. + -text; copying by drag and drop +text; copying by drag and drop drag and drop; copying text - -Copying Text Using Drag-and-Drop - - -If you select text and drag it into a spreadsheet with drag-and-drop, it will be inserted as text into the cell where you release the mouse. - - -If you drag text to the normal view of a presentation, an OLE object is inserted as a $[officename] plug-in. - - -If you drag the text to the outline view of a presentation, it will be inserted at the cursor location. - - - - - - - + +Copying Text Using Drag-and-Drop + + +If you select text and drag it into a spreadsheet with drag-and-drop, it will be inserted as text into the cell where you release the mouse. + + +If you drag text to the normal view of a presentation, an OLE object is inserted as a $[officename] plug-in. + + +If you drag the text to the outline view of a presentation, it will be inserted at the cursor location. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp index e15c7da342..db0a51b5e1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Languages Using Complex Text Layout -/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Languages Using Complex Text Layout +/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -CTL;complex text layout languages -languages;complex text layout -text;CTL languages -text layout;complex text layout (CTL) -right-to-left;complex text layout -languages;right to left -entering text from right to left -bi-directional writing -Hindi;entering text -Hebrew;entering text -Arabic;entering text +CTL;complex text layout languages +languages;complex text layout +text;CTL languages +text layout;complex text layout (CTL) +right-to-left;complex text layout +languages;right to left +entering text from right to left +bi-directional writing +Hindi;entering text +Hebrew;entering text +Arabic;entering text Thai;entering text - + Languages Using Complex Text Layout - -Currently, $[officename] supports Hindi, Thai, Hebrew, and Arabic as CTL languages. -If you select the text flow from right to left, embedded Western text still runs from left to right. The cursor responds to the arrow keys in that Right Arrow moves it "to the text end" and Left Arrow "to the text start". -You can change the text writing direction directly be pressing one of the following keys: - - -Ctrl+Shift+D or Ctrl+Right Shift Key - switch to right-to-left text entry - - -Ctrl+Shift+A or Ctrl+Left Shift Key - switch to left-to-right text entry - - -The modifier-only key combinations only work when CTL support is enabled. - - -In multicolumn pages, sections or frames that are formatted with text flow from right to left, the first column is the right column and the last column is the left column. -In $[officename] Writer text formatted in Thai language has the following features: - - -In paragraphs with justified alignment, the characters are stretched to flush the lines at the margins. In other languages the spaces between words are stretched. - - -Use the Delete key to delete a whole composite character. Use the Backspace key to delete the last part of the previous composite character. - - + +Currently, $[officename] supports Hindi, Thai, Hebrew, and Arabic as CTL languages. +If you select the text flow from right to left, embedded Western text still runs from left to right. The cursor responds to the arrow keys in that Right Arrow moves it "to the text end" and Left Arrow "to the text start". +You can change the text writing direction directly be pressing one of the following keys: + + +Ctrl+Shift+D or Ctrl+Right Shift Key - switch to right-to-left text entry + + +Ctrl+Shift+A or Ctrl+Left Shift Key - switch to left-to-right text entry + + +The modifier-only key combinations only work when CTL support is enabled. + + +In multicolumn pages, sections or frames that are formatted with text flow from right to left, the first column is the right column and the last column is the left column. +In $[officename] Writer text formatted in Thai language has the following features: + + +In paragraphs with justified alignment, the characters are stretched to flush the lines at the margins. In other languages the spaces between words are stretched. + + +Use the Delete key to delete a whole composite character. Use the Backspace key to delete the last part of the previous composite character. + + Use the Right or Left Arrow key to jump to the next or previous whole composite character. To position the cursor into a composite character, use Option -Alt+Arrow key. - - - - -Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages -Tools - Options - Language Settings - Complex Text Layout - - +Alt+Arrow key. + + + + +Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages +Tools - Options - Language Settings - Complex Text Layout + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp index 82b3f9558b..0e926f2524 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format -/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format +/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -databases; text formats -text formats; databases -importing; tables in text format +databases; text formats +text formats; databases +importing; tables in text format exporting; tables in text format - - + + Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format - -If you want to exchange data with a database that does not have an ODBC link and does not allow dBase import and export, you can use a common text format. -Importing Data Into $[officename] -To exchange data in a text format use the $[officename] Calc import/export filter. - - -Export the desired data from the source database in a text format. The CSV text format is recommended. This format separates data fields by using delimiters such as commas or semi-colons, and separates records by inserting line breaks. - - -Choose File - Open and select "Text CSV" from the File type combo box. Select the file and click Open. - - -The Text Import dialog appears. Decide which data to include from the text document. - - -Once the data is in a $[officename] Calc spreadsheet, you can edit it as needed. You have two ways of saving the data as a $[officename] data source: - - -Save the current $[officename] Calc spreadsheet in dBase format in the folder of a dBase database. To do this, choose File - Save As, then select the File type "dBase" and the folder of the dBase database. - - -Select the data range in the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet and drag the range to a table container in the data source view. The table container is the "Tables" line (see illustration) in the database explorer. A Wizards starts automatically. - - -Exporting in CSV Text Format -You can export the current $[officename] spreadsheet in a text format which can be read by many other applications. - - -Choose File - Save as. - - -In File type select the filter "Text CSV". Enter a file name and click Save. - - -This opens the dBase Export dialog, in which you can select the character set, field delimiter and text delimiter. Click OK. A warning informs you that only the active sheet was saved. - - - + +If you want to exchange data with a database that does not have an ODBC link and does not allow dBase import and export, you can use a common text format. +Importing Data Into $[officename] +To exchange data in a text format use the $[officename] Calc import/export filter. + + +Export the desired data from the source database in a text format. The CSV text format is recommended. This format separates data fields by using delimiters such as commas or semi-colons, and separates records by inserting line breaks. + + +Choose File - Open and select "Text CSV" from the File type combo box. Select the file and click Open. + + +The Text Import dialog appears. Decide which data to include from the text document. + + +Once the data is in a $[officename] Calc spreadsheet, you can edit it as needed. You have two ways of saving the data as a $[officename] data source: + + +Save the current $[officename] Calc spreadsheet in dBase format in the folder of a dBase database. To do this, choose File - Save As, then select the File type "dBase" and the folder of the dBase database. + + +Select the data range in the $[officename] Calc spreadsheet and drag the range to a table container in the data source view. The table container is the "Tables" line (see illustration) in the database explorer. A Wizards starts automatically. + + +Exporting in CSV Text Format +You can export the current $[officename] spreadsheet in a text format which can be read by many other applications. + + +Choose File - Save as. + + +In File type select the filter "Text CSV". Enter a file name and click Save. + + +This opens the dBase Export dialog, in which you can select the character set, field delimiter and text delimiter. Click OK. A warning informs you that only the active sheet was saved. + + + - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp index ab93b30f89..999d321d96 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Saving Documents Automatically -/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Saving Documents Automatically +/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-documents; saving automatically -saving;documents automatically -automatic saving -backups;automatic -files; saving automatically -text; saving automatically -spreadsheets; saving automatically -drawings; saving automatically +documents; saving automatically +saving;documents automatically +automatic saving +backups;automatic +files; saving automatically +text; saving automatically +spreadsheets; saving automatically +drawings; saving automatically presentations; saving automatically - - + + Saving Documents Automatically - -To create a backup file every time you save a document - - -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. - - -Mark Always create backup copy. - - -If the Always create backup copy option is selected, the old version of the file is saved to the backup directory whenever the latest version of the file is saved. If this option is not selected, the old version of the file is overwritten by the latest version. - - + +To create a backup file every time you save a document + + +Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. + + +Mark Always create backup copy. + + +If the Always create backup copy option is selected, the old version of the file is saved to the backup directory whenever the latest version of the file is saved. If this option is not selected, the old version of the file is overwritten by the latest version. + + The backup directory is $[officepath]/user/backup -$[officepath]\user\backup. You can change the backup directory by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, then change the Backups path in the dialog. - - -The backup copy has the same name as the document, but the extension is .BAK. If the backup folder already contains such a file, it will be overwritten without warning. - - -To save automatically every n minutes - - -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. - - -Mark AutoSave every and select the time interval in the spin button. - - -Mark Prompt to save if you want to be asked prior to automatic saving whether you want to save the document. - - -This command saves the current document as if you pressed Ctrl+S. If the document was saved previously, the latest version of the file will overwrite the old version. -
- - - -Save As -Tools - Options - Load/Save - General - - +$[officepath]\user\backup. You can change the backup directory by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, then change the Backups path in the dialog. + + +The backup copy has the same name as the document, but the extension is .BAK. If the backup folder already contains such a file, it will be overwritten without warning. + + +To save automatically every n minutes + + +Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. + + +Mark AutoSave every and select the time interval in the spin button. + + +Mark Prompt to save if you want to be asked prior to automatic saving whether you want to save the document. + + +This command saves the current document as if you pressed Ctrl+S. If the document was saved previously, the latest version of the file will overwrite the old version. +
+ + + +Save As +Tools - Options - Load/Save - General + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp index f1dd5a834a..be992dd7c7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Opening Documents -/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshot. Cleaned slightly. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Opening Documents +/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted screenshot. Cleaned slightly. + + -opening; documents -documents; opening -files; opening -files; loading -loading; documents -text; opening -tables; opening -presentations; opening -drawings; opening -FTP; opening documents -new documents -empty documents -text documents; new -spreadsheets; new -drawings; creating new -presentations; new -HTML documents; new +opening; documents +documents; opening +files; opening +files; loading +loading; documents +text; opening +tables; opening +presentations; opening +drawings; opening +FTP; opening documents +new documents +empty documents +text documents; new +spreadsheets; new +drawings; creating new +presentations; new +HTML documents; new formulas; new - + Opening Documents - -Opening an existing document - - -Do one of the following: -Choose File - Open - -Click the Open File icon -Press Ctrl+O - -The Open dialog appears. - - -Select the file you want to open and click Open. - - -You can also enter a URL in the File name box of the Open dialog. This must start with the fully extended form with file:/// or ftp:// or http://. -Restrict Files to Display -To restrict the display of files in the Open dialog to a certain type select the corresponding File type from the list. Select All Files (*.*) to display all files. -Opening a document at the page position you were on when it was closed - - -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - View tab and mark the Editing view check box. - - -Opening an Empty Document + +Opening an existing document + + +Do one of the following: +Choose File - Open + +Click the Open File icon +Press Ctrl+O + +The Open dialog appears. + + +Select the file you want to open and click Open. + + +You can also enter a URL in the File name box of the Open dialog. This must start with the fully extended form with file:/// or ftp:// or http://. +Restrict Files to Display +To restrict the display of files in the Open dialog to a certain type select the corresponding File type from the list. Select All Files (*.*) to display all files. +Opening a document at the page position you were on when it was closed + + +Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - View tab and mark the Editing view check box. + + +Opening an Empty Document Short-click the New icon Icon - on the function bar or choose File - New. This opens a document of the document type specified. -If you long-click the New icon, a submenu opens in which you can select another document type. -
-File - Open - - - -
- - + on the function bar or choose File - New. This opens a document of the document type specified. +If you long-click the New icon, a submenu opens in which you can select another document type. +
+File - Open + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp index c64a6ef794..17381c915d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Saving Documents -/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Saving Documents +/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -documents; saving -saving; documents -backups; documents -files; saving -text; saving -tables; saving -drawings; saving -presentations; saving +documents; saving +saving; documents +backups; documents +files; saving +text; saving +tables; saving +drawings; saving +presentations; saving FTP; saving documents - + Saving Documents - - - + + + Click the Save icon or press the shortcut keys Command -Ctrl+S. - - - - - +Ctrl+S. + + +
+ + This icon is for tips on how to use the program more effectively. - - - -The document is saved under its path and name on the current local data medium or network drive or on the Internet, overwriting any file of the same name. - - -
- -When you save a new file for the first time, the Save As dialog opens, in which you can enter a name, folder and drive or volume for the file. To open this dialog, choose File - Save As. -You can set the AutoSave or automatic creation of a backup copy under Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. - - - - -Save As - -Tools - Options - Load/Save - General - - + + + +The document is saved under its path and name on the current local data medium or network drive or on the Internet, overwriting any file of the same name. + + + + +When you save a new file for the first time, the Save As dialog opens, in which you can enter a name, folder and drive or volume for the file. To open this dialog, choose File - Save As. +You can set the AutoSave or automatic creation of a backup copy under Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. + + + + +Save As + +Tools - Options - Load/Save - General + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp index eedef39f27..8443fe5467 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Dragging and Dropping Within a $[officename] Document -/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Dragging and Dropping Within a $[officename] Document +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -drag and drop; mouse pointers -drag and drop;overview +drag and drop; mouse pointers +drag and drop;overview mouse pointers when using drag and drop - - + + Dragging and Dropping Within a $[officename] Document - -There are many options for moving or copying objects using drag-and-drop. Text sections, drawing objects, graphics, form functions, hyperlinks, cell ranges, and many more can be moved or copied with the mouse. -Note that the mouse pointer displays a plus sign when copying and an arrow when creating a link or hyperlink. - - - -Mouse Pointer - - -Description - - - - + +There are many options for moving or copying objects using drag-and-drop. Text sections, drawing objects, graphics, form functions, hyperlinks, cell ranges, and many more can be moved or copied with the mouse. +Note that the mouse pointer displays a plus sign when copying and an arrow when creating a link or hyperlink. +
+ + +Mouse Pointer + + +Description + + + + Mouse pointer moving data - - - -Moving - - - - + + + +Moving + + + + Mouse pointer copying data - - - -Copying - - - - + + + +Copying + + + + Mouse pointer inserting link - - - -Creating a link - - -
- -If you press Ctrl or Shift+Ctrl while releasing the mouse button, you can control whether the object is copied, moved, or a link is created. - - - + + + +Creating a link + + +
+ +If you press Ctrl or Shift+Ctrl while releasing the mouse button, you can control whether the object is copied, moved, or a link is created. + + + Icon - - - -If you drag objects out of the Navigator, you can specify in the submenu of the Navigator's Drag Mode icon whether to copy the object, insert it as a link or insert it as a hyperlink. - - -
- -You can cancel a drag-and-drop operation in $[officename] at any time by pressing the Esc key before releasing the mouse button. - - - - + + + +If you drag objects out of the Navigator, you can specify in the submenu of the Navigator's Drag Mode icon whether to copy the object, insert it as a link or insert it as a hyperlink. + + + + +You can cancel a drag-and-drop operation in $[officename] at any time by pressing the Esc key before releasing the mouse button. + + + + @@ -143,6 +143,6 @@ - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp index a575869d63..bbad966c08 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Saving Documents in Other Formats -/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Saving Documents in Other Formats +/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-documents; saving in Microsoft format -documents; exporting -saving; documents in other formats -files; saving in other formats -text; saving in other formats -spreadsheets; saving in other formats -drawings; saving in other formats -presentations; saving in other formats -exporting; Microsoft Office documents -Word; saving as -Excel; save as -PowerPoint; save as +documents; saving in Microsoft format +documents; exporting +saving; documents in other formats +files; saving in other formats +text; saving in other formats +spreadsheets; saving in other formats +drawings; saving in other formats +presentations; saving in other formats +exporting; Microsoft Office documents +Word; saving as +Excel; save as +PowerPoint; save as saving; documents in Microsoft Office format - - + + Saving Documents in Other Formats - - - -Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. - - -In the Save as type list box, select the desired format. - - -Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. - - -If you always want to save your $[officename] documents in another format, select that format in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Standard file format area. -
- - -Save As - - - + + + +Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. + + +In the Save as type list box, select the desired format. + + +Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. + + +If you always want to save your $[officename] documents in another format, select that format in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Standard file format area. +
+ + +Save As + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp index 41e53ca2b3..1fe59bb81c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Using Floating Toolbars -/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: needs rework. -UFI: added few lines to cover all toolbars -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Using Floating Toolbars +/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: needs rework. +UFI: added few lines to cover all toolbars +dedr: reviewed + + +
-floating toolbars; using -toolbars; floating toolbars -toolbars; opening +floating toolbars; using +toolbars; floating toolbars +toolbars; opening opening; toolbars - + Using Floating Toolbars - -The Insert icon is located at the top of the Main Toolbar of a text document. Long-click on this icon. This opens a floating toolbar containing further icons. - - - + +The Insert icon is located at the top of the Main Toolbar of a text document. Long-click on this icon. This opens a floating toolbar containing further icons. +
+ + Tearing off a floating toolbar - - - -
- -You now have a choice: either click the icon that you want to activate, or seize the floating toolbar by its title bar and drag it away from the Main Toolbar while holding down the mouse button. You first have to release the mouse button, otherwise you cannot seize the title bar with the mouse. -Now look at the icon at the top of the Main Toolbar with which you opened the floating toolbar. You always see the icon from the floating toolbar that you used last. If you click the Insert Graphics icon, you will see that icon at the top of the Main Toolbar instead. A short click opens the directly visible function, whereas a long click opens the floating toolbar again. -To Make a Toolbar a Floating Toolbar -Do one of the following: - - -Hold down the Ctrl key, click in an empty part of the toolbar, and drag the toolbar into the document. - - -Hold down the Ctrl key and double-click in an empty part of the toolbar. - - -To Reattach a Floating Toolbar - - -Hold down the Ctrl key and drag the title bar of the toolbar to an edge of the document window. - - -
- - + + + + + +You now have a choice: either click the icon that you want to activate, or seize the floating toolbar by its title bar and drag it away from the Main Toolbar while holding down the mouse button. You first have to release the mouse button, otherwise you cannot seize the title bar with the mouse. +Now look at the icon at the top of the Main Toolbar with which you opened the floating toolbar. You always see the icon from the floating toolbar that you used last. If you click the Insert Graphics icon, you will see that icon at the top of the Main Toolbar instead. A short click opens the directly visible function, whereas a long click opens the floating toolbar again. +To Make a Toolbar a Floating Toolbar +Do one of the following: + + +Hold down the Ctrl key, click in an empty part of the toolbar, and drag the toolbar into the document. + + +Hold down the Ctrl key and double-click in an empty part of the toolbar. + + +To Reattach a Floating Toolbar + + +Hold down the Ctrl key and drag the title bar of the toolbar to an edge of the document window. + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp index 9c4e46bf12..6a48c7850d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Fontwork For Graphical Text Art -text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp - - -UFI: new implemetation of Fontwork - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Fontwork For Graphical Text Art +text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp + + +UFI: new implemetation of Fontwork + + + + Fontwork For Graphical Text Art - -Using Fontwork, you can create graphical text art. -Create the Fontwork in Impress or Draw. Copy the Fontwork to a text document or spreadsheet using the clipboard. -To create a Fontwork text art: - - -Open an Impress or Draw document. - - -Click the Fontwork icon. - - -In the Fontwork Gallery dialog, select a Fontwork style and click OK. - - -Click the default text and enter your own text. - - -Click outside the text or press Esc to exit text edit mode. - - -If you want to undo the Fontwork, choose Edit - Undo. -To edit a Fontwork text art: - - -Select the Fontwork object. -You see the Fontwork toolbar. If the Fontwork toolbar was closed before, open it by choosing View - Toolbars - Fontwork.UFI: test - - -Click an icon in the Fontwork toolbar.UFI: add link to Editing Fontwork guide - - -The following icons are available: - - -FontWork Gallery - redefining the style - - -FontWork Shape - editing the shape - - -FontWork Same Letter Heights - sizing all letters - - -FontWork Vertical Text - toggling Fontwork text direction - - -FontWork Alignment - aligning all Fontwork objects - - -FontWork Character Spacing - changing the character spacing - - - -UFI: add link to Editing Fontwork guide - - + +Using Fontwork, you can create graphical text art. +Create the Fontwork in Impress or Draw. Copy the Fontwork to a text document or spreadsheet using the clipboard. +To create a Fontwork text art: + + +Open an Impress or Draw document. + + +Click the Fontwork icon. + + +In the Fontwork Gallery dialog, select a Fontwork style and click OK. + + +Click the default text and enter your own text. + + +Click outside the text or press Esc to exit text edit mode. + + +If you want to undo the Fontwork, choose Edit - Undo. +To edit a Fontwork text art: + + +Select the Fontwork object. +You see the Fontwork toolbar. If the Fontwork toolbar was closed before, open it by choosing View - Toolbars - Fontwork.UFI: test + + +Click an icon in the Fontwork toolbar.UFI: add link to Editing Fontwork guide + + +The following icons are available: + + +FontWork Gallery - redefining the style + + +FontWork Shape - editing the shape + + +FontWork Same Letter Heights - sizing all letters + + +FontWork Vertical Text - toggling Fontwork text direction + + +FontWork Alignment - aligning all Fontwork objects + + +FontWork Character Spacing - changing the character spacing + + + +UFI: add link to Editing Fontwork guide + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp index 1e39a63f10..3ee1ae8ff7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Inserting, Editing, Saving Bitmaps -/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Inserting, Editing, Saving Bitmaps +/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -images; inserting bitmaps -images; editing bitmaps -illustrations; inserting -inserting; images -bitmaps; inserting and editing -pixel graphics; inserting and editing -exporting; bitmaps -importing; bitmaps -graphics; inserting -inserting; graphics -graphics; editing -editing; graphics -invert filter -smoothing filter -sharpening filter -remove noise filter -solarization filter -aging filter -posterizing filter -pop-art filter -charcoal sketches filter -mosaic filter +images; inserting bitmaps +images; editing bitmaps +illustrations; inserting +inserting; images +bitmaps; inserting and editing +pixel graphics; inserting and editing +exporting; bitmaps +importing; bitmaps +graphics; inserting +inserting; graphics +graphics; editing +editing; graphics +invert filter +smoothing filter +sharpening filter +remove noise filter +solarization filter +aging filter +posterizing filter +pop-art filter +charcoal sketches filter +mosaic filter graphics;filters - + Inserting, Editing, Saving Bitmaps - -Inserting Bitmaps -A bitmap image can be inserted in $[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc, $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress documents. - - -Choose Insert - Graphics - From File. In $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress choose Insert - Graphics. - - -Select the file. In the File type box you can restrict the selection to certain file types. - - -Check the Link box if you want a link to the original file. -If the Link box is marked, whenever the document is updated and loaded the bitmap image is reloaded. The editing steps that you have carried out in the local copy of the image in the document are re-applied and the image is displayed. -If the Link box is not marked, you are always working with the copy created when the graphic was first inserted. -To embed graphics that were first inserted as links, go to Edit - Links and click the Break Link button. - - -Click Open to insert the image. - - -Editing Bitmaps -When you select the bitmap image, the Object Bar offers you the tools for editing the image. Only a local copy is edited in the document, even if you have inserted an image as a link. + +Inserting Bitmaps +A bitmap image can be inserted in $[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc, $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress documents. + + +Choose Insert - Graphics - From File. In $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress choose Insert - Graphics. + + +Select the file. In the File type box you can restrict the selection to certain file types. + + +Check the Link box if you want a link to the original file. +If the Link box is marked, whenever the document is updated and loaded the bitmap image is reloaded. The editing steps that you have carried out in the local copy of the image in the document are re-applied and the image is displayed. +If the Link box is not marked, you are always working with the copy created when the graphic was first inserted. +To embed graphics that were first inserted as links, go to Edit - Links and click the Break Link button. + + +Click Open to insert the image. + + +Editing Bitmaps +When you select the bitmap image, the Object Bar offers you the tools for editing the image. Only a local copy is edited in the document, even if you have inserted an image as a link. The Object Bar may look slightly different depending to the module you are using. The illustration shows the Object Bar in $[officename] Draw Object Bar in $[officename] Draw -Object Bar in $[officename] Draw: - - - +Object Bar in $[officename] Draw: +
+ + Object bar for bitmap editing - - - -
- -A number of filters are located on the Filter floating toolbar, which you can open with the icon on the far left of the Object Bar: - - - + + + +
+ +A number of filters are located on the Filter floating toolbar, which you can open with the icon on the far left of the Object Bar: + + + Filters for Bitmaps Toolbar - - - -
- -Some of the filters open a dialog, which you can use to select, for example, the intensity of the filter. -In $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Image, you can add text and graphics, select these objects together with the bitmap, and export the selection as a new bitmap image. -Saving Bitmaps -If you want to save in a format such as GIF, JPEG or TIFF, you must select and export the bitmap image. This is only possible in $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress. - - -Select the bitmap image. You can also select additional objects, such as text, to be exported with the image by pressing the shift key while selecting or by opening a selection frame around all objects. - - -Choose File - Export. The Export dialog opens. - - -In the File format field, select the file format you want, for example GIF or JPEG. - - -If you only want to export the selected objects, mark the Selection box. -If Selection is not marked, the entire page of the document is exported. - - -Enter a name for the file and click Save. - - - + + + + + +Some of the filters open a dialog, which you can use to select, for example, the intensity of the filter. +In $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Image, you can add text and graphics, select these objects together with the bitmap, and export the selection as a new bitmap image. +Saving Bitmaps +If you want to save in a format such as GIF, JPEG or TIFF, you must select and export the bitmap image. This is only possible in $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress. + + +Select the bitmap image. You can also select additional objects, such as text, to be exported with the image by pressing the shift key while selecting or by opening a selection frame around all objects. + + +Choose File - Export. The Export dialog opens. + + +In the File format field, select the file format you want, for example GIF or JPEG. + + +If you only want to export the selected objects, mark the Selection box. +If Selection is not marked, the entire page of the document is exported. + + +Enter a name for the file and click Save. + + + @@ -180,6 +180,6 @@ - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp index 107d33f63a..6013c59036 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Drawing Graphics With the Draw Functions -/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Drawing Graphics With the Draw Functions +/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -text; drawing graphics -inserting; drawings -graphics; drawing -objects; copying when moving in presentations -drawing objects; drawing from the center -drawing objects; limiting -circles; drawing -squares; drawing -objects; drawing from the center -handles; scaling -scaling; objects -objects; scaling -changing; object sizes -objects; moving by drag and drop -copying; draw objects +text; drawing graphics +inserting; drawings +graphics; drawing +objects; copying when moving in presentations +drawing objects; drawing from the center +drawing objects; limiting +circles; drawing +squares; drawing +objects; drawing from the center +handles; scaling +scaling; objects +objects; scaling +changing; object sizes +objects; moving by drag and drop +copying; draw objects drawing objects; copying - + Drawing Graphics With the Draw Functions - -Open Show Draw Functions on the Main Toolbar. - -When you select a function, the relevant icon appears on the Main Toolbar. You can restart this function by clicking on it. A long-click opens the floating toolbar from which you can select a different function. -Draw objects can be subsequently edited and modified. Drawing elements created in this way are vector graphics, which you can scale freely without any loss of quality. Drag the floating toolbar on to the screen as a separate window if you want to draw several elements. -To create a rectangle, click the rectangle icon and move your cursor to the place in the document where you want one corner of the rectangle to be. Press the mouse button and hold it down while dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle. When you release the mouse button, the rectangle is inserted in the document. It is selected, and you can edit its properties through the context menu. - - + +Open Show Draw Functions on the Main Toolbar. + +When you select a function, the relevant icon appears on the Main Toolbar. You can restart this function by clicking on it. A long-click opens the floating toolbar from which you can select a different function. +Draw objects can be subsequently edited and modified. Drawing elements created in this way are vector graphics, which you can scale freely without any loss of quality. Drag the floating toolbar on to the screen as a separate window if you want to draw several elements. +To create a rectangle, click the rectangle icon and move your cursor to the place in the document where you want one corner of the rectangle to be. Press the mouse button and hold it down while dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle. When you release the mouse button, the rectangle is inserted in the document. It is selected, and you can edit its properties through the context menu. + + To draw multiple objects of the same type, double-click the icon. To draw multiple objects of the same type, double-click the icon. - - - + + + If you want to open up draw objects from the center instead of dragging from one corner to the other, hold down the Option Alt key while dragging. With some window managers, you may need to hold down also the meta key. - Holding down the Shift key while dragging limits the created object. For example, instead of a rectangle with sides of different length, you obtain a square. - - -To scale the objects, first select them by clicking on them with the selection tool. You then see eight handles around the object. When you drag one of the four corner handles, the opposite corner remains fixed while the other three corners move. When you drag one of the side handles, the opposite side remains fixed. - - -To move draw objects, first select them. To select ,more than one object, press the Shift key while clicking. Select text objects by clicking exactly on their edge. While holding down the mouse button, drag the objects to the new location. If you hold down Shift while dragging, the objects can only be positioned in places compatible with the page margins and the other objects on the page. - - + Holding down the Shift key while dragging limits the created object. For example, instead of a rectangle with sides of different length, you obtain a square. + + +To scale the objects, first select them by clicking on them with the selection tool. You then see eight handles around the object. When you drag one of the four corner handles, the opposite corner remains fixed while the other three corners move. When you drag one of the side handles, the opposite side remains fixed. + + +To move draw objects, first select them. To select ,more than one object, press the Shift key while clicking. Select text objects by clicking exactly on their edge. While holding down the mouse button, drag the objects to the new location. If you hold down Shift while dragging, the objects can only be positioned in places compatible with the page margins and the other objects on the page. + + Hold down the Command key -Ctrl while dragging the draw object to copy the object. - - -To revert to normal text mode after creating and editing draw objects, click in an area of the document containing no draw or other objects. If you are in a normal view, first exit this by clicking the Select icon. - +Ctrl while dragging the draw object to copy the object. + + +To revert to normal text mode after creating and editing draw objects, click in an area of the document containing no draw or other objects. If you are in a normal view, first exit this by clicking the Select icon. + Information about the individual icons @@ -138,6 +138,6 @@ - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp index f5d98fb339..96b8986af2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Inserting Special Characters -/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Inserting Special Characters +/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -characters; special -inserting; special characters -inserting;accents -special characters; inserting (tutorial) -text; inserting special characters -accents +characters; special +inserting; special characters +inserting;accents +special characters; inserting (tutorial) +text; inserting special characters +accents compose key; special characters - + Inserting Special Characters - -This function allows you to insert special characters, such as check marks, boxes, and telephone symbols, into your text. - - -To view a selection of all characters, choose Insert - Special Character. - - -In the large selection field click the desired character or several characters in succession. The characters are displayed at the bottom of the dialog. When you close the dialog with OK, all displayed characters in the selected font are inserted in the current document. - - + +This function allows you to insert special characters, such as check marks, boxes, and telephone symbols, into your text. + + +To view a selection of all characters, choose Insert - Special Character. + + +In the large selection field click the desired character or several characters in succession. The characters are displayed at the bottom of the dialog. When you close the dialog with OK, all displayed characters in the selected font are inserted in the current document. + + In any text input field (such as the URL field of the Function Bar or in the input fields in the Find&Replace dialog) you can press Shift+Command -Ctrl+S to call the Special Characters dialog. - - +Ctrl+S to call the Special Characters dialog. + + At present there are three ways of entering letters with accents directly from the keyboard. - + Sun Solaris: Using a Sun keyboard. First press the Compose key to the right of the space bar, then enter the first and second modifiers. - + Linux / NetBSD: Using the dead-keys. In an xterm window first press the (´) or (`) key. The character should not appear on the screen. Now press a letter, such as "e". The e is given an accent, é or è. If not, then check in the XF86Config file if a "nodeadkeys" XkbdVariant has been loaded there and replace it. You may also have set the environment variable SAL_NO_DEADKEYS, which deactivates the dead-keys. - + All Unix systems: (Alt Graph) as additional compose key. The (Alt Graph) key can work in $[officename] like the Compose key, if you set the environment variable SAL_ALTGR_COMPOSE. The (Alt Graph) key must trigger a mode_switch, so, for example, xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_R = Mode_switch" must be set. First press (Alt Graph), then the first modifier, then the second modifier. The characters are combined as described on a Solaris system in the file /usr/openwin/include/X11/Suncompose.h. - - -Special Characters -AutoCorrect - - + + +Special Characters +AutoCorrect + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp index a8e07d755c..00dfb8c4fd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Defining Line Styles -/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshot. Cleaned -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Defining Line Styles +/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted screenshot. Cleaned +dedr: reviewed + + line styles; defining - + Defining Line Styles - - - -Select a line drawing object in a document. - - -Choose Format - Line and click the Line Styles tab. - - -Specify the line options that you want. -To specify the length of the line as a percentage of the line width, select Fit to line width. - - -Click Add. - - -Enter a name for the line style and click OK. -To save the line style in a custom line style list, click the Save Line Styles icon. - - -Click Close to close the dialog. - - -
- - -
- - + + + +Select a line drawing object in a document. + + +Choose Format - Line and click the Line Styles tab. + + +Specify the line options that you want. +To specify the length of the line as a percentage of the line width, select Fit to line width. + + +Click Add. + + +Enter a name for the line style and click OK. +To save the line style in a custom line style list, click the Save Line Styles icon. + + +Click Close to close the dialog. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp index 70801df361..36aefc90ca 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Applying Line Styles -/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Cleaned; dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Applying Line Styles +/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Cleaned; dedr: reviewed + + -separator lines; defining -reference lines; defining -arrows; defining arrow lines +separator lines; defining +reference lines; defining +arrows; defining arrow lines line styles; applying - + Applying Line Styles Using the Object Bar - -The Draw object bar contains icons and combo boxes to define various line attributes: + +The Draw object bar contains icons and combo boxes to define various line attributes: Object bar with drawing objects - - - + + + Click the Line icon Icon - to open the Format - Line dialog. - - + to open the Format - Line dialog. + + Click the Arrow Styles icon Icon - to select an arrow style for the right and left ends of a line. This selection can be made into a floating toolbar. - - -Select a style from the Line Style box and specify the width in the Line Width box. A width of 0 corresponds to 1 pixel. - - -Select the line and arrow color in the Line Color box. - - -
- - -
- - + to select an arrow style for the right and left ends of a line. This selection can be made into a floating toolbar. + + +Select a style from the Line Style box and specify the width in the Line Width box. A width of 0 corresponds to 1 pixel. + + +Select the line and arrow color in the Line Color box. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp index 7005fd51a9..3136bb4880 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Recording a Macro -/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: fixed #112032# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Recording a Macro +/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: fixed #112032# + + -macros; recording -recording; macros +macros; recording +recording; macros Basic; recording macros - + Recording a Macro - -
- -The Record Macro icon can be added to the Function Bar by the context menu command Visible Buttons. - - -Open the document for which you want to record a macro. - - -Click the Record Macro icon or choose the menu command Tools - Macros - Record Macro. -You see the small Recording dialog with just one button called Stop Recording. - - -Perform the actions you want to be recorded in the document. -Press the Escape key to deselect an object, as the macro recorder currently does not record this action by mouse click. - - -Click Stop Recording. -The Macro dialog appears, in which you can save and run the macro. -If you want to abort the recording without saving a macro, click the Close button of the Recording dialog. - - -To save the macro, first select the object where you want the macro to be saved in the Save macro in list box. - - -If you want the macro to be saved into a new library or module, click the New Library or New Module button and enter a name for the library or module. - - -Enter a name for the new macro in the Macro name text box. - - -Click Save. - - - -Macro -Programming in %PRODUCTNAMEhow-to running a macrohow-to testing and debugging a macro + +
+ +The Record Macro icon can be added to the Function Bar by the context menu command Visible Buttons. + + +Open the document for which you want to record a macro. + + +Click the Record Macro icon or choose the menu command Tools - Macros - Record Macro. +You see the small Recording dialog with just one button called Stop Recording. + + +Perform the actions you want to be recorded in the document. +Press the Escape key to deselect an object, as the macro recorder currently does not record this action by mouse click. + + +Click Stop Recording. +The Macro dialog appears, in which you can save and run the macro. +If you want to abort the recording without saving a macro, click the Close button of the Recording dialog. + + +To save the macro, first select the object where you want the macro to be saved in the Save macro in list box. + + +If you want the macro to be saved into a new library or module, click the New Library or New Module button and enter a name for the library or module. + + +Enter a name for the new macro in the Macro name text box. + + +Click Save. + + + +Macro +Programming in %PRODUCTNAMEhow-to running a macrohow-to testing and debugging a macro
- + The macro recording functionality is only available for text documents in %PRODUCTNAME Writer and for spreadsheets in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp index fee4fdd3ee..f8bb25f5a5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -General Instructions for %PRODUCTNAME -/text/shared/guide/main.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +General Instructions for %PRODUCTNAME +/text/shared/guide/main.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + instructions; general - + General Instructions for %PRODUCTNAME - -Opening and Saving Documents and Templates - - - - - - - - - + +Opening and Saving Documents and Templates + + + + + + + + + - - - - - - - + + + + + + + - - -Using Windows, Menus and Icons - - - - - - - - -Accessibility - + + +Using Windows, Menus and Icons + + + + + + + + +Accessibility + @@ -118,114 +118,114 @@ - + - + - -Copying Data by Drag and Drop or Menu Commands - - - - - - - - - - - -Data Sources -Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME -Table Wizard -Query Wizard -Forms Wizard -Report Wizard - - - - - - - - - - -Recording Changes (Revision Marking) - - - - - - - -Configuring and Modifying %PRODUCTNAME + +Copying Data by Drag and Drop or Menu Commands + + + + + + + + + + + +Data Sources +Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME +Table Wizard +Query Wizard +Forms Wizard +Report Wizard + + + + + + + + + + +Recording Changes (Revision Marking) + + + + + + + +Configuring and Modifying %PRODUCTNAME - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + - - - -Charts - - - - - -Miscellaneous -General Terminology -Internet Terminology - - + + + +Charts + + + + + +Miscellaneous +General Terminology +Internet Terminology + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp index bfaa74a7c7..09240eaed2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Using Microsoft Office and $[officename] -/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Using Microsoft Office and $[officename] +/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -Office;Microsoft Office and $[officename] -Microsoft Office;new users information +Office;Microsoft Office and $[officename] +Microsoft Office;new users information Microsoft Office compatibility - + Using Microsoft Office and $[officename] - -$[officename] can open and save documents in the Microsoft Office file formats. -Opening a Microsoft Office File - - -Choose File - Open. Select a Microsoft Office file in the $[officename] file open dialog. - - - - - -MS Office file... - - -...will open in $[officename] module - - - - -MS Word, *.doc - - -$[officename] Writer - - - - -MS Excel, *.xls - - -$[officename] Calc - - - - -MS PowerPoint, *.ppt, *.pps - - -$[officename] Impress - - -
- -Saving as a Microsoft Office File - - -Choose File - Save As. - - -In the File type box, select a Microsoft Office file format. - - -Always Save Documents in Microsoft Office Formats - - -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. - - -In the Standard file format area, first select a document type, then select the file type for saving. - - -From now on, if you save a document, the File type will be set according to your choice. Of course, you still can select another file type in the file save dialog. + +$[officename] can open and save documents in the Microsoft Office file formats. +Opening a Microsoft Office File + + +Choose File - Open. Select a Microsoft Office file in the $[officename] file open dialog. + + + + + +MS Office file... + + +...will open in $[officename] module + + + + +MS Word, *.doc + + +$[officename] Writer + + + + +MS Excel, *.xls + + +$[officename] Calc + + + + +MS PowerPoint, *.ppt, *.pps + + +$[officename] Impress + + +
+ +Saving as a Microsoft Office File + + +Choose File - Save As. + + +In the File type box, select a Microsoft Office file format. + + +Always Save Documents in Microsoft Office Formats + + +Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. + + +In the Standard file format area, first select a document type, then select the file type for saving. + + +From now on, if you save a document, the File type will be set according to your choice. Of course, you still can select another file type in the file save dialog. Always Use $[officename] to Open Microsoft Office Files - + The following applies to MS Windows only: it's in the printed manual - -Converting Many Microsoft Office Files into $[officename] Files -The Document Converter Wizard will convert all Microsoft Office files in a folder into $[officename] documents. You can specify the folder to be read, and the folder where the converted files are to be saved. You can limit the conversion to specific file types, such as only Word files, or only templates. - - -Choose File - Wizard - Document Converter to start the Wizard. - - -Macros in Microsoft Office and $[officename] -Microsoft Office and $[officename] cannot run the same macro code. Microsoft Office uses VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code, and $[officename] uses StarBasic code based on the $[officename] API (Application Program Interface) environment. Although the programming language is the same, the objects and methods are different. -If you use macros in one of the applications and want to use the same functionality in the other application, you must edit the macros. $[officename] can load the macros that are contained within Microsoft Office files and you can then view and edit the macro code in the $[officename] Basic IDE editor. -You can choose to preserve or delete VBA macros -Open a Microsoft Office document that contains VBA macro code. Change only the normal contents (text, cells, graphics), and do not edit the macros. Save the document as a Microsoft Office file type. Open the file in Microsoft Office, and the VBA macros will run as before. -You may delete the VBA macros from the Microsoft Office file on loading or on saving. - - -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties to set the VBA macro handling of $[officename]. - - - - - - + +Converting Many Microsoft Office Files into $[officename] Files +The Document Converter Wizard will convert all Microsoft Office files in a folder into $[officename] documents. You can specify the folder to be read, and the folder where the converted files are to be saved. You can limit the conversion to specific file types, such as only Word files, or only templates. + + +Choose File - Wizard - Document Converter to start the Wizard. + + +Macros in Microsoft Office and $[officename] +Microsoft Office and $[officename] cannot run the same macro code. Microsoft Office uses VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code, and $[officename] uses StarBasic code based on the $[officename] API (Application Program Interface) environment. Although the programming language is the same, the objects and methods are different. +If you use macros in one of the applications and want to use the same functionality in the other application, you must edit the macros. $[officename] can load the macros that are contained within Microsoft Office files and you can then view and edit the macro code in the $[officename] Basic IDE editor. +You can choose to preserve or delete VBA macros +Open a Microsoft Office document that contains VBA macro code. Change only the normal contents (text, cells, graphics), and do not edit the macros. Save the document as a Microsoft Office file type. Open the file in Microsoft Office, and the VBA macros will run as before. +You may delete the VBA macros from the Microsoft Office file on loading or on saving. + + +Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties to set the VBA macro handling of $[officename]. + + + + + + - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp index 94707f06f3..57b71be41f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Navigation to Quickly Reach Objects -/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Navigation to Quickly Reach Objects +/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -cursor;quickly moving to an object -objects;quickly moving to +cursor;quickly moving to an object +objects;quickly moving to navigating;in documents - + Navigation to Quickly Reach Objects - -This is a common use of the Navigator. - - -Double-click an object in the Navigator to jump directly to the position of the object in the document. - - -You can use the Navigation floating toolbar to scroll to the previous or next object of a specific category. - - - - - + +This is a common use of the Navigator. + + +Double-click an object in the Navigator to jump directly to the position of the object in the document. + + +You can use the Navigation floating toolbar to scroll to the previous or next object of a specific category. + + +
+ + Floating toolbar Navigation - - - -
- - -Open the floating toolbar using the Navigation icon below to the right of the document window or on top to the left in Navigator. - - -On the Navigation floating toolbar you first select the category then click on one of the buttons to the right - Previous Object or Next Object. The names of the buttons refer to the category, for example, the button "Next Object" is named "Next Page" or "Next Bookmark" according to the category. - - - + + + + + + +Open the floating toolbar using the Navigation icon below to the right of the document window or on top to the left in Navigator. + + +On the Navigation floating toolbar you first select the category then click on one of the buttons to the right - Previous Object or Next Object. The names of the buttons refer to the category, for example, the button "Next Object" is named "Next Page" or "Next Bookmark" according to the category. + + + @@ -107,6 +107,6 @@ - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp index ee0fb83b4d..bec916e598 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Turning off Numbering/Bullets for Individual Paragraphs -/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Turning off Numbering/Bullets for Individual Paragraphs +/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -numbering; turning off +numbering; turning off bullets; turning off - + Turning off Numbering/Bullets for Individual Paragraphs - - - - + +
+ + Icon - + Icon - - - -For the current paragraph or selected paragraphs you can switch off the automatic numbering or listing. Click the Numbering Off icon in the Numbering Object bar or the Bullets On/Off icon in the Text Object bar. - - -
+ + + +For the current paragraph or selected paragraphs you can switch off the automatic numbering or listing. Click the Numbering Off icon in the Numbering Object bar or the Bullets On/Off icon in the Text Object bar. + + + - - - - + +
+ + Icon - - - -If the cursor is located within a numbered or bulleted list, you can turn off automatic numbers or bullets for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs by clicking the Numbering On/Off icon on the Object bar. - - -
+ + + +If the cursor is located within a numbered or bulleted list, you can turn off automatic numbers or bullets for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs by clicking the Numbering On/Off icon on the Object bar. + + + - + To remove numbering from a paragraph using the keyboard: - - - + + + Place the cursor at the beginning of a numbered paragraph and press the Backspace key. - - - + + + The numbering of the paragraph disappears and is removed from the numbering sequence. Numbering resumes in the following paragraph. - - - + + + If you press the Enter key in an empty numbered paragraph, the numbering stops. - - -Format - Bullets/Numbering - - - - - - - - + + +Format - Bullets/Numbering + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp index 469581dbd7..caea613daa 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Copying Attributes With the Format Paintbrush -text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp - - -UFI: Using the Format Paintbrush -dedr: reviewed - - - -
+ ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Copying Attributes With the Format Paintbrush +text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp + + +UFI: Using the Format Paintbrush +dedr: reviewed + + + +
Copying Formatting With the Format Paintbrush - -
-You can use the Format Paintbrush tool to copy formatting from a text selection or object and apply the formatting to another text selection or object. - - - -Select the text or object whose formatting you want to copy. - - - - -On the Standard Bar, click the Format Paintbrush icon. -The cursor changes to a paint bucket. -If you want to apply the formatting to more than one selection, double-click the Format Paintbrush icon. After you apply all the formatting, click the icon again. - - -Select or click the text or object that you want to apply the formatting to. - - -To exclude paragraph formatting, hold down Ctrl when you click. To exclude character formatting, hold down Ctrl+Shift when you click. -The following table describes the formatting attributes that the Format Paintbrush can copy:UFI: do we need this? - - - -Type of Selection - - -Comment - - - - -Nothing selected, but cursor is inside a text passage - - -Copies the formatting of the current paragraph and the character formatting of the next character in the text flow direction. - - - - -Text is selected - - -Copies the formatting of the last selected character and of the paragraph that contains the character. - - - - -Frame is selected - - -Copies the frame attributes that are defined in Format - Frame dialog. The contents, size, position, linking, hyperlinks, and macros in the frame are not copied. - - - - -Object is selected - - -Copies the object formatting that is defined in the Format - Graphics or Format - Object dialogs. The contents, size, position, hyperlinks, and macros in the object are not copied. - - - - -Form control is selected - - -Not supported - - - - -Drawing object is selected - - -Copies all formatting attributes. In Impress and Draw, the text contents of the object is also copied. - - - - -Text within drawing object or within Calc cells is selected - - -Not supported - - - - -Writer table or cells are selected - - -Copies the formatting that is specified in Table, Text Flow, Borders, and Background tab pages in the Format - Table dialog. The paragraph and character formatting are also copied. - - - - -Calc table or cells are selected - - -Copies the formatting that is specified in the Format - Cells dialog as well as the formatting of the cell contents - - -
- - - + +
+You can use the Format Paintbrush tool to copy formatting from a text selection or object and apply the formatting to another text selection or object. + + + +Select the text or object whose formatting you want to copy. + + + + +On the Standard Bar, click the Format Paintbrush icon. +The cursor changes to a paint bucket. +If you want to apply the formatting to more than one selection, double-click the Format Paintbrush icon. After you apply all the formatting, click the icon again. + + +Select or click the text or object that you want to apply the formatting to. + + +To exclude paragraph formatting, hold down Ctrl when you click. To exclude character formatting, hold down Ctrl+Shift when you click. +The following table describes the formatting attributes that the Format Paintbrush can copy:UFI: do we need this? + + + +Type of Selection + + +Comment + + + + +Nothing selected, but cursor is inside a text passage + + +Copies the formatting of the current paragraph and the character formatting of the next character in the text flow direction. + + + + +Text is selected + + +Copies the formatting of the last selected character and of the paragraph that contains the character. + + + + +Frame is selected + + +Copies the frame attributes that are defined in Format - Frame dialog. The contents, size, position, linking, hyperlinks, and macros in the frame are not copied. + + + + +Object is selected + + +Copies the object formatting that is defined in the Format - Graphics or Format - Object dialogs. The contents, size, position, hyperlinks, and macros in the object are not copied. + + + + +Form control is selected + + +Not supported + + + + +Drawing object is selected + + +Copies all formatting attributes. In Impress and Draw, the text contents of the object is also copied. + + + + +Text within drawing object or within Calc cells is selected + + +Not supported + + + + +Writer table or cells are selected + + +Copies the formatting that is specified in Table, Text Flow, Borders, and Background tab pages in the Format - Table dialog. The paragraph and character formatting are also copied. + + + + +Calc table or cells are selected + + +Copies the formatting that is specified in the Format - Cells dialog as well as the formatting of the cell contents + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp index 898bdabf5b..9a3ef9e1f9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Recording and Displaying Changes -/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Recording and Displaying Changes +/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -marking changes -changes; marking -changes; recording +marking changes +changes; marking +changes; recording review function; recording changes - + Recording and Displaying Changes - -When several authors are working on the same text or spreadsheet, the review function records and displays who made the various changes. On the final edit of the document, it is then possible to look at each individual change and decide whether it should be accepted or rejected. -For example: You are an editor and are delivering your latest report. But before publication the report must be read by the senior editor and the proofreader, and both will add their changes. The senior editor writes "clarify" after one paragraph and crosses out another entirely. The proofreader corrects the spelling of your document. -The edited document comes back to you, and you can incorporate or ignore the suggestions of the two reviewers. -Let's say you also e-mailed a copy of the report to a good friend and colleague who has done research on a similar topic in the past. You asked for a few suggestions, and the document is now returned by e-mail with your colleague's suggestions. -As all your colleagues and the managers in your company work with $[officename], you can produce a final version of the document from the results you get back. - - - - - - - - - + +When several authors are working on the same text or spreadsheet, the review function records and displays who made the various changes. On the final edit of the document, it is then possible to look at each individual change and decide whether it should be accepted or rejected. +For example: You are an editor and are delivering your latest report. But before publication the report must be read by the senior editor and the proofreader, and both will add their changes. The senior editor writes "clarify" after one paragraph and crosses out another entirely. The proofreader corrects the spelling of your document. +The edited document comes back to you, and you can incorporate or ignore the suggestions of the two reviewers. +Let's say you also e-mailed a copy of the report to a good friend and colleague who has done research on a similar topic in the past. You asked for a few suggestions, and the document is now returned by e-mail with your colleague's suggestions. +As all your colleagues and the managers in your company work with $[officename], you can produce a final version of the document from the results you get back. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp index 829bc891cf..cf6c6e8d0d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Comparing Versions of a Document -/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Comparing Versions of a Document +/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -documents; comparing -comparing documents -versions; comparing documents -changes; comparing +documents; comparing +comparing documents +versions; comparing documents +changes; comparing review function; comparing documents - + Comparing Versions of a Document - -If one of the authors has made changes to a document without recording them, you can compare the changed document to your original document. - - -Open your original document and then choose Edit - Compare Document. - - -A file selection dialog appears. Select the copy of the document and confirm the dialog. - -%PRODUCTNAME combines both documents into your original document. All text passages that occur in your document but not in the copy are identified as having been inserted, and all text passages that are missing in your original document are identified as deletions. - - -You can now accept the "insertions", in which case the relevant texts stay in their original form, or you can accept the "deletions", in which case the marked text contained in the copy is not inserted in your document. - - - - - - - - - - + +If one of the authors has made changes to a document without recording them, you can compare the changed document to your original document. + + +Open your original document and then choose Edit - Compare Document. + + +A file selection dialog appears. Select the copy of the document and confirm the dialog. + +%PRODUCTNAME combines both documents into your original document. All text passages that occur in your document but not in the copy are identified as having been inserted, and all text passages that are missing in your original document are identified as deletions. + + +You can now accept the "insertions", in which case the relevant texts stay in their original form, or you can accept the "deletions", in which case the marked text contained in the copy is not inserted in your document. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp index af680de221..cee5f2fa35 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Recording Changes -/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Recording Changes +/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -changes; recording (tutorial) -recording; changes (guide) -comments; on changes +changes; recording (tutorial) +recording; changes (guide) +comments; on changes changes; settings - + Recording Changes - -The review function is available in $[officename] for text documents and spreadsheet documents. Not all changes are recorded. For example, the changing of a tab stop from align left to align right is not recorded. However, all usual changes made by a proofreader are recorded, such as additions, deletions, text alterations, and usual formatting. - - - -1. - - -To start recording changes, open the document to be edited and choose Edit - Changes and then choose Record. - - - - -2. - - -Now start making your changes. You will note that all new text passages that you enter are underlined in color, while all text that you delete remains visible but is crossed out and shown in color. - - - - -3. - - -If you move to a marked change with the mouse pointer, you will see a reference to the type of change, the author, date and time of day for the change in the Help Tip. If the Extended Tips are also enabled (on the Help menu), you will also see any available comments on this change. - - -
- -Changes in a spreadsheet document are highlighted by a border around the cells; when you point to the cell you can see more detailed information on this change in the Help Tips. -You can enter a comment on each recorded change by placing the cursor in the area of the change and then choosing Edit - Changes - Comment. In addition to Extended Tips, the comment is also displayed in the list in the Accept or Reject Changes dialog. -To stop recording changes, choose Edit - Changes - Record again. The check mark is removed and you can now save the document. -In a text document, you can highlight all lines that you have changed with an additional colored marking. This can be in the form of a red line in the margin, for example. -To change the settings for tracking changes, choose Tools - Options - Text Document - Changes or on the Tools - Options - Spreadsheet - Changes. - - - - - - - - + +The review function is available in $[officename] for text documents and spreadsheet documents. Not all changes are recorded. For example, the changing of a tab stop from align left to align right is not recorded. However, all usual changes made by a proofreader are recorded, such as additions, deletions, text alterations, and usual formatting. + + + +1. + + +To start recording changes, open the document to be edited and choose Edit - Changes and then choose Record. + + + + +2. + + +Now start making your changes. You will note that all new text passages that you enter are underlined in color, while all text that you delete remains visible but is crossed out and shown in color. + + + + +3. + + +If you move to a marked change with the mouse pointer, you will see a reference to the type of change, the author, date and time of day for the change in the Help Tip. If the Extended Tips are also enabled (on the Help menu), you will also see any available comments on this change. + + +
+ +Changes in a spreadsheet document are highlighted by a border around the cells; when you point to the cell you can see more detailed information on this change in the Help Tips. +You can enter a comment on each recorded change by placing the cursor in the area of the change and then choosing Edit - Changes - Comment. In addition to Extended Tips, the comment is also displayed in the list in the Accept or Reject Changes dialog. +To stop recording changes, choose Edit - Changes - Record again. The check mark is removed and you can now save the document. +In a text document, you can highlight all lines that you have changed with an additional colored marking. This can be in the form of a red line in the margin, for example. +To change the settings for tracking changes, choose Tools - Options - Text Document - Changes or on the Tools - Options - Spreadsheet - Changes. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp index 09057a886e..3d9a3d9c8d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Starting the $[officename] Software With Parameters -/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Starting the $[officename] Software With Parameters +/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-start parameters -command line parameters -parameters in command line +start parameters +command line parameters +parameters in command line arguments in command line - -Starting the $[officename] Software With Parameters -By starting the $[officename] software from the command line you can assign various parameters, with which you can influence the performance. The use of command line parameters is only recommended for experienced users. -For normal handling, the use of command line parameters is not necessary. A few of the parameters require a deeper knowledge of the technical background of the $[officename] software technology. -More information on this topic can be found at www.openoffice.org. -Starting the $[officename] Software From the Command LineSwitches had to be removed since this is also in the Setup Guide where we have no switching (FPE) - - -Under Windows, select Run from the Windows Start menu, or open a Shell under UNIX® based platforms. - - -Under Windows, type the following text in the Open text field and click OK. - - -Under UNIX based systems, type the following line of text, then press Return: + +Starting the $[officename] Software With Parameters +By starting the $[officename] software from the command line you can assign various parameters, with which you can influence the performance. The use of command line parameters is only recommended for experienced users. +For normal handling, the use of command line parameters is not necessary. A few of the parameters require a deeper knowledge of the technical background of the $[officename] software technology. +More information on this topic can be found at www.openoffice.org. +Starting the $[officename] Software From the Command LineSwitches had to be removed since this is also in the Setup Guide where we have no switching (FPE) + + +Under Windows, select Run from the Windows Start menu, or open a Shell under UNIX® based platforms. + + +Under Windows, type the following text in the Open text field and click OK. + + +Under UNIX based systems, type the following line of text, then press Return: {install}\program\soffice.exe {parameter} {install}/program/soffice {parameter} - -Replace {install} with the path to your installation of the $[officename] software (for example, C:\Program Files\Office, or ~/office) -Where required, replace {parameter} with one or more of the following command line parameters. - - -Valid Command Line Parameters - - - -Parameter - - -Meaning - - - - --help / -h / -? - - + +Replace {install} with the path to your installation of the $[officename] software (for example, C:\Program Files\Office, or ~/office) +Where required, replace {parameter} with one or more of the following command line parameters. + + +Valid Command Line Parameters +
+ + +Parameter + + +Meaning + + + + +-help / -h / -? + + Lists the available command line parameters in a dialog box -to the console. -help shows a long help text, -h shows a short help text. - - - - --writer - - -Starts with an empty Writer document. - - - - --calc - - -Starts with an empty Calc document. - - - - --draw - - -Starts with an empty Draw document. - - - - --impress - - -Starts with an empty Impress document. - - - - --math - - -Starts with an empty Math document. - - - - --global - - -Starts with an empty global document. - - - - --web - - -Starts with an empty HTML document. - - - - --show {filename.sxi} - - -Starts with the Impress file {filename.sxi} and starts the presentation. Enters edit mode after the presentation. - - - - --minimized - - -Starts minimized. The splash screen is not displayed. - - - - --invisible - - -Starts in invisible mode. -Neither the start-up logo nor the initial program window will be visible. However, the $[officename] software can be controlled and documents and dialogs opened via the API. -When the $[officename] software has been started with this parameter, it can only be ended using the taskmanager (Windows) or the kill command (UNIX based systems). -It cannot be used in conjunction with -quickstart. -More information is found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. - - - - --nocrashreport - - -Disables the error report tool. - - - - --norestore - - -Disables restart and file recovery after a system crash. - - - - --quickstart - - -Activates the Quickstarter. The splash screen is not displayed. - - - - --terminate_after_init - - -Registers some UNO services and ends. The splash screen does not appear. -More information is found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. - - - - --accept={UNO string} - - -Notifies the $[officename] software that upon the creation of "UNO Acceptor Threads", an "UNO Accept String" will be used. -More information is found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. - - - - --userid={user id} - - -Specifies a user's directory that is used instead of the data from the soffice.ini, bootstrap.ini and sversion.ini files. -More information is found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. - - - - --p {filename1} {filename2} ... - - -Prints the files {filename1} {filename2} ... to the default printer and ends. The splash screen does not appear. -If the file name contains spaces, then it must be enclosed in quotation marks. (for example, "C:\My File.sxw") - - - - --pt {Printername} {filename1} {filename2} ... - - -Prints the files {filename1} {filename2} ... to the printer {Printername} and ends. The splash screen does not appear. -If the file name contains spaces, then it must be enclosed in quotation marks. (for example, "C:\My File.sxw") - - - - --o {filename} - - -Opens {filename} for editing, even if it is a template. - - - - --view {filename} - - -Creates a temporary copy of {filename} and opens it read-only. - - - - --n {filename} - - -Creates a new document using {filename} as a template. - - - - --nologo - - -Disables the splash screen at program start. - - - - --nodefault - - -Opens the backing window. The backing window opens also when you call the program file directly without any start parameter. - - - - --display {display} - - -Sets the DISPLAY environment variable on UNIX based platforms to the value {display}. This parameter is only supported by the start script for the $[officename] software on UNIX based platforms. - - - - --headless - - -Starts in "headless mode" which allows using the application without user interface. -This special mode can be used when the application is controlled by external clients via the API. - - -
- -
- - +to the console. -help shows a long help text, -h shows a short help text. + + + + +-writer + + +Starts with an empty Writer document. + + + + +-calc + + +Starts with an empty Calc document. + + + + +-draw + + +Starts with an empty Draw document. + + + + +-impress + + +Starts with an empty Impress document. + + + + +-math + + +Starts with an empty Math document. + + + + +-global + + +Starts with an empty global document. + + + + +-web + + +Starts with an empty HTML document. + + + + +-show {filename.sxi} + + +Starts with the Impress file {filename.sxi} and starts the presentation. Enters edit mode after the presentation. + + + + +-minimized + + +Starts minimized. The splash screen is not displayed. + + + + +-invisible + + +Starts in invisible mode. +Neither the start-up logo nor the initial program window will be visible. However, the $[officename] software can be controlled and documents and dialogs opened via the API. +When the $[officename] software has been started with this parameter, it can only be ended using the taskmanager (Windows) or the kill command (UNIX based systems). +It cannot be used in conjunction with -quickstart. +More information is found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + + + +-nocrashreport + + +Disables the error report tool. + + + + +-norestore + + +Disables restart and file recovery after a system crash. + + + + +-quickstart + + +Activates the Quickstarter. The splash screen is not displayed. + + + + +-terminate_after_init + + +Registers some UNO services and ends. The splash screen does not appear. +More information is found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + + + +-accept={UNO string} + + +Notifies the $[officename] software that upon the creation of "UNO Acceptor Threads", an "UNO Accept String" will be used. +More information is found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + + + +-userid={user id} + + +Specifies a user's directory that is used instead of the data from the soffice.ini, bootstrap.ini and sversion.ini files. +More information is found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + + + +-p {filename1} {filename2} ... + + +Prints the files {filename1} {filename2} ... to the default printer and ends. The splash screen does not appear. +If the file name contains spaces, then it must be enclosed in quotation marks. (for example, "C:\My File.sxw") + + + + +-pt {Printername} {filename1} {filename2} ... + + +Prints the files {filename1} {filename2} ... to the printer {Printername} and ends. The splash screen does not appear. +If the file name contains spaces, then it must be enclosed in quotation marks. (for example, "C:\My File.sxw") + + + + +-o {filename} + + +Opens {filename} for editing, even if it is a template. + + + + +-view {filename} + + +Creates a temporary copy of {filename} and opens it read-only. + + + + +-n {filename} + + +Creates a new document using {filename} as a template. + + + + +-nologo + + +Disables the splash screen at program start. + + + + +-nodefault + + +Opens the backing window. The backing window opens also when you call the program file directly without any start parameter. + + + + +-display {display} + + +Sets the DISPLAY environment variable on UNIX based platforms to the value {display}. This parameter is only supported by the start script for the $[officename] software on UNIX based platforms. + + + + +-headless + + +Starts in "headless mode" which allows using the application without user interface. +This special mode can be used when the application is controlled by external clients via the API. + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp index 7b3820867e..4550b1f377 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Inserting and Editing Tab Stops -/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: edited link in par_id3151059 and text in 3146972 to fix #i21542# -added intro text to give info about scope -FPE: Deleted screenshot. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Inserting and Editing Tab Stops +/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: edited link in par_id3151059 and text in 3146972 to fix #i21542# +added intro text to give info about scope +FPE: Deleted screenshot. + + -tab stops; inserting and editing -paragraphs; tab stops -text; tab stops -default tab stops in text -editing; tab stops +tab stops; inserting and editing +paragraphs; tab stops +text; tab stops +default tab stops in text +editing; tab stops decimal tab stops; inserting - + Inserting and Editing Tab Stops - -On the horizontal ruler you can see the tab stops for the current paragraph. If you want to change the tab stops, you should first consider the scope to which you want to change tab stops as follows: - - -Change the default tab stops for all documents: Use the menu Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. - - -Change the tab stops for all paragraphs using the current Paragraph Style: Right-click the paragraph to open the context menu, choose Edit Paragraph Style, click Tabs. - - -Change the tab stops for one or more paragraphs: Select the paragraphs, then click inside the ruler. - - -In the following, you find instructions for all above mentioned tasks. -You can set a tab stop by clicking on the ruler or by selecting Format - Paragraph - Tabs. Both methods affect the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs. -Click the ruler once to set a left-justified tab. Right-click a tab icon on the ruler to see the context menu in which you can change the tab type. -To set several decimal tabs one after the other, keep clicking the icon to the left of the ruler until the desired tab type is shown, then click on the ruler. - - - -Selection - - -Description: - - - - + +On the horizontal ruler you can see the tab stops for the current paragraph. If you want to change the tab stops, you should first consider the scope to which you want to change tab stops as follows: + + +Change the default tab stops for all documents: Use the menu Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. + + +Change the tab stops for all paragraphs using the current Paragraph Style: Right-click the paragraph to open the context menu, choose Edit Paragraph Style, click Tabs. + + +Change the tab stops for one or more paragraphs: Select the paragraphs, then click inside the ruler. + + +In the following, you find instructions for all above mentioned tasks. +You can set a tab stop by clicking on the ruler or by selecting Format - Paragraph - Tabs. Both methods affect the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs. +Click the ruler once to set a left-justified tab. Right-click a tab icon on the ruler to see the context menu in which you can change the tab type. +To set several decimal tabs one after the other, keep clicking the icon to the left of the ruler until the desired tab type is shown, then click on the ruler. +
+ + +Selection + + +Description: + + + + Icon - - - -Setting left tabs - - - - + + + +Setting left tabs + + + + Icon - - - -Setting right tabs - - - - + + + +Setting right tabs + + + + Icon - - - -Setting decimal tabs - - - - + + + +Setting decimal tabs + + + + Icon - - - -Setting centered tabs - - -
- -Double-click the ruler to open the Paragraph dialog. -Double-click the white area of the ruler to set one tab. The Paragraph dialog appears with the Tabs tab page open. -Moving Tabs on the Ruler - - -Move individual tab stops on the ruler using the mouse. - - -To move several tab stops on the ruler, press the Shift key before you click a tab. Drag one tab while continuing to press Shift to move that tab as well as all the tabs to the right of it. The spacing between those tabs remains the same. - - + + + +Setting centered tabs + + + + +Double-click the ruler to open the Paragraph dialog. +Double-click the white area of the ruler to set one tab. The Paragraph dialog appears with the Tabs tab page open. +Moving Tabs on the Ruler + + +Move individual tab stops on the ruler using the mouse. + + +To move several tab stops on the ruler, press the Shift key before you click a tab. Drag one tab while continuing to press Shift to move that tab as well as all the tabs to the right of it. The spacing between those tabs remains the same. + + Press Command -Ctrl when you drag a tab on the ruler to move that tab and all the tabs to the right of it. This results in the spacing between those tabs changing proportionally to their distance from the margin. - - -Changing the Properties of Tabs -To change tab type, click the tab you want to change on the ruler, then right-click to open the context menu. -Deleting Tabs +Ctrl when you drag a tab on the ruler to move that tab and all the tabs to the right of it. This results in the spacing between those tabs changing proportionally to their distance from the margin. + + +Changing the Properties of Tabs +To change tab type, click the tab you want to change on the ruler, then right-click to open the context menu. +Deleting Tabs To delete a tab, hold down the mouse button while you drag the tab outside the ruler. - -Changing the Defaults + +Changing the Defaults If you want to change the settings of your default tab stops, you will find further information under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General @@ -179,19 +179,19 @@ FPE: Deleted screenshot. -rulers; default settings -rulers; measurement units +rulers; default settings +rulers; measurement units measurement units; rulers - + The context menu of the ruler allows you to change the displayed units of measurement. These changes are only valid until you exit $[officename], and they only apply to the ruler on whose context menu you made the change. If you want to change the ruler measurement units permanently, choose Tools - Options - [Document type] - View and change the measurement unit there. - -
-Ruler + +
+Ruler
- - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp index b73cf61fb3..d5819856f9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Changing Your Work Directory -/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Changing Your Work Directory +/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-work directory; changing -My Documents folder; work directory -paths; work directory -graphics; changing paths +work directory; changing +My Documents folder; work directory +paths; work directory +graphics; changing paths paths;changing - - + + Changing Your Work Directory - -When you start a dialog to open or save a document, $[officename] initially displays your work directory. To change this directory: - - -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. - - -Click My Documents and click the Edit button, or double-click on My Documents. - - -In the Select Path dialog, choose the work directory you want and click OK. - - -You also use this procedure to change the directory displayed by $[officename] when you want to insert a graphic. Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - Graphics, then follow step 3. -
- -Paths - - + +When you start a dialog to open or save a document, $[officename] initially displays your work directory. To change this directory: + + +Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. + + +Click My Documents and click the Edit button, or double-click on My Documents. + + +In the Select Path dialog, choose the work directory you want and click OK. + + +You also use this procedure to change the directory displayed by $[officename] when you want to insert a graphic. Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - Graphics, then follow step 3. +
+ +Paths + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp index 0c85c8ebe1..b51eb9bb75 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -XML Form Documents (XForms) -text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp - - -UFI: XForms main guide - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +XML Form Documents (XForms) +text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp + + +UFI: XForms main guide + + + +
-web documents;XForms -forms;XForms -XML Forms;guide +web documents;XForms +forms;XForms +XML Forms;guide XForms;guide - -XML Form Documents (XForms) -XForms is the name for a specification of web forms, defined by the World Wide Web Consortium: http://www.w3.org/MarkUp/Forms/. -
-Working with XForms -In %PRODUCTNAME, an XForms document is basically a text document. When you open an XForms document, you see some additional toolbars and windows. -As a designer of an Xforms document, you add controls, for example push buttons and list boxes, to the XForms document. Once you have created your XForms document, you switch off design mode and save the document. -Any user who loads your XForms documents can then fill out the text boxes, click check boxes or radio buttons, and finally click a push button to submit the changes to a server. -Within the XForms document, a data model resides which holds a data structure and optional data contents, coded as an XML (eXtensible Markup Language) file. -What's the role of UBL?We do not officially support exporting to XHTML - but should be possible using XSLT -To create a new XForms document - - -Choose File - New - XML Form Document. -You see the XForms toolbars and windows in an empty Writer document. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Insert a control, select the default model in the property browser, and enter a binding statement. - - -In the data navigator, add an element to the instance. - - -Load a new instance from an XML file and add controls to the relevant XML elements or attributes. - - -To open an XForms document - - -Choose File - Open and select the XForms document. XForms documents have the same extension as Writer text documents (*.oot). - - -To edit an XForms document -Open the XForms document. You see the following toolbars and windows: - - -Forms toolbarUFI: spec contemplates that we need three toolbars: Writer, Data base, XForms - - -Controls toolbarUFI: in final state this is the same as Form Functions toolbar, with only available icons visible - - -Data Navigator - - -Form Navigator - - -UFI: currently only StarOffice can render and evaluate our XForms docs. Mozilla has announced a planned support recently. There may be plugins for other browsers. Should we tell the user? - - + +XML Form Documents (XForms) +XForms is the name for a specification of web forms, defined by the World Wide Web Consortium: http://www.w3.org/MarkUp/Forms/. +
+Working with XForms +In %PRODUCTNAME, an XForms document is basically a text document. When you open an XForms document, you see some additional toolbars and windows. +As a designer of an Xforms document, you add controls, for example push buttons and list boxes, to the XForms document. Once you have created your XForms document, you switch off design mode and save the document. +Any user who loads your XForms documents can then fill out the text boxes, click check boxes or radio buttons, and finally click a push button to submit the changes to a server. +Within the XForms document, a data model resides which holds a data structure and optional data contents, coded as an XML (eXtensible Markup Language) file. +What's the role of UBL?We do not officially support exporting to XHTML - but should be possible using XSLT +To create a new XForms document + + +Choose File - New - XML Form Document. +You see the XForms toolbars and windows in an empty Writer document. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +Insert a control, select the default model in the property browser, and enter a binding statement. + + +In the data navigator, add an element to the instance. + + +Load a new instance from an XML file and add controls to the relevant XML elements or attributes. + + +To open an XForms document + + +Choose File - Open and select the XForms document. XForms documents have the same extension as Writer text documents (*.oot). + + +To edit an XForms document +Open the XForms document. You see the following toolbars and windows: + + +Forms toolbarUFI: spec contemplates that we need three toolbars: Writer, Data base, XForms + + +Controls toolbarUFI: in final state this is the same as Form Functions toolbar, with only available icons visible + + +Data Navigator + + +Form Navigator + + +UFI: currently only StarOffice can render and evaluate our XForms docs. Mozilla has announced a planned support recently. There may be plugins for other browsers. Should we tell the user? + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp index 0766f84de8..6870d94de6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Working With %PRODUCTNAME XML Filters -text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp - - -see also ui.openoffice.org/proposals/XMLFilterSpec.sxw -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Working With %PRODUCTNAME XML Filters +text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp + + +see also ui.openoffice.org/proposals/XMLFilterSpec.sxw +dedr: reviewed + + -File filters;XML -saving;to XML -loading;from XML -importing;from XML -exporting;to XML -XSLT filters, see also XML filters -XML filters;distributing -XML filters;editing +File filters;XML +saving;to XML +loading;from XML +importing;from XML +exporting;to XML +XSLT filters, see also XML filters +XML filters;distributing +XML filters;editing XML filters;creating - + Working With %PRODUCTNAME XML Filters - -About XML Filters -%PRODUCTNAME stores documents in XML format. You can create customized filters that convert the native %PRODUCTNAME XML format into another format. These filters can be integrated into %PRODUCTNAME seamlessly so that you can save or load these formats transparently. -To create an XML filter, you must have a good understanding of XML and XSLT concepts. These concepts are beyond the scope of this help. -An XML filter contains stylesheets that are written in the XSLT language. The stylesheets define the transformation from the %PRODUCTNAME format to another XML format through export and import filters. There are three types of XML filters: - - - -Import Filters load external XML files and transform the format of the files into the %PRODUCTNAME XML format. After you install an import filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog. - - - -Export Filters transform %PRODUCTNAME XML files and save the files to a different XML format. After you install an export filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the Export dialog. - - - -Import/Export Filters load and save %PRODUCTNAME XML files into a different XML format. After you install these filters, the names of the filters are added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog and the File Save As dialog. - - -Creating an XML Filter for %PRODUCTNAME -When you create an XML filter for %PRODUCTNAME, you need to design an XSLT stylesheet that can convert to and from the %PRODUCTNAME XML format. -For more information about the %PRODUCTNAME XML format, go to http://xml.openoffice.org/. -If you want, you can include a template with your filter to apply %PRODUCTNAME styles to an XML document that you import. -You can also include the Document Type Definition (DTD) for the for the external XML format so you can validate the XML format, for example, when you test the filter. -To Create an XML Filter - - -Create an XSLT transformation stylesheet that maps the elements of the external XML format to the elements of the %PRODUCTNAME XML format and back again. - - -Create a template that assigns %PRODUCTNAME styles to elements in the external XML format when you import a file in this format into %PRODUCTNAME. - - -In %PRODUCTNAME Writer, create a text document, and choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. - - -Click New. - - -In the XML Filter dialog, click the General tab, and define the properties of the filter. - - - - -In the Filter Name box, enter a name for the XML filter. -This name is displayed in the XML Filter Settings dialog. - - -In the Application box, select the %PRODUCTNAME application that the filter is for. - - -In the Name of File Type box, enter the file type that the filter is for. -This name is displayed in the list of file types in the Open, Export, and Save As dialogs. - - -In the File extension box, enter the extension for the exported file. -To differentiate the file from other XML files, enter an extension other than *.xml. - - - - -On the Transformation tab page, define the transformation properties for the filter. - - - - -(Optional) In the DocType box, enter the document type identifier for the external file format. -This identifier is used to detect the file type on import. - - -(Optional) In the DTD box, enter the path and file name of the DTD for the external file format. -This DTD is used to validate the files on export. - - -In the XSLT for export box, enter the path and file name of the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from %PRODUCTNAME to the external format. - - -In the XSLT for import box, enter the path and file name to the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from the external format to %PRODUCTNAME. - - -(Optional) In the Template for import box, enter the path and name of the template that defines the %PRODUCTNAME styles that are used in the imported file. -The files that are specified on the Transformation tab page are copied to the local %PRODUCTNAME users directory. - - - - -Click OK. - - -To Test an XML Filter -You can perform basic tests on a custom XML filter in %PRODUCTNAME. -The document is not altered by these tests. - - -Create or open a text document. - - -Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. - - -In the list of filters, select the filter that you want to test, and click Text XSLTs. - - -To test an Export Filter, do one of the following in the Export area of the dialog: - - - - -Click Browse, select the %PRODUCTNAME document that you want to test, and click Open. - - -To test the current document, click Current Document. - - - - -To test an Import Filter, click Browse in the Import area of the dialog, select a document, and click Open. - - -To validate the transformed file against the specified DTD, click Validate. - - -Distributing An XML Filter As Package -You can distribute an XML filter to multiple users using a special package format. -To save an XML filter as a package -The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when you a text document is opened. - - -In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. - - -Select the filter that you want to distribute and click Save As Package. - - -To Install an XML Filter from a Package -The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is opened. - - -In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. - - -Click Open Package and select the package file with the filter you want to install. - - -To Delete an Installed XML Filter -The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is opened. - - -In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. - - -Select the filter you want to delete and click Delete. - - -
- - - -World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) -World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Markup Language (XML) -
- - + +About XML Filters +%PRODUCTNAME stores documents in XML format. You can create customized filters that convert the native %PRODUCTNAME XML format into another format. These filters can be integrated into %PRODUCTNAME seamlessly so that you can save or load these formats transparently. +To create an XML filter, you must have a good understanding of XML and XSLT concepts. These concepts are beyond the scope of this help. +An XML filter contains stylesheets that are written in the XSLT language. The stylesheets define the transformation from the %PRODUCTNAME format to another XML format through export and import filters. There are three types of XML filters: + + + +Import Filters load external XML files and transform the format of the files into the %PRODUCTNAME XML format. After you install an import filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog. + + + +Export Filters transform %PRODUCTNAME XML files and save the files to a different XML format. After you install an export filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the Export dialog. + + + +Import/Export Filters load and save %PRODUCTNAME XML files into a different XML format. After you install these filters, the names of the filters are added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog and the File Save As dialog. + + +Creating an XML Filter for %PRODUCTNAME +When you create an XML filter for %PRODUCTNAME, you need to design an XSLT stylesheet that can convert to and from the %PRODUCTNAME XML format. +For more information about the %PRODUCTNAME XML format, go to http://xml.openoffice.org/. +If you want, you can include a template with your filter to apply %PRODUCTNAME styles to an XML document that you import. +You can also include the Document Type Definition (DTD) for the for the external XML format so you can validate the XML format, for example, when you test the filter. +To Create an XML Filter + + +Create an XSLT transformation stylesheet that maps the elements of the external XML format to the elements of the %PRODUCTNAME XML format and back again. + + +Create a template that assigns %PRODUCTNAME styles to elements in the external XML format when you import a file in this format into %PRODUCTNAME. + + +In %PRODUCTNAME Writer, create a text document, and choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + +Click New. + + +In the XML Filter dialog, click the General tab, and define the properties of the filter. + + + + +In the Filter Name box, enter a name for the XML filter. +This name is displayed in the XML Filter Settings dialog. + + +In the Application box, select the %PRODUCTNAME application that the filter is for. + + +In the Name of File Type box, enter the file type that the filter is for. +This name is displayed in the list of file types in the Open, Export, and Save As dialogs. + + +In the File extension box, enter the extension for the exported file. +To differentiate the file from other XML files, enter an extension other than *.xml. + + + + +On the Transformation tab page, define the transformation properties for the filter. + + + + +(Optional) In the DocType box, enter the document type identifier for the external file format. +This identifier is used to detect the file type on import. + + +(Optional) In the DTD box, enter the path and file name of the DTD for the external file format. +This DTD is used to validate the files on export. + + +In the XSLT for export box, enter the path and file name of the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from %PRODUCTNAME to the external format. + + +In the XSLT for import box, enter the path and file name to the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from the external format to %PRODUCTNAME. + + +(Optional) In the Template for import box, enter the path and name of the template that defines the %PRODUCTNAME styles that are used in the imported file. +The files that are specified on the Transformation tab page are copied to the local %PRODUCTNAME users directory. + + + + +Click OK. + + +To Test an XML Filter +You can perform basic tests on a custom XML filter in %PRODUCTNAME. +The document is not altered by these tests. + + +Create or open a text document. + + +Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + +In the list of filters, select the filter that you want to test, and click Text XSLTs. + + +To test an Export Filter, do one of the following in the Export area of the dialog: + + + + +Click Browse, select the %PRODUCTNAME document that you want to test, and click Open. + + +To test the current document, click Current Document. + + + + +To test an Import Filter, click Browse in the Import area of the dialog, select a document, and click Open. + + +To validate the transformed file against the specified DTD, click Validate. + + +Distributing An XML Filter As Package +You can distribute an XML filter to multiple users using a special package format. +To save an XML filter as a package +The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when you a text document is opened. + + +In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + +Select the filter that you want to distribute and click Save As Package. + + +To Install an XML Filter from a Package +The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is opened. + + +In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + +Click Open Package and select the package file with the filter you want to install. + + +To Delete an Installed XML Filter +The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is opened. + + +In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + +Select the filter you want to delete and click Delete. + + +
+ + + +World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) +World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Markup Language (XML) +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp index 539cb98b45..f4ab214da0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Form Toolbar -/text/shared/main0213.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: changed name from Form Toolbar to Navigation bar; dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Form Toolbar +/text/shared/main0213.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: changed name from Form Toolbar to Navigation bar; dedr: reviewed + + +
-forms;navigation toolbar -toolbars; form toolbar -toolbars; navigation toolbar -navigation bar;forms -filtering; data in forms -sorting; data in forms -data in forms; sorting and filtering +forms;navigation toolbar +toolbars; form toolbar +toolbars; navigation toolbar +navigation bar;forms +filtering; data in forms +sorting; data in forms +data in forms; sorting and filtering forms; filtering and sorting data - -Navigation Bar -The Navigation bar contains icons to edit a database table or to control the data view. The bar is displayed at the bottom of a document that contains fields that are linked to a database. -
-You can use the Navigation bar to move within records as well as to insert and to delete records. If data is saved in a form, the changes are transferred to the database. The Navigation bar also contains sort, filter, and search functions for data records. -You can use the Navigation Bar icon on the Form Functions toolbar to add a Navigation bar to a form. -The Navigation bar is only visible for forms connected to a database. In the Design view of a form, the Navigation bar is not available. See also Database Bar. -You can control the view of data with the sorting and filtering functions. Original tables are not changed. -The current sort order or filter is saved with the current document. If a filter is set, the Apply Filter icon on the Navigation bar is activated. Sorting and filtering features in the document can also be configured in the Form Properties dialog. (Choose Form Properties - Data - properties Sort and Filter). + +Navigation Bar +The Navigation bar contains icons to edit a database table or to control the data view. The bar is displayed at the bottom of a document that contains fields that are linked to a database. +
+You can use the Navigation bar to move within records as well as to insert and to delete records. If data is saved in a form, the changes are transferred to the database. The Navigation bar also contains sort, filter, and search functions for data records. +You can use the Navigation Bar icon on the Form Functions toolbar to add a Navigation bar to a form. +The Navigation bar is only visible for forms connected to a database. In the Design view of a form, the Navigation bar is not available. See also Database Bar. +You can control the view of data with the sorting and filtering functions. Original tables are not changed. +The current sort order or filter is saved with the current document. If a filter is set, the Apply Filter icon on the Navigation bar is activated. Sorting and filtering features in the document can also be configured in the Form Properties dialog. (Choose Form Properties - Data - properties Sort and Filter). If an SQL statement is the basis for a form (see Form Properties - tab Data - Data Source), then the filter and sort functions are only available when the SQL statement refers to only one table and is not written in the native SQL mode. - -Absolute Record - - - + +Absolute Record +
+ + Icon - - - -Shows the number of the current record. Enter a number to go to the corresponding record. - - -
+ + + +Shows the number of the current record. Enter a number to go to the corresponding record. + + + - -First Record - - - + +First Record +
+ + Icon - - - -Takes you to the first record. - - -
+ + + +Takes you to the first record. + + + - -Previous Record - - - + +Previous Record +
+ + Icon - - - -Takes you to the previous record. - - -
+ + + +Takes you to the previous record. + + + - -Next Record - - - + +Next Record +
+ + Icon - - - -Takes you to the next record. - - -
+ + + +Takes you to the next record. + + + - -Last Record - - - + +Last Record +
+ + Icon - - - -Takes you to the last record. - - -
+ + + +Takes you to the last record. + + + - -Save Record - - - + +Save Record +
+ + Icon - - - -Saves a new data entry. The change is registered in the database. - - -
+ + + +Saves a new data entry. The change is registered in the database. + + + - -Undo: Data entry - - - + +Undo: Data entry +
+ + Icon - - - -Allows you to undo a data entry. - - -
+ + + +Allows you to undo a data entry. + + + - -New Record - - - + +New Record +
+ + Icon - - - -Creates a new record. - - -
+ + + +Creates a new record. + + + - -Delete Record - - - + +Delete Record +
+ + Icon - - - -Deletes a record. A query needs to be confirmed before deleting. - - -
- - -Find Record - - - - - - - - - - - -Sort - - - - - - - - - - + + + +Deletes a record. A query needs to be confirmed before deleting. + + + + + +Find Record + + + + + + + + + + + +Sort + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp index e9421565be..291f6ea7eb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -$[officename] and the Internet -/text/shared/main0800.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-$[officename] and the Internet -This section provides information on the subject of the Internet. An Internet glossary explains the most important terms. -
- - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +$[officename] and the Internet +/text/shared/main0800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+$[officename] and the Internet +This section provides information on the subject of the Internet. An Internet glossary explains the most important terms. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp index ebc0c7af94..8f13ffa31a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Options -/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Options +/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-options; tools -defaults; options +options; tools +defaults; options settings; options - -Options -This command opens a dialog for a customized program configuration. -
-All your settings will be automatically saved. To open an entry either double click this entry or click the plus sign. To collapse the entry, click the minus sign or double click the entry. + +Options +This command opens a dialog for a customized program configuration. +
+All your settings will be automatically saved. To open an entry either double click this entry or click the plus sign. To collapse the entry, click the minus sign or double click the entry. You will only see the entries that are applicable to the current document. If the current document is a text document, you will see the %PRODUCTNAME Writer entry, and so on for all modules of %PRODUCTNAME. %PRODUCTNAME Impress and %PRODUCTNAME Draw are treated as the same in this dialog. The common entries are always visible. - -Select an entry to edit. - -%PRODUCTNAME - -Load/Save - -Language Settings - -Internet - -%PRODUCTNAME Writer - -%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - -%PRODUCTNAME Calc - -%PRODUCTNAME Impress - -%PRODUCTNAME Draw - -%PRODUCTNAME Math - -Charts - -%PRODUCTNAME Database - - - + +Select an entry to edit. + +%PRODUCTNAME + +Load/Save + +Language Settings + +Internet + +%PRODUCTNAME Writer + +%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web + +%PRODUCTNAME Calc + +%PRODUCTNAME Impress + +%PRODUCTNAME Draw + +%PRODUCTNAME Math + +Charts + +%PRODUCTNAME Database + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp index b7bb384bb8..6d929f642f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Writing Aids -/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Added missing section - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Writing Aids +/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Added missing section + + +
-writing aids;options -custom dictionaries; editing -user-defined dictionaries; editing -dictionaries; editing user-defined -exceptions; user-defined dictionaries -user-defined dictionaries; dictionary of exceptions -spellcheck; dictionary of exceptions -ignore list; spellcheck -spellcheck; ignore list -spellcheck; German -hyphenation; minimal number of characters -old German;spellcheck +writing aids;options +custom dictionaries; editing +user-defined dictionaries; editing +dictionaries; editing user-defined +exceptions; user-defined dictionaries +user-defined dictionaries; dictionary of exceptions +spellcheck; dictionary of exceptions +ignore list; spellcheck +spellcheck; ignore list +spellcheck; German +hyphenation; minimal number of characters +old German;spellcheck new German;spellcheck - -Writing Aids -Specifies the properties of the spellcheck, thesaurus and hyphenation. -
+ +Writing Aids +Specifies the properties of the spellcheck, thesaurus and hyphenation. + - -Available Language Modules -Contains the installed language modules. + +Available Language Modules +Contains the installed language modules. A language module can contain one, two or three submodules: Spellcheck, hyphenation and thesaurus. Each sub-module can be available in one or more languages. If you click in front of the name of the module, you activate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you remove a set mark, you deactivate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you wish to activate or deactivate individual sub-modules, click the Edit button to open the Edit Modules dialog. - -Edit -To edit a language module, select it and click Edit. The Edit Modules dialog appears. + +Edit +To edit a language module, select it and click Edit. The Edit Modules dialog appears.
- -User-defined dictionaries + +User-defined dictionaries Lists the available user dictionaries. Mark the user dictionaries that you want to use for spellcheck and hyphenation. - -New -Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. -New Dictionary + +New +Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. +New Dictionary In the Dictionary section you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. - -Name + +Name Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary. The file extension "*.DIC" is automatically appended. - -Language + +Language By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary. By selecting All the custom dictionary is used independently of the current language. - -Exceptions (-) + +Exceptions (-) Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents. You can include in the custom dictionary defined in this way all the words to be avoided. During the spellcheck, if this exception dictionary is activated, you will receive a corresponding note that this word should be avoided. - -Edit -Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries. -In the Edit custom dictionary dialog you have the option to enter new terms or edit existing entries. If you edit an exception dictionary, the dialog has the added facility of defining an exception for a word. During the spellcheck this exception is then listed as a suggestion. + +Edit +Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries. +In the Edit custom dictionary dialog you have the option to enter new terms or edit existing entries. If you edit an exception dictionary, the dialog has the added facility of defining an exception for a word. During the spellcheck this exception is then listed as a suggestion. When a dictionary is edited, a check is made on the status of the file. If the file is write-protected, it cannot be changed. The buttons New and Delete are then deactivated. - -Book -Specifies the book to be edited. + +Book +Specifies the book to be edited. The IgnoreAllList (All) includes all words that have been marked with Ignore during spellcheck, This list is administered only for the current spellcheck in the volatile RAM. Some user data will be entered in the list at program start. IgnoreAllList (All) cannot be deleted. - + The IgnoreAllList entry cannot be selected and cannot be deleted. Only the words included as content can be deleted. This happens automatically each time that $[officename] is closed. - -Language + +Language Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary. - -Word + +Word You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary. If you select a word from this list it is displayed in the text field. If you type a word with an equals sign after it, such as "AutoComplete=", the word is neither automatically hyphenated nor is a hyphenation suggested. Typing "Auto=Complete" result in the word being hyphenated, or a hyphenation suggested, at this point. - -Suggestion + +Suggestion This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary. The field takes the alterative suggestion for the word in the "Word" text box. - -New + +New Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries. - -Delete + +Delete Removes the marked word from the current custom dictionary. - -Delete -Deletes the selected dictionary after a confirmation, provided it is not write-protected. -
+ +Delete +Deletes the selected dictionary after a confirmation, provided it is not write-protected. +
- -Options + +Options Defines the options for the spellcheck and hyphenation. - -Edit -If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit. You will see a dialog for entering a new value. -Check uppercase words -Specifies that capitalization is checked during spellcheck. -Check words with numbers. -Specifies that words that contain numbers as well as letters are to be checked. -Check capitalization -Checks for the correct use of capitals at the start of words during spellcheck. -Check special regions -Specifies that special regions, such as text in headers and footers, document tables, and text frames, are checked during spellcheck. -Check in all languages + +Edit +If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit. You will see a dialog for entering a new value. +Check uppercase words +Specifies that capitalization is checked during spellcheck. +Check words with numbers. +Specifies that words that contain numbers as well as letters are to be checked. +Check capitalization +Checks for the correct use of capitals at the start of words during spellcheck. +Check special regions +Specifies that special regions, such as text in headers and footers, document tables, and text frames, are checked during spellcheck. +Check in all languages Checks spelling against all installed language dictionaries. The "Language" font attribute is therefore not taken into account. - -AutoCheck + +AutoCheck Automatically checks spelling as you type, and underlines errors. - -
-Typing errors are highlighted in the document with a red underline. If you place the cursor over a word marked in this way, you can open the context menu to obtain a list of suggested corrections. Select a suggested correction to replace the suspect word with the suggestion. If you make the same mistake again while editing the document, it will be corrected automatically. -These automatic replacements are only made during the current $[officename] session. -To place the word pair in the AutoCorrect replacement table, open the AutoCorrect context menu and choose AutoCorrect. Make your selection from the submenu. The word is replaced and at the same time the word pair is placed in the replacement table. -
-Do not mark errors -Specifies that spelling errors will not be indicated with a red underline. This mode allows you to check the spelling "in the background" while typing or loading a text, but without the time-consuming red underlining. If you unmark the Do not mark errors box later, you will immediately see the red underlining. -German spelling - old + +
+Typing errors are highlighted in the document with a red underline. If you place the cursor over a word marked in this way, you can open the context menu to obtain a list of suggested corrections. Select a suggested correction to replace the suspect word with the suggestion. If you make the same mistake again while editing the document, it will be corrected automatically. +These automatic replacements are only made during the current $[officename] session. +To place the word pair in the AutoCorrect replacement table, open the AutoCorrect context menu and choose AutoCorrect. Make your selection from the submenu. The word is replaced and at the same time the word pair is placed in the replacement table. +
+Do not mark errors +Specifies that spelling errors will not be indicated with a red underline. This mode allows you to check the spelling "in the background" while typing or loading a text, but without the time-consuming red underlining. If you unmark the Do not mark errors box later, you will immediately see the red underlining. +German spelling - old Specifies that old German spelling rules are applied. If you don't check this box, $[officename] follows the new spelling rules for spellcheck and hyphenation. - -Minimal number of characters for hyphenation -Specifies the minimum number of characters required for automatic hyphenation to be applied. Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen. -Characters before line break -Sets the minimum number of characters of the word to be hyphenated that must remain at the end of the line. -Characters after line break -Specifies the minimum number of characters of a hyphenated word required at the next line. -Hyphenate without inquiry -Specifies that you will never be asked for a manual hyphenation. If the field is not marked, when a word is not recognized you will be presented with a dialog for entering hyphens. -Hyphenate special regions -Specifies that hyphenation will also be carried out in footnotes, headers and footers. -
- - + +Minimal number of characters for hyphenation +Specifies the minimum number of characters required for automatic hyphenation to be applied. Type the minimum number of characters that must come before or after the hyphen. +Characters before line break +Sets the minimum number of characters of the word to be hyphenated that must remain at the end of the line. +Characters after line break +Specifies the minimum number of characters of a hyphenated word required at the next line. +Hyphenate without inquiry +Specifies that you will never be asked for a manual hyphenation. If the field is not marked, when a word is not recognized you will be presented with a dialog for entering hyphens. +Hyphenate special regions +Specifies that hyphenation will also be carried out in footnotes, headers and footers. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp index c4536f65ea..4d1c456a6a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Edit module -/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Edit module +/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -spellcheck; activating for a language -hyphenation; activating for a language -thesaurus; activating for a language -languages; activating modules -dictionaries;creating +spellcheck; activating for a language +hyphenation; activating for a language +thesaurus; activating for a language +languages; activating modules +dictionaries;creating user-defined dictionaries;creating - - -
-Edit module -
+ + +
+Edit module +
- -Options -Specifies the language and the available spelling, hyphenation and Thesaurus sub-modules for the selected module. You can arrange the sub-modules by priority. - - -Select the language from the Language list. - - -Mark all modules that are to be activated for this language under the headings Spelling, Hyphenation and Thesaurus. - - -As long as you have more than one sub-module available for one area, the sub-modules for spelling and the Thesaurus are processed in the sequence in which they are listed. You can change the sequence using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. - - -Only one sub-module can be activated under Hyphenation. - + +Options +Specifies the language and the available spelling, hyphenation and Thesaurus sub-modules for the selected module. You can arrange the sub-modules by priority. + + +Select the language from the Language list. + + +Mark all modules that are to be activated for this language under the headings Spelling, Hyphenation and Thesaurus. + + +As long as you have more than one sub-module available for one area, the sub-modules for spelling and the Thesaurus are processed in the sequence in which they are listed. You can change the sequence using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. + + +Only one sub-module can be activated under Hyphenation. + - -Language -Specifies the language of the module. -For all language selection fields in %PRODUCTNAME, the following applies: + +Language +Specifies the language of the module. +For all language selection fields in %PRODUCTNAME, the following applies: A language entry has a check mark in front of it if the spellcheck is activated for this language. - -Move up + +Move up Increases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. - -Move down + +Move down Decreases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. - -Back -Click here to undo the current changes in the list box. - - + +Back +Click here to undo the current changes in the list box. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp index 67c70f08a6..70971549a3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Color -/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Color +/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + Color -defining;colors -colors; defining +defining;colors +colors; defining colors;selection - + Allows you to define your own colors using the two-dimensional graphic and numerical gradient chart. - Click OK to display the newly defined color in the preview box of the Colors register, where you can then decide if you want to add or replace the new color in the current color palette. - -Color Window -In the two big color windows, you click to select a new color. You can select the color in the left or the right color window as you wish. -In the right color window, you will see the entire color spectrum from the left to the right, with the colors at the top being fully saturated and the colors at the bottom being unsaturated. -In the left color window, you will see a selection of colors, displaying a progressive spectrum, varying between the four colors in the four corners of this window. You can change the colors in the four corners as follows: - - -Click the corner of the field in which you want to change the color. - - -In the right color window, click the desired new color for the corner field or enter the values, which define the color, in the numeric input fields. - - -Accept the color selected on the right into the small field that is marked in the left color window by clicking the <-- button. - - + Click OK to display the newly defined color in the preview box of the Colors register, where you can then decide if you want to add or replace the new color in the current color palette. + +Color Window +In the two big color windows, you click to select a new color. You can select the color in the left or the right color window as you wish. +In the right color window, you will see the entire color spectrum from the left to the right, with the colors at the top being fully saturated and the colors at the bottom being unsaturated. +In the left color window, you will see a selection of colors, displaying a progressive spectrum, varying between the four colors in the four corners of this window. You can change the colors in the four corners as follows: + + +Click the corner of the field in which you want to change the color. + + +In the right color window, click the desired new color for the corner field or enter the values, which define the color, in the numeric input fields. + + +Accept the color selected on the right into the small field that is marked in the left color window by clicking the <-- button. + + The gradient in the left color window is immediately adjusted with respect to hue, saturation, and brightness. - -<-- + +<-- Click the <-- button to replace the selected color in the color palette with the color selected at the right. - ---> + +--> Sets the small selection cursor in the right window on the color, which corresponds to the selected color in the left window and updates the respective values in the numerical fields. - -Cyan + +Cyan Sets the Cyan color value in the CMYK color model. - -Magenta + +Magenta Sets the Magenta color value in the CMYK color model. - -Yellow + +Yellow Sets the Yellow color value in the CMYK color model. - -Key + +Key Sets the Black color value or key (black) in the CMYK color model. - -Red + +Red Sets the Red color value in the RGB color model. - -Green + +Green Sets the Green color value in the RGB color model. - -Blue + +Blue Sets the Blue color value in the RGB color model. - -Color + +Color Sets the Hue in the HSB color model. - -Saturation + +Saturation Sets the Saturation in the HSB color model. - -Luminance -Sets the Brightness in the HSB color model. - -In the left preview field, you will see the original color from the parent tab, Colors. In the right preview field, you will always see the current result of your work in this dialog. - - + +Luminance +Sets the Brightness in the HSB color model. + +In the left preview field, you will see the original color from the parent tab, Colors. In the right preview field, you will always see the current result of your work in this dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp index 466f2bd2dd..c769fc55be 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -General -/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +General +/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -opening; dialog settings -saving; dialog settings -dialogs; opening and saving -years; 2-digits options -Help Agent;options -Help;style sheets +opening; dialog settings +saving; dialog settings +dialogs; opening and saving +years; 2-digits options +Help Agent;options +Help;style sheets dialogs;default - - -
-General -Specifies the general settings for $[officename]. -
+ + +
+General +Specifies the general settings for $[officename]. +
- -Year (two digits) -Defines a date range, within which the system recognizes a two-digit year. -
-In $[officename], years are indicated by four digits, so that the difference between 1/1/99 and 1/1/01 is two years. This Year (two digits) setting allows the user to define the years in which two-digit dates are added to 2000. To illustrate, if you specify a date of 1/1/30 or later, the entry "1/1/20" is recognized as 1/1/2020 instead of 1/1/1920. -
-Help Agent + +Year (two digits) +Defines a date range, within which the system recognizes a two-digit year. +
+In $[officename], years are indicated by four digits, so that the difference between 1/1/99 and 1/1/01 is two years. This Year (two digits) setting allows the user to define the years in which two-digit dates are added to 2000. To illustrate, if you specify a date of 1/1/30 or later, the entry "1/1/20" is recognized as 1/1/2020 instead of 1/1/1920. +
+Help Agent Specifies the behavior of the Help Agent. - -Activate + +Activate Specifies that the Help Agent will be displayed automatically in selected situations. - -Display duration + +Display duration Specifies how long the Help Agent remains visible until it is automatically closed. - -Help Agent Reset -If you have not opened the Help Agent for a particular situation three times in succession, but rather have closed it or let it close automatically, the Help Agent for this situation is not shown again. The situation is removed from the relevant internal list. -Click the Reset button to restore the default list of situations for which the Help Agent is displayed. + +Help Agent Reset +If you have not opened the Help Agent for a particular situation three times in succession, but rather have closed it or let it close automatically, the Help Agent for this situation is not shown again. The situation is removed from the relevant internal list. +Click the Reset button to restore the default list of situations for which the Help Agent is displayed. $[officename] Help formatting - -Style sheet -Choose the style of $[officename] Help. + +Style sheet +Choose the style of $[officename] Help. Open/Save dialogs - + Use $[officename] dialogs - + Specifies whether $[officename] dialogs are used to open and save documents. Otherwise the dialogs of the operating system are used. - + The $[officename] dialogs for opening and saving documents are described in $[officename] Help. - + Document status - -Printing sets "document modified" status -Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification. When this option is marked, the very next time the document is closed you are asked if the changes should be saved. The print date is then entered in the document properties as a change. - - + +Printing sets "document modified" status +Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification. When this option is marked, the very next time the document is closed you are asked if the changes should be saved. The print date is then entered in the document properties as a change. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp index f79318be28..307472c933 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Fonts -/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Fonts +/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-HTML;font for source display +HTML;font for source display Basic; fonts for source display - -Fonts -Substitutes a font with a font of your choice. The substitution only replaces a font when it is displayed on screen or during printing. It does not change the font specified in your document formatting. -
-If you want, you can override the default substitution font that your operating system uses when it encounters an unavailable font in a document. - + +Fonts +Substitutes a font with a font of your choice. The substitution only replaces a font when it is displayed on screen or during printing. It does not change the font specified in your document formatting. + +If you want, you can override the default substitution font that your operating system uses when it encounters an unavailable font in a document. + Font replacement also affects the display of fonts on the $[officename] user interface. - -Apply replacement table + +Apply replacement table Enables the font replacement settings that you define. - -Replacement table -Lists the original font and the font that will replace it. Select Always to replace both the screen font and the printer font, even if the original font is installed on your system. Select Screen to replace the screen font only. -Always -Replaces the original font with the font you specify, both onscreen and on a printed page. -Leave this selection blank if you only want $[officename] to replace fonts that are not installed on your system. -Screen + +Replacement table +Lists the original font and the font that will replace it. Select Always to replace both the screen font and the printer font, even if the original font is installed on your system. Select Screen to replace the screen font only. +Always +Replaces the original font with the font you specify, both onscreen and on a printed page. +Leave this selection blank if you only want $[officename] to replace fonts that are not installed on your system. +Screen Font replacement only affects screen display. - -Font + +Font Enter or select the name of the font that you want to replace. - -Replace with + +Replace with Enter or select the name of the replacement font. - -Apply -Applies the selected font replacement. - - - + +Apply +Applies the selected font replacement. +
+ + Icon - - - -Apply - - -
+ + + +Apply + + + - -Delete -Deletes the selected font replacement. - - - + +Delete +Deletes the selected font replacement. +
+ + Icon - - - -Delete - - -
- -Font settings for HTML and Basic sources + + + +Delete + + + + +Font settings for HTML and Basic sources Select the font and font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. - -Fonts + +Fonts Select the font for the display of HTML and Basic source code. Select Automatic to detect a suitable font automatically. - -Non-proportional fonts only + +Non-proportional fonts only Check to display only non-proportional fonts in the Fonts list box. - -Size -Select a font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. - - + +Size +Select a font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp index a4498cf2c9..923f7e11cc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -View -/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: changes due to spec NativeWidgetRendering; dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +View +/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: changes due to spec NativeWidgetRendering; dedr: reviewed + + +
-views; defaults -defaults; views -settings; views -scaling; screen representation -font sizes; scaling on screen -menus; inactive menu items -commands; not visible -WYSIWYG in fonts lists -previews; fonts lists -fonts lists; previews -font names;histories -3D view -views; in 3D -OpenGL; using -OpenGL; optimized output -dithering; using -interaction; refreshing objects -mouse; positioning -clipboard; selection clipboard +views; defaults +defaults; views +settings; views +scaling; screen representation +font sizes; scaling on screen +menus; inactive menu items +commands; not visible +WYSIWYG in fonts lists +previews; fonts lists +fonts lists; previews +font names;histories +3D view +views; in 3D +OpenGL; using +OpenGL; optimized output +dithering; using +interaction; refreshing objects +mouse; positioning +clipboard; selection clipboard selection clipboard; mouse function - -View -Specifies view options. -
- + +View +Specifies view options. + + User Interface - -Scaling -Uses percentile scaling for font size in user interface elements, such as dialogs and icon labels. + +Scaling +Uses percentile scaling for font size in user interface elements, such as dialogs and icon labels. The Scaling setting does not affect the font size of text in a document. - -Toolbar icon size + +Toolbar icon size Specifies the display size of toolbar icons.The Automatic option uses the font size settings of your operating system for menus. - -Use system font for user interface -Specifies to use the system font to display all menus and dialogs. + +Use system font for user interface +Specifies to use the system font to display all menus and dialogs. Menu - -Show icons in menus + +Show icons in menus Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. - -Show inactive menu items -Displays inactive menu items in gray. -Inactive items in context menus are not displayed. + +Show inactive menu items +Displays inactive menu items in gray. +Inactive items in context menus are not displayed. Font lists - -Show preview of fonts + +Show preview of fonts Displays the names of selectable fonts in the corresponding font, for example, fonts in the Font box on the Object bar. - -Show font history -Lists the last five fonts that you used in the current document at the top of the list in the Font Name box on the Object bar. + +Show font history +Lists the last five fonts that you used in the current document at the top of the list in the Font Name box on the Object bar. Restore - -Open windows -This is where you define whether windows that are open when you end the program are to be restored when you restart $[officename]. + +Open windows +This is where you define whether windows that are open when you end the program are to be restored when you restart $[officename]. 3D view - -Use OpenGL + +Use OpenGL Specifies that all 3D graphics from $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress will be displayed in your system using an OpenGL capable hardware. This box is checked by default. If your system does not have an OpenGL capable hardware, this setting will be ignored. - -Optimized output + +Optimized output Select this option for an optimized OpenGL output. If Optimized output has been activated, all geometry data will be simultaneously transferred in an array to the graphic driver. Not every graphic diver correctly supports this OpenGL capability. For this reason, you can deactivate Optimized output in case of presentation errors of 3D output. All geometry data is now transferred one after the other as single components. - -Use dithering -The Use dithering option uses dithering to display more colors with few colors available. Dithering creates the illusion of new colors and shades by varying the pattern of color pixels. Varying the patterns of black and white dots, for instance, produces different shades of gray. This option is activated by default. + +Use dithering +The Use dithering option uses dithering to display more colors with few colors available. Dithering creates the illusion of new colors and shades by varying the pattern of color pixels. Varying the patterns of black and white dots, for instance, produces different shades of gray. This option is activated by default. Internally, 3-D graphics are always created with 16 million colors (24-bit color depth). They are used to dither portrayals with fewer colors. Without dithering, several bits of color information are omitted, making the grading distinctly visible. The fewer colors available, the poorer the quality. - -Object refresh during interaction + +Object refresh during interaction Specifies that if you rotate or move a 3-D object, the full display is rotated or moved and not a grid frame. This option is deactivated by default. - + Press Shift+Ctrl+R to restore or refresh the view of the current document.UFI: dont know where else to plce this. But we need it: see "customize/menus/add commands". - -Mouse positioning + +Mouse positioning Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs. - -Middle mouse button -Defines the function of the middle mouse button. - - - -Automatic scrolling - dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view. - - - -Paste clipboard - pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the "Selection clipboard" at the cursor position. - - -The "Selection clipboard" is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by Edit - Copy/Cut /Insert or the respective keyboard shortcuts. Clipboard and "Selection clipboard" can contain different contents at the same time. - - - - - -Clipboard - - -Selection clipboard - - - - - -Copy content - - - -Edit - Copy Ctrl+C. - - -Select text, table, object. - - - - - -Paste content - - - -Edit - Paste Ctrl+V pastes at the cursor position. - - -Clicking the middle mouse button pastes at the mouse pointer position. - - - - - -Pasting into another document - - - -No effect on the clipboard contents. - - -The last marked selection is the content of the selection clipboard. - - -
- - - + +Middle mouse button +Defines the function of the middle mouse button. + + + +Automatic scrolling - dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view. + + + +Paste clipboard - pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the "Selection clipboard" at the cursor position. + + +The "Selection clipboard" is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by Edit - Copy/Cut /Insert or the respective keyboard shortcuts. Clipboard and "Selection clipboard" can contain different contents at the same time. + + + + + +Clipboard + + +Selection clipboard + + + + + +Copy content + + + +Edit - Copy Ctrl+C. + + +Select text, table, object. + + + + + +Paste content + + + +Edit - Paste Ctrl+V pastes at the cursor position. + + +Clicking the middle mouse button pastes at the mouse pointer position. + + + + + +Pasting into another document + + + +No effect on the clipboard contents. + + +The last marked selection is the content of the selection clipboard. + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp index 115c17840e..9a2189dda8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Network Identity -/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Network Identity +/text/shared/optionen/01014000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-network identity;options -options; network identity -single sign on options -LDAP; sign on options -remote configuration; options +network identity;options +options; network identity +single sign on options +LDAP; sign on options +remote configuration; options configuration;Configuration Manager - -Network Identity -Sets the options for a remote configuration access to your personal $[officename] settings stored on an LDAP server. To see this tab page and to use this feature, remote configuration must be active: You need an account on an LDAP server that is running and configured to store $[officename] user settings. -
-Using remote configuration, you can start a copy of $[officename] on any computer in the network with your own user data and personal configuration. + +Network Identity +Sets the options for a remote configuration access to your personal $[officename] settings stored on an LDAP server. To see this tab page and to use this feature, remote configuration must be active: You need an account on an LDAP server that is running and configured to store $[officename] user settings. + +Using remote configuration, you can start a copy of $[officename] on any computer in the network with your own user data and personal configuration. link to how-to ldap config, single signon how-to, etc - -Authentication Method + +Authentication Method Choose your security mechanism for access to the LDAP server. Choices are Simple or Kerberos. - -User name + +User name Using "simple" authentication method, you enter your user name on the LDAP server here. Using "Kerberos", you just see your user name, but cannot edit it. - -Password + +Password Using "simple" authentication method, enter your password for access to the LDAP server here. Using "Kerberos", this box is not active. - -Save password -Using "simple" authentication method, check this box to make your password persistent. If the password is persistent and the same user starts $[officename] later on, the user name and password will not be requested again. Using "Kerberos", this box is not active. + +Save password +Using "simple" authentication method, check this box to make your password persistent. If the password is persistent and the same user starts $[officename] later on, the user name and password will not be requested again. Using "Kerberos", this box is not active. The password will be stored encrypted in a file called .ssop in your home directory -"My Documents" folder. - - +"My Documents" folder. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp index fb214a056d..5731fa7b85 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Proxy -/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Proxy +/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-settings; proxy +settings; proxy proxy settings - -Proxy -
-Proxy servers for accessing the Internet can be set up manually as needed. - -Settings + +Proxy + +Proxy servers for accessing the Internet can be set up manually as needed. + +Settings Defines the settings for the proxy server. - -Proxy server -Specifies the type of proxy definition. -None -Accesses the Internet without a proxy server. Allows you to set up a connection directly on your computer to an Internet provider that does not use a proxy. -Manual -Lets you enter the proxy server manually. Specify the proxy servers in accordance with your Internet service. Ask your system administrator for the proxies and ports to enter. + +Proxy server +Specifies the type of proxy definition. +None +Accesses the Internet without a proxy server. Allows you to set up a connection directly on your computer to an Internet provider that does not use a proxy. +Manual +Lets you enter the proxy server manually. Specify the proxy servers in accordance with your Internet service. Ask your system administrator for the proxies and ports to enter. Type server names without the protocol prefix. For example, type www.sun.com, not http://www.sun.com. - -HTTP proxy + +HTTP proxy Type the name of the proxy server for HTTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. - -FTP proxy + +FTP proxy Type the name of the proxy server for FTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. - -No proxy for -Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers, separated by semicolons. These are servers addressed in your local network, and servers used for video and audio streaming, for example. + +No proxy for +Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers, separated by semicolons. These are servers addressed in your local network, and servers used for video and audio streaming, for example. You can also use placeholders for the names of hosts and domains. For example, type *.sun.com to address all the hosts in the sun.com domain without proxy. - -Port -Type the port for the corresponding proxy server. The maximum value of a port number is fixed at 65535. - - + +Port +Type the port for the corresponding proxy server. The maximum value of a port number is fixed at 65535. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp index c78f2d5b14..663d68c59f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Search -/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Search +/text/shared/optionen/01020200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
search engines; selecting - -Search -Use this register to define the settings for searching in the Internet. -
- - -Search in + +Search +Use this register to define the settings for searching in the Internet. + + + +Search in Specifies the search engine and its corresponding configuration. - -Search engines + +Search engines Displays the available search engines. Select a search engine to display its configuration in the adjacent text and option boxes. - -Name + +Name Displays the name of the selected search engine. This is the name that will be shown in the sub-menu of the Search icon. - -Type -Sets the advanced search preferences (and, or, exact) as well as the way the results are defined and displayed. + +Type +Sets the advanced search preferences (and, or, exact) as well as the way the results are defined and displayed. The links And, Or and Exactly are available. - -Prefix + +Prefix This text box displays the URL and the first part of the query command for a search machine. A URL can also be typed directly. - -Suffix + +Suffix The search terms are passed between the prefix and the suffix.The suffix provides the command sequence, sent at the end of a search. - -Separator -If you type more than one word while running a search, these words will be separated by the character specified here. Most search engines require the "+" character. -To determine which prefixes, separators and suffixes to use when defining a new search engine: - - -Activate the search engine and perform a search with at least two words. - - -Copy the URL from the URL field in the Function bar and paste it into a blank document. - - -Change the conditions for the search in the search engine, if it offers you the choice. - - -Again, copy the contents of the URL field. - - -Compare the URLs with the sample URLs in the fields of this dialog and make a note of the prefixes, suffixes and separators used. - + +Separator +If you type more than one word while running a search, these words will be separated by the character specified here. Most search engines require the "+" character. +To determine which prefixes, separators and suffixes to use when defining a new search engine: + + +Activate the search engine and perform a search with at least two words. + + +Copy the URL from the URL field in the Function bar and paste it into a blank document. + + +Change the conditions for the search in the search engine, if it offers you the choice. + + +Again, copy the contents of the URL field. + + +Compare the URLs with the sample URLs in the fields of this dialog and make a note of the prefixes, suffixes and separators used. + - -Case match -Determines the case match for running a search. The list contains the following entries: None, Upper and Lower. The search terms entered are converted according to your selection. + +Case match +Determines the case match for running a search. The list contains the following entries: None, Upper and Lower. The search terms entered are converted according to your selection. Search engines handle queries differently according to the way they are constructed. For example, some are case sensitive and some are not. Because of this, it is best to select None as the case match option. - -New + +New Use this button to include a new search engine.New deletes all important entries of the entry mask such as "Name" and "Suffix". Enter the new search engine together with all of the necessary details. As soon as you accept your entries with Add, the new search engine will appear in the search engine list under Search in. Close the dialog with the OK button. - -Add + +Add Click this button to add a new configuration to the list. - -Modify + +Modify Click this button to apply the modifications made to an existing configuration. - -Delete -Click this button to delete the selected search engine from the list. There will be no security response. - - + +Delete +Click this button to delete the selected search engine from the list. There will be no security response. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp index b4d25fe756..dfa99ad97f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Security -/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Security +/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-Basic; scripts running automatically -%PRODUCTNAME Basic scripts -missing access rights -access rights; missing +Basic; scripts running automatically +%PRODUCTNAME Basic scripts +missing access rights +access rights; missing error messages; 'Missing access rights' - -Security -Defines the security options for opening documents that contain %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros. -
- - + +Security +Defines the security options for opening documents that contain %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros. + + + %PRODUCTNAME Basic Script - -Run macro -Specifies whether macros that are loaded with %PRODUCTNAME documents are allowed to run. Macros that are imported from macro libraries or that are defined within the Basic IDE of %PRODUCTNAME are always allowed to run. -According to path list -Only runs %PRODUCTNAME document macros from documents opened from a folder in the Path list. -Always -Runs all %PRODUCTNAME document macros, regardless of the source. -Never + +Run macro +Specifies whether macros that are loaded with %PRODUCTNAME documents are allowed to run. Macros that are imported from macro libraries or that are defined within the Basic IDE of %PRODUCTNAME are always allowed to run. +According to path list +Only runs %PRODUCTNAME document macros from documents opened from a folder in the Path list. +Always +Runs all %PRODUCTNAME document macros, regardless of the source. +Never Disables all %PRODUCTNAME document macros. - -Confirm in case of other document sources + +Confirm in case of other document sources Prompts you to allow execution of macros loaded with a document from a directory not specified in the Path list. - -Show warning before running + +Show warning before running Displays a warning when a %PRODUCTNAME document that contains a macro is opened. You can choose to allow the macros in the document to run, or to disable the macros, or to cancel opening the document. If the macro is located in a directory that is not in the Path list, you are prompted to add the directory to the Path list. - -Path list -Lists the trusted sources for macros. You can edit or add paths to this list. - - - -Path Variables - - -Meaning - - - - -$(workdirurl) - - -Specifies your home directory assigned by the operating system (see also Tools - Options - - -%PRODUCTNAME - - - Paths). - - - - -$(userurl) - - -Specifies the %PRODUCTNAME directory containing your user data. - - - - -$(insturl) - - -Specifies the %PRODUCTNAME installation directory. - - -
+ +Path list +Lists the trusted sources for macros. You can edit or add paths to this list. + + + +Path Variables + + +Meaning + + + + +$(workdirurl) + + +Specifies your home directory assigned by the operating system (see also Tools - Options - + +%PRODUCTNAME + + - Paths). + + + + +$(userurl) + + +Specifies the %PRODUCTNAME directory containing your user data. + + + + +$(insturl) + + +Specifies the %PRODUCTNAME installation directory. + + +
- -New path -Enter a new path to a trusted source for %PRODUCTNAME document macros, and then click Add. You can also use wildcards when specifying the path, such as *Sun*. + +New path +Enter a new path to a trusted source for %PRODUCTNAME document macros, and then click Add. You can also use wildcards when specifying the path, such as *Sun*. All subdirectories of the directory you specify in the New path box are included in the path. - -Add + +Add Adds the path you entered in the New path box to the Path list. - -If you receive an error message about "missing access rights" when you try to run a Wizard or to load a template, click Default to reset the Path list. -Hyperlinks + +If you receive an error message about "missing access rights" when you try to run a Wizard or to load a template, click Default to reset the Path list. +Hyperlinks Sets the security options for opening hyperlinks in a %PRODUCTNAME document. - -Open hyperlinks -Specifies the action that occurs when a hyperlink is clicked in a %PRODUCTNAME document. -Never -Automatically disables all of the hyperlinks in a document. -With security check -User is prompted when opening a hyperlink to a file type that %PRODUCTNAME does not recognize. This is the default setting. -Always -Automatically opens hyperlinks, with no prompting. Use this setting only if you trust the sources for your hyperlinks. -Java + +Open hyperlinks +Specifies the action that occurs when a hyperlink is clicked in a %PRODUCTNAME document. +Never +Automatically disables all of the hyperlinks in a document. +With security check +User is prompted when opening a hyperlink to a file type that %PRODUCTNAME does not recognize. This is the default setting. +Always +Automatically opens hyperlinks, with no prompting. Use this setting only if you trust the sources for your hyperlinks. +Java Specifies the security options for Java technology-based applications and applets (called "Java applications and applets" in the following paragraphs). - -Security checks -Performs a security check on Java technology-based code that is not found in the Java ClassPath, before running such an application or applet. -The disabling of security checks permits Java applications and applets read and write access to all of the directories on your machine. -Only disable security checks under the following conditions: - - -The Java application or applet is known. - - -You are not logged on to your computer with administrator rights. - + +Security checks +Performs a security check on Java technology-based code that is not found in the Java ClassPath, before running such an application or applet. +The disabling of security checks permits Java applications and applets read and write access to all of the directories on your machine. +Only disable security checks under the following conditions: + + +The Java application or applet is known. + + +You are not logged on to your computer with administrator rights. + - -Net access -Specifies the type of network access granted to a Java application or applet. There are three types of network access: unrestricted, restricted to the user's computer, or none. + +Net access +Specifies the type of network access granted to a Java application or applet. There are three types of network access: unrestricted, restricted to the user's computer, or none. Enable - -Plug-ins + +Plug-ins Allows plug-ins written in the Java programming language to execute. - -Applets -Allows applets written in the Java programming language to execute. - - + +Applets +Allows applets written in the Java programming language to execute. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp index bc47520706..13d9ebf513 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -HTML compatibility -/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +HTML compatibility +/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
$[officename] Basic scripts in HTML documents - -HTML compatibility -Defines settings for HTML pages. -
+ +HTML compatibility +Defines settings for HTML pages. + @@ -80,38 +80,38 @@ - -Font sizes -Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags. -Import + +Font sizes +Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags. +Import Defines the settings for importing HTML documents. - -Import unknown HTML tags as fields + +Import unknown HTML tags as fields Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields. For an opening tag, an HTML_ON field will be created with the value of the tag name. For a closing tag, an HTML_OFF will be created. These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export. - -Ignore font settings + +Ignore font settings Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used. - -Export -Defines the settings for exporting HTML documents. To export in HTML format select the HTML Document file type in the Save As dialog. You can find further instructions in the Import and export filters description. + +Export +Defines the settings for exporting HTML documents. To export in HTML format select the HTML Document file type in the Save As dialog. You can find further instructions in the Import and export filters description. To optimize the HTML export, select a browser or HTML standard from the Export box. If "StarOffice Writer" is selected, specific $[officename] Writer instructions are exported. - -$[officename] Basic -Mark this check box to consider the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting in HTML format. -You must activate this option before you create the $[officename] Basic Script, since otherwise it will not be inserted. $[officename] Basic Scripts must be located in the header of the HTML document. Once you have created the macro in the $[officename] Basic IDE, it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header. + +$[officename] Basic +Mark this check box to consider the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting in HTML format. +You must activate this option before you create the $[officename] Basic Script, since otherwise it will not be inserted. $[officename] Basic Scripts must be located in the header of the HTML document. Once you have created the macro in the $[officename] Basic IDE, it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header. If you want the macro to run automatically when the HTML document is opened, choose Tools - Configure - Events. Select the "Document" check box and "Open Document" in the Events list. In Macros select your document, its standard library, module1 and the macro and click Assign. - -Display warning + +Display warning If this field is marked, when exporting in HTML a warning is shown stating that any existing basic macros will be lost. - -Print layout + +Print layout If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document is exported as well. It can be read by $[officename] as well as Netscape Navigator from 4.0 and above and by MS Internet Explorer from 4.0 and above. - -Copy local graphics to Internet -Mark this check box to copy the graphics in a document in the selected Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet. + +Copy local graphics to Internet +Mark this check box to copy the graphics in a document in the selected Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet. The HTML filter supports CSS2 (Cascading Style Sheets Level 2) for printing documents. These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated. - -Character set -Select the appropriate character set for the export. - - + +Character set +Select the appropriate character set for the export. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp index dbdd2a54bd..496af1d2c7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Formatting Aids -/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: spec "Hidden Text in Writer"; dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Formatting Aids +/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: spec "Hidden Text in Writer"; dedr: reviewed + + +
-non-printing characters -displaying; non-printing characters -paragraph marks; displaying -characters; displaying only on screen -optional hyphens -hyphens; displaying custom -custom hyphens; displaying -spaces; displaying -spaces; showing protected spaces -protected spaces; showing -non-breaking spaces -tab stops; displaying -breaks; displaying -hidden text;showing -hidden fields; showing -hidden paragraphs; showing -paragraphs; hidden paragraphs +non-printing characters +displaying; non-printing characters +paragraph marks; displaying +characters; displaying only on screen +optional hyphens +hyphens; displaying custom +custom hyphens; displaying +spaces; displaying +spaces; showing protected spaces +protected spaces; showing +non-breaking spaces +tab stops; displaying +breaks; displaying +hidden text;showing +hidden fields; showing +hidden paragraphs; showing +paragraphs; hidden paragraphs cursor; allowing in protected areas - -Formatting Aids -In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor. -
- -Display of + +Formatting Aids +In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor. + + +Display of Defines which non-printing characters are visible on the screen. Turn on the Non-printing Characters On/Off - + Non-printing Characters On/Off icon on the Main toolbar. All characters that you have marked here will be displayed. - -Paragraph end + +Paragraph end Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information. - -Custom hyphens + +Custom hyphens Specifies whether user-defined delimiters are displayed. These are hidden delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Command+Hyphen(-) Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with user-defined delimiters are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a user-defined delimiter has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated. - -Spaces + +Spaces Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot. - -Non-breaking spaces + +Non-breaking spaces Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Command+Spacebar Ctrl+Spacebar shortcut keys. - -Tabs + +Tabs Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows. - -Breaks + +Breaks Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph. - -Hidden textUFI: new, although name of control is re-used, see spec "Hidden Text in Writer" + +Hidden textUFI: new, although name of control is re-used, see spec "Hidden Text in Writer" Displays text that uses the "hidden" character format when the icon Non-printing Characters On/Off is selected. - -Fields: Hidden text (not for HTML documents)UFI: this is the old "Hidden text" control renamed + +Fields: Hidden text (not for HTML documents)UFI: this is the old "Hidden text" control renamed Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields. - -Fields: Hidden paragraphs (not for HTML documents) + +Fields: Hidden paragraphs (not for HTML documents) If you have inserted text using the Hidden Paragraph field, specifies whether to display the hidden paragraph. This option has the same function as the menu commands View - Hidden Paragraphs -View - Hidden Paragraphs available in open text documents. -Direct cursor (not for HTML documents) +View - Hidden Paragraphs available in open text documents. +Direct cursor (not for HTML documents) Defines all properties of the Direct Cursor. - -Direct cursor + +Direct cursor Activates the Direct cursor. You can also activate this function by clicking the Direct Cursor On/Off -Direct Cursor On/Off icon in a text document. -Insert (not for HTML document) +Direct Cursor On/Off icon in a text document. +Insert (not for HTML document) Defines the insert options for the direct cursor. If you click at any position in your document, a new paragraph can be written or inserted exactly at this position. The properties of this paragraph depend on the selected option. You can select from the following options: - -Paragraph alignment + +Paragraph alignment Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set. - -Left paragraph margin + +Left paragraph margin When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned. - -Tabs + +Tabs When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached. - -Tabs and Spaces -When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached. + +Tabs and Spaces +When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached. All insert options refer only to the current paragraph generated with the Direct Cursor. - -Allow cursor in protected areas -Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes. - - + +Allow cursor in protected areas +Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp index f11dbe96fe..d8adc0601f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Changes -/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Changes +/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Changes -Defines the appearance of changes in the document. -
-To record or show changes, with the text or spreadsheet document open, choose Edit - Changes. - -Text display + +Changes +Defines the appearance of changes in the document. + +To record or show changes, with the text or spreadsheet document open, choose Edit - Changes. + +Text display Defines the settings for displaying recorded changes. Select the type of change with the radio buttons, and the corresponding display attribute and color. The preview field shows the effect of the selected display options. - -Insertions / Attributes + +Insertions / Attributes Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted. - -Deletions / Attributes + +Deletions / Attributes Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted. - -Changed attributes / Attributes + +Changed attributes / Attributes Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline. - -Color -It is possible to select a color to identify each type of recorded change. By entering "By author" from the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename] and modified according to the corresponding author of the changes. -Lines changed + +Color +It is possible to select a color to identify each type of recorded change. By entering "By author" from the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename] and modified according to the corresponding author of the changes. +Lines changed To indicate which lines of the text have been changed, you can define a mark that appears in the left or right page margin. - -Mark + +Mark Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked. You can set the markings so that they always appear on the left or right page margin, or on even or uneven pages. - -Color -Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text. - - - + +Color +Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp index b1d6ca984c..e9688c5d37 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -General -/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: tried to fix #i22472# - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +General +/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: tried to fix #i22472# + + +
-links; updating -updating; links -updating; fields -fields;updating automatically -updating; charts automatically -charts; updating automatically -captions; tables -tables in text; captions -captions; graphics -graphics; captions -captions; frames -frames; captions -captions; OLE objects -OLE objects; captions -tabs; spacing +links; updating +updating; links +updating; fields +fields;updating automatically +updating; charts automatically +charts; updating automatically +captions; tables +tables in text; captions +captions; graphics +graphics; captions +captions; frames +frames; captions +captions; OLE objects +OLE objects; captions +tabs; spacing spacing; tabs - -General -Specifies general settings for text documents. -
- -
-Update + +General +Specifies general settings for text documents. +
+ +
+Update Update links when loading - -Always + +Always Always updates links while loading a document. - -On request + +On request Updates links only on request while loading a document. - -Never -Links are never updated while loading a document. -
+ +Never +Links are never updated while loading a document. + Automatically - -Fields -The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place. The following table lists the fields that are updated without regard to this checkbox. - - - -Condition - - -Automatically updated fields - - - - -Printing the document (also exporting as PDF) - - -Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time, References, Last printed - - - - -Reloading the document - - -Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time - - - - -Saving the document - - -File name, Statistics, Document number, Editing time, Modified - - - - -Editing the text line where the field is in - - -Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time - - - - -Manually changing a variable - - -Conditional text, Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Variables, DDE field - - - - -Switching off "fixed content" - - -Author, Sender, all document information fields - - - - -Changing the page count - - -Page - - -
+ +Fields +The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place. The following table lists the fields that are updated without regard to this checkbox. + + + +Condition + + +Automatically updated fields + + + + +Printing the document (also exporting as PDF) + + +Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time, References, Last printed + + + + +Reloading the document + + +Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time + + + + +Saving the document + + +File name, Statistics, Document number, Editing time, Modified + + + + +Editing the text line where the field is in + + +Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time + + + + +Manually changing a variable + + +Conditional text, Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Variables, DDE field + + + + +Switching off "fixed content" + + +Author, Sender, all document information fields + + + + +Changing the page count + + +Page + + +
- -Charts -Specifies whether to automatically update charts. The Charts option is automatically activated if the Fields box has been marked. -Caption + +Charts +Specifies whether to automatically update charts. The Charts option is automatically activated if the Fields box has been marked. +Caption Defines the settings for captions in tables, graphics, frames and OLE objects that have been inserted into a text document. - -Automatic -Specifies that the objects selected in the Caption dialog (to open click the ... button) are formatted as they are defined there. + +Automatic +Specifies that the objects selected in the Caption dialog (to open click the ... button) are formatted as they are defined there. Object selection - -... -The Object selection button opens the Caption dialog where you can make default settings for inserted objects of different types. + +... +The Object selection button opens the Caption dialog where you can make default settings for inserted objects of different types. Settings - -Measurement unit + +Measurement unit Specifies Unit of Measure for text documents. - -Tab stops -Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops. The horizontal ruler displays the selected spacing. - - + +Tab stops +Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops. The horizontal ruler displays the selected spacing. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp index 9c068c665e..36bcab62c2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Compatibility -text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp - - -UFI: sw.features "New options tabpage Compatibility" -FPE: Added missing embedded section "compatibility" -YJ:checked - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Compatibility +text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp + + +UFI: sw.features "New options tabpage Compatibility" +FPE: Added missing embedded section "compatibility" +YJ:checked + + -Word documents;compatibility -importing documents;compatibility -options;compatibility -compatibility;options -compatibility; MS Word -Microsoft Word;importing Word documents +Word documents;compatibility +importing documents;compatibility +options;compatibility +compatibility;options +compatibility; MS Word +Microsoft Word;importing Word documents layout;importing Word documents - -
+ +
Compatibility - -Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents. -
- -Some of the settings defined here are only valid for the current document and must be defined separately for each document. + +Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents. +
+ +Some of the settings defined here are only valid for the current document and must be defined separately for each document.
-formatting;printer metrics -metrics;document formatting +formatting;printer metrics +metrics;document formatting printer metrics;document formatting -UFI: added bookmarks due to bug #i24216#UFI: this one called also from Impress options -Use printer metrics for document formatting -Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. -If you set this option for the current document and then save the document, for example, in an older binary format, this option will not be saved. If you later open the file from the older format, this option will be set by default. +UFI: added bookmarks due to bug #i24216#UFI: this one called also from Impress options +Use printer metrics for document formatting +Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. +If you set this option for the current document and then save the document, for example, in an older binary format, this option will not be saved. If you later open the file from the older format, this option will be set by default.
- -Add spacing between paragraphs and tables (in current document) -In $[officename] Writer, paragraph spacing is defined differently than in MS Word documents. If you have defined spacing between two paragraphs or tables, spacing is also added in the corresponding MS Word documents. + +Add spacing between paragraphs and tables (in current document) +In $[officename] Writer, paragraph spacing is defined differently than in MS Word documents. If you have defined spacing between two paragraphs or tables, spacing is also added in the corresponding MS Word documents. Specifies whether to add MS Word-compatible spacing between paragraphs and tables in $[officename] Writer text documents - -Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages (in current document) -Specifies whether paragraph spacing at the top of a page is also be effective at the beginning of a page or column if the paragraph is positioned on the first page of the document. The same applies for a page break. + +Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages (in current document) +Specifies whether paragraph spacing at the top of a page is also be effective at the beginning of a page or column if the paragraph is positioned on the first page of the document. The same applies for a page break. If you import an MS Word document, the spaces are automatically added during the conversion. - -Use StarOffice 6.0/7 tab stop formattingUFI: spec "Tab Stop Compatibility" -Specifies how to align text at tab stops beyond the right margin, how to handle decimal tab stops, and how to handle tab stops close to a line break. If this check box is not selected, tab stops are handled in the same way as in other Office applications. -In text documents created by %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION, the new tab stop handling is used by default. In documents created by %PRODUCTNAME prior to version %PRODUCTVERSION, the previously used tab stop handling is applied. -Do not add leading (extra space) between lines of textUFI: spec external_leading -Specifies that additional leading (extra space) between lines of text is not added, even if the font in use contains the additional leading attribute. -In text documents created by %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION, the additional leading is used by default. In documents created by %PRODUCTNAME prior to version %PRODUCTVERSION, the additional leading is not used. -Use StarOffice 6.0/7 line spacingUFI: spec spec-line-spacingUFI: api.feature "Adjusted formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing" -If the option is off, a new process for formatting text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. If the option is on, the previous method of formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. -In %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION and Microsoft Word documents of recent versions, the new process is used. In %PRODUCTNAME prior to version %PRODUCTVERSION, the previous process is used. -Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cellsUFI: spec spec-formatting-table-cells -Specifies that the bottom spacing is added to a paragraph, even when it is the last paragraph in a table cell. -If the option is off, table cells will be formatted as in %PRODUCTNAME prior to version %PRODUCTVERSION. If the option is on, an alternative method of formatting table cells will be applied. The option is on by default for new documents created with %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION and for documents imported from Microsoft Word format. -Use StarOffice 6.0/7 object positioningUFI: spec spec-adjust-object-positioning -Specifies how to calculate the position of floating objects anchored to a character or paragraph with respect to the top and bottom paragraph spacing. -If the option is on, the floating objects are positioned as in %PRODUCTNAME versions prior to %PRODUCTVERSION. If the option is off, the floating objects are positioned using an alternative method that is similar to the method used by Microsoft Word. -The option will be set to off for new documents. For Writer documents created by a version prior to %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION the option is on. -Use StarOffice 6.0/7 text wrapping around objectsUFI: spec obj-pos-without-wrapping -Specifies how the complex iterative process of positioning floating objects that are anchors to a character or paragraph should work. In %PRODUCTNAME prior to version %PRODUCTVERSION, an iterative process was used, while in %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION a straightforward process is used, which is similar to the same process in Microsoft Word. + +Use StarOffice 6.0/7 tab stop formattingUFI: spec "Tab Stop Compatibility" +Specifies how to align text at tab stops beyond the right margin, how to handle decimal tab stops, and how to handle tab stops close to a line break. If this check box is not selected, tab stops are handled in the same way as in other Office applications. +In text documents created by %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION, the new tab stop handling is used by default. In documents created by %PRODUCTNAME prior to version %PRODUCTVERSION, the previously used tab stop handling is applied. +Do not add leading (extra space) between lines of textUFI: spec external_leading +Specifies that additional leading (extra space) between lines of text is not added, even if the font in use contains the additional leading attribute. +In text documents created by %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION, the additional leading is used by default. In documents created by %PRODUCTNAME prior to version %PRODUCTVERSION, the additional leading is not used. +Use StarOffice 6.0/7 line spacingUFI: spec spec-line-spacingUFI: api.feature "Adjusted formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing" +If the option is off, a new process for formatting text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. If the option is on, the previous method of formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. +In %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION and Microsoft Word documents of recent versions, the new process is used. In %PRODUCTNAME prior to version %PRODUCTVERSION, the previous process is used. +Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cellsUFI: spec spec-formatting-table-cells +Specifies that the bottom spacing is added to a paragraph, even when it is the last paragraph in a table cell. +If the option is off, table cells will be formatted as in %PRODUCTNAME prior to version %PRODUCTVERSION. If the option is on, an alternative method of formatting table cells will be applied. The option is on by default for new documents created with %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION and for documents imported from Microsoft Word format. +Use StarOffice 6.0/7 object positioningUFI: spec spec-adjust-object-positioning +Specifies how to calculate the position of floating objects anchored to a character or paragraph with respect to the top and bottom paragraph spacing. +If the option is on, the floating objects are positioned as in %PRODUCTNAME versions prior to %PRODUCTVERSION. If the option is off, the floating objects are positioned using an alternative method that is similar to the method used by Microsoft Word. +The option will be set to off for new documents. For Writer documents created by a version prior to %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION the option is on. +Use StarOffice 6.0/7 text wrapping around objectsUFI: spec obj-pos-without-wrapping +Specifies how the complex iterative process of positioning floating objects that are anchors to a character or paragraph should work. In %PRODUCTNAME prior to version %PRODUCTVERSION, an iterative process was used, while in %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION a straightforward process is used, which is similar to the same process in Microsoft Word. If the option is on, the former iterative process of object positioning is used. If the option is off, the new default straightforward process is used. - -Use as Default -Click to use the settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME. - - + +Use as Default +Click to use the settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp index 3ce9dd6322..9505013fe3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -General -/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: added an index for Metrics, replaced table by spreadsheet - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +General +/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: added an index for Metrics, replaced table by spreadsheet + + +
-measurement units; selecting in sheets -metrics;in sheets -tab stops; setting in sheets -cells; cursor position after input -edit mode; through Enter key -formatting; expanding -expanding; formatting -references; expanding -column headers; highlighting +measurement units; selecting in sheets +metrics;in sheets +tab stops; setting in sheets +cells; cursor position after input +edit mode; through Enter key +formatting; expanding +expanding; formatting +references; expanding +column headers; highlighting row headers; highlighting - -General -Defines general settings for spreadsheet documents. -
- + +General +Defines general settings for spreadsheet documents. + + Metrics - -Measurement unit + +Measurement unit Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets. - -Tab stops -Defines the tab stops distance. - + +Tab stops +Defines the tab stops distance. + Input settings - -Press Enter to move selection + +Press Enter to move selection Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key. - -Press Enter to switch to edit mode + +Press Enter to switch to edit mode Allows you to immediately edit the selected cell after pressing the Enter key. - -Expand formatting + +Expand formatting Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells. I f, for example, the contents of the selected cell have the bold attribute, this bold attribute will also apply to adjacent cells. Cells that already have a special format will not be modified by this function. You can see the range in question by pressing the Command Ctrl + * (multiplication sign on the number pad) shortcut. This format also applies to all new values inserted within this range. The normal default settings apply to cells outside this range. - -Expand references when new columns/rows are inserted -Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction. - -Example: If the range A1:B1 is referenced in a formula and you insert a new column after column B, the reference is expanded to A1:C1. If the range A1:B1 is referenced and a new row is inserted under row 1, the reference is not expanded, since there is only a single cell in the vertical direction. + +Expand references when new columns/rows are inserted +Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction. + +Example: If the range A1:B1 is referenced in a formula and you insert a new column after column B, the reference is expanded to A1:C1. If the range A1:B1 is referenced and a new row is inserted under row 1, the reference is not expanded, since there is only a single cell in the vertical direction. If you insert rows or columns in the middle of a reference area, the reference is always expanded. - -Highlight selection in column/row headings + +Highlight selection in column/row headings Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows. - -Use printer metrics for text formatting + +Use printer metrics for text formatting Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. - -Show overwrite warning when pasting data -Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears. - - + +Show overwrite warning when pasting data +Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp index 944f14987c..31343c1123 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Sort Lists -/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Sort Lists +/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Sort Lists -All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.UFI: fix to #111848# -
+ +Sort Lists +All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.UFI: fix to #111848# + @@ -80,24 +80,24 @@ - -Lists + +Lists Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing. - -Entries + +Entries Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited. - -Copy list from + +Copy list from Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default. - -Copy + +Copy Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column. - -New/Discard + +New/Discard Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box. This button will change from New to Discard, which enables you to delete the new list. - -Add/Modify + +Add/Modify Adds a new list into the Lists box. If you would like to edit this list in the Entries box, this button will change from Add to Modify, which enables you to include the newly modified list. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp index 1ab21501ce..426cb904b4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Print -/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Print +/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-printing; drawings default -drawings; printing defaults -page names; printing in presentations -printing; dates in presentations -dates; printing in presentations -time; inserting when printing presentations -printing; hidden pages of presentations -hidden pages; printing in presentations -printing; without scaling in presentations -scaling; when printing presentations -printing; fitting to pages in presentations -fitting to pages; printing in presentations -printing; tiling pages in presentations +printing; drawings default +drawings; printing defaults +page names; printing in presentations +printing; dates in presentations +dates; printing in presentations +time; inserting when printing presentations +printing; hidden pages of presentations +hidden pages; printing in presentations +printing; without scaling in presentations +scaling; when printing presentations +printing; fitting to pages in presentations +fitting to pages; printing in presentations +printing; tiling pages in presentations tiling; pages for printing in presentations - -Print -Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document. -
- -Contents + +Print +Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document. + + +Contents Specifies which parts of the document are to be printed. - -Drawing + +Drawing Specifies whether the graphical contents of the pages are to be printed. - -Notes + +Notes Specifies whether to include notes when printing. - -Handouts + +Handouts Specifies whether to include handouts when printing. - -Outline -Specifies whether to print an outline. -Quality + +Outline +Specifies whether to print an outline. +Quality See also . - -Default + +Default Specifies that you want to print in original colors. - -Grayscale + +Grayscale Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale. - -Black & white -Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white. -Print + +Black & white +Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white. +Print Defines additional elements to be printed on the page margin. You cannot select some elements if you marked Brochure in the Page options area. - -Page name + +Page name Specifies whether to print the page name of a document. - -Date + +Date Specifies whether to print the current date. - -Time + +Time Specifies wither to print the current time. - -Hidden pages -Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation. -Page options + +Hidden pages +Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation. +Page options Define additional options for printing the pages. - -Default + +Default Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing. - -Fit to page -
-Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer. + +Fit to page +
+Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer.
- -Tile pages + +Tile pages Specifies that pages are to be printed in tile format. Select a page format that is larger than the paper format. - -Brochure + +Brochure Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format. You can also decide if you want to print the front, the back or both sides of the brochure. - + embedvar href="text/swriter/guide/print_brochure.xhp#print_brochure" - -Front + +Front Select Front to print the front of a brochure. - -Back + +Back Select Back to print the back of a brochure. - -Paper tray from printer settings -Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup. - - + +Paper tray from printer settings +Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp index a80ba94c4c..be3a7efbff 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -General -/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30842# - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +General +/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30842# + + +
-presentations; starting with Wizard -objects; always moveable -distorting; in drawings -measurement units; selecting in presentations -units; selecting in presentations -spacing; tabs in presentations -tabs; spacing in presentations -starting; always with the current slide +presentations; starting with Wizard +objects; always moveable +distorting; in drawings +measurement units; selecting in presentations +units; selecting in presentations +spacing; tabs in presentations +tabs; spacing in presentations +starting; always with the current slide text objects; in presentations and drawings - -General -Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents. -
- + +General +Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents. +
+ Text objects - -Allow quick editing + +Allow quick editing Specifies whether to immediately switch to the text editing mode when clicking a text object. - + In a presentation or drawing document, you can also activate the text editing mode through the Allow Quick Editing icon in the Option bar. - -Only text area selectable + +Only text area selectable Specifies whether to select a text frame by clicking the text. - + In the area of the text frame that is not filled with text, an object behind the text frame can be selected. - + -In a presentation or drawing document, you can also activate this mode through the Select Text Area Only icon in the Option bar. +In a presentation or drawing document, you can also activate this mode through the Select Text Area Only icon in the Option bar. New document (only in presentations) - -Start with Wizard -Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation. + +Start with Wizard +Specifies whether to activate the Wizard when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation. Settings - -Use background cache + +Use background cache Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master page. This speeds up the display. Unmark the Use background cache option if you want to display changing contents on the master page. - -Copy when moving + +Copy when moving Specifies whether to automatically create a copy when you move an object while holding down the Control Ctrl key. The same will apply for rotating and resizing the object. The original object will remain in its current position and size. - -Objects always moveable + +Objects always moveable Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object. - -Do not distort objects in curve (only in drawings) + +Do not distort objects in curve (only in drawings) Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object. - -Unit of measurement + +Unit of measurement Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations. - -Tab stops -Defines the spacing between tab stops. + +Tab stops +Defines the spacing between tab stops. Start presentation (only in presentations) - -Always with current page -Specifies that you always want a presentation to start with the current slide. Unmark Always with current page to always start a presentation with the first page. + +Always with current page +Specifies that you always want a presentation to start with the current slide. Unmark Always with current page to always start a presentation with the first page. Scale (only in drawings) - -Drawing scale -Determines the drawing scale on the rulers. -Compatibility (document specific settings) + +Drawing scale +Determines the drawing scale on the rulers. +Compatibility (document specific settings) The settings in this area are valid for the current document only. - -Add spacing between paragraphs in the current document -Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint. -Microsoft PowerPoint adds the bottom spacing of a paragraph to the top spacing of the next paragraph to calculate the total spacing between both paragraphs. $[officename] Impress utilizes only the larger of the two spacings. - - + +Add spacing between paragraphs in the current document +Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint. +Microsoft PowerPoint adds the bottom spacing of a paragraph to the top spacing of the next paragraph to calculate the total spacing between both paragraphs. $[officename] Impress utilizes only the larger of the two spacings. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp index e3dc236d5d..2949d872a1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Drawing Options -/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Drawing Options +/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -%PRODUCTNAME Draw Options + +%PRODUCTNAME Draw Options Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default. - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp index 1423abd3bd..5bfd789eab 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Formula -/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Formula +/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -%PRODUCTNAME Math Options + +%PRODUCTNAME Math Options Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math. - You can also call the dialog by clicking the Options button in the Print dialog. The settings you define in the Tools - Options dialog will be permanent settings, whereas the settings in the Print dialog are only valid for the current document. - -Options - - - - + You can also call the dialog by clicking the Options button in the Print dialog. The settings you define in the Tools - Options dialog will be permanent settings, whereas the settings in the Print dialog are only valid for the current document. + +Options + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp index 5ef46e5d21..7413c60d04 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Settings -/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Settings +/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -printing; title rows in $[officename] Math -title rows; printing in $[officename] Math -printing; formulas -formula texts; printing in $[officename] Math -frames; printing in $[officename] Math -printing; in original size in $[officename] Math -original size; printing in $[officename] Math -printing; fitting to page in $[officename] Math -format filling; printing in $[officename] -printing; scaling in $[officename] Math +printing; title rows in $[officename] Math +title rows; printing in $[officename] Math +printing; formulas +formula texts; printing in $[officename] Math +frames; printing in $[officename] Math +printing; in original size in $[officename] Math +original size; printing in $[officename] Math +printing; fitting to page in $[officename] Math +format filling; printing in $[officename] +printing; scaling in $[officename] Math scaling; printing in $[officename] Math - -Settings + +Settings Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents. - - + + Print options - -Title row + +Title row Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout. - -Formula text + +Formula text Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout. - -Border -Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.Title row and Formula text are only set down by a frame if the corresponding check box is active. + +Border +Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout.Title row and Formula text are only set down by a frame if the corresponding check box is active. Print format - -Original size + +Original size Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size. It is possible that with large formulas a part of the command text is cut off. - -Fit to size + +Fit to size Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout. The real size will be determined by the used paper format. - -Scaling -Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor. Type the desired enlargement factor directly in the Scaling spin box, or set the value using the arrow buttons. + +Scaling +Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor. Type the desired enlargement factor directly in the Scaling spin box, or set the value using the arrow buttons. Other options - -Ignore ~ and ' at the and of the line -Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line. In earlier versions of $[officename], adding such characters at the end of a line prevented the right edge of the formula from being cut off during printing. - - + +Ignore ~ and ' at the and of the line +Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line. In earlier versions of $[officename], adding such characters at the end of a line prevented the right edge of the formula from being cut off during printing. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp index 7ba2cc7d18..e4a49fafb4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Complex Text Layout -/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Complex Text Layout +/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: reviewed + + +
CTL; options - -Complex Text Layout -Defines the options for documents with complex text layouts. -
- - -Sequence checking + +Complex Text Layout +Defines the options for documents with complex text layouts. + + + +Sequence checking In languages such as Thai, rules specify that certain characters are not allowed next to other characters. If Sequence Input Checking (SIC) is enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will not allow a character next to another if this is forbidden by a rule. - -Use sequence checking -Enables sequence input checking for languages as Thai. -Restricted -Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations.UFI: see #103780# -Cursor control + +Use sequence checking +Enables sequence input checking for languages as Thai. +Restricted +Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations.UFI: see #103780# +Cursor control Select the type of text cursor movement and text selection for mixed text (right-to-left mixed with left-to-right text direction). - -Logical + +Logical The text cursor moves to the text end with Arrow Right and to the text begin with Arrow Left. - -Visual -The text cursor moves to the right with Arrow Right and to the left with Arrow Left. + +Visual +The text cursor moves to the right with Arrow Right and to the left with Arrow Left. General options - -Numerals (in text only) -Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected. - - -Arabic: All numbers are shown in Arabic. This is the default. - - -Hindi: All numbers are shown in Hindi. - - -System: All numbers are shown according to the locale settings defined by your system locale. - - -This setting is not saved in the document but in the %PRODUCTNAME configuration. - - + +Numerals (in text only) +Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected. + + +Arabic: All numbers are shown in Arabic. This is the default. + + +Hindi: All numbers are shown in Hindi. + + +System: All numbers are shown according to the locale settings defined by your system locale. + + +This setting is not saved in the document but in the %PRODUCTNAME configuration. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp index d52a717ec6..40c0a9efb2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Data sources options -/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Data sources options + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Data sources options +/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Data sources options Defines the general settings for the data sources in $[officename]. - - - - - - - + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp index 524f527037..38bf787b8b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Registered Databases -text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp - - -UFI: Registered Databases tab page - - - - -
-Databases -Add, modify, or remove entries to the list of registered databases. You must register a database within %PRODUCTNAME in order to see it in the View - Data sources window. -
+ ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Registered Databases +text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp + + +UFI: Registered Databases tab page + + + + +
+Databases +Add, modify, or remove entries to the list of registered databases. You must register a database within %PRODUCTNAME in order to see it in the View - Data sources window. +
- -Registered Databases + +Registered Databases Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit. - -New + +New Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry. - -Delete + +Delete Removes the selected entry from the list. - -Edit -Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry. - - + +Edit +Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp index 6731af12f0..f2edd0984f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Edit Menu -/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Edit Menu -
-Choose Edit - Duplicate - -Shift+F3 -
+ ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Edit Menu +/text/simpress/00/00000402.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Edit Menu +
+Choose Edit - Duplicate + +Shift+F3 +
Choose Edit - Cross-fading (%PRODUCTNAME Draw only) - + Choose Edit - Delete Slide - + Choose Edit - Layer - Delete - + Choose Edit - Fields - + Click the Edit Glue Points icon on the Option Bar -UFI: this is called from text\simpress\02\10030200.xhp to fix bug #i23785# - - +UFI: this is called from text\simpress\02\10030200.xhp to fix bug #i23785# + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp index 5199b51dc5..ba4fc8718a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -View Menu -/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -View Menu + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +View Menu +/text/simpress/00/00000403.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +View Menu Choose View - Ruler - + Choose View - Toolbars - Option Bar - -Choose View - Toolbars - Presentation - -On the Object -Bar, click -
- - - + +Choose View - Toolbars - Presentation + +On the Object +Bar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Presentation Box On/Off - - -
- -
+ + + +Presentation Box On/Off + + + + + Choose View - Color/Grayscale - + Choose View - Preview Mode - -
-Choose View - Normal - - -
-
-Choose View - Outline - - -
-
-Choose View - Slide Sorter - - -
-
-Choose View - Notes Page - - -
-
-Choose View - Handout Page - -On the vertical scrollbar, click - - - + +
+Choose View - Normal + + +
+
+Choose View - Outline + + +
+
+Choose View - Slide Sorter + + +
+
+Choose View - Notes Page + + +
+
+Choose View - Handout Page + +On the vertical scrollbar, click +
+ + Icon - - - -Handout view - - -
- -
-Choose Slide Show - Slide Show - -F5 -On the Main toolbar, click -
- - - + + + +Handout view + + +
+ +
+Choose Slide Show - Slide Show + +F5 +On the Main toolbar, click +
+ + + Icon - - - -Slide Show - - -
- -
+ + + +Slide Show + + + + + Choose View - Preview - -
-Choose View - Normal - - -
-
-Choose View - Master - - -
+ +
+Choose View - Normal + + +
+
+Choose View - Master + + +
Choose View - Master Layouts - + Choose View - Master - Master Elements - + Choose View - Master - Notes Master - + Choose View - Master - Handout Master - -
-Choose View - Header and Footer - -Choose Insert - Page number - -Choose Insert - Date and time - -
+ +
+Choose View - Header and Footer + +Choose Insert - Page number + +Choose Insert - Date and time + +
Choose View - Normal View - + Choose View - Master - Slide Master - + Choose View - Slide Sorter - + Choose View - Notes Page - + Choose View - Handout Page - +
- + Choose View - Layer (only in Drawings) - -
- - + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp index dfc52e3dad..784f59d41b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Export -/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Export +/text/simpress/01/01170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -Macromedia Flash;exporting to +Macromedia Flash;exporting to exporting;to Macromedia Flash format - -Export + +Export Exports your presentation or drawing and sets the export options. - - -The following file formats present you with additional export options after you click Save: 4 and 5 were joined to one para by error -HTML Document, JPEG, SVM/WMF/PICT/MET, BMP, GIF, EPS, PNG, PBM, PPM, PGM. -If you select "Macromedia Flash (SWF)" as file format, the current Impress or Draw document will be exported to the Macromedia Flash format. -If you choose "HTML Document" as your file format, the HTML Export Wizard appears. This Wizard guides you through the export process and even includes the option to save the graphics in your presentation in GIF or JPG format. - -Export dialog -Information on Import and Export Filters - - + + +The following file formats present you with additional export options after you click Save: 4 and 5 were joined to one para by error +HTML Document, JPEG, SVM/WMF/PICT/MET, BMP, GIF, EPS, PNG, PBM, PPM, PGM. +If you select "Macromedia Flash (SWF)" as file format, the current Impress or Draw document will be exported to the Macromedia Flash format. +If you choose "HTML Document" as your file format, the HTML Export Wizard appears. This Wizard guides you through the export process and even includes the option to save the graphics in your presentation in GIF or JPG format. + +Export dialog +Information on Import and Export Filters + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp index fa6c7bc51d..9184f0b385 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Option Bar -/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Option Bar +/text/simpress/01/03050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
Option bar - -Option Bar -Displays or hides the Option bar. -
-The Option bar contains common commands for editing $[officename] Impress and $[officename] Draw documents. - - - + +Option Bar +Displays or hides the Option bar. + +The Option bar contains common commands for editing $[officename] Impress and $[officename] Draw documents. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp index 952590cb8b..336677f455 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Rulers -/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Rulers +/text/simpress/01/03060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Ruler -Displays or hides rulers at the top and at the left edge of the workspace. -
- -You can use rulers to position objects in the workspace, to set paragraph indents or to drag guides onto the page. - - + +Ruler +Displays or hides rulers at the top and at the left edge of the workspace. + + +You can use rulers to position objects in the workspace, to set paragraph indents or to drag guides onto the page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp index c444a62071..ac9ea9964a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Normal View -/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Normal View +/text/simpress/01/03080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
normal view; for presentations - -Normal -Switches to normal view where you can create and edit your slides.. -
- - - + +Normal +Switches to normal view where you can create and edit your slides.. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp index 6f6379d1f7..3f86140193 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Outline -/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Outline +/text/simpress/01/03090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-outline view +outline view editing;slide titles - -Outline -Switches to outline view where you can reorder slides and edit slide titles and headings. -
- -The Text Object bar contains the following icons for slide titles:Promote, Demote, Move Up and Move Down. If you want to reorder slide titles with the keyboard, ensure that the cursor is at the beginning of a title and press Tab to move the title one level lower in the hierarchy. To move the title up one level, press Shift - Tab. -The upper outline level corresponds to slide titles, and the lower levels correspond to the headings on a slides. - - + +Outline +Switches to outline view where you can reorder slides and edit slide titles and headings. + + +The Text Object bar contains the following icons for slide titles:Promote, Demote, Move Up and Move Down. If you want to reorder slide titles with the keyboard, ensure that the cursor is at the beginning of a title and press Tab to move the title one level lower in the hierarchy. To move the title up one level, press Shift - Tab. +The upper outline level corresponds to slide titles, and the lower levels correspond to the headings on a slides. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp index 3608bc5541..28771b98ed 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Master -/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Master +/text/simpress/01/03150000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
master views - -Master -Switches to one of several master views, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides in your show. -
- - - - - - - + +Master +Switches to one of several master views, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides in your show. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp index 4c8ee8a336..cf567a8201 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Drawing -/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: renamed due to graphics.feature "Header&Footer support for Impress"; dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Drawing +/text/simpress/01/03150100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: renamed due to graphics.feature "Header&Footer support for Impress"; dedr: reviewed + + +
-normal view; backgrounds -backgrounds; normal view -views;slide master view +normal view; backgrounds +backgrounds; normal view +views;slide master view slide master view - -Slide Master -Switches to slide master view, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides in your show. -
- - - + +Slide Master +Switches to slide master view, where you can add elements that you want to appear on all of the slides in your show. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp index 109f94555d..d00e887e7f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Notes Master -/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Notes Master +/text/simpress/01/03150300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-notes;default formatting -backgrounds;notes +notes;default formatting +backgrounds;notes speaker notes;defaults - -Notes Master -Displays the notes master, where you can set the default formatting for notes. -
- - - + +Notes Master +Displays the notes master, where you can set the default formatting for notes. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp index b2ad387ccf..44cb0ccead 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Master Layouts -text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp - - -UFI: new menu Master Layouts -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Master Layouts +text/simpress/01/03151000.xhp + + +UFI: new menu Master Layouts +dedr: reviewed + + -headers and footers;master layouts +headers and footers;master layouts master layouts with headers and footers - -
-Master Layouts -Add header, footer, date, and slide number placeholders to the master slide. -
- - - - - - + +
+Master Layouts +Add header, footer, date, and slide number placeholders to the master slide. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp index c49dae2b1a..fbc4a4ff69 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Color/Grayscale -/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: changes due to View Menu spec doc - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Color/Grayscale +/text/simpress/01/03180000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: changes due to View Menu spec doc + + +
-display qualities of presentations -quality; display of presentations -colors; displaying presentations +display qualities of presentations +quality; display of presentations +colors; displaying presentations black and white display - -Color/Grayscale -Shows slides in color, grayscale, or black and white. -
- + +Color/Grayscale +Shows slides in color, grayscale, or black and white. + +
- -Color -Shows slides in color. -
+ +Color +Shows slides in color. +
- -Grayscale -Shows slides in shades of black and white. -
+ +Grayscale +Shows slides in shades of black and white. +
- -Black and White -Shows slides in pure black or white without shading. -
- - + +Black and White +Shows slides in pure black or white without shading. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp index 7f2070467b..8d44b5d95b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Snap Point/Line -/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Snap Point/Line +/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -guides; new -snap lines; inserting +guides; new +snap lines; inserting magnetic lines in presentations - -Snap Point/Line + +Snap Point/Line Inserts a snap point or snap line that you can use to quickly align objects on a slide. - Snap points and snap lines do not appear when a slide is printed or used in a presentation. You do not need to turn on the grid to use snap lines. - -You can drag a snap line from the rulers and drop them on the page. To delete a snap line, drag it back to the ruler. -Draw or move an object near a snap point or snap line to snap it in place. -To edit the properties of a snap point or snap line, right-click it and choose Edit - Snap Line or Edit Snap Point. + Snap points and snap lines do not appear when a slide is printed or used in a presentation. You do not need to turn on the grid to use snap lines. + +You can drag a snap line from the rulers and drop them on the page. To delete a snap line, drag it back to the ruler. +Draw or move an object near a snap point or snap line to snap it in place. +To edit the properties of a snap point or snap line, right-click it and choose Edit - Snap Line or Edit Snap Point. To set the snap range, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid. -To show or hide a snap points or lines, choose Snap Lines - Snap Lines Visible.where is it? -To move snap lines and snap points to the foreground or background, choose Snap Lines - Snap Lines to Front.where is it? -Position -Sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left corner of the page. +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid. +To show or hide a snap points or lines, choose Snap Lines - Snap Lines Visible.where is it? +To move snap lines and snap points to the foreground or background, choose Snap Lines - Snap Lines to Front.where is it? +Position +Sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left corner of the page. You can also drag a snap point or snap line to a new position. - -X axis + +X axis Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the left edge of the page. - -Y axis -Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the top edge of the page. -Type + +Y axis +Enter the amount of space you want between the snap point or line and the top edge of the page. +Type Specified the type of snap object you want to insert. - -Point + +Point Inserts a snap point (dashed cross). - -Vertical + +Vertical Inserts a vertical snap line. - -Horizontal -Inserts a horizontal snap line. - - + +Horizontal +Inserts a horizontal snap line. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp index e9b528ea35..8845ab3150 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Date (fixed) -/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Date (fixed) +/text/simpress/01/04990100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-dates; fixed +dates; fixed fields; dates (fixed) - -Date (fixed) -Inserts the current date into your slide as a fixed field. The date is not automatically updated. -
- + +Date (fixed) +Inserts the current date into your slide as a fixed field. The date is not automatically updated. + + To edit an inserted field in your slide, double-click the field, place the cursor in front of the first character in the field and choose Edit - Fields. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp index 51e42ce516..f5bd97282e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Date (variable) -/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Date (variable) +/text/simpress/01/04990200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-dates; variable +dates; variable fields; dates (variable) - -Date (variable) -Inserts the current date into your slide as a variable field. The date is automatically updated when you reload the file. -
- - - - + +Date (variable) +Inserts the current date into your slide as a variable field. The date is automatically updated when you reload the file. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp index cac83d890a..72428172c8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Time (fixed) -/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Time (fixed) +/text/simpress/01/04990300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-times; fixed +times; fixed fields; times (fixed) - -Time (fixed) -Inserts the current time into your slide as a fixed field. The time is not automatically updated. -
- - - - + +Time (fixed) +Inserts the current time into your slide as a fixed field. The time is not automatically updated. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp index 1c1d620595..e4a648918f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Time (variable) -/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Time (variable) +/text/simpress/01/04990400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-times;variable +times;variable fields;times (variable) - -Time (variable) -Inserts the current time into your slide as a variable field. The time is automatically updated when you reload the file. -
- - - - + +Time (variable) +Inserts the current time into your slide as a variable field. The time is automatically updated when you reload the file. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp index 3758759069..fad41112c1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Slide Design -/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Slide Design +/text/simpress/01/05120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Slide Design + +Slide Design Displays the Slide Design dialog, where you can select a layout scheme for the current slide. Any objects in the slide design are inserted behind objects in the current slide. - - -Slide design + + +Slide design Displays the slide designs you can apply to your slide. Select a design and click OK to apply it to the current slide. - -Exchange background page + +Exchange background page Applies the background of the selected slide design to all of the slides in your document. - -Delete unused background slides + +Delete unused background slides Deletes unreferenced background slides and presentation layouts from your document. - -Load -Displays the Load Slide Design dialog, where you can select additional slide designs. - - + +Load +Displays the Load Slide Design dialog, where you can select additional slide designs. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp index fc8cf14307..675238d9cc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Modify Slide Layout -/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Modify Slide Layout +/text/simpress/01/05130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -modifying; slide layouts -slide layouts -slides; entering slide names +modifying; slide layouts +slide layouts +slides; entering slide names AutoLayout command - -Modify Slide Layout + +Modify Slide Layout Changes the layout of the selected slide. This command may shift text elements, but does not affect graphic elements. - - + + - -Name + +Name Enter a name for the selected slide. - -AutoLayout -Click the layout you want to apply to the slide. The contents of the selected layout are described at the base of the AutoLayout pane. + +AutoLayout +Click the layout you want to apply to the slide. The contents of the selected layout are described at the base of the AutoLayout pane. Show - -Background + +Background Applies the background fill of the selected layout to all of the slides in your document that use the layout. - -Objects on background -Adds the drawing elements from the selected layout to all of the slides in the current document that use the layout. - - + +Objects on background +Adds the drawing elements from the selected layout to all of the slides in the current document that use the layout. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp index fa103da759..9272130d13 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -In Front of Object -/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +In Front of Object +/text/simpress/01/05250500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-objects; in front of object command +objects; in front of object command in front of object command - -In Front of Object -Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object in front of an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change. -
- -Select the object(s) that you want to move to the foreground. Right-click and choose Arrange – In Front of Object, and then click an object in your slide. - - + +In Front of Object +Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object in front of an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change. + + +Select the object(s) that you want to move to the foreground. Right-click and choose Arrange – In Front of Object, and then click an object in your slide. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp index 9bb642eba9..8f5fed784e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Behind Object -/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Behind Object +/text/simpress/01/05250600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-objects; behind object command +objects; behind object command behind object command - -Behind Object -Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object behind an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change. -
- -Select the object(s) that you want to move to the foreground. Right-click and choose Arrange – Behind Object, and then click an object in your your slide. + +Behind Object +Changes the stacking order by moving the selected object behind an object that you specify. The screen location of the selected object does not change. + + +Select the object(s) that you want to move to the foreground. Right-click and choose Arrange – Behind Object, and then click an object in your your slide. Arranging objects affects the stacking order of all of the objects in your document. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp index 57dee49ee1..ccae886537 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Reverse -/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Reverse +/text/simpress/01/05250700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-reversing objects +reversing objects objects; reversing - -Reverse -Reverses the stacking order of the selected objects. -
- -You can select this function only if at least two drawing elements are selected together. - - + +Reverse +Reverses the stacking order of the selected objects. + + +You can select this function only if at least two drawing elements are selected together. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp index 257f76d3f6..05040e0c6b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Convert to Curve -/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Convert to Curve +/text/simpress/01/13050100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Convert to Curve -Converts the selected object to a Bézier curve. -
- - - + +Convert to Curve +Converts the selected object to a Bézier curve. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp index 3e826e322a..31458ce35a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Convert to Polygon -/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Convert to Polygon +/text/simpress/01/13050200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Convert to Polygon -Converts the selected object to a polygon (a closed object bounded by straight lines). The appearance of the object does not change. If you want, you can right-click and choose Edit Points to view the changes. -
- - -Convert to Polygon -The following options are required to convert a bitmap image to a polygon. The converted image is actually a collection of smaller polygons filled with color. -Settings + +Convert to Polygon +Converts the selected object to a polygon (a closed object bounded by straight lines). The appearance of the object does not change. If you want, you can right-click and choose Edit Points to view the changes. + + + +Convert to Polygon +The following options are required to convert a bitmap image to a polygon. The converted image is actually a collection of smaller polygons filled with color. +Settings Set the conversion options for the image. - -Number of colors: + +Number of colors: Enter the number of colors to be displayed in the converted image. $[officename] generates a polygon for each occurrence of a color in the image. - -Point reduction + +Point reduction Removes color polygons that are smaller than the pixel value you enter. - -Fill holes + +Fill holes Fills the color gaps caused by applying a point reduction. - -Tile size -Enter the size of the rectangle for the background fill. -Source picture: -Preview of the original image. -Vectorized image: -Preview of the converted image. Click Preview to generate the vectorized image. -Progress + +Tile size +Enter the size of the rectangle for the background fill. +Source picture: +Preview of the original image. +Vectorized image: +Preview of the converted image. Click Preview to generate the vectorized image. +Progress Displays the conversion progress. - -Preview -Previews the converted image without applying the changes. - - + +Preview +Previews the converted image without applying the changes. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp index c179dba0b8..83d18140dd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Break -/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Break +/text/simpress/01/13170000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-objects; breaking connections +objects; breaking connections breaking object connections - -Break -Breaks apart lines joined with the Connect command. -
-You cannot apply a fill to closed shapes that have been broken apart with this command. - - - + +Break +Breaks apart lines joined with the Connect command. + +You cannot apply a fill to closed shapes that have been broken apart with this command. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp index 3b607ffd10..6dc3fa35ff 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Rehearse Timings -/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Rehearse Timings +/text/simpress/02/04070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Rehearse Timings -Starts a slide show with a timer in the lower left corner. -
-
- - - + +Rehearse Timings +Starts a slide show with a timer in the lower left corner. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Rehearse Timings - - -
- -
- - -Slide Show Settings - - + + + +Rehearse Timings + + + + + + + +Slide Show Settings + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp index 910d8e50b5..cfc3bdb1e8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp @@ -1,217 +1,217 @@ - - - - - - -Curves -/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -floating toolbars;curves -curves; floating toolbar -polygons; inserting -inserting; polygons -freeform lines; drawing -drawing; freeform lines - - -
- -Curves -Long-click to open the Curves floating toolbar, where you can add lines and shapes to the current slide. -
-If you hold the Shift key down, the movement of the mouse is limited to multiples of 45 degrees. If you hold down the -Options -Alt key, the new point will not be connected to the last point. This allows you to create objects that consist of curves that are not connected together. If you draw a smaller object while holding down the -Options -Alt key into a larger object that you have not closed yet, the smaller object is subtracted from the larger one, thus appearing as a hole in the larger one. -Closed shapes automatically receive the fill that is displayed in the Area Style/Filling box on Object bar. - - -Curve, Filled -Draws a filled closed shape that is based on a Bézier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to close the shape. - - - - -Icon - - - -Curve, Filled - - -
- - -Polygon, filled -Draws a closed shape consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click. - - - - -Icon - - - -Polygon, Filled - - -
- - -Polygon (45°), Filled -Draws a closed shape consisting of straight line segments that are constrained by angles of 45 degrees. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To draw a polygon that is not constrained to a 45 degree angle, hold down Shift when you click. - - - - -Icon - - - -Polygon (45°), Filled - - -
- - -Freeform Line, Filled -Draws a freeform line where you drag in the slide. When you release, $[officename] creates a closed shape by drawing a straight line segment from the endpoint to the starting point of the line. The shape within the lines will be filled with the current area color. - - - - -Icon - - - -Freeform Line, Filled - - -
- -Curve - - - - - -Icon - - - -Curve - - -
- -Polygon - - - - - -Icon - - - -Polygon - - -
- - -Polygon (45°) -Draws a line composed of a series of straight line segments, that are constrained by angles of 45 degree. Drag to draw a line segment, click to define the endpoint of the line segment, and then drag to draw a new line segment. Double-click to finish drawing the line. To create a closed shape, hold down -Options -Alt and double-click. - - - - -Icon - - - -Polygon (45°) - - -
- -Freeform Curve - - - - - -Icon - - - -Freeform Curve - - -
- - - + + + + + + +Curves +/text/simpress/02/10080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +floating toolbars;curves +curves; floating toolbar +polygons; inserting +inserting; polygons +freeform lines; drawing +drawing; freeform lines + + +
+ +Curves +Long-click to open the Curves floating toolbar, where you can add lines and shapes to the current slide. +
+If you hold the Shift key down, the movement of the mouse is limited to multiples of 45 degrees. If you hold down the +Options +Alt key, the new point will not be connected to the last point. This allows you to create objects that consist of curves that are not connected together. If you draw a smaller object while holding down the +Options +Alt key into a larger object that you have not closed yet, the smaller object is subtracted from the larger one, thus appearing as a hole in the larger one. +Closed shapes automatically receive the fill that is displayed in the Area Style/Filling box on Object bar. + + +Curve, Filled +Draws a filled closed shape that is based on a Bézier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to close the shape. + + + + +Icon + + + +Curve, Filled + + +
+ + +Polygon, filled +Draws a closed shape consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click. + + + + +Icon + + + +Polygon, Filled + + +
+ + +Polygon (45°), Filled +Draws a closed shape consisting of straight line segments that are constrained by angles of 45 degrees. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To draw a polygon that is not constrained to a 45 degree angle, hold down Shift when you click. + + + + +Icon + + + +Polygon (45°), Filled + + +
+ + +Freeform Line, Filled +Draws a freeform line where you drag in the slide. When you release, $[officename] creates a closed shape by drawing a straight line segment from the endpoint to the starting point of the line. The shape within the lines will be filled with the current area color. + + + + +Icon + + + +Freeform Line, Filled + + +
+ +Curve + + + + + +Icon + + + +Curve + + +
+ +Polygon + + + + + +Icon + + + +Polygon + + +
+ + +Polygon (45°) +Draws a line composed of a series of straight line segments, that are constrained by angles of 45 degree. Drag to draw a line segment, click to define the endpoint of the line segment, and then drag to draw a new line segment. Double-click to finish drawing the line. To create a closed shape, hold down +Options +Alt and double-click. + + + + +Icon + + + +Polygon (45°) + + +
+ +Freeform Curve + + + + + +Icon + + + +Freeform Curve + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp index 66cb075bb0..0e40589db5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -3D Objects -/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +3D Objects +/text/simpress/02/10090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -floating toolbars;3D objects -3D objects; inserting -inserting;3D objects -cubes -spheres -cylinders -cones -pyramids -torus -shells -half-spheres +floating toolbars;3D objects +3D objects; inserting +inserting;3D objects +cubes +spheres +cylinders +cones +pyramids +torus +shells +half-spheres drawing;3D objects - - + +
- -3D Objects -Long-click to open the 3D Objects floating toolbar, where you can add 3D shapes to the current slide. -
-
- - - + +3D Objects +Long-click to open the 3D Objects floating toolbar, where you can add 3D shapes to the current slide. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -3D Objects - - -
- -
+ + + +3D Objects + + + + + To rotate a 3D object around any of its three axes, click to select the object, and then click again to display its rotation handles. Drag a handle in the direction you want to rotate the object. - -Cube -Draws a filled cube where you drag in the slide. To draw a 3D rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Cube +Draws a filled cube where you drag in the slide. To draw a 3D rectangle, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Cube - - -
+ + + +Cube + + + - -Sphere -Draws a filled sphere where you drag in the slide. To draw a spheroid, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Sphere +Draws a filled sphere where you drag in the slide. To draw a spheroid, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Sphere - - -
+ + + +Sphere + + + - -Cylinder -Draws a cylinder that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a cylinder that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Cylinder +Draws a cylinder that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a cylinder that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Cylinder - - -
+ + + +Cylinder + + + - -Cone -Draws a cone that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a cone that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Cone +Draws a cone that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a cone that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Cone - - -
+ + + +Cone + + + - -Pyramid -Draws a pyramid with a square base where you drag in the slide. To draw a pyramid with a rectangular base, hold down Shift while you drag. To define a different polygon for the base of the pyramid, open the 3D Effects dialog and click the Geometry tab. In the Segments area, enter the number of sides for the polygon in the box labeled Horizontal, and then click the green checkmark. - - - + +Pyramid +Draws a pyramid with a square base where you drag in the slide. To draw a pyramid with a rectangular base, hold down Shift while you drag. To define a different polygon for the base of the pyramid, open the 3D Effects dialog and click the Geometry tab. In the Segments area, enter the number of sides for the polygon in the box labeled Horizontal, and then click the green checkmark. +
+ + Icon - - - -Pyramid - - -
+ + + +Pyramid + + + - -Torus -Draws a ring-shaped object that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a torus that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Torus +Draws a ring-shaped object that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a torus that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Torus - - -
+ + + +Torus + + + - -Shell -Draws a bowl-shaped object that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a shell that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Shell +Draws a bowl-shaped object that is based on a circle where you drag in the slide. To draw a shell that is based on an oval, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Shell - - -
+ + + +Shell + + + - -Half-Sphere -Draws one half of a sphere where you drag in the slide. To draw a one half of a spheroid, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Half-Sphere +Draws one half of a sphere where you drag in the slide. To draw a one half of a spheroid, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Half-sphere - - -
- - - - + + + +Half-sphere + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp index c17f928a24..c18bdcbe5a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Connectors -/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Connectors +/text/simpress/02/10100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Connectors - - - + +Connectors +
+ + Icon - - - -Connector - - -
- -Long-click to open the Connectors floating toolbar, where you can add connectors to objects in the current slide. A connector is a line that joins objects, and remains attached when the objects are moved. If you copy an object with a connector, the connector is also copied. -There are four types of connector lines: - - -Standard (90-degree angle bends) - - -Line (two bends) - - -Straight - - -Curved - - -
-
-
-When you click a connector and move your mouse pointer over a filled object, or the edge of an unfilled object, connection points appear. A connection point is a fixed point where you can attach a connector line. If you want, you can add a custom connection point, called a glue point, to an object. -To draw a connector line, click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. You can also drag to an empty part of you document and click. The unattached end of the connector is locked in place, until you drag the end to a different location. To detach a connector, drag either end of the connector line to a different location. + + + +Connector + + + + +Long-click to open the Connectors floating toolbar, where you can add connectors to objects in the current slide. A connector is a line that joins objects, and remains attached when the objects are moved. If you copy an object with a connector, the connector is also copied. +There are four types of connector lines: + + +Standard (90-degree angle bends) + + +Line (two bends) + + +Straight + + +Curved + + + +
+
+When you click a connector and move your mouse pointer over a filled object, or the edge of an unfilled object, connection points appear. A connection point is a fixed point where you can attach a connector line. If you want, you can add a custom connection point, called a glue point, to an object. +To draw a connector line, click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. You can also drag to an empty part of you document and click. The unattached end of the connector is locked in place, until you drag the end to a different location. To detach a connector, drag either end of the connector line to a different location. To change the connector type, select the connector, and choose Format – Connector. Use the Object bar to modify the line properties of the connector. - -Connector -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Connector +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Connector - - -
+ + + +Connector + + + - -Connector Starts with Arrow -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and an arrow at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and an arrow at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Connector Starts with Arrow - - -
+ + + +Connector Starts with Arrow + + + - -Connector Ends with Arrow -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and an arrow at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and an arrow at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Connector Ends with Arrow - - -
+ + + +Connector Ends with Arrow + + + - -Connector with Arrows -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and arrows at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Connector with Arrows +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and arrows at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Connector with Arrows - - -
+ + + +Connector with Arrows + + + - -Connector Starts with Circle -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and a circle at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and a circle at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Connector Starts with Circle - - -
+ + + +Connector Starts with Circle + + + - -Connector Ends with Circle -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and a circle at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and a circle at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Connector Ends with Circle - - -
+ + + +Connector Ends with Circle + + + - -Connector with Circles -Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and circles at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Connector with Circles +Draws a connector with one or more 90-degree angle bends and circles at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Connector with Circles - - -
+ + + +Connector with Circles + + + - -Line Connector -Draws a connector that bends near a connection point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. - - - + +Line Connector +Draws a connector that bends near a connection point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line Connector - - -
+ + + +Line Connector + + + - -Line Connector Starts with Arrow -Draws a connector that starts with an arrow and bends near a connection point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. - - - + +Line Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a connector that starts with an arrow and bends near a connection point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line Connector Starts with Arrow - - -
+ + + +Line Connector Starts with Arrow + + + - -Line Connector Ends with Arrow -Draws a connector that ends with an arrow and bends near a connection point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. - - - + +Line Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a connector that ends with an arrow and bends near a connection point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line Connector Ends with Arrow - - -
+ + + +Line Connector Ends with Arrow + + + - -Line Connector with Arrows -Draws a connector that bends near a connection point and has arrows at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. - - - + +Line Connector with Arrows +Draws a connector that bends near a connection point and has arrows at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line Connector with Arrows - - -
+ + + +Line Connector with Arrows + + + - -Line Connector Starts with Circle -Draws a connector that starts with a circle and bends near a connection point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. - - - + +Line Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a connector that starts with a circle and bends near a connection point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line Connector Starts with Circle - - -
+ + + +Line Connector Starts with Circle + + + - -Line Connector Ends with Circle -Draws a connector that ends with a circle and bends near a connection point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. - - - + +Line Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a connector that ends with a circle and bends near a connection point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line Connector Ends with Circle - - -
+ + + +Line Connector Ends with Circle + + + - -Line Connector with Circles -Draws a connector that bends near a connection point and has circles at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. - - - + +Line Connector with Circles +Draws a connector that bends near a connection point and has circles at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. To adjust the length of the line segment between a bend point and a connection point, click the connector and drag the bend point. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line Connector with Circles - - -
+ + + +Line Connector with Circles + + + - -Straight Connector -Draws a straight line connector. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Straight Connector +Draws a straight line connector. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Straight Connector - - -
+ + + +Straight Connector + + + - -Straight Connector Starts with Arrow -Draws a straight line connector with an arrow at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Straight Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a straight line connector with an arrow at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Straight Connector Starts with Arrow - - -
+ + + +Straight Connector Starts with Arrow + + + - -Straight Connector Ends with Arrow -Draws a straight line connector with an arrow at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Straight Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a straight line connector with an arrow at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Straight Connector Ends with Arrow - - -
+ + + +Straight Connector Ends with Arrow + + + - -Straight Connector with Arrows -Draws a straight line connector with arrows at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Straight Connector with Arrows +Draws a straight line connector with arrows at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Straight Connector with Arrows - - -
+ + + +Straight Connector with Arrows + + + - -Straight Connector Starts with Circle -Draws a straight line connector with a circle at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Straight Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a straight line connector with a circle at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Straight Connector Starts with Circle - - -
+ + + +Straight Connector Starts with Circle + + + - -Straight Connector Ends with Circle -Draws a straight line connector with a circle at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Straight Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a straight line connector with a circle at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Straight Connector Ends with Circle - - -
+ + + +Straight Connector Ends with Circle + + + - -Straight Connector with Circles -Draws a straight line connector with circles at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Straight Connector with Circles +Draws a straight line connector with circles at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Straight Connector with Circles - - -
+ + + +Straight Connector with Circles + + + - -Curved Connector -Draws a curved line connector. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Curved Connector +Draws a curved line connector. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Curved Connector - - -
+ + + +Curved Connector + + + - -Curved Connector Starts with Arrow -Draws a curved line connector with an arrow at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Curved Connector Starts with Arrow +Draws a curved line connector with an arrow at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Curved Connector Starts with Arrow - - -
+ + + +Curved Connector Starts with Arrow + + + - -Curved Connector Ends with Arrow -Draws a curved line connector with an arrow at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Curved Connector Ends with Arrow +Draws a curved line connector with an arrow at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Curved Connector Ends with Arrow - - -
+ + + +Curved Connector Ends with Arrow + + + - -Curved Connector with Arrows -Draws a curved line connector with arrows at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Curved Connector with Arrows +Draws a curved line connector with arrows at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Curved Connector with Arrows - - -
+ + + +Curved Connector with Arrows + + + - -Curved Connector Starts with Circle -Draws a curved line connector with a circle at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Curved Connector Starts with Circle +Draws a curved line connector with a circle at the starting point. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Curved Connector Starts with Circle - - -
+ + + +Curved Connector Starts with Circle + + + - -Curved Connector Ends with Circle -Draws a curved line connector with a circle at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Curved Connector Ends with Circle +Draws a curved line connector with a circle at the endpoint. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Curved Connector Ends with Circle - - -
+ + + +Curved Connector Ends with Circle + + + - -Curved Connector with Circles -Draws a curved line connector with circles at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. - - - + +Curved Connector with Circles +Draws a curved line connector with circles at both ends. Click a connection point on an object, drag to a connection point on another object, and then release. +
+ + Icon - - - -Curved Connector with Circles - - -
- - - + + + +Curved Connector with Circles + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp index fc499e60b7..3acf80c9c3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Lines and Arrows -/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Lines and Arrows +/text/simpress/02/10120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-lines;inserting -arrows; inserting -inserting; lines -inserting; arrows +lines;inserting +arrows; inserting +inserting; lines +inserting; arrows dimension lines; drawing - -Lines and Arrows -Long-click to open the Lines and Arrows floating toolbar, where you can add straight lines, lines with arrows, and dimension lines to the current slide. If you want, you can add an arrow after you draw a line by choosing Format - Line, and then selecting an arrow style from the Style box. -
- -
- - - + +Lines and Arrows +Long-click to open the Lines and Arrows floating toolbar, where you can add straight lines, lines with arrows, and dimension lines to the current slide. If you want, you can add an arrow after you draw a line by choosing Format - Line, and then selecting an arrow style from the Style box. + + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Lines and Arrows - - -
- -
-Line -Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + + + +Lines and Arrows + + +
+ + +Line +Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + + + Icon - - - -Line - - -
+ + + +Line + + + - -Line Ends with Arrow -Draws a straight line that ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Line Ends with Arrow +Draws a straight line that ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line Ends with Arrow - - -
+ + + +Line Ends with Arrow + + + - -Line with Arrow/Circle -Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow and ends with a circle where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Line with Arrow/Circle +Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow and ends with a circle where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line with Arrow/Circle - - -
+ + + +Line with Arrow/Circle + + + - -Line with Arrow/Square -Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow and ends with a square where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Line with Arrow/Square +Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow and ends with a square where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line with Arrow/Square - - -
+ + + +Line with Arrow/Square + + + - -Line (45°) -Draws a straight line that is constrained by angles of 45 degrees. - - - + +Line (45°) +Draws a straight line that is constrained by angles of 45 degrees. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line (45°) - - -
+ + + +Line (45°) + + + - -Line Starts with Arrow -Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Line Starts with Arrow +Draws a straight line that starts with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line Starts with Arrow - - -
+ + + +Line Starts with Arrow + + + - -Line with Circle/Arrow -Draws a straight line that starts with a circle and ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Line with Circle/Arrow +Draws a straight line that starts with a circle and ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line with Circle/Arrow - - -
+ + + +Line with Circle/Arrow + + + - -Line with Square/Arrow -Draws a straight line that starts with a square and ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Line with Square/Arrow +Draws a straight line that starts with a square and ends with an arrow where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line with Square/Arrow - - -
+ + + +Line with Square/Arrow + + + - -Dimension Line -Draws a line that displays the dimension length bounded by guides. Dimension lines automatically calculate and display linear dimensions. To draw a dimension line, open the Lines and Arrows floating toolbar and click the Dimension Line icon. Move your pointer to where you want the line to start and drag to draw the dimension line. Release when finished. + +Dimension Line +Draws a line that displays the dimension length bounded by guides. Dimension lines automatically calculate and display linear dimensions. To draw a dimension line, open the Lines and Arrows floating toolbar and click the Dimension Line icon. Move your pointer to where you want the line to start and drag to draw the dimension line. Release when finished. If you want the dimension line to be the same length as the side of a nearby object, hold down the Command -Ctrl key while dragging. To constrain the dimension line to 45 degrees, hold down the Shift key while dragging. -If you convert a group of dimension lines to create an object, the dimension text will no longer be automatically updated.in german it is Umwandeln = Convert to polygon - this is another action than Combine (?!?) -A Dimension Line is always inserted on the layer called Dimension Lines. If you set that layer to invisible, you will not see any Dimension Line in your drawing. -For more information, see Format - Dimensions. -
- - - +Ctrl key while dragging. To constrain the dimension line to 45 degrees, hold down the Shift key while dragging. +If you convert a group of dimension lines to create an object, the dimension text will no longer be automatically updated.in german it is Umwandeln = Convert to polygon - this is another action than Combine (?!?) +A Dimension Line is always inserted on the layer called Dimension Lines. If you set that layer to invisible, you will not see any Dimension Line in your drawing. +For more information, see Format - Dimensions. +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Dimension Line - - -
- + + + +Dimension Line + + + +
- -Line with Arrows -Draws a straight line that starts with arrows at both ends where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Line with Arrows +Draws a straight line that starts with arrows at both ends where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Line with Arrows - - -
- - - + + + +Line with Arrows + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp index 4266543f10..e3e2d0a67a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -3D Effects -/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-3D Effects -Specifies the properties of a 3D object or converts a 2D object to 3D.UFI: this will be not visible by default. But users can configure it if they find out how. -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Format - 3D Effects - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +3D Effects +/text/simpress/02/10130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+3D Effects +Specifies the properties of a 3D object or converts a 2D object to 3D.UFI: this will be not visible by default. But users can configure it if they find out how. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Format - 3D Effects + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp index bd67165423..c9f85d0049 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Black & White View -/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Black & White View +/text/simpress/02/11110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-views; black and white +views; black and white black and white view - -Black & White View -Shows text in black and white or in color.but only in outline mode!so the following does not really fit into this context:To change the color of a heading, open the stylist, right-click a style, and then choose Modify. Click the Font Effects tab, and select a color in the Font color box. -
-
- - - + +Black & White View +Shows text in black and white or in color.but only in outline mode!so the following does not really fit into this context:To change the color of a heading, open the stylist, right-click a style, and then choose Modify. Click the Font Effects tab, and select a color in the Font color box. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Black & White View - - -
- -
- - + + + +Black & White View + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp index 4d78fe50ce..09db5756d2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Rotation Mode after Clicking Object -/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Rotation Mode after Clicking Object +/text/simpress/02/13020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
rotation mode - -Rotation Mode after Clicking Object -Changes the mouse-click behavior, so that rotation handles appear after you click an object, and then click it again. Drag a handle to rotate the object in the direction you want. -
-
- - - + +Rotation Mode after Clicking Object +Changes the mouse-click behavior, so that rotation handles appear after you click an object, and then click it again. Drag a handle to rotate the object in the direction you want. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Rotation Mode after Clicking Object - - -
- -
- - + + + +Rotation Mode after Clicking Object + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp index 269856ad42..e534092c87 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Allow Effects -/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Allow Effects +/text/simpress/02/13030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-allowing; effects +allowing; effects effects; preview - -Allow Effects + +Allow Effects Plays a preview of an animation effect that is assigned to an object, when you click the object in the slide. To select an object for editing, hold down the Options -Alt key when you click. -
-
- - - +Alt key when you click. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Allow Effects - - -
- -
- - - - - + + + +Allow Effects + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp index eb44f09a02..6d46c47430 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Allow Interaction -/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Allow Interaction +/text/simpress/02/13040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-interactions; preview +interactions; preview allowing; interaction - -Allow Interaction + +Allow Interaction Runs a preview of the interaction that is assigned to an object, when you click the object in the slide. To select an object for editing, hold down the Options -Alt key when you click. -
-
- - - +Alt key when you click. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Allow Interaction - - -
- -
- - + + + +Allow Interaction + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp index 6737b9d412..901d66801b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Shortcut Keys for $[officename] Impress -/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30842# - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Shortcut Keys for $[officename] Impress +/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30842# + + +
-shortcut keys; presentations +shortcut keys; presentations presentations; shortcut keys - + Shortcut Keys for $[officename] Impress - -The following is a list of shortcut keys for $[officename] Impress. -You can also use the general shortcut keys in $[officename]. -
-Function Keys for $[officename] Impress - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -F2 - - -Edit text. - - - - -F3 - - -Edit group. - - - - + +The following is a list of shortcut keys for $[officename] Impress. +You can also use the general shortcut keys in $[officename]. + +Function Keys for $[officename] Impress +
+ + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +F2 + + +Edit text. + + + + +F3 + + +Edit group. + + + + Command -Ctrl+F3 - - -Exit group. - - - - -Shift+F3 - - -Duplicate - - - - -F4 - - -Position and Size - - - - -F5 - - -View Slide Show. - - - - +Ctrl+F3 + + +Exit group. + + + + +Shift+F3 + + +Duplicate + + + + +F4 + + +Position and Size + + + + +F5 + + +View Slide Show. + + + + Command -Ctrl+F5 - - -Navigator - - - - -F7 - - -Spellcheck - - - - +Ctrl+F5 + + +Navigator + + + + +F7 + + +Spellcheck + + + + Command -Ctrl+F7 - - -Thesaurus - - - - -F8 - - -Edit Points. - - - - +Ctrl+F7 + + +Thesaurus + + + + +F8 + + +Edit Points. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+F8 - - -Fit text to frame. - - - - -F11 - - -Styles and Formatting - - - - -F12 - - -Outline View - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+F8 + + +Fit text to frame. + + + + +F11 + + +Styles and Formatting + + + + +F12 + + +Outline View + + + + Command -Ctrl+F12 - - -Normal View - - -
- -Shortcut Keys in Slide Shows - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Esc or Backspace or (-) Minus key on the numerical keypad - - -End presentation. - - - - -Spacebar - - -Next animated object or next slide. - - - - -Enter or Arrow Down or N - - -Go to next slide. - - - - -[number] - Enter - - -Type a number of a slide and press Enter to go to the slide. - - - - -Arrow Left or Arrow Up or P - - -Go to the previous slide. - - - - -Arrow Right - - -Go to the next slide. - - - - -Home - - -Jump to first slide in the slide show. - - - - -End - - -Jump to the last slide in the slide show. - - - - +Ctrl+F12 + + +Normal View + + +
+ +Shortcut Keys in Slide Shows + + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Esc or Backspace or (-) Minus key on the numerical keypad + + +End presentation. + + + + +Spacebar + + +Next animated object or next slide. + + + + +Enter or Arrow Down or N + + +Go to next slide. + + + + +[number] - Enter + + +Type a number of a slide and press Enter to go to the slide. + + + + +Arrow Left or Arrow Up or P + + +Go to the previous slide. + + + + +Arrow Right + + +Go to the next slide. + + + + +Home + + +Jump to first slide in the slide show. + + + + +End + + +Jump to the last slide in the slide show. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Page Up - - -Go to the previous slide. - - - - +Ctrl+Page Up + + +Go to the previous slide. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Page Down - - -Go to the next slide. - - - - -B - - -Toggle screen to black. - - - - -W - - -Toggle screen to white. - - -
- -Shortcut Keys in the Normal View - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Plus(+) Key - - -Zoom in. - - - - -Minus(-) Key - - -Zoom out. - - - - -Times(×) Key (number pad) - - -Fit page in window. - - - - -Divide(÷) Key (number pad) - - -Zoom in on current selection. - - - - +Ctrl+Page Down + + +Go to the next slide. + + + + +B + + +Toggle screen to black. + + + + +W + + +Toggle screen to white. + + +
+ +Shortcut Keys in the Normal View + + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Plus(+) Key + + +Zoom in. + + + + +Minus(-) Key + + +Zoom out. + + + + +Times(×) Key (number pad) + + +Fit page in window. + + + + +Divide(÷) Key (number pad) + + +Zoom in on current selection. + + + + Shift+Command -Ctrl+G - - -Group selected objects. - - - - +Ctrl+G + + +Group selected objects. + + + + Shift+Command+Option -Ctrl+Alt+A - - -Ungroup selected group. - - - - +Ctrl+Alt+A + + +Ungroup selected group. + + + + Command -Ctrl + click - - -Enter a group, so that you can edit the individual objects of the group. Click outside the group to return to the normal view. - - - - +Ctrl + click + + +Enter a group, so that you can edit the individual objects of the group. Click outside the group to return to the normal view. + + + + Shift+Command -Ctrl+K - - -Combine selected objects. - - - - +Ctrl+K + + +Combine selected objects. + + + + Shift+Command -Ctrl+K - - -Split selected object. This combination only works on an object that was created by combining two or more objects. - - - - +Ctrl+K + + +Split selected object. This combination only works on an object that was created by combining two or more objects. + + + + Command -Ctrl+ Plus key - - -Bring to Front. - - - - +Ctrl+ Plus key + + +Bring to Front. + + + + Shift+Command -Ctrl+Plus key - - -Bring Forward. - - - - +Ctrl+Plus key + + +Bring Forward. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Minus key - - -Send Backward. - - - - +Ctrl+Minus key + + +Send Backward. + + + + Shift+Command -Ctrl+Minus key - - -Send to Back. - - -
- -Shortcut Keys for $[officename] Impress - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Arrow key - - -Moves the selected object or the page view in the direction of the arrow. - - - - +Ctrl+Minus key + + +Send to Back. + + +
+ +Shortcut Keys for $[officename] Impress + + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Arrow key + + +Moves the selected object or the page view in the direction of the arrow. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Arrow Key - - -Move around in the page view. - - - - -Shift + drag - - -Constrains the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. - - - - +Ctrl+Arrow Key + + +Move around in the page view. + + + + +Shift + drag + + +Constrains the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. + + + + Command -Ctrl + drag (with Copy when moving option active) - - +Ctrl + drag (with Copy when moving option active) + + Hold down Command -Ctrl and drag an object to create a copy of the object. - - - - +Ctrl and drag an object to create a copy of the object. + + + + Option -Alt Key - - +Alt Key + + Hold down Option -Alt to draw or resize objects by dragging from the center of the object outward. - - - - +Alt to draw or resize objects by dragging from the center of the object outward. + + + + Option -Alt key+click - - -Select the object behind the currently selected object. - - - - +Alt key+click + + +Select the object behind the currently selected object. + + + + Option -Alt+Shift+click - - -Select the object in front of the currently selected object. - - - - -Shift+click - - -Select adjacent items or a text passage. Click at the start of a selection, move to the end of the selection, and then hold down Shift while you click. - - - - -Shift+drag (when resizing) - - -Hold down Shift while dragging to resize an object to maintain the proportions of the object. - - - - -Tab key - - -Select objects in the order in which they were created. - - - - -Shift+Tab - - -Select objects in the reverse order in which they were created. - - - - -Escape - - -Exit current mode. - - - - -Enter - - -Activate a placeholder object in a new presentation (only if the frame is selected). - - - - +Alt+Shift+click + + +Select the object in front of the currently selected object. + + + + +Shift+click + + +Select adjacent items or a text passage. Click at the start of a selection, move to the end of the selection, and then hold down Shift while you click. + + + + +Shift+drag (when resizing) + + +Hold down Shift while dragging to resize an object to maintain the proportions of the object. + + + + +Tab key + + +Select objects in the order in which they were created. + + + + +Shift+Tab + + +Select objects in the reverse order in which they were created. + + + + +Escape + + +Exit current mode. + + + + +Enter + + +Activate a placeholder object in a new presentation (only if the frame is selected). + + + + Command -Ctrl+Enter - - -Moves to the next text object on the slide. -If there are no text objects on the slide, or if you reached the last text object, a new slide is inserted after the current slide. The new slide uses the same layout as the current slide. - - -
- -
-Navigating with the Keyboard in Slide Sorter - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Escape - - -Moves the focus to the first slide. - - - - -Arrow key - - -Moves the focus to the next slide. - - - - -Spacebar - - -Makes the slide with the focus the current slide. - - -
- -
- - - - - +Ctrl+Enter + + +Moves to the next text object on the slide. +If there are no text objects on the slide, or if you reached the last text object, a new slide is inserted after the current slide. The new slide uses the same layout as the current slide. + + + + +
+Navigating with the Keyboard in Slide Sorter + + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Escape + + +Moves the focus to the first slide. + + + + +Arrow key + + +Moves the focus to the next slide. + + + + +Spacebar + + +Makes the slide with the focus the current slide. + + +
+ +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp index 85a8702d39..97870554ba 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Converting 2D Objects to Curves, Polygons, and 3D Objects -/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshots - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Converting 2D Objects to Curves, Polygons, and 3D Objects +/text/simpress/guide/3d_create.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted screenshots + + -3D rotation objects; generating -3D objects; generating -converting; to curves, polygons, 3D +3D rotation objects; generating +3D objects; generating +converting; to curves, polygons, 3D extrusion objects - + Converting 2D Objects to Curves, Polygons, and 3D Objects - -You can convert two dimensional (2D) objects to create different shapes. $[officename] can convert 2D objects to the following object types: - - -Curved object based on Bézier curves - - -Polygon object consisting of straight line segments - - -3D object with shading and a light source - - -3D rotation object with shading and a light source - - -To convert an object to a curved shape: - - -Select a 2D object on the slide. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Curve. - - -In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object and choose Convert - To Curve. - - -To modify the shape of the object, click the Edit Points icon on the Object Bar, and drag the handles of the object (Figure 4). You can also drag the control points of a handle to modify the shape of the curve (Figures 5 and 6). -To convert a 2D object to a polygon: - - -Select a 2D object on the slide.no slide in Draw, sorry - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Polygon - - - -In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object and choose Convert - To Polygon. - - - -To modify the shape of the object, click the Edit Points icon on the Object Bar, and drag the handles of the object. -To convert a 2D object to a 3D object: - - -Select a 2D object on the slide. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To 3D - - - - - -In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object and choose Convert - To 3D - - - -To modify the shape of the 3D object, click the Edit Points icon on the Object Bar, and drag the handles of the object. To modify the properties of the 3D object, choose Format - 3D Effects. -To convert a 2D object to a 3D rotational object: -A 3D rotation object is created by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis. - - -Select a 2D object on the slide. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To 3D Rotation Object. - - - - -In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object and choose Convert - To 3D Rotation Object - - - -To modify the shape of the 3D object, click the Edit Points icon on the Object Bar, and drag the handles of the object. To modify the properties of the 3D object, choose Format - 3D Effects. -You can rotate the 2D object before converting it to create a more complex shape. -
- - - - -
- - + +You can convert two dimensional (2D) objects to create different shapes. $[officename] can convert 2D objects to the following object types: + + +Curved object based on Bézier curves + + +Polygon object consisting of straight line segments + + +3D object with shading and a light source + + +3D rotation object with shading and a light source + + +To convert an object to a curved shape: + + +Select a 2D object on the slide. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Curve. + + +In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object and choose Convert - To Curve. + + +To modify the shape of the object, click the Edit Points icon on the Object Bar, and drag the handles of the object (Figure 4). You can also drag the control points of a handle to modify the shape of the curve (Figures 5 and 6). +To convert a 2D object to a polygon: + + +Select a 2D object on the slide.no slide in Draw, sorry + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Polygon + + + +In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object and choose Convert - To Polygon. + + + +To modify the shape of the object, click the Edit Points icon on the Object Bar, and drag the handles of the object. +To convert a 2D object to a 3D object: + + +Select a 2D object on the slide. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To 3D + + + + + +In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object and choose Convert - To 3D + + + +To modify the shape of the 3D object, click the Edit Points icon on the Object Bar, and drag the handles of the object. To modify the properties of the 3D object, choose Format - 3D Effects. +To convert a 2D object to a 3D rotational object: +A 3D rotation object is created by rotating the selected object around its vertical axis. + + +Select a 2D object on the slide. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To 3D Rotation Object. + + + + +In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object and choose Convert - To 3D Rotation Object + + + +To modify the shape of the 3D object, click the Edit Points icon on the Object Bar, and drag the handles of the object. To modify the properties of the 3D object, choose Format - 3D Effects. +You can rotate the 2D object before converting it to create a more complex shape. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp index 2e4a0203a5..4d9cf5e9e6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Creating Animated GIF Images -/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Cleaned. Needs rework (see last para comments) - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Creating Animated GIF Images +/text/simpress/guide/animated_gif_create.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Cleaned. Needs rework (see last para comments) + + -cross-fading; creating cross-fades -GIF images; animating +cross-fading; creating cross-fades +GIF images; animating animated GIFs - + Creating Animated GIF Images - -You can animate drawing objects, text objects, and graphic objects (images) on your slides to make your presentation more interesting. $[officename] Impress provides you with a simple animation editor where you can create animation images (frames) by assembling objects from your slide. The animation effect is achieved by rotating through the static frames that you create. -If you create a bitmap animation (animated GIF), you can assign a delay time to each frame, and specify the number of times the animation is played. -To create an animated GIF: - - -Select an object or group of objects that you want to include in your animation, and choose Slide Show - Animation. - - -Do one of the following: + +You can animate drawing objects, text objects, and graphic objects (images) on your slides to make your presentation more interesting. $[officename] Impress provides you with a simple animation editor where you can create animation images (frames) by assembling objects from your slide. The animation effect is achieved by rotating through the static frames that you create. +If you create a bitmap animation (animated GIF), you can assign a delay time to each frame, and specify the number of times the animation is played. +To create an animated GIF: + + +Select an object or group of objects that you want to include in your animation, and choose Slide Show - Animation. + + +Do one of the following: Click the Apply Object button Note Icon - to add a single object or a group of objects to the current animation frame. + to add a single object or a group of objects to the current animation frame. Click the Apply Objects Individually button Tip Icon - to create a separate animation frame for each of the selected objects. -You can add objects to the animation sequence as long as the Animation dialog is opened. To delete an image, click the Delete Current Image button. - - -In the Animation Group area, select Bitmap object. -Use the animation timeline to specify the duration for displaying a frame and the number of times an animation sequence is presented (looping). + to create a separate animation frame for each of the selected objects. +You can add objects to the animation sequence as long as the Animation dialog is opened. To delete an image, click the Delete Current Image button. + + +In the Animation Group area, select Bitmap object. +Use the animation timeline to specify the duration for displaying a frame and the number of times an animation sequence is presented (looping). Animation Timeline Dialog - - - -Enter a frame number in the Image Number box (left box). - - -Enter the number of seconds you want the frame to display in the Duration box (middle box). - - -Repeat the last two steps for each frame in your animation. -You can preview your animation by using the controls to the left of the Image Number box. - - -Select the number of times you want the animation sequence to repeat in the Loop count box (right box). - - -Select an alignment option for the objects in the Alignment box. - - -Click Create. - - -You cannot modify an animated object after you create it. sorry, but I can Instead, you can select the object, choose Slide Show - Animation, make your modifications, and then save it as a different animation.how on earth do I save it as a different animation? -
- -
- - + + + +Enter a frame number in the Image Number box (left box). + + +Enter the number of seconds you want the frame to display in the Duration box (middle box). + + +Repeat the last two steps for each frame in your animation. +You can preview your animation by using the controls to the left of the Image Number box. + + +Select the number of times you want the animation sequence to repeat in the Loop count box (right box). + + +Select an alignment option for the objects in the Alignment box. + + +Click Create. + + +You cannot modify an animated object after you create it. sorry, but I can Instead, you can select the object, choose Slide Show - Animation, make your modifications, and then save it as a different animation.how on earth do I save it as a different animation? +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp index 4c91064839..ed3c9eba2f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Adding a Header or a Footer to All Slides -/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Slightly cleaned - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Adding a Header or a Footer to All Slides +/text/simpress/guide/footer.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Slightly cleaned + + -master pages;footers -footers;master pages -slides;footers on master pages -master pages; headers -headers in slides +master pages;footers +footers;master pages +slides;footers on master pages +master pages; headers +headers in slides slides; headers on master pages - + Adding a Header or a Footer to All Slides - -You can add a text object to the master page for your slides to act as a header or a footer. - - -Choose View - Normal, and then click the Master View button in the lower left corner of the workspace: + +You can add a text object to the master page for your slides to act as a header or a footer. + + +Choose View - Normal, and then click the Master View button in the lower left corner of the workspace: Master View button bar - - - + + + On the Main toolbar, open the Text floating toolbar, and select a text tool Icon - . - - -Drag in the master page to draw a text object, and then type or paste your text. - - -Format the text the way you want. You can also change the fill properties of the text object by choosing Format - Area. - - -Drag the edge of the text object to the top or the bottom of the slide. - - -Click the Slide View button in the lower left corner of the workspace when you are finished. - - -You can also add fields, such as the date or page number, to a header or footer by choosing Insert - Fields. -You can hide the header or footer on the current slide by choosing Format - Modify Layout, and clearing the Objects on background check box. -
- - - -Insert Fields -
- - + . + + +Drag in the master page to draw a text object, and then type or paste your text. + + +Format the text the way you want. You can also change the fill properties of the text object by choosing Format - Area. + + +Drag the edge of the text object to the top or the bottom of the slide. + + +Click the Slide View button in the lower left corner of the workspace when you are finished. + + +You can also add fields, such as the date or page number, to a header or footer by choosing Insert - Fields. +You can hide the header or footer on the current slide by choosing Format - Modify Layout, and clearing the Objects on background check box. +
+ + + +Insert Fields +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp index 02cc1920a4..480b1e0293 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Saving a Presentation in HTML Format -/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Saving a Presentation in HTML Format +/text/simpress/guide/html_export.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -exporting; to HTML -presentations; exporting to HTML +exporting; to HTML +presentations; exporting to HTML HTML; exporting from presentations - + Saving a Presentation in HTML Format - - - -Open the presentation that you want to save in HTML format. - - -Choose File - Export. - - -Set the File type to HTML Document ($[officename] Impress) (.html;.htm). - - -Enter a File name, and then click Save. - - -Follow the instructions in the HTML Export Wizard. - - - - - -HTML Export Wizard -File - Export - - + + + +Open the presentation that you want to save in HTML format. + + +Choose File - Export. + + +Set the File type to HTML Document ($[officename] Impress) (.html;.htm). + + +Enter a File name, and then click Save. + + +Follow the instructions in the HTML Export Wizard. + + + + + +HTML Export Wizard +File - Export + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp index 16acb5d0c0..ee740ed865 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Moving Objects to a Different Layer -/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Moving Objects to a Different Layer +/text/simpress/guide/layer_move.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -objects; moving in layers -layers; moving objects +objects; moving in layers +layers; moving objects moving; between layers - + Moving Objects to a Different Layer - -Drawings in %PRODUCTNAME Draw support layers. - - -Click and hold the object until its edges flash. - - -Drag the object to the name tab of the layer you want to move it to. - - -Release the object. - - - - - - - - + +Drawings in %PRODUCTNAME Draw support layers. + + +Click and hold the object until its edges flash. + + +Drag the object to the name tab of the layer you want to move it to. + + +Release the object. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp index 8dcbe9ccc2..62f96df84d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Instructions for Using $[officename] Impress -/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Instructions for Using $[officename] Impress +/text/simpress/guide/main.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -$[officename] Impress; instructions +$[officename] Impress; instructions instructions; $[officename] Impress - + Instructions for Using $[officename] Impress - - -Viewing and Printing a Presentation - - - - - - - - -Animated Objects and 3D Objects - - - - - -Working with Layers - - - - - - - -Importing and Exporting - - - - - - - - -Miscellaneous - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + +Viewing and Printing a Presentation + + + + + + + + +Animated Objects and 3D Objects + + + + + +Working with Layers + + + + + + + +Importing and Exporting + + + + + + + + +Miscellaneous + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp index feed2fdc3d..a4438abd18 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Applying a Slide Design to a Master Slide -/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Applying a Slide Design to a Master Slide +/text/simpress/guide/masterpage.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -slide designs for master pages -backgrounds; slides -master pages; defining +slide designs for master pages +backgrounds; slides +master pages; defining slides; backgrounds - + Applying a Slide Design to a Master Slide - -A master slide determines the text formatting style for the title and outline and the background design for individual slides, or for all of the slides in a presentation. You can change the appearance of a master slide by applying a new slide design. -To apply a new slide design: - - -Select Format - Styles - Slide Design. - - -Click Load. - - -Under Categories, select a slide design category. - - -Under Templates, select a template with the design that you want to apply. To preview the template, click More, and then select the Preview box. - - -Click OK. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -To apply the slide design to all of the slides in your presentation, select the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. - - -To apply the slide design to the current slide only, clear the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. - - - - -Stylist - - + +A master slide determines the text formatting style for the title and outline and the background design for individual slides, or for all of the slides in a presentation. You can change the appearance of a master slide by applying a new slide design. +To apply a new slide design: + + +Select Format - Styles - Slide Design. + + +Click Load. + + +Under Categories, select a slide design category. + + +Under Templates, select a template with the design that you want to apply. To preview the template, click More, and then select the Preview box. + + +Click OK. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +To apply the slide design to all of the slides in your presentation, select the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. + + +To apply the slide design to the current slide only, clear the Exchange background page check box, and then click OK. + + + + +Stylist + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp index 0835894f85..944b6611ba 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Moving Objects -/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30469# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Moving Objects +/text/simpress/guide/move_object.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30469# + + -objects;moving in slides +objects;moving in slides moving;objects in slides - + Moving Objects - -You can move selected objects in your slide by dragging them, using the arrow keys, or by copying the objects and pasting them in another location. - - -The arrow keys let you move objects more precisely than with the mouse. - - - - - - + +You can move selected objects in your slide by dragging them, using the arrow keys, or by copying the objects and pasting them in another location. + + +The arrow keys let you move objects more precisely than with the mouse. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp index c9c9f2b868..7621ffd587 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Selecting Underlying Objects -/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Selecting Underlying Objects +/text/simpress/guide/select_object.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -objects; selecting -selecting; hidden objects +objects; selecting +selecting; hidden objects covered objects - + Selecting Underlying Objects - - - + + + To select an object that is covered by another object, hold down Option -Alt and click the object. - - +Alt and click the object. + + To select an object that is covered by several objects, hold down Option Alt and click through the objects until you reach the underlying object. To cycle through the objects in reverse order, hold down Option -Alt+Shift when you click. - - -To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard, press Tab to cycle through the objects on the slide. To cycle through the objects in reverse order, press Shift+Tab. - - - - - - +Alt+Shift when you click. + + +To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard, press Tab to cycle through the objects on the slide. To cycle through the objects in reverse order, press Shift+Tab. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp index e8a697fd8b..185e0bd891 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Converting Text Characters into Drawing Objects -/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Changed table to numbering list, resized image - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Converting Text Characters into Drawing Objects +/text/simpress/guide/text2curve.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Changed table to numbering list, resized image + + -text; converting to curves -characters; converting to curves -signs;converting to curves +text; converting to curves +characters; converting to curves +signs;converting to curves converting; text to curves - + Converting Text Characters into Drawing Objects - -You can convert text characters into curves that you can edit and resize as you would any drawing object. Once you convert text into a drawing object, you can no longer edit the content of the text. -To convert text into a drawing object: - - -Select the text that you want to convert, and do one of the following: -In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Curve. -In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object, and then choose Convert - To Curve. - - -If your text contains more than one character, the converted text becomes a grouped object. Double-click the group to edit individual objects. Press Esc when finished. - - -Now, click the Edit Points icon on the Object Bar. Click the object. You can see all the Bézier points of the object. On the Object Bar, you can find various icons for editing, inserting and deleting points. - - -
- - - - -
- - + +You can convert text characters into curves that you can edit and resize as you would any drawing object. Once you convert text into a drawing object, you can no longer edit the content of the text. +To convert text into a drawing object: + + +Select the text that you want to convert, and do one of the following: +In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Curve. +In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object, and then choose Convert - To Curve. + + +If your text contains more than one character, the converted text becomes a grouped object. Double-click the group to edit individual objects. Press Esc when finished. + + +Now, click the Edit Points icon on the Object Bar. Click the object. You can see all the Bézier points of the object. On the Object Bar, you can find various icons for editing, inserting and deleting points. + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp index 31991d5707..da44b45ff2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Converting Bitmap Images into Vector Graphics -/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshot. Cleaned - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Converting Bitmap Images into Vector Graphics +/text/simpress/guide/vectorize.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted screenshot. Cleaned + + -vectorizing bitmaps -converting; bitmaps to polygons -bitmaps; converting to vector graphics +vectorizing bitmaps +converting; bitmaps to polygons +bitmaps; converting to vector graphics vector graphics;converting bitmaps - + Converting Bitmap Images into Vector Graphics - -A vector graphic can be resized without losing the quality of the graphic. In $[officename] Draw and Impress, you can convert a bitmap image into a vector graphic. - - -Select the bitmap image that you want to convert. - - -Do one of the following: -In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Polygon. -In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object, and then choose Convert - To Polygon. - - -Set the conversion options for the image, and then click OK. See Convert to Polygon for a description of the conversion options. - - -
-Convert to Polygon - - - - -
- - + +A vector graphic can be resized without losing the quality of the graphic. In $[officename] Draw and Impress, you can convert a bitmap image into a vector graphic. + + +Select the bitmap image that you want to convert. + + +Do one of the following: +In $[officename] Draw, choose Modify - Convert - To Polygon. +In $[officename] Impress, right-click the object, and then choose Convert - To Polygon. + + +Set the conversion options for the image, and then click OK. See Convert to Polygon for a description of the conversion options. + + +
+Convert to Polygon + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp index 2a14b6ae45..8dfe145b0b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Welcome to the $[officename] Impress Help -/text/simpress/main0000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Welcome to the $[officename] Impress Help +/text/simpress/main0000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe. + + - -Welcome to the $[officename] Impress Help -How to Work With $[officename] Impress - - - - -$[officename] Impress Menus, Toolbars, and Keys - - - -Help about the Help - - - - - - - - - - + +Welcome to the $[officename] Impress Help +How to Work With $[officename] Impress + + + + +$[officename] Impress Menus, Toolbars, and Keys + + + +Help about the Help + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0101.xhp index b6fea4c4aa..687696ade7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0101.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -File -/text/simpress/main0101.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-File -This menu contains commands that apply to the whole document. -
- -Open - - - - - -Save As - - - -Versions - -Export - - -Properties - - -Print - -Printer Settings - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +File +/text/simpress/main0101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+File +This menu contains commands that apply to the whole document. +
+ +Open + + + + + +Save As + + + +Versions + +Export + + +Properties + + +Print + +Printer Settings + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0103.xhp index 6128b54d90..2b9edecdd5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0103.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0103.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -View -/text/simpress/main0103.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: some changes due to View Menu Spec doc -dedr: reviewed - - - -
-View -This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document. -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -the master layouts are not in spec - - - -Zoom - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +View +/text/simpress/main0103.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: some changes due to View Menu Spec doc +dedr: reviewed + + + +
+View +This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + +the master layouts are not in spec + + + +Zoom + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0104.xhp index d4d1f582ec..7ca5a6fa9a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0104.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0104.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Insert -/text/simpress/main0104.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Insert -This menu contains the commands that are used to insert new elements into the document, for example, graphics, objects, special characters and other files. -
-Slide - - - - -Page Number -Date and Time - -Special Character - -Hyperlink - -Animated ImageUFI: renamed and moved from main0114, spec "presentation engine for q" - -Scan - -Spreadsheet - - - - -Chart - -Floating Frame - -File - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Insert +/text/simpress/main0104.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Insert +This menu contains the commands that are used to insert new elements into the document, for example, graphics, objects, special characters and other files. +
+Slide + + + + +Page Number +Date and Time + +Special Character + +Hyperlink + +Animated ImageUFI: renamed and moved from main0114, spec "presentation engine for q" + +Scan + +Spreadsheet + + + + +Chart + +Floating Frame + +File + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0114.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0114.xhp index 4c0b488d30..1f03b86114 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0114.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0114.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Slide Show -/text/simpress/main0114.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Slide ShowUFI: this menu is in the order and wording of the spec doc "presentationengine.sxw". Current UI doesn't follow the spec -Contains commands and options for running a presentation. -
- -Slide Show Settings - - -Interaction - - -Custom Animation - - - -Custom Slide Show - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Slide Show +/text/simpress/main0114.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Slide ShowUFI: this menu is in the order and wording of the spec doc "presentationengine.sxw". Current UI doesn't follow the spec +Contains commands and options for running a presentation. +
+ +Slide Show Settings + + +Interaction + + +Custom Animation + + + +Custom Slide Show + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp index 032aa741d3..d76ad6269a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0203.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Object Bar for Text Input -/text/simpress/main0203.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Object Bar for Text Input -To display the Object Bar for text, place the cursor inside a text object. -
- - - - - - - - - - -Font Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Object Bar for Text Input +/text/simpress/main0203.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Object Bar for Text Input +To display the Object Bar for text, place the cursor inside a text object. +
+ + + + + + + + + + +Font Color + + + + + + + + + + + + + @@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ - - + + @@ -152,13 +152,13 @@ - -Character - - -Paragraph - - + +Character + + +Paragraph + + Numbering Symbols @@ -168,11 +168,11 @@ - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp index 9397ca9cee..e65d93ce0c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0209.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Rulers -/text/simpress/main0209.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Rulers +/text/simpress/main0209.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -rulers; in presentations +rulers; in presentations origin of rulers - -Rulers -You can use vertical and horizontal rulers at the left and upper edges of the $[officename] Impress workspace to assist you in creating your slide. The sections of the rulers that cover the area of the slide are white. -When you select an object, its dimensions are displayed on the rulers as gray double lines. To precisely resize the object, drag one of the double lines to a new location on the ruler. -When you select a text object on a slide, indents and tabs are displayed on the horizontal ruler. To change the indent or tab settings for the text object, drag an indent or a tab marker to a new location on the ruler. -You can also drag asnap line from a ruler to help you align objects on your slide. To insert a snap line using a ruler, drag the edge of a ruler into the slide. -To show or hide the rulers, chooseView - Rulers. -To specify the measurement units for a ruler, right-click the ruler, and then choose a new unit from the list. -To change the origin (0 point) of the rulers, drag the intersection of the two rulers in the top left corner into the workspace. Vertical and horizontal guides appear. Continue to drag until the vertical and horizontal guides are where you want the new origin to be, and then release. To reset the origins of the rulers to the default values, double-click the intersection. -To change the slide margins, drag the edge of the white areas in the rulers. - - + +Rulers +You can use vertical and horizontal rulers at the left and upper edges of the $[officename] Impress workspace to assist you in creating your slide. The sections of the rulers that cover the area of the slide are white. +When you select an object, its dimensions are displayed on the rulers as gray double lines. To precisely resize the object, drag one of the double lines to a new location on the ruler. +When you select a text object on a slide, indents and tabs are displayed on the horizontal ruler. To change the indent or tab settings for the text object, drag an indent or a tab marker to a new location on the ruler. +You can also drag asnap line from a ruler to help you align objects on your slide. To insert a snap line using a ruler, drag the edge of a ruler into the slide. +To show or hide the rulers, chooseView - Rulers. +To specify the measurement units for a ruler, right-click the ruler, and then choose a new unit from the list. +To change the origin (0 point) of the rulers, drag the intersection of the two rulers in the top left corner into the workspace. Vertical and horizontal guides appear. Continue to drag until the vertical and horizontal guides are where you want the new origin to be, and then release. To reset the origins of the rulers to the default values, double-click the intersection. +To change the slide margins, drag the edge of the white areas in the rulers. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp index 8c752d7fa3..129301184b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/main0210.xhp @@ -1,123 +1,123 @@ - - - - - - -Main Toolbar for the Normal, Notes and Handout Pages -/text/simpress/main0210.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
- -Main Toolbar for the Normal, Notes and Handout Pages -The Main Toolbar contains frequently used editing tools. Toolbar icons with a small green arrow indicate a floating toolbar. Long-click the icon to open a floating toolbar that contains additional commands. -
-
-Select -To select an object on the current slide, click the Select tool (white arrow) on the Main Toolbar, and then click the object. -To select more than one object, hold down Shift while you click. -To select an object that is behind another object, hold Option -Alt, and then click the object. To select the next underlying object in the stacking, hold Option -Alt, and then click again. To return the selection to the previously selected object, hold down Shift + Option -Alt, and then click. -To add text to a selected object, double-click the object and type or enter your text. -To remove a selection, click anywhere outside the selected object, or press Escape. -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Rotate -This tool is used to rotate the object. It corresponds to the command Rotate found on the $[officename] Draw Main toolbar under Effects. - - - - - - - - - -Interaction - - - - - - - - + + + + + + +Main Toolbar for the Normal, Notes and Handout Pages +/text/simpress/main0210.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+ +Main Toolbar for the Normal, Notes and Handout Pages +The Main Toolbar contains frequently used editing tools. Toolbar icons with a small green arrow indicate a floating toolbar. Long-click the icon to open a floating toolbar that contains additional commands. +
+
+Select +To select an object on the current slide, click the Select tool (white arrow) on the Main Toolbar, and then click the object. +To select more than one object, hold down Shift while you click. +To select an object that is behind another object, hold Option +Alt, and then click the object. To select the next underlying object in the stacking, hold Option +Alt, and then click again. To return the selection to the previously selected object, hold down Shift + Option +Alt, and then click. +To add text to a selected object, double-click the object and type or enter your text. +To remove a selection, click anywhere outside the selected object, or press Escape. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Rotate +This tool is used to rotate the object. It corresponds to the command Rotate found on the $[officename] Draw Main toolbar under Effects. + + + + + + + + + +Interaction + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp index 73be5f3e4b..b0915747bd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Next Error -/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Next Error +/text/smath/01/02100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-error search; next error +error search; next error finding ;errors in %PRODUCTNAME Math - -Next Error -Moves the cursor to the next error (moving right). -
- - - + +Next Error +Moves the cursor to the next error (moving right). + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp index 75d80a522a..49ce86fe79 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Zoom In -/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Zoom In +/text/smath/01/03040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-zooming in on formula display +zooming in on formula display formulas; increasing size of display - -Zoom In -Increases the display scale of the formula by 25%. The zoom scale is displayed on the status bar. You can also change the scale in the context menu of the status bar. The workspace context menu contains zoom options as well. -
- - - + +Zoom In +Increases the display scale of the formula by 25%. The zoom scale is displayed on the status bar. You can also change the scale in the context menu of the status bar. The workspace context menu contains zoom options as well. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp index a2c0eb37c1..cf53655841 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Zoom Out -/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Zoom Out +/text/smath/01/03050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-views; zooming out $[officename] Math -formula display sizes -formulas; zooming out +views; zooming out $[officename] Math +formula display sizes +formulas; zooming out zooming out on formula display - -Zoom Out -Decreases the display scale of formulas by 25%. The zoom scale is displayed on the status bar. You can also change the scale in the context menu of the status bar. The workspace context menu also has zoom options. -
- - - + +Zoom Out +Decreases the display scale of formulas by 25%. The zoom scale is displayed on the status bar. You can also change the scale in the context menu of the status bar. The workspace context menu also has zoom options. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp index 7e0869bde4..6df0ad21ed 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Display All -/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Display All +/text/smath/01/03060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-views; maximum size -maximum formula size +views; maximum size +maximum formula size formulas; maximum size - -Display All -Displays the entire formula in the maximum size possible so that all elements are included. The formula is reduced or enlarged so that all formula elements can be displayed in the work area. Show All is equivalent to the Entire Formula icon on the toolbar. The current scale is displayed on the status bar. A selection of available scale options is accessible through the context menu. The context menu in the work area also contains the scale options. -
- - - + +Display All +Displays the entire formula in the maximum size possible so that all elements are included. The formula is reduced or enlarged so that all formula elements can be displayed in the work area. Show All is equivalent to the Entire Formula icon on the toolbar. The current scale is displayed on the status bar. A selection of available scale options is accessible through the context menu. The context menu in the work area also contains the scale options. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp index e52341c7ad..181979ee4c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Refreshing -/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Refreshing +/text/smath/01/03070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-refreshing formula view +refreshing formula view formula view; refreshing - -Refreshing -This command refreshes the formula in the document window. -Changes in the Commands window are automatically refreshed if Refresh View Automatically is activated. -
- - - + +Refreshing +This command refreshes the formula in the document window. +Changes in the Commands window are automatically refreshed if Refresh View Automatically is activated. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp index 6646123e2d..d3de57c884 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Relations -/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Relations +/text/smath/01/03090200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-relations; in $[officename] Math -$[officename] Math; relations -equal sign -inequation -unequal sign -identical to relation -congruent relation -right angled relations -orthogonal relations -divides relation -does not divide relation -less than relations -approximately equal to relation -parallel relation -less than or equal to signs -greater than or equal to signs -proportional to relation -similar to relations -toward relation -logic symbols -double arrow symbols -much greater than relation -considerably greater than relation -greater than relations -much less than relation -considerably less than relation -defined as relation -correspondence; picture by -picture by correspondence -image of relation -correspondence; original by +relations; in $[officename] Math +$[officename] Math; relations +equal sign +inequation +unequal sign +identical to relation +congruent relation +right angled relations +orthogonal relations +divides relation +does not divide relation +less than relations +approximately equal to relation +parallel relation +less than or equal to signs +greater than or equal to signs +proportional to relation +similar to relations +toward relation +logic symbols +double arrow symbols +much greater than relation +considerably greater than relation +greater than relations +much less than relation +considerably less than relation +defined as relation +correspondence; picture by +picture by correspondence +image of relation +correspondence; original by original by correspondence - -Relations -You can choose among various relations to structure your $[officename] Math formula. The relation functions are displayed in the lower part of the Selection window. The list is also in the context menu of the Commands window. All relations that are not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window. -
- -The following is a complete list of the relations. The symbol next to the name of the relation indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (choose View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -Relations: - - - + +Relations +You can choose among various relations to structure your $[officename] Math formula. The relation functions are displayed in the lower part of the Selection window. The list is also in the context menu of the Commands window. All relations that are not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window. + + +The following is a complete list of the relations. The symbol next to the name of the relation indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (choose View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +Relations: +
+ + Icon - - - -is equal -Inserts an equal sign (=) with two placeholders. You can also directly type <?> = <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +is equal +Inserts an equal sign (=) with two placeholders. You can also directly type <?> = <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -does not equal -The neq icon or command inserts an inequality with two placeholders. You can also type <?> neq <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +does not equal +The neq icon or command inserts an inequality with two placeholders. You can also type <?> neq <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -identical to -Inserts a character for the identical to (congruent) relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> equiv <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +identical to +Inserts a character for the identical to (congruent) relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> equiv <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -orthogonal to -Inserts a character for a orthogonal (right angled) relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> ortho <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +orthogonal to +Inserts a character for a orthogonal (right angled) relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> ortho <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -divides -Inserts the divides character. You can also type <?> divides <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +divides +Inserts the divides character. You can also type <?> divides <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -does not divide -This icon inserts the does not divide character. You can also type <?>ndivides<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +does not divide +This icon inserts the does not divide character. You can also type <?>ndivides<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -less than -Inserts the less than relation. You can also type <?>lt<?> or <?> < <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +less than +Inserts the less than relation. You can also type <?>lt<?> or <?> < <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -greater than -Inserts the greater than relation. You can also type <?> gt <?> or <?> > <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +greater than +Inserts the greater than relation. You can also type <?> gt <?> or <?> > <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -approximately equal to -Inserts the approximately equal relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> approx <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +approximately equal to +Inserts the approximately equal relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> approx <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -parallel to -Inserts a parallel relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>parallel<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +parallel to +Inserts a parallel relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>parallel<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -less than or equal to (slanted) -Inserts a less than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> leslant <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +less than or equal to (slanted) +Inserts a less than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> leslant <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -greater than or equal to (slanted) -Inserts the greater than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>geslant<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +greater than or equal to (slanted) +Inserts the greater than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>geslant<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -similar or equal to -Inserts the similar or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>simeq<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +similar or equal to +Inserts the similar or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>simeq<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -proportional to -Inserts the proportional to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> prop <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +proportional to +Inserts the proportional to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> prop <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -less than or equal to -Inserts the less than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> le <?> or <?> <= <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +less than or equal to +Inserts the less than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> le <?> or <?> <= <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -greater than or equal to -Inserts the greater than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> ge <?> or <?> >= <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +greater than or equal to +Inserts the greater than or equal to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?> ge <?> or <?> >= <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -similar to -This icon inserts the similar to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>sim<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +similar to +This icon inserts the similar to relation with two placeholders. You can also type <?>sim<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -toward -Inserts a toward relation symbol with two placeholders. You can also type <?> toward <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +toward +Inserts a toward relation symbol with two placeholders. You can also type <?> toward <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -double arrow pointing left -Inserts the logical relation arrow with double bar pointing left. You can also type dlarrow in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +double arrow pointing left +Inserts the logical relation arrow with double bar pointing left. You can also type dlarrow in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -double arrow pointing left and right -Inserts the logical relation arrow with double bar pointing left and right with two operators. You can also type dlrarrow in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +double arrow pointing left and right +Inserts the logical relation arrow with double bar pointing left and right with two operators. You can also type dlrarrow in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -double arrow pointing right -Inserts the logical operator arrow with double bar pointing right with two placeholders. You can also type drarrow in the Commands window. - - -
- -To create the much greater than relation with two placeholders, type <?> gg <?> or >> in the Commands window. -Type ll or << in the Commands window to insert the much less than relation into the formula. -The is defined as relation with two placeholders is inserted by typing <?>def<?>. -Insert the picture by correspondence character with two placeholders by typing <?> transl <?> in the Commands window. -The <?>transr<?> command inserts the original by correspondence character with two placeholders. -When entering information manually in the Commands window, note that a number of operators require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true if you are working with values instead of placeholders. For example, for the "is considerably greater" relation, type either 10 gg 1 or a gg b. - - + + + +double arrow pointing right +Inserts the logical operator arrow with double bar pointing right with two placeholders. You can also type drarrow in the Commands window. + + + + +To create the much greater than relation with two placeholders, type <?> gg <?> or >> in the Commands window. +Type ll or << in the Commands window to insert the much less than relation into the formula. +The is defined as relation with two placeholders is inserted by typing <?>def<?>. +Insert the picture by correspondence character with two placeholders by typing <?> transl <?> in the Commands window. +The <?>transr<?> command inserts the original by correspondence character with two placeholders. +When entering information manually in the Commands window, note that a number of operators require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true if you are working with values instead of placeholders. For example, for the "is considerably greater" relation, type either 10 gg 1 or a gg b. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp index 9a8c8085ce..ab2a48cdfc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Operators -/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Operators +/text/smath/01/03090300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-operators; general -upper limits -limits; in %PRODUCTNAME Math -product -coproduct -lower limits -curve integrals -user-defined operators; general -integrals; signs +operators; general +upper limits +limits; in %PRODUCTNAME Math +product +coproduct +lower limits +curve integrals +user-defined operators; general +integrals; signs summation - -Operators -You can choose among various operators to structure your $[officename] Math formula. All available operators appear in the lower part of the Selection window. They are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All operators not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window. -
- -The following is a list of the available operators. An icon next to the operator name indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (choose View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -Operator Functions - - - + +Operators +You can choose among various operators to structure your $[officename] Math formula. All available operators appear in the lower part of the Selection window. They are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All operators not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window. + + +The following is a list of the available operators. An icon next to the operator name indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (choose View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +Operator Functions +
+ + Icon - - - -Limit -Inserts the limit sign with one placeholder. You can also enter lim <?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Limit +Inserts the limit sign with one placeholder. You can also enter lim <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Summation -Inserts a summation sign with one placeholder. You can also enter sum <?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Summation +Inserts a summation sign with one placeholder. You can also enter sum <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Product -Inserts a product sign with one placeholder. You can also type prod <?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Product +Inserts a product sign with one placeholder. You can also type prod <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Coproduct -Inserts a coproduct symbol with one placeholder. You can also enter coprod <?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Coproduct +Inserts a coproduct symbol with one placeholder. You can also enter coprod <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Upper and Lower Limit -Inserts a range statement upper and lower limit for integral and summation with one placeholder. You can also type from{<?>} to{<?>} <?> directly in the Commands window. Limit statements must be combined with the appropriate operators. The limits will be centered above/below the summation character. - - -
- - - - + + + +Upper and Lower Limit +Inserts a range statement upper and lower limit for integral and summation with one placeholder. You can also type from{<?>} to{<?>} <?> directly in the Commands window. Limit statements must be combined with the appropriate operators. The limits will be centered above/below the summation character. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Integral -Inserts an integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type int <?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Integral +Inserts an integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type int <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Double Integral -Inserts a double integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type iint <?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Double Integral +Inserts a double integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type iint <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Triple Integral -Inserts a triple integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type iiint <?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Triple Integral +Inserts a triple integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type iiint <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Lower Limit -Inserts a lower limit range statement for integral and sum with placeholders. You can also type from {<?>}<?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Lower Limit +Inserts a lower limit range statement for integral and sum with placeholders. You can also type from {<?>}<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Curve Integral -Inserts a curve integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type lint <?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Curve Integral +Inserts a curve integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type lint <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Double Curve Integral -Inserts a double curve integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type llint <?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Double Curve Integral +Inserts a double curve integral symbol with one placeholder. You can also type llint <?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Triple Curve Integral -Inserts a triple curve integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type lllint <?> directly in the Commands window window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Triple Curve Integral +Inserts a triple curve integral sign with one placeholder. You can also type lllint <?> directly in the Commands window window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Upper Limit -Inserts the range statement upper limit for integral and summation with placeholders You can also type to <?><?> directly in the Commands window. Limit statements can only be used if combined with the appropriate operators. - - -
- -You can also add limits to an operator (for example, an integral) by first clicking the desired operator and then clicking the limit symbol. This method is faster than typing the commands directly. -Inserts the limit inferior with one placeholder. You can also type liminf <?> directly in the Commands window. -Inserts the Limit superior with one placeholder. You can also type limsup <?> directly in the Commands window. -By typing oper in the Commands window, you can insert user-defined operators in $[officename] Math, a feature useful for incorporating special characters into a formula. An example is oper %theta x. Using the oper command, you can also insert characters not in the default $[officename] character set. oper can also be used in connection with limits; for example, oper %union from {i=1} to n x_{i}. In this example, the union symbol is indicated by the name union. However, this is not one of the predefined symbols. To define it, choose Tools - Catalog. select Special as the symbol set in the dialog that appears, then click the Edit button. In the next dialog, select Special as the symbol set again. Enter a meaningful name in the Symbol text box, for example, "union" and then click the union symbol in the set of symbols. Click Add and then OK. Click Close to close the Symbols dialog. You are now finished and can type the union symbol in the Commands window, by entering oper %union. -Limits can be arranged in ways other than centered above/below the operator. Use the options provided by $[officename] Math for working with superscript and subscript indexes. For example, type sum_a^b c in the Commands window to arrange the limits to the right of the sum symbol. If your limit entries contain longer expressions, you must put them in group brackets, for example, sum_{i=1}^{2*n} b. When formulas are imported from older versions this is done automatically. To change the spacing (gaps) between the characters choose Format - Spacing - Category - Indexes or Format - Spacing - Category - Limits. Additional basic information about indexes is given elsewhere in the Help. -When you type information manually in the Commands window, note that a number of operators require spaces for correct structure. This is especially true when your operators are supplied with values instead of placeholders, for example, lim a_{n}=a. - - + + + +Upper Limit +Inserts the range statement upper limit for integral and summation with placeholders You can also type to <?><?> directly in the Commands window. Limit statements can only be used if combined with the appropriate operators. + + + + +You can also add limits to an operator (for example, an integral) by first clicking the desired operator and then clicking the limit symbol. This method is faster than typing the commands directly. +Inserts the limit inferior with one placeholder. You can also type liminf <?> directly in the Commands window. +Inserts the Limit superior with one placeholder. You can also type limsup <?> directly in the Commands window. +By typing oper in the Commands window, you can insert user-defined operators in $[officename] Math, a feature useful for incorporating special characters into a formula. An example is oper %theta x. Using the oper command, you can also insert characters not in the default $[officename] character set. oper can also be used in connection with limits; for example, oper %union from {i=1} to n x_{i}. In this example, the union symbol is indicated by the name union. However, this is not one of the predefined symbols. To define it, choose Tools - Catalog. select Special as the symbol set in the dialog that appears, then click the Edit button. In the next dialog, select Special as the symbol set again. Enter a meaningful name in the Symbol text box, for example, "union" and then click the union symbol in the set of symbols. Click Add and then OK. Click Close to close the Symbols dialog. You are now finished and can type the union symbol in the Commands window, by entering oper %union. +Limits can be arranged in ways other than centered above/below the operator. Use the options provided by $[officename] Math for working with superscript and subscript indexes. For example, type sum_a^b c in the Commands window to arrange the limits to the right of the sum symbol. If your limit entries contain longer expressions, you must put them in group brackets, for example, sum_{i=1}^{2*n} b. When formulas are imported from older versions this is done automatically. To change the spacing (gaps) between the characters choose Format - Spacing - Category - Indexes or Format - Spacing - Category - Limits. Additional basic information about indexes is given elsewhere in the Help. +When you type information manually in the Commands window, note that a number of operators require spaces for correct structure. This is especially true when your operators are supplied with values instead of placeholders, for example, lim a_{n}=a. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp index f49018a1b3..9927ebef74 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp @@ -1,483 +1,483 @@ - - - - - - -Functions -/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-functions; in $[officename] Math -natural exponential functions -natural logarithms -exponential functions -logarithms -variables; with right exponents -exponents; variables with right -trigonometrical functions -sine function -cosine function -cotangent function -hyperbolic sine function -square roots -hyperbolic cosine function -hyperbolic tangent function -hyperbolic cotangent function -roots -arc sine function -arc cosine function -arc cotangent function -absolute values -area hyperbolic cosine function -area hyperbolic tangent function -area hyperbolic cotangent function -factorial -values; absolute -tangent function - - - -Functions -Choose a function in the lower part of the window. These functions are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. Any functions not contained in the Selection window need to be typed manually in the Commands window. -
- -The following is a list of all functions that appear in the Selection window. The icon next to the function indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (menu View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -List of functions - - - - -Icon - - - - -Natural Exponential Function -Inserts a natural exponential function. You can also type func e^<?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Natural Logarithm -Inserts a natural (base e) logarithm with one placeholder. You can also type ln(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Exponential Function -Inserts an exponential function with one placeholder. You can also type exp(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Logarithm -Inserts a common (base 10) logarithm with one placeholder. You can also type log(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - -Power -Inserts x raised to the yth power. You can also type <?>^{<?>} in the Commands window. You can replace the ^ character with rsup or sup. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Sine -Inserts a sine function with one placeholder. You can also type sin(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Cosine -Inserts a cosine function with one placeholder. You can also type cos(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Tangent -Inserts a tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type tan<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Cotangent -Inserts a cotangent symbol with a placeholder. You can also type cot(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Hyperbolic Sine -Inserts a hyperbolic sine with one placeholder. You can also type sinh(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Square Root -Inserts a square root symbol with one placeholder. You can also type sqrt(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Hyperbolic Cosine -Inserts a hyperbolic cosine symbol with one placeholder. You can also type cosh(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Hyperbolic Tangent -Inserts a hyperbolic tangent symbol with one placeholder. You can also type tanh(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Hyperbolic Cotangent -Inserts a hyperbolic cotangent symbol with one placeholder. You can directly type coth(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -nth Root -Inserts an nth root function with two placeholders. You can also type nroot n x in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Arc Sine -Inserts an arc sine function with one placeholder. You can also type arcsin(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Arc Cosine -Inserts an arc cosine symbol with one placeholder. You can also type arccos(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Arc Tangent -Inserts an arc tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type arctan(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Arc Cotangent -Inserts an arc cotangent function with one placeholder. You can directly type arccot(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Absolute Value -Inserts an absolute value sign with one placeholder. You can also type abs(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Area Hyperbolic Sine -Inserts an area hyperbolic sine function with one placeholder. You can also type arsinh(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Area Hyperbolic Cosine -Inserts an area hyperbolic cosine function with one placeholder. You can also type arcosh(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Area Hyperbolic Tangent -Inserts an area hyperbolic tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type artanh(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Area Hyperbolic Cotangent -Inserts an area hyperbolic cotangent function with one placeholder. You can also type arcoth(<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - - -Icon - - - - -Factorial -Inserts the factorial sign with one placeholder. You can directly type fact <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- -You can also assign an index or an exponent to a function. For example, typing sin^2x results in in a function "sine to the power of 2x". -When typing functions manually in the Commands window, note that spaces are required for some functions (for example, abs 5=5 ; abs -3=3). - - + + + + + + +Functions +/text/smath/01/03090400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+functions; in $[officename] Math +natural exponential functions +natural logarithms +exponential functions +logarithms +variables; with right exponents +exponents; variables with right +trigonometrical functions +sine function +cosine function +cotangent function +hyperbolic sine function +square roots +hyperbolic cosine function +hyperbolic tangent function +hyperbolic cotangent function +roots +arc sine function +arc cosine function +arc cotangent function +absolute values +area hyperbolic cosine function +area hyperbolic tangent function +area hyperbolic cotangent function +factorial +values; absolute +tangent function + + + +Functions +Choose a function in the lower part of the window. These functions are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. Any functions not contained in the Selection window need to be typed manually in the Commands window. +
+ +The following is a list of all functions that appear in the Selection window. The icon next to the function indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (menu View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +List of functions + + + + +Icon + + + + +Natural Exponential Function +Inserts a natural exponential function. You can also type func e^<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Natural Logarithm +Inserts a natural (base e) logarithm with one placeholder. You can also type ln(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Exponential Function +Inserts an exponential function with one placeholder. You can also type exp(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Logarithm +Inserts a common (base 10) logarithm with one placeholder. You can also type log(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Power +Inserts x raised to the yth power. You can also type <?>^{<?>} in the Commands window. You can replace the ^ character with rsup or sup. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Sine +Inserts a sine function with one placeholder. You can also type sin(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Cosine +Inserts a cosine function with one placeholder. You can also type cos(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Tangent +Inserts a tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type tan<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Cotangent +Inserts a cotangent symbol with a placeholder. You can also type cot(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Hyperbolic Sine +Inserts a hyperbolic sine with one placeholder. You can also type sinh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Square Root +Inserts a square root symbol with one placeholder. You can also type sqrt(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Hyperbolic Cosine +Inserts a hyperbolic cosine symbol with one placeholder. You can also type cosh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Hyperbolic Tangent +Inserts a hyperbolic tangent symbol with one placeholder. You can also type tanh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Hyperbolic Cotangent +Inserts a hyperbolic cotangent symbol with one placeholder. You can directly type coth(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +nth Root +Inserts an nth root function with two placeholders. You can also type nroot n x in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Arc Sine +Inserts an arc sine function with one placeholder. You can also type arcsin(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Arc Cosine +Inserts an arc cosine symbol with one placeholder. You can also type arccos(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Arc Tangent +Inserts an arc tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type arctan(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Arc Cotangent +Inserts an arc cotangent function with one placeholder. You can directly type arccot(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Absolute Value +Inserts an absolute value sign with one placeholder. You can also type abs(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Sine +Inserts an area hyperbolic sine function with one placeholder. You can also type arsinh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Cosine +Inserts an area hyperbolic cosine function with one placeholder. You can also type arcosh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Tangent +Inserts an area hyperbolic tangent function with one placeholder. You can also type artanh(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Area Hyperbolic Cotangent +Inserts an area hyperbolic cotangent function with one placeholder. You can also type arcoth(<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + + +Factorial +Inserts the factorial sign with one placeholder. You can directly type fact <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ +You can also assign an index or an exponent to a function. For example, typing sin^2x results in in a function "sine to the power of 2x". +When typing functions manually in the Commands window, note that spaces are required for some functions (for example, abs 5=5 ; abs -3=3). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp index f92212c722..d50e9e5b5d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Brackets -/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: added text to fix #i29948# -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Brackets +/text/smath/01/03090500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: added text to fix #i29948# +dedr: reviewed + + +
-brackets; in $[officename] Math -brackets; round (Math) -parentheses (Math) -brackets; square (Math) -brackets; double square (Math) -braces in %PRODUCTNAME Math -brackets; angle (Math) -brackets; operator (Math) -brackets; angle with operator -brackets; group -grouping brackets -round brackets -square brackets -double square brackets; scalable -scalable braces -scalable round brackets -scalable lines with ceiling -vertical bars -brackets; scalable -operator brackets -floor brackets -lines; with edges -ceiling; lines with -lines; scalable -ceiling; scalable lines with -brackets; single, without group function -single brackets without group function -brackets;widowed -widowed brackets +brackets; in $[officename] Math +brackets; round (Math) +parentheses (Math) +brackets; square (Math) +brackets; double square (Math) +braces in %PRODUCTNAME Math +brackets; angle (Math) +brackets; operator (Math) +brackets; angle with operator +brackets; group +grouping brackets +round brackets +square brackets +double square brackets; scalable +scalable braces +scalable round brackets +scalable lines with ceiling +vertical bars +brackets; scalable +operator brackets +floor brackets +lines; with edges +ceiling; lines with +lines; scalable +ceiling; scalable lines with +brackets; single, without group function +single brackets without group function +brackets;widowed +widowed brackets orphaned brackets - -Brackets -You can choose among various bracket types to structure a $[officename] Math formula. Bracket types are displayed in the lower part of the Selection window. These brackets are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All brackets that are not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window. -
- -The following is a complete list of all available bracket types. The icon next to the bracket type indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (menu View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -Bracket types - - - + +Brackets +You can choose among various bracket types to structure a $[officename] Math formula. Bracket types are displayed in the lower part of the Selection window. These brackets are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All brackets that are not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu can be typed manually in the Commands window. + + +The following is a complete list of all available bracket types. The icon next to the bracket type indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (menu View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +Bracket types +
+ + Icon - - - -Round brackets (parentheses) -Inserts a placeholder within normal round brackets (parentheses). You can also type (<?>) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Round brackets (parentheses) +Inserts a placeholder within normal round brackets (parentheses). You can also type (<?>) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Square brackets -Inserts a placeholder within square brackets. You can also type [<?>] in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Square brackets +Inserts a placeholder within square brackets. You can also type [<?>] in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Double square brackets -Inserts a placeholder within double square brackets. You can also type ldbracket <?> rdbracket in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Double square brackets +Inserts a placeholder within double square brackets. You can also type ldbracket <?> rdbracket in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Braces (curly brackets) -Inserts a placeholder withing braces (curly brackets). You can also type lbrace<?>rbrace directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Braces (curly brackets) +Inserts a placeholder withing braces (curly brackets). You can also type lbrace<?>rbrace directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Single vertical bars -Inserts a placeholder within vertical bars. You can also type lline <?> rline directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Single vertical bars +Inserts a placeholder within vertical bars. You can also type lline <?> rline directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Double vertical bars -Inserts a placeholder within double vertical bars. You can also type ldline <?> rdline directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Double vertical bars +Inserts a placeholder within double vertical bars. You can also type ldline <?> rdline directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Angle brackets -Inserts a placeholder within angle brackets. You can also type langle <?> rangle in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Angle brackets +Inserts a placeholder within angle brackets. You can also type langle <?> rangle in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Operator brackets -Inserts a placeholder within operator brackets. You can also type langle <?> mline <?> rangle in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Operator brackets +Inserts a placeholder within operator brackets. You can also type langle <?> mline <?> rangle in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Group brackets -Inserts group brackets. You can also type {<?>} in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Group brackets +Inserts group brackets. You can also type {<?>} in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Round brackets (scalable) -Inserts scalable rounded brackets with one placeholder. You can also type left(<?> right) in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Round brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable rounded brackets with one placeholder. You can also type left(<?> right) in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Square brackets (scalable) -Inserts scalable square brackets with placeholders. You can also type left[<?> right] in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is adjusted automatically. - - -
- - - - + + + +Square brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable square brackets with placeholders. You can also type left[<?> right] in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is adjusted automatically. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Double square brackets (scalable) -Inserts scalable double square brackets with placeholders. You can also type left ldbracket <?> right rdbracket directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. - - -
- - - - + + + +Double square brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable double square brackets with placeholders. You can also type left ldbracket <?> right rdbracket directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Braces (scalable) -Inserts scalable braces with a placeholder. You can also type left lbrace <?> right rbrace in the Commands window. The size of the braces is automatically adjusted. - - -
- - - - + + + +Braces (scalable) +Inserts scalable braces with a placeholder. You can also type left lbrace <?> right rbrace in the Commands window. The size of the braces is automatically adjusted. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Single vertical bars (scalable) -Inserts scalable single vertical bars with a placeholder. You can also type left lline <?> right rline in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. - - -
- - - - + + + +Single vertical bars (scalable) +Inserts scalable single vertical bars with a placeholder. You can also type left lline <?> right rline in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Double vertical bars (scalable) -Inserts scalable double vertical bars with a placeholder. You can also type left ldline <?> right rdline in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. - - -
- - - - + + + +Double vertical bars (scalable) +Inserts scalable double vertical bars with a placeholder. You can also type left ldline <?> right rdline in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Angle brackets (scalable) -Inserts scalable angle brackets with a placeholder. You can also type left langle <?> right rangle in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. - - -
- - - - + + + +Angle brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable angle brackets with a placeholder. You can also type left langle <?> right rangle in the Commands window. The size of the brackets is automatically adjusted. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Operator brackets (scalable) -Inserts scalable operator brackets with placeholders. You can also type left langle <?> mline <?> right rangle in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. - - -
- - - - + + + +Operator brackets (scalable) +Inserts scalable operator brackets with placeholders. You can also type left langle <?> mline <?> right rangle in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Brace top (scalable) -Inserts a scalable horizontal upper brace with placeholders. You can also enter <?> overbrace <?> directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. - - -
- - - - + + + +Brace top (scalable) +Inserts a scalable horizontal upper brace with placeholders. You can also enter <?> overbrace <?> directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Brace bottom (scalable) -Inserts a scalable horizontal lower brace with placeholders. You can also type <?> underbrace <?> directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. - - -
+ + + +Brace bottom (scalable) +Inserts a scalable horizontal lower brace with placeholders. You can also type <?> underbrace <?> directly in the Commands window. The bracket size is adjusted automatically. + + + - + To insert floor brackets, type lfloor<?>rfloor directly in the Commands window. - + To insert ceiling brackets, type lceil<?>rceil directly in the Commands window. - + To insert scalable floor brackets, type left lfloor<?>right rfloor directly in the Commands window. - -To insert scalable ceiling brackets, type left lceil<?>right rceil directly in the Commands window. -Brackets are automatically sized when you type left and right in front of the bracket command, for example, left(a over b right). You can also set the size and spacing of brackets by choosing Format - Spacing - Category - Brackets and setting the desired percentages. Mark the Scale all brackets check box to apply the changes to all brackets in the formula. -You can also use single brackets. To do this, type a backslash \ in front of the command. For example, when you type \[, the left square bracket appears without its counterpart. This is useful for creating reverse brackets or for constructing intervals. Note that only non-scalable brackets can be used individually. To change the size, use the size command. -Examples of single brackets -For non-scaled brackets: -a = \{ \( \[ b newline -{} + c \] \) \ } -For scaled brackets use none as the bracket name -a = left ( a over b right none newline -left none phantom {a over b} + c right ) -The phantom statement ensures that the last bracket is the correct size. -Be sure to put spaces (gaps) between elements when entering them directly in the Commands window. This ensures that the correct structure is recognized. -Useful information about indexes and exponents as well as scaling helps you structure formulas effectively. For more information about brackets, see Brackets and Grouping. - - + +To insert scalable ceiling brackets, type left lceil<?>right rceil directly in the Commands window. +Brackets are automatically sized when you type left and right in front of the bracket command, for example, left(a over b right). You can also set the size and spacing of brackets by choosing Format - Spacing - Category - Brackets and setting the desired percentages. Mark the Scale all brackets check box to apply the changes to all brackets in the formula. +You can also use single brackets. To do this, type a backslash \ in front of the command. For example, when you type \[, the left square bracket appears without its counterpart. This is useful for creating reverse brackets or for constructing intervals. Note that only non-scalable brackets can be used individually. To change the size, use the size command. +Examples of single brackets +For non-scaled brackets: +a = \{ \( \[ b newline +{} + c \] \) \ } +For scaled brackets use none as the bracket name +a = left ( a over b right none newline +left none phantom {a over b} + c right ) +The phantom statement ensures that the last bracket is the correct size. +Be sure to put spaces (gaps) between elements when entering them directly in the Commands window. This ensures that the correct structure is recognized. +Useful information about indexes and exponents as well as scaling helps you structure formulas effectively. For more information about brackets, see Brackets and Grouping. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp index 0e3e812d27..540386fac4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Attributes -/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Attributes +/text/smath/01/03090600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-attributes; in %PRODUCTNAME Math -formulas; attributes in -accents; in %PRODUCTNAME Math -attributes; accents -vector arrows as attributes -tilde as attribute -circumflex attribute -bold attribute -italics; attribute in %PRODUCTNAME Math -resizing fonts -attributes; changing fonts -changing; fonts -attributes; colored characters -colored characters -attributes; changing defaults -circle attribute -double dot attribute -dot attribute -line through attribute -line above attribute -reversed circumflex attribute -overline attribute -wide vector arrow attribute -wide tilde attribute -wide circumflex attribute -underline attribute -triple dot attribute +attributes; in %PRODUCTNAME Math +formulas; attributes in +accents; in %PRODUCTNAME Math +attributes; accents +vector arrows as attributes +tilde as attribute +circumflex attribute +bold attribute +italics; attribute in %PRODUCTNAME Math +resizing fonts +attributes; changing fonts +changing; fonts +attributes; colored characters +colored characters +attributes; changing defaults +circle attribute +double dot attribute +dot attribute +line through attribute +line above attribute +reversed circumflex attribute +overline attribute +wide vector arrow attribute +wide tilde attribute +wide circumflex attribute +underline attribute +triple dot attribute transparent character as attribute - -Attributes -You can choose from various attributes for -%PRODUCTNAME - - Math formulas. Some attributes are displayed in the lower part of the Selection window. These attributes are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All attributes not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window. -
- -The following is a complete list of all attributes available in %PRODUCTNAME Math. The symbol next to the attribute indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (choose View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -In describing the following attribute functions, the letter "a" in the icon refers to the placeholder that you would like to assign to the respective attribute. You can substitute this character with any other character that you choose. -Attribute Functions - - - + +Attributes +You can choose from various attributes for +%PRODUCTNAME + + Math formulas. Some attributes are displayed in the lower part of the Selection window. These attributes are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. All attributes not contained in the Selection window or in the context menu must be typed manually in the Commands window. + + +The following is a complete list of all attributes available in %PRODUCTNAME Math. The symbol next to the attribute indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (choose View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +In describing the following attribute functions, the letter "a" in the icon refers to the placeholder that you would like to assign to the respective attribute. You can substitute this character with any other character that you choose. +Attribute Functions +
+ + Icon - - - -Acute accent -Inserts a placeholder with an acute accent. You can also type acute<?> in the Command window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Acute accent +Inserts a placeholder with an acute accent. You can also type acute<?> in the Command window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Grave accent -Inserts a placeholder with a grave accent (grave). You can also type grave<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Grave accent +Inserts a placeholder with a grave accent (grave). You can also type grave<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Reverse Circumflex -Inserts a placeholder with a reverse circumflex ("checkmark") over it. You can also type check<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Reverse Circumflex +Inserts a placeholder with a reverse circumflex ("checkmark") over it. You can also type check<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Breve -Inserts a placeholder with an accent breve. You can also type breve <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Breve +Inserts a placeholder with an accent breve. You can also type breve <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Circle -Inserts a placeholder with a circle over it. You can also type circle<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Circle +Inserts a placeholder with a circle over it. You can also type circle<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Vector arrow -Inserts a placeholder with a vector arrow. You can also type vec<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Vector arrow +Inserts a placeholder with a vector arrow. You can also type vec<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Tilde -Inserts a placeholder with a tilde. You can also type tilde<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Tilde +Inserts a placeholder with a tilde. You can also type tilde<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Circumflex -Inserts a placeholder with a circumflex ("hat"). You can also directly enter hat <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Circumflex +Inserts a placeholder with a circumflex ("hat"). You can also directly enter hat <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Line above (bar) -Inserts a line ("bar") above a placeholder . You can also type bar<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Line above (bar) +Inserts a line ("bar") above a placeholder . You can also type bar<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Dot -Inserts a placeholder with a dot over it. You can also type dot<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Dot +Inserts a placeholder with a dot over it. You can also type dot<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Wide vector arrow -Inserts a wide vector arrow with a placeholder. You can also type widevec in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Wide vector arrow +Inserts a wide vector arrow with a placeholder. You can also type widevec in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Wide tilde -Inserts a wide tilde with a placeholder. You can also type widetilde directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Wide tilde +Inserts a wide tilde with a placeholder. You can also type widetilde directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Wide circumflex -Inserts a wide circumflex ("hat") with a placeholder. You can also type widehat in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Wide circumflex +Inserts a wide circumflex ("hat") with a placeholder. You can also type widehat in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Double dot -Inserts a placeholder with two dots over it. You can also directly enter ddot<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Double dot +Inserts a placeholder with two dots over it. You can also directly enter ddot<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Line over -Inserts a line over a placeholder. You can also type overline<?> in the Commands window. The line adjusts itself to correct length. - - -
- - - - + + + +Line over +Inserts a line over a placeholder. You can also type overline<?> in the Commands window. The line adjusts itself to correct length. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Line below -Inserts a line below a placeholder. You can also type underline<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Line below +Inserts a line below a placeholder. You can also type underline<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Line through (overstrike) -Inserts a placeholder with a line (or overstrike) through it. You can also type overstrike<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Line through (overstrike) +Inserts a placeholder with a line (or overstrike) through it. You can also type overstrike<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Triple dot -Inserts three dots over a placeholder. You can also type dddot<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Triple dot +Inserts three dots over a placeholder. You can also type dddot<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Transparent -Inserts a placeholder for a transparent character. This character takes up the space of "a" but does not display it. You can also type phantom<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Transparent +Inserts a placeholder for a transparent character. This character takes up the space of "a" but does not display it. You can also type phantom<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Bold font -Inserts a placeholder with bold formatting. You can also type bold <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Bold font +Inserts a placeholder with bold formatting. You can also type bold <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Italic font -Inserts a placeholder with italic formatting. You can also type ital<?> or italic<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Italic font +Inserts a placeholder with italic formatting. You can also type ital<?> or italic<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Resize -Inserts a command for modifying the font size with two placeholders. The first placeholder refers to the font size (for example, 12) and the second one contains the text. For proper structure, insert a space between the values. You can also directly enter size <?> <?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Resize +Inserts a command for modifying the font size with two placeholders. The first placeholder refers to the font size (for example, 12) and the second one contains the text. For proper structure, insert a space between the values. You can also directly enter size <?> <?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Change font -Inserts a command for changing the font type, with two placeholders. Replace the first placeholder with the name of one of the custom fonts, Serif, Sans or Fixed. Replace the second placeholder with the text. You can also type font<?><?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - Use the color command to change the color of your formula. Type color, then type the color name (the available colors are white, black, cyan, magenta, red, blue, green and yellow), then the formula, character or character sequence. The input color green size 20 a results in a green letter "a" with a font size of 20. -The nbold and nitalic commands remove the bold or italic default fonts of formula components. For example, remove italics from the x in the formula 5 x + 3=28 by typing nitalic before the x as in 5 nitalic x + 3=28. -The attributes "acute", "bar", "breve", "check", "circle", "dot", "ddot", "dddot", "grave", "hat", "tilde" and "vec" have fixed sizes. Their width or length cannot be adjusted when positioned over a long symbol. -For size changes you can use size n, +n, -n, *n and /n , where n is a placeholder. This method is useful when the base size of the formula is subject to change. The commands size +n and size -n change point size, and size *n and size /n change the size by a percentage. For example, the command size *1.17 increases the size of a character by exactly 17%. -Note that some entries require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true when you specify attributes with fixed values instead of placeholders. -For more information about formatting in -%PRODUCTNAME - - Math, see Brackets and Grouping. -Information on attributes, indexes and exponents, and scaling can help you structure your documents more efficiently. - - + + + +Change font +Inserts a command for changing the font type, with two placeholders. Replace the first placeholder with the name of one of the custom fonts, Serif, Sans or Fixed. Replace the second placeholder with the text. You can also type font<?><?> directly in the Commands window. + + + + + Use the color command to change the color of your formula. Type color, then type the color name (the available colors are white, black, cyan, magenta, red, blue, green and yellow), then the formula, character or character sequence. The input color green size 20 a results in a green letter "a" with a font size of 20. +The nbold and nitalic commands remove the bold or italic default fonts of formula components. For example, remove italics from the x in the formula 5 x + 3=28 by typing nitalic before the x as in 5 nitalic x + 3=28. +The attributes "acute", "bar", "breve", "check", "circle", "dot", "ddot", "dddot", "grave", "hat", "tilde" and "vec" have fixed sizes. Their width or length cannot be adjusted when positioned over a long symbol. +For size changes you can use size n, +n, -n, *n and /n , where n is a placeholder. This method is useful when the base size of the formula is subject to change. The commands size +n and size -n change point size, and size *n and size /n change the size by a percentage. For example, the command size *1.17 increases the size of a character by exactly 17%. +Note that some entries require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true when you specify attributes with fixed values instead of placeholders. +For more information about formatting in +%PRODUCTNAME + + Math, see Brackets and Grouping. +Information on attributes, indexes and exponents, and scaling can help you structure your documents more efficiently. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp index 894a97dcb2..bc13ed90e2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Format -/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Format +/text/smath/01/03090700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-formatting in $[officename] Math -$[officename] Math; formatting -superscripts -binomials -vertical elements -lines; inserting in formulas -subscripts -stacks -vertical arrangement of elements -small gaps -alignment; left (Math) -left-justified alignment (Math) -alignment; horizontally centered (Math) -centered horizontally; alignment (Math) -alignment; right (Math) -right-justified alignment in %PRODUCTNAME Math -matrices; arranging -spaces in formulas -gaps in formulas -inserting; gaps +formatting in $[officename] Math +$[officename] Math; formatting +superscripts +binomials +vertical elements +lines; inserting in formulas +subscripts +stacks +vertical arrangement of elements +small gaps +alignment; left (Math) +left-justified alignment (Math) +alignment; horizontally centered (Math) +centered horizontally; alignment (Math) +alignment; right (Math) +right-justified alignment in %PRODUCTNAME Math +matrices; arranging +spaces in formulas +gaps in formulas +inserting; gaps arranging;matrices - -Format -You can choose among various options for formatting a $[officename] Math formula. The format options are displayed in the lower half of the Selection window. These options are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. -
- -The following is a complete list of all available formatting options in $[officename] Math. The icon next to the formatting option indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (menu View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. -The letter "a" refers to the placeholder in your formula which you would like to assign to the respective formatting. You can substitute this character for any other you like. -Formatting options - - - + +Format +You can choose among various options for formatting a $[officename] Math formula. The format options are displayed in the lower half of the Selection window. These options are also listed in the context menu of the Commands window. + + +The following is a complete list of all available formatting options in $[officename] Math. The icon next to the formatting option indicates that it can be accessed through the Selection window (menu View - Selection) or through the context menu of the Commands window. +The letter "a" refers to the placeholder in your formula which you would like to assign to the respective formatting. You can substitute this character for any other you like. +Formatting options +
+ + Icon - - - -Superscript left -Inserts a superscript to the left of a placeholder. You can also type <?>lsup{<?>} in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Superscript left +Inserts a superscript to the left of a placeholder. You can also type <?>lsup{<?>} in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Superscript top -Inserts a superscript directly above a placeholder. You can also type <?>csup<?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Superscript top +Inserts a superscript directly above a placeholder. You can also type <?>csup<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Superscript right -Inserts a superscript to the right of a placeholder. You can also type <?>^{<?>} directly in the Commands window, or you can use rsup or sup. - - -
- - - - + + + +Superscript right +Inserts a superscript to the right of a placeholder. You can also type <?>^{<?>} directly in the Commands window, or you can use rsup or sup. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Vertical stack (2 elements) -Inserts a vertical stack (binomial) with two placeholders. You can also type binom<?><?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Vertical stack (2 elements) +Inserts a vertical stack (binomial) with two placeholders. You can also type binom<?><?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -New line -Inserts a new line in your document. You can also type newline directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +New line +Inserts a new line in your document. You can also type newline directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Subscript left -Inserts a subscript to the left of a placeholder. You can also type <?>lsub{<?>} in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Subscript left +Inserts a subscript to the left of a placeholder. You can also type <?>lsub{<?>} in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Subscript bottom -Inserts a subscript directly under a placeholder. You can also type <?>csub<?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Subscript bottom +Inserts a subscript directly under a placeholder. You can also type <?>csub<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Subscript right -Inserts a subscript to the right of a placeholder. You can also type <?>_{<?>} in the Commands window, and the subscript dash can be replaced by rsub or sub. - - -
- - - - + + + +Subscript right +Inserts a subscript to the right of a placeholder. You can also type <?>_{<?>} in the Commands window, and the subscript dash can be replaced by rsub or sub. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Vertical stack (3 elements) -Inserts a vertical stack with three. You can also type stack {<?>#<?>#<?>} in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Vertical stack (3 elements) +Inserts a vertical stack with three. You can also type stack {<?>#<?>#<?>} in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Small gap -Inserts a small gap between a placeholder and the next element. You can also type ` directly in the Commands window. The command must appear to the left or right of a symbol, variable, number or complete command. - - -
- - - - + + + +Small gap +Inserts a small gap between a placeholder and the next element. You can also type ` directly in the Commands window. The command must appear to the left or right of a symbol, variable, number or complete command. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Align left -This icon assigns left-alignment to "a" and inserts a placeholder. You can type alignl<?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Align left +This icon assigns left-alignment to "a" and inserts a placeholder. You can type alignl<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Align to horizontal center -Assigns horizontal central alignment to "a" and inserts a placeholder. You can also type alignc<?> directly in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Align to horizontal center +Assigns horizontal central alignment to "a" and inserts a placeholder. You can also type alignc<?> directly in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Align right -Inserts the command for right alignment and a placeholder. You can also type alignr<?> in the Commands window. - - -
- - - - + + + +Align right +Inserts the command for right alignment and a placeholder. You can also type alignr<?> in the Commands window. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Matrix stack -This icon inserts a matrix with four placeholders. You can also type matrix{<?>#<?>##<?>#<?>#} directly in the Commands window. The position of an element inside this diagram is indicated by two coordinates; the first specifies the line number and the second the column number. You can expand this matrix in any direction in the Commands window by adding characters. - - -
- - - - + + + +Matrix stack +This icon inserts a matrix with four placeholders. You can also type matrix{<?>#<?>##<?>#<?>#} directly in the Commands window. The position of an element inside this diagram is indicated by two coordinates; the first specifies the line number and the second the column number. You can expand this matrix in any direction in the Commands window by adding characters. + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - -Gap -This icon inserts a gap or space between placeholders. You can also type ~ directly in the Commands window. The command must appear to the left or right of a symbol, variable, number or complete command. - - -
- -For alignment, the alignl, alignc and alignr commands are especially effective, if you are - - -aligning numbers and denominators, for example {alignl a}over{b+c} - - - -constructing binomials or stacks, for example binom{2*n}{alignr k} - - - -aligning the elements in a matrix, for example matrix{alignr a#b+2##c+1/3#alignl d} and - - -beginning a new line, for example a+b-c newline alignr x/y - - - -When using the align instructions, note that - - -they can only placed at the beginning of expressions and can only occur once. Therefore you can type a+b alignr c, but not a+alignr b - - - -they affect each other, which means that typing {alignl{alignr a}}over{b+c} aligns a on the right. - - -If a line or an expression begins with text, it is aligned on the left by default. You can change this with the any of the align commands. An example is stack{a+b-c*d#alignr "text"}, where "text" appears aligned to the right. Note that text must always be surrounded by quotation marks. -The standard centralized formulas can be aligned to the left without using the Format - Alignment menu. To do this, place an empty character string, that is, the inverted commas which surround any text "", before the section of formula that you want to align. For example, typing "" a+b newline "" c+d results in both equations being left-aligned instead of centered. -When typing information in the command window, note that some formats require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true when entering values (for example, a lsup{3}) instead of placeholders. -Click Brackets and Grouping for more information about formatting in $[officename] Math. -Useful information about Indexes and Exponents and Scaling, helps you organize your document in the best possible way. - - + + + +Gap +This icon inserts a gap or space between placeholders. You can also type ~ directly in the Commands window. The command must appear to the left or right of a symbol, variable, number or complete command. + + + + +For alignment, the alignl, alignc and alignr commands are especially effective, if you are + + +aligning numbers and denominators, for example {alignl a}over{b+c} + + + +constructing binomials or stacks, for example binom{2*n}{alignr k} + + + +aligning the elements in a matrix, for example matrix{alignr a#b+2##c+1/3#alignl d} and + + +beginning a new line, for example a+b-c newline alignr x/y + + + +When using the align instructions, note that + + +they can only placed at the beginning of expressions and can only occur once. Therefore you can type a+b alignr c, but not a+alignr b + + + +they affect each other, which means that typing {alignl{alignr a}}over{b+c} aligns a on the right. + + +If a line or an expression begins with text, it is aligned on the left by default. You can change this with the any of the align commands. An example is stack{a+b-c*d#alignr "text"}, where "text" appears aligned to the right. Note that text must always be surrounded by quotation marks. +The standard centralized formulas can be aligned to the left without using the Format - Alignment menu. To do this, place an empty character string, that is, the inverted commas which surround any text "", before the section of formula that you want to align. For example, typing "" a+b newline "" c+d results in both equations being left-aligned instead of centered. +When typing information in the command window, note that some formats require spaces for the correct structure. This is especially true when entering values (for example, a lsup{3}) instead of placeholders. +Click Brackets and Grouping for more information about formatting in $[officename] Math. +Useful information about Indexes and Exponents and Scaling, helps you organize your document in the best possible way. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp index fd1a74db20..0fe4306624 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Indexes and Exponents -/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30770# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Indexes and Exponents +/text/smath/01/03091200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30770# + + -indexes and exponents in $[officename] Math +indexes and exponents in $[officename] Math exponents and indexes in $[officename] Math - -Indexes and Exponents -Here, you will find basic information about indexes and exponents in $[officename] Math. You can try the examples described here to help you understand the details discussed. (The quotation marks in this text are for emphasis purposes only and are not part of the examples.) -The index and exponent for a character are displayed one on top of the other, left-justified to the base character. For example, type a_2^3 or a^3_2. This can be in any order. Instead of '_' and '^', you can use 'sub' and 'sup'. -However, it is no longer possible to use the following patterns -a_2_3 -a^2^3 -a_2^3_4 -Each sub-/superscript position of a base character can only be used once. You must use brackets to indicate the desired result. The following examples illustrate this -a_{2_3} -a^{2^3} -a_2^{3_4} -a_{2^3}^{4_5} -Unlike other formula editors where "_" and " ^ " only refer to the next character ("a_24" refers only to the "2"), $[officename] Math refers to the entire number(s)/name(s)/text. If you want to put superscripts and subscripts in sequence, the expression can be written as follows: a_2{}^3 or a^3{}_2 -To write tensors, $[officename] Math provides several options. In addition to the notation "R_i{}^{jk}{}_l", common in other applications, additional notations can be used, namely "R_i{}^jk{}_l" and "{{R_i}^jk}_l." -Super- and subscripts to the left of the base character can also be right-justified. To do this, the new commands "lsub" and "lsup" are used. Both commands have the same effect as "sub" and "sup", except that they are left of the base character. See also "a lsub 2 lsup 3." -The rules governing unambiguity and the necessity of using brackets remain the same. In principle, this can be achieved with {}_2^3 a. -The commands "sub" and "sup" are also available as "rsub" and "rsup". -Using the "csub" and "csup" commands, you can write super- and subscripts directly above or below a character. An example is "a csub y csup x". Combinations of indexes and exponents together are also possible: "abc_1^2 lsub 3 lsup 4 csub 55555 csup 66666." -Super- and subscripts can be attached to most unary and binary operators. Two examples: "a div_2 b a<csub n b +_2 h" and "a toward csub f b x toward csup f y." -Be sure to to also enter all spaces between characters when entering these examples into the Commands window. - - + +Indexes and Exponents +Here, you will find basic information about indexes and exponents in $[officename] Math. You can try the examples described here to help you understand the details discussed. (The quotation marks in this text are for emphasis purposes only and are not part of the examples.) +The index and exponent for a character are displayed one on top of the other, left-justified to the base character. For example, type a_2^3 or a^3_2. This can be in any order. Instead of '_' and '^', you can use 'sub' and 'sup'. +However, it is no longer possible to use the following patterns +a_2_3 +a^2^3 +a_2^3_4 +Each sub-/superscript position of a base character can only be used once. You must use brackets to indicate the desired result. The following examples illustrate this +a_{2_3} +a^{2^3} +a_2^{3_4} +a_{2^3}^{4_5} +Unlike other formula editors where "_" and " ^ " only refer to the next character ("a_24" refers only to the "2"), $[officename] Math refers to the entire number(s)/name(s)/text. If you want to put superscripts and subscripts in sequence, the expression can be written as follows: a_2{}^3 or a^3{}_2 +To write tensors, $[officename] Math provides several options. In addition to the notation "R_i{}^{jk}{}_l", common in other applications, additional notations can be used, namely "R_i{}^jk{}_l" and "{{R_i}^jk}_l." +Super- and subscripts to the left of the base character can also be right-justified. To do this, the new commands "lsub" and "lsup" are used. Both commands have the same effect as "sub" and "sup", except that they are left of the base character. See also "a lsub 2 lsup 3." +The rules governing unambiguity and the necessity of using brackets remain the same. In principle, this can be achieved with {}_2^3 a. +The commands "sub" and "sup" are also available as "rsub" and "rsup". +Using the "csub" and "csup" commands, you can write super- and subscripts directly above or below a character. An example is "a csub y csup x". Combinations of indexes and exponents together are also possible: "abc_1^2 lsub 3 lsup 4 csub 55555 csup 66666." +Super- and subscripts can be attached to most unary and binary operators. Two examples: "a div_2 b a<csub n b +_2 h" and "a toward csub f b x toward csup f y." +Be sure to to also enter all spaces between characters when entering these examples into the Commands window. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp index df8cf30ed7..c9fb553cb5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Other Symbols -/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Other Symbols +/text/smath/01/03091600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-mathematical symbols; other -real part of complex numbers -symbols;for complex numbers -partial differentiation symbol -infinity symbol -Nabla operator -there exists symbol -existence quantor symbol -for all symbol -universal quantifier symbol -h-bar symbol -lambda-bar symbol -imaginary part of a complex number -complex numbers; symbols -weierstrass p symbol -left arrow symbol -right arrow symbol -up arrow symbol -down arrow symbol -arrows;symbols in %PRODUCTNAME Math -center dots symbol -axis-ellipsis -vertical dots symbol -diagonal upward dots;symbol -diagonal downward dots;symbol -epsilon; back -back epsilon symbol -placeholders; inserting in formulas +mathematical symbols; other +real part of complex numbers +symbols;for complex numbers +partial differentiation symbol +infinity symbol +Nabla operator +there exists symbol +existence quantor symbol +for all symbol +universal quantifier symbol +h-bar symbol +lambda-bar symbol +imaginary part of a complex number +complex numbers; symbols +weierstrass p symbol +left arrow symbol +right arrow symbol +up arrow symbol +down arrow symbol +arrows;symbols in %PRODUCTNAME Math +center dots symbol +axis-ellipsis +vertical dots symbol +diagonal upward dots;symbol +diagonal downward dots;symbol +epsilon; back +back epsilon symbol +placeholders; inserting in formulas ellipsis symbols - -Other Symbols -Shows miscellaneous mathematical symbols. -
- -Symbols in detail - - - + +Other Symbols +Shows miscellaneous mathematical symbols. + + +Symbols in detail +
+ + Icon - - - - - -Partial - - - - - - -Inserts the symbol for a partial differentiation.Command for the Commands window: partial - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Partial + + + + + + +Inserts the symbol for a partial differentiation.Command for the Commands window: partial + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Infinity - - - - - - -Inserts the symbol for infinity.Command for the Commands window: infinity or infty - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Infinity + + + + + + +Inserts the symbol for infinity.Command for the Commands window: infinity or infty + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Nabla - - - - - - -Inserts the symbol for a Nabla vector operator.Command for the Commands window: nabla - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Nabla + + + + + + +Inserts the symbol for a Nabla vector operator.Command for the Commands window: nabla + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -There exists - - - - - - -Inserts the symbol for an Existence quantor.Command for the Commands window: exists - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +There exists + + + + + + +Inserts the symbol for an Existence quantor.Command for the Commands window: exists + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -For all - - - - - - -Inserts the symbol for a universal quantifier "for all".Command for the Commands window: forall - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +For all + + + + + + +Inserts the symbol for a universal quantifier "for all".Command for the Commands window: forall + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -h Bar -Inserts the symbol for the h-bar constant.Command for the Commands window: hbar - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +h Bar +Inserts the symbol for the h-bar constant.Command for the Commands window: hbar + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Lambda Bar - - - - - - -Inserts the symbol for a lambda-bar.Command for the Commands window: lambdabar - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Lambda Bar + + + + + + +Inserts the symbol for a lambda-bar.Command for the Commands window: lambdabar + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Real Part - - - - - - -Inserts the symbol for the real part of a complex number.Command for the Commands window: re - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Real Part + + + + + + +Inserts the symbol for the real part of a complex number.Command for the Commands window: re + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Imaginary Part - - - - - - -Inserts the symbol for the imaginary part of a complex number.Command for the Commands window: im - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Imaginary Part + + + + + + +Inserts the symbol for the imaginary part of a complex number.Command for the Commands window: im + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Weierstrass p - - - - - - -This icon inserts a Weierstrass p-function symbol.Command for the Commands window: wp - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Weierstrass p + + + + + + +This icon inserts a Weierstrass p-function symbol.Command for the Commands window: wp + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Left Arrow - - - - - - -This icon inserts a left arrow.Command for the Commands window: leftarrow - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Left Arrow + + + + + + +This icon inserts a left arrow.Command for the Commands window: leftarrow + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Right Arrow - - - - - - -This icon inserts a right arrow.Command for the Commands window: rightarrow - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Right Arrow + + + + + + +This icon inserts a right arrow.Command for the Commands window: rightarrow + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Up Arrow - - - - - - -This icon inserts an up arrow.Command for the Commands window: uparrow - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Up Arrow + + + + + + +This icon inserts an up arrow.Command for the Commands window: uparrow + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Down Arrow - - - - - - -This icon inserts a down arrow.Command for the Commands window: downarrow - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Down Arrow + + + + + + +This icon inserts a down arrow.Command for the Commands window: downarrow + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Ellipsis - - - - - - -This icon inserts an ellipsis (three low horizontal dots).Command for the Commands window: dotslow - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Ellipsis + + + + + + +This icon inserts an ellipsis (three low horizontal dots).Command for the Commands window: dotslow + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Math-axis Ellipsis - - - - - - -This icon inserts an axis-ellipsis (three vertically centered horizontal dots).Command for the Commands window: dotaxis - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Math-axis Ellipsis + + + + + + +This icon inserts an axis-ellipsis (three vertically centered horizontal dots).Command for the Commands window: dotaxis + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Vertical Ellipsis - - - - - - -This icon inserts a vertical ellipsis (three vertical dots).Command for the Commands window: dotsvert - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Vertical Ellipsis + + + + + + +This icon inserts a vertical ellipsis (three vertical dots).Command for the Commands window: dotsvert + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Upward Diagonal Ellipsis - - - - - - -This icon inserts an upward diagonal ellipsis (three dots on the diagonal from the bottom left to the top right)Command for the Commands window: dotsup or dotsdiag - - - -
- - - - + + + + + +Upward Diagonal Ellipsis + + + + + + +This icon inserts an upward diagonal ellipsis (three dots on the diagonal from the bottom left to the top right)Command for the Commands window: dotsup or dotsdiag + + + +
+ + + + Icon - - - - - -Downward Diagonal Ellipsis - - - - - - -This icon inserts a downward diagonal ellipsis (three dots on the diagonal from upper left to lower right).Command for the Commands window: dotsdown - - - -
- -A back epsilon can be inserted by typing backepsilon in the Commands window. -To insert a placeholder into your formula, type <?> in the Commands window. - - + + + + + +Downward Diagonal Ellipsis + + + + + + +This icon inserts a downward diagonal ellipsis (three dots on the diagonal from upper left to lower right).Command for the Commands window: dotsdown + + + + + +A back epsilon can be inserted by typing backepsilon in the Commands window. +To insert a placeholder into your formula, type <?> in the Commands window. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp index 74fe5c704c..4c097e7c3c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Fonts -/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -dedr: fixed #i30893# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Fonts +/text/smath/01/05010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +dedr: fixed #i30893# + + -fonts; in $[officename] Math -formula fonts; defining +fonts; in $[officename] Math +formula fonts; defining defining; formula fonts - -Fonts + +Fonts Defines the fonts that can be applied to formula elements. - - -Formula Fonts -You can define fonts for the variables, functions, numbers and inserted text that form the elements of your formula. -The list boxes in the Font dialog display Times New Roman as the default font for all elements. To change to a different font, click Modify, the select the element type. A new dialog box appears. Select the desired font and check any desired attributes, then click OK. To set the changes as the default fonts, click the Default button. + + +Formula Fonts +You can define fonts for the variables, functions, numbers and inserted text that form the elements of your formula. +The list boxes in the Font dialog display Times New Roman as the default font for all elements. To change to a different font, click Modify, the select the element type. A new dialog box appears. Select the desired font and check any desired attributes, then click OK. To set the changes as the default fonts, click the Default button. If you want to mark individual text segments with a font other than that used for the whole text, then choose the FONT command in the Commands window. - -Variables + +Variables You can select the fonts for the variables in your formula. For example, in the formula x=SIN(y), x and y are variables, and will reflect the assigned font. - -Functions + +Functions Select the fonts for names and properties of functions. For example, the functions in the formula x=SIN(y) are =SIN( ). - -Numbers + +Numbers You can select the fonts for the numbers in your formula. - -Text -Define the fonts for the text in your formula here. -Custom Fonts -In this section of the Fonts dialog you can define fonts, with which you can format other text components in the formula. The three basic fonts Serif, Sans and Fixed are available. You can add any other font to each standard installed basic font. Every font installed on your system is available for you to use. Select the Modify button to expand the selection offered in the list box. + +Text +Define the fonts for the text in your formula here. +Custom Fonts +In this section of the Fonts dialog you can define fonts, with which you can format other text components in the formula. The three basic fonts Serif, Sans and Fixed are available. You can add any other font to each standard installed basic font. Every font installed on your system is available for you to use. Select the Modify button to expand the selection offered in the list box. These custom fonts are used if you set a different font with the FONT command in the Commands window. - -Serif + +Serif You can specify the font to be used for the font serif format. Serifs are the small "guides" that can be seen, for example, at the bottom of a capital A when the Times serif font is used. Using serifs is quite helpful since it guides a reader's eye in a straight line and can speed up reading. - -Sans + +Sans You can specify the font to be used for sans font formatting. - -Fixed + +Fixed You can specify the font to be used for fixed font formatting. - -Modify + +Modify Click one of the choices from this pop-up menu to access the Fonts dialog, where you can define the font and attributes for the respective formula and for custom fonts. - -Default -Click this button to save your changes as the default for all new formulas. After confirming the changes, click the Yes button. - - + +Default +Click this button to save your changes as the default for all new formulas. After confirming the changes, click the Yes button. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp index 747a99744b..961331a315 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Catalog -/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Catalog +/text/smath/01/06010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-symbols; entering in %PRODUCTNAME Math -%PRODUCTNAME Math; entering symbols in -catalog for mathematical symbols -mathematical symbols;catalog -Greek symbols in formulas +symbols; entering in %PRODUCTNAME Math +%PRODUCTNAME Math; entering symbols in +catalog for mathematical symbols +mathematical symbols;catalog +Greek symbols in formulas formulas; entering symbols in - + - -Catalog + +Catalog Opens the Symbols dialog, in which you can select a symbol to insert in the formula. - -
+ + - -Symbol Set -All symbols are organized into symbol sets. Select the desired symbol set from the list box. The corresponding group of symbols appear in the field below. -When a symbol is selected, its command name appears below the symbol list and a magnified version appears in a box to the right. Note that the name must be typed in the Commands window exactly as displayed here (case-sensitive). + +Symbol Set +All symbols are organized into symbol sets. Select the desired symbol set from the list box. The corresponding group of symbols appear in the field below. +When a symbol is selected, its command name appears below the symbol list and a magnified version appears in a box to the right. Note that the name must be typed in the Commands window exactly as displayed here (case-sensitive). To insert a symbol, select it from the list and click Insert. The corresponding command name appears in the Commands window. - -Edit + +Edit Click here to open the Edit Symbols dialog. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp index 851448fcc8..e4882ccefd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Edit Symbols -/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fix to #i28380# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Edit Symbols +/text/smath/01/06010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fix to #i28380# + + -new symbols in %PRODUCTNAME Math +new symbols in %PRODUCTNAME Math symbols; adding in %PRODUCTNAME Math - -Edit Symbols -Use this dialog to add symbols to a symbol set, to edit symbol sets, or to modify symbol notations. You can also define new symbol sets, assign names to symbols, or to modify existing symbol sets. + +Edit Symbols +Use this dialog to add symbols to a symbol set, to edit symbol sets, or to modify symbol notations. You can also define new symbol sets, assign names to symbols, or to modify existing symbol sets. - -Old Symbol + +Old Symbol Select the name of the current symbol. The symbol, the name of the symbol, and the set that the symbol belongs to are displayed in the left preview pane at the bottom of the dialog box. - -Old Symbol Set + +Old Symbol Set This list box contains the name of the current symbol set. If you want, you can also select a different symbol set. - -Symbol -Lists the names for the symbols in the current symbol set. Select a name from the list or type a name for a newly added symbol. -Adding a New Symbol -To add a symbol to a symbol set, select a font in the Font box, and then click a symbol in symbols pane. In the Symbol box, type a name for the symbol. In the Symbol set, select a symbol set, or type a name for a new symbol set. The right preview pane displays the symbol that you selected. Click OK. -Modifying the Name of a Symbol + +Symbol +Lists the names for the symbols in the current symbol set. Select a name from the list or type a name for a newly added symbol. +Adding a New Symbol +To add a symbol to a symbol set, select a font in the Font box, and then click a symbol in symbols pane. In the Symbol box, type a name for the symbol. In the Symbol set, select a symbol set, or type a name for a new symbol set. The right preview pane displays the symbol that you selected. Click OK. +Modifying the Name of a Symbol To change the name of a symbol, select it in the Old symbol list box. Then enter the new name in the Symbol box. Check whether the desired character is in the preview window before you click the Modify button. Click OK. - -Symbol Set -The Symbol s -et list box contains the names of all existing symbol sets. You can modify a symbol set or create a new one. -Creating a New Symbol Set + +Symbol Set +The Symbol s +et list box contains the names of all existing symbol sets. You can modify a symbol set or create a new one. +Creating a New Symbol Set To create a new symbol set, type a name for it in the Symbol set list box and add at least one symbol. Click OK to close the dialog. The new symbol set is now available under the new name. - -Font + +Font Displays the name of the current font and enables you to select a different font. - -Subset + +Subset If you selected a non-symbol font in the Font list box, you can select a Unicode subset in which to place your new or edited symbol. When a subset has been selected, all symbols belonging to this subset of the current symbol set are displayed in the symbols list above. - -Typeface + +Typeface The current typeface is displayed. You can change the typeface by selecting one from the list box. - -Add + +Add Click this button to add the symbol shown in the right preview window to the current symbol set. It will be saved under the name displayed in the Symbol list box. You must specify a name under Symbol or Symbol Set to be able to use this button. Names cannot be used more than once. - -Modify -Click this button to replace the name of the symbol shown in the left preview window (the old name is displayed in the Old symbol list box) with the new name you have entered in the Symbol list box. -Moving a Symbol to Another Symbol Set + +Modify +Click this button to replace the name of the symbol shown in the left preview window (the old name is displayed in the Old symbol list box) with the new name you have entered in the Symbol list box. +Moving a Symbol to Another Symbol Set As an example, to transfer the large ALPHA from the "Greek" set to the "Special" set, select the old set (Greek) and then the ALPHA symbol using the two top list boxes. The symbol appears in the left preview window. In the Symbol set list box, select the "Special" set. Click Modify and then OK. The ALPHA symbol is now only in the "Special" symbol set. - -Delete -Click to remove the symbol shown in the left preview window from the current symbol set. There will be no security query. Deleting the last remaining symbol of a symbol set also deletes the symbol set. -You can also click Cancel at any time to close the dialog without saving any of the changes. - - + +Delete +Click to remove the symbol shown in the left preview window from the current symbol set. There will be no security query. Deleting the last remaining symbol of a symbol set also deletes the symbol set. +You can also click Cancel at any time to close the dialog without saving any of the changes. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp index 11a81bbd60..6812d697eb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Formula Cursor -/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Formula Cursor +/text/smath/02/03010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -formula cursor in $[officename] Math +formula cursor in $[officename] Math cursor; in $[officename] Math - -Formula Cursor + +Formula Cursor Use this icon in the main toolbar to turn the formula cursor on or off. The part of the formula where the cursor is positioned in the Commands window is marked with a thin border when the formula cursor is active. - - -You can also click a position in the document to move the cursor to its corresponding position in the Commands window. -Double-clicking a character or symbol in the document moves the focus of the cursor to the Commands window and highlights its respective position. - - + + +You can also click a position in the document to move the cursor to its corresponding position in the Commands window. +Double-clicking a character or symbol in the document moves the focus of the cursor to the Commands window and highlights its respective position. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp index ba9d379dd0..c54a5ffee2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Shortcuts ($[officename] Math Accessibility) -/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Shortcuts ($[officename] Math Accessibility) +/text/smath/guide/keyboard.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + accessibility; $[officename] Math shortcuts - + Shortcuts ($[officename] Math Accessibility) - -You can control $[officename] Math without a mouse. -Inserting a Formula Directly -If you want to insert a formula into a text document, and you already know the correct writing, you can proceed as follows: - - -Write the formula into your text - - -Select the formula - - -Choose the command Insert - Object - Formula. - - -Inserting a Formula using a Window - - -If you want to use the $[officename] Math interface to edit a formula, choose the command Insert - Object - Formula without any text selected. - - - - -The cursor waits in the Commands window and you can type the formula. - - -You can compose formulas using the Selection window. Open it with the menu View - Selection if it is not already open. - - -If the Selection window is open, use F6 to switch from the Commands window to the Selection window and back. - - -Selection window - - - - - - - - - + +You can control $[officename] Math without a mouse. +Inserting a Formula Directly +If you want to insert a formula into a text document, and you already know the correct writing, you can proceed as follows: + + +Write the formula into your text + + +Select the formula + + +Choose the command Insert - Object - Formula. + + +Inserting a Formula using a Window + + +If you want to use the $[officename] Math interface to edit a formula, choose the command Insert - Object - Formula without any text selected. + + + + +The cursor waits in the Commands window and you can type the formula. + + +You can compose formulas using the Selection window. Open it with the menu View - Selection if it is not already open. + + +If the Selection window is open, use F6 to switch from the Commands window to the Selection window and back. + + +Selection window + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp index 4742a0b378..6d91fd8e05 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/main.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Instructions for Using $[officename] Math -/text/smath/guide/main.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Instructions for Using $[officename] Math +/text/smath/guide/main.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -$[officename] Math;general instructions +$[officename] Math;general instructions instructions; $[officename] Math - + Instructions for Using $[officename] Math - - -Entering and Editing Formulas - - - - - - - - - + + +Entering and Editing Formulas + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp index 230c9a9f6e..83ba36b609 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -File Menu -/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -File Menu + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +File Menu +/text/swriter/00/00000401.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +File Menu Menu File - Export - + Choose File - Send - Outline to Presentation - + Choose File - Send - Outline to Clipboard - + Choose File - Send - Create AutoAbstract - + Choose File - Send - AutoAbstract to Presentation - + Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document - + Choose File - Send - Create HTML Document - Current Style, menu File - Send - Create Master Document - Current Style - -
-Choose Tools - Configure. Then configure the Mail Merge dialog to a new menu entry.UFI: this calls the old dialog; see Mail Merge spec -
-
- - - + +
+Choose Tools - Configure. Then configure the Mail Merge dialog to a new menu entry.UFI: this calls the old dialog; see Mail Merge spec +
+
+
+ + Icon - - - -Mail Merge - - -
- -
- - + + + +Mail Merge + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp index 2951c31865..0c89919b47 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -View Menu -/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -View Menu + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +View Menu +/text/swriter/00/00000403.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +View Menu Choose View - Ruler - + Choose View - Text Boundaries - -
-Choose View - Field Shadings - + +
+Choose View - Field Shadings + Command -Ctrl+F8 -
-
-Choose View - Field Names - +Ctrl+F8 +
+
+Choose View - Field Names + Command -Ctrl+F9 -
-
-Choose View - Nonprinting Characters - +Ctrl+F9 +
+
+Choose View - Nonprinting Characters + Command -Ctrl+F10 -On Main toolbar, click -
- - - +Ctrl+F10 +On Main toolbar, click +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Nonprinting Characters - - -
- -
-
-
-Choose View - Online Layout - -On main toolbar, click -
- - - + + + +Nonprinting Characters + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose View - Online Layout + +On main toolbar, click +
+ + + Icon - - - -Online Layout - - -
- -
-
-
-Choose View - Print Layout - -On Main toolbar/Web, click -
- - - + + + +Online Layout + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose View - Print Layout + +On Main toolbar/Web, click +
+ + + Icon - - - -Print Layout On/Off - - -
- -
-
+ + + +Print Layout On/Off + + + + +
+ Choose View - Hidden Paragraphs - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp index 2be66f7d6d..947b729570 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -AutoAbstract to Presentation -/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +AutoAbstract to Presentation +/text/swriter/01/01160400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -AutoAbstract to Presentation -Opens the current document as a $[officename] Impress presentation. The current document must contain at least one predefined heading paragraph style. -
- -Included Outline Levels -Enter the number of outline levels to include in the new presentation. For example, if you choose one level, only the paragraphs that follow the "Heading 1" paragraph style are included. -Subpoints per Level -Enter the number of paragraphs that you want to include below each outline level (heading). - - + +AutoAbstract to Presentation +Opens the current document as a $[officename] Impress presentation. The current document must contain at least one predefined heading paragraph style. + + +Included Outline Levels +Enter the number of outline levels to include in the new presentation. For example, if you choose one level, only the paragraphs that follow the "Heading 1" paragraph style are included. +Subpoints per Level +Enter the number of paragraphs that you want to include below each outline level (heading). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp index c407804b4a..4c4b02b380 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Name and Path of HTML Documents -/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Name and Path of HTML Documents +/text/swriter/01/01160500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Name and Path of HTML Documents + +Name and Path of HTML Documents Saves the file as an HTML document, so that you can view it in a web browser. You can choose to create a separate page when a heading style that you specify is encountered in the document. If you choose this option, a separate page of links to all of the pages that are generated is also created. - - + + Consecutive numbers are added to the file name if more than one HTML document is created. The titles of the HTML pages are created from the topmost chapter heading. - -Display area + +Display area - -File name + +File name - -Current Style + +Current Style Select the heading paragraph style that you want to use to indicate a new HTML page. To use this option, apply one of the heading paragraph styles to the paragraphs where you want to start a new page in the document. - -File type + +File type - -Save + +Save - -Automatic file name extension - - - + +Automatic file name extension + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp index dddaf2c5d3..700fcea81a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -AutoText -/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +AutoText +/text/swriter/01/02120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -AutoText + +AutoText Creates, edits, or inserts AutoText. You can store formatted text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText. To quickly insert AutoText, type the shortcut for the AutoText in your document, and then press F3. - -
-You can also long-click the AutoText icon on the Main Toolbar, and then choose the AutoText that you want to insert. - - -AutoText + + +You can also long-click the AutoText icon on the Main Toolbar, and then choose the AutoText that you want to insert. + + +AutoText The AutoText dialog lists the AutoText categories and entries. - -Display remainder of name as a suggestion while typing + +Display remainder of name as a suggestion while typing Displays a suggestion for completing a word as a Help Tip after you type the first three letters of a word that matches an AutoText entry. To accept the suggestion, press Enter. If more than one AutoText entry matches the letters that you type, press Command -Ctrl+Tab to advance through the entries. For example, to insert dummy text, type "Dum", and then press Enter. +Ctrl+Tab to advance through the entries. For example, to insert dummy text, type "Dum", and then press Enter. To display the list in reverse order, press Command Ctrl+Shift+Tab. - -Name + +Name Lists the name of the currently selected AutoText entry. If you have selected text in the document, type the name of the new AutoText entry, click the AutoText button, and then choose New. - -Shortcut -Displays the shortcut for the selected AutoText entry. If you are creating a new AutoText entry, type the shortcut that you want to use for the entry. -List box -Lists the AutoText categories. To view the AutoText entries in a category, double-click the category, or click the plus sign (+) in front of the category. To insert an AutoText entry into the current document, select the entry in the list, and then click Insert. -You can drag and drop AutoText entries from one category to another. -Insert -Inserts the selected AutoText into the current document. -If you insert an unformatted AutoText entry into a paragraph, the entry is formatted with the current paragraph style. + +Shortcut +Displays the shortcut for the selected AutoText entry. If you are creating a new AutoText entry, type the shortcut that you want to use for the entry. +List box +Lists the AutoText categories. To view the AutoText entries in a category, double-click the category, or click the plus sign (+) in front of the category. To insert an AutoText entry into the current document, select the entry in the list, and then click Insert. +You can drag and drop AutoText entries from one category to another. +Insert +Inserts the selected AutoText into the current document. +If you insert an unformatted AutoText entry into a paragraph, the entry is formatted with the current paragraph style. - -AutoText + +AutoText Click to display additional AutoText commands, for example, to create a new AutoText entry from a text selection in the current document. - -New + +New Creates a new AutoText entry from the selection that you made in the current document. The entry is added to the currently selected AutoText category. - -New (text only) + +New (text only) Creates a new AutoText entry only from the text in the selection that you made in the current document. Graphics, tables and other objects are not included. - -Copy + +Copy Copies the selected AutoText to the clipboard. - -Replace + +Replace Replaces the contents of the selected AutoText entry with the selection that made in the current document. - -Rename + +Rename Opens the Rename Text Block, where you can change the name of the selected AutoText entry. - -Edit + +Edit Opens the selected AutoText entry for editing in a separate document. Make the changes that you want, choose File - Save AutoText, and then choose File - Close. - -Macro -Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry. + +Macro +Opens the Assign Macro dialog, where you attach a macro to the selected AutoText entry. You can also use the macros that are linked to some of the provided AutoText entries in AutoText entries that you create. The AutoText entries must be created with the "text only" option. For example, if you insert the string <field:company> in an AutoText entry, and $[officename] replaces the string with the contents of the corresponding database field. - -Import + +Import Opens a dialog where you can select the MS 97/2000/XP Word document or template, containing the AutoText entries that you want to import. - -Categories + +Categories Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. - -Edit Categories + +Edit Categories Adds, renames, or deletes AutoText categories. - -Category + +Category Displays the name of the selected AutoText category. To change the name of the category, type a new name, and then click Rename. To create a new category, type a name, and then click New. - -Path + +Path Displays the current path to the directory where the selected AutoText category files are stored. If you are creating an AutoText category, select where you want to store the category files. - -New + +New Creates a new AutoText category using the name that you entered in the Name box. - -Rename + +Rename Changes the name of the selected AutoText category to the name that you enter in the Name box. - -Selection list + +Selection list Lists the existing AutoText categories and the corresponding paths. - -Path -Opens the Select Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText. -To add a new path to an AutoText directory, click the Path button in the AutoText dialog. You can also choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, select AutoText in the list, and then click Edit. - -Save links relative to + +Path +Opens the Select Paths dialog, where you can select the directory to store AutoText. +To add a new path to an AutoText directory, click the Path button in the AutoText dialog. You can also choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, select AutoText in the list, and then click Edit. + +Save links relative to Use this area to set the way $[officename] inserts links to the AutoText directory. - -File system + +File system Links to AutoText directories on your computer are relative. - -Internet + +Internet Links to files on the Internet are relative. - -Show preview -Turns on or off a preview of the selected AutoText entry. -Preview -Shows a preview of the selected AutoText entry. - - + +Show preview +Turns on or off a preview of the selected AutoText entry. +Preview +Shows a preview of the selected AutoText entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp index 12e736891c..c2e8a38078 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Text Boundaries -/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Text Boundaries +/text/swriter/01/03070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Text Boundaries -Shows or hides the boundaries of the printable area of a page. The boundary lines are not printed. -
- - - + +Text Boundaries +Shows or hides the boundaries of the printable area of a page. The boundary lines are not printed. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp index a30c4edff5..89b426fb7d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Field Shadings -/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
+ ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Field Shadings +/text/swriter/01/03080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
- -Field Shadings -Shows or hides field shadings in your document, including non-breaking spaces, custom hyphens, indexes, and footnotes. -
- - -Nonprinting Characters On/Off - - + +Field Shadings +Shows or hides field shadings in your document, including non-breaking spaces, custom hyphens, indexes, and footnotes. +
+ + +Nonprinting Characters On/Off + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp index 21055ba351..f75e14579c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Fields -/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Fields +/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Field Names -Switches the field display between field names and field contents. A check mark indicates that the field names are displayed, and no check mark indicates that field contents are displayed. Some field contents cannot be displayed. -
- -To change the default field display to field names instead of the field contents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select the Field codes checkbox in the Display area. -When you print a document with View - Field Names enabled, you are prompted to include the field names in the print out. - -Insert - Fields. - - + +Field Names +Switches the field display between field names and field contents. A check mark indicates that the field names are displayed, and no check mark indicates that field contents are displayed. Some field contents cannot be displayed. + + +To change the default field display to field names instead of the field contents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select the Field codes checkbox in the Display area. +When you print a document with View - Field Names enabled, you are prompted to include the field names in the print out. + +Insert - Fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp index e8af39c82f..19af11a4e6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Nonprinting Characters -/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Nonprinting Characters +/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Nonprinting Characters -Shows nonprinting characters in your text, such as paragraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, and spaces. -
- -When you delete a paragraph mark, the paragraph that is merged takes on the formatting of the paragraph that the cursor is in. -To specify which nonprinting characters are displayed, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the options that you want in the Display of area. - - + +Nonprinting Characters +Shows nonprinting characters in your text, such as paragraph marks, line breaks, tab stops, and spaces. + + +When you delete a paragraph mark, the paragraph that is merged takes on the formatting of the paragraph that the cursor is in. +To specify which nonprinting characters are displayed, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the options that you want in the Display of area. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp index 6165b81972..dd3fadc716 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Online Layout -/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Online Layout +/text/swriter/01/03120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Web Layout -Displays the document as seen in a Web browser. This is useful when you create HTML documents. -
- - - + +Web Layout +Displays the document as seen in a Web browser. This is useful when you create HTML documents. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp index cc80bd63be..ff40aba437 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Insert Footnote -/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Insert Footnote +/text/swriter/01/04030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Insert Footnote + +Insert Footnote Inserts a footnote or an endnote in the document. The anchor for the note is inserted at the current cursor position. You can choose between automatic numbering or a custom symbol. - + The following applies to both footnotes and endnotes. - + Footnotes are inserted at the end of a page, and endnotes are inserted at the end of a document. - - -Numbering + + +Numbering Select the type of numbering that you want to use for footnotes and endnotes. - -Automatic + +Automatic Automatically assigns consecutive numbers to the footnotes or endnotes that you insert. To change the settings for automatic numbering, choose Tools - Footnotes. - -Character + +Character Choose this option to define a character or symbol for the current footnote. This can be either a letter or number. To assign a special character, click the button at the bottom. - -... + +... Inserts a special character as a footnote or endnote anchor. - -Type + +Type Select whether to insert a footnote or an endnote. Endnote numbering is separate from the footnote numbering. - -Footnote + +Footnote Inserts a footnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a footnote to the bottom of the page. - -Endnote -Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a endnote at the end of the document. - -Tips for working with footnotes. - - + +Endnote +Inserts an endnote anchor at the current cursor position in the document, and adds a endnote at the end of the document. + +Tips for working with footnotes. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp index 8964b0d0e8..5ca20ba412 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Insert Bookmark -/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Insert Bookmark +/text/swriter/01/04040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - - Insert Bookmark + + Insert Bookmark Inserts a bookmark at the cursor position. You can then use the Navigator to quickly jump to the marked location at a later time. In an HTML document, bookmarks are converted to anchors that you can jump to from a hyperlink. - - -To jump to a specific bookmark, press F5 to open the Navigator, click the plus sign (+) next to the Bookmark entry, and then double-click the bookmark. + + +To jump to a specific bookmark, press F5 to open the Navigator, click the plus sign (+) next to the Bookmark entry, and then double-click the bookmark. You can also right-click the Page Number field at the left end of the Status Bar at the bottom of the document window, and then choose the bookmark that you want to jump to. - -Bookmarks -Type the name of the bookmark that you want to create. The lower list contains all of the bookmarks in the current document. To delete a bookmark, select it in the list, and then click Delete. + +Bookmarks +Type the name of the bookmark that you want to create. The lower list contains all of the bookmarks in the current document. To delete a bookmark, select it in the list, and then click Delete. You cannot use the following characters in a bookmark name: / \ @ : * ? " ; , . # - -Delete -To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark from the Insert Bookmark dialog and click the Delete button. No confirmation dialog will follow. - - + +Delete +To delete a bookmark, select the bookmark from the Insert Bookmark dialog and click the Delete button. No confirmation dialog will follow. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp index 78159e4759..e49eb3d5ea 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Caption -/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Caption +/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Caption + +Caption Adds a numbered caption to a selected graphic, table, frame, text frame, or drawing object. You can also access this command by right-clicking the item that you want to add the caption to. - - -Properties + + +Properties Set the caption options for the current selection. - -Category + +Category Select the caption category, or type a name to create a new category. The category text appears before the caption number in the caption label. Each predefined caption category is formatted with a paragraph style of the same name. For example, the "Illustration" caption category is formatted with the "Illustration" paragraph style. - -Numbering + +Numbering Select the type of numbering that you want to use in the caption. - -Caption + +Caption Type the text that you want to appear after the caption number. For example, if you want to label your objects as "Object 1: Text", type a colon (:), a space, and then the text. - -Position + +Position Adds the caption above or below the selected item. This option is only available for some objects. - -Apply border and shadow + +Apply border and shadow Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame. - -Object name -Type a name for the caption object, so that you can use the Navigator to quickly jump to the caption in your document. -Options - - - - - - + +Object name +Type a name for the caption object, so that you can use the Navigator to quickly jump to the caption in your document. +Options + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp index 65fb8009ce..bbf45666bc 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Options -/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -UFI: edited re spec "Enhance Caption Dialog in Writer" - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Options +/text/swriter/01/04060100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe +UFI: edited re spec "Enhance Caption Dialog in Writer" + + - -Options + +Options Adds the chapter number to the caption label. To use this feature, you must first assign an outline level to a paragraph style, and then apply the style to the chapter headings in your document. - - -Numbering by chapter + + +Numbering by chapter When you add chapter numbers to caption labels, the caption numbering is reset when a chapter heading is encountered. For example, if the last figure in chapter 1 is "Figure 1.12", the first figure in the next chapter would be "Figure 2.1". - -Level + +Level Select the number of outline levels from the top of the chapter hierarchy down to include in the caption label. - -Separator -Enter the character that you want to insert between the chapter number and the caption number. -Category and frame format -Character style -Specifies the character style. -Apply border and shadow -Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame. - - - - - - + +Separator +Enter the character that you want to insert between the chapter number and the caption number. +Category and frame format +Character style +Specifies the character style. +Apply border and shadow +Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp index 99f483c4b6..f90b4f08c7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Envelope -/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Envelope +/text/swriter/01/04070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Envelope + +Envelope Creates an envelope. You can specify the dimensions of the envelope, the printing direction, and enter the recipient and return addresses. - - - - + + + + - -New doc. + +New doc. Creates a new document and inserts the envelope. - -Insert -Inserts the envelope before the current page in the document. The envelope is formatted with the Envelope page style. - - - + +Insert +Inserts the envelope before the current page in the document. The envelope is formatted with the Envelope page style. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp index 37977b001b..9c61d56c7b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Database -/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Database +/text/swriter/01/04090006.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Database -You can insert fields from any database, for example, address fields, into your document. -
+ +Database +You can insert fields from any database, for example, address fields, into your document. + - - - - -Field type - - -Meaning - - - - -Any Record - - -Inserts the contents of the database field that you specify in the Record Number box as a mail merge field if the Condition that you enter is met. Only records selected by a multiple selection in the data source view are considered. -You can use this field to insert several records into a document. Simply insert the Any Record field in front of the form letter fields that use a certain record. - - - - -Database Name - - -Inserts the name of the database table selected in the Database selection box. The "Database Name" field is a global field, that is, if you insert a different database name in your document, the contents of all previously inserted "Database Name" fields are updated. - - - - -Mail merge field - - -Inserts the name of a database field as a placeholder, so that you can create a mail merge document. The field content is automatically inserted when you print the form letter. - - - - -Next record - - -Inserts the contents of the next mail merge field in your document, if the condition that you define is met. The records that you want to include must be selected in the data source view. -You can use the "Next record" field to insert the contents of consecutive records between the mail merge fields in a document. - - - - -Record number - - -Inserts the number of the selected database record. - - -
+ + + + +Field type + + +Meaning + + + + +Any Record + + +Inserts the contents of the database field that you specify in the Record Number box as a mail merge field if the Condition that you enter is met. Only records selected by a multiple selection in the data source view are considered. +You can use this field to insert several records into a document. Simply insert the Any Record field in front of the form letter fields that use a certain record. + + + + +Database Name + + +Inserts the name of the database table selected in the Database selection box. The "Database Name" field is a global field, that is, if you insert a different database name in your document, the contents of all previously inserted "Database Name" fields are updated. + + + + +Mail merge field + + +Inserts the name of a database field as a placeholder, so that you can create a mail merge document. The field content is automatically inserted when you print the form letter. + + + + +Next record + + +Inserts the contents of the next mail merge field in your document, if the condition that you define is met. The records that you want to include must be selected in the data source view. +You can use the "Next record" field to insert the contents of consecutive records between the mail merge fields in a document. + + + + +Record number + + +Inserts the number of the selected database record. + + +
- -Database Selection + +Database Selection Select the database table or the database query that you want the field to refer to. You can include fields from more than one database or query in a document. - + If you want, you can assign a condition that must be met before the contents of the "Any Record" and "Next Record" fields are inserted. The default condition is "True", that is, the condition is always true if you do not change the condition text. - -Record number -Enter the number of the record that you want to insert when the condition that you specify is met. The record number corresponds to the current selection in the data source view. For example, if you select the last 5 records in a database containing 10 records, the number of the first record will be 1, and not 6. -If you refer to fields in a different database (or in a different table or query within the same database), $[officename] determines the record number relative to the current selection. -Format + +Record number +Enter the number of the record that you want to insert when the condition that you specify is met. The record number corresponds to the current selection in the data source view. For example, if you select the last 5 records in a database containing 10 records, the number of the first record will be 1, and not 6. +If you refer to fields in a different database (or in a different table or query within the same database), $[officename] determines the record number relative to the current selection. +Format Select the format of the field that you want to insert. This option is only available for date fields. - -From database + +From database Uses the format defined in the selected database. - -Browse + +Browse Opens a file open dialog to select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Databases Selection list. - -User defined + +User defined Applies the format that you select in the List of user-defined formats. - -List of user-defined formats -Lists the available user-defined formats. - - + +List of user-defined formats +Lists the available user-defined formats. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp index b8a21655ec..5ab2e81b2e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Special Tags -/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Special Tags +/text/swriter/01/04090007.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -tags; in $[officename] Writer -$[officename] Writer; tags -HTML;fields -fields;HTML import and export -time fields;HTML -date fields;HTML +tags; in $[officename] Writer +$[officename] Writer; tags +HTML;fields +fields;HTML import and export +time fields;HTML +date fields;HTML DocInformation fields - -Special Tags -When you save a document that contains fields as an HTML document, $[officename] automatically converts date, time, and DocInformation fields to special HTML tags. The field contents are inserted between the opening and closing HTML tags of the converted fields. These special HTML tags do not correspond to standard HTML tags. -$[officename] Writer fields are identified by the <SDFIELD> tag in an HTML document. The field type, the format, and the name of the special field are included in the opening HTML tag. The format of a field tag that is recognized by an HTML filter depends on the field type. -
-Date and Time Fields -For "Date" and "Time" fields, the TYPE parameter equals DATETIME. The format of the date or the time is specified by the SDNUM parameter, for example, DD:MM:YY for dates, or HH:MM:SS for time. -For fixed date and time fields, the date or the time is specified by the SDVAL parameter. -Examples of date and time special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: - - - -Fields - - -$[officename] Tag - - - - -Date is fixed - - -<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4239988426" SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> - - - - -Date is variable - - -<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> - - - - -Time is fixed - - -<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4240335648" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD> - - - - -Time is variable - - -<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD> - - -
- -
-
-DocInformation Fields -For DocInformation fields, the TYPE parameter equals DOCINFO. The SUBTYPE parameter displays the specific field type, for example, for the "Created" DocInformation field, SUBTYPE=CREATE. For date and time DocInformation fields, the FORMAT parameter equals DATE or TIME, and the SDNUM parameter indicates the number format that is used. The SDFIXED parameter indicates if the content of the DocInformation field is fixed or not. -The contents of a fixed date or time field are equal to the SDVAL parameter, otherwise the contents are equal to the text found between the SDFIELD HTML tags. -Examples of DocInformation special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: - - - -Fields - - -$[officename] Tag - - - - -Description (fixed content) - - -<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=COMMENT SDFIXED>Description</SDFIELD> - - - - -Creation date - - -<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;QQ ??YY??JJ">1. Quarter 98</SDFIELD> - - - - -Creation time (fixed content) - - -<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=TIME SDVAL="0" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS AM/PM" SDFIXED>03:58:35 PM</SDFIELD> - - - - -Modification date - - -<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CHANGE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;NN DD MMM, YY">Mo 23 Feb, 98</SDFIELD> - - -
- -
- - + +Special Tags +When you save a document that contains fields as an HTML document, $[officename] automatically converts date, time, and DocInformation fields to special HTML tags. The field contents are inserted between the opening and closing HTML tags of the converted fields. These special HTML tags do not correspond to standard HTML tags. +$[officename] Writer fields are identified by the <SDFIELD> tag in an HTML document. The field type, the format, and the name of the special field are included in the opening HTML tag. The format of a field tag that is recognized by an HTML filter depends on the field type. +
+Date and Time Fields +For "Date" and "Time" fields, the TYPE parameter equals DATETIME. The format of the date or the time is specified by the SDNUM parameter, for example, DD:MM:YY for dates, or HH:MM:SS for time. +For fixed date and time fields, the date or the time is specified by the SDVAL parameter. +Examples of date and time special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: + + + +Fields + + +$[officename] Tag + + + + +Date is fixed + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4239988426" SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> + + + + +Date is variable + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;DD/MM/YY">17/02/98</SDFIELD> + + + + +Time is fixed + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDVAL="35843,4240335648" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD> + + + + +Time is variable + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DATETIME SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS">10:10:36</SDFIELD> + + +
+ +
+
+DocInformation Fields +For DocInformation fields, the TYPE parameter equals DOCINFO. The SUBTYPE parameter displays the specific field type, for example, for the "Created" DocInformation field, SUBTYPE=CREATE. For date and time DocInformation fields, the FORMAT parameter equals DATE or TIME, and the SDNUM parameter indicates the number format that is used. The SDFIXED parameter indicates if the content of the DocInformation field is fixed or not. +The contents of a fixed date or time field are equal to the SDVAL parameter, otherwise the contents are equal to the text found between the SDFIELD HTML tags. +Examples of DocInformation special HTML tags that are recognized by $[officename] as fields are shown in the following table: + + + +Fields + + +$[officename] Tag + + + + +Description (fixed content) + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=COMMENT SDFIXED>Description</SDFIELD> + + + + +Creation date + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;QQ ??YY??JJ">1. Quarter 98</SDFIELD> + + + + +Creation time (fixed content) + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CREATE FORMAT=TIME SDVAL="0" SDNUM="1031;1031;HH:MM:SS AM/PM" SDFIXED>03:58:35 PM</SDFIELD> + + + + +Modification date + + +<SDFIELD TYPE=DOCINFO SUBTYPE=CHANGE FORMAT=DATE SDNUM="1031;1031;NN DD MMM, YY">Mo 23 Feb, 98</SDFIELD> + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp index 06be06dc4d..4fca5caaae 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Input Field -/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Input Field +/text/swriter/01/04090100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Input Field -Inserts a text field that you can open and edit by clicking it in the document. You can use input fields for text, or to assign a new value to a variable. + +Input Field +Inserts a text field that you can open and edit by clicking it in the document. You can use input fields for text, or to assign a new value to a variable. To change the content of an Input Field in a document, click the field, and then edit the text in the lower box of the dialog. - -Edit + +Edit The upper box displays the name that you entered in the Reference box of the Input Field on the Functions tab of the Fields dialog. The lower box displays the contents of the field. - -Next -Jumps to the next input field in the document. This button is only available when you position the cursor directly before an input field, and then press Shift+Ctrl+F9. - - + +Next +Jumps to the next input field in the document. This button is only available when you position the cursor directly before an input field, and then press Shift+Ctrl+F9. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp index b68e3afd50..0683de1f21 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Defining Conditions -/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: some code problems in database field conditions? -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Defining Conditions +/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: some code problems in database field conditions? +dedr: reviewed + + -logical expressions -formulating conditions -conditions in fields and sections -fields;defining conditions -sections;defining conditions -variables; in conditions -display of fields;conditions -user data;in conditions -databases in conditions +logical expressions +formulating conditions +conditions in fields and sections +fields;defining conditions +sections;defining conditions +variables; in conditions +display of fields;conditions +user data;in conditions +databases in conditions hiding; database fields - -Defining Conditions -Conditions are logical expressions that you can use to control the display of fields and sections in your document. Although the following examples apply to fields, they also apply to sections. -You can define conditions for the following field types: - - -Conditional text: displays text A if the condition is true, or text B if the condition is false. - - -Hidden text: hides the contents of the field if the condition is true. - - -Hidden paragraph: hides the paragraph if the condition is true. - - -Any record and next record: controls the access to database records. - - -The simplest way to define a condition is to type the logical expression directly in a Condition box using the following values: - - - -True - - -The condition is always met. You can also enter any value not equal to 0 as the conditional text. - - - - -False - - -The condition is not met. You can also enter the value 0. - - -
- -If you leave the Condition box empty, the condition is interpreted as not being met. -When you define a condition, use the same elements for defining a formula, namely comparative operators, mathematical and statistical functions, number formats, variables and constants. -You can use the following types of variables when you define a condition: - - -Predefined $[officename] variables that use statistics on document properties - - -Custom variables, that are a created with the "Set variable" field - - -Variables based on user data - - -Variables based on the contents of database fields - - -You cannot use internal variables, such as page and chapter numbers, in condition expression. -Conditions and Variables -The following examples use a variable called "x": - - - -x == 1 or x EQ 1 - - -The condition is true if "x" is equal to 1. - - - - -x != 1 or x NEQ 1 - - -The condition is true if "x" does not equal 1. - - - - -sinx == 0 - - -The condition is true if "x" is a multiple of pi. - - -
- -To use comparative operators with strings, the operands must be bounded by double quotation marks: - - - -x == "ABC" or x EQ "ABC" - - -Checks if variable "x" contains (true) the "ABC" string, or not (false). - - - - -x == "" or x EQ "" -or -!x or NOT x - - -Checks if the variable "x" contains an empty string. - - -
- -The "equal" comparative operator must be represented by two equal signs (==) in a condition. For example, if you define a variable "x" with the value of 1, you can enter the condition as FALSE x==1. -User Data -You can include user data when you define conditions. To change your user data, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - User data. User data must be entered in the form of strings. You can query the user data with "==" (EQ), "!=" (NEQ), or "!"(NOT). -The following table lists user data variables and their meanings: - - - -Variable - - -Meaning - - - - -user_firstname - - -First name - - - - -user_lastname - - -Last name - - - - -user_initials - - -Initials - - - - -user_company - - -Company - - - - -user_street - - -Street - - - - -user_country - - -Country - - - - -user_zipcode - - -Zip code - - - - -user_city - - -City - - - - -user_title - - -Title - - - - -user_position - - -Position - - - - -user_tel_work - - -Business telephone number - - - - -user_tel_home - - -Home telephone number - - - - -user_fax - - -Fax number - - - - -user_email - - -E-mail address - - - - -user_state - - -State (not in all $[officename] versions) - - -
- -For example, to hide a paragraph, text, or a section from a user with a specific initial, such as "LM", enter the condition: user_initials=="LM". -Conditions and Database Fields -You can define conditions for accessing databases, or database fields. For example, you can check the contents of a database field from a condition, or use database fields in logical expressions. The following table lists a few more examples of using databases in conditions: - - - -Example - - -Meaning - - - - -Database.Table.Company -Database.Table.Company NEQ "" -Database.Table.Company != "" - - -The condition is true if the COMPANY field is not empty. (In the first example, no operator is required.) - - - - -!Database.Table.Company -NOT Database.Table.Company -Database.Table.Company EQ "" -Database.Table.Company =="" - - -Returns TRUE if the COMPANY field is empty. (Exclamation sign represents a logical NOT.) - - - - -Database.Table.Company !="Sun Microsystems" -Database.Table.Company NEQ "Sun Microsystems" - - -Returns TRUE if the current entry in the COMPANY field is "Sun Microsystems". - - - - -Database.Table.Firstname AND Database.Table.Name - - -Returns TRUE if the record contains the first and the last name. - - -
- -Note the difference between the boolean NOT "!" and the comparative operator not equal "!=" (NEQ). -When you refer to a database field in a condition, use the form Databasename.Tablename.Fieldname. If one of the names contains a character that is an operator, such as a minus sign (-), enclose the name in square brackets, for example, Databasename.[Table-name].Fieldname. Never use spaces inside field names.UFI: fixes bug #i25781# - but see #i25983#. Fixes also #i19571# -Example: Hiding an Empty Database Field -You may want to create a condition that hides an empty field, for example, if the COMPANY field is empty for some of the data records. -Select the Hidden Paragraph box, and type the following condition: Addressbook.Addresses.Company EQ "" -or type the following -NOT Addressbook.Addresses.Company -If the COMPANY database field is empty, the condition is true and the paragraph is hidden. -To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, you can choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and clear the Hidden paragraphs check box. -Examples of Conditions in Fields -The following examples use the Conditional text field, although they can be applied to any fields that can be linked to a condition. The syntax used for conditions is also used for the Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Any record or Next record fields. -To display conditional text based on the number of pages: - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Functions tab. - - -In the Type list, click "Conditional text". - - -In the Condition box, type "page == 1". - - -In the Then box, type "There is only one page". - - -In the Or box, type "There are several pages". - - -Click Insert, and then click Close. - - -To display conditional text based on a user-defined Variable - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Variables tab. - - -In the Type list, click "Set Variable". - - -In the Name box, type "Profit". - - -In the Value box, type "5000". - - -Click Insert. - - -Click the Functions tab, and click "Conditional text" in the Type list. - - -In the Condition box, type "Profit < 5000". - - -In the Then box, type "Target is not met". - - -In the Or box, type "Target is met". - - -Click Insert. - - -To edit the contents of the "Profit" variable, double-click the variable field. -To display conditional text based on the contents of a database field: -The first part of this example inserts a space between the "First Name" and "Last Name" fields in a document, and the second part inserts text based on the contents of a field name. This example requires that an address data source to be registered with $[officename]. - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Database tab. - - -In the Type list, click "Mail merge fields". - - -In the Database selection box, double-click an address book, click "First Name", and then click Insert. Repeat for "Last Name". - - -In the document, place the cursor between the two fields, press Space, and then return to the Fields dialog: - - -Click the Functions tab, and then click "Conditional text" in the Type list. - - -In the Condition box, type: "Addressbook.addresses.firstname". - - -In the Then box, type a space and leave the Or box blank. - - -You can now use a condition to insert text based on the contents of the First Name field. - - -In the Fields dialog, click the Functions tab. - - -In the Type box, click "Conditional text". - - -In the Condition box, type: Addressbook.addresses.firstname == "Michael" - - -In the Then box, type "Dear". - - -In the Or box, type "Hello". - - -Click Insert. - - - - + +Defining Conditions +Conditions are logical expressions that you can use to control the display of fields and sections in your document. Although the following examples apply to fields, they also apply to sections. +You can define conditions for the following field types: + + +Conditional text: displays text A if the condition is true, or text B if the condition is false. + + +Hidden text: hides the contents of the field if the condition is true. + + +Hidden paragraph: hides the paragraph if the condition is true. + + +Any record and next record: controls the access to database records. + + +The simplest way to define a condition is to type the logical expression directly in a Condition box using the following values: + + + +True + + +The condition is always met. You can also enter any value not equal to 0 as the conditional text. + + + + +False + + +The condition is not met. You can also enter the value 0. + + +
+ +If you leave the Condition box empty, the condition is interpreted as not being met. +When you define a condition, use the same elements for defining a formula, namely comparative operators, mathematical and statistical functions, number formats, variables and constants. +You can use the following types of variables when you define a condition: + + +Predefined $[officename] variables that use statistics on document properties + + +Custom variables, that are a created with the "Set variable" field + + +Variables based on user data + + +Variables based on the contents of database fields + + +You cannot use internal variables, such as page and chapter numbers, in condition expression. +Conditions and Variables +The following examples use a variable called "x": + + + +x == 1 or x EQ 1 + + +The condition is true if "x" is equal to 1. + + + + +x != 1 or x NEQ 1 + + +The condition is true if "x" does not equal 1. + + + + +sinx == 0 + + +The condition is true if "x" is a multiple of pi. + + +
+ +To use comparative operators with strings, the operands must be bounded by double quotation marks: + + + +x == "ABC" or x EQ "ABC" + + +Checks if variable "x" contains (true) the "ABC" string, or not (false). + + + + +x == "" or x EQ "" +or +!x or NOT x + + +Checks if the variable "x" contains an empty string. + + +
+ +The "equal" comparative operator must be represented by two equal signs (==) in a condition. For example, if you define a variable "x" with the value of 1, you can enter the condition as FALSE x==1. +User Data +You can include user data when you define conditions. To change your user data, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - User data. User data must be entered in the form of strings. You can query the user data with "==" (EQ), "!=" (NEQ), or "!"(NOT). +The following table lists user data variables and their meanings: + + + +Variable + + +Meaning + + + + +user_firstname + + +First name + + + + +user_lastname + + +Last name + + + + +user_initials + + +Initials + + + + +user_company + + +Company + + + + +user_street + + +Street + + + + +user_country + + +Country + + + + +user_zipcode + + +Zip code + + + + +user_city + + +City + + + + +user_title + + +Title + + + + +user_position + + +Position + + + + +user_tel_work + + +Business telephone number + + + + +user_tel_home + + +Home telephone number + + + + +user_fax + + +Fax number + + + + +user_email + + +E-mail address + + + + +user_state + + +State (not in all $[officename] versions) + + +
+ +For example, to hide a paragraph, text, or a section from a user with a specific initial, such as "LM", enter the condition: user_initials=="LM". +Conditions and Database Fields +You can define conditions for accessing databases, or database fields. For example, you can check the contents of a database field from a condition, or use database fields in logical expressions. The following table lists a few more examples of using databases in conditions: + + + +Example + + +Meaning + + + + +Database.Table.Company +Database.Table.Company NEQ "" +Database.Table.Company != "" + + +The condition is true if the COMPANY field is not empty. (In the first example, no operator is required.) + + + + +!Database.Table.Company +NOT Database.Table.Company +Database.Table.Company EQ "" +Database.Table.Company =="" + + +Returns TRUE if the COMPANY field is empty. (Exclamation sign represents a logical NOT.) + + + + +Database.Table.Company !="Sun Microsystems" +Database.Table.Company NEQ "Sun Microsystems" + + +Returns TRUE if the current entry in the COMPANY field is "Sun Microsystems". + + + + +Database.Table.Firstname AND Database.Table.Name + + +Returns TRUE if the record contains the first and the last name. + + +
+ +Note the difference between the boolean NOT "!" and the comparative operator not equal "!=" (NEQ). +When you refer to a database field in a condition, use the form Databasename.Tablename.Fieldname. If one of the names contains a character that is an operator, such as a minus sign (-), enclose the name in square brackets, for example, Databasename.[Table-name].Fieldname. Never use spaces inside field names.UFI: fixes bug #i25781# - but see #i25983#. Fixes also #i19571# +Example: Hiding an Empty Database Field +You may want to create a condition that hides an empty field, for example, if the COMPANY field is empty for some of the data records. +Select the Hidden Paragraph box, and type the following condition: Addressbook.Addresses.Company EQ "" +or type the following +NOT Addressbook.Addresses.Company +If the COMPANY database field is empty, the condition is true and the paragraph is hidden. +To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, you can choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and clear the Hidden paragraphs check box. +Examples of Conditions in Fields +The following examples use the Conditional text field, although they can be applied to any fields that can be linked to a condition. The syntax used for conditions is also used for the Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Any record or Next record fields. +To display conditional text based on the number of pages: + + +Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Functions tab. + + +In the Type list, click "Conditional text". + + +In the Condition box, type "page == 1". + + +In the Then box, type "There is only one page". + + +In the Or box, type "There are several pages". + + +Click Insert, and then click Close. + + +To display conditional text based on a user-defined Variable + + +Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Variables tab. + + +In the Type list, click "Set Variable". + + +In the Name box, type "Profit". + + +In the Value box, type "5000". + + +Click Insert. + + +Click the Functions tab, and click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + +In the Condition box, type "Profit < 5000". + + +In the Then box, type "Target is not met". + + +In the Or box, type "Target is met". + + +Click Insert. + + +To edit the contents of the "Profit" variable, double-click the variable field. +To display conditional text based on the contents of a database field: +The first part of this example inserts a space between the "First Name" and "Last Name" fields in a document, and the second part inserts text based on the contents of a field name. This example requires that an address data source to be registered with $[officename]. + + +Choose Insert - Fields - Other, and then click the Database tab. + + +In the Type list, click "Mail merge fields". + + +In the Database selection box, double-click an address book, click "First Name", and then click Insert. Repeat for "Last Name". + + +In the document, place the cursor between the two fields, press Space, and then return to the Fields dialog: + + +Click the Functions tab, and then click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + +In the Condition box, type: "Addressbook.addresses.firstname". + + +In the Then box, type a space and leave the Or box blank. + + +You can now use a condition to insert text based on the contents of the First Name field. + + +In the Fields dialog, click the Functions tab. + + +In the Type box, click "Conditional text". + + +In the Condition box, type: Addressbook.addresses.firstname == "Michael" + + +In the Then box, type "Dear". + + +In the Or box, type "Hello". + + +Click Insert. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp index 8292314666..31adabc864 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Indexes and Tables -/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Indexes and Tables -
- -Instructions for Indexes -Entry - -Indexes and Tables - -Bibliography Entry - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Indexes and Tables +/text/swriter/01/04120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Indexes and Tables +
+ +Instructions for Indexes +Entry + +Indexes and Tables + +Bibliography Entry + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp index 2986afb023..f51b32c6f2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Index -/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Index + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120213.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Index The following options are available when you select the Illustration Index as the index type. - - - - -
-Create from + + + + +
+Create from Specify the information to be combined to form an index. - -Captions + +Captions Creates index entries from object captions. To add a caption to an object, select the object, and then choose Insert - Caption. - -Category + +Category Select the caption category that you want to use for the index entries. - -Display -Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries. The following table lists the caption options that can be selected, based on the caption text "Illustration 24: The Sun", where "Illustration 24" was automatically generated, and "The Sun" was added by the user. - - - -Selections in the Display list box - - -Entry in the Index - - - - -Reference Text - - -Illustration 24: The Sun - - - - -Category and Number - - -Illustration 24 - - - - -Caption - - -The Sun - - -
- + +Display +Select the part of the caption that you want to use for index entries. The following table lists the caption options that can be selected, based on the caption text "Illustration 24: The Sun", where "Illustration 24" was automatically generated, and "The Sun" was added by the user. + + + +Selections in the Display list box + + +Entry in the Index + + + + +Reference Text + + +Illustration 24: The Sun + + + + +Category and Number + + +Illustration 24 + + + + +Caption + + +The Sun + + +
+ If you select "Caption Text", the punctuation and the space at the beginning of the caption does not appear in the index entry. - -Object name -Creates index entries from object names. You can view object names in the Navigator, for example, and change them in the context menu. -
- - + +Object name +Creates index entries from object names. You can view object names in the Navigator, for example, and change them in the context menu. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp index bbd1e44501..1c9654e960 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Index -/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Index + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120214.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Index The following options are available when you select Index of Tables as the index type. - - - - - - - + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp index 8173d7737e..abf7a08e99 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Index -/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Index + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120215.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Index The following options are available when you select User-Defined as the index type. - - -User-defined indexes are available in the Type box when you insert an index entry in your document. - - -Create from -Styles - - + + +User-defined indexes are available in the Type box when you insert an index entry in your document. + + +Create from +Styles + + - -Tables + +Tables Includes tables in the index. - -Graphics + +Graphics Includes graphics in the index. - -Text frames + +Text frames Includes text frames in the index. - -OLE objects + +OLE objects Includes OLE objects in the index. - -Use level from source chapter -Indents table, graphic, text frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter heading hierarchy. - -Defining an index entry - - + +Use level from source chapter +Indents table, graphic, text frame, and OLE object index entries according their place in the chapter heading hierarchy. + +Defining an index entry + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp index 486921e337..6c48545610 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Index -/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Index + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120216.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Index The following options are available when you select Table of Objects as the index type. - - - + + + - -Create from the following objects -Select the object types that you want to include in a table of objects. - - + +Create from the following objects +Select the object types that you want to include in a table of objects. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp index 0e1e8c3a78..c95bd62a67 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Index -/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Index + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Index +/text/swriter/01/04120217.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Index The following options are available when you select Bibliography as the index type. - - - + + + Formatting of the entries - -Number entries + +Number entries Automatically numbers the bibliography entries. To set the sorting options for the numbering, click the Entries tab. - -Brackets -Select the brackets that you want to enclose bibliography entries. - - - + +Brackets +Select the brackets that you want to enclose bibliography entries. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp index b970a655a9..e401ab4f79 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Define Bibliography Entry -/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Define Bibliography Entry +/text/swriter/01/04120229.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Define Bibliography Entry -Change the content of a bibliography entry. - -Entry data + +Define Bibliography Entry +Change the content of a bibliography entry. + +Entry data Enter a short name and select the appropriate source type. You can now enter data into the other fields belonging for the entry. - -Short name + +Short name Displays the short name for the bibliography entry. You can only enter a name here if you are creating a new bibliography entry. @@ -102,14 +102,14 @@ - + This is where you select the desired entry data for your bibliography. - -Type -Select the source for the bibliography entry. -The entries in the bibliography database have the following names: -"Identifier"; "BibliographyType"; "Author"; "Title"; "Year"; "ISBN"; "Booktitle"; "Chapter"; "Edition"; "Editor"; "Howpublished"; "Institution"; "Journal"; "Month"; "Note"; "Annote"; "Number"; "Organizations"; "Pages"; "Publisher"; "Address"; "School"; "Series";"ReportType"; "Volume"; "URL"; "Custom1"; "Custom2"; "Custom3"; "Custom4"; "Custom5" - -Formatting bibliography entries - - + +Type +Select the source for the bibliography entry. +The entries in the bibliography database have the following names: +"Identifier"; "BibliographyType"; "Author"; "Title"; "Year"; "ISBN"; "Booktitle"; "Chapter"; "Edition"; "Editor"; "Howpublished"; "Institution"; "Journal"; "Month"; "Note"; "Annote"; "Number"; "Organizations"; "Pages"; "Publisher"; "Address"; "School"; "Series";"ReportType"; "Volume"; "URL"; "Custom1"; "Custom2"; "Custom3"; "Custom4"; "Custom5" + +Formatting bibliography entries + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp index 2af61e39b9..2fbf5d2500 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Edit Concordance File -/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Edit Concordance File +/text/swriter/01/04120250.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -editing; concordance files +editing; concordance files concordance files; definition - -Edit Concordance File -Create or edit a list of words to include in an Alphabetical Index. -To access the Edit Concordance File dialog: - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables - Index/Table. - - -In the Type box, select "Alphabetical Index". - - -In the Options area, select the Concordance file check box. - - -Click the File button, and then choose New or Edit. - - -A concordance file contains the following fields: -"Search term" refers to the index entry that you want to mark in the document. -"Alternative entry" refers to the index entry that you want to appear in the index. -The 1st and 2nd Keys are parent index entries. The "Search term" or the "Alternative entry" appears as a subentry under the 1st and 2nd Keys. -"Match case" means that uppercase and lowercase letters are considered. -"Word only" searches for the term as a single word. -To enable the "Match case" or "Word only" options, click in the corresponding cell, and then select the check box. -To create a concordance file without the Edit Concordance File dialog: -Use the following format guidelines when you create a concordance file: - - -Each entry in the concordance file is on a separate line. - - -Commented lines start with #. - - -Use the following format for the entries: - - -Search term;Alternative entry;1st key;2nd key;Match case;Word only -The entries "Match case" and "Word only" are interpreted as "No" or FALSE if they are empty or zero (0). All other contents are interpreted as "Yes" or TRUE. -Example -For example, to include the word "Boston" in your alphabetical index under the "Cities" entry, enter the following line in the concordance file: -Boston;Boston;Cities;;0;0 -This also finds "Boston" if it is written in lowercase letters. -To include the "Beacon Hill" district in Boston under the "Cities" entry, enter the following line: -Beacon Hill;Boston;Cities; - - + +Edit Concordance File +Create or edit a list of words to include in an Alphabetical Index. +To access the Edit Concordance File dialog: + + +Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables - Index/Table. + + +In the Type box, select "Alphabetical Index". + + +In the Options area, select the Concordance file check box. + + +Click the File button, and then choose New or Edit. + + +A concordance file contains the following fields: +"Search term" refers to the index entry that you want to mark in the document. +"Alternative entry" refers to the index entry that you want to appear in the index. +The 1st and 2nd Keys are parent index entries. The "Search term" or the "Alternative entry" appears as a subentry under the 1st and 2nd Keys. +"Match case" means that uppercase and lowercase letters are considered. +"Word only" searches for the term as a single word. +To enable the "Match case" or "Word only" options, click in the corresponding cell, and then select the check box. +To create a concordance file without the Edit Concordance File dialog: +Use the following format guidelines when you create a concordance file: + + +Each entry in the concordance file is on a separate line. + + +Commented lines start with #. + + +Use the following format for the entries: + + +Search term;Alternative entry;1st key;2nd key;Match case;Word only +The entries "Match case" and "Word only" are interpreted as "No" or FALSE if they are empty or zero (0). All other contents are interpreted as "Yes" or TRUE. +Example +For example, to include the word "Boston" in your alphabetical index under the "Cities" entry, enter the following line in the concordance file: +Boston;Boston;Cities;;0;0 +This also finds "Boston" if it is written in lowercase letters. +To include the "Beacon Hill" district in Boston under the "Cities" entry, enter the following line: +Beacon Hill;Boston;Cities; + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp index 1d42b8dd35..2b86c2b52d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Frame -/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Frame +/text/swriter/01/04130000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Frame + +Frame Inserts a frame that you can use to create a layout of one or more columns of text and objects. On the Insert floating toolbar, long-click the Frame icon, and then select the number of columns for the frame. - -To insert a frame, click in the document, and then choose Insert - Frame. - -To edit a frame, select it, and then choose Format - Frame. You can also resize or move a selected frame using special shortcut keys. -To delete a frame, click the border of the frame, and then press Delete. -If you see small red arrows at the beginning and the end of text in frame, use the arrow keys to scroll through the remaining text. -In the preview area of the Frame dialog, the frame is represented by a green rectangle, and the reference area by a red rectangle. -You can also preview the effects when you change the frame anchor to "As Character". The "Baseline" is drawn in red, "Character" is the font height, and "line" is the height of the line, including the frame. - - - - - - - - - - + +To insert a frame, click in the document, and then choose Insert - Frame. + +To edit a frame, select it, and then choose Format - Frame. You can also resize or move a selected frame using special shortcut keys. +To delete a frame, click the border of the frame, and then press Delete. +If you see small red arrows at the beginning and the end of text in frame, use the arrow keys to scroll through the remaining text. +In the preview area of the Frame dialog, the frame is represented by a green rectangle, and the reference area by a red rectangle. +You can also preview the effects when you change the frame anchor to "As Character". The "Baseline" is drawn in red, "Character" is the font height, and "line" is the height of the line, including the frame. + + + + + + + + + + - -Icon in the Insert floating toolbar in the Main toolbar: + +Icon in the Insert floating toolbar in the Main toolbar: Draws a frame where you drag in the document. Long-click to select the number of columns for the frame. - - - - - - - + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp index dec14e2bc5..59919271fb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Exchange Database -/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Exchange Database +/text/swriter/01/04180400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -databases; exchanging -address book; exchanging -exchanging; databases +databases; exchanging +address book; exchanging +exchanging; databases replacing;databases - -Exchange Database + +Exchange Database Change the data sources for the current document. To correctly display the contents of inserted fields, the replacement database must contain identical field names. - - -For example, if you inserting address fields in a form letter from an address database, you can then exchange the database with another address database to insert different addresses. -Exchanging Databases + + +For example, if you inserting address fields in a form letter from an address database, you can then exchange the database with another address database to insert different addresses. +Exchanging Databases You can only change one database at a time in this dialog. - -Databases in Use + +Databases in Use Lists the databases that are currently in use. The current document contains at least one data field from each of the databases in the list. - -Available Databases + +Available Databases Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME. - -Browse -Opens a file open dialog to select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Available Databases list. -Define -Replaces the current data source with the data source that you selected in the Available Databases list. -To exchange a database: -Ensure that both databases contain matching field names and field types. - - -Click in the document that you want to change the data source for. - - -Choose Edit - Exchange Database. - - -In the Databases in Use list, select the database table that you want to replace. - - -In the Available Databases list, select the replacement database table. - - -Click Define. - - - - + +Browse +Opens a file open dialog to select a database file (*.odb). The selected file is added to the Available Databases list. +Define +Replaces the current data source with the data source that you selected in the Available Databases list. +To exchange a database: +Ensure that both databases contain matching field names and field types. + + +Click in the document that you want to change the data source for. + + +Choose Edit - Exchange Database. + + +In the Databases in Use list, select the database table that you want to replace. + + +In the Available Databases list, select the replacement database table. + + +Click Define. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp index 3aa78e8360..9f757cac7a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Footers -/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Footers +/text/swriter/01/04230000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Footers -Adds or removes a footer from the page style that you select in the submenu. The footer is added to all of the pages that use the same page style. In a new document, only the "Default" page style is listed. Other page styles are added to the list after you apply them in the document. -
- -A check mark is displayed in front of the page styles that have footers. -To remove a footer, choose Insert - Footer, and the select the page style containing the footer. The footer is removed from all of the pages that use this page style. -To add or remove footers from all of the page styles that are in use in the document, choose Insert - Footer - All. -To format a footer, choose Format - Page - Footer. - - + +Footers +Adds or removes a footer from the page style that you select in the submenu. The footer is added to all of the pages that use the same page style. In a new document, only the "Default" page style is listed. Other page styles are added to the list after you apply them in the document. + + +A check mark is displayed in front of the page styles that have footers. +To remove a footer, choose Insert - Footer, and the select the page style containing the footer. The footer is removed from all of the pages that use this page style. +To add or remove footers from all of the page styles that are in use in the document, choose Insert - Footer - All. +To format a footer, choose Format - Page - Footer. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp index b0a736412d..f556b8145a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Fields -/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Fields -Inserts a field at the current cursor position. The submenu lists the most common field types. To view all of the available fields, choose Other. -
- - - - - - - - -Other - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Fields +/text/swriter/01/04990000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Fields +Inserts a field at the current cursor position. The submenu lists the most common field types. To view all of the available fields, choose Other. +
+ + + + + + + + +Other + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp index e00ec96a3d..8645bcf9f0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Text Flow -/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Text Flow +/text/swriter/01/05030200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Text Flow -Specify hyphenation and pagination options. -
- -Hyphenation + +Text Flow +Specify hyphenation and pagination options. + + +Hyphenation Specify the hyphenation options for text documents. - -Automatically + +Automatically Automatically inserts hyphens where they are needed in a paragraph. - -Characters at line end + +Characters at line end Enter the minimum number of characters to leave at the end of the line before a hyphen is inserted. - -Characters at line begin + +Characters at line begin Enter the minimum number of characters that must appear at the beginning of the line after the hyphen. - -Maximum no. of consecutive hyphens -Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated. -Breaks + +Maximum no. of consecutive hyphens +Enter the maximum number of consecutive lines that can be hyphenated. +Breaks Specify the page or columnbreak options. - -Enable + +Enable Select this check box, and then select the break type that you want to use. - -Type + +Type Select the break type that you want to insert. - -Position + +Position Select where you want to insert the break. - -With Page Style + +With Page Style Select this check box, and then select the page style that you want to use for the first page after the break. - -Page Style + +Page Style Select the formatting style to use for the first page after the break. - -Page number -Enter the page number that you want to appear on the first page after the break. If you want to use the current page numbering, select "0". -Options + +Page number +Enter the page number that you want to appear on the first page after the break. If you want to use the current page numbering, select "0". +Options Specify the text flow options for paragraphs that appear before and after a page break. - -Do not split paragraph + +Do not split paragraph Shifts the entire paragraph to the next page or column after a break is inserted. -text flow;at breaks +text flow;at breaks paragraphs;keeping together at breaks - -Keep with next paragraph + +Keep with next paragraph Keeps the current paragraph and the following paragraph together when a break or column break is inserted. - -Orphan control + +Orphan control Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph before a page break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the end of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the paragraph is shifted to the next page. - -Widow control -Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the top of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the position of the break is adjusted. - -Orphans. - - + +Widow control +Specifies the minimum number of lines in a paragraph in the first page after the break. Select this check box, and then enter a number in the Lines box. If the number of lines at the top of the page is less than the amount specified in the Lines box, the position of the break is adjusted. + +Orphans. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp index 28367f3e70..8c4905eb3e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Drop Caps -/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Drop Caps +/text/swriter/01/05030400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Drop Caps -Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. You can also format the first word of the paragraph with large type. -
- + +Drop Caps +Formats the first letter of a paragraph with a large capital letter, that can span several lines. You can also format the first word of the paragraph with large type. + + Settings - -Show Drop Caps + +Show Drop Caps Applies the drop cap settings to the selected paragraph. - -Whole word + +Whole word Displays the first letter of the first word in the paragraph as a drop cap, and the remaining letters of the word as large type. - -Number of characters + +Number of characters Enter the number of characters to convert to drop caps. - -Lines + +Lines Enter the number of lines that you want the drop cap to extend downward from the first line of the paragraph. The selection is limited to 2-9 lines. - -Distance from text -Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph. + +Distance from text +Enter the amount of space to leave between the drop caps and the rest of the text in the paragraph. Contents - -Text + +Text Enter the text that you want to display as drop caps instead of the first letters of the paragraph. - -Character Style -Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps. To use the formatting style of the current paragraph, select [None]. - - - + +Character Style +Select the formatting style that you want to apply to the drop caps. To use the formatting style of the current paragraph, select [None]. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp index 2f4387605b..463bfc1fb1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Numbering -/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Numbering +/text/swriter/01/05030800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Numbering -Adds or removes numbering or bullets from the paragraph. You can also select the style of numbering to use, and reset the numbering in a numbered list. -
- - - -To change the numbering options for paragraphs that use the same paragraph style, choose Format - Stylist, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the style in the list, choose Modify, and then click the Numbering tab. - - -To change the numbering options for selected paragraphs, choose Format -Paragraph, and then click the Numbering tab. You can also click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Object Bar. - + +Numbering +Adds or removes numbering or bullets from the paragraph. You can also select the style of numbering to use, and reset the numbering in a numbered list. + + + + +To change the numbering options for paragraphs that use the same paragraph style, choose Format - Stylist, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the style in the list, choose Modify, and then click the Numbering tab. + + +To change the numbering options for selected paragraphs, choose Format -Paragraph, and then click the Numbering tab. You can also click the Numbering On/Off icon on the Object Bar. + - -Number Style -Select the Numbering Style that you want to apply to the paragraph. These styles are also listed in the Stylist if you click the Numbering Style icon. -Numbering + +Number Style +Select the Numbering Style that you want to apply to the paragraph. These styles are also listed in the Stylist if you click the Numbering Style icon. +Numbering This section only appears when you edit the properties of the current paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph. - -Restart at this paragraph + +Restart at this paragraph Restarts the numbering at the current paragraph. - -Start with + +Start with Select this check box, and then enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. - -"Start with" spin button -Enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. The following paragraphs are numbered consecutively from the number that you enter here. -Line numbering + +"Start with" spin button +Enter the number that you want to assign to the paragraph. The following paragraphs are numbered consecutively from the number that you enter here. +Line numbering Specify the Line numbering options. To add line numbers to your document, choose Tools - Line Numbering. - -Include this paragraph in line numbering + +Include this paragraph in line numbering Includes the current paragraph in the line numbering. - -Restart at this paragraph + +Restart at this paragraph Restarts the line numbering at the current paragraph, or at the number that you enter. - -Start with -Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering - - + +Start with +Enter the number at which to restart the line numbering + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp index 4187206dc1..7995bd927d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Graphics -/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Graphics +/text/swriter/01/05060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -GraphicsUFI: menu changed to Picture - dialog also? + +GraphicsUFI: menu changed to Picture - dialog also? Formats the size, position, and other properties of the selected graphic. - -You can also change some of the properties of the selected graphic with shortcut keys. - -The Graphics dialog contains the following tab pages: - - -Wrap - - - - - - - - - - + +You can also change some of the properties of the selected graphic with shortcut keys. + +The Graphics dialog contains the following tab pages: + + +Wrap + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp index 20672988cc..c90382d9f2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Type -/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: sw.feature "Enhanced Writer fly frame positioning and alignment" news://staroffice-news:119/openoffice.sw.features-6195447.1075794225974.JavaMail.root@so; dedr: reviewed --web3.Germany.Sun.COM -YJ:checked - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Type +/text/swriter/01/05060100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: sw.feature "Enhanced Writer fly frame positioning and alignment" news://staroffice-news:119/openoffice.sw.features-6195447.1075794225974.JavaMail.root@so; dedr: reviewed +-web3.Germany.Sun.COM +YJ:checked + + +
- -Type -Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page. -
- + +Type +Specifies the size and the position of the selected object or frame on a page. + + Size - -Width + +Width Enter the width that you want for the selected object. - -Relative + +Relative Calculates the width of the selected object as a percentage of the width of the page print area. - -Height + +Height Enter the height that you want for the selected object. - -Relative + +Relative Calculates the height of the selected object as a percentage of the height of the page print area. - -Keep ratio + +Keep ratio Maintains the height and width ratio when you change the width or the height setting. - -Original Size -Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values. + +Original Size +Resets the size settings of the selected object to the original values. This option is not available for frames. - -Automatic -Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame. -The Automatic option is only available when you select a frame. -Anchor + +Automatic +Automatically adjusts the width or height of a frame to match the contents of the frame. If you want, you can specify a minimum width or minimum height for the frame. +The Automatic option is only available when you select a frame. +Anchor Specify the anchoring options for the selected object or frame. - -To page + +To page Anchors the selection to the current page. - -To paragraph + +To paragraph Anchors the selection to the current paragraph. - -To character + +To character Anchors the selection to a character. - -As character -Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection. -Position + +As character +Anchors the selection as character. The height of the current line is resized to match the height of the selection. +Position Specify the location of the selected object on the current page. - -Horizontal + +Horizontal Select the horizontal alignment option for the object. This option is not available if you chose "anchor as character". - -by + +by Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Left" in the Horizontal box. - -to -Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option. + +to +Select the reference point for the selected horizontal alignment option. You can see the result of the alignments options that you select in the Preview box. - -Mirror on even pages -Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages. + +Mirror on even pages +Reverses the current horizontal alignment settings on even pages. You can also use the Graphics flip options to adjust the layout of objects on even and odd pages. - -Vertical -Select the vertical alignment option for the object. + +Vertical +Select the vertical alignment option for the object. If you anchor an object to a frame with a fixed height, only the "Bottom" and "Center" alignment options are available. - -by + +by Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the selected object and the reference point that you select in the To box. This option is only available if you select "From Top" or "From Bottom" (as character) in the Vertical box. - -to -Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option. - -The green rectangle represents the selected object and the red rectangle represents the alignment reference point. If you anchor the object as a character, the reference rectangle changes to a red line. - -Format - Anchor + +to +Select the reference point for the selected vertical alignment option. + +The green rectangle represents the selected object and the red rectangle represents the alignment reference point. If you anchor the object as a character, the reference rectangle changes to a red line. + +Format - Anchor Format - Alignment - -Follow text flow + +Follow text flow Keeps the selected object within the layout boundaries of the text that the object is anchored to. To place the selected object anywhere in your document, do not select this option. -By default, the Follow text flow option is selected when you open a document that was created in a version of %PRODUCTNAME older than %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION. However, this option is not selected when you create a document or when you open a document in Microsoft Word format (*.doc). - - +By default, the Follow text flow option is selected when you open a document that was created in a version of %PRODUCTNAME older than %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION. However, this option is not selected when you create a document or when you open a document in Microsoft Word format (*.doc). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp index 538af9d999..6d8e426acc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Contour Editor -/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Contour Editor +/text/swriter/01/05060201.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + - -Contour Editor + +Contour Editor Changes the contour of the selected object. $[officename] uses the contour when determining the text wrap options for the object. - -Displays a preview of the contour.and this bubble text hides both from view if not set to 0 length - + +Displays a preview of the contour.and this bubble text hides both from view if not set to 0 length + - -Apply -Applies the contour to the selected object. - - - + +Apply +Applies the contour to the selected object. +
+ + Icon - - - -Apply - - -
+ + + +Apply + + + - -Wrap Region -Deletes the custom contour. Click here, and then click in the preview area. - - - + +Wrap Region +Deletes the custom contour. Click here, and then click in the preview area. +
+ + Icon - - - -Work area - - -
+ + + +Work area + + + - -Select -Changes to selection mode, so that you can select the contour. - - - + +Select +Changes to selection mode, so that you can select the contour. +
+ + Icon - - - -Select - - -
+ + + +Select + + + - -Rectangle -Draws a rectangular contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. - - - + +Rectangle +Draws a rectangular contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Rectangle - - -
+ + + +Rectangle + + + - -Ellipse -Draws an oval contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a circle, hold down shift while you drag. - - - + +Ellipse +Draws an oval contour where you drag in the object preview. To draw a circle, hold down shift while you drag. +
+ + Icon - - - -Ellipse - - -
+ + + +Ellipse + + + - -Polygon -Draws a closed contour consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click. - - - + +Polygon +Draws a closed contour consisting of straight line segments. Click where you want to start the polygon, and drag to draw a line segment. Click again to define the end of the line segment, and continue clicking to define the remaining line segments of the polygon. Double-click to finish drawing the polygon. To constrain the polygon to angles of 45 degree, hold down Shift when you click. +
+ + Icon - - - -Polygon - - -
+ + + +Polygon + + + - -Edit Points -Lets you change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then drag the handles of the contour. - - - + +Edit Points +Lets you change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then drag the handles of the contour. +
+ + Icon - - - -Edit Points - - -
+ + + +Edit Points + + + - -Move Points -Lets you drag the handles of the contour to change the shape of the contour. - - - + +Move Points +Lets you drag the handles of the contour to change the shape of the contour. +
+ + Icon - - - -Move Points - - -
+ + + +Move Points + + + - -Insert Points -Inserts a handle that you can drag to change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then click on the contour outline. - - - + +Insert Points +Inserts a handle that you can drag to change the shape of the contour. Click here, and then click on the contour outline. +
+ + Icon - - - -Insert Points - - -
+ + + +Insert Points + + + - -Delete Points -Removes a point from the contour outline. Click here, and then click the point that you want to delete. - - - + +Delete Points +Removes a point from the contour outline. Click here, and then click the point that you want to delete. +
+ + Icon - - - -Delete Points - - -
+ + + +Delete Points + + + - -Auto Contour -Automatically draws a contour around the object that you can edit. - - - + +Auto Contour +Automatically draws a contour around the object that you can edit. +
+ + Icon - - - -AutoContour - - -
+ + + +AutoContour + + + - -Undo -Reverses the last action. - - - + +Undo +Reverses the last action. +
+ + Icon - - - -Undo - - -
+ + + +Undo + + + - -Redo -Reverses the action of the last Undo command. - - - + +Redo +Reverses the action of the last Undo command. +
+ + Icon - - - -Redo - - -
+ + + +Redo + + + - -Eyedropper -Selects the parts of the bitmap that are the same color. Click here, and then click a color in the bitmap. To increase the color range that is selected, increase the value in the Tolerance box. - - - + +Eyedropper +Selects the parts of the bitmap that are the same color. Click here, and then click a color in the bitmap. To increase the color range that is selected, increase the value in the Tolerance box. +
+ + Icon - - - -Eyedropper - - -
+ + + +Eyedropper + + + - -Tolerance -Enter the color tolerance for the eyedropper as a percentage. To increase the color range that the eyedropper selects, enter a high percentage. - - + +Tolerance +Enter the color tolerance for the eyedropper as a percentage. To increase the color range that the eyedropper selects, enter a high percentage. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp index 98896aa026..d5074fbc56 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Graphics -/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Graphics +/text/swriter/01/05060300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Graphics -Specify the flip and the link options for the selected graphic. -
- + +Graphics +Specify the flip and the link options for the selected graphic. + + Flip - -Verticallysee bug 106420;Writer uses VERT for HOR and HORZ for VERT + +Verticallysee bug 106420;Writer uses VERT for HOR and HORZ for VERT Flips the selected graphic vertically. - + - -Horizontally + +Horizontally Flips the selected graphic horizontally. - + - -On all pages + +On all pages Flips the selected graphic horizontally on all pages. - -On left pages + +On left pages Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on even pages. - -On right pages -Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on odd pages. - -Link + +On right pages +Flips the selected graphic horizontally only on odd pages. + +Link Inserts the graphic as a link. - -File name + +File name Displays the path to the linked graphic file. To change the link, click the browse button (...) and then locate the file that you want to link to. - -... -Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open. - -Format - Flip -Edit - Links - - + +... +Locate the new graphic file that you want to link to, and then click Open. + +Format - Flip +Edit - Links + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp index cbb2732f40..794667d6b5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Macro -/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Macro +/text/swriter/01/05060700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-events; assigning macros +events; assigning macros macros; assigning - -Macro -Specifies the macro to run when you click a graphic, frame, or an OLE object. -
- -Event -List the events that can trigger a macro. Only the events that are relevant to selected object are listed. -The following table lists the object types and the events that can trigger a macro: - - - -Event - - -Event trigger - - -OLE object - - -Graphics - - -Frame - - -AutoText - - -ImageMap area - - -Hyperlink - - - - -Click object - - -object is selected - - -x - - -x - - -x - - - - - - - - - - -Mouse over object - - -mouse pointer moves over the object - - -x - - -x - - -x - - - - -x - - -x - - - - -Trigger Hyperlink - - -hyperlink that is assigned to the object is clicked - - -x - - -x - - -x - - - - - - -x - - - - -Mouse leaves object - - -mouse pointer moves off the object - - -x - - -x - - -x - - - - -x - - -x - - - - -Graphics load successful - - -graphic is loaded successfully - - - - -x - - - - - - - - - - - - -Graphics load terminated - - -loading of the graphic is terminated by the user (for example, when downloading) - - - - -x - - - - - - - - - - - - -Graphics load faulty - - -graphic is not successfully loaded - - - - -x - - - - - - - - - - - - -Input of alpha characters - - -text is inputted - - - - - - -x - - - - - - - - - - -Input of non-alpha characters - - -Nonprinting characters, such as tabs and line breaks, are entered - - - - - - -x - - - - - - - - - - -Resize frame - - -frame is resized - - - - - - -x - - - - - - - - - - -Move frame - - -frame is moved - - - - - - -x - - - - - - - - - - -Before inserting AutoText - - -before AutoText is inserted - - - - - - - - -x - - - - - - - - -After inserting AutoText - - -after AutoText is inserted - - - - - - - - -x - - - - - - -
- -For events that are linked to controls in forms, seeControl properties, or Form properties. -Macros -Specify the macro that executes when the selected event occurs. -Frames allow you to link certain events to a function that then decides if the event is handled by $[officename] Writer or by the function. See the $[officename] Basic Help for more information. -Category -Lists the $[officename] program and any open $[officename] document. Within this list, select the location where you want to save the macros. -Macro name + +Macro +Specifies the macro to run when you click a graphic, frame, or an OLE object. + + +Event +List the events that can trigger a macro. Only the events that are relevant to selected object are listed. +The following table lists the object types and the events that can trigger a macro: + + + +Event + + +Event trigger + + +OLE object + + +Graphics + + +Frame + + +AutoText + + +ImageMap area + + +Hyperlink + + + + +Click object + + +object is selected + + +x + + +x + + +x + + + + + + + + + + +Mouse over object + + +mouse pointer moves over the object + + +x + + +x + + +x + + + + +x + + +x + + + + +Trigger Hyperlink + + +hyperlink that is assigned to the object is clicked + + +x + + +x + + +x + + + + + + +x + + + + +Mouse leaves object + + +mouse pointer moves off the object + + +x + + +x + + +x + + + + +x + + +x + + + + +Graphics load successful + + +graphic is loaded successfully + + + + +x + + + + + + + + + + + + +Graphics load terminated + + +loading of the graphic is terminated by the user (for example, when downloading) + + + + +x + + + + + + + + + + + + +Graphics load faulty + + +graphic is not successfully loaded + + + + +x + + + + + + + + + + + + +Input of alpha characters + + +text is inputted + + + + + + +x + + + + + + + + + + +Input of non-alpha characters + + +Nonprinting characters, such as tabs and line breaks, are entered + + + + + + +x + + + + + + + + + + +Resize frame + + +frame is resized + + + + + + +x + + + + + + + + + + +Move frame + + +frame is moved + + + + + + +x + + + + + + + + + + +Before inserting AutoText + + +before AutoText is inserted + + + + + + + + +x + + + + + + + + +After inserting AutoText + + +after AutoText is inserted + + + + + + + + +x + + + + + + +
+ +For events that are linked to controls in forms, seeControl properties, or Form properties. +Macros +Specify the macro that executes when the selected event occurs. +Frames allow you to link certain events to a function that then decides if the event is handled by $[officename] Writer or by the function. See the $[officename] Basic Help for more information. +Category +Lists the $[officename] program and any open $[officename] document. Within this list, select the location where you want to save the macros. +Macro name Lists the available macros. Select the macro that you want to assign to the selected event, and then click Assign. - -Assign + +Assign Assigns the selected to the selected event. - -Remove + +Remove Removes the macro assignment from the selected entry. - - - + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp index 402b7b5c76..2de1170ae7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Text Flow -/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: spec "Tables: Automatic Page And Column Breaks" -YJ:checked -UFI: sw.features "Vertical formatting of individual table cells"; dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Text Flow +/text/swriter/01/05090300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: spec "Tables: Automatic Page And Column Breaks" +YJ:checked +UFI: sw.features "Vertical formatting of individual table cells"; dedr: reviewed + + +
-tables;text flow around text tables -text flow;around text tables -columns; breaks in text tables -row breaks in text tables -tables; allowing page breaks -page breaks; tables +tables;text flow around text tables +text flow;around text tables +columns; breaks in text tables +row breaks in text tables +tables; allowing page breaks +page breaks; tables splitting tables;row breaks - -Text Flow -Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table. -
- + +Text Flow +Set the text flow options for the text before and after the table. + + Text flow - -Break + +Break Select this check box, and then select the type of break that you want to associate with the table. - -Page -Inserts a page break before or after the table. + +Page +Inserts a page break before or after the table. To prevent a page break in a table, select the table, long-click the Insert icon on the Main Toolbar, and then click the Insert Frame Manually icon. To hide the border of the frame, select the frame, choose Format - Frame, and then click the Borders tab. - -Column + +Column Inserts a column break before or after the table on a multi-column page. - -Before + +Before Inserts a page or column break before the table. - -After + +After Inserts a page or column break after the table. - -With Page Style + +With Page Style Applies the page style that you specify to the first page that follows the page break. - -Page Style + +Page Style Select the page style that you want to apply to the first page that follows the break. - -Page number + +Page number Enter the page number for the first page that follows the break. - -Allow table to split across pages and columns + +Allow table to split across pages and columns Allows a page break or column break between the rows of a table. - -Allow row to break across pages and columns + +Allow row to break across pages and columns Allows a page break or column break inside a row of the table. This option is not applied to the first row in a table if the Repeat Heading option is selected. - -Keep with next paragraph + +Keep with next paragraph Keeps the table and the following paragraph together when you insert the break. - -Repeat heading + +Repeat heading Repeats the table heading on a new page when the table spans more than one page. - -The first ... rows + +The first ... rows Enter the number of rows to include in the heading. - -Text direction -Select the direction for the text in the cells. You can also use a combination of the following %PRODUCTNAME formatting options to specify the orientation of text in table cells:dedr: (put location of these options in brackets) - - -horizontal text - - -vertical text - - -right-to-left (vertical) direction - - -left-to-right direction. - + +Text direction +Select the direction for the text in the cells. You can also use a combination of the following %PRODUCTNAME formatting options to specify the orientation of text in table cells:dedr: (put location of these options in brackets) + + +horizontal text + + +vertical text + + +right-to-left (vertical) direction + + +left-to-right direction. + - -Vertical alignment -Specify the vertical text alignment for the cells in the table. - - - - + +Vertical alignment +Specify the vertical text alignment for the cells in the table. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110600.xhp index fdcad3c5f9..a101dc21d4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05110600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Space Equally -/text/swriter/01/05110600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Space Equally +/text/swriter/01/05110600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Space Rows Equally + +Space Rows Equally Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection. - -
- - - + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp index 8aa96b1a98..04efe72c8b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Numbering Style -/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -Numbering Style -Here you can create a Numbering Style. The Numbering Styles are organized in the Style catalog offered in the Stylist for creating documents. - -When a Numbering Style is created, a name is assigned to the numbering. This is why such templates are also called "named" numberings. Unnamed numberings, which are used for direct formatting, can be created in the Numbering/bullets dialog or with the icons of the object bar for bullets and numbering. - - - - - - - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Numbering Style +/text/swriter/01/05130004.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +Numbering Style +Here you can create a Numbering Style. The Numbering Styles are organized in the Style catalog offered in the Stylist for creating documents. + +When a Numbering Style is created, a name is assigned to the numbering. This is why such templates are also called "named" numberings. Unnamed numberings, which are used for direct formatting, can be created in the Numbering/bullets dialog or with the icons of the object bar for bullets and numbering. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp index fb3781cceb..3386e1df44 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Condition -/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Condition +/text/swriter/01/05130100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-styles; conditional +styles; conditional conditional styles - -Condition -Define conditions for Conditional Styles here. -
- -Conditional Styles are Paragraph Styles that have different properties depending on the context. Once defined, you cannot change the properties of a Conditional Style. -$[officename] applies the paragraph properties of conditional Styles as follows (the bold terms correspond to the titles of dialog fields): If a paragraph formatted with a conditional Style is in a Context that has an Applied Style linked to it, then the Paragraph Style from that condition is used. If no Style is linked to the Context, then the attributes defined in the conditional Style apply. The following example illustrates this relationship: - - -Open a blank text document and write a short business letter with a header (Format - Page ... -Header). - - -Define a new Paragraph Style by choosing New... and selecting all the paragraph properties that you want for your business letter in the Paragraph Style dialog. Name this template "business letter". - - -Then click the Condition tab and select the Conditional style field to define the new Paragraph Style as a conditional style. - - -In Context, select the header entry and under Paragraph Styles select the style for the header in your business letter; for example, the default Paragraph Style "Header". You also can select your own style. - - -You can apply the Paragraph Style to the context by double-clicking the selected entry in the Paragraph Styles list box or by using Assign. - - -Click OK to close the Paragraph Style dialog, and then format all paragraphs in your business letter, including the header, with the new "business letter" conditional Paragraph Style. (When you click in the header, you may need to display all the styles or user styles in the style list to use the new business letter style.) - - -The header text now has the attributes you specified in the Header Paragraph Style, while the other parts of the document have the attributes defined in the business letter conditional Paragraph Style. -The "Text Body" Style was created as a conditional Style. Therefore, any Styles you derive from it can be used as conditional Styles. + +Condition +Define conditions for Conditional Styles here. + + +Conditional Styles are Paragraph Styles that have different properties depending on the context. Once defined, you cannot change the properties of a Conditional Style. +$[officename] applies the paragraph properties of conditional Styles as follows (the bold terms correspond to the titles of dialog fields): If a paragraph formatted with a conditional Style is in a Context that has an Applied Style linked to it, then the Paragraph Style from that condition is used. If no Style is linked to the Context, then the attributes defined in the conditional Style apply. The following example illustrates this relationship: + + +Open a blank text document and write a short business letter with a header (Format - Page ... -Header). + + +Define a new Paragraph Style by choosing New... and selecting all the paragraph properties that you want for your business letter in the Paragraph Style dialog. Name this template "business letter". + + +Then click the Condition tab and select the Conditional style field to define the new Paragraph Style as a conditional style. + + +In Context, select the header entry and under Paragraph Styles select the style for the header in your business letter; for example, the default Paragraph Style "Header". You also can select your own style. + + +You can apply the Paragraph Style to the context by double-clicking the selected entry in the Paragraph Styles list box or by using Assign. + + +Click OK to close the Paragraph Style dialog, and then format all paragraphs in your business letter, including the header, with the new "business letter" conditional Paragraph Style. (When you click in the header, you may need to display all the styles or user styles in the style list to use the new business letter style.) + + +The header text now has the attributes you specified in the Header Paragraph Style, while the other parts of the document have the attributes defined in the business letter conditional Paragraph Style. +The "Text Body" Style was created as a conditional Style. Therefore, any Styles you derive from it can be used as conditional Styles. The Paragraph Style applied to the context is used when exporting to other formats (RTF, HTML, and so on). - -Conditional style + +Conditional style Check this box to define a new style as a conditional style. - -Context -Here you can see the $[officename] predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, numbering/bullets levels 1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer. -Applied Style + +Context +Here you can see the $[officename] predefined contexts, including outline levels 1 to 10, numbering/bullets levels 1 to 10, table header, table contents, section, border, footnote, header and footer. +Applied Style Here you can see the list of all Paragraph Styles applied to a context. - -Styles + +Styles A list of all Paragraph Styles which can be assigned to a context is contained in the list box. - -Remove + +Remove Click here to remove the current context assigned to the selected style. - -Assign -Click Assign to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context. - - + +Assign +Click Assign to apply the selected Paragraph Style to the defined context. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp index 7dec6f6fa8..268f8b4021 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Stylist -/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fixed #i21144#, deleted bookmarks, changed par_3146333 wording to reflect what really happens - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Stylist +/text/swriter/01/05140000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fixed #i21144#, deleted bookmarks, changed par_3146333 wording to reflect what really happens + + +
applying styles - -Styles and Formatting -Use the Styles and Formatting window to apply, create, edit, add, and remove formatting styles. -
- -To dock the Styles and Formatting window, hold down Ctrl, and then drag its title bar to the left or to the right side of the workspace. To undock the window, hold down Ctrl, and then double-click a free space on its toolbar. -How to apply a style: - - -Select the text. To apply a Character Style to one word, click the word. To apply a Paragraph Style, click the paragraph. - - -Double-click the style in the Styles and Formatting window. - - -You can assign shortcut keys to Styles on the Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab page. -The Styles and Formatting toolbar contains icons for formatting your documents: -Style Category - - - + +Styles and Formatting +Use the Styles and Formatting window to apply, create, edit, add, and remove formatting styles. + + +To dock the Styles and Formatting window, hold down Ctrl, and then drag its title bar to the left or to the right side of the workspace. To undock the window, hold down Ctrl, and then double-click a free space on its toolbar. +How to apply a style: + + +Select the text. To apply a Character Style to one word, click the word. To apply a Paragraph Style, click the paragraph. + + +Double-click the style in the Styles and Formatting window. + + +You can assign shortcut keys to Styles on the Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab page. +The Styles and Formatting toolbar contains icons for formatting your documents: +Style Category +
+ + Icon - - - -Paragraph Styles - - -
+ + + +Paragraph Styles + + + - -Displays formatting styles for paragraphs. Use paragraph styles to apply the same formatting, such as font, numbering, and layout to the paragraphs in your document. - - - + +Displays formatting styles for paragraphs. Use paragraph styles to apply the same formatting, such as font, numbering, and layout to the paragraphs in your document. +
+ + Icon - - - -Character Styles - - -
+ + + +Character Styles + + + - -Displays formatting styles for characters. Use character styles to apply font styles to selected text in a paragraph. - - - + +Displays formatting styles for characters. Use character styles to apply font styles to selected text in a paragraph. +
+ + Icon - - - -Frame Styles - - -
+ + + +Frame Styles + + + - -Displays formatting styles for frames. Use frame styles to format frame layouts and position. - - - + +Displays formatting styles for frames. Use frame styles to format frame layouts and position. +
+ + Icon - - - -Page Styles - - -
+ + + +Page Styles + + + - -Displays formatting styles for pages. Use page styles to determine page layouts, including the presence of headers and footers. - - - + +Displays formatting styles for pages. Use page styles to determine page layouts, including the presence of headers and footers. +
+ + Icon - - - -Numbering Styles - - -
+ + + +Numbering Styles + + + - -Displays formatting styles for numbered and bulleted lists. Use numbering styles to format number and bullet characters and to specify indents. - - - + +Displays formatting styles for numbered and bulleted lists. Use numbering styles to format number and bullet characters and to specify indents. +
+ + Icon - - - -Fill Format Mode - - -
+ + + +Fill Format Mode + + + - -Applies the selected style to the object or text that you select in the document. Click this icon, and then drag a selection in the document to apply the style. To exit this mode, click the icon again, or press Esc. - - - - + +Applies the selected style to the object or text that you select in the document. Click this icon, and then drag a selection in the document to apply the style. To exit this mode, click the icon again, or press Esc. + +
+ + Icon - - - -New Style from Selection - - -
+ + + +New Style from Selection + + + - -Creates a new style based on the formatting of the current paragraph, page, or selection. - - - - + +Creates a new style based on the formatting of the current paragraph, page, or selection. + +
+ + Icon - - - -Update Style - - -
+ + + +Update Style + + + - -Updates the style that is selected in the Styles and Formatting window to match the style of the current text selection. - -Style List / Style Groups / Context Menu: New / Modify / Delete -The commands offered in the Styles and Formatting window are the same as those found in the Style Catalog dialog.UFI: Style Catalog may be removed, see Format Menu spec -Applied Styles - - - + +Updates the style that is selected in the Styles and Formatting window to match the style of the current text selection. + +Style List / Style Groups / Context Menu: New / Modify / Delete +The commands offered in the Styles and Formatting window are the same as those found in the Style Catalog dialog.UFI: Style Catalog may be removed, see Format Menu spec +Applied Styles + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp index af32b17142..8a5ea297f4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -AutoFormat -/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +AutoFormat +/text/swriter/01/05150000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
AutoFormat function; text documents - -AutoFormat -Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect. -
- - - - -To open the AutoFormat for Tables dialog, click in a table cell, and then choose Format - AutoFormat. - - + +AutoFormat +Automatically formats the file according to the options that you set under Tools - AutoCorrect. + + + + + +To open the AutoFormat for Tables dialog, click in a table cell, and then choose Format - AutoFormat. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp index 3d4828ea7e..77ab7b0222 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -AutoFormat for Tables -/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +AutoFormat for Tables +/text/swriter/01/05150101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -tables;AutoFormat function -AutoFormat function;applying to text tables +tables;AutoFormat function +AutoFormat function;applying to text tables table styles;adding to AutoFormat list - -AutoFormat for Tables + +AutoFormat for Tables Automatically applies formats to the current table, including fonts, shading, and borders. - - -Applying an AutoFormat to a Table - - -Click in a table cell, or select the cells that you want to format. - - -Choose Format - -AutoFormat, and then click the format that you to want to apply. - - -Click OK. - + + +Applying an AutoFormat to a Table + + +Click in a table cell, or select the cells that you want to format. + + +Choose Format - +AutoFormat, and then click the format that you to want to apply. + + +Click OK. + - -Format + +Format Lists the available formatting styles for tables. Click the format that you want to apply, and then click OK. - -Add -Adds a new table style to the list. - - -Format a table in your document. - - -Select the table, and then choose Format - AutoFormat. - - -Click Add. - - -In the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name, and then click OK. - + +Add +Adds a new table style to the list. + + +Format a table in your document. + + +Select the table, and then choose Format - AutoFormat. + + +Click Add. + + +In the Add AutoFormat dialog, enter a name, and then click OK. + - -Delete + +Delete Deletes the selected table style. - -More -Displays more formatting options for tables. Click again to hide the options. -Formatting + +More +Displays more formatting options for tables. Click again to hide the options. +Formatting Select the formatting attributes that you to include in the selected table style. - -Number format + +Number format Includes numbering formats in the selected table style. - -Font + +Font Includes font formatting in the selected table style. - -Alignment + +Alignment Includes alignment settings in the selected table style. - -Border + +Border Includes border styles in the selected table style. - -Pattern + +Pattern Includes background styles in the selected table style. - -Rename -Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename the "Standard" table style. - - + +Rename +Changes the name of the selected table style. You cannot rename the "Standard" table style. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp index 26f0b7a37f..be0945ccf7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Hyphenation -/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Hyphenation +/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Hyphenation + +Hyphenation Inserts hyphens in words that are too long to fit at the end of a line. $[officename] searches the document and suggests hyphenation that you can accept or reject. - -
- - -To automatically hyphenate the current or selected paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Text Flow tab. You can also apply automatic hyphenation to a paragraph style. -When $[officename] finds a word that requires hyphenation, do one of the following options: - - -To accept the suggestion, click Hyphenate. - - -To accept one of the suggestions, click the hyphen, type an Equal sign (=), and then click Hyphenate. - - -To reject the suggestion, click Remove. - - -To exclude paragraphs from the automatic hyphenation, select the paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Text Flow tab, and then clear the Automatically check box in the Hyphenation area. -To turn off the suggestion dialogs for hyphenation, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and select the Hyphenate without inquiry check box. + + + + +To automatically hyphenate the current or selected paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, and then click the Text Flow tab. You can also apply automatic hyphenation to a paragraph style. +When $[officename] finds a word that requires hyphenation, do one of the following options: + + +To accept the suggestion, click Hyphenate. + + +To accept one of the suggestions, click the hyphen, type an Equal sign (=), and then click Hyphenate. + + +To reject the suggestion, click Remove. + + +To exclude paragraphs from the automatic hyphenation, select the paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Text Flow tab, and then clear the Automatically check box in the Hyphenation area. +To turn off the suggestion dialogs for hyphenation, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and select the Hyphenate without inquiry check box. To manually enter a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command -Ctrl+Minus sign (-). +Ctrl+Minus sign (-). To insert a non-breaking (protected) hyphen, click in the word that you want to hyphenate, and then press Shift+Command -+Ctrl +Minus sign(-). -To hide custom hyphens, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then clear the Custom hyphens check box. ++Ctrl +Minus sign(-). +To hide custom hyphens, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then clear the Custom hyphens check box. Word - -Word + +Word Displays the hyphenation suggestion(s) for the selected word. - -Left / Right Arrow + +Left / Right Arrow Set the position of the hyphen. This option is only available if more than one hyphenation suggestion is displayed. - -Next + +Next Ignores the hyphenation suggestion and finds the next word to hyphenate. - -Hyphenate + +Hyphenate Inserts the hyphen at the indicated position. - -Remove -Rejects the hyphenation suggestion. - - - - + +Remove +Rejects the hyphenation suggestion. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp index 43316b289c..dc6cbe2120 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Word Count -text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp - - -UFI: new Writer menu entry Word Count -yj: checked - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Word Count +text/swriter/01/06040000.xhp + + +UFI: new Writer menu entry Word Count +yj: checked + + -character counts -counting words +character counts +counting words word counts - -
-Word Count -Counts the words and characters in the current selection and in the whole document. -
- -
-Statistics -
- - + +
+Word Count +Counts the words and characters in the current selection and in the whole document. +
+ +
+Statistics +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp index 896bc6998c..59b75ace95 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Numbering -/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Numbering -Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document. -
+ ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Numbering +/text/swriter/01/06060100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Numbering +Specifies the number format and the hierarchy for chapter numbering in the current document. +
- -Level -Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level. To apply the numbering options, except for the paragraph style, to all of the levels, click "1-10". -Numbering + +Level +Click the outline level that you want to modify, and then specify the numbering options for the level. To apply the numbering options, except for the paragraph style, to all of the levels, click "1-10". +Numbering Specify the formatting for the select outline level. - -Paragraph Style + +Paragraph Style Select the paragraph style that you want to assign to the selected outline level. If you click "None", the selected outline level is not defined. - -Number -Select the numbering style that you want to apply to the selected outline level. - - - - -Selection - - - - -Description - - - - - -A, B, C, ? - - -Capital letters - - - - -a, b, c, ? - - -Lowercase letters - - - - -I, II, III, ? - - -Roman numerals (upper) - - - - -i, ii, iii, ? - - -Roman numerals (lower) - - - - -1, 2, 3, ? - - -Arabic numerals - - - - -A,... AA,... AAA,... - - -Alphabetical numbering with identical capital letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the second number in level three is "BBB". - - - - -a,... aa,... aaa,... - - -Alphabetical numbering with identical lower case letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the third number in level two is "cc". - - - - -None - - -No numbering symbol. Only the character or symbol defined in the Separator fields appears at the beginning of the numbered line. - - -
+ +Number +Select the numbering style that you want to apply to the selected outline level. + + + + +Selection + + + + +Description + + + + + +A, B, C, ? + + +Capital letters + + + + +a, b, c, ? + + +Lowercase letters + + + + +I, II, III, ? + + +Roman numerals (upper) + + + + +i, ii, iii, ? + + +Roman numerals (lower) + + + + +1, 2, 3, ? + + +Arabic numerals + + + + +A,... AA,... AAA,... + + +Alphabetical numbering with identical capital letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the second number in level three is "BBB". + + + + +a,... aa,... aaa,... + + +Alphabetical numbering with identical lower case letters, where the number of letters indicates the chapter level. For example, the third number in level two is "cc". + + + + +None + + +No numbering symbol. Only the character or symbol defined in the Separator fields appears at the beginning of the numbered line. + + +
- -Character Style + +Character Style Select the format of the numbering character. - -Show sublevels + +Show sublevels Select the number of outline levels to include in the chapter numbering. For example, select "3" to display three levels of chapter numbering: 1.1.1 - -Separator Before + +Separator Before Enter the text that you want to display before the chapter number. For example, type "Chapter " to display "Chapter 1". - -Separator After + +Separator After Enter the text that you want to display after the chapter number. For example, type a period (.) to display "1." - -Start at -Enter the number that you want to restart the chapter numbering at. - - + +Start at +Enter the number that you want to restart the chapter numbering at. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp index f1a4452d3f..a4e9fe30b0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses -text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp - - -UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 3 - - - - -
-Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses -Specify the recipients and the layout of the address block. -
-This page has the title Address block if you create letters, and Address list if you create e-mails. -If you start the Mail Merge Wizard from a text document that already contains addresses as database fields, this Wizard page is the first page you will see. The first button then has the name Select different address list. -Select address list -Opens the Select Address List dialog, where you can choose a data source for the addresses, add new addresses, or type in a new list. -This document shall have an address block -Select to insert an address block to the text document. -Select the address block layout from the list box. -More -Opens the Select Address Block dialog. -Match fields -Opens the Match Fields dialog. -(Browse buttons) -Click a browse button to preview the address block of the previous or next document. -Mail Merge Wizard - Greetings line - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses +text/swriter/01/mailmerge03.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 3 + + + + +
+Mail Merge Wizard - Addresses +Specify the recipients and the layout of the address block. +
+This page has the title Address block if you create letters, and Address list if you create e-mails. +If you start the Mail Merge Wizard from a text document that already contains addresses as database fields, this Wizard page is the first page you will see. The first button then has the name Select different address list. +Select address list +Opens the Select Address List dialog, where you can choose a data source for the addresses, add new addresses, or type in a new list. +This document shall have an address block +Select to insert an address block to the text document. +Select the address block layout from the list box. +More +Opens the Select Address Block dialog. +Match fields +Opens the Match Fields dialog. +(Browse buttons) +Click a browse button to preview the address block of the previous or next document. +Mail Merge Wizard - Greetings line + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp index f938dc9b75..2950ae832b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Mail Merge Wizard - Greeting Line -text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp - - -UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 4 - - - - -
-Mail Merge Wizard - Greeting Line -Specify whether to include a greeting line and how it looks. You can automatically insert different greeting lines depending on the recipient's gender, if this information is stored in the database. -
-This document shall contain a greeting line -Select to add a greeting line. -Insert personalized greeting line -Select to add a personalized greeting line, or clear the check box to add a general greeting line. -Female -Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. -New -Opens the Custom Greeting Line (Female recipient) dialog. -Male -Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. -New -Opens the Custom Greeting Line (Male recipient) dialog. -Column title -Select the field name of the address database field containing gender information. -Field value -Select the field value that indicates that the recipient is of female gender. -General greeting line -Select the general greeting line that is used if a personalized greeting line cannot be created. -Preview -Watch a preview of the greeting line. -Match fields -Opens the Match Fields dialog. -(Browse buttons) -Click a browse button to preview the greeting line of the previous or next document. -Mail Merge Wizard - Layout - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Greeting Line +text/swriter/01/mailmerge04.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 4 + + + + +
+Mail Merge Wizard - Greeting Line +Specify whether to include a greeting line and how it looks. You can automatically insert different greeting lines depending on the recipient's gender, if this information is stored in the database. +
+This document shall contain a greeting line +Select to add a greeting line. +Insert personalized greeting line +Select to add a personalized greeting line, or clear the check box to add a general greeting line. +Female +Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. +New +Opens the Custom Greeting Line (Female recipient) dialog. +Male +Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. +New +Opens the Custom Greeting Line (Male recipient) dialog. +Column title +Select the field name of the address database field containing gender information. +Field value +Select the field value that indicates that the recipient is of female gender. +General greeting line +Select the general greeting line that is used if a personalized greeting line cannot be created. +Preview +Watch a preview of the greeting line. +Match fields +Opens the Match Fields dialog. +(Browse buttons) +Click a browse button to preview the greeting line of the previous or next document. +Mail Merge Wizard - Layout + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp index 2f04ac336d..fcdfed2b00 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Mail Merge Wizard - Layout -text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp - - -UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 5 - - - - -
-Mail Merge Wizard - Layout -Specify where to position the address block and greeting line on the documents. -
-Align to text body -Select to align the frame containing the address block to the left page margin. -From left -Enter the horizontal position of the address block frame on the page. -From top -Enter the vertical position of the address block frame on the page. -Up -Click to move the greeting line up. -Down -Click to move the greeting line down. -Zoom -Select a zooming level for the page preview. -Mail Merge Wizard - Prepare merge - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Layout +text/swriter/01/mailmerge05.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 5 + + + + +
+Mail Merge Wizard - Layout +Specify where to position the address block and greeting line on the documents. +
+Align to text body +Select to align the frame containing the address block to the left page margin. +From left +Enter the horizontal position of the address block frame on the page. +From top +Enter the vertical position of the address block frame on the page. +Up +Click to move the greeting line up. +Down +Click to move the greeting line down. +Zoom +Select a zooming level for the page preview. +Mail Merge Wizard - Prepare merge + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp index 9c05dc1a8b..e6b96296d7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Mail Merge Wizard - Prepare Merge -text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp - - -UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 6 - - - - -
-Mail Merge Wizard - Prepare Merge -Browse through the document previews, exclude single recipients, and edit the common document. -
-Recipient -Enter an address record number to preview the mail merge document of that recipient. Use the browse buttons to browse through all records. -Exclude this recipient -Select to exclude the current recipient from this mail merge. -Edit Document -Click to edit the common mail merge document for all recipients. The Wizard shrinks to a single button showing Back to the Mail Merge Wizard. Edit the document, then click the button to return to this page of the Wizard. -Mail Merge Wizard - Personalize - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Prepare Merge +text/swriter/01/mailmerge06.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 6 + + + + +
+Mail Merge Wizard - Prepare Merge +Browse through the document previews, exclude single recipients, and edit the common document. +
+Recipient +Enter an address record number to preview the mail merge document of that recipient. Use the browse buttons to browse through all records. +Exclude this recipient +Select to exclude the current recipient from this mail merge. +Edit Document +Click to edit the common mail merge document for all recipients. The Wizard shrinks to a single button showing Back to the Mail Merge Wizard. Edit the document, then click the button to return to this page of the Wizard. +Mail Merge Wizard - Personalize + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp index 3859496386..763166c7c7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Mail Merge Wizard - Personalize -text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp - - -UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 7 - - - - -
-Mail Merge Wizard - Personalize -Edit the individually created document for any recipient. -
-The Mail Merge Wizard creates one big merged document for all recipients together, with page breaks between the single recipients. When you see this page of the Wizard, the database fields are already replaced by the recipients field contents, so that you can search the merged document for a recipient's name and address. -Edit individual document -Click to edit the individual document for any recipient. The Wizard shrinks to a single button showing Back to the Mail Merge Wizard. Edit the document, then click the button to return to this page of the Wizard. -Find -Enter the text string to find in the document that contains the letters for all recipients. Click Find to perform the search. -Whole words only -Select to find the text as whole words only. -Backwards -Select to search from the current cursor position to the top of the document. -Match case -Select to search case sensitive, where for example searching for "a" does not find "A". -Mail Merge Wizard - Save, print & send - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Personalize +text/swriter/01/mailmerge07.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 7 + + + + +
+Mail Merge Wizard - Personalize +Edit the individually created document for any recipient. +
+The Mail Merge Wizard creates one big merged document for all recipients together, with page breaks between the single recipients. When you see this page of the Wizard, the database fields are already replaced by the recipients field contents, so that you can search the merged document for a recipient's name and address. +Edit individual document +Click to edit the individual document for any recipient. The Wizard shrinks to a single button showing Back to the Mail Merge Wizard. Edit the document, then click the button to return to this page of the Wizard. +Find +Enter the text string to find in the document that contains the letters for all recipients. Click Find to perform the search. +Whole words only +Select to find the text as whole words only. +Backwards +Select to search from the current cursor position to the top of the document. +Match case +Select to search case sensitive, where for example searching for "a" does not find "A". +Mail Merge Wizard - Save, print & send + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp index f893fa88e4..0360dd926d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Mail Merge Wizard - Save, Print & Send -text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp - - -UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 8 - - - - -
-Mail Merge Wizard - Save, Print & Send -Specify all output options on this page of the Wizard. -
-This page of the Wizard looks different according to the selected option. You can select an option, enter your settings for that option, then select another option, and so on. After all output options are set, click Finish to end the Wizard.Derek, please rewrite this para ! -Save starting document -Select to save the starting document that contains the database fields. -Save starting document -Click to save the document. -Save merged document -Select to save the merged document that contains all the recipients on separate pages. -Save as single document -Select to save the merged document as one file. -Save as individual documents -Select to save the merged document as one file per recipient. The file names are constructed from the name you enter plus an underline plus the number of the current record. -From -Select to save the merged document as one file per recipient, starting at the record number From, up to the record number To. -To -Enter the last record number to be saved as a file. -Save Documents -Click to save the documents. -Print merged document -Select to print the output for all or some recipients. -Printer -Select the printer. -Properties -Click to change the printer properties. -Print all documents -Select to print documents for all recipients. -From -Select to print the merged document as one file per recipient, starting at the record number From, up to the record number To. -To -Enter the last record number to be printed. -Print Documents -Click to start printing. -Send merged document as e-mail -Select to send the output as e-mails to all recipients. -To -Select the database field containing the e-mail address of the recipient. -Copy to -Opens the Copies to dialog, where you can specify one or more CC or BCC addresses. -Subject -Enter the subject line for all e-mails. -Send as -Select the mail format for all e-mails. -The formats Plain text and HTML are sent as mail body. The formats *.sxw, *.doc, and *.pdf are sent as attachments. -Properties -For e-mail formats that are sent as attachments, click here to open the E-Mail Message dialog. You can enter a text body and create a greeting line. -Name of the attachment -Shows the name of the attachment. -Send all records -Select to send e-mails to all recipients. -From -Select to send the merged document as one e-mail per recipient, starting at the record number From, up to the record number To. -To -Enter the last record number to be sent as e-mail. -Send Documents -Click to start sending e-mails. -Mail Merge Wizard - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Mail Merge Wizard - Save, Print & Send +text/swriter/01/mailmerge08.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge Wizard page 8 + + + + +
+Mail Merge Wizard - Save, Print & Send +Specify all output options on this page of the Wizard. +
+This page of the Wizard looks different according to the selected option. You can select an option, enter your settings for that option, then select another option, and so on. After all output options are set, click Finish to end the Wizard.Derek, please rewrite this para ! +Save starting document +Select to save the starting document that contains the database fields. +Save starting document +Click to save the document. +Save merged document +Select to save the merged document that contains all the recipients on separate pages. +Save as single document +Select to save the merged document as one file. +Save as individual documents +Select to save the merged document as one file per recipient. The file names are constructed from the name you enter plus an underline plus the number of the current record. +From +Select to save the merged document as one file per recipient, starting at the record number From, up to the record number To. +To +Enter the last record number to be saved as a file. +Save Documents +Click to save the documents. +Print merged document +Select to print the output for all or some recipients. +Printer +Select the printer. +Properties +Click to change the printer properties. +Print all documents +Select to print documents for all recipients. +From +Select to print the merged document as one file per recipient, starting at the record number From, up to the record number To. +To +Enter the last record number to be printed. +Print Documents +Click to start printing. +Send merged document as e-mail +Select to send the output as e-mails to all recipients. +To +Select the database field containing the e-mail address of the recipient. +Copy to +Opens the Copies to dialog, where you can specify one or more CC or BCC addresses. +Subject +Enter the subject line for all e-mails. +Send as +Select the mail format for all e-mails. +The formats Plain text and HTML are sent as mail body. The formats *.sxw, *.doc, and *.pdf are sent as attachments. +Properties +For e-mail formats that are sent as attachments, click here to open the E-Mail Message dialog. You can enter a text body and create a greeting line. +Name of the attachment +Shows the name of the attachment. +Send all records +Select to send e-mails to all recipients. +From +Select to send the merged document as one e-mail per recipient, starting at the record number From, up to the record number To. +To +Enter the last record number to be sent as e-mail. +Send Documents +Click to start sending e-mails. +Mail Merge Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp index d399821497..e837fb2388 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Customize Greeting Line -text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp - - -UFI: Custom Greeting Line dialog in mail merge - - - - -Customize Greeting Line -Specify the greeting line layout for letter mail merge or e-mail merge. This dialog exists for female recipients and male recipients with the same controls, but slightly different title bars. -Greeting line fields -Select a field and drag it to the other list box. -> -Click to add the selected field from the Greeting line fields list to the other list box. You can add the same field at multiple positions. -< -Click to remove the selected field from the other list box. -Drag greeting line fields into the box below -Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the buttons in the 4-arrows-block. -Customize greeting line field -For the Salutation and Punctuation Mark fields, select the value from the list box. -Preview -Shows a preview of the first database record using the current greeting line layout. -(4 arrows block) -Select an entry in the list box and click a button to move the entry. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Customize Greeting Line +text/swriter/01/mm_cusgrelin.xhp + + +UFI: Custom Greeting Line dialog in mail merge + + + + +Customize Greeting Line +Specify the greeting line layout for letter mail merge or e-mail merge. This dialog exists for female recipients and male recipients with the same controls, but slightly different title bars. +Greeting line fields +Select a field and drag it to the other list box. +> +Click to add the selected field from the Greeting line fields list to the other list box. You can add the same field at multiple positions. +< +Click to remove the selected field from the other list box. +Drag greeting line fields into the box below +Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the buttons in the 4-arrows-block. +Customize greeting line field +For the Salutation and Punctuation Mark fields, select the value from the list box. +Preview +Shows a preview of the first database record using the current greeting line layout. +(4 arrows block) +Select an entry in the list box and click a button to move the entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp index 811e2ad658..ecdfade37f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -E-Mail Message -text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp - - -UFI: E-Mail Body dialog for mail merge - - - - -E-Mail Message -Enter a text body and create a greeting line for e-mail formats that are sent as attachments, which are *.sxw, *.doc, and *.pdf formats. -This e-mail shall contain a greeting line -Select to add a greeting line. -Insert personalized greeting line -Select to add a personalized greeting line, or clear the check box to add a general greeting line. -Female -Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. -New -Opens the Custom Greeting Line (Female recipient) dialog. -Male -Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. -New -Opens the Custom Greeting Line (Male recipient) dialog. -Column title -Select the field name of the address database field containing gender information. -Field value -Select the field value that indicates that the recipient is of female gender. -General greeting line -Select the general greeting line that is used if a personalized greeting line cannot be created. -Write your message here -Enter the text body of all e-mails. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +E-Mail Message +text/swriter/01/mm_emabod.xhp + + +UFI: E-Mail Body dialog for mail merge + + + + +E-Mail Message +Enter a text body and create a greeting line for e-mail formats that are sent as attachments, which are *.sxw, *.doc, and *.pdf formats. +This e-mail shall contain a greeting line +Select to add a greeting line. +Insert personalized greeting line +Select to add a personalized greeting line, or clear the check box to add a general greeting line. +Female +Select the personalized greeting for a female recipient. +New +Opens the Custom Greeting Line (Female recipient) dialog. +Male +Select the personalized greeting for a male recipient. +New +Opens the Custom Greeting Line (Male recipient) dialog. +Column title +Select the field name of the address database field containing gender information. +Field value +Select the field value that indicates that the recipient is of female gender. +General greeting line +Select the general greeting line that is used if a personalized greeting line cannot be created. +Write your message here +Enter the text body of all e-mails. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp index eaee685d91..037b511f42 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Find Entry -text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp - - -UFI: Find Entry dialog of mail merge - - - - -Find Entry -Find a record or recipient in the mail merge address list. -Find -Enter the search text. -Find only in -Select to restrict the search to one data field. -Select the data field where to search the text. -Find -Click to display the next record containing the search text. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Find Entry +text/swriter/01/mm_finent.xhp + + +UFI: Find Entry dialog of mail merge + + + + +Find Entry +Find a record or recipient in the mail merge address list. +Find +Enter the search text. +Find only in +Select to restrict the search to one data field. +Select the data field where to search the text. +Find +Click to display the next record containing the search text. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp index 04f26ecb2e..9b6801a448 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Match Fields -text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp - - -UFI: Match Fields dialog for mail merge - - - - -Match Fields -Match the logical field names of the layout dialog to the field names in your database, for new address blocks or greeting lines. -Matches to: -For each logical field element, select a field name from your database. -Preview -The previews show the values of the first data record. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Match Fields +text/swriter/01/mm_matfie.xhp + + +UFI: Match Fields dialog for mail merge + + + + +Match Fields +Match the logical field names of the layout dialog to the field names in your database, for new address blocks or greeting lines. +Matches to: +For each logical field element, select a field name from your database. +Preview +The previews show the values of the first data record. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp index e71c5f9369..890fdab664 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -New Address Block -text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp - - -UFI: New Address Block dialog for mail merge - - - - -New Address Block -Specify the placement of address data fields for an address block for mail merge. -Address Elements -Select a field and drag it to the other list box. -> -Click to add the selected field from the Address Elements list to the other list box. You can add the same field at multiple positions. -< -Click to remove the selected field from the other list box. -Drag address element to the field below -Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the buttons in the 4-arrows-block. -Preview -Shows a preview of the first database record using the current address block layout. -(4 arrows block) -Select an entry in the list box and click a button to move the entry. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +New Address Block +text/swriter/01/mm_newaddblo.xhp + + +UFI: New Address Block dialog for mail merge + + + + +New Address Block +Specify the placement of address data fields for an address block for mail merge. +Address Elements +Select a field and drag it to the other list box. +> +Click to add the selected field from the Address Elements list to the other list box. You can add the same field at multiple positions. +< +Click to remove the selected field from the other list box. +Drag address element to the field below +Arrange the fields by drag-and-drop or use the buttons in the 4-arrows-block. +Preview +Shows a preview of the first database record using the current address block layout. +(4 arrows block) +Select an entry in the list box and click a button to move the entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp index c27532c7f6..f0a6439eab 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -New Address List -text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp - - -UFI: New Address List dialog for mail merge - - - - -New Address List -Enter new addresses or edit the addresses for the mail merge. When you close the dialog with OK, a save as dialog asks you for a path and file name to save the address list. The new address list is saved in the file format CSV - UTF8 formatted, with tab characters as record delimiters. -Address Information -Enter or edit the field contents for each mail merge recipient. -View Entry Numberscreen mockup is View Entries -Click the buttons to navigate through the records, or enter a record number to display that record. -New -Adds a new empty record to the address list. -Delete -Deletes the currently displayed record. -Find -Opens the Find Entry dialog. The Find Entry dialog can stay open while you edit the entries. -Customize -Opens the Customize Address List dialog, where you can rearrange the field order, rename, add and delete fields. - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +New Address List +text/swriter/01/mm_newaddlis.xhp + + +UFI: New Address List dialog for mail merge + + + + +New Address List +Enter new addresses or edit the addresses for the mail merge. When you close the dialog with OK, a save as dialog asks you for a path and file name to save the address list. The new address list is saved in the file format CSV - UTF8 formatted, with tab characters as record delimiters. +Address Information +Enter or edit the field contents for each mail merge recipient. +View Entry Numberscreen mockup is View Entries +Click the buttons to navigate through the records, or enter a record number to display that record. +New +Adds a new empty record to the address list. +Delete +Deletes the currently displayed record. +Find +Opens the Find Entry dialog. The Find Entry dialog can stay open while you edit the entries. +Customize +Opens the Customize Address List dialog, where you can rearrange the field order, rename, add and delete fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp index 37324d6909..3417af108e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Unlink Frames -/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Unlink Frames +/text/swriter/02/03220000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-frame links; unlinking +frame links; unlinking unlinking frames - -Unlink Frames -Breaks the link between two frames. You can only break the link that extends from the selected frame to the target frame. -
-
- - - + +Unlink Frames +Breaks the link between two frames. You can only break the link that extends from the selected frame to the target frame. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Unlink Frames - - -
- -
- - + + + +Unlink Frames + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04210000.xhp index 0b625de240..59165cc9e3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04210000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/04210000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Optimize -/text/swriter/02/04210000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Optimize +/text/swriter/02/04210000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Optimize -Opens a floating toolbar that contains functions for optimizing the rows and columns in a table. -
-
- - - + +Optimize +Opens a floating toolbar that contains functions for optimizing the rows and columns in a table. + +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Optimize - - -
- -
-You can select from the following functions: - - - - -Optimal Height - - -Optimal Column Width - - - - + + + +Optimize + + + + + +You can select from the following functions: + + + + +Optimal Height + + +Optimal Column Width + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp index c80743d735..2fdbecacf0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Book preview -text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp - - -UFI: new icon Spec doc "BookPreview" -YJ: checked - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Book preview +text/swriter/02/10080000.xhp + + +UFI: new icon Spec doc "BookPreview" +YJ: checked + + -previews;book preview +previews;book preview book preview - -
-Book preview -Select to display the first page on the right side in the page preview. If not selected, the first page is displayed on the left side of the preview. -
-
- - - + +
+Book preview +Select to display the first page on the right side in the page preview. If not selected, the first page is displayed on the left side of the preview. +
+
+
+ + book preview icon - - - -Book Preview - - -
- -
- - + + + +Book Preview + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp index ca2f019ed9..b88cf85558 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Formula -/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Formula +/text/swriter/02/14020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
-operators; in formulas -statistical functions -trigonometric functions -document properties;variables for -pages;number of +operators; in formulas +statistical functions +trigonometric functions +document properties;variables for +pages;number of variables;document properties - -Formula -Opens a submenu, from which you can insert a formula into the cell of a table. Place the cursor in a cell in the table or at the position in the document where you want the result to appear. Click the Formula icon and choose the desired formula from the submenu. -
-The formula appears in the input line. To specify a range of cells in a table, select the desired cells with the mouse. The corresponding cell references also appear in the input line. Enter additional parameters, as necessary, and click Apply to confirm your entry. You can also enter the formula directly if you know the appropriate syntax. This is necessary, for example, in the Insert Fields and Edit Fields dialogs. -
- - - + +Formula +Opens a submenu, from which you can insert a formula into the cell of a table. Place the cursor in a cell in the table or at the position in the document where you want the result to appear. Click the Formula icon and choose the desired formula from the submenu. + +The formula appears in the input line. To specify a range of cells in a table, select the desired cells with the mouse. The corresponding cell references also appear in the input line. Enter additional parameters, as necessary, and click Apply to confirm your entry. You can also enter the formula directly if you know the appropriate syntax. This is necessary, for example, in the Insert Fields and Edit Fields dialogs. +
+
+ + Icon - - - -Formula - - -
- -
-Summary of Formula Options -Basic Calculation Functions - - - -Addition - - -+ - - -Calculates the total. -Example: <A1> + 8 - - - - -Subtraction - - -- - - -Calculates the difference -Example: 10 - <B5> - - - - -Multiplication - - -MUL or * - - -Calculates the product. -Example: 7 MUL 9 - - - - -Division - - -DIV or / - - -Calculates the quotient -Example: 100 DIV 15 - - -
- -Basic Functions in the Submenu - - - -Sum - - -SUM - - - -Calculates the sum of the selected cells. -Example: SUM <A2:C2> displays the sum of the values in cells A2 to C2 - - - - -Round - - -ROUND - - - -Rounds a number to the specified decimal places. -Example: 15.678 ROUND 2 displays 15.68 - - - - -Percent - - -PHD - - - -Calculates a percentage -Example: 10 + 15 PHD displays 10.15 - - - - -Square Root - - -SQRT - - - -Calculates the square root. -Example: SQRT 25 displays 5.00 - - - - -Power - - -POW - - - -Calculates the power of a number. -Example: 2 POW 8 displays 256.00 - - -
+ + + +Formula + + + + + +Summary of Formula Options +Basic Calculation Functions + + + +Addition + + ++ + + +Calculates the total. +Example: <A1> + 8 + + + + +Subtraction + + +- + + +Calculates the difference +Example: 10 - <B5> + + + + +Multiplication + + +MUL or * + + +Calculates the product. +Example: 7 MUL 9 + + + + +Division + + +DIV or / + + +Calculates the quotient +Example: 100 DIV 15 + + +
+ +Basic Functions in the Submenu + + + +Sum + + +SUM + + + +Calculates the sum of the selected cells. +Example: SUM <A2:C2> displays the sum of the values in cells A2 to C2 + + + + +Round + + +ROUND + + + +Rounds a number to the specified decimal places. +Example: 15.678 ROUND 2 displays 15.68 + + + + +Percent + + +PHD + + + +Calculates a percentage +Example: 10 + 15 PHD displays 10.15 + + + + +Square Root + + +SQRT + + + +Calculates the square root. +Example: SQRT 25 displays 5.00 + + + + +Power + + +POW + + + +Calculates the power of a number. +Example: 2 POW 8 displays 256.00 + + +
+ + +Operators +You can insert various operators in your formula. Choose from the following functions: + + + +List Separator + + +| + + + +Separates the elements in a list. +Example of using a list: +MIN 10|20|50|<C6>|<A2:B6>|20 + + + + +Equal + + +EQ or == + + + +Checks if selected values are equal. If they are unequal, the result is zero, otherwise 1 (true) appears. +Example: <A1> EQ 2 displays 1, if the content of A1 equals 2. + + + + +Not Equal + + +NEQ or != + + + +Tests for inequality between selected values. +Example: <A1> NEQ 2 displays 0 (wrong), if the content of A1 equals 2. + + + + +Less than or Equal + + +LEQ + + + +Tests for values less than or equal to a specified value. +Example: <A1> LEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than or equal to 2. + + + + +Greater than or Equal + + +GEQ + + + +Tests for values greater than or equal to a specified value +Example: <A1> GEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than or equal to 2. + + + + +Less + + +L + + + +Tests for values less than a specified value +Example: <A1> L 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than 2. + + + + +Greater + + +G + + + +Tests for values greater than a specified value +Example: <A1> G 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than 2. + + + + +Boolean Or + + +OR + + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean OR +Example: 0 OR 0 displays 0 (false), anything else results in 1 (true) + + + + +Boolean X Or + + +XOR + + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean exclusive OR +Example: 1 XOR 0 displays 1 (true) + + + + +Boolean And + + +AND + + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean AND +Example: 1 AND 2 displays 1 (true) + + + + +Boolean Not + + +NOT + + + +Tests for values matching the Boolean NOT +Example: NOT 1 (true) displays 0 (false) + + +
+ + +Statistical Functions +You can choose from the following statistical functions: + + + +Mean + + +MEAN + + + +Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values in an area or a list. +Example: MEAN 10|30|20 displays 20 + + + + +Minimum Value + + +MIN + + + +Calculates the minimum value in an area or a list. +Example: MIN 10|30|20 displays 10 + + + + +Maximum Value + + +MAX + + + +Calculates the maximum value in an area or a list. +Example: MAX 10|30|20 displays 30.00 + + +
+ + +Trigonometric Functions +You can choose from the following trigonometric functions: + + + +Sine + + +SIN + + + +Calculates the sine in radians +Example: SIN (PI/2) + + + + +Cosine + + +COS + + + +Calculates the cosine in radians. +Example: COS 1 + + + + +Tangent + + +TAN + + + +Calculates the tangent in radians. +Example: TAN <A1> + + + + +Arc Sine + + +ASIN + + + +Calculates the arc sine in radians. +Example: ASIN 1 + + + + +Arc Cosine + + +ACOS + + + +Calculates the arc cosine in radians. +Example: ACOS 1 + + + + +Arc Tangent + + +ATAN + + + +Calculates the arc tangent in radians. +Example :ATAN 1 + + +
- -Operators -You can insert various operators in your formula. Choose from the following functions: - - - -List Separator - - -| - - - -Separates the elements in a list. -Example of using a list: -MIN 10|20|50|<C6>|<A2:B6>|20 - - - - -Equal - - -EQ or == - - - -Checks if selected values are equal. If they are unequal, the result is zero, otherwise 1 (true) appears. -Example: <A1> EQ 2 displays 1, if the content of A1 equals 2. - - - - -Not Equal - - -NEQ or != - - - -Tests for inequality between selected values. -Example: <A1> NEQ 2 displays 0 (wrong), if the content of A1 equals 2. - - - - -Less than or Equal - - -LEQ - - - -Tests for values less than or equal to a specified value. -Example: <A1> LEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than or equal to 2. - - - - -Greater than or Equal - - -GEQ - - - -Tests for values greater than or equal to a specified value -Example: <A1> GEQ 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than or equal to 2. - - - - -Less - - -L - - - -Tests for values less than a specified value -Example: <A1> L 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is less than 2. - - - - -Greater - - -G - - - -Tests for values greater than a specified value -Example: <A1> G 2 displays 1 (true), if the content of A1 is greater than 2. - - - - -Boolean Or - - -OR - - - -Tests for values matching the Boolean OR -Example: 0 OR 0 displays 0 (false), anything else results in 1 (true) - - - - -Boolean X Or - - -XOR - - - -Tests for values matching the Boolean exclusive OR -Example: 1 XOR 0 displays 1 (true) - - - - -Boolean And - - -AND - - - -Tests for values matching the Boolean AND -Example: 1 AND 2 displays 1 (true) - - - - -Boolean Not - - -NOT - - - -Tests for values matching the Boolean NOT -Example: NOT 1 (true) displays 0 (false) - - -
+Variables for document properties +The following document properties are also found under File - Properties - Statistics. + + + +CHAR + + +Number of characters in the document + + + + +WORD + + +Number of words in the document + + + + +PARA + + +Number of paragraphs in the document + + + + +GRAPH + + +Number of graphics in the document + + + + +TABLES + + +Number of tables in the document + + + + +OLE + + +Number of OLE objects in the document + + + + +PAGE + + +Total number of pages in the document + + +
- -Statistical Functions -You can choose from the following statistical functions: - - - -Mean - - -MEAN - - - -Calculates the arithmetic mean of the values in an area or a list. -Example: MEAN 10|30|20 displays 20 - - - - -Minimum Value - - -MIN - - - -Calculates the minimum value in an area or a list. -Example: MIN 10|30|20 displays 10 - - - - -Maximum Value - - -MAX - - - -Calculates the maximum value in an area or a list. -Example: MAX 10|30|20 displays 30.00 - - -
+More Defined Values + + + +PI + + +PI + + +3.1415... + + + + +Euler's constant + + +E + + +2.7182... + + + + +True + + +TRUE + + +not equal to 0 + + + + +False + + +FALSE + + +0 + + +
- -Trigonometric Functions -You can choose from the following trigonometric functions: - - - -Sine - - -SIN - - - -Calculates the sine in radians -Example: SIN (PI/2) - - - - -Cosine - - -COS - - - -Calculates the cosine in radians. -Example: COS 1 - - - - -Tangent - - -TAN - - - -Calculates the tangent in radians. -Example: TAN <A1> - - - - -Arc Sine - - -ASIN - - - -Calculates the arc sine in radians. -Example: ASIN 1 - - - - -Arc Cosine - - -ACOS - - - -Calculates the arc cosine in radians. -Example: ACOS 1 - - - - -Arc Tangent - - -ATAN - - - -Calculates the arc tangent in radians. -Example :ATAN 1 - - -
- -Variables for document properties -The following document properties are also found under File - Properties - Statistics. - - - -CHAR - - -Number of characters in the document - - - - -WORD - - -Number of words in the document - - - - -PARA - - -Number of paragraphs in the document - - - - -GRAPH - - -Number of graphics in the document - - - - -TABLES - - -Number of tables in the document - - - - -OLE - - -Number of OLE objects in the document - - - - -PAGE - - -Total number of pages in the document - - -
- -More Defined Values - - - -PI - - -PI - - -3.1415... - - - - -Euler's constant - - -E - - -2.7182... - - - - -True - - -TRUE - - -not equal to 0 - - - - -False - - -FALSE - - -0 - - -
- - - + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp index 273ac44902..e267d5c3d5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Page Numbers -/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Page Numbers +/text/swriter/02/18030300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Page Numbers -Inserts the current page number as a field at the cursor position. The default setting is the Page Style format. -
- -If you would like to define a different format or modify the page number, insert a field with Insert - Fields - Other and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. It is also possible to edit a field inserted with the Page Numbers command with Edit - Fields. - - + +Page Numbers +Inserts the current page number as a field at the cursor position. The default setting is the Page Style format. + + +If you would like to define a different format or modify the page number, insert a field with Insert - Fields - Other and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. It is also possible to edit a field inserted with the Page Numbers command with Edit - Fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp index 3bc63b943f..c50ef00966 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Page Count -/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Page Count +/text/swriter/02/18030400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Page Count -Inserts as a field the total number of pages in the document. -
- -If you wish to have the page number formatted with a different numbering style, choose Insert - Field - Other to insert the required field, and specify the settings in the Field dialog. The format of the field inserted using the Page Number command can also be modified using the Edit - Field command. - - + +Page Count +Inserts as a field the total number of pages in the document. + + +If you wish to have the page number formatted with a different numbering style, choose Insert - Field - Other to insert the required field, and specify the settings in the Field dialog. The format of the field inserted using the Page Number command can also be modified using the Edit - Field command. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp index 5faf06c25e..d7edd05aa9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Title -/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Title +/text/swriter/02/18030600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Title -Inserts the title specified in the document properties as a field. This field displays the data entered in the Title field under File - Properties - Description. -
- -If you would like to insert a different document property as a field, select Insert - Fields - Other and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. The DocInformation category contains all of the fields shown in the document properties. - - + +Title +Inserts the title specified in the document properties as a field. This field displays the data entered in the Title field under File - Properties - Description. + + +If you would like to insert a different document property as a field, select Insert - Fields - Other and make the desired settings in the Fields dialog. The DocInformation category contains all of the fields shown in the document properties. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp index 032709a222..d5db1ad487 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Insert Headername is wrong, see bug #105568# -/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Insert Headername is wrong, see bug #105568# +/text/swriter/02/19010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Insert Headername is wrong, see bug #105568# -Displays the header of an HTML document if headers are enabled on the Format - Page - Header tab page.help text still visible in Customize - Toolbars, so do not remove -
- - + +Insert Headername is wrong, see bug #105568# +Displays the header of an HTML document if headers are enabled on the Format - Page - Header tab page.help text still visible in Customize - Toolbars, so do not remove + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp index b1a2b6f669..a8ac566910 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Insert Footername is wrong, see bug #105568# -/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Insert Footername is wrong, see bug #105568# +/text/swriter/02/19020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Insert Footername is wrong, see bug #105568# -Displays the footer of an HTML document if footers are enabled on the Format - Page - Footer -tab page.help text still visible in Customize - Toolbars, so do not remove -
- - + +Insert Footername is wrong, see bug #105568# +Displays the footer of an HTML document if footers are enabled on the Format - Page - Footer +tab page.help text still visible in Customize - Toolbars, so do not remove + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp index 367b43119a..03ebe90192 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer -/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: introduced tables again, fixing #i17471# -yj: checked - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer +/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: introduced tables again, fixing #i17471# +yj: checked + + +
-shortcut keys; in text documents +shortcut keys; in text documents text documents; shortcut keys in - + Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer - -You can use shortcut keys to quickly perform common tasks in %PRODUCTNAME. This section lists the default shortcut keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer. -
-You can also use the general shortcut keys in %PRODUCTNAME. -Function Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Effect - - - - -F2 - - -Formula Bar - - - - + +You can use shortcut keys to quickly perform common tasks in %PRODUCTNAME. This section lists the default shortcut keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + +You can also use the general shortcut keys in %PRODUCTNAME. +Function Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer +
+ + +Shortcut keys + + +Effect + + + + +F2 + + +Formula Bar + + + + Command -Ctrl+F2 - - -Insert Fields - - - - -F3 - - -Complete AutoText - - - - +Ctrl+F2 + + +Insert Fields + + + + +F3 + + +Complete AutoText + + + + Command -Ctrl+F3 - - -Edit AutoText - - - - -F4 - - -Open Data Source View - - - - -Shift+F4 - - -Select next frameUFI: see spec "OpenDocumentBehavior" - - - - -F5 - - -Navigator on/off - - - - +Ctrl+F3 + + +Edit AutoText + + + + +F4 + + +Open Data Source View + + + + +Shift+F4 + + +Select next frameUFI: see spec "OpenDocumentBehavior" + + + + +F5 + + +Navigator on/off + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+F5 - - -Navigator on, go to page number - - - - -F7 - - -Spellcheck - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+F5 + + +Navigator on, go to page number + + + + +F7 + + +Spellcheck + + + + Command -Ctrl+F7 - - -Thesaurus - - - - -F8 - - -Extension mode - - - - +Ctrl+F7 + + +Thesaurus + + + + +F8 + + +Extension mode + + + + Command -Ctrl+F8 - - -Field shadings on / off - - - - -Shift+F8 - - -Additional Selection - - - - -F9 - - -Update fields - - - - +Ctrl+F8 + + +Field shadings on / off + + + + +Shift+F8 + + +Additional Selection + + + + +F9 + + +Update fields + + + + Command -Ctrl+F9 - - -Show fields - - - - -Shift+F9 - - -Calculate Table - - - - +Ctrl+F9 + + +Show fields + + + + +Shift+F9 + + +Calculate Table + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+F9 - - -Update Input Fields and Input ListsUFI: fixes #i30104# - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+F9 + + +Update Input Fields and Input ListsUFI: fixes #i30104# + + + + Command -Ctrl+F10 - - -Nonprinting Characters on/off - - - - -F11 - - -Stylist on/off - - - - -Shift+F11 - - -Create Style - - - - +Ctrl+F10 + + +Nonprinting Characters on/off + + + + +F11 + + +Stylist on/off + + + + +Shift+F11 + + +Create Style + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+F11 - - -Update Style - - - - -F12 - - -Numbering on - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+F11 + + +Update Style + + + + +F12 + + +Numbering on + + + + Command -Ctrl+F12 - - -Insert or edit Table - - - - -Shift+F12 - - -Bullets on - - - - +Ctrl+F12 + + +Insert or edit Table + + + + +Shift+F12 + + +Bullets on + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+F12 - - -Numbering / Bullets off - - -
- -Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Effect - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+F12 + + +Numbering / Bullets off + + +
+ +Shortcut Keys for %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + + +Shortcut keys + + +Effect + + + + Command -Ctrl+A - - -Select All - - - - +Ctrl+A + + +Select All + + + + Command -Ctrl+J - - -Justify - - - - +Ctrl+J + + +Justify + + + + Command -Ctrl+D - - -Double Underline - - - - +Ctrl+D + + +Double Underline + + + + Command -Ctrl+E - - -Centered - - - - +Ctrl+E + + +Centered + + + + Command -Ctrl+F - - -Find and Replace - - - - +Ctrl+F + + +Find and Replace + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+P - - -Superscript - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+P + + +Superscript + + + + Command -Ctrl+L - - -Align Left - - - - +Ctrl+L + + +Align Left + + + + Command -Ctrl+R - - -Align Right - - - - +Ctrl+R + + +Align Right + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+B - - -Subscript - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+B + + +Subscript + + + + Command -Ctrl+Y - - -Redo last action - - - - +Ctrl+Y + + +Redo last action + + + + Command -Ctrl+1 - - -Single Line Spacing - - - - +Ctrl+1 + + +Single Line Spacing + + + + Command -Ctrl+2 - - -Double Line Spacing - - - - +Ctrl+2 + + +Double Line Spacing + + + + Command -Ctrl+5 - - -1.5 Line Spacing - - - - +Ctrl+5 + + +1.5 Line Spacing + + + + Command -Ctrl+ Plus Key(+) - - -Calculates the selected text and copies the result to the clipboard. - - - - +Ctrl+ Plus Key(+) + + +Calculates the selected text and copies the result to the clipboard. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Hyphen(-) - - -Custom hyphens; hyphenation set by you. - - - - +Ctrl+Hyphen(-) + + +Custom hyphens; hyphenation set by you. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+minus sign (-) - - -Non-breaking dash (is not used for hyphenation) - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+minus sign (-) + + +Non-breaking dash (is not used for hyphenation) + + + + Command -Ctrl+multiplication sign * (only on number pad) - - -Run macro field - - - - +Ctrl+multiplication sign * (only on number pad) + + +Run macro field + + + + Command -Ctrl+Space - - -Non-breaking spaces. Non-breaking spaces are not used for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text is justified. - - - - -Shift+Enter - - -Line break without paragraph change - - - - +Ctrl+Space + + +Non-breaking spaces. Non-breaking spaces are not used for hyphenation and are not expanded if the text is justified. + + + + +Shift+Enter + + +Line break without paragraph change + + + + Command -Ctrl+Enter - - -Manual page break - - - - +Ctrl+Enter + + +Manual page break + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+Enter - - -Column break in multicolumnar texts - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+Enter + + +Column break in multicolumnar texts + + + + Option -Alt+Enter - - -Inserting a new paragraph without numbering - - - - +Alt+Enter + + +Inserting a new paragraph without numbering + + + + Option -Alt+Enter - - -Inserting a new paragraph directly before or after a section or a table. - - - - -Arrow Left - - -Move cursor to left - - - - -Shift+Arrow Left - - -Move cursor with selection to the left - - - - +Alt+Enter + + +Inserting a new paragraph directly before or after a section or a table. + + + + +Arrow Left + + +Move cursor to left + + + + +Shift+Arrow Left + + +Move cursor with selection to the left + + + + Command -Ctrl+Arrow Left - - -Go to beginning of word - - - - +Ctrl+Arrow Left + + +Go to beginning of word + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Left - - -Selecting to the left word by word - - - - -Arrow Right - - -Move cursor to right - - - - -Shift+Arrow Right - - -Move cursor with selection to the right - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Left + + +Selecting to the left word by word + + + + +Arrow Right + + +Move cursor to right + + + + +Shift+Arrow Right + + +Move cursor with selection to the right + + + + Command -Ctrl+Arrow Right - - -Go to end of word - - - - +Ctrl+Arrow Right + + +Go to end of word + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Right - - -Selecting to the right word by word - - - - -Arrow Up - - -Move up one line - - - - -Shift+Arrow Up - - -Selecting lines in an upwards direction - - - - -Arrow Down - - -Move cursor down one line - - - - -Shift+Arrow Down - - -Selecting lines in a downward direction - - - - -Home - - -Go to beginning of line - - - - -Shift+Home - - -Go and select to the beginning of a line - - - - -End - - -Go to end of line - - - - -Shift+End - - -Go and select to end of line - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Right + + +Selecting to the right word by word + + + + +Arrow Up + + +Move up one line + + + + +Shift+Arrow Up + + +Selecting lines in an upwards direction + + + + +Arrow Down + + +Move cursor down one line + + + + +Shift+Arrow Down + + +Selecting lines in a downward direction + + + + +Home + + +Go to beginning of line + + + + +Shift+Home + + +Go and select to the beginning of a line + + + + +End + + +Go to end of line + + + + +Shift+End + + +Go and select to end of line + + + + Command -Ctrl+Home - - -Go to start of document - - - - +Ctrl+Home + + +Go to start of document + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+Home - - -Go and select text to start of document - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+Home + + +Go and select text to start of document + + + + Command -Ctrl+End - - -Go to end of document - - - - +Ctrl+End + + +Go to end of document + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+End - - -Go and select text to end of document - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+End + + +Go and select text to end of document + + + + Command -Ctrl+PageUp - - -Switch cursor between text and header - - - - +Ctrl+PageUp + + +Switch cursor between text and header + + + + Command -Ctrl+PageDown - - -Switch cursor between text and footer - - - - -Insert - - -Insert mode on/off - - - - -PageUp - - -Screen page up - - - - -Shift+PageUp - - -Move up screen page with selection - - - - -PageDown - - -Move down screen page - - - - -Shift+PageDown - - -Move down screen page with selection - - - - +Ctrl+PageDown + + +Switch cursor between text and footer + + + + +Insert + + +Insert mode on/off + + + + +PageUp + + +Screen page up + + + + +Shift+PageUp + + +Move up screen page with selection + + + + +PageDown + + +Move down screen page + + + + +Shift+PageDown + + +Move down screen page with selection + + + + Command -Ctrl+Del - - -Delete text to end of word - - - - +Ctrl+Del + + +Delete text to end of word + + + + Command -Ctrl+Backspace - - -Delete text to beginning of word - - - - +Ctrl+Backspace + + +Delete text to beginning of word + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+Del - - -Delete text to end of sentence - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+Del + + +Delete text to end of sentence + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+Backspace - - -Delete text to beginning of sentence - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+Backspace + + +Delete text to beginning of sentence + + + + Command -Ctrl+Tab - - -Next suggestion with Automatic Word Completion - - - - +Ctrl+Tab + + +Next suggestion with Automatic Word Completion + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+Tab - - -Use previous suggestion with Automatic Word Completion - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+Tab + + +Use previous suggestion with Automatic Word Completion + + + + Option -Alt+W - - -Spellchecker dialog: Call back the original unknown word into the text boxUFI: check if still valid - - - - +Alt+W + + +Spellchecker dialog: Call back the original unknown word into the text boxUFI: check if still valid + + + + Command Ctrl+ double-click or Command -Ctrl+Shift+F10 - - -Use this combination to quickly dock or undock the Navigator, Stylist or other windows - - -
+Ctrl+Shift+F10 + + +Use this combination to quickly dock or undock the Navigator, Stylist or other windows + + + -headings; switching levels by keyboard +headings; switching levels by keyboard paragraphs; moving by keyboard - -Shortcut Keys for Paragraphs and Heading Levels - - - -Shortcut keys - - -Effect - - - - -Ctrl+Alt+Up Arrow - - -Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs up one paragraph. - - - - -Ctrl+Alt+Down Arrow - - -Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs down one paragraph. - - - - -Tab - - -The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 1-9) is moved down one level in the outline. - - - - -Shift+Tab - - -The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 2-10) is moved up one level in the outline. - - - - + +Shortcut Keys for Paragraphs and Heading Levels +
+ + +Shortcut keys + + +Effect + + + + +Ctrl+Alt+Up Arrow + + +Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs up one paragraph. + + + + +Ctrl+Alt+Down Arrow + + +Move the active paragraph or selected paragraphs down one paragraph. + + + + +Tab + + +The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 1-9) is moved down one level in the outline. + + + + +Shift+Tab + + +The heading in format "Heading X" (X = 2-10) is moved up one level in the outline. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Tab - +Ctrl+Tab + -tabs; before headings +tabs; before headings headings; starting with tabs - -At the start of a heading: Inserts a tab stop. Depending on the Window Manager in use, Alt+Tab may be used instead. -To change the heading level with the keyboard, first position the cursor in front of the heading. - - -
- -Shortcut Keys for Tables in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - + +At the start of a heading: Inserts a tab stop. Depending on the Window Manager in use, Alt+Tab may be used instead. +To change the heading level with the keyboard, first position the cursor in front of the heading. + + +
+ +Shortcut Keys for Tables in %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + Command -Ctrl+A - - -If the active cell is empty: selects the whole table. Otherwise: selects the contents of the active cell. Pressing again selects the entire table. - - - - +Ctrl+A + + +If the active cell is empty: selects the whole table. Otherwise: selects the contents of the active cell. Pressing again selects the entire table. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Home - - -If the active cell is empty: goes to the beginning of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to beginning of the active cell, second press goes to beginning of the current table, third press goes to beginning of document. - - - - +Ctrl+Home + + +If the active cell is empty: goes to the beginning of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to beginning of the active cell, second press goes to beginning of the current table, third press goes to beginning of document. + + + + Command -Ctrl+End - - -If the active cell is empty: goes to the end of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to the end of the active cell, second press goes to the end of the current table, third press goes to the end of the document. - - - - +Ctrl+End + + +If the active cell is empty: goes to the end of the table. Otherwise: first press goes to the end of the active cell, second press goes to the end of the current table, third press goes to the end of the document. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Tab - - -Inserts a tab stop (only in tables). Depending on the Window Manager in use, Alt+Tab may be used instead. - - - - +Ctrl+Tab + + +Inserts a tab stop (only in tables). Depending on the Window Manager in use, Alt+Tab may be used instead. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Up - - -Jump to start of table - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Up + + +Jump to start of table + + + + Command -Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Down - - -Jump to end of table - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Down + + +Jump to end of table + + + + Option -Alt+Arrow Keys - - -Increases/decreases the size of the column/row on the right/bottom cell edge - - - - +Alt+Arrow Keys + + +Increases/decreases the size of the column/row on the right/bottom cell edge + + + + Option -Alt+Shift+Arrow Keys - - -Increase/decrease the size of the column/row on the left/top cell edge - - - - +Alt+Shift+Arrow Keys + + +Increase/decrease the size of the column/row on the left/top cell edge + + + + Option+Command -Alt+Ctrl+Arrow Keys - - +Alt+Ctrl+Arrow Keys + + Like Option -Alt, but only the active cell is modified - - - - +Alt, but only the active cell is modified + + + + Option+Command -Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Arrow Keys - - +Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Arrow Keys + + Like Option -Alt, but only the active cell is modified - - - - +Alt, but only the active cell is modified + + + + Option -Alt+Insert - - +Alt+Insert + + 3 seconds in Insert mode, Arrow Key inserts row/column, Command -Ctrl+Arrow Key inserts cell - - - - +Ctrl+Arrow Key inserts cell + + + + Option -Alt+Del - - +Alt+Del + + 3 seconds in Delete mode, Arrow key deletes row/column, Command -Ctrl+Arrow key merges cell with neighboring cell - - - +Ctrl+Arrow key merges cell with neighboring cell + + + cell protection; removing in text documents - + Command -Ctrl+Shift+T - - -Removes cell protection from all selected tables. If no table is selected, then cell protection is removed from all of the tables in the document. - - - - +Ctrl+Shift+T + + +Removes cell protection from all selected tables. If no table is selected, then cell protection is removed from all of the tables in the document. + + + + Shift+Command -Ctrl+Del - - -If nothing is selected, the contents of the next cell are deleted. If cells are selected, the whole line of the selection will be deleted. If all rows are selected completely or partially, the entire table is deleted. - - -
+Ctrl+Del + + +If nothing is selected, the contents of the next cell are deleted. If cells are selected, the whole line of the selection will be deleted. If all rows are selected completely or partially, the entire table is deleted. + + + -objects; resizing +objects; resizing resizing; objects - -Shortcut Keys for Moving and Resizing Frames, Graphics and Objects - - - -Shortcut Keys - - - -Effect - - - - - -Esc - - -Cursor is inside a text frame and no text is selected: Escape selects the text frame. -Text frame is selected: Escape clears the cursor from the text frame. - - - - -F2 or Enter or any key that produces a character on screen - - -If a text frame is selected: positions the cursor to the end of the text in the text frame. If you press any key that produces a character on screen, and the document is in edit mode, the character is appended to the text. - - - - + +Shortcut Keys for Moving and Resizing Frames, Graphics and Objects +
+ + +Shortcut Keys + + + +Effect + + + + + +Esc + + +Cursor is inside a text frame and no text is selected: Escape selects the text frame. +Text frame is selected: Escape clears the cursor from the text frame. + + + + +F2 or Enter or any key that produces a character on screen + + +If a text frame is selected: positions the cursor to the end of the text in the text frame. If you press any key that produces a character on screen, and the document is in edit mode, the character is appended to the text. + + + + Option -Alt+Arrow Keys - - -Move object. - - - - +Alt+Arrow Keys + + +Move object. + + + + Option+Command -Alt+Ctrl+Arrow Keys - - -Resizes by moving lower right corner. - - - - +Alt+Ctrl+Arrow Keys + + +Resizes by moving lower right corner. + + + + Option+Command -Alt+Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Keys - - -Resizes by moving top left corner. - - - - +Alt+Ctrl+Shift+Arrow Keys + + +Resizes by moving top left corner. + + + + Command -Ctrl+Tab - - -Selects the anchor of an object (in Edit Points mode). - - -
- -
- - - -
- - +Ctrl+Tab + + +Selects the anchor of an object (in Edit Points mode). + + + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp index 2654abf64e..a4039f5282 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Turning Off AutoFormat and AutoCorrect -/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Turning Off AutoFormat and AutoCorrect +/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -turning off automatic correction -text; turning off automatic correction -uppercase; changing to lowercase -capital letters; changing automatically -quotation marks; changing automatically -words; automatic replacement on/off -lines; changing automatically -underlining; changing automatically -borders; changing automatically -automatic changes;turning off -changes made automatically +turning off automatic correction +text; turning off automatic correction +uppercase; changing to lowercase +capital letters; changing automatically +quotation marks; changing automatically +words; automatic replacement on/off +lines; changing automatically +underlining; changing automatically +borders; changing automatically +automatic changes;turning off +changes made automatically AutoCorrect function;turning off - - + + Turning Off AutoFormat and AutoCorrect - -By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. - - + +By default, $[officename] automatically corrects many common typing errors and applies formatting while you type. + + To quickly undo an automatic correction or completion, press Command -Ctrl+Z. - - -To turn off most AutoFormat features, remove the check mark from the menu Format - AutoFormat - While Typing. - - -To remove a word from the AutoCorrect list: - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect.name changed for SO8 - - -Click the Replace tab. - - -In the AutoCorrect list, select the word pair that you want to remove. - - -Click Delete. - - -To stop replacing quotation marks: - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect. - - -Click the Custom Quotes tab - - -Clear the Replace check box(es). - - -To stop capitalizing the first letter of a sentence: - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect. - - -Click the Options tab. - - -Clear the Capitalize first letter of every sentence check box. - - -To stop drawing a line when you type three identical characters: -$[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ # - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect. - - -Click the Options tab. - - -Clear the Apply border check box. - - - - - - - +Ctrl+Z. + + +To turn off most AutoFormat features, remove the check mark from the menu Format - AutoFormat - While Typing. + + +To remove a word from the AutoCorrect list: + + +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect.name changed for SO8 + + +Click the Replace tab. + + +In the AutoCorrect list, select the word pair that you want to remove. + + +Click Delete. + + +To stop replacing quotation marks: + + +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect. + + +Click the Custom Quotes tab + + +Clear the Replace check box(es). + + +To stop capitalizing the first letter of a sentence: + + +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect. + + +Click the Options tab. + + +Clear the Capitalize first letter of every sentence check box. + + +To stop drawing a line when you type three identical characters: +$[officename] automatically draws a line when you type three of the following characters and press Enter: - _ = * ~ # + + +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect. + + +Click the Options tab. + + +Clear the Apply border check box. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp index 2546c765c2..49f0022236 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Automatically Check Spelling -/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Automatically Check Spelling +/text/swriter/guide/auto_spellcheck.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -spellcheck; automatic -automatic spellcheck -checking the spelling -spellcheck; disabling -text; without spellcheck +spellcheck; automatic +automatic spellcheck +checking the spelling +spellcheck; disabling +text; without spellcheck words; disabling spellcheck - + Automatically Check Spelling - -You can have $[officename] automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelt words with a red wavy line. -To check spelling automatically while you type: - - -Choose Tools - Spellcheck - AutoSpellcheck, or click the AutoSpellcheck On/Off icon on the Main Toolbar. - - -Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the AutoCorrect submenu. - - - - -If you choose a word from the AutoCorrect submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the AutoCorrect list for the current language. To view the AutoCorrect list, choose Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat, and then click the Replace tab. - - - - -You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing Add. - - -To exclude words from the spellcheck: - - -Select the words that you want to exclude. - - -Right-click and choose Character. - - -Click the Font tab, and then select [None] in the Language box. - - - -Creating a new dictionary. - - - - + +You can have $[officename] automatically check spelling while you type and underline possible misspelt words with a red wavy line. +To check spelling automatically while you type: + + +Choose Tools - Spellcheck - AutoSpellcheck, or click the AutoSpellcheck On/Off icon on the Main Toolbar. + + +Right-click a word with a red wavy underline, and then choose a suggested replacement word from the list, or from the AutoCorrect submenu. + + + + +If you choose a word from the AutoCorrect submenu, the underlined word and the replacement word are automatically added to the AutoCorrect list for the current language. To view the AutoCorrect list, choose Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat, and then click the Replace tab. + + + + +You can also add the underlined word to your custom dictionary by choosing Add. + + +To exclude words from the spellcheck: + + +Select the words that you want to exclude. + + +Right-click and choose Character. + + +Click the Font tab, and then select [None] in the Language box. + + + +Creating a new dictionary. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp index 0202bbac4f..ca514f0f83 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List -/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List +/text/swriter/guide/autocorr_except.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -AutoCorrect function; adding exceptions +AutoCorrect function; adding exceptions exceptions; AutoCorrect function (guide) - + Adding Exceptions to the AutoCorrect List - -You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. + +You can prevent AutoCorrect from correcting specific abbreviations or words that have mixed capital letters and lowercase letters. To quickly undo an AutoCorrect replacement, press Command -Ctrl+Z. This also adds the word or abbreviation that you typed to the AutoCorrect exceptions list. -To add an exception to the AutoCorrect exceptions list - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat, and then click the Exceptions tab. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) box. - - -Type the word in the Words with TWo INitial CApitals box. - - - - - - +Ctrl+Z. This also adds the word or abbreviation that you typed to the AutoCorrect exceptions list. +To add an exception to the AutoCorrect exceptions list + + +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat, and then click the Exceptions tab. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +Type the abbreviation followed by a period in the Abbreviations (no subsequent capital) box. + + +Type the word in the Words with TWo INitial CApitals box. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp index e2875c2ff0..61b8984a96 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Using AutoText -/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshot - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Using AutoText +/text/swriter/guide/autotext.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted screenshot + + -AutoText +AutoText networks; AutoText in - + Using AutoText - -$[officename] Writer allows you to store text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert them in a document later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text. -Creating an AutoText Entry - - -Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character. - - -Choose Edit - AutoText. - - -Select the category where you want to store the AutoText. - - -Type a name that is a longer than four characters. This allows you to use the Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut. - - -Click AutoText, and then choose New. - - -Inserting an AutoText Entry - - -Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry. - - -Choose Edit - AutoText. - - -Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click Insert. - - -You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or long-click the Edit AutoText icon on the Main Toolbar, and then choose an AutoText entry. -To quickly enter a math formula, type "FN", and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type "DT", and then press F3. -Printing a List of AutoText Entries - - -Choose Tools - Macros - Macro. - - -In the Macro from list, double-click "Gimmicks". - - -Select "AutoText" and then click Run. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document. - - -Choose File - Print. - - -Using AutoText in Network Installations -You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network. -For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory. -To view the paths for the current AutoText directories, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, select AutoText, and then click Edit. -Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used. -
-Edit - AutoText -Word Completion -
- - + +$[officename] Writer allows you to store text, text with graphics, tables, and fields as AutoText, so that you can quickly insert them in a document later on. If you want, you can also store formatted text. +Creating an AutoText Entry + + +Select the text, text with graphics, table, or field that you want to save as an AutoText entry. A graphic can only be stored if it is anchored as a character and is preceded and followed by at least one text character. + + +Choose Edit - AutoText. + + +Select the category where you want to store the AutoText. + + +Type a name that is a longer than four characters. This allows you to use the Display remainder of name as suggestion while typing AutoText option. If you want, you can modify the proposed shortcut. + + +Click AutoText, and then choose New. + + +Inserting an AutoText Entry + + +Click in your document where you want to insert an AutoText entry. + + +Choose Edit - AutoText. + + +Select the AutoText that you want to insert, and then click Insert. + + +You can also type the shortcut for an AutoText entry, and then press F3, or long-click the Edit AutoText icon on the Main Toolbar, and then choose an AutoText entry. +To quickly enter a math formula, type "FN", and then press F3. If you insert more than one formula, the formulae are sequentially numbered. To insert dummy text, type "DT", and then press F3. +Printing a List of AutoText Entries + + +Choose Tools - Macros - Macro. + + +In the Macro from list, double-click "Gimmicks". + + +Select "AutoText" and then click Run. A list of the current AutoText entries is generated in a separate text document. + + +Choose File - Print. + + +Using AutoText in Network Installations +You can store AutoText entries in different directories on a network. +For example, you can store "read-only" AutoText entries for your company on a central server, and user-defined AutoText entries in a local directory. +To view the paths for the current AutoText directories, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, select AutoText, and then click Edit. +Two directories are listed here. The first entry is on the server installation and the second entry is in the user directory. If there are two AutoText entries with the same name in both directories, the entry from the user directory is used. +
+Edit - AutoText +Word Completion +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp index 879ef4d761..c365a949db 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Calculating Cell Totals in Tables -/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Calculating Cell Totals in Tables +/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intable.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -calculating; in text tables -totals in text tables -text tables; calculating +calculating; in text tables +totals in text tables +text tables; calculating tables; calculating - + Calculating Cell Totals in Tables - - - -Choose Insert - Table, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document. - - -Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty. - - -Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the Sum icon on the Table Object Bar. -The Formula Bar appears, and $[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column. Individual cells are separated by a vertical slash |. - - -If the formula is correct, press Enter, or click Apply in the Formula bar. The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell. - - -If you enter a different numbers anywhere in the column, the sum is automatically updated. -Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers. -To calculate the sum of a series of table cells: - - -Click in a blank cell in the table. - - -On the Formula Bar, click the Sum icon. - - -Click in the first cell of the series, drag to the final cell, and then release. - - -Press Enter. - - - - - - - - - - + + + +Choose Insert - Table, and insert a table with one column and more than one row into a text document. + + +Type a number in each cell of the column, but leave the last cell in the column empty. + + +Place the cursor in the last cell of the column, and then click the Sum icon on the Table Object Bar. +The Formula Bar appears, and $[officename] inserts a formula for calculating the sum of the values in the current column. Individual cells are separated by a vertical slash |. + + +If the formula is correct, press Enter, or click Apply in the Formula bar. The sum of the values in the current column is entered in the cell. + + +If you enter a different numbers anywhere in the column, the sum is automatically updated. +Similarly, you can also quickly calculate the sum of a row of numbers. +To calculate the sum of a series of table cells: + + +Click in a blank cell in the table. + + +On the Formula Bar, click the Sum icon. + + +Click in the first cell of the series, drag to the final cell, and then release. + + +Press Enter. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp index 9bf34a8020..bfc27ad593 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents -/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents +/text/swriter/guide/calculate_intext.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -calculating;complex formulas in text +calculating;complex formulas in text formulas; complex formulas in text - + Calculating Complex Formulas in Text Documents - -You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document. -For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following: - - -Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2. - - -Click the Formula icon, and choose "Mean" from the list. - - -Type the first number, followed by a vertical slash (|), and repeat for the second and third numbers. - - -Press Enter. The result is inserted as a field into the document. - - -To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document. - - - - - - - - - + +You can use predefined functions in a formula, and then insert the result of the calculation into a text document. +For example, to calculate the mean value of three numbers, do the following: + + +Click in the document where you want to insert the formula, and then press F2. + + +Click the Formula icon, and choose "Mean" from the list. + + +Type the first number, followed by a vertical slash (|), and repeat for the second and third numbers. + + +Press Enter. The result is inserted as a field into the document. + + +To edit the formula, double-click the field in the document. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp index c6d6f41523..137ed1836d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Outline Numbering -/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted a screenshot - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Outline Numbering +/text/swriter/guide/chapter_numbering.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted a screenshot + + -outline; numbering -headings; numbering +outline; numbering +headings; numbering headings; own Paragraph Styles - + Outline Numbering - -You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the outline hierarchy. -To add automatic numbering to a heading style: - - -Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. - - -In the Paragraph Style box, select the heading style that you want to add a chapter number to. - - -In the Numbers box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click OK. - - - -To use a custom paragraph style as a heading: - - -Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. - - -Select the custom style in the Paragraph Style box. - - -Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the Level list. - - -Click OK. - - -To rearrange the headings in a text document: -You can quickly rearrange the heading order, or change the heading hierarchy in a text document by using the Navigator. You can choose to include or exclude the subordinate text of a heading when you reorder the hierarchy. - - -Open an existing text document. - - -On the Function Bar, click the Navigator icon. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -To change the order of a heading, drag the heading to a different location in the list.The following icons are in -sw/imglist/sc20171-4.png - - -To move a heading down one level in the hierarchy, click the Demote Level icon. - - -To move a heading up one level in the hierarchy, click the Promote Level icon. - - -To move a heading to the beginning of the document, click the Promote Chapter icon. - - -To move a heading to the end of the document, click the Demote Chapter icon. - - -The numbering of affected headings is automatically updated. - - - + +You can modify the heading hierarchy or assign a level in the hierarchy to a custom paragraph style. You can also also add chapter and section numbering to heading paragraph styles. By default, the "Heading 1" paragraph style is at the top of the outline hierarchy. +To add automatic numbering to a heading style: + + +Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. + + +In the Paragraph Style box, select the heading style that you want to add a chapter number to. + + +In the Numbers box, select the numbering style that you want to use, and then click OK. + + + +To use a custom paragraph style as a heading: + + +Choose Tools - Outline Numbering, and then click the Numbering tab. + + +Select the custom style in the Paragraph Style box. + + +Click the heading level that you want to assign to the custom paragraph style in the Level list. + + +Click OK. + + +To rearrange the headings in a text document: +You can quickly rearrange the heading order, or change the heading hierarchy in a text document by using the Navigator. You can choose to include or exclude the subordinate text of a heading when you reorder the hierarchy. + + +Open an existing text document. + + +On the Function Bar, click the Navigator icon. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +To change the order of a heading, drag the heading to a different location in the list.The following icons are in +sw/imglist/sc20171-4.png + + +To move a heading down one level in the hierarchy, click the Demote Level icon. + + +To move a heading up one level in the hierarchy, click the Promote Level icon. + + +To move a heading to the beginning of the document, click the Promote Chapter icon. + + +To move a heading to the end of the document, click the Demote Chapter icon. + + +The numbering of affected headings is automatically updated. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp index d54e293b52..ec9a0dc52e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Conditional Text -/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Conditional Text +/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -matching conditional text in fields -if-then queries as fields -conditional text; setting up +matching conditional text in fields +if-then queries as fields +conditional text; setting up text; conditional text - + Conditional Text - -You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters. -Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition. - - - + +You can set up fields in your document that display text when a condition that you define is met. For example, you can define the conditional text that is displayed in a series of reminder letters. +Setting up conditional text in this example is a two-part process. First you create a variable, and then you create the condition. +
+ + Fields / Variables - - - -
- -To define a conditional variable: -The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement. - - -Type "Reminder" in your document, and then add space. - - -Choose Insert - -Fields - Other, and then click the Variables tab. - - -Click "Set variable" in the Type list. - - -Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example "Reminder". - - -Click "Text" in the Format list. - - -To display integers, click the "-1234" format. - - -Enter "1" in the Value box, and then click Insert. - - -To define a condition and the conditional text: -The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document. - - -Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text. - - -Choose Insert - -Fields - Other, and then click the Functions tab. - - -Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. - - -Type Reminder EQ "3" in the Condition box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three. - - -The quotation marks enclosing the number 3 indicates that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string. For a list of operators that you can use when defining your condition, see the Related Topics section of this page. - - - + + + +
+ +To define a conditional variable: +The first part of the example is to define a variable for the condition statement. + + +Type "Reminder" in your document, and then add space. + + +Choose Insert - +Fields - Other, and then click the Variables tab. + + +Click "Set variable" in the Type list. + + +Type a name for the variable in the Name box, for example "Reminder". + + +Click "Text" in the Format list. + + +To display integers, click the "-1234" format. + + +Enter "1" in the Value box, and then click Insert. + + +To define a condition and the conditional text: +The second part of the example is to define the condition that must be met, and to insert a placeholder for displaying the conditional text in your document. + + +Place the cursor where you want to insert the conditional text in your text. + + +Choose Insert - +Fields - Other, and then click the Functions tab. + + +Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + +Type Reminder EQ "3" in the Condition box. In other words, the conditional text will be displayed when the variable in the field that you defined in the first part of this example is equal to three. + + +The quotation marks enclosing the number 3 indicates that the variable that you defined in the first part of this example is a text string. For a list of operators that you can use when defining your condition, see the Related Topics section of this page. + + + Fields / Functions - - - -
- - - -Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the Then box. There is no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. If you want, you can even copy and paste a paragraph into this box. - - -Click Insert, and then click Close. - - -To display the conditional text: -In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3. - - -Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose Edit - Fields. - - -Replace the number in the Value box with "3", and then click Close. - - -If the field does not automatically update, press F9. - - - - - -List of conditional operators - - + + + + + + + +Type the text that you want to display when the condition is met in the Then box. There is no limit to the length of the text that you can enter. If you want, you can even copy and paste a paragraph into this box. + + +Click Insert, and then click Close. + + +To display the conditional text: +In this example, the conditional text is displayed when the value of the conditional variable is equal to 3. + + +Place your cursor in front of the field that you defined in the first part of this example, and then choose Edit - Fields. + + +Replace the number in the Value box with "3", and then click Close. + + +If the field does not automatically update, press F9. + + + + + +List of conditional operators + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp index e4ef411fbb..efbba4984b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Conditional Text for Page Counts -/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Conditional Text for Page Counts +/text/swriter/guide/conditional_text2.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -page counts +page counts conditional text;page counts - + Conditional Text for Page Counts - -You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page. - - -Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count. - - -Choose Insert - Field - Page Count, and then enter a space. - - -Choose Insert - Field - Other, and then click the Functions tab. - - -Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. - - -Type "Page > 1" in the Condition box. - - -Type "Pages" in the Then box. - - -Type "Page" in the Otherwise box. - - -Click Insert, and then click Close. - - - - - - - + +You can create a conditional text field that displays the word "pages" instead of "page" in conjunction with a page count field if your document contains more than one page. + + +Place the cursor in your document where you want to insert the page count. + + +Choose Insert - Field - Page Count, and then enter a space. + + +Choose Insert - Field - Other, and then click the Functions tab. + + +Click "Conditional text" in the Type list. + + +Type "Page > 1" in the Condition box. + + +Type "Pages" in the Then box. + + +Type "Page" in the Otherwise box. + + +Click Insert, and then click Close. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp index 0f922a44cc..ec71a66da0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages -/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages +/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -page styles; left and right pages -pages; left and right pages -formatting; page styles -title pages; page styles -first page;page styles -left page; page styles +page styles; left and right pages +pages; left and right pages +formatting; page styles +title pages; page styles +first page;page styles +left page; page styles right pages - + Alternating Page Styles on Odd and Even Pages - - - - + +
+ + Icon - - - - - -$[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the workplace. - - -
- - - -Choose Format - Stylist, and then click the Page Styles icon. - - -In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose Modify. - - -Click the Organizer tab. - - -Select "Right Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. - - -In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose Modify. - - -Select "Left Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. - - -Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Stylist. - - - - -To add a header to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Header, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header. - - -To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Footer, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer. - - -If you want do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page. - - - -Insert Break dialog - - + + + + + +$[officename] can automatically apply alternating page styles on even (left) and odd pages (right) in your document. For example, you can use page styles to display different headers and footers on even and odd pages. The current page style is displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the workplace. + + + + + + +Choose Format - Stylist, and then click the Page Styles icon. + + +In the list of page styles, right-click "Left Page" and choose Modify. + + +Click the Organizer tab. + + +Select "Right Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + + +In the list of page styles, right-click "Right Page" and choose Modify. + + +Select "Left Page" in the Next Style box, and then click OK. + + +Go to the first page in your document, and double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles in the Stylist. + + + + +To add a header to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Header, and choose the page style that you want to add the header to. In the header frame, type the text that you want to use as the header. + + +To add a footer to one of the page styles, choose Insert - Footer, and choose the page style that you want to add the footer to. In the footer frame, type the text that you want to use as a footer. + + +If you want do not want to have a header or a footer on the title page of your document, apply the "First Page" style to the title page. + + + +Insert Break dialog + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp index 2527f0ce26..a549939471 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Inserting Page Numbers in Footers -/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Inserting Page Numbers in Footers +/text/swriter/guide/footer_pagenumber.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -footers; with page numbers -pages; numbers and count of +footers; with page numbers +pages; numbers and count of page numbers; footers - + Inserting Page Numbers in Footers - - - -Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Page Number. - - -If you want, you can align the Page Number field as you would text. -You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form "Page 9 of 12": - - -Click in front of the Page Number field and type "Page ", click after the field, enter a space and then type "of ". - - -Choose Insert - Fields - Page Count. - - - - - - - - - - + + + +Choose Insert - Footer and select the page style that you want to add the footer to. + + +Choose Insert - Fields - Page Number. + + +If you want, you can align the Page Number field as you would text. +You can also add a page count to the footer, for example, in the form "Page 9 of 12": + + +Click in front of the Page Number field and type "Page ", click after the field, enter a space and then type "of ". + + +Choose Insert - Fields - Page Count. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp index f242c0850f..794ae42691 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes -/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes +/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -endnotes;editing -inserting;footnotes -endnotes;inserting -inserting;endnotes -deleting;footnotes -removing;footnotes -editing;footnotes -navigation;footnotes +endnotes;editing +inserting;footnotes +endnotes;inserting +inserting;endnotes +deleting;footnotes +removing;footnotes +editing;footnotes +navigation;footnotes organizing footnotes - + Inserting and Editing Footnotes or Endnotes - -Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes that you insert in your document. -To insert a footnote or endnote: - - -Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note. - - -Choose Insert - Footnote. - - -In the Numbering area, select the format that you want to use. If you select Character, click the browse button (...) and select the character that you want to use for the footnote. - - -In the Type area, select Footnote or Endnote. - - -Click OK. - - -Type the note. - - - - - + +Footnotes reference more information about a topic at the bottom of a page and endnotes reference information at the end of the document. $[officename] automatically numbers the footnotes that you insert in your document. +To insert a footnote or endnote: + + +Click in your document where you want to place the anchor of the note. + + +Choose Insert - Footnote. + + +In the Numbering area, select the format that you want to use. If you select Character, click the browse button (...) and select the character that you want to use for the footnote. + + +In the Type area, select Footnote or Endnote. + + +Click OK. + + +Type the note. + + +
+ + Icon - - - -You can also insert footnotes or endnotes by long-clicking the Insert icon on the Main Toolbar and clicking the Insert Footnote Directly icon. - - - - - - - - -
- -On pages that use a multiple column layout, the footnote is at the base of the column that contains the footnote anchor. -Editing Footnotes or Endnotes - - -To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text. - - - - - + + + +You can also insert footnotes or endnotes by long-clicking the Insert icon on the Main Toolbar and clicking the Insert Footnote Directly icon. + + + + + + + + +
+ +On pages that use a multiple column layout, the footnote is at the base of the column that contains the footnote anchor. +Editing Footnotes or Endnotes + + +To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text. + + + + + Mouse hand cursor - - - -The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document. - - -
- - -To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press F11 to open the Stylist, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. - - - - -To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PgUp. - - -To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose Edit - Footnote. - + + + +The mouse pointer changes to a hand when you rest it over a footnote or endnote anchor in your document. + + + + + +To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press F11 to open the Stylist, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. + + + + +To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PgUp. + + +To edit the numbering properties of a footnote or endnote anchor, click in front of the anchor, and choose Edit - Footnote. + footnotes; general settings - -To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose Tools - Footnotes. - - -To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. - - - - -To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text. - - - - - - + +To change the formatting that $[officename] applies to footnotes and endnotes, choose Tools - Footnotes. + + +To edit the properties of the text area for footnotes or endnotes, choose Format - Page, and then click the Footnote tab. + + + + +To remove a footnote, delete the footnote anchor in the text. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp index 2161c69229..0cb7c527ab 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Creating a Form Letter -/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Creating a Form Letter +/text/swriter/guide/form_letters_main.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -form letters -mail merge +form letters +mail merge letters; creating form letters - + Creating a Form Letter - -To create a form letter, you require a template document that contains one or more placeholders, and access to a data source. Creating a form letter is a three-step process: - - -Creating a template document - - -Specifying a data source and inserting placeholders - - -Printing or saving the output of a form letter - - -Creating a Template Document -The template document for the form letter contains the text content of the letter and placeholders for data, such as the name of a recipient and addresses. -To create a template for a form letter: - - -Do one of the following: -Choose File - New - Templates and Documents and choose a template. -Choose File - New - Text document. -Choose File - Open and select the text document that you want to use as form letter. - - -Add or edit the letter content, and adjust the layout of the letter. - - -Choose File - Save, but do not close the document. - - -Specifying a Data Source And Inserting Placeholders -The placeholder fields that you insert into your form letter are replaced with text from the data source when you print the letter. -The first time you access one of the supplied form letter templates, you will automatically see the Address Data Source Wizard. After a few clicks, your preferred address book is registered with $[officename]. To manually register an address book, choose File - Wizard - Address Data Source and follow the instructions. You only need to register an address book once. -To insert placeholders from a data source into a form letter: - - -Choose View - Data Sources or press F4. The Data Source browser opens at the top of the document window. - - -In the left pane of the Data Source browser, double-click the data source that you want to use for your form letter. - - -Double-click Tables to expand the list of tables for the data source. -You can also use a query as a data source. - - -Select the table name that contains the data that you want to use in your form letter. A list of the fields contained in the table appears in the right pane of the data source browser. - - -Drag a column header for the field that you want to use as a placeholder to where you want it to appear in your form letter and release. Repeat this step for every field you want to add. -You can also add placeholders from the Database tab in the Fields dialog. - - -Choose File - Save, but do not close the document. - - -Printing or Saving the Output of a Form Letter -The final steps in creating a form letter are to merge the template document with the data from the database, and output the letter. -To specify the data to include in a form letter output: - - -Choose Tools - Mail Merge to open the Mail Merge dialog.changes galore...!!! - - -In the Records area, select the data range you want to include in the form letter. - - -To only include a subset of the data in your form letter, ctrl-click the corresponding row headers. If you want, you can also filter the data that you use in the form letter. - - -To print the output of a form letter: - - -Select Printer in the Output area, and then click OK. The form letters are sent to the printer as one print job. If you want to send each form letter to the printer as a separate print job, select Single print jobs. - - -To save the output of a form letter: - - -Select File in the Output area. - - -Specify where you want to save the form letter files in the Path box. - - -Do one of the following: -Select a field to use for the file name in the Generate file name from box. -Enter a name in the Manual setting text box. $[officename] automatically generates a sequence number and adds the number to the end of the file name. - - -Click OK. A separate file is created for each form letter. - - - - - - - - - + +To create a form letter, you require a template document that contains one or more placeholders, and access to a data source. Creating a form letter is a three-step process: + + +Creating a template document + + +Specifying a data source and inserting placeholders + + +Printing or saving the output of a form letter + + +Creating a Template Document +The template document for the form letter contains the text content of the letter and placeholders for data, such as the name of a recipient and addresses. +To create a template for a form letter: + + +Do one of the following: +Choose File - New - Templates and Documents and choose a template. +Choose File - New - Text document. +Choose File - Open and select the text document that you want to use as form letter. + + +Add or edit the letter content, and adjust the layout of the letter. + + +Choose File - Save, but do not close the document. + + +Specifying a Data Source And Inserting Placeholders +The placeholder fields that you insert into your form letter are replaced with text from the data source when you print the letter. +The first time you access one of the supplied form letter templates, you will automatically see the Address Data Source Wizard. After a few clicks, your preferred address book is registered with $[officename]. To manually register an address book, choose File - Wizard - Address Data Source and follow the instructions. You only need to register an address book once. +To insert placeholders from a data source into a form letter: + + +Choose View - Data Sources or press F4. The Data Source browser opens at the top of the document window. + + +In the left pane of the Data Source browser, double-click the data source that you want to use for your form letter. + + +Double-click Tables to expand the list of tables for the data source. +You can also use a query as a data source. + + +Select the table name that contains the data that you want to use in your form letter. A list of the fields contained in the table appears in the right pane of the data source browser. + + +Drag a column header for the field that you want to use as a placeholder to where you want it to appear in your form letter and release. Repeat this step for every field you want to add. +You can also add placeholders from the Database tab in the Fields dialog. + + +Choose File - Save, but do not close the document. + + +Printing or Saving the Output of a Form Letter +The final steps in creating a form letter are to merge the template document with the data from the database, and output the letter. +To specify the data to include in a form letter output: + + +Choose Tools - Mail Merge to open the Mail Merge dialog.changes galore...!!! + + +In the Records area, select the data range you want to include in the form letter. + + +To only include a subset of the data in your form letter, ctrl-click the corresponding row headers. If you want, you can also filter the data that you use in the form letter. + + +To print the output of a form letter: + + +Select Printer in the Output area, and then click OK. The form letters are sent to the printer as one print job. If you want to send each form letter to the printer as a separate print job, select Single print jobs. + + +To save the output of a form letter: + + +Select File in the Output area. + + +Specify where you want to save the form letter files in the Path box. + + +Do one of the following: +Select a field to use for the file name in the Generate file name from box. +Enter a name in the Manual setting text box. $[officename] automatically generates a sequence number and adds the number to the end of the file name. + + +Click OK. A separate file is created for each form letter. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp index 83a84671f6..4a853e6950 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Using Master Documents and Subdocuments -/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: fixed #i25344# - FPE: fixed #110245# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Using Master Documents and Subdocuments +/text/swriter/guide/globaldoc.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: fixed #i25344# - FPE: fixed #110245# + + -master documents -central documents -subsidiary documents -documents; sub-documents -documents; master documents +master documents +central documents +subsidiary documents +documents; sub-documents +documents; master documents Navigator;master documents - + Using Master Documents and Subdocuments - -A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters, by acting as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. You can also separate a large document that is being worked on by several people into subdocuments and then add the subdocuments to a master document. + +A master document lets you manage large documents, such as a book with many chapters, by acting as a container for individual %PRODUCTNAME Writer files. The individual files are called subdocuments. You can also separate a large document that is being worked on by several people into subdocuments and then add the subdocuments to a master document. When you add a document to a master document or create a new subdocument, a link is created in the master document. You cannot edit the content of a subdocument directly in the master document, but you can use the Navigator to open any subdocument for edit. -references; master documents -bookmarks; master documents +references; master documents +bookmarks; master documents master documents; bookmarks - -Page, caption, footnote, endnote, and any other numbering that you have set in the subdocuments, is carried over into the master document. For example, if the last footnote in the first subdocument is footnote 6, then the first footnote in the next subdocument will be footnote 7. -Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the master document after you save the master document. When you modify the style in the master document, the style in the subdocument is unaffected. -Use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. When you modify or create a style, add it to the document template, and then reload the master document to apply to the subdocuments. + +Page, caption, footnote, endnote, and any other numbering that you have set in the subdocuments, is carried over into the master document. For example, if the last footnote in the first subdocument is footnote 6, then the first footnote in the next subdocument will be footnote 7. +Styles that are used in subdocuments, such as paragraph styles, are automatically imported into the master document after you save the master document. When you modify the style in the master document, the style in the subdocument is unaffected. +Use the same document template for the master document and its subdocuments. When you modify or create a style, add it to the document template, and then reload the master document to apply to the subdocuments. When you print a master document, the contents of all subdocuments, indexes, and any text that you entered are printed. -master documents; indexes +master documents; indexes indexes; master documents - -You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments. -To create a master document: - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Choose File - New - Master Document. - - - - -Open an existing document and choose File - Send - Create Master Document. - - - - -If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a Text entry (see illustration). Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that the styles that you define in the master document are valid in the subdocuments. - - -In the Navigator, long-click the Insert icon, and do one of the following: - - - - -To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose File, locate the file that you want to include, and then click OK. - - - - -To create a new subdocument, choose New Document, type a name for the file, and then click Save. - - - - - + +You can create a table of contents and index in the master document for all of the subdocuments. +To create a master document: + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +Choose File - New - Master Document. + + + + +Open an existing document and choose File - Send - Create Master Document. + + + + +If you are creating a new master document, the first entry in the Navigator should be a Text entry (see illustration). Type an introduction or enter some text. This ensures that the styles that you define in the master document are valid in the subdocuments. + + +In the Navigator, long-click the Insert icon, and do one of the following: + + + + +To insert an existing file as a subdocument, choose File, locate the file that you want to include, and then click OK. + + + + +To create a new subdocument, choose New Document, type a name for the file, and then click Save. + + +
+ + Navigator for master documents - - - -
- - - -Choose File - Save. - - -Working With Master Documents -Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document. -You would like to know the link for a subdocument? Position the mouse pointer in the Navigator on the subdocument's name. The path information of the original document will appear in a small window. If the file is no longer found under the original path, the warning File not found is shown in red in addition to the path. - - -To open a subdocument for editing, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list, and then choose Edit. - - - - -To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Text. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. - - - - -To delete a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose Delete. The source file is not affected by this command. - - - - -To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the Move down or Move up icon. - - - - -To add an index, such as a table of contents, to a master document, right-click a subdocument in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Index. The index is inserted before the selected subdocument in the master document. - - - - - + + + +
+ + + +Choose File - Save. + + +Working With Master Documents +Use the Navigator for rearranging and editing the subdocuments in a master document. +You would like to know the link for a subdocument? Position the mouse pointer in the Navigator on the subdocument's name. The path information of the original document will appear in a small window. If the file is no longer found under the original path, the warning File not found is shown in red in addition to the path. + + +To open a subdocument for editing, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list, and then choose Edit. + + + + +To add text to a master document, right-click an item in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Text. A text section is inserted before the selected item in the master document where you can type the text that you want. + + + + +To delete a subdocument from the master document, right-click the subdocument in the Navigator list and choose Delete. The source file is not affected by this command. + + + + +To reorder the subdocuments in a master document, drag a subdocument to a new location in the Navigator list. You can also select a subdocument in the list, and click the Move down or Move up icon. + + + + +To add an index, such as a table of contents, to a master document, right-click a subdocument in the Navigator list, and then choose Insert - Index. The index is inserted before the selected subdocument in the master document. + + + + + Icon - - - -To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the Update icon. - - -
- -To start each subdocument on a new page: - - -Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1". - - -In the master document, choose Format - Stylist, and click the Paragraph Styles icon. - - -Right-click "Heading 1" and choose Modify. - - -Click the Text Flow tab. - - -In the Breaks area, select Enable, and then select Page in the Type box. - - -If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select With Page Style, and select "Right page" in the box. - - -Click OK. - - -To save a master document as a %PRODUCTNAME text document: - - -Choose File - Export. - - -In the File format list, select a text document file format and click Export. - - -
- -Navigator in master mode -
- - + + + +To update an index in a master document, select the index in the Navigator, and then click the Update icon. + + + + +To start each subdocument on a new page: + + +Ensure that each subdocument starts with a heading that uses the same paragraph style, for example "Heading 1". + + +In the master document, choose Format - Stylist, and click the Paragraph Styles icon. + + +Right-click "Heading 1" and choose Modify. + + +Click the Text Flow tab. + + +In the Breaks area, select Enable, and then select Page in the Type box. + + +If you want each subdocument to start on an odd page, select With Page Style, and select "Right page" in the box. + + +Click OK. + + +To save a master document as a %PRODUCTNAME text document: + + +Choose File - Export. + + +In the File format list, select a text document file format and click Export. + + +
+ +Navigator in master mode +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp index cefe6c9da6..735b7ee7ca 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -About Headers and Footers -/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +About Headers and Footers +/text/swriter/guide/header_footer.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -headers;about -footers;about +headers;about +footers;about HTML documents; headers and footers - + About Headers and Footers - -Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert Fields, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document. - - -To add a header to a page, choose Insert - Header, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. - - -To add a footer to a page, choose Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. - - -The page style for the current page is displayed in the Status Bar. - - -You can also choose Format - Page, click the Header or Footer tab, and then select Header on or Footer on. Clear the Same content left/right check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages. - - - - -To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different Page Styles, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear. - - -Headers and Footers in HTML Documents -Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Online Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted. - - - - - -Page Styles - - + +Headers and footers are areas in the top and the bottom page margins, where you can add text or graphics. Headers and footers are added to the current page style. Any page that uses the same style automatically receives the header or footer that you add. You can insert Fields, such as page numbers and chapter headings, in headers and footers in a text document. + + +To add a header to a page, choose Insert - Header, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + +To add a footer to a page, choose Insert - Footer, and then select the page style for the current page from the submenu. + + +The page style for the current page is displayed in the Status Bar. + + +You can also choose Format - Page, click the Header or Footer tab, and then select Header on or Footer on. Clear the Same content left/right check box if you want to define different headers and footers for even and odd pages. + + + + +To use different headers or footers in your document, you must add them to different Page Styles, and then apply the styles to the pages where you want the headers or footer to appear. + + +Headers and Footers in HTML Documents +Some of the header and footer options are also available for HTML documents. Headers and footers are not supported by HTML and instead are exported with special tags, so that they can be viewed in a browser. Headers and footers are only exported in HTML documents if they are enabled in Online Layout mode. When you reopen the document in $[officename], the headers and footers are displayed correctly, including any fields that you inserted. + + + + + +Page Styles + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp index 61c8a176de..c9b3e1e57a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Defining Different Headers and Footers -/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Defining Different Headers and Footers +/text/swriter/guide/header_pagestyles.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -headers; changing -page styles; changing +headers; changing +page styles; changing changing; headers - + Defining Different Headers and Footers - -You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as First page, Left page and Right page, or you can create a custom page style. -You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose Format - Page, click the Page tab, and in the Layout settings area, choose Mirrored in the Page layout box. -For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document. - - -Open a new text document. - - -Choose Format - Stylist and click the Page Styles icon in the Stylist. - - -Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. - - -In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. - - -Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. - - -In the Next Style box, select "Left Page". - - -Click OK. - - -In the Stylist, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. - - -In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. - - -Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. - - -In the Next Style box, select "Right Page". - - -Click OK. - - -Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page. - - -Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style. - - - - - - - - - + +You can use different headers and footers on different pages in your document, so long as the pages use different page styles. $[officename] provides several predefined page styles, such as First page, Left page and Right page, or you can create a custom page style. +You can also use the mirrored page layout if you want to add a header to a page style that has different inner and outer page margins. To apply this option to a page style, choose Format - Page, click the Page tab, and in the Layout settings area, choose Mirrored in the Page layout box. +For example, you can use page styles to define different headers for even and odd pages in a document. + + +Open a new text document. + + +Choose Format - Stylist and click the Page Styles icon in the Stylist. + + +Right-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + + +In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. + + +Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. + + +In the Next Style box, select "Left Page". + + +Click OK. + + +In the Stylist, right-click "Left Page" in the list of page styles and choose Modify. + + +In the Page Styles dialog, click the Header tab. + + +Select Header on and click the Organizer tab. + + +In the Next Style box, select "Right Page". + + +Click OK. + + +Double-click "Right Page" in the list of page styles to apply the style to the current page. + + +Enter text or graphics in the header for the Left Page style. After the next page is added to your document, enter text or graphics in the header for the Right Page style. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp index 67938630b0..e33b760f26 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries -/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries +/text/swriter/guide/indices_enter.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -indexes; defining entries in -tables of contents; defining entries in -entries; defining in indexes +indexes; defining entries in +tables of contents; defining entries in +entries; defining in indexes entries; defining in tables of contents - + Defining Index or Table of Contents Entries - -Defining Index Entries - - -Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry, and do one of the following: - - - - -To change the text that appears in the index, type the text that you want in the Entry box. The text that you type here does not replace the selected text in the document. - - -To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select Apply to all similar texts. - - -To add the entries to a custom index, click the New User-defined Index icon, enter the name of the index, and then click OK. - - -Defining Table of Contents Entries -The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. You can also use custom paragraph styles, so long as you assign them one of the predefined outline levels. -To use a custom paragraph style as a table of contents entry: - - -Choose Tools - Outline Numbering and click the Numbering tab. - - -Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the Paragraph Style box. - - -In the Level list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to. - - -Click OK. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. - - - - - - - - - - - - - + +Defining Index Entries + + +Click in a word, or select the words in your document that you want to use as an index entry. + + +Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry, and do one of the following: + + + + +To change the text that appears in the index, type the text that you want in the Entry box. The text that you type here does not replace the selected text in the document. + + +To add an index mark to similar words in your document, select Apply to all similar texts. + + +To add the entries to a custom index, click the New User-defined Index icon, enter the name of the index, and then click OK. + + +Defining Table of Contents Entries +The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. You can also use custom paragraph styles, so long as you assign them one of the predefined outline levels. +To use a custom paragraph style as a table of contents entry: + + +Choose Tools - Outline Numbering and click the Numbering tab. + + +Select the paragraph style that you want to include in your table of contents in the Paragraph Style box. + + +In the Level list, click the hierarchical level that you want to apply the paragraph style to. + + +Click OK. You can now apply the style to headings in your document and include them in your table of contents. + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp index b2a2f5ef51..90115fb3cd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents -/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents +/text/swriter/guide/indices_form.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -indexes; editing index format -editing; index format -tables of contents; formatting -entries; formatting indexes -tables of contents; hyperlinks as entries -hyperlinks; as index entry +indexes; editing index format +editing; index format +tables of contents; formatting +entries; formatting indexes +tables of contents; hyperlinks as entries +hyperlinks; as index entry hyperlinks; in tables of contents - + Formatting an Index or a Table of Contents - -You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the Insert Index dialog. -To apply a different paragraph style to an index level: - - -Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. - - -Click the Styles tab. - - -Click an index level in the Levels list. - - -Click the style that you want to apply in the Paragraph Style list. - - -Click the assign button <. - - -Click OK. - - - - - + +You can apply different paragraph styles, assign hyperlinks to entries, change the layout of indexes, and change the background color of indexes in the Insert Index dialog. +To apply a different paragraph style to an index level: + + +Right-click in the index or table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. + + +Click the Styles tab. + + +Click an index level in the Levels list. + + +Click the style that you want to apply in the Paragraph Style list. + + +Click the assign button <. + + +Click OK. + + +
+ + Insert index/table - - - -
- -To assign hyperlinks to entries in a table of contents: -You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents. - - -Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. - - -Click the Entries tab. - - -Click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to in the Level list. - - -In the Structure area, click in the box in front of E#, and then click Hyperlink. - - -Click in the box behind the E, and then click Hyperlink. - - -Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the All levels button to apply the formatting to all levels. - - - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + +To assign hyperlinks to entries in a table of contents: +You can assign a cross-reference as a hyperlink to entries in a table of contents. + + +Right-click in the table of contents, and then choose Edit Index/Table. + + +Click the Entries tab. + + +Click the heading level that you want to assign hyperlinks to in the Level list. + + +In the Structure area, click in the box in front of E#, and then click Hyperlink. + + +Click in the box behind the E, and then click Hyperlink. + + +Repeat for each heading level that you want to create hyperlinks for, or click the All levels button to apply the formatting to all levels. + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp index 54439db7e8..1437d9debe 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Creating Alphabetical Indexes -/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Creating Alphabetical Indexes +/text/swriter/guide/indices_index.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -concordance files;indexes -indexes;concordance files -indexes; alphabetical indexes +concordance files;indexes +indexes;concordance files +indexes; alphabetical indexes alphabetical indexes - + Creating Alphabetical Indexes - - - -Click in your document where you want to insert the index. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. - - -On the Index/Table tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the Type box. - - -If you want to use a concordance file, select Concordance file in the Options area, click the File, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file. - - -Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then select Alphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab. - - -Click OK. - - -To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose Update Index/Table. - - - - - - - - - - - -Creating a concordance file - - + + + +Click in your document where you want to insert the index. + + +Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. + + +On the Index/Table tab, select "Alphabetical Index" in the Type box. + + +If you want to use a concordance file, select Concordance file in the Options area, click the File, and then locate an existing file or create a new concordance file. + + +Set the formatting options for the index, either on the current tab, or on any of the other tabs of this dialog. For example, if you want to use single letter headings in your index, click the Entries tab, and then select Alphabetical delimiter. To change the formatting of levels in the index, click the Styles tab. + + +Click OK. + + +To update the index, right-click in the index, and then choose Update Index/Table. + + + + + + + + + + + +Creating a concordance file + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp index a4946d8c98..4a3ec1defc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Creating a Bibliography -/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Creating a Bibliography +/text/swriter/guide/indices_literature.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -indexes;creating bibliographies +indexes;creating bibliographies bibliographies - + Creating a Bibliography - -A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document. -Storing Bibliographic Information -$[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document. -To store information in the bibliography database: - - -Choose Tools - Bibliography Database. - - -Choose Insert - Record. - - -Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes. - - -Close the Bibliography Database window. - - -To store bibliographic information in an individual document: - - -Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. - - -Select From document content and click New. - - -Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box. - - -Select the publication source for the record in the Type box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes. - - -Click OK. - - -In the Insert Bibliography Entry dialog, click Insert, and then Close. - - - -Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database - - -Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. - - - - - + +A bibliography is a list of works that you reference in a document. +Storing Bibliographic Information +$[officename] stores bibliographic information in a bibliography database, or in an individual document. +To store information in the bibliography database: + + +Choose Tools - Bibliography Database. + + +Choose Insert - Record. + + +Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box, and then add additional information to the record in the remaining boxes. + + +Close the Bibliography Database window. + + +To store bibliographic information in an individual document: + + +Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. + + +Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. + + +Select From document content and click New. + + +Type a name for the bibliography entry in the Short name box. + + +Select the publication source for the record in the Type box, and then add additional information in the remaining boxes. + + +Click OK. + + +In the Insert Bibliography Entry dialog, click Insert, and then Close. + + + +Inserting Bibliography Entries From the Bibliography Database + + +Click in your document where you want to add the bibliography entry. + + +Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Bibliography Entry. + + +
+ + Insert Bibliography Entry - - - -
- - - -Select From bibliography database. - - -Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the Short name box. - - -Click Insert and then click Close. - - - - - - - - - - - -Bibliography Database - - + + + + + + + +Select From bibliography database. + + +Select the name of the bibliography entry that you want to insert in the Short name box. + + +Click Insert and then click Close. + + + + + + + + + + + +Bibliography Database + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp index aa62e58386..819db85ec1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Creating a Table of Contents -/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Creating a Table of Contents +/text/swriter/guide/indices_toc.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -creating; tables of contents -tables of contents; creating -tables of contents; updating all +creating; tables of contents +tables of contents; creating +tables of contents; updating all updating; tables of contents - + Creating a Table of Contents - -
-The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents. - - -Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables, and then click the Index/Table tab. - - -Select "Table of Contents" in the Type box. - - -Select any options that you want. - - -Click OK. - - -If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the Additional Styles check box in the Create from area, and then click the (...) button next to the check box. In the Assign Styles dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. -
-Updating a Table of Contents -Do one of the following: - - -Right-click in the table of contents and choose Update Index/Table. - - -Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables. - - - - - - - - - - - - - + +
+The best way to generate a table of contents is to apply the predefined heading paragraph styles, such as "Heading 1", to the paragraphs that you want to include in your table of contents. After you apply these styles, you can then create a table of contents. + + +Click in your document where you want to create the table of contents. + + +Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables, and then click the Index/Table tab. + + +Select "Table of Contents" in the Type box. + + +Select any options that you want. + + +Click OK. + + +If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select the Additional Styles check box in the Create from area, and then click the (...) button next to the check box. In the Assign Styles dialog, click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. +
+Updating a Table of Contents +Do one of the following: + + +Right-click in the table of contents and choose Update Index/Table. + + +Choose Tools - Update - All Indexes and Tables. + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp index 81b19f39fd..18171457ed 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -User-Defined Indexes -/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +User-Defined Indexes +/text/swriter/guide/indices_userdef.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -indexes; creating user-defined indexes +indexes; creating user-defined indexes user-defined indexes - + User-Defined Indexes - -You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want. -Creating a User-Defined Index - - -Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry. - - -Click the New User-defined Index button next to the Index box. - - -Type a name for the index in the Name box and click OK. - - -Click Insert to add the selected word(s) to the new index. - - -Click Close. - - -Inserting a User-Defined Index - - -Click in the document where you want to insert the index. - - -Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. - - -On the Index/Table tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the Type box. - - - - - + +You can create as many user-defined indexes as you want. +Creating a User-Defined Index + + +Select a word or words that you want to add to a user-defined index. + + +Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Entry. + + +Click the New User-defined Index button next to the Index box. + + +Type a name for the index in the Name box and click OK. + + +Click Insert to add the selected word(s) to the new index. + + +Click Close. + + +Inserting a User-Defined Index + + +Click in the document where you want to insert the index. + + +Choose Insert - Indexes and Tables - Indexes and Tables. + + +On the Index/Table tab, select the name of the user-defined index that you created in the Type box. + + +
+ + Insert index/table - - - -
- - - -Select any options that you want. - - -Click OK. - - -If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select Styles, and then click the (...) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. - - - - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + +Select any options that you want. + + +Click OK. + + +If you want to use a different paragraph style as a table of contents entry, select Styles, and then click the (...) button next to the box. Click the style in the list, and then click the >> or the << button to define the outline level for the paragraph style. + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp index 96c4760a63..a5fc60db3a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Inserting a Horizontal Line -/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: changed line to ruler in command name, fix #i25122# - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Inserting a Horizontal Line +/text/swriter/guide/insert_line.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: changed line to ruler in command name, fix #i25122# + + -horizontal lines; inserting -lines; inserting horizontal lines -rulers;horizontal ruler <HR> +horizontal lines; inserting +lines; inserting horizontal lines +rulers;horizontal ruler <HR> inserting; horizontal lines - + Inserting a Horizontal Line - - - -Click in the document where you want to insert the line. - - -Choose Insert - Horizontal Ruler. - - - - - + + + +Click in the document where you want to insert the line. + + +Choose Insert - Horizontal Ruler. + + +
+ + Insert Horizontal Ruler - - - -
- - - -Click the line that you want to insert in the Selection list. - - -Click OK. - - -The inserted line is anchored to the current paragraph and centered between the page margins. -You can also insert one of these lines by dragging it from the Rulers folder in the Gallery into the current document. - -Gallery - - + + + + + + + +Click the line that you want to insert in the Selection list. + + +Click OK. + + +The inserted line is anchored to the current paragraph and centered between the page margins. +You can also insert one of these lines by dragging it from the Rulers folder in the Gallery into the current document. + +Gallery + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp index 19a1bc2a4e..0a4b6dac6d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Combining Numbered Lists -/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Combining Numbered Lists +/text/swriter/guide/join_numbered_lists.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + numbering; combining - + Combining Numbered Lists - -You can combine numbered lists into a single consecutively numbered list. -To combine consecutive numbered lists: - - -Select all of the paragraphs in the lists. - - -On the Object Bar, click the Numbering on/off icon twice. - - -To create a numbered list from non-consecutive paragraphs: - - -Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character. - - -Continue to hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine. - - -On the Object Bar, click the Numbering on/off icon twice. - - - - - - - - - - - + +You can combine numbered lists into a single consecutively numbered list. +To combine consecutive numbered lists: + + +Select all of the paragraphs in the lists. + + +On the Object Bar, click the Numbering on/off icon twice. + + +To create a numbered list from non-consecutive paragraphs: + + +Hold down Ctrl and drag a selection in the first numbered paragraph. You only have to select one character. + + +Continue to hold down Ctrl, and drag a selection in each numbered paragraph of the lists you want to combine. + + +On the Object Bar, click the Numbering on/off icon twice. + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp index b2471f4428..afab932912 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) -/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) +/text/swriter/guide/keyboard.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -keyboard; accessibility $[officename] Writer +keyboard; accessibility $[officename] Writer accessibility; $[officename] Writer - + Using Shortcut Keys ($[officename] Writer Accessibility) - -Use the keyboard accelerator Alt+<Letter> to access menu commands. For example, press Alt+I to open the Insert menu, and then T to insert a table. -To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape. -Inserting Frames and Sections - - -Press F6 until the focus is on the Insert icon on the Main Toolbar. - - -Press the right arrow key to open the Insert floating toolbar. - - -Press the right arrow key until the Insert Frame Manually or Insert Section icon is selected. - - -Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the frame or section that you want to insert. - - -Press Enter. - - -Press Enter again to place the cursor inside the frame or section. -Inserting Text Tables - - -Press F6 until the focus is on the Insert icon on the Main Toolbar. - - -Press the right arrow key to open the Insert floating toolbar. - - -Press the right arrow key until the Insert Table icon is selected. - - -Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table. - - -Press Enter. - - - - - - - + +Use the keyboard accelerator Alt+<Letter> to access menu commands. For example, press Alt+I to open the Insert menu, and then T to insert a table. +To open a context menu, press Shift+F10. To close a context menu, press Escape. +Inserting Frames and Sections + + +Press F6 until the focus is on the Insert icon on the Main Toolbar. + + +Press the right arrow key to open the Insert floating toolbar. + + +Press the right arrow key until the Insert Frame Manually or Insert Section icon is selected. + + +Press the down arrow key, and then press the right arrow key to set the width of the frame or section that you want to insert. + + +Press Enter. + + +Press Enter again to place the cursor inside the frame or section. +Inserting Text Tables + + +Press F6 until the focus is on the Insert icon on the Main Toolbar. + + +Press the right arrow key to open the Insert floating toolbar. + + +Press the right arrow key until the Insert Table icon is selected. + + +Press the down arrow key, and then use the arrow keys to select the number of columns and rows to include in the table. + + +Press Enter. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp index 3a235e4ddc..ae07bc552c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Using Styles From Another Document or Template -/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Using Styles From Another Document or Template +/text/swriter/guide/load_styles.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -formatting styles; importing -styles; importing from other files -importing;styles from other files +formatting styles; importing +styles; importing from other files +importing;styles from other files loading;styles from other files - + Using Styles From Another Document or Template - -Youthis is for embedding into manual can import styles from another document or template into the current document. - - -Choose Format - Styles - Load. - - - - - + +Youthis is for embedding into manual can import styles from another document or template into the current document. + + +Choose Format - Styles - Load. + + +
+ + Load Styles - - - -
- - - -Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select Overwrite. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Click an entry in the Categories list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use in the Templates list, and then click OK. - - -Click From File, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, and then click name, and then click Open. - - - - - - - - + + + + + + + +Use the check boxes at the bottom of the dialog to select the style types that you want to import. To replace styles in the current document that have the same name as the ones you are importing, select Overwrite. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +Click an entry in the Categories list, then click the template containing the styles that you want to use in the Templates list, and then click OK. + + +Click From File, locate the file containing the styles that you want to use, and then click name, and then click Open. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp index 5a71ab9ffd..6dcdaa7b59 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List -/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List +/text/swriter/guide/numbering_paras.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -numbering; removing numbers -numbering; interrupting +numbering; removing numbers +numbering; interrupting bullet lists; interrupting - + Modifying Numbering in a Numbered List - -You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in a numbered list or change the number that a numbered list starts with. -To remove the number from a paragraph in a numbered list: - - -Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -To remove the number while preserving the indent of the paragraph, press the Backspace key. - - -To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the Numbering on/off icon on the Object Bar. If you save the document in HTML format, a separate numbered list is created for the numbered paragraphs that follow the current paragraph. - - -To change the number that a numbered list starts with: - - -Click anywhere in the numbered list. - - -Choose Format - Numbering/Bullets, and then click the Options tab. - - -Enter the number you want the list to start with in the Start at box. - - -Click OK. - - - - - - - - - - - + +You can remove the numbering from a paragraph in a numbered list or change the number that a numbered list starts with. +To remove the number from a paragraph in a numbered list: + + +Click in front of the first character of the paragraph that you want to remove the numbering from. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +To remove the number while preserving the indent of the paragraph, press the Backspace key. + + +To remove the number and the indent of the paragraph, click the Numbering on/off icon on the Object Bar. If you save the document in HTML format, a separate numbered list is created for the numbered paragraphs that follow the current paragraph. + + +To change the number that a numbered list starts with: + + +Click anywhere in the numbered list. + + +Choose Format - Numbering/Bullets, and then click the Options tab. + + +Enter the number you want the list to start with in the Start at box. + + +Click OK. + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp index da92351ce5..4d2a55cd58 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks -/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks +/text/swriter/guide/page_break.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -page breaks; inserting and deleting -inserting; page breaks -pages; inserting page breaks +page breaks; inserting and deleting +inserting; page breaks +pages; inserting page breaks formatting; page breaks - + Inserting and Deleting Page Breaks - -To insert a manual page break: - - -Click in your document where you want the new page to begin. - - -Press Ctrl+Enter. - - -To delete a manual page break: - - -Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break. - - -Press Backspace. - - -To delete a manual page break that occurs before a table: - - -Right-click in the table, and choose Table. - - -Click the Text Flow tab. - - -Clear the Break check box. - - - -Insert Break dialog - - + +To insert a manual page break: + + +Click in your document where you want the new page to begin. + + +Press Ctrl+Enter. + + +To delete a manual page break: + + +Click in front of the first character on the page that follows the manual page break. + + +Press Backspace. + + +To delete a manual page break that occurs before a table: + + +Right-click in the table, and choose Table. + + +Click the Text Flow tab. + + +Clear the Break check box. + + + +Insert Break dialog + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp index 0a86f4ccef..d335615196 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Changing Page Backgrounds -text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp - - -UFI: part of a series of files to fix #i29922# -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Changing Page Backgrounds +text/swriter/guide/pagebackground.xhp + + +UFI: part of a series of files to fix #i29922# +dedr: reviewed + + -page backgrounds -page styles;backgrounds -backgrounds on different pages -printing;page backgrounds +page backgrounds +page styles;backgrounds +backgrounds on different pages +printing;page backgrounds pages;backgrounds - + Changing Page Background - -$[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages. -
-To Change the Page Background - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the Page Styles icon. - - -In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. - - -On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. - - -In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. - - - - -To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default". - - -To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style. - - - - -Click the Background tab. - - -In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. - - -Click OK. - - -
-To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document -Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the Page Styles icon. - - -Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply. - - -To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document -Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. - - -Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background. - - -Choose Insert - Manual Break. - - -Select Page break. - - -In the Style box, select a page style that uses the page background. - - - - -To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default". - - -To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style. -If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3. - - - - -Click OK. - - - - - - - - - + +$[officename] uses page styles to specify the background of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page background of one or more pages in a document to a watermark, you need to create a page style that uses the watermark background, and then apply the page style to the pages. +
+To Change the Page Background + + +Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + +Click the Page Styles icon. + + +In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + + +On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. + + +In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. + + + + +To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default". + + +To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style. + + + + +Click the Background tab. + + +In the list box at the top, select whether you want a solid color or a graphic. Then select your options from the tab page. + + +Click OK. + + +
+To Change the Page Background of All Pages in a Document +Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. + + +Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + +Click the Page Styles icon. + + +Double-click the page style that uses the page background that you want to apply. + + +To Use Different Page Backgrounds in the Same Document +Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses a page background. See To Change the Page Background for details. + + +Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page background. + + +Choose Insert - Manual Break. + + +Select Page break. + + +In the Style box, select a page style that uses the page background. + + + + +To change the background of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default". + + +To change the background of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style. +If you want to change the page background later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3. + + + + +Click OK. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp index 8118809753..f4ced5e89a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Changing Page Orientation (Landscape or Portrait) -text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp - - -UFI: fixing #i29922# -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Changing Page Orientation (Landscape or Portrait) +text/swriter/guide/pageorientation.xhp + + +UFI: fixing #i29922# +dedr: reviewed + + -page styles;orientation -page formats; changing individual pages -formatting; changing individual pages -portrait and landscape -landscape and portrait -printing;portrait page format -printing;landscape page format -orientation;page format -paper orientation -page orientation;page format +page styles;orientation +page formats; changing individual pages +formatting; changing individual pages +portrait and landscape +landscape and portrait +printing;portrait page format +printing;landscape page format +orientation;page format +paper orientation +page orientation;page format sideways orientation of pages - + Changing Page Orientation - -$[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page orientation of one or more pages in a document from portrait to landscape in a document, you need to create a page style that uses the landscape orientation, and then apply the page style to the pages. -
-To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the Page Styles icon. - - -Right-click, and choose New. - - -On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. - - -In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. - - - - -To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default". - - -To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style. - - - - -Click the Page tab. - - -Under Paper format, select Portrait or Landscape. - - -Click OK. - - -
-To Change the Page Orientation of All Pages in a Document to Landscape or Portrait -Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses landscape page orientation. See To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait for details. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the Page Styles icon. - - -Double-click the page style that uses the page orientation that you want to apply. - - -To Use Landscape and Portrait Page Orientation in the Same Document -Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses landscape page orientation. See To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait for details. - - -Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page orientation. - - -Choose Insert - Manual Break. - - -Select Page break. - - -In the Style box, select a page style that uses the landscape or portrait page orientation. - - - - -To change the orientation of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default". - - -To change the orientation of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style. -If you want to change the page orientation later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3. - - - - -Click OK. - - - - - - - - - + +$[officename] uses page styles to specify the orientation of the pages in a document. For example, to change the page orientation of one or more pages in a document from portrait to landscape in a document, you need to create a page style that uses the landscape orientation, and then apply the page style to the pages. +
+To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait + + +Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + +Click the Page Styles icon. + + +Right-click, and choose New. + + +On the Organizer tab page, type a name for the page style in the Name box. + + +In the Next Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the next page. + + + + +To only apply the new page style to a single page, select "Default". + + +To apply the new page style to all subsequent pages, select the name of the new page style. + + + + +Click the Page tab. + + +Under Paper format, select Portrait or Landscape. + + +Click OK. + + +
+To Change the Page Orientation of All Pages in a Document to Landscape or Portrait +Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses landscape page orientation. See To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait for details. + + +Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + +Click the Page Styles icon. + + +Double-click the page style that uses the page orientation that you want to apply. + + +To Use Landscape and Portrait Page Orientation in the Same Document +Before you begin, ensure that you have created a page style that uses landscape page orientation. See To Change the Page Orientation to Landscape or Portrait for details. + + +Click in front of the first character of the paragraph where you want to change the page orientation. + + +Choose Insert - Manual Break. + + +Select Page break. + + +In the Style box, select a page style that uses the landscape or portrait page orientation. + + + + +To change the orientation of the current page only, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to "Default". + + +To change the orientation of the current and subsequent pages, select a page style where the Next Style option is set to the name of the page style. +If you want to change the page orientation later on in the document, repeat steps 1 to 3. + + + + +Click OK. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp index ac6f0929c1..f8dcd4741c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Creating and Applying Page Styles -/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -UFI: moved index entries to the new guides pageorientation and pagebackground -dedr: reviewed - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Creating and Applying Page Styles +/text/swriter/guide/pagestyles.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +UFI: moved index entries to the new guides pageorientation and pagebackground +dedr: reviewed + + + Creating and Applying Page Styles - -$[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page. - - - - - - -To define a new page style: - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - - -Click the Page Styles icon. - - -In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. - - -On the Organizer tab, type a name in the Name box. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the Next Style box. - - -To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the Next Style box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style. - - - - -Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click OK. - - -To apply a page style: - - -Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to. - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Style icon. - - -Double-click a name in the list. - - -To apply a page style to a new page: - - -Click in the document where you want a new page to start. - - -Choose Insert - Manual Break. - - -Select Page break. - - -In the Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break. - - -Click OK. - - - - - - - - - + +$[officename] uses page styles to specify the layout of a page, including the page orientation, background, margins, headers, footers, and text columns. To change the layout of an individual page in a document, you must create and apply a custom page style to the page. + + + + + + +To define a new page style: + + +Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + + +Click the Page Styles icon. + + +In the list of page styles, right-click an item, and then choose New. + + +On the Organizer tab, type a name in the Name box. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +To apply the custom page style to a single page, select the default page style that is used in your document in the Next Style box. + + +To apply the custom page style to more than one page, select its name in the Next Style box. To stop using the style, insert a manual page break and assign it a different page style. + + + + +Use the tabs in the dialog to set the layout options for the page style, and then click OK. + + +To apply a page style: + + +Click in the page that you want to apply the page style to. + + +Choose Format - Styles and Formatting, and then click the Page Style icon. + + +Double-click a name in the list. + + +To apply a page style to a new page: + + +Click in the document where you want a new page to start. + + +Choose Insert - Manual Break. + + +Select Page break. + + +In the Style box, select the page style that you want to apply to the page that follows the manual break. + + +Click OK. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp index 6a3d155243..14320f5ae1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Previewing a Page Before Printing -/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Previewing a Page Before Printing +/text/swriter/guide/print_preview.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -printing; previews -previews; print layouts -print layouts; checking +printing; previews +previews; print layouts +print layouts; checking page views - + Previewing a Page Before Printing - - - -Choose File - Page Preview. - - -Use the zoom icons on the Object Bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page. - - - - - + + + +Choose File - Page Preview. + + +Use the zoom icons on the Object Bar to reduce or enlarge the view of the page. + + +
+ + Change zoom factor using icons in the object bar - - - - - -
- - - -Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the Object Bar to scroll through the document. - - - - - + + + + + +
+ + + +Use the arrow keys or the arrow icons on the Object Bar to scroll through the document. + + + + + Symbol bar Print Preview - - - - - -
- - -File - Page Preview. - - + + + + + + + + +File - Page Preview. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp index ae1cdb58fa..9c4bf060a5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Removing Line Breaks -/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Removing Line Breaks +/text/swriter/guide/removing_line_breaks.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -hard returns;finding & replacing -paragraph marks;finding & replacing -line breaks;finding & replacing +hard returns;finding & replacing +paragraph marks;finding & replacing +line breaks;finding & replacing finding & replacing line breaks - - -Removing Line Breaks -Use the AutoFormat feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document. -This AutoFormat feature only works on text that is formatted with the "Default" paragraph style. - - -Choose Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat. - - -On the Options tab, ensure that Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50% is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage. - - -Click OK. - - -Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove. - - -In the Apply Style box on the Object Bar, choose Default. - - -Choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply. - - - - + + +Removing Line Breaks +Use the AutoFormat feature to remove line breaks that occur within sentences. Unwanted line breaks can occur when you copy text from another source and paste it into a text document. +This AutoFormat feature only works on text that is formatted with the "Default" paragraph style. + + +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat. + + +On the Options tab, ensure that Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than 50% is selected. To change the minimum percentage for the line length, double-click the option in the list, and then enter a new percentage. + + +Click OK. + + +Select the text containing the line breaks that you want to remove. + + +In the Apply Style box on the Object Bar, choose Default. + + +Choose Format - AutoFormat - Apply. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp index 2cc0cfadcc..e291c2e4d2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Resetting Font Attributes -/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Resetting Font Attributes +/text/swriter/guide/reset_format.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -formats; resetting -font attributes; resetting -fonts; resetting +formats; resetting +font attributes; resetting +fonts; resetting resetting fonts - + Resetting Font Attributes - - - -You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing the right-arrow key. For example, if you are pressed Ctrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press the right arrow to return to the default character format of the paragraph. - - -To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command Format - Default. - - - - - - - + + + +You can quickly exit manual formatting by pressing the right-arrow key. For example, if you are pressed Ctrl+B to apply the bold typeface to the text that you type, press the right arrow to return to the default character format of the paragraph. + + +To reset all direct formatting of existing text, select that text, then choose the menu command Format - Default. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp index 3807532706..29af6b7749 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Docking and Resizing Windows -/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Docking and Resizing Windows +/text/swriter/guide/resize_navigator.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -Navigator;changing size -Navigator;docking -Styles and Formatting window;changing size -Styles and Formatting window;docking -Gallery;changing size -Gallery;docking +Navigator;changing size +Navigator;docking +Styles and Formatting window;changing size +Styles and Formatting window;docking +Gallery;changing size +Gallery;docking docking; windows resizing - + Docking and Resizing Windows - -You can dock, undock and resize most $[officename] program windows such as the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window. + +You can dock, undock and resize most $[officename] program windows such as the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window. To dock or undock the Navigator or the Styles and Formatting window, hold down Command -Ctrl and double-click on a gray area in the window. -To resize the window, drag a corner or an edge of the window. - - - - +Ctrl and double-click on a gray area in the window. +To resize the window, drag a corner or an edge of the window. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp index d9c283fea7..6fd5f4eebb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Using Wildcards in Text Searches -/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE. fix #110141# -dedr: reviewed - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Using Wildcards in Text Searches +/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE. fix #110141# +dedr: reviewed + + -searching; with wildcards -regular expressions;searching +searching; with wildcards +regular expressions;searching wildcards; searching in text - + Using Wildcards in Text Searches - -You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". - - -Choose Edit - Find & Replace. - - -Select the Regular expressions check box. - - -In the Search for box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search. - - -Click Find or Find All. - - -Regular Expression Examples - - -The wildcard for a single character is a period (.). - - -The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". - - -The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). - - -The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The the wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). - - -You can only search for regular expressions within the same paragraph. That is, you cannot search for one term in a paragraph and a different term in the next paragraph. - - - + +You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". + + +Choose Edit - Find & Replace. + + +Select the Regular expressions check box. + + +In the Search for box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search. + + +Click Find or Find All. + + +Regular Expression Examples + + +The wildcard for a single character is a period (.). + + +The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". + + +The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). + + +The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The the wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). + + +You can only search for regular expressions within the same paragraph. That is, you cannot search for one term in a paragraph and a different term in the next paragraph. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp index 4010196327..74f6382f6e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Updating Styles From Selections -/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Updating Styles From Selections +/text/swriter/guide/stylist_update.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -styles; updating from selections -templates; updating from selections -Styles and Formatting window; updating from selections +styles; updating from selections +templates; updating from selections +Styles and Formatting window; updating from selections updating; styles, from selections - + Updating Styles From Selections - - - -Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. - - -Click the icon of the style category that you want to update.UFI: use "category" for consistent wording, see #i21144# - - -Click in the document where you want to copy the updated style from, for example, in a paragraph that you applied manual formatting to. - - -In the Styles and Formatting windows, click the style that you want to update. - - -Click the Update Style icon. - - - - - + + + +Choose Format - Styles and Formatting. + + +Click the icon of the style category that you want to update.UFI: use "category" for consistent wording, see #i21144# + + +Click in the document where you want to copy the updated style from, for example, in a paragraph that you applied manual formatting to. + + +In the Styles and Formatting windows, click the style that you want to update. + + +Click the Update Style icon. + + +
+ + Icon - - - -Update Style - - -
- - - - -Styles and Formatting - - + + + +Update Style + + + + + + + +Styles and Formatting + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp index adb9928165..258df88b43 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Making Text Superscript or Subscript -/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Making Text Superscript or Subscript +/text/swriter/guide/subscript.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -text; subscript and superscript -superscript text +text; subscript and superscript +superscript text subscript text - + Making Text Superscript or Subscript - - - -Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Choose Format - Character - Position, and then select Superscript or Subscript. - - -Press Ctrl+Shift+P to make the text superscript, and Ctrl+Shift+B to make the text subscript. - - - -Format - Character - Position -Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat - Replace - - + + + +Select the text that you want to make superscript or subscript. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +Choose Format - Character - Position, and then select Superscript or Subscript. + + +Press Ctrl+Shift+P to make the text superscript, and Ctrl+Shift+B to make the text subscript. + + + +Format - Character - Position +Tools - AutoCorrect/AutoFormat - Replace + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp index 5bd82bc3a4..91c411756d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard -/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard +/text/swriter/guide/table_cells.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -rows; inserting in text tables by keyboard -columns; inserting in text tables by keyboard +rows; inserting in text tables by keyboard +columns; inserting in text tables by keyboard text tables; inserting rows or columns - + Adding or Deleting a Row or Column to a Table Using the Keyboard - -You can add or delete rows or columns in table as well as split or merge table cells using the keyboard. - - + +You can add or delete rows or columns in table as well as split or merge table cells using the keyboard. + + To insert a new row in a table, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option -Alt+Ins, and then press the up or down arrow key. You can also move the cursor to the last cell in the table, and then press Tab. - - +Alt+Ins, and then press the up or down arrow key. You can also move the cursor to the last cell in the table, and then press Tab. + + To insert a new column, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option -Alt+Ins, and then press the left or right arrow key. - - +Alt+Ins, and then press the left or right arrow key. + + To split a table cell instead of adding a column, press Option Alt+Ins, and then hold down Command -Ctrl while you press the left or right arrow key. - - +Ctrl while you press the left or right arrow key. + + To delete a row, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option -Alt+Del, and then press the up or down arrow key. - - +Alt+Del, and then press the up or down arrow key. + + To delete a column, place the cursor in a table cell, press Option -Alt+Del, and then press the left or the right arrow key. - - +Alt+Del, and then press the left or the right arrow key. + + To merge a table into an adjacent cell, place the cursor in the cell, press Option Alt+Del, hold down Command -Ctrl, and then press the left or the right arrow key. - - - - - - - - +Ctrl, and then press the left or the right arrow key. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp index 97f06aa409..53663acfba 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Changing the Case of Text -/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Changing the Case of Text +/text/swriter/guide/text_capital.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -characters; uppercase or lowercase -text; uppercase or lowercase -lowercase; text +characters; uppercase or lowercase +text; uppercase or lowercase +lowercase; text uppercase; formatting text - + Changing the Case of Text - -You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection. -To capitalize text: - - -Select the text that you want to capitalize. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Choose Format - Case/Characters - Uppercase. - - -Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, and then select the type of capitalization in the Effects box. "Capitals" capitalizes all of the letters in the selection. "Title" capitalizes the first letter of each word in the selection. "Small capitals" capitalizes every letter in the selection, but in a reduced font size. - - -To change text to lowercase: - - -Select the text that you want to change to lowercase. - - -Do one of the following: - - - - -Choose Format - Case/Characters - Lowercase. - - -Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, and then select "Lowercase" in the Effects box. - - - - - - + +You can change the case of text, format text with small capitals, or capitalize the first letter of each word in a selection. +To capitalize text: + + +Select the text that you want to capitalize. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +Choose Format - Case/Characters - Uppercase. + + +Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, and then select the type of capitalization in the Effects box. "Capitals" capitalizes all of the letters in the selection. "Title" capitalizes the first letter of each word in the selection. "Small capitals" capitalizes every letter in the selection, but in a reduced font size. + + +To change text to lowercase: + + +Select the text that you want to change to lowercase. + + +Do one of the following: + + + + +Choose Format - Case/Characters - Lowercase. + + +Choose Format - Character, click the Font Effects tab, and then select "Lowercase" in the Effects box. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp index 25adc4c745..adfd62e6b9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page -/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page +/text/swriter/guide/text_centervert.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -text; centering on pages -text; positioning in middle -centering; text on page +text; centering on pages +text; positioning in middle +centering; text on page title pages; centering text on - + Using a Frame to Center Text on a Page - - - -Select the text that you want to center on the page. - - -Choose Insert - Frame. - - -In the Anchor area, select To page. - - -In the Size area, set the dimensions of the frame. - - -In the Position area, select "Center" in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes. - - -Click OK. - - -To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose Format - Frame. Click the Borders tab, and then click in the Set No Border box in the Line Arrangement area. -To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame. - - - - - + + + +Select the text that you want to center on the page. + + +Choose Insert - Frame. + + +In the Anchor area, select To page. + + +In the Size area, set the dimensions of the frame. + + +In the Position area, select "Center" in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes. + + +Click OK. + + +To hide the borders of the frame, select the frame, and then choose Format - Frame. Click the Borders tab, and then click in the Set No Border box in the Line Arrangement area. +To resize the frame, drag the edges of the frame. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp index 01c45cf75e..96e00b7608 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Using the Direct Cursor -/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Using the Direct Cursor +/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -text; cursor -entering text with direct cursor -direct cursor; settings -writing with direct cursor +text; cursor +entering text with direct cursor +direct cursor; settings +writing with direct cursor cursor;direct cursor - + Using the Direct Cursor - -The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page. -To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. - - + +The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page. +To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. + + On the Main Toolbar, click the Direct Cursor icon Icon - . - - -Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type: + . + + +Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type: Icon - Align left + Align left Icon - Centered + Centered Icon - Align right - - -Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces. - - - - - - - - + Align right + + +Type your text. %PRODUCTNAME automatically inserts the required number of blank lines, and, if the options are enabled, tabs and spaces. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp index 98b5615e6b..91640f4289 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames -/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames +/text/swriter/guide/text_frame.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -text frames; inserting -frames; inserting for text -text frames; moving -text frames; enlarging/reducing -text frames; scaling -scaling; text frames -changing; size of text frames -linking frames -text flow; from frame to frame -frames; linking -text frames; linking -text frames; editing -text;not printing -printing;hiding text from printing +text frames; inserting +frames; inserting for text +text frames; moving +text frames; enlarging/reducing +text frames; scaling +scaling; text frames +changing; size of text frames +linking frames +text flow; from frame to frame +frames; linking +text frames; linking +text frames; editing +text;not printing +printing;hiding text from printing printing;not printing text - + Inserting, Editing, and Linking Text Frames - -A text frame is a container for text and graphics that you can place anywhere on a page. You can also use a frame to apply a column layout to text. -Inserting Text Frames - - -Select the text that you want to include in the frame. - - -Choose Insert - Frame, and click OK. - - -Editing Text Frames -To edit the contents of a text frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want. -To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose Frame. -To resize a text frame, click an edge of frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame. -Hiding Text From Printing -Any text frame can be set to a mode which allows viewing the text on screen, but hides the text from printing. - - -Select the text frame (you see the eight handles). - - -Choose Format - Frame - Options. - - -In the Properties area, unmark the Print check box and click OK. - - -Linking Text Frames -You can link text frames so that their contents automatically flow from one frame to another. - - - - - -1. - - -Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame. - - - - + +A text frame is a container for text and graphics that you can place anywhere on a page. You can also use a frame to apply a column layout to text. +Inserting Text Frames + + +Select the text that you want to include in the frame. + + +Choose Insert - Frame, and click OK. + + +Editing Text Frames +To edit the contents of a text frame, click in the frame, and make the changes that you want. +To edit a frame, select the frame, right-click, and then choose a formatting option. You can also right-click the selected frame, and choose Frame. +To resize a text frame, click an edge of frame, and drag one of the edges or corners of the frame. Hold down Shift while you drag to maintain the proportion of the frame. +Hiding Text From Printing +Any text frame can be set to a mode which allows viewing the text on screen, but hides the text from printing. + + +Select the text frame (you see the eight handles). + + +Choose Format - Frame - Options. + + +In the Properties area, unmark the Print check box and click OK. + + +Linking Text Frames +You can link text frames so that their contents automatically flow from one frame to another. +
+ + + + +1. + + +Click the edge of a frame that you want to link. Selection handles appear on the edges of the frame. + + + + Icon - - - -2. - - -On the Object Bar, click the Link icon. - - - - - - -3. - - -Click the frame that you want to link to. - - -
- -You can only link frames if: - - -The target frame is empty. - - -The target frame is not linked to another frame. - - -The source and the target frames are in the same section. For example, you cannot link a header frame to a footer frame. - - -The source frame does not have a next link. - - -The target or the source frame are not contained in each other. - - -When you select a linked frame, a line is displayed that connects the linked frames. -You can only change the height of the last frame in a series of linked frames. - - - - - - - + + + +2. + + +On the Object Bar, click the Link icon. + + + + + + +3. + + +Click the frame that you want to link to. + + + + +You can only link frames if: + + +The target frame is empty. + + +The target frame is not linked to another frame. + + +The source and the target frames are in the same section. For example, you cannot link a header frame to a footer frame. + + +The source frame does not have a next link. + + +The target or the source frame are not contained in each other. + + +When you select a linked frame, a line is displayed that connects the linked frames. +You can only change the height of the last frame in a series of linked frames. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp index 6b42563b90..4dd7e98629 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard -/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard +/text/swriter/guide/text_nav_keyb.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -text; navigating with keyboard -text; selecting with keyboard -navigating; in text -selections; of text +text; navigating with keyboard +text; selecting with keyboard +navigating; in text +selections; of text keyboard; using in text - + Navigating and Selecting With the Keyboard - -You can navigate through a document and make selections with the keyboard. - - - -Key - - -Function - - - + +You can navigate through a document and make selections with the keyboard. +
+ + +Key + + +Function + + + +Command key - -Ctrl key - - - - -Right/left arrow keys - - -Moves the cursor one character to the left or to the right. - - -Moves the cursor one word to the left or to the right. - - - - -Up/down arrow keys - - -Moves the cursor up or down one line. - - -(Ctrl+Alt) Moves the current paragraph up or down. - - - - -Home - - -Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. - - -Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document. - - - - -Home -In a table - - -Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents in the current cell. - - -Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the first cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the beginning of the document. - - - - -End - - -Moves the cursor to the end of the current line. - - -Moves the cursor to the end of the document - - - - -End -In a table - - -Moves to the end of the contents in the current cell. - - -Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the last cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the end of the document. - - - - -PgUp - - -Scrolls up one page. - - -Moves the cursor to the header. - - - - -PgDn - - -Scroll down one page. - - -Moves the cursor to the footer. - - -
- - - - - + +Ctrl key + + + + +Right/left arrow keys + + +Moves the cursor one character to the left or to the right. + + +Moves the cursor one word to the left or to the right. + + + + +Up/down arrow keys + + +Moves the cursor up or down one line. + + +(Ctrl+Alt) Moves the current paragraph up or down. + + + + +Home + + +Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. + + +Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document. + + + + +Home +In a table + + +Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents in the current cell. + + +Moves the cursor to the beginning of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the first cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the beginning of the document. + + + + +End + + +Moves the cursor to the end of the current line. + + +Moves the cursor to the end of the document + + + + +End +In a table + + +Moves to the end of the contents in the current cell. + + +Moves the cursor to the end of the contents of the current cell. Press again to move the cursor to the last cell in the table. Press again to move the cursor to the end of the document. + + + + +PgUp + + +Scrolls up one page. + + +Moves the cursor to the header. + + + + +PgDn + + +Scroll down one page. + + +Moves the cursor to the footer. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp index 9c53351f8c..aec5053636 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Thesaurus -/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Thesaurus +/text/swriter/guide/using_thesaurus.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -thesaurus; related words -related words in thesaurus -spelling in thesaurus -dictionaries; thesaurus -lexicon, see thesaurus +thesaurus; related words +related words in thesaurus +spelling in thesaurus +dictionaries; thesaurus +lexicon, see thesaurus synonyms in thesaurus - + Thesaurus - -You can use the thesaurus to look up synonyms, and related words. - - -Click in the word that you want to look up. - - + +You can use the thesaurus to look up synonyms, and related words. + + +Click in the word that you want to look up. + + Choose Tools - Thesaurus, or press Command -Ctrl+F7. - - -In the Meaning list, select the definition that matches the context of the word. - - - - - +Ctrl+F7. + + +In the Meaning list, select the definition that matches the context of the word. + + +
+ + Dialog Thesaurus English - - - -
- - - -Select the replacement word in the Synonym list. - - -Click OK. - - -To look up the word in a different language, click Language in the Thesaurus dialog, select one of the installed languages, and then click OK. In the Thesaurus dialog, click Search. The thesaurus may not be available for all installed languages. -If you applied a different language setting to individual words, or paragraphs, the thesaurus for the applied language is used. - - - -Thesaurus - - + + + + + + + +Select the replacement word in the Synonym list. + + +Click OK. + + +To look up the word in a different language, click Language in the Thesaurus dialog, select one of the installed languages, and then click OK. In the Thesaurus dialog, click Search. The thesaurus may not be available for all installed languages. +If you applied a different language setting to individual words, or paragraphs, the thesaurus for the applied language is used. + + + +Thesaurus + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp index 9429dd9a8c..1ba78374b7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Word Completion for Text Documents -text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp - - -UFI: new guide by request of users -FPE: Deleted the screenshot for word completion. This guide needs review! -YJ: checked English, but didn't review content -UFI: who did set this to depreciated? Reset to final - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Word Completion for Text Documents +text/swriter/guide/word_completion.xhp + + +UFI: new guide by request of users +FPE: Deleted the screenshot for word completion. This guide needs review! +YJ: checked English, but didn't review content +UFI: who did set this to depreciated? Reset to final + + -automatic word completion -completion of words; automatic -AutoCorrect function; word completion -word completion -weekdays; automatically completing +automatic word completion +completion of words; automatic +AutoCorrect function; word completion +word completion +weekdays; automatically completing months; automatically completing - + Word Completion for Text Documents - -$[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. -If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press Ctrl+Tab to cycle through the available words. To cycle in the opposite direction, press Ctrl+Shift+Tab. - Using word completion - - -By default, you accept the word completion by pressing the Enter key. - - - To reject the word completion, continue typing with any other key. - - - Switching off the word completion - - - Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Word Completion . - - - Clear Enable word completion . - - - Fine-tuning the word completion - - - Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Word Completion . - - - Select any of the following options: - - - Inserting an additional space character - - - Select Append space. - - - The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. - Selecting the accept key - - - Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. - - - Selecting the number of characters - - - Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. - - - Selecting the scope of collected words - - - Select When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents. - Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted. - If you do not select the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. -If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section. - - - Working with the word list - If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. - Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. - - - Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. - The word completion feature collects the words. - - - Select all or some of the words in the list. - - - Use Ctrl+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words. - Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words. - - -
-Word Completion -
- - + +$[officename] collects words that you frequently use in the current session. When you later type the first three letters of a collected word, $[officename] automatically completes the word. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. +If there is more than one word in the AutoCorrect memory that matches the three letters that you type, press Ctrl+Tab to cycle through the available words. To cycle in the opposite direction, press Ctrl+Shift+Tab. + Using word completion + + +By default, you accept the word completion by pressing the Enter key. + + + To reject the word completion, continue typing with any other key. + + + Switching off the word completion + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Word Completion . + + + Clear Enable word completion . + + + Fine-tuning the word completion + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Word Completion . + + + Select any of the following options: + + + Inserting an additional space character + + + Select Append space. + + + The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. + Selecting the accept key + + + Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. + + + Selecting the number of characters + + + Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. + + + Selecting the scope of collected words + + + Select When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents. + Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted. + If you do not select the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. +If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section. + + + Working with the word list + If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. + Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. + + + Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. + The word completion feature collects the words. + + + Select all or some of the words in the list. + + + Use Ctrl+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words. + Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words. + + +
+Word Completion +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp index 65c966fdf3..b599b4cf02 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Counting Words -/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Counting Words +/text/swriter/guide/words_count.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + -words; counting in text -numbers; words in text -text; counting words -number of words -documents; number of words -text; number of words -characters; counting -number of characters -documents; number of characters -text; number of characters -lines; counting -number of lines +words; counting in text +numbers; words in text +text; counting words +number of words +documents; number of words +text; number of words +characters; counting +number of characters +documents; number of characters +text; number of characters +lines; counting +number of lines documents; number of lines - + Counting Words - - - -Choose File - Properties. - - -Click the Statistics tab. - - - -File - Properties - Statistics - - + + + +Choose File - Properties. + + +Click the Statistics tab. + + + +File - Properties - Statistics + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp index 0af51f2f88..2abeb9f359 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Wrapping Text Around Objects -/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -FPE: Deleted screenshots - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Wrapping Text Around Objects +/text/swriter/guide/wrap.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +FPE: Deleted screenshots + + -text wrap around objects -contour editor -contour wrap -text; formatting around objects -formatting; contour wrap +text wrap around objects +contour editor +contour wrap +text; formatting around objects +formatting; contour wrap objects; contour wrap - + Wrapping Text Around Objects - - - -Select the object. - - -Choose Format - Wrap, and then choose the wrapping style that you want to apply. -The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet. - - -Specifying the Wrapping Properties - - -Select the object. - - -Choose Format - Graphics, and then click the Wrap tab. - - - - -Set the options that you want. - - -Click OK. - - -To change the wrapping contour of an graphic: -You can change the shape that the text wraps around. - - -Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose Wrap - Edit Contour. - - - + + -wrapping text;editing contours +Select the object. + + +Choose Format - Wrap, and then choose the wrapping style that you want to apply. +The current wrapping style is indicated by a bullet. + + +Specifying the Wrapping Properties + + +Select the object. + + +Choose Format - Graphics, and then click the Wrap tab. + + + + +Set the options that you want. + + +Click OK. + + +To change the wrapping contour of an graphic: +You can change the shape that the text wraps around. + + +Select the graphic, right-click, and then choose Wrap - Edit Contour. + + + + +wrapping text;editing contours editors;contour editor - -Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the Apply icon (green check mark). - - -Close the Contour Editor window. - - -
- -Contour Editor -
- - + +Use the tools to draw a new contour, and then click the Apply icon (green check mark). + + +Close the Contour Editor window. + + +
+ +Contour Editor +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp index 8db78f5b1f..edf8c30cd1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0101.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -File -/text/swriter/main0101.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +File +/text/swriter/main0101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -File -Contains commands that apply to the whole document. -
- -Open - - - - - -Save As - - - -Versions - - - - - -Properties - - - -Print - -Printer Settings - - - - + +File +Contains commands that apply to the whole document. + + +Open + + + + + +Save As + + + +Versions + + + + + +Properties + + + +Print + +Printer Settings + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp index 7ee52857da..eadac65cda 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0102.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Edit -/text/swriter/main0102.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Edit -This menu contains commands for editing the contents of a document. -
- - - - - - -Paste Special - -Select Text - - - -Compare Document - -Find & Replace - - -AutoText - -Exchange Database - -Fields - -Footnotes - -Index Entry - -Bibliography Entry - -Hyperlink - -Links - - -ImageMap - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Edit +/text/swriter/main0102.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Edit +This menu contains commands for editing the contents of a document. +
+ + + + + + +Paste Special + +Select Text + + + +Compare Document + +Find & Replace + + +AutoText + +Exchange Database + +Fields + +Footnotes + +Index Entry + +Bibliography Entry + +Hyperlink + +Links + + +ImageMap + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp index 99268644a7..ea33e0de79 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0103.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -View -/text/swriter/main0103.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-View -This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document. -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Zoom - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +View +/text/swriter/main0103.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+View +This menu contains commands for controlling the on-screen display of the document. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Zoom + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp index f0af5174d7..d7c9ba8513 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0104.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Insert -/text/swriter/main0104.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Insert -This menu contains all the necessary commands for inserting new elements in your document. This includes sections, footnotes, notes, special characters, graphics, and objects from other applications. -
-Manual Break - - -Special Character - -Section - -Hyperlink - - - -Footnote - -Caption - -Bookmark - -Cross-reference - -Note - -Script - - -Envelope - -Frame - -Table - -Horizontal Line - - - -Floating Frame - - -File - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Insert +/text/swriter/main0104.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Insert +This menu contains all the necessary commands for inserting new elements in your document. This includes sections, footnotes, notes, special characters, graphics, and objects from other applications. +
+Manual Break + + +Special Character + +Section + +Hyperlink + + + +Footnote + +Caption + +Bookmark + +Cross-reference + +Note + +Script + + +Envelope + +Frame + +Table + +Horizontal Line + + + +Floating Frame + + +File + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp index de06f1e665..f39a042b6a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0105.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Format -/text/swriter/main0105.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Format +/text/swriter/main0105.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Format -Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document. -
- -Character - -Paragraph - -Bullets and Numbering - -Page - - - -Columns - -Sections - - - - - - - - - - -Object - -Form ElementsUFI: Form Elements, see Format Menu spec doc and XForms spec doc - -Frame - -PictureUFI: see Format Menu in Writer spec - - - + +Format +Contains commands for formatting the layout and the contents of your document. + + +Character + +Paragraph + +Bullets and Numbering + +Page + + + +Columns + +Sections + + + + + + + + + + +Object + +Form ElementsUFI: Form Elements, see Format Menu spec doc and XForms spec doc + +Frame + +PictureUFI: see Format Menu in Writer spec + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp index 69a2b33b0c..447a288fb7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0106.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Tools -/text/swriter/main0106.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -
-Tools -Contains spelling tools, a gallery of object art that you can add to your document, as well as tools for configuring menus, and setting program preferences. -
- - - -AutoCorrect - -Outline Numbering - -Line Numbering - -Footnotes - - - - -Data Sources - - -Text <-> Table - -Sort - - - - - - - -Customize - - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Tools +/text/swriter/main0106.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + + +
+Tools +Contains spelling tools, a gallery of object art that you can add to your document, as well as tools for configuring menus, and setting program preferences. +
+ + + +AutoCorrect + +Outline Numbering + +Line Numbering + +Footnotes + + + + +Data Sources + + +Text <-> Table + +Sort + + + + + + + +Customize + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp index c0b70063f4..d3d308a3b7 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/main0210.xhp @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ - + - - - - -Page Preview -/text/swriter/main0210.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + ************************************************************************--> + + + + +Page Preview +/text/swriter/main0210.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. +converted from old format - fpe + + +
- -Page Preview -The Page Preview Bar appears when you view the current document in the page preview mode. -
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + +Page Preview +The Page Preview Bar appears when you view the current document in the page preview mode. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -- cgit